qtwidgets

package
v0.0.0-...-36af009 Latest Latest
Warning

This package is not in the latest version of its module.

Go to latest
Published: Mar 10, 2018 License: LGPL-3.0 Imports: 7 Imported by: 0

Documentation

Index

Constants

This section is empty.

Variables

This section is empty.

Functions

func DeleteQAbstractButton

func DeleteQAbstractButton(this *QAbstractButton)

func DeleteQAbstractGraphicsShapeItem

func DeleteQAbstractGraphicsShapeItem(this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem)

func DeleteQAbstractItemDelegate

func DeleteQAbstractItemDelegate(this *QAbstractItemDelegate)

func DeleteQAbstractItemView

func DeleteQAbstractItemView(this *QAbstractItemView)

func DeleteQAbstractScrollArea

func DeleteQAbstractScrollArea(this *QAbstractScrollArea)

func DeleteQAbstractSlider

func DeleteQAbstractSlider(this *QAbstractSlider)

func DeleteQAbstractSpinBox

func DeleteQAbstractSpinBox(this *QAbstractSpinBox)

func DeleteQAccessibleWidget

func DeleteQAccessibleWidget(this *QAccessibleWidget)

func DeleteQAction

func DeleteQAction(this *QAction)

func DeleteQActionGroup

func DeleteQActionGroup(this *QActionGroup)

func DeleteQApplication

func DeleteQApplication(this *QApplication)

func DeleteQBoxLayout

func DeleteQBoxLayout(this *QBoxLayout)

func DeleteQButtonGroup

func DeleteQButtonGroup(this *QButtonGroup)

func DeleteQCalendarWidget

func DeleteQCalendarWidget(this *QCalendarWidget)

func DeleteQCheckBox

func DeleteQCheckBox(this *QCheckBox)

func DeleteQColorDialog

func DeleteQColorDialog(this *QColorDialog)

func DeleteQColormap

func DeleteQColormap(this *QColormap)

func DeleteQColumnView

func DeleteQColumnView(this *QColumnView)

func DeleteQComboBox

func DeleteQComboBox(this *QComboBox)

func DeleteQCommandLinkButton

func DeleteQCommandLinkButton(this *QCommandLinkButton)

func DeleteQCommonStyle

func DeleteQCommonStyle(this *QCommonStyle)

func DeleteQCompleter

func DeleteQCompleter(this *QCompleter)

func DeleteQDataWidgetMapper

func DeleteQDataWidgetMapper(this *QDataWidgetMapper)

func DeleteQDateEdit

func DeleteQDateEdit(this *QDateEdit)

func DeleteQDateTimeEdit

func DeleteQDateTimeEdit(this *QDateTimeEdit)

func DeleteQDesktopWidget

func DeleteQDesktopWidget(this *QDesktopWidget)

func DeleteQDial

func DeleteQDial(this *QDial)

func DeleteQDialog

func DeleteQDialog(this *QDialog)

func DeleteQDialogButtonBox

func DeleteQDialogButtonBox(this *QDialogButtonBox)

func DeleteQDirModel

func DeleteQDirModel(this *QDirModel)

func DeleteQDockWidget

func DeleteQDockWidget(this *QDockWidget)

func DeleteQDoubleSpinBox

func DeleteQDoubleSpinBox(this *QDoubleSpinBox)

func DeleteQErrorMessage

func DeleteQErrorMessage(this *QErrorMessage)

func DeleteQFileDialog

func DeleteQFileDialog(this *QFileDialog)

func DeleteQFileIconProvider

func DeleteQFileIconProvider(this *QFileIconProvider)

func DeleteQFileSystemModel

func DeleteQFileSystemModel(this *QFileSystemModel)

func DeleteQFocusFrame

func DeleteQFocusFrame(this *QFocusFrame)

func DeleteQFontComboBox

func DeleteQFontComboBox(this *QFontComboBox)

func DeleteQFontDialog

func DeleteQFontDialog(this *QFontDialog)

func DeleteQFormLayout

func DeleteQFormLayout(this *QFormLayout)

func DeleteQFrame

func DeleteQFrame(this *QFrame)

func DeleteQGesture

func DeleteQGesture(this *QGesture)

func DeleteQGestureEvent

func DeleteQGestureEvent(this *QGestureEvent)

func DeleteQGestureRecognizer

func DeleteQGestureRecognizer(this *QGestureRecognizer)

func DeleteQGraphicsAnchor

func DeleteQGraphicsAnchor(this *QGraphicsAnchor)

func DeleteQGraphicsAnchorLayout

func DeleteQGraphicsAnchorLayout(this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout)

func DeleteQGraphicsBlurEffect

func DeleteQGraphicsBlurEffect(this *QGraphicsBlurEffect)

func DeleteQGraphicsColorizeEffect

func DeleteQGraphicsColorizeEffect(this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect)

func DeleteQGraphicsDropShadowEffect

func DeleteQGraphicsDropShadowEffect(this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect)

func DeleteQGraphicsEffect

func DeleteQGraphicsEffect(this *QGraphicsEffect)

func DeleteQGraphicsEllipseItem

func DeleteQGraphicsEllipseItem(this *QGraphicsEllipseItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsGridLayout

func DeleteQGraphicsGridLayout(this *QGraphicsGridLayout)

func DeleteQGraphicsItem

func DeleteQGraphicsItem(this *QGraphicsItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsItemAnimation

func DeleteQGraphicsItemAnimation(this *QGraphicsItemAnimation)

func DeleteQGraphicsItemGroup

func DeleteQGraphicsItemGroup(this *QGraphicsItemGroup)

func DeleteQGraphicsLayout

func DeleteQGraphicsLayout(this *QGraphicsLayout)

func DeleteQGraphicsLayoutItem

func DeleteQGraphicsLayoutItem(this *QGraphicsLayoutItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsLineItem

func DeleteQGraphicsLineItem(this *QGraphicsLineItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsLinearLayout

func DeleteQGraphicsLinearLayout(this *QGraphicsLinearLayout)

func DeleteQGraphicsOpacityEffect

func DeleteQGraphicsOpacityEffect(this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect)

func DeleteQGraphicsPathItem

func DeleteQGraphicsPathItem(this *QGraphicsPathItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsPixmapItem

func DeleteQGraphicsPixmapItem(this *QGraphicsPixmapItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsPolygonItem

func DeleteQGraphicsPolygonItem(this *QGraphicsPolygonItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsProxyWidget

func DeleteQGraphicsProxyWidget(this *QGraphicsProxyWidget)

func DeleteQGraphicsRectItem

func DeleteQGraphicsRectItem(this *QGraphicsRectItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsRotation

func DeleteQGraphicsRotation(this *QGraphicsRotation)

func DeleteQGraphicsScale

func DeleteQGraphicsScale(this *QGraphicsScale)

func DeleteQGraphicsScene

func DeleteQGraphicsScene(this *QGraphicsScene)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneHelpEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneHelpEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneHoverEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneHoverEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneMouseEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneMouseEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneMoveEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneMoveEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneResizeEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneResizeEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneWheelEvent

func DeleteQGraphicsSceneWheelEvent(this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent)

func DeleteQGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func DeleteQGraphicsSimpleTextItem(this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsTextItem

func DeleteQGraphicsTextItem(this *QGraphicsTextItem)

func DeleteQGraphicsTransform

func DeleteQGraphicsTransform(this *QGraphicsTransform)

func DeleteQGraphicsView

func DeleteQGraphicsView(this *QGraphicsView)

func DeleteQGraphicsWidget

func DeleteQGraphicsWidget(this *QGraphicsWidget)

func DeleteQGridLayout

func DeleteQGridLayout(this *QGridLayout)

func DeleteQGroupBox

func DeleteQGroupBox(this *QGroupBox)

func DeleteQHBoxLayout

func DeleteQHBoxLayout(this *QHBoxLayout)

func DeleteQHeaderView

func DeleteQHeaderView(this *QHeaderView)

func DeleteQInputDialog

func DeleteQInputDialog(this *QInputDialog)

func DeleteQItemDelegate

func DeleteQItemDelegate(this *QItemDelegate)

func DeleteQItemEditorCreatorBase

func DeleteQItemEditorCreatorBase(this *QItemEditorCreatorBase)

func DeleteQItemEditorFactory

func DeleteQItemEditorFactory(this *QItemEditorFactory)

func DeleteQKeyEventTransition

func DeleteQKeyEventTransition(this *QKeyEventTransition)

func DeleteQKeySequenceEdit

func DeleteQKeySequenceEdit(this *QKeySequenceEdit)

func DeleteQLCDNumber

func DeleteQLCDNumber(this *QLCDNumber)

func DeleteQLabel

func DeleteQLabel(this *QLabel)

func DeleteQLayout

func DeleteQLayout(this *QLayout)

func DeleteQLayoutItem

func DeleteQLayoutItem(this *QLayoutItem)

func DeleteQLineEdit

func DeleteQLineEdit(this *QLineEdit)

func DeleteQListView

func DeleteQListView(this *QListView)

func DeleteQListWidget

func DeleteQListWidget(this *QListWidget)

func DeleteQListWidgetItem

func DeleteQListWidgetItem(this *QListWidgetItem)

func DeleteQMainWindow

func DeleteQMainWindow(this *QMainWindow)

func DeleteQMdiArea

func DeleteQMdiArea(this *QMdiArea)

func DeleteQMdiSubWindow

func DeleteQMdiSubWindow(this *QMdiSubWindow)

func DeleteQMenu

func DeleteQMenu(this *QMenu)

func DeleteQMenuBar

func DeleteQMenuBar(this *QMenuBar)

func DeleteQMessageBox

func DeleteQMessageBox(this *QMessageBox)

func DeleteQMouseEventTransition

func DeleteQMouseEventTransition(this *QMouseEventTransition)

func DeleteQPanGesture

func DeleteQPanGesture(this *QPanGesture)

func DeleteQPinchGesture

func DeleteQPinchGesture(this *QPinchGesture)

func DeleteQPlainTextDocumentLayout

func DeleteQPlainTextDocumentLayout(this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout)

func DeleteQPlainTextEdit

func DeleteQPlainTextEdit(this *QPlainTextEdit)

func DeleteQProgressBar

func DeleteQProgressBar(this *QProgressBar)

func DeleteQProgressDialog

func DeleteQProgressDialog(this *QProgressDialog)

func DeleteQProxyStyle

func DeleteQProxyStyle(this *QProxyStyle)

func DeleteQPushButton

func DeleteQPushButton(this *QPushButton)

func DeleteQRadioButton

func DeleteQRadioButton(this *QRadioButton)

func DeleteQRubberBand

func DeleteQRubberBand(this *QRubberBand)

func DeleteQScrollArea

func DeleteQScrollArea(this *QScrollArea)

func DeleteQScrollBar

func DeleteQScrollBar(this *QScrollBar)

func DeleteQScroller

func DeleteQScroller(this *QScroller)

func DeleteQScrollerProperties

func DeleteQScrollerProperties(this *QScrollerProperties)

func DeleteQShortcut

func DeleteQShortcut(this *QShortcut)

func DeleteQSizeGrip

func DeleteQSizeGrip(this *QSizeGrip)

func DeleteQSizePolicy

func DeleteQSizePolicy(this *QSizePolicy)

func DeleteQSlider

func DeleteQSlider(this *QSlider)

func DeleteQSpacerItem

func DeleteQSpacerItem(this *QSpacerItem)

func DeleteQSpinBox

func DeleteQSpinBox(this *QSpinBox)

func DeleteQSplashScreen

func DeleteQSplashScreen(this *QSplashScreen)

func DeleteQSplitter

func DeleteQSplitter(this *QSplitter)

func DeleteQSplitterHandle

func DeleteQSplitterHandle(this *QSplitterHandle)

func DeleteQStackedLayout

func DeleteQStackedLayout(this *QStackedLayout)

func DeleteQStackedWidget

func DeleteQStackedWidget(this *QStackedWidget)

func DeleteQStatusBar

func DeleteQStatusBar(this *QStatusBar)

func DeleteQStyle

func DeleteQStyle(this *QStyle)

func DeleteQStyleFactory

func DeleteQStyleFactory(this *QStyleFactory)

func DeleteQStyleHintReturn

func DeleteQStyleHintReturn(this *QStyleHintReturn)

func DeleteQStyleHintReturnMask

func DeleteQStyleHintReturnMask(this *QStyleHintReturnMask)

func DeleteQStyleHintReturnVariant

func DeleteQStyleHintReturnVariant(this *QStyleHintReturnVariant)

func DeleteQStyleOption

func DeleteQStyleOption(this *QStyleOption)

func DeleteQStyleOptionButton

func DeleteQStyleOptionButton(this *QStyleOptionButton)

func DeleteQStyleOptionComboBox

func DeleteQStyleOptionComboBox(this *QStyleOptionComboBox)

func DeleteQStyleOptionComplex

func DeleteQStyleOptionComplex(this *QStyleOptionComplex)

func DeleteQStyleOptionDockWidget

func DeleteQStyleOptionDockWidget(this *QStyleOptionDockWidget)

func DeleteQStyleOptionFocusRect

func DeleteQStyleOptionFocusRect(this *QStyleOptionFocusRect)

func DeleteQStyleOptionFrame

func DeleteQStyleOptionFrame(this *QStyleOptionFrame)

func DeleteQStyleOptionGraphicsItem

func DeleteQStyleOptionGraphicsItem(this *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem)

func DeleteQStyleOptionGroupBox

func DeleteQStyleOptionGroupBox(this *QStyleOptionGroupBox)

func DeleteQStyleOptionHeader

func DeleteQStyleOptionHeader(this *QStyleOptionHeader)

func DeleteQStyleOptionMenuItem

func DeleteQStyleOptionMenuItem(this *QStyleOptionMenuItem)

func DeleteQStyleOptionProgressBar

func DeleteQStyleOptionProgressBar(this *QStyleOptionProgressBar)

func DeleteQStyleOptionRubberBand

func DeleteQStyleOptionRubberBand(this *QStyleOptionRubberBand)

func DeleteQStyleOptionSizeGrip

func DeleteQStyleOptionSizeGrip(this *QStyleOptionSizeGrip)

func DeleteQStyleOptionSlider

func DeleteQStyleOptionSlider(this *QStyleOptionSlider)

func DeleteQStyleOptionSpinBox

func DeleteQStyleOptionSpinBox(this *QStyleOptionSpinBox)

func DeleteQStyleOptionTab

func DeleteQStyleOptionTab(this *QStyleOptionTab)

func DeleteQStyleOptionTabBarBase

func DeleteQStyleOptionTabBarBase(this *QStyleOptionTabBarBase)

func DeleteQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame

func DeleteQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame(this *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame)

func DeleteQStyleOptionTitleBar

func DeleteQStyleOptionTitleBar(this *QStyleOptionTitleBar)

func DeleteQStyleOptionToolBar

func DeleteQStyleOptionToolBar(this *QStyleOptionToolBar)

func DeleteQStyleOptionToolBox

func DeleteQStyleOptionToolBox(this *QStyleOptionToolBox)

func DeleteQStyleOptionToolButton

func DeleteQStyleOptionToolButton(this *QStyleOptionToolButton)

func DeleteQStyleOptionViewItem

func DeleteQStyleOptionViewItem(this *QStyleOptionViewItem)

func DeleteQStylePainter

func DeleteQStylePainter(this *QStylePainter)

func DeleteQStylePlugin

func DeleteQStylePlugin(this *QStylePlugin)

func DeleteQStyledItemDelegate

func DeleteQStyledItemDelegate(this *QStyledItemDelegate)

func DeleteQSwipeGesture

func DeleteQSwipeGesture(this *QSwipeGesture)

func DeleteQSystemTrayIcon

func DeleteQSystemTrayIcon(this *QSystemTrayIcon)

func DeleteQTabBar

func DeleteQTabBar(this *QTabBar)

func DeleteQTabWidget

func DeleteQTabWidget(this *QTabWidget)

func DeleteQTableView

func DeleteQTableView(this *QTableView)

func DeleteQTableWidget

func DeleteQTableWidget(this *QTableWidget)

func DeleteQTableWidgetItem

func DeleteQTableWidgetItem(this *QTableWidgetItem)

func DeleteQTableWidgetSelectionRange

func DeleteQTableWidgetSelectionRange(this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange)

func DeleteQTapAndHoldGesture

func DeleteQTapAndHoldGesture(this *QTapAndHoldGesture)

func DeleteQTapGesture

func DeleteQTapGesture(this *QTapGesture)

func DeleteQTextBrowser

func DeleteQTextBrowser(this *QTextBrowser)

func DeleteQTextEdit

func DeleteQTextEdit(this *QTextEdit)

func DeleteQTileRules

func DeleteQTileRules(this *QTileRules)

func DeleteQTimeEdit

func DeleteQTimeEdit(this *QTimeEdit)

func DeleteQToolBar

func DeleteQToolBar(this *QToolBar)

func DeleteQToolBox

func DeleteQToolBox(this *QToolBox)

func DeleteQToolButton

func DeleteQToolButton(this *QToolButton)

func DeleteQToolTip

func DeleteQToolTip(this *QToolTip)

func DeleteQTreeView

func DeleteQTreeView(this *QTreeView)

func DeleteQTreeWidget

func DeleteQTreeWidget(this *QTreeWidget)

func DeleteQTreeWidgetItem

func DeleteQTreeWidgetItem(this *QTreeWidgetItem)

func DeleteQTreeWidgetItemIterator

func DeleteQTreeWidgetItemIterator(this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator)

func DeleteQUndoCommand

func DeleteQUndoCommand(this *QUndoCommand)

func DeleteQUndoGroup

func DeleteQUndoGroup(this *QUndoGroup)

func DeleteQUndoStack

func DeleteQUndoStack(this *QUndoStack)

func DeleteQUndoView

func DeleteQUndoView(this *QUndoView)

func DeleteQVBoxLayout

func DeleteQVBoxLayout(this *QVBoxLayout)

func DeleteQWhatsThis

func DeleteQWhatsThis(this *QWhatsThis)

func DeleteQWidget

func DeleteQWidget(this *QWidget)

func DeleteQWidgetAction

func DeleteQWidgetAction(this *QWidgetAction)

func DeleteQWidgetData

func DeleteQWidgetData(this *QWidgetData)

func DeleteQWidgetItem

func DeleteQWidgetItem(this *QWidgetItem)

func DeleteQWidgetItemV2

func DeleteQWidgetItemV2(this *QWidgetItemV2)

func DeleteQWizard

func DeleteQWizard(this *QWizard)

func DeleteQWizardPage

func DeleteQWizardPage(this *QWizardPage)

func KeepMe

func KeepMe()

func QAbstractItemDelegate_ElidedText

func QAbstractItemDelegate_ElidedText(fontMetrics qtgui.QFontMetrics_ITF, width int, mode int, text string) string

func QApplication_AboutQt

func QApplication_AboutQt()

func QApplication_Alert

func QApplication_Alert(widget QWidget_ITF, duration int)

func QApplication_Beep

func QApplication_Beep()

func QApplication_CloseAllWindows

func QApplication_CloseAllWindows()

func QApplication_ColorSpec

func QApplication_ColorSpec() int

func QApplication_CursorFlashTime

func QApplication_CursorFlashTime() int

func QApplication_DoubleClickInterval

func QApplication_DoubleClickInterval() int

func QApplication_Exec

func QApplication_Exec() int

func QApplication_Font

func QApplication_Font() *qtgui.QFont

func QApplication_FontMetrics

func QApplication_FontMetrics() *qtgui.QFontMetrics

func QApplication_Font_1

func QApplication_Font_1(arg0 QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QFont

func QApplication_Font_2

func QApplication_Font_2(className string) *qtgui.QFont

func QApplication_GlobalStrut

func QApplication_GlobalStrut() *qtcore.QSize

func QApplication_IsEffectEnabled

func QApplication_IsEffectEnabled(arg0 int) bool

func QApplication_KeyboardInputInterval

func QApplication_KeyboardInputInterval() int

func QApplication_Palette

func QApplication_Palette(arg0 QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QPalette

func QApplication_Palette_1

func QApplication_Palette_1(className string) *qtgui.QPalette

func QApplication_SetActiveWindow

func QApplication_SetActiveWindow(act QWidget_ITF)

func QApplication_SetColorSpec

func QApplication_SetColorSpec(arg0 int)

func QApplication_SetCursorFlashTime

func QApplication_SetCursorFlashTime(arg0 int)

func QApplication_SetDoubleClickInterval

func QApplication_SetDoubleClickInterval(arg0 int)

func QApplication_SetEffectEnabled

func QApplication_SetEffectEnabled(arg0 int, enable bool)

func QApplication_SetFont

func QApplication_SetFont(arg0 qtgui.QFont_ITF, className string)

func QApplication_SetGlobalStrut

func QApplication_SetGlobalStrut(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func QApplication_SetKeyboardInputInterval

func QApplication_SetKeyboardInputInterval(arg0 int)

func QApplication_SetPalette

func QApplication_SetPalette(arg0 qtgui.QPalette_ITF, className string)

func QApplication_SetStartDragDistance

func QApplication_SetStartDragDistance(l int)

func QApplication_SetStartDragTime

func QApplication_SetStartDragTime(ms int)

func QApplication_SetStyle

func QApplication_SetStyle(arg0 QStyle_ITF)

func QApplication_SetWheelScrollLines

func QApplication_SetWheelScrollLines(arg0 int)

func QApplication_SetWindowIcon

func QApplication_SetWindowIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func QApplication_StartDragDistance

func QApplication_StartDragDistance() int

func QApplication_StartDragTime

func QApplication_StartDragTime() int

func QApplication_WheelScrollLines

func QApplication_WheelScrollLines() int

func QApplication_WindowIcon

func QApplication_WindowIcon() *qtgui.QIcon

func QColorDialog_CustomColor

func QColorDialog_CustomColor(index int) *qtgui.QColor

func QColorDialog_CustomCount

func QColorDialog_CustomCount() int

func QColorDialog_GetColor

func QColorDialog_GetColor(initial qtgui.QColor_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, title string, options int) *qtgui.QColor

func QColorDialog_GetRgba

func QColorDialog_GetRgba(rgba uint, ok *bool, parent QWidget_ITF) uint

func QColorDialog_SetCustomColor

func QColorDialog_SetCustomColor(index int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func QColorDialog_SetStandardColor

func QColorDialog_SetStandardColor(index int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func QColorDialog_StandardColor

func QColorDialog_StandardColor(index int) *qtgui.QColor

func QColormap_Cleanup

func QColormap_Cleanup()

func QColormap_Initialize

func QColormap_Initialize()

func QDrawBorderPixmap

func QDrawBorderPixmap(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, targetRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, targetMargins qtcore.QMargins_ITF, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, sourceRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, sourceMargins qtcore.QMargins_ITF, rules QTileRules_ITF, hints int)

func QDrawBorderPixmap_1

func QDrawBorderPixmap_1(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, target qtcore.QRect_ITF, margins qtcore.QMargins_ITF, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

func QDrawPlainRect

func QDrawPlainRect(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, x int, y int, w int, h int, arg5 qtgui.QColor_ITF, lineWidth int, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawPlainRect_1

func QDrawPlainRect_1(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, r qtcore.QRect_ITF, arg2 qtgui.QColor_ITF, lineWidth int, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawShadeLine

func QDrawShadeLine(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, x1 int, y1 int, x2 int, y2 int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, lineWidth int, midLineWidth int)

func QDrawShadeLine_1

func QDrawShadeLine_1(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, p1 qtcore.QPoint_ITF, p2 qtcore.QPoint_ITF, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, lineWidth int, midLineWidth int)

func QDrawShadePanel

func QDrawShadePanel(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, x int, y int, w int, h int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, lineWidth int, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawShadePanel_1

func QDrawShadePanel_1(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, r qtcore.QRect_ITF, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, lineWidth int, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawShadeRect

func QDrawShadeRect(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, x int, y int, w int, h int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, lineWidth int, midLineWidth int, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawShadeRect_1

func QDrawShadeRect_1(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, r qtcore.QRect_ITF, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, lineWidth int, midLineWidth int, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawWinButton

func QDrawWinButton(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, x int, y int, w int, h int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawWinButton_1

func QDrawWinButton_1(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, r qtcore.QRect_ITF, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawWinPanel

func QDrawWinPanel(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, x int, y int, w int, h int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QDrawWinPanel_1

func QDrawWinPanel_1(p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, r qtcore.QRect_ITF, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, sunken bool, fill qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func QFileDialog_GetExistingDirectory

func QFileDialog_GetExistingDirectory(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, options int) string

func QFileDialog_GetExistingDirectoryUrl

func QFileDialog_GetExistingDirectoryUrl(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, options int, supportedSchemes qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

func QFileDialog_GetOpenFileName

func QFileDialog_GetOpenFileName(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) string

func QFileDialog_GetOpenFileNames

func QFileDialog_GetOpenFileNames(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) *qtcore.QStringList

func QFileDialog_GetOpenFileUrl

func QFileDialog_GetOpenFileUrl(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int, supportedSchemes qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

func QFileDialog_GetSaveFileName

func QFileDialog_GetSaveFileName(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) string

func QFileDialog_GetSaveFileUrl

func QFileDialog_GetSaveFileUrl(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int, supportedSchemes qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

func QFontDialog_GetFont

func QFontDialog_GetFont(ok *bool, parent QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QFont

func QFontDialog_GetFont_1

func QFontDialog_GetFont_1(ok *bool, initial qtgui.QFont_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, title string, options int) *qtgui.QFont

func QGestureRecognizer_RegisterRecognizer

func QGestureRecognizer_RegisterRecognizer(recognizer QGestureRecognizer_ITF) int

func QGestureRecognizer_UnregisterRecognizer

func QGestureRecognizer_UnregisterRecognizer(type_ int)

func QGraphicsLayout_InstantInvalidatePropagation

func QGraphicsLayout_InstantInvalidatePropagation() bool

func QGraphicsLayout_SetInstantInvalidatePropagation

func QGraphicsLayout_SetInstantInvalidatePropagation(enable bool)

func QGraphicsWidget_SetTabOrder

func QGraphicsWidget_SetTabOrder(first QGraphicsWidget_ITF, second QGraphicsWidget_ITF)

func QHash_43

func QHash_43(key QSizePolicy_ITF, seed uint) uint

Returns the hash value for key, using seed to seed the calculation.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.6.

func QInputDialog_GetDouble

func QInputDialog_GetDouble(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64, maxValue float64, decimals int, ok *bool, flags int) float64

func QInputDialog_GetDouble_1

func QInputDialog_GetDouble_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64, maxValue float64, decimals int, ok *bool, flags int, step float64) float64

func QInputDialog_GetInt

func QInputDialog_GetInt(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value int, minValue int, maxValue int, step int, ok *bool, flags int) int

func QInputDialog_GetItem

func QInputDialog_GetItem(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, items qtcore.QStringList_ITF, current int, editable bool, ok *bool, flags int, inputMethodHints int) string

func QInputDialog_GetMultiLineText

func QInputDialog_GetMultiLineText(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, text string, ok *bool, flags int, inputMethodHints int) string

func QInputDialog_GetText

func QInputDialog_GetText(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, echo int, text string, ok *bool, flags int, inputMethodHints int) string

func QItemEditorFactory_SetDefaultFactory

func QItemEditorFactory_SetDefaultFactory(factory QItemEditorFactory_ITF)

func QLayout_ClosestAcceptableSize

func QLayout_ClosestAcceptableSize(w QWidget_ITF, s qtcore.QSize_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

func QMessageBox_About

func QMessageBox_About(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string)

func QMessageBox_AboutQt

func QMessageBox_AboutQt(parent QWidget_ITF, title string)

func QMessageBox_Critical

func QMessageBox_Critical(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

func QMessageBox_Critical_1

func QMessageBox_Critical_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

func QMessageBox_Critical_2

func QMessageBox_Critical_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

func QMessageBox_Critical_3

func QMessageBox_Critical_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

func QMessageBox_Information

func QMessageBox_Information(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

func QMessageBox_Information_1

func QMessageBox_Information_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

func QMessageBox_Information_2

func QMessageBox_Information_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

func QMessageBox_Information_3

func QMessageBox_Information_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

func QMessageBox_Question

func QMessageBox_Question(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

func QMessageBox_Question_1

func QMessageBox_Question_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

func QMessageBox_Question_2

func QMessageBox_Question_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

func QMessageBox_Question_3

func QMessageBox_Question_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

func QMessageBox_StandardIcon

func QMessageBox_StandardIcon(icon int) *qtgui.QPixmap

func QMessageBox_Warning

func QMessageBox_Warning(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

func QMessageBox_Warning_1

func QMessageBox_Warning_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

func QMessageBox_Warning_2

func QMessageBox_Warning_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

func QMessageBox_Warning_3

func QMessageBox_Warning_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

func QScrollerProperties_SetDefaultScrollerProperties

func QScrollerProperties_SetDefaultScrollerProperties(sp QScrollerProperties_ITF)

func QScrollerProperties_UnsetDefaultScrollerProperties

func QScrollerProperties_UnsetDefaultScrollerProperties()

func QScroller_GrabGesture

func QScroller_GrabGesture(target qtcore.QObject_ITF, gestureType int) int

func QScroller_GrabbedGesture

func QScroller_GrabbedGesture(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) int

func QScroller_HasScroller

func QScroller_HasScroller(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) bool

func QScroller_UngrabGesture

func QScroller_UngrabGesture(target qtcore.QObject_ITF)

func QStyleFactory_Keys

func QStyleFactory_Keys() *qtcore.QStringList

func QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_LevelOfDetailFromTransform

func QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_LevelOfDetailFromTransform(worldTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF) float64

func QStyle_AlignedRect

func QStyle_AlignedRect(direction int, alignment int, size qtcore.QSize_ITF, rectangle qtcore.QRect_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

func QStyle_SliderPositionFromValue

func QStyle_SliderPositionFromValue(min int, max int, val int, space int, upsideDown bool) int

func QStyle_SliderValueFromPosition

func QStyle_SliderValueFromPosition(min int, max int, pos int, space int, upsideDown bool) int

func QStyle_VisualAlignment

func QStyle_VisualAlignment(direction int, alignment int) int

func QStyle_VisualPos

func QStyle_VisualPos(direction int, boundingRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, logicalPos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

func QStyle_VisualRect

func QStyle_VisualRect(direction int, boundingRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, logicalRect qtcore.QRect_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

func QSystemTrayIcon_IsSystemTrayAvailable

func QSystemTrayIcon_IsSystemTrayAvailable() bool

func QSystemTrayIcon_SupportsMessages

func QSystemTrayIcon_SupportsMessages() bool

func QTapAndHoldGesture_SetTimeout

func QTapAndHoldGesture_SetTimeout(msecs int)

func QTapAndHoldGesture_Timeout

func QTapAndHoldGesture_Timeout() int

func QToolTip_Font

func QToolTip_Font() *qtgui.QFont

func QToolTip_HideText

func QToolTip_HideText()

func QToolTip_IsVisible

func QToolTip_IsVisible() bool

func QToolTip_Palette

func QToolTip_Palette() *qtgui.QPalette

func QToolTip_SetFont

func QToolTip_SetFont(arg0 qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func QToolTip_SetPalette

func QToolTip_SetPalette(arg0 qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

func QToolTip_ShowText

func QToolTip_ShowText(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF)

func QToolTip_ShowText_1

func QToolTip_ShowText_1(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF)

func QToolTip_ShowText_2

func QToolTip_ShowText_2(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, msecShowTime int)

func QToolTip_Text

func QToolTip_Text() string

func QWhatsThis_EnterWhatsThisMode

func QWhatsThis_EnterWhatsThisMode()

func QWhatsThis_HideText

func QWhatsThis_HideText()

func QWhatsThis_InWhatsThisMode

func QWhatsThis_InWhatsThisMode() bool

func QWhatsThis_LeaveWhatsThisMode

func QWhatsThis_LeaveWhatsThisMode()

func QWhatsThis_ShowText

func QWhatsThis_ShowText(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF)

func QWidget_SetTabOrder

func QWidget_SetTabOrder(arg0 QWidget_ITF, arg1 QWidget_ITF)

Types

type QAbstractButton

type QAbstractButton struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQAbstractButton

func NewQAbstractButton(parent QWidget_ITF) *QAbstractButton

Constructs an abstract button with a parent.

func NewQAbstractButtonFromPointer

func NewQAbstractButtonFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractButton

func NewQAbstractButton__

func NewQAbstractButton__() *QAbstractButton

Constructs an abstract button with a parent.

func (*QAbstractButton) AnimateClick

func (this *QAbstractButton) AnimateClick(msec int)

Performs an animated click: the button is pressed immediately, and released msec milliseconds later (the default is 100 ms).

Calling this function again before the button is released resets the release timer.

All signals associated with a click are emitted as appropriate.

This function does nothing if the button is disabled.

See also click().

func (*QAbstractButton) AnimateClick__

func (this *QAbstractButton) AnimateClick__()

Performs an animated click: the button is pressed immediately, and released msec milliseconds later (the default is 100 ms).

Calling this function again before the button is released resets the release timer.

All signals associated with a click are emitted as appropriate.

This function does nothing if the button is disabled.

See also click().

func (*QAbstractButton) AutoExclusive

func (this *QAbstractButton) AutoExclusive() bool

func (*QAbstractButton) AutoRepeat

func (this *QAbstractButton) AutoRepeat() bool

func (*QAbstractButton) AutoRepeatDelay

func (this *QAbstractButton) AutoRepeatDelay() int

func (*QAbstractButton) AutoRepeatInterval

func (this *QAbstractButton) AutoRepeatInterval() int

func (*QAbstractButton) ChangeEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) ChangeEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) CheckStateSet

func (this *QAbstractButton) CheckStateSet()

This virtual handler is called when setChecked() is used, unless it is called from within nextCheckState(). It allows subclasses to reset their intermediate button states.

See also nextCheckState().

func (*QAbstractButton) Click

func (this *QAbstractButton) Click()

Performs a click.

All the usual signals associated with a click are emitted as appropriate. If the button is checkable, the state of the button is toggled.

This function does nothing if the button is disabled.

See also animateClick().

func (*QAbstractButton) Clicked

func (this *QAbstractButton) Clicked(checked bool)

This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e., pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the shortcut key is typed, or when click() or animateClick() is called. Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setDown(), setChecked() or toggle().

If the button is checkable, checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.

See also pressed(), released(), and toggled().

func (*QAbstractButton) Clicked__

func (this *QAbstractButton) Clicked__()

This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e., pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the shortcut key is typed, or when click() or animateClick() is called. Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setDown(), setChecked() or toggle().

If the button is checkable, checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.

See also pressed(), released(), and toggled().

func (*QAbstractButton) Event

func (this *QAbstractButton) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QAbstractButton) FocusInEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) FocusInEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) FocusOutEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) GetCthis

func (this *QAbstractButton) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAbstractButton) Group

func (this *QAbstractButton) Group() *QButtonGroup

Returns the group that this button belongs to.

If the button is not a member of any QButtonGroup, this function returns 0.

See also QButtonGroup.

func (*QAbstractButton) HitButton

func (this *QAbstractButton) HitButton(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) bool

Returns true if pos is inside the clickable button rectangle; otherwise returns false.

By default, the clickable area is the entire widget. Subclasses may reimplement this function to provide support for clickable areas of different shapes and sizes.

func (*QAbstractButton) Icon

func (this *QAbstractButton) Icon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QAbstractButton) IconSize

func (this *QAbstractButton) IconSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritChangeEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritCheckStateSet

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritCheckStateSet(f func())

void checkStateSet()

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritHitButton

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritHitButton(f func(pos *qtcore.QPoint) bool)

bool hitButton(const class QPoint &)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritNextCheckState

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritNextCheckState(f func())

void nextCheckState()

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) InheritTimerEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QAbstractButton) IsCheckable

func (this *QAbstractButton) IsCheckable() bool

func (*QAbstractButton) IsChecked

func (this *QAbstractButton) IsChecked() bool

func (*QAbstractButton) IsDown

func (this *QAbstractButton) IsDown() bool

func (*QAbstractButton) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) KeyPressEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) KeyReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) MetaObject

func (this *QAbstractButton) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QAbstractButton) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) MouseMoveEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) MousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) MousePressEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) MouseReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) NewFromPointer

func (*QAbstractButton) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractButton

func (*QAbstractButton) NextCheckState

func (this *QAbstractButton) NextCheckState()

This virtual handler is called when a button is clicked. The default implementation calls setChecked(!isChecked()) if the button isCheckable(). It allows subclasses to implement intermediate button states.

See also checkStateSet().

func (*QAbstractButton) PaintEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) Pressed

func (this *QAbstractButton) Pressed()

This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.

See also released() and clicked().

func (*QAbstractButton) QAbstractButton_PTR

func (ptr *QAbstractButton) QAbstractButton_PTR() *QAbstractButton

func (*QAbstractButton) Released

func (this *QAbstractButton) Released()

This signal is emitted when the button is released.

See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().

func (*QAbstractButton) SetAutoExclusive

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetAutoExclusive(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetAutoRepeat

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetAutoRepeat(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetAutoRepeatDelay

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetAutoRepeatDelay(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetAutoRepeatInterval

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetAutoRepeatInterval(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetCheckable

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetCheckable(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetChecked

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetChecked(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetCthis

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetDown

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetDown(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetIcon

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetIconSize

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetIconSize(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetShortcut

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetShortcut(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF)

func (*QAbstractButton) SetText

func (this *QAbstractButton) SetText(text string)

func (*QAbstractButton) Shortcut

func (this *QAbstractButton) Shortcut() *qtgui.QKeySequence

func (*QAbstractButton) Text

func (this *QAbstractButton) Text() string

func (*QAbstractButton) TimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractButton) TimerEvent(e qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QAbstractButton) Toggle

func (this *QAbstractButton) Toggle()

Toggles the state of a checkable button.

See also checked.

func (*QAbstractButton) Toggled

func (this *QAbstractButton) Toggled(checked bool)

This signal is emitted whenever a checkable button changes its state. checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.

This may be the result of a user action, click() slot activation, or because setChecked() is called.

The states of buttons in exclusive button groups are updated before this signal is emitted. This means that slots can act on either the "off" signal or the "on" signal emitted by the buttons in the group whose states have changed.

For example, a slot that reacts to signals emitted by newly checked buttons but which ignores signals from buttons that have been unchecked can be implemented using the following pattern:

void MyWidget::reactToToggle(bool checked)
{
   if (checked) {
      // Examine the new button states.
      ...
   }
}

Button groups can be created using the QButtonGroup class, and updates to the button states monitored with the QButtonGroup::buttonClicked() signal.

Note: Notifier signal for property checked.

See also checked and clicked().

type QAbstractButton_ITF

type QAbstractButton_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QAbstractButton_PTR() *QAbstractButton
}

type QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem

type QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem struct {
	*QGraphicsItem
}

func NewQAbstractGraphicsShapeItem

func NewQAbstractGraphicsShapeItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem

func NewQAbstractGraphicsShapeItemFromPointer

func NewQAbstractGraphicsShapeItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem

func NewQAbstractGraphicsShapeItem__

func NewQAbstractGraphicsShapeItem__() *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) Brush

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) Brush() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) GetCthis

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) Pen

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) Pen() *qtgui.QPen

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_PTR

func (ptr *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_PTR() *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) SetBrush

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) SetBrush(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) SetCthis

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) SetPen

func (this *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem) SetPen(pen qtgui.QPen_ITF)

type QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_ITF

type QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsItem_ITF
	QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_PTR() *QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem
}

type QAbstractItemDelegate

type QAbstractItemDelegate struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQAbstractItemDelegate

func NewQAbstractItemDelegate(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAbstractItemDelegate

Creates a new abstract item delegate with the given parent.

func NewQAbstractItemDelegateFromPointer

func NewQAbstractItemDelegateFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractItemDelegate

func NewQAbstractItemDelegate__

func NewQAbstractItemDelegate__() *QAbstractItemDelegate

Creates a new abstract item delegate with the given parent.

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) CloseEditor

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) CloseEditor(editor QWidget_ITF, hint int)

This signal is emitted when the user has finished editing an item using the specified editor.

The hint provides a way for the delegate to influence how the model and view behave after editing is completed. It indicates to these components what action should be performed next to provide a comfortable editing experience for the user. For example, if EditNextItem is specified, the view should use a delegate to open an editor on the next item in the model.

See also EndEditHint.

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) CloseEditor__

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) CloseEditor__(editor QWidget_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the user has finished editing an item using the specified editor.

The hint provides a way for the delegate to influence how the model and view behave after editing is completed. It indicates to these components what action should be performed next to provide a comfortable editing experience for the user. For example, if EditNextItem is specified, the view should use a delegate to open an editor on the next item in the model.

See also EndEditHint.

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) CommitData

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) CommitData(editor QWidget_ITF)

This signal must be emitted when the editor widget has completed editing the data, and wants to write it back into the model.

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) CreateEditor

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) CreateEditor(parent QWidget_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the editor to be used for editing the data item with the given index. Note that the index contains information about the model being used. The editor's parent widget is specified by parent, and the item options by option.

The base implementation returns 0. If you want custom editing you will need to reimplement this function.

The returned editor widget should have Qt::StrongFocus; otherwise, QMouseEvents received by the widget will propagate to the view. The view's background will shine through unless the editor paints its own background (e.g., with setAutoFillBackground()).

See also destroyEditor(), setModelData(), and setEditorData().

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) DestroyEditor

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) DestroyEditor(editor QWidget_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Called when the editor is no longer needed for editing the data item with the given index and should be destroyed. The default behavior is a call to deleteLater on the editor. It is possible e.g. to avoid this delete by reimplementing this function.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also createEditor().

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) EditorEvent

When editing of an item starts, this function is called with the event that triggered the editing, the model, the index of the item, and the option used for rendering the item.

Mouse events are sent to editorEvent() even if they don't start editing of the item. This can, for instance, be useful if you wish to open a context menu when the right mouse button is pressed on an item.

The base implementation returns false (indicating that it has not handled the event).

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) ElidedText

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) ElidedText(fontMetrics qtgui.QFontMetrics_ITF, width int, mode int, text string) string

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) GetCthis

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) HelpEvent

Whenever a help event occurs, this function is called with the event view option and the index that corresponds to the item where the event occurs.

Returns true if the delegate can handle the event; otherwise returns false. A return value of true indicates that the data obtained using the index had the required role.

For QEvent::ToolTip and QEvent::WhatsThis events that were handled successfully, the relevant popup may be shown depending on the user's system configuration.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also QHelpEvent.

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) MetaObject

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) NewFromPointer

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) Paint

This pure abstract function must be reimplemented if you want to provide custom rendering. Use the painter and style option to render the item specified by the item index.

If you reimplement this you must also reimplement sizeHint().

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) QAbstractItemDelegate_PTR

func (ptr *QAbstractItemDelegate) QAbstractItemDelegate_PTR() *QAbstractItemDelegate

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) SetCthis

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) SetEditorData

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) SetEditorData(editor QWidget_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the contents of the given editor to the data for the item at the given index. Note that the index contains information about the model being used.

The base implementation does nothing. If you want custom editing you will need to reimplement this function.

See also setModelData().

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) SetModelData

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) SetModelData(editor QWidget_ITF, model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the data for the item at the given index in the model to the contents of the given editor.

The base implementation does nothing. If you want custom editing you will need to reimplement this function.

See also setEditorData().

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) SizeHint

This pure abstract function must be reimplemented if you want to provide custom rendering. The options are specified by option and the model item by index.

If you reimplement this you must also reimplement paint().

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) SizeHintChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) SizeHintChanged(arg0 qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal must be emitted when the sizeHint() of index changed.

Views automatically connect to this signal and relayout items as necessary.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QAbstractItemDelegate) UpdateEditorGeometry

func (this *QAbstractItemDelegate) UpdateEditorGeometry(editor QWidget_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Updates the geometry of the editor for the item with the given index, according to the rectangle specified in the option. If the item has an internal layout, the editor will be laid out accordingly. Note that the index contains information about the model being used.

The base implementation does nothing. If you want custom editing you must reimplement this function.

type QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF

type QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QAbstractItemDelegate_PTR() *QAbstractItemDelegate
}

type QAbstractItemDelegate__EndEditHint

type QAbstractItemDelegate__EndEditHint = int

This enum describes the different hints that the delegate can give to the model and view components to make editing data in a model a comfortable experience for the user.

These hints let the delegate influence the behavior of the view:

Note that custom views may interpret the concepts of next and previous differently.

The following hints are most useful when models are used that cache data, such as those that manipulate data locally in order to increase performance or conserve network bandwidth.

Although models and views should respond to these hints in appropriate ways, custom components may ignore any or all of them if they are not relevant.

const QAbstractItemDelegate__EditNextItem QAbstractItemDelegate__EndEditHint = 1

The view should use the delegate to open an editor on the next item in the view.

const QAbstractItemDelegate__EditPreviousItem QAbstractItemDelegate__EndEditHint = 2

The view should use the delegate to open an editor on the previous item in the view.

const QAbstractItemDelegate__NoHint QAbstractItemDelegate__EndEditHint = 0

There is no recommended action to be performed.

const QAbstractItemDelegate__RevertModelCache QAbstractItemDelegate__EndEditHint = 4

If the model caches data, it should discard cached data and replace it with data from the underlying data store.

const QAbstractItemDelegate__SubmitModelCache QAbstractItemDelegate__EndEditHint = 3

If the model caches data, it should write out cached data to the underlying data store.

type QAbstractItemView

type QAbstractItemView struct {
	*QAbstractScrollArea
}

func NewQAbstractItemView

func NewQAbstractItemView(parent QWidget_ITF) *QAbstractItemView

Constructs an abstract item view with the given parent.

func NewQAbstractItemViewFromPointer

func NewQAbstractItemViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractItemView

func NewQAbstractItemView__

func NewQAbstractItemView__() *QAbstractItemView

Constructs an abstract item view with the given parent.

func (*QAbstractItemView) Activated

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Activated(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is activated by the user. How to activate items depends on the platform; e.g., by single- or double-clicking the item, or by pressing the Return or Enter key when the item is current.

See also clicked(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().

func (*QAbstractItemView) AlternatingRowColors

func (this *QAbstractItemView) AlternatingRowColors() bool

func (*QAbstractItemView) AutoScrollMargin

func (this *QAbstractItemView) AutoScrollMargin() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) ClearSelection

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ClearSelection()

Deselects all selected items. The current index will not be changed.

See also setSelection() and selectAll().

func (*QAbstractItemView) Clicked

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Clicked(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a mouse button is left-clicked. The item the mouse was clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.

See also activated(), doubleClicked(), entered(), and pressed().

func (*QAbstractItemView) CloseEditor

func (this *QAbstractItemView) CloseEditor(editor QWidget_ITF, hint int)

Closes the given editor, and releases it. The hint is used to specify how the view should respond to the end of the editing operation. For example, the hint may indicate that the next item in the view should be opened for editing.

See also edit() and commitData().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ClosePersistentEditor

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ClosePersistentEditor(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Closes the persistent editor for the item at the given index.

See also openPersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QAbstractItemView) CommitData

func (this *QAbstractItemView) CommitData(editor QWidget_ITF)

Commit the data in the editor to the model.

See also closeEditor().

func (*QAbstractItemView) CurrentChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) CurrentChanged(current qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, previous qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This slot is called when a new item becomes the current item. The previous current item is specified by the previous index, and the new item by the current index.

If you want to know about changes to items see the dataChanged() signal.

func (*QAbstractItemView) CurrentIndex

func (this *QAbstractItemView) CurrentIndex() *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the model index of the current item.

See also setCurrentIndex().

func (*QAbstractItemView) DefaultDropAction

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DefaultDropAction() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) DirtyRegionOffset

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DirtyRegionOffset() *qtcore.QPoint

Returns the offset of the dirty regions in the view.

If you use scrollDirtyRegion() and implement a paintEvent() in a subclass of QAbstractItemView, you should translate the area given by the paint event with the offset returned from this function.

See also scrollDirtyRegion() and setDirtyRegion().

func (*QAbstractItemView) DoAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DoAutoScroll()

func (*QAbstractItemView) DoItemsLayout

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DoItemsLayout()

func (*QAbstractItemView) DoubleClicked

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DoubleClicked(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a mouse button is double-clicked. The item the mouse was double-clicked on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.

See also clicked() and activated().

func (*QAbstractItemView) DragDropMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DragDropMode() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) DragDropOverwriteMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DragDropOverwriteMode() bool

func (*QAbstractItemView) DragEnabled

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DragEnabled() bool

func (*QAbstractItemView) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DragEnterEvent(event qtgui.QDragEnterEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a drag and drop operation enters the widget. If the drag is over a valid dropping place (e.g. over an item that accepts drops), the event is accepted; otherwise it is ignored.

See also dropEvent() and startDrag().

func (*QAbstractItemView) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DragLeaveEvent(event qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

This function is called when the item being dragged leaves the view. The event describes the state of the drag and drop operation.

func (*QAbstractItemView) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DragMoveEvent(event qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

This function is called continuously with the given event during a drag and drop operation over the widget. It can cause the view to scroll if, for example, the user drags a selection to view's right or bottom edge. In this case, the event will be accepted; otherwise it will be ignored.

See also dropEvent() and startDrag().

func (*QAbstractItemView) DropEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DropEvent(event qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a drop event occurs over the widget. If the model accepts the even position the drop event is accepted; otherwise it is ignored.

See also startDrag().

func (*QAbstractItemView) DropIndicatorPosition

func (this *QAbstractItemView) DropIndicatorPosition() int

Returns the position of the drop indicator in relation to the closest item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QAbstractItemView) Edit

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Edit(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Starts editing the item corresponding to the given index if it is editable.

Note that this function does not change the current index. Since the current index defines the next and previous items to edit, users may find that keyboard navigation does not work as expected. To provide consistent navigation behavior, call setCurrentIndex() before this function with the same model index.

See also QModelIndex::flags().

func (*QAbstractItemView) EditTriggers

func (this *QAbstractItemView) EditTriggers() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) Edit_1

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Edit_1(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, trigger int, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Starts editing the item corresponding to the given index if it is editable.

Note that this function does not change the current index. Since the current index defines the next and previous items to edit, users may find that keyboard navigation does not work as expected. To provide consistent navigation behavior, call setCurrentIndex() before this function with the same model index.

See also QModelIndex::flags().

func (*QAbstractItemView) EditorDestroyed

func (this *QAbstractItemView) EditorDestroyed(editor qtcore.QObject_ITF)

This function is called when the given editor has been destroyed.

See also closeEditor().

func (*QAbstractItemView) Entered

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Entered(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the item specified by index. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.

See also viewportEntered(), activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and pressed().

func (*QAbstractItemView) Event

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ExecuteDelayedItemsLayout

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ExecuteDelayedItemsLayout()

Executes the scheduled layouts without waiting for the event processing to begin.

See also scheduleDelayedItemsLayout().

func (*QAbstractItemView) FocusInEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

This function is called with the given event when the widget obtains the focus. By default, the event is ignored.

See also setFocus() and focusOutEvent().

func (*QAbstractItemView) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QAbstractItemView) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QAbstractItemView) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

This function is called with the given event when the widget loses the focus. By default, the event is ignored.

See also clearFocus() and focusInEvent().

func (*QAbstractItemView) GetCthis

func (this *QAbstractItemView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAbstractItemView) HasAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) HasAutoScroll() bool

func (*QAbstractItemView) HorizontalOffset

func (this *QAbstractItemView) HorizontalOffset() int

Returns the horizontal offset of the view.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

See also verticalOffset().

func (*QAbstractItemView) HorizontalScrollMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) HorizontalScrollMode() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) HorizontalScrollbarAction

func (this *QAbstractItemView) HorizontalScrollbarAction(action int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) HorizontalScrollbarValueChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) HorizontalScrollbarValueChanged(value int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) HorizontalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) HorizontalStepsPerItem() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) IconSize

func (this *QAbstractItemView) IconSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QAbstractItemView) IconSizeChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) IconSizeChanged(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QAbstractItemView) IndexAt

func (this *QAbstractItemView) IndexAt(point qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the model index of the item at the viewport coordinates point.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

See also visualRect().

func (*QAbstractItemView) IndexWidget

func (this *QAbstractItemView) IndexWidget(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the widget for the item at the given index.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setIndexWidget().

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritCloseEditor

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritCloseEditor(f func(editor *QWidget, hint int))

void closeEditor(class QWidget *, class QAbstractItemDelegate::EndEditHint)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritCommitData

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritCommitData(f func(editor *QWidget))

void commitData(class QWidget *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritCurrentChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritCurrentChanged(f func(current *qtcore.QModelIndex, previous *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void currentChanged(const class QModelIndex &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritDirtyRegionOffset

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritDirtyRegionOffset(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QPoint dirtyRegionOffset()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritDoAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritDoAutoScroll(f func())

void doAutoScroll()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragEnterEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QDragEnterEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritDropIndicatorPosition

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritDropIndicatorPosition(f func() int)

QAbstractItemView::DropIndicatorPosition dropIndicatorPosition()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritEdit

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritEdit(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex, trigger int, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool edit(const class QModelIndex &, enum QAbstractItemView::EditTrigger, class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritEditorDestroyed

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritEditorDestroyed(f func(editor *qtcore.QObject))

void editorDestroyed(class QObject *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritExecuteDelayedItemsLayout

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritExecuteDelayedItemsLayout(f func())

void executeDelayedItemsLayout()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalOffset

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalOffset(f func() int)

int horizontalOffset()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarAction

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarAction(f func(action int))

void horizontalScrollbarAction(int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarValueChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarValueChanged(f func(value int))

void horizontalScrollbarValueChanged(int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritHorizontalStepsPerItem(f func() int)

int horizontalStepsPerItem()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritIsIndexHidden

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritIsIndexHidden(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool isIndexHidden(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritMoveCursor

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritMoveCursor(f func(cursorAction int, modifiers int) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex moveCursor(enum QAbstractItemView::CursorAction, Qt::KeyboardModifiers)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritRowsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritRowsAboutToBeRemoved(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsAboutToBeRemoved(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritRowsInserted

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritRowsInserted(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsInserted(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritScheduleDelayedItemsLayout

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritScheduleDelayedItemsLayout(f func())

void scheduleDelayedItemsLayout()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritScrollDirtyRegion

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritScrollDirtyRegion(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollDirtyRegion(int, int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSelectedIndexes

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSelectedIndexes(f func() *qtcore.QModelIndexList)

QModelIndexList selectedIndexes()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSelectionChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSelectionChanged(f func(selected *qtcore.QItemSelection, deselected *qtcore.QItemSelection))

void selectionChanged(const class QItemSelection &, const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSelectionCommand

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSelectionCommand(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex, event *qtcore.QEvent) int)

QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags selectionCommand(const class QModelIndex &, const class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSetDirtyRegion

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSetDirtyRegion(f func(region *qtgui.QRegion))

void setDirtyRegion(const class QRegion &)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSetHorizontalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSetHorizontalStepsPerItem(f func(steps int))

void setHorizontalStepsPerItem(int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSetSelection

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSetSelection(f func(rect *qtcore.QRect, command int))

void setSelection(const class QRect &, class QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSetState

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSetState(f func(state int))

void setState(enum QAbstractItemView::State)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritSetVerticalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritSetVerticalStepsPerItem(f func(steps int))

void setVerticalStepsPerItem(int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritStartAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritStartAutoScroll(f func())

void startAutoScroll()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritStartDrag

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritStartDrag(f func(supportedActions int))

void startDrag(Qt::DropActions)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritState

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritState(f func() int)

QAbstractItemView::State state()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritStopAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritStopAutoScroll(f func())

void stopAutoScroll()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritTimerEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritUpdateEditorData

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritUpdateEditorData(f func())

void updateEditorData()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritUpdateEditorGeometries

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritUpdateEditorGeometries(f func())

void updateEditorGeometries()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritUpdateGeometries

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritUpdateGeometries(f func())

void updateGeometries()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalOffset

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalOffset(f func() int)

int verticalOffset()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalScrollbarAction

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalScrollbarAction(f func(action int))

void verticalScrollbarAction(int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalScrollbarValueChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalScrollbarValueChanged(f func(value int))

void verticalScrollbarValueChanged(int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritVerticalStepsPerItem(f func() int)

int verticalStepsPerItem()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritViewOptions

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritViewOptions(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QStyleOptionViewItem viewOptions()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritViewportEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritViewportEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool viewportEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritViewportSizeHint

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritViewportSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize viewportSizeHint()

func (*QAbstractItemView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection(f func(selection *qtcore.QItemSelection) unsafe.Pointer)

QRegion visualRegionForSelection(const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QAbstractItemView) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InputMethodEvent(event qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QAbstractItemView) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QAbstractItemView) InputMethodQuery(query int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QAbstractItemView) IsIndexHidden

func (this *QAbstractItemView) IsIndexHidden(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Returns true if the item referred to by the given index is hidden in the view, otherwise returns false.

Hiding is a view specific feature. For example in TableView a column can be marked as hidden or a row in the TreeView.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

func (*QAbstractItemView) IsPersistentEditorOpen

func (this *QAbstractItemView) IsPersistentEditorOpen(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Returns whether a persistent editor is open for the item at index index.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.10.

See also openPersistentEditor() and closePersistentEditor().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegate

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegate() *QAbstractItemDelegate

Returns the item delegate used by this view and model. This is either one set with setItemDelegate(), or the default one.

See also setItemDelegate().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegateForColumn

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegateForColumn(column int) *QAbstractItemDelegate

Returns the item delegate used by this view and model for the given column. You can call itemDelegate() to get a pointer to the current delegate for a given index.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setItemDelegateForColumn(), itemDelegateForRow(), and itemDelegate().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegateForRow

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegateForRow(row int) *QAbstractItemDelegate

Returns the item delegate used by this view and model for the given row, or 0 if no delegate has been assigned. You can call itemDelegate() to get a pointer to the current delegate for a given index.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setItemDelegateForRow(), itemDelegateForColumn(), and setItemDelegate().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegate_1

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ItemDelegate_1(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QAbstractItemDelegate

Returns the item delegate used by this view and model. This is either one set with setItemDelegate(), or the default one.

See also setItemDelegate().

func (*QAbstractItemView) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a key event is sent to the widget. The default implementation handles basic cursor movement, e.g. Up, Down, Left, Right, Home, PageUp, and PageDown; the activated() signal is emitted if the current index is valid and the activation key is pressed (e.g. Enter or Return, depending on the platform). This function is where editing is initiated by key press, e.g. if F2 is pressed.

See also edit(), moveCursor(), keyboardSearch(), and tabKeyNavigation.

func (*QAbstractItemView) KeyboardSearch

func (this *QAbstractItemView) KeyboardSearch(search string)

Moves to and selects the item best matching the string search. If no item is found nothing happens.

In the default implementation, the search is reset if search is empty, or the time interval since the last search has exceeded QApplication::keyboardInputInterval().

func (*QAbstractItemView) MetaObject

func (this *QAbstractItemView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QAbstractItemView) Model

Returns the model that this view is presenting.

See also setModel().

func (*QAbstractItemView) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a mouse button is double clicked inside the widget. If the double-click is on a valid item it emits the doubleClicked() signal and calls edit() on the item.

func (*QAbstractItemView) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) MouseMoveEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a mouse move event is sent to the widget. If a selection is in progress and new items are moved over the selection is extended; if a drag is in progress it is continued.

func (*QAbstractItemView) MousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a mouse button is pressed while the cursor is inside the widget. If a valid item is pressed on it is made into the current item. This function emits the pressed() signal.

func (*QAbstractItemView) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) MouseReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a mouse button is released, after a mouse press event on the widget. If a user presses the mouse inside your widget and then drags the mouse to another location before releasing the mouse button, your widget receives the release event. The function will emit the clicked() signal if an item was being pressed.

func (*QAbstractItemView) MoveCursor

func (this *QAbstractItemView) MoveCursor(cursorAction int, modifiers int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns a QModelIndex object pointing to the next object in the view, based on the given cursorAction and keyboard modifiers specified by modifiers.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

func (*QAbstractItemView) NewFromPointer

func (*QAbstractItemView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractItemView

func (*QAbstractItemView) OpenPersistentEditor

func (this *QAbstractItemView) OpenPersistentEditor(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Opens a persistent editor on the item at the given index. If no editor exists, the delegate will create a new editor.

See also closePersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QAbstractItemView) Pressed

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Pressed(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a mouse button is pressed. The item the mouse was pressed on is specified by index. The signal is only emitted when the index is valid.

Use the QApplication::mouseButtons() function to get the state of the mouse buttons.

See also activated(), clicked(), doubleClicked(), and entered().

func (*QAbstractItemView) QAbstractItemView_PTR

func (ptr *QAbstractItemView) QAbstractItemView_PTR() *QAbstractItemView

func (*QAbstractItemView) Reset

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Reset()

Reset the internal state of the view.

Warning: This function will reset open editors, scroll bar positions, selections, etc. Existing changes will not be committed. If you would like to save your changes when resetting the view, you can reimplement this function, commit your changes, and then call the superclass' implementation.

func (*QAbstractItemView) ResetHorizontalScrollMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ResetHorizontalScrollMode()

func (*QAbstractItemView) ResetVerticalScrollMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ResetVerticalScrollMode()

func (*QAbstractItemView) ResizeEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a resize event is sent to the widget.

See also QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QAbstractItemView) RootIndex

func (this *QAbstractItemView) RootIndex() *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the model index of the model's root item. The root item is the parent item to the view's toplevel items. The root can be invalid.

See also setRootIndex().

func (*QAbstractItemView) RowsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QAbstractItemView) RowsAboutToBeRemoved(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

This slot is called when rows are about to be removed. The deleted rows are those under the given parent from start to end inclusive.

See also rowsInserted().

func (*QAbstractItemView) RowsInserted

func (this *QAbstractItemView) RowsInserted(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

This slot is called when rows are inserted. The new rows are those under the given parent from start to end inclusive. The base class implementation calls fetchMore() on the model to check for more data.

See also rowsAboutToBeRemoved().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ScheduleDelayedItemsLayout

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ScheduleDelayedItemsLayout()

Schedules a layout of the items in the view to be executed when the event processing starts.

Even if scheduleDelayedItemsLayout() is called multiple times before events are processed, the view will only do the layout once.

See also executeDelayedItemsLayout().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ScrollDirtyRegion

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ScrollDirtyRegion(dx int, dy int)

Prepares the view for scrolling by (dx,dy) pixels by moving the dirty regions in the opposite direction. You only need to call this function if you are implementing a scrolling viewport in your view subclass.

If you implement scrollContentsBy() in a subclass of QAbstractItemView, call this function before you call QWidget::scroll() on the viewport. Alternatively, just call update().

See also scrollContentsBy(), dirtyRegionOffset(), and setDirtyRegion().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ScrollTo

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ScrollTo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, hint int)

Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item at index is visible. The view will try to position the item according to the given hint.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

func (*QAbstractItemView) ScrollToBottom

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ScrollToBottom()

Scrolls the view to the bottom.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also scrollTo() and scrollToTop().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ScrollToTop

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ScrollToTop()

Scrolls the view to the top.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also scrollTo() and scrollToBottom().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ScrollTo__

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ScrollTo__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item at index is visible. The view will try to position the item according to the given hint.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectAll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectAll()

Selects all items in the view. This function will use the selection behavior set on the view when selecting.

See also setSelection(), selectedIndexes(), and clearSelection().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectedIndexes

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectedIndexes() *qtcore.QModelIndexList

This convenience function returns a list of all selected and non-hidden item indexes in the view. The list contains no duplicates, and is not sorted.

See also QItemSelectionModel::selectedIndexes().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectionBehavior

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectionBehavior() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectionChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectionChanged(selected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF, deselected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF)

This slot is called when the selection is changed. The previous selection (which may be empty), is specified by deselected, and the new selection by selected.

See also setSelection().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectionCommand

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectionCommand(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) int

Returns the SelectionFlags to be used when updating a selection with to include the index specified. The event is a user input event, such as a mouse or keyboard event.

Reimplement this function to define your own selection behavior.

See also setSelection().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectionCommand__

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectionCommand__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Returns the SelectionFlags to be used when updating a selection with to include the index specified. The event is a user input event, such as a mouse or keyboard event.

Reimplement this function to define your own selection behavior.

See also setSelection().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectionMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectionMode() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) SelectionModel

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SelectionModel() *qtcore.QItemSelectionModel

Returns the current selection model.

See also setSelectionModel() and selectedIndexes().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetAlternatingRowColors

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetAlternatingRowColors(enable bool)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetAutoScroll(enable bool)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetAutoScrollMargin

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetAutoScrollMargin(margin int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetCthis

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetCurrentIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the current item to be the item at index.

Unless the current selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected. Note that this function also updates the starting position for any new selections the user performs.

To set an item as the current item without selecting it, call

selectionModel()->setCurrentIndex(index, QItemSelectionModel::NoUpdate);

See also currentIndex(), currentChanged(), and selectionMode.

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetDefaultDropAction

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetDefaultDropAction(dropAction int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetDirtyRegion

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetDirtyRegion(region qtgui.QRegion_ITF)

Marks the given region as dirty and schedules it to be updated. You only need to call this function if you are implementing your own view subclass.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also scrollDirtyRegion() and dirtyRegionOffset().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetDragDropMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetDragDropMode(behavior int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetDragDropOverwriteMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetDragDropOverwriteMode(overwrite bool)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetDragEnabled

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetDragEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetDropIndicatorShown

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetDropIndicatorShown(enable bool)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetEditTriggers

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetEditTriggers(triggers int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetHorizontalScrollMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetHorizontalScrollMode(mode int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetHorizontalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetHorizontalStepsPerItem(steps int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetIconSize

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetIconSize(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetIndexWidget

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetIndexWidget(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the given widget on the item at the given index, passing the ownership of the widget to the viewport.

If index is invalid (e.g., if you pass the root index), this function will do nothing.

The given widget's autoFillBackground property must be set to true, otherwise the widget's background will be transparent, showing both the model data and the item at the given index.

If index widget A is replaced with index widget B, index widget A will be deleted. For example, in the code snippet below, the QLineEdit object will be deleted.

setIndexWidget(index, new QLineEdit);
...
setIndexWidget(index, new QTextEdit);

This function should only be used to display static content within the visible area corresponding to an item of data. If you want to display custom dynamic content or implement a custom editor widget, subclass QItemDelegate instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also indexWidget() and Delegate Classes.

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetItemDelegate

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetItemDelegate(delegate QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF)

Sets the item delegate for this view and its model to delegate. This is useful if you want complete control over the editing and display of items.

Any existing delegate will be removed, but not deleted. QAbstractItemView does not take ownership of delegate.

Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.

See also itemDelegate().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetItemDelegateForColumn

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetItemDelegateForColumn(column int, delegate QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF)

Sets the given item delegate used by this view and model for the given column. All items on column will be drawn and managed by delegate instead of using the default delegate (i.e., itemDelegate()).

Any existing column delegate for column will be removed, but not deleted. QAbstractItemView does not take ownership of delegate.

Note: If a delegate has been assigned to both a row and a column, the row delegate will take precedence and manage the intersecting cell index.

Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also itemDelegateForColumn(), setItemDelegateForRow(), and itemDelegate().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetItemDelegateForRow

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetItemDelegateForRow(row int, delegate QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF)

Sets the given item delegate used by this view and model for the given row. All items on row will be drawn and managed by delegate instead of using the default delegate (i.e., itemDelegate()).

Any existing row delegate for row will be removed, but not deleted. QAbstractItemView does not take ownership of delegate.

Note: If a delegate has been assigned to both a row and a column, the row delegate (i.e., this delegate) will take precedence and manage the intersecting cell index.

Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also itemDelegateForRow(), setItemDelegateForColumn(), and itemDelegate().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetModel

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetModel(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Sets the model for the view to present.

This function will create and set a new selection model, replacing any model that was previously set with setSelectionModel(). However, the old selection model will not be deleted as it may be shared between several views. We recommend that you delete the old selection model if it is no longer required. This is done with the following code:

QItemSelectionModel *m = view->selectionModel();
view->setModel(new model);
delete m;

If both the old model and the old selection model do not have parents, or if their parents are long-lived objects, it may be preferable to call their deleteLater() functions to explicitly delete them.

The view does not take ownership of the model unless it is the model's parent object because the model may be shared between many different views.

See also model(), selectionModel(), and setSelectionModel().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetRootIndex

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetRootIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the root item to the item at the given index.

See also rootIndex().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetSelection

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetSelection(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, command int)

Applies the selection flags to the items in or touched by the rectangle, rect.

When implementing your own itemview setSelection should call selectionModel()->select(selection, flags) where selection is either an empty QModelIndex or a QItemSelection that contains all items that are contained in rect.

See also selectionCommand() and selectedIndexes().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetSelectionBehavior

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetSelectionBehavior(behavior int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetSelectionMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetSelectionMode(mode int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetSelectionModel

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetSelectionModel(selectionModel qtcore.QItemSelectionModel_ITF)

Sets the current selection model to the given selectionModel.

Note that, if you call setModel() after this function, the given selectionModel will be replaced by one created by the view.

Note: It is up to the application to delete the old selection model if it is no longer needed; i.e., if it is not being used by other views. This will happen automatically when its parent object is deleted. However, if it does not have a parent, or if the parent is a long-lived object, it may be preferable to call its deleteLater() function to explicitly delete it.

See also selectionModel(), setModel(), and clearSelection().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetState

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetState(state int)

Sets the item view's state to the given state.

See also state().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetTabKeyNavigation

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetTabKeyNavigation(enable bool)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetTextElideMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetTextElideMode(mode int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetVerticalScrollMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetVerticalScrollMode(mode int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) SetVerticalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SetVerticalStepsPerItem(steps int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) ShowDropIndicator

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ShowDropIndicator() bool

func (*QAbstractItemView) SizeHintForColumn

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SizeHintForColumn(column int) int

Returns the width size hint for the specified column or -1 if there is no model.

This function is used in views with a horizontal header to find the size hint for a header section based on the contents of the given column.

See also sizeHintForRow().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SizeHintForIndex

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SizeHintForIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

Returns the size hint for the item with the specified index or an invalid size for invalid indexes.

See also sizeHintForRow() and sizeHintForColumn().

func (*QAbstractItemView) SizeHintForRow

func (this *QAbstractItemView) SizeHintForRow(row int) int

Returns the height size hint for the specified row or -1 if there is no model.

The returned height is calculated using the size hints of the given row's items, i.e. the returned value is the maximum height among the items. Note that to control the height of a row, you must reimplement the QAbstractItemDelegate::sizeHint() function.

This function is used in views with a vertical header to find the size hint for a header section based on the contents of the given row.

See also sizeHintForColumn().

func (*QAbstractItemView) StartAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) StartAutoScroll()

func (*QAbstractItemView) StartDrag

func (this *QAbstractItemView) StartDrag(supportedActions int)

Starts a drag by calling drag->exec() using the given supportedActions.

func (*QAbstractItemView) State

func (this *QAbstractItemView) State() int

Returns the item view's state.

See also setState().

func (*QAbstractItemView) StopAutoScroll

func (this *QAbstractItemView) StopAutoScroll()

func (*QAbstractItemView) TabKeyNavigation

func (this *QAbstractItemView) TabKeyNavigation() bool

func (*QAbstractItemView) TextElideMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) TextElideMode() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) TimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) TimerEvent(event qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

This function is called with the given event when a timer event is sent to the widget.

See also QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QAbstractItemView) Update

func (this *QAbstractItemView) Update(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Updates the area occupied by the given index.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QAbstractItemView) UpdateEditorData

func (this *QAbstractItemView) UpdateEditorData()

func (*QAbstractItemView) UpdateEditorGeometries

func (this *QAbstractItemView) UpdateEditorGeometries()

func (*QAbstractItemView) UpdateGeometries

func (this *QAbstractItemView) UpdateGeometries()

Updates the geometry of the child widgets of the view.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QAbstractItemView) VerticalOffset

func (this *QAbstractItemView) VerticalOffset() int

Returns the vertical offset of the view.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

See also horizontalOffset().

func (*QAbstractItemView) VerticalScrollMode

func (this *QAbstractItemView) VerticalScrollMode() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) VerticalScrollbarAction

func (this *QAbstractItemView) VerticalScrollbarAction(action int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) VerticalScrollbarValueChanged

func (this *QAbstractItemView) VerticalScrollbarValueChanged(value int)

func (*QAbstractItemView) VerticalStepsPerItem

func (this *QAbstractItemView) VerticalStepsPerItem() int

func (*QAbstractItemView) ViewOptions

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ViewOptions() *QStyleOptionViewItem

Returns a QStyleOptionViewItem structure populated with the view's palette, font, state, alignments etc.

func (*QAbstractItemView) ViewportEntered

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ViewportEntered()

This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters the viewport. Mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.

See also entered().

func (*QAbstractItemView) ViewportEvent

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ViewportEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().

This function is used to handle tool tips, and What's This? mode, if the given event is a QEvent::ToolTip,or a QEvent::WhatsThis. It passes all other events on to its base class viewportEvent() handler.

func (*QAbstractItemView) ViewportSizeHint

func (this *QAbstractItemView) ViewportSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportSizeHint().

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QAbstractItemView) VisualRect

func (this *QAbstractItemView) VisualRect(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at index.

If your item is displayed in several areas then visualRect should return the primary area that contains index and not the complete area that index might encompasses, touch or cause drawing.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

See also indexAt() and visualRegionForSelection().

func (*QAbstractItemView) VisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QAbstractItemView) VisualRegionForSelection(selection qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF) *qtgui.QRegion

Returns the region from the viewport of the items in the given selection.

In the base class this is a pure virtual function.

See also visualRect() and selectedIndexes().

type QAbstractItemView_ITF

type QAbstractItemView_ITF interface {
	QAbstractScrollArea_ITF
	QAbstractItemView_PTR() *QAbstractItemView
}

type QAbstractItemView__CursorAction

type QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = int

This enum describes the different ways to navigate between items,

See also moveCursor().

const QAbstractItemView__MoveDown QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 1

Move to the item below the current item.

const QAbstractItemView__MoveEnd QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 5

Move to the bottom-right corner item.

const QAbstractItemView__MoveHome QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 4

Move to the top-left corner item.

const QAbstractItemView__MoveLeft QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 2

Move to the item left of the current item.

const QAbstractItemView__MoveNext QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 8

Move to the item after the current item.

const QAbstractItemView__MovePageDown QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 7

Move one page down below the current item.

const QAbstractItemView__MovePageUp QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 6

Move one page up above the current item.

const QAbstractItemView__MovePrevious QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 9

Move to the item before the current item.

const QAbstractItemView__MoveRight QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 3

Move to the item right of the current item.

const QAbstractItemView__MoveUp QAbstractItemView__CursorAction = 0

Move to the item above the current item.

type QAbstractItemView__DragDropMode

type QAbstractItemView__DragDropMode = int

Describes the various drag and drop events the view can act upon. By default the view does not support dragging or dropping (NoDragDrop).

Note that the model used needs to provide support for drag and drop operations.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.2.

See also setDragDropMode() and Using drag and drop with item views.

const QAbstractItemView__DragDrop QAbstractItemView__DragDropMode = 3

The view supports both dragging and dropping

const QAbstractItemView__DragOnly QAbstractItemView__DragDropMode = 1

The view supports dragging of its own items

const QAbstractItemView__DropOnly QAbstractItemView__DragDropMode = 2

The view accepts drops

const QAbstractItemView__InternalMove QAbstractItemView__DragDropMode = 4

The view accepts move (not copy) operations only from itself.

const QAbstractItemView__NoDragDrop QAbstractItemView__DragDropMode = 0

Does not support dragging or dropping.

type QAbstractItemView__DropIndicatorPosition

type QAbstractItemView__DropIndicatorPosition = int

This enum indicates the position of the drop indicator in relation to the index at the current mouse position:

const QAbstractItemView__AboveItem QAbstractItemView__DropIndicatorPosition = 1

The item will be dropped above the index.

const QAbstractItemView__BelowItem QAbstractItemView__DropIndicatorPosition = 2

The item will be dropped below the index.

const QAbstractItemView__OnItem QAbstractItemView__DropIndicatorPosition = 0

The item will be dropped on the index.

const QAbstractItemView__OnViewport QAbstractItemView__DropIndicatorPosition = 3

The item will be dropped onto a region of the viewport with no items. The way each view handles items dropped onto the viewport depends on the behavior of the underlying model in use.

type QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger

type QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = int
const QAbstractItemView__AllEditTriggers QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = 31
const QAbstractItemView__AnyKeyPressed QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = 16
const QAbstractItemView__CurrentChanged QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = 1
const QAbstractItemView__DoubleClicked QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = 2
const QAbstractItemView__EditKeyPressed QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = 8
const QAbstractItemView__NoEditTriggers QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = 0
const QAbstractItemView__SelectedClicked QAbstractItemView__EditTrigger = 4

type QAbstractItemView__ScrollHint

type QAbstractItemView__ScrollHint = int
const QAbstractItemView__EnsureVisible QAbstractItemView__ScrollHint = 0

Scroll to ensure that the item is visible.

const QAbstractItemView__PositionAtBottom QAbstractItemView__ScrollHint = 2

Scroll to position the item at the bottom of the viewport.

const QAbstractItemView__PositionAtCenter QAbstractItemView__ScrollHint = 3

Scroll to position the item at the center of the viewport.

const QAbstractItemView__PositionAtTop QAbstractItemView__ScrollHint = 1

Scroll to position the item at the top of the viewport.

type QAbstractItemView__ScrollMode

type QAbstractItemView__ScrollMode = int

Describes how the scrollbar should behave. When setting the scroll mode to ScrollPerPixel the single step size will adjust automatically unless it was set explicitly using setSingleStep(). The automatic adjustment can be restored by setting the single step size to -1.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.2.

const QAbstractItemView__ScrollPerItem QAbstractItemView__ScrollMode = 0

The view will scroll the contents one item at a time.

const QAbstractItemView__ScrollPerPixel QAbstractItemView__ScrollMode = 1

The view will scroll the contents one pixel at a time.

type QAbstractItemView__SelectionBehavior

type QAbstractItemView__SelectionBehavior = int
const QAbstractItemView__SelectColumns QAbstractItemView__SelectionBehavior = 2

Selecting only columns.

const QAbstractItemView__SelectItems QAbstractItemView__SelectionBehavior = 0

Selecting single items.

const QAbstractItemView__SelectRows QAbstractItemView__SelectionBehavior = 1

Selecting only rows.

type QAbstractItemView__SelectionMode

type QAbstractItemView__SelectionMode = int

This enum indicates how the view responds to user selections:

The most commonly used modes are SingleSelection and ExtendedSelection.

const QAbstractItemView__ContiguousSelection QAbstractItemView__SelectionMode = 4

When the user selects an item in the usual way, the selection is cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between the current item and the clicked item are selected or unselected, depending on the state of the clicked item.

const QAbstractItemView__ExtendedSelection QAbstractItemView__SelectionMode = 3

When the user selects an item in the usual way, the selection is cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the clicked item gets toggled and all other items are left untouched. If the user presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between the current item and the clicked item are selected or unselected, depending on the state of the clicked item. Multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse over them.

const QAbstractItemView__MultiSelection QAbstractItemView__SelectionMode = 2

When the user selects an item in the usual way, the selection status of that item is toggled and the other items are left alone. Multiple items can be toggled by dragging the mouse over them.

const QAbstractItemView__NoSelection QAbstractItemView__SelectionMode = 0

Items cannot be selected.

const QAbstractItemView__SingleSelection QAbstractItemView__SelectionMode = 1

When the user selects an item, any already-selected item becomes unselected. It is possible for the user to deselect the selected item.

type QAbstractItemView__State

type QAbstractItemView__State = int

Describes the different states the view can be in. This is usually only interesting when reimplementing your own view.

const QAbstractItemView__AnimatingState QAbstractItemView__State = 6

The item view is performing an animation.

const QAbstractItemView__CollapsingState QAbstractItemView__State = 5

The user is closing a branch of items.

const QAbstractItemView__DragSelectingState QAbstractItemView__State = 2

The user is selecting items.

const QAbstractItemView__DraggingState QAbstractItemView__State = 1

The user is dragging items.

const QAbstractItemView__EditingState QAbstractItemView__State = 3

The user is editing an item in a widget editor.

const QAbstractItemView__ExpandingState QAbstractItemView__State = 4

The user is opening a branch of items.

const QAbstractItemView__NoState QAbstractItemView__State = 0

The is the default state.

type QAbstractScrollArea

type QAbstractScrollArea struct {
	*QFrame
}

func NewQAbstractScrollArea

func NewQAbstractScrollArea(parent QWidget_ITF) *QAbstractScrollArea

Constructs a viewport.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

func NewQAbstractScrollAreaFromPointer

func NewQAbstractScrollAreaFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractScrollArea

func NewQAbstractScrollArea__

func NewQAbstractScrollArea__() *QAbstractScrollArea

Constructs a viewport.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) AddScrollBarWidget

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) AddScrollBarWidget(widget QWidget_ITF, alignment int)

Adds widget as a scroll bar widget in the location specified by alignment.

Scroll bar widgets are shown next to the horizontal or vertical scroll bar, and can be placed on either side of it. If you want the scroll bar widgets to be always visible, set the scrollBarPolicy for the corresponding scroll bar to AlwaysOn.

alignment must be one of Qt::Alignleft and Qt::AlignRight, which maps to the horizontal scroll bar, or Qt::AlignTop and Qt::AlignBottom, which maps to the vertical scroll bar.

A scroll bar widget can be removed by either re-parenting the widget or deleting it. It's also possible to hide a widget with QWidget::hide()

The scroll bar widget will be resized to fit the scroll bar geometry for the current style. The following describes the case for scroll bar widgets on the horizontal scroll bar:

The height of the widget will be set to match the height of the scroll bar. To control the width of the widget, use QWidget::setMinimumWidth and QWidget::setMaximumWidth, or implement QWidget::sizeHint() and set a horizontal size policy. If you want a square widget, call QStyle::pixelMetric(QStyle::PM_ScrollBarExtent) and set the width to this value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also scrollBarWidgets().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) ContextMenuEvent(arg0 qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive context menu events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.

See also QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) CornerWidget

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) CornerWidget() *QWidget

Returns the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars.

By default, no corner widget is present.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setCornerWidget().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) DragEnterEvent(arg0 qtgui.QDragEnterEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag enter events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.

See also QWidget::dragEnterEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) DragLeaveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag leave events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.

See also QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) DragMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag move events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.

See also QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) DropEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) DropEvent(arg0 qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drop events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.

See also QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) Event

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

This is the main event handler for the QAbstractScrollArea widget (not the scrolling area viewport()). The specified event is a general event object that may need to be cast to the appropriate class depending on its type.

See also QEvent::type().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) EventFilter

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) EventFilter(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) GetCthis

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) HorizontalScrollBar

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) HorizontalScrollBar() *QScrollBar

Returns the horizontal scroll bar.

See also setHorizontalScrollBar(), horizontalScrollBarPolicy, and verticalScrollBar().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) HorizontalScrollBarPolicy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) HorizontalScrollBarPolicy() int

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QDragEnterEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QDragEnterEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritDropEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritEventFilter(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QObject, arg1 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritSetViewportMargins

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritSetViewportMargins(f func(left int, top int, right int, bottom int))

void setViewportMargins(int, int, int, int)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritViewportEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritViewportEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool viewportEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritViewportMargins

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritViewportMargins(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QMargins viewportMargins()

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritViewportSizeHint

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritViewportSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize viewportSizeHint()

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) InheritWheelEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

This function is called with key event e when key presses occur. It handles PageUp, PageDown, Up, Down, Left, and Right, and ignores all other key presses.

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) MaximumViewportSize

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) MaximumViewportSize() *qtcore.QSize

Returns the size of the viewport as if the scroll bars had no valid scrolling range.

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) MetaObject

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) MouseDoubleClickEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse double click events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.

See also QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.

See also QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) MousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.

See also QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.

See also QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) NewFromPointer

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractScrollArea

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) PaintEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.

Note: If you open a painter, make sure to open it on the viewport().

See also QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) QAbstractScrollArea_PTR

func (ptr *QAbstractScrollArea) QAbstractScrollArea_PTR() *QAbstractScrollArea

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) ResizeEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive resize events (passed in event), for the viewport() widget.

When resizeEvent() is called, the viewport already has its new geometry: Its new size is accessible through the QResizeEvent::size() function, and the old size through QResizeEvent::oldSize().

See also QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) ScrollBarWidgets

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) ScrollBarWidgets(alignment int) *QWidgetList

Returns a list of the currently set scroll bar widgets. alignment can be any combination of the four location flags.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also addScrollBarWidget().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

This virtual handler is called when the scroll bars are moved by dx, dy, and consequently the viewport's contents should be scrolled accordingly.

The default implementation simply calls update() on the entire viewport(), subclasses can reimplement this handler for optimization purposes, or - like QScrollArea - to move a contents widget. The parameters dx and dy are there for convenience, so that the class knows how much should be scrolled (useful e.g. when doing pixel-shifts). You may just as well ignore these values and scroll directly to the position the scroll bars indicate.

Calling this function in order to scroll programmatically is an error, use the scroll bars instead (e.g. by calling QScrollBar::setValue() directly).

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetCornerWidget

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetCornerWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars to be widget.

You will probably also want to set at least one of the scroll bar modes to AlwaysOn.

Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.

Any previous corner widget is hidden.

You may call setCornerWidget() with the same widget at different times.

All widgets set here will be deleted by the scroll area when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0).

Any newly set widget should have no current parent.

By default, no corner widget is present.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also cornerWidget(), horizontalScrollBarPolicy, and horizontalScrollBarPolicy.

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetCthis

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetHorizontalScrollBar

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetHorizontalScrollBar(scrollbar QScrollBar_ITF)

Replaces the existing horizontal scroll bar with scrollBar, and sets all the former scroll bar's slider properties on the new scroll bar. The former scroll bar is then deleted.

QAbstractScrollArea already provides horizontal and vertical scroll bars by default. You can call this function to replace the default horizontal scroll bar with your own custom scroll bar.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also horizontalScrollBar() and setVerticalScrollBar().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetHorizontalScrollBarPolicy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetHorizontalScrollBarPolicy(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetSizeAdjustPolicy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetSizeAdjustPolicy(policy int)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetVerticalScrollBar

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetVerticalScrollBar(scrollbar QScrollBar_ITF)

Replaces the existing vertical scroll bar with scrollBar, and sets all the former scroll bar's slider properties on the new scroll bar. The former scroll bar is then deleted.

QAbstractScrollArea already provides vertical and horizontal scroll bars by default. You can call this function to replace the default vertical scroll bar with your own custom scroll bar.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also verticalScrollBar() and setHorizontalScrollBar().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetVerticalScrollBarPolicy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetVerticalScrollBarPolicy(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetViewport

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetViewport(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the viewport to be the given widget. The QAbstractScrollArea will take ownership of the given widget.

If widget is 0, QAbstractScrollArea will assign a new QWidget instance for the viewport.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also viewport().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetViewportMargins

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetViewportMargins(left int, top int, right int, bottom int)

Sets the margins around the scrolling area to left, top, right and bottom. This is useful for applications such as spreadsheets with "locked" rows and columns. The marginal space is is left blank; put widgets in the unused area.

Note that this function is frequently called by QTreeView and QTableView, so margins must be implemented by QAbstractScrollArea subclasses. Also, if the subclasses are to be used in item views, they should not call this function.

By default all margins are zero.

See also viewportMargins().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetViewportMargins_1

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetViewportMargins_1(margins qtcore.QMargins_ITF)

Sets the margins around the scrolling area to left, top, right and bottom. This is useful for applications such as spreadsheets with "locked" rows and columns. The marginal space is is left blank; put widgets in the unused area.

Note that this function is frequently called by QTreeView and QTableView, so margins must be implemented by QAbstractScrollArea subclasses. Also, if the subclasses are to be used in item views, they should not call this function.

By default all margins are zero.

See also viewportMargins().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SetupViewport

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SetupViewport(viewport QWidget_ITF)

This slot is called by QAbstractScrollArea after setViewport(viewport) has been called. Reimplement this function in a subclass of QAbstractScrollArea to initialize the new viewport before it is used.

See also setViewport().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SizeAdjustPolicy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SizeAdjustPolicy() int

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) SizeHint

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

Returns the sizeHint property of the scroll area. The size is determined by using viewportSizeHint() plus some extra space for scroll bars, if needed.

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) VerticalScrollBar

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) VerticalScrollBar() *QScrollBar

Returns the vertical scroll bar.

See also setVerticalScrollBar(), verticalScrollBarPolicy, and horizontalScrollBar().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) VerticalScrollBarPolicy

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) VerticalScrollBarPolicy() int

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) Viewport

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) Viewport() *QWidget

Returns the viewport widget.

Use the QScrollArea::widget() function to retrieve the contents of the viewport widget.

See also setViewport() and QScrollArea::widget().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) ViewportEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) ViewportEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

The main event handler for the scrolling area (the viewport() widget). It handles the event specified, and can be called by subclasses to provide reasonable default behavior.

Returns true to indicate to the event system that the event has been handled, and needs no further processing; otherwise returns false to indicate that the event should be propagated further.

You can reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using one of the specialized event handlers instead.

Specialized handlers for viewport events are: paintEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), wheelEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), dropEvent(), contextMenuEvent(), and resizeEvent().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) ViewportMargins

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) ViewportMargins() *qtcore.QMargins

Returns the margins around the scrolling area. By default all the margins are zero.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.5.

See also setViewportMargins().

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) ViewportSizeHint

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) ViewportSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Returns the recommended size for the viewport. The default implementation returns viewport()->sizeHint(). Note that the size is just the viewport's size, without any scroll bars visible.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QAbstractScrollArea) WheelEvent

func (this *QAbstractScrollArea) WheelEvent(arg0 qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive wheel events for the viewport() widget. The event is passed in e.

See also QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QAbstractScrollArea_ITF

type QAbstractScrollArea_ITF interface {
	QFrame_ITF
	QAbstractScrollArea_PTR() *QAbstractScrollArea
}

type QAbstractScrollArea__SizeAdjustPolicy

type QAbstractScrollArea__SizeAdjustPolicy = int

This enum specifies how the size hint of the QAbstractScrollArea should adjust when the size of the viewport changes.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 5.2.

const QAbstractScrollArea__AdjustIgnored QAbstractScrollArea__SizeAdjustPolicy = 0

The scroll area will behave like before - and not do any adjust.

const QAbstractScrollArea__AdjustToContents QAbstractScrollArea__SizeAdjustPolicy = 2

The scroll area will always adjust to the viewport

const QAbstractScrollArea__AdjustToContentsOnFirstShow QAbstractScrollArea__SizeAdjustPolicy = 1

The scroll area will adjust to its viewport the first time it is shown.

type QAbstractSlider

type QAbstractSlider struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQAbstractSlider

func NewQAbstractSlider(parent QWidget_ITF) *QAbstractSlider

Constructs an abstract slider.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.

func NewQAbstractSliderFromPointer

func NewQAbstractSliderFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractSlider

func NewQAbstractSlider__

func NewQAbstractSlider__() *QAbstractSlider

Constructs an abstract slider.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.

func (*QAbstractSlider) ActionTriggered

func (this *QAbstractSlider) ActionTriggered(action int)

This signal is emitted when the slider action action is triggered. Actions are SliderSingleStepAdd, SliderSingleStepSub, SliderPageStepAdd, SliderPageStepSub, SliderToMinimum, SliderToMaximum, and SliderMove.

When the signal is emitted, the sliderPosition has been adjusted according to the action, but the value has not yet been propagated (meaning the valueChanged() signal was not yet emitted), and the visual display has not been updated. In slots connected to this signal you can thus safely adjust any action by calling setSliderPosition() yourself, based on both the action and the slider's value.

See also triggerAction().

func (*QAbstractSlider) ChangeEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) ChangeEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QAbstractSlider) Event

func (this *QAbstractSlider) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QAbstractSlider) GetCthis

func (this *QAbstractSlider) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAbstractSlider) HasTracking

func (this *QAbstractSlider) HasTracking() bool

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritChangeEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritRepeatAction

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritRepeatAction(f func() int)

QAbstractSlider::SliderAction repeatAction()

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritSetRepeatAction

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritSetRepeatAction(f func(action int, thresholdTime int, repeatTime int))

void setRepeatAction(enum QAbstractSlider::SliderAction, int, int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritSliderChange

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritSliderChange(f func(change int))

void sliderChange(enum QAbstractSlider::SliderChange)

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritTimerEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSlider) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InheritWheelEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSlider) InvertedAppearance

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InvertedAppearance() bool

func (*QAbstractSlider) InvertedControls

func (this *QAbstractSlider) InvertedControls() bool

func (*QAbstractSlider) IsSliderDown

func (this *QAbstractSlider) IsSliderDown() bool

func (*QAbstractSlider) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) KeyPressEvent(ev qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QAbstractSlider) Maximum

func (this *QAbstractSlider) Maximum() int

func (*QAbstractSlider) MetaObject

func (this *QAbstractSlider) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QAbstractSlider) Minimum

func (this *QAbstractSlider) Minimum() int

func (*QAbstractSlider) NewFromPointer

func (*QAbstractSlider) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractSlider

func (*QAbstractSlider) Orientation

func (this *QAbstractSlider) Orientation() int

func (*QAbstractSlider) PageStep

func (this *QAbstractSlider) PageStep() int

func (*QAbstractSlider) QAbstractSlider_PTR

func (ptr *QAbstractSlider) QAbstractSlider_PTR() *QAbstractSlider

func (*QAbstractSlider) RangeChanged

func (this *QAbstractSlider) RangeChanged(min int, max int)

This signal is emitted when the slider range has changed, with min being the new minimum, and max being the new maximum.

See also minimum and maximum.

func (*QAbstractSlider) RepeatAction

func (this *QAbstractSlider) RepeatAction() int

Returns the current repeat action.

See also setRepeatAction().

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetCthis

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetInvertedAppearance

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetInvertedAppearance(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetInvertedControls

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetInvertedControls(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetMaximum

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetMaximum(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetMinimum

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetMinimum(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetOrientation

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetOrientation(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetPageStep

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetPageStep(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetRange

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetRange(min int, max int)

Sets the slider's minimum to min and its maximum to max.

If max is smaller than min, min becomes the only legal value.

See also minimum and maximum.

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetRepeatAction

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetRepeatAction(action int, thresholdTime int, repeatTime int)

Sets action action to be triggered repetitively in intervals of repeatTime, after an initial delay of thresholdTime.

See also triggerAction() and repeatAction().

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetRepeatAction__

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetRepeatAction__(action int)

Sets action action to be triggered repetitively in intervals of repeatTime, after an initial delay of thresholdTime.

See also triggerAction() and repeatAction().

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetRepeatAction__1

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetRepeatAction__1(action int, thresholdTime int)

Sets action action to be triggered repetitively in intervals of repeatTime, after an initial delay of thresholdTime.

See also triggerAction() and repeatAction().

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetSingleStep

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetSingleStep(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetSliderDown

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetSliderDown(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetSliderPosition

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetSliderPosition(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetTracking

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetTracking(enable bool)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SetValue

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SetValue(arg0 int)

func (*QAbstractSlider) SingleStep

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SingleStep() int

func (*QAbstractSlider) SliderChange

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SliderChange(change int)

Reimplement this virtual function to track slider changes such as SliderRangeChange, SliderOrientationChange, SliderStepsChange, or SliderValueChange. The default implementation only updates the display and ignores the change parameter.

func (*QAbstractSlider) SliderMoved

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SliderMoved(position int)

This signal is emitted when sliderDown is true and the slider moves. This usually happens when the user is dragging the slider. The value is the new slider position.

This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off.

Note: Notifier signal for property sliderPosition.

See also setTracking(), valueChanged(), isSliderDown(), sliderPressed(), and sliderReleased().

func (*QAbstractSlider) SliderPosition

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SliderPosition() int

func (*QAbstractSlider) SliderPressed

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SliderPressed()

This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(true) is called.

See also sliderReleased(), sliderMoved(), and isSliderDown().

func (*QAbstractSlider) SliderReleased

func (this *QAbstractSlider) SliderReleased()

This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse, or programmatically when setSliderDown(false) is called.

See also sliderPressed(), sliderMoved(), and sliderDown.

func (*QAbstractSlider) TimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) TimerEvent(arg0 qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QAbstractSlider) TriggerAction

func (this *QAbstractSlider) TriggerAction(action int)

Triggers a slider action. Possible actions are SliderSingleStepAdd, SliderSingleStepSub, SliderPageStepAdd, SliderPageStepSub, SliderToMinimum, SliderToMaximum, and SliderMove.

See also actionTriggered().

func (*QAbstractSlider) Value

func (this *QAbstractSlider) Value() int

func (*QAbstractSlider) ValueChanged

func (this *QAbstractSlider) ValueChanged(value int)

This signal is emitted when the slider value has changed, with the new slider value as argument.

Note: Notifier signal for property value.

func (*QAbstractSlider) WheelEvent

func (this *QAbstractSlider) WheelEvent(e qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QAbstractSlider_ITF

type QAbstractSlider_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QAbstractSlider_PTR() *QAbstractSlider
}

type QAbstractSlider__SliderAction

type QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = int

ConstantValue QAbstractSlider::SliderNoAction0 QAbstractSlider::SliderSingleStepAdd1 QAbstractSlider::SliderSingleStepSub2 QAbstractSlider::SliderPageStepAdd3 QAbstractSlider::SliderPageStepSub4 QAbstractSlider::SliderToMinimum5 QAbstractSlider::SliderToMaximum6 QAbstractSlider::SliderMove7

const QAbstractSlider__SliderMove QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 7
const QAbstractSlider__SliderNoAction QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 0
const QAbstractSlider__SliderPageStepAdd QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 3
const QAbstractSlider__SliderPageStepSub QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 4
const QAbstractSlider__SliderSingleStepAdd QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 1
const QAbstractSlider__SliderSingleStepSub QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 2
const QAbstractSlider__SliderToMaximum QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 6
const QAbstractSlider__SliderToMinimum QAbstractSlider__SliderAction = 5

type QAbstractSlider__SliderChange

type QAbstractSlider__SliderChange = int

ConstantValue QAbstractSlider::SliderRangeChange0 QAbstractSlider::SliderOrientationChange1 QAbstractSlider::SliderStepsChange2 QAbstractSlider::SliderValueChange3

const QAbstractSlider__SliderOrientationChange QAbstractSlider__SliderChange = 1
const QAbstractSlider__SliderRangeChange QAbstractSlider__SliderChange = 0
const QAbstractSlider__SliderStepsChange QAbstractSlider__SliderChange = 2
const QAbstractSlider__SliderValueChange QAbstractSlider__SliderChange = 3

type QAbstractSpinBox

type QAbstractSpinBox struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQAbstractSpinBox

func NewQAbstractSpinBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QAbstractSpinBox

Constructs an abstract spinbox with the given parent with default wrapping, and alignment properties.

func NewQAbstractSpinBoxFromPointer

func NewQAbstractSpinBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractSpinBox

func NewQAbstractSpinBox__

func NewQAbstractSpinBox__() *QAbstractSpinBox

Constructs an abstract spinbox with the given parent with default wrapping, and alignment properties.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) Alignment

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) Alignment() int

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) ButtonSymbols

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) ButtonSymbols() int

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) ChangeEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) Clear

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) Clear()

Clears the lineedit of all text but prefix and suffix.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) CloseEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) CloseEvent(event qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) ContextMenuEvent(event qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) CorrectionMode

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) CorrectionMode() int

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) EditingFinished

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) EditingFinished()

This signal is emitted editing is finished. This happens when the spinbox loses focus and when enter is pressed.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) Event

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) Fixup

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) Fixup(input string)

This virtual function is called by the QAbstractSpinBox if the input is not validated to QValidator::Acceptable when Return is pressed or interpretText() is called. It will try to change the text so it is valid. Reimplemented in the various subclasses.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) FocusInEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) GetCthis

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) HasAcceptableInput

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) HasAcceptableInput() bool

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) HasFrame

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) HasFrame() bool

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) HideEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) HideEvent(event qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritCloseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritHideEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionSpinBox))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionSpinBox *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritLineEdit

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritLineEdit(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QLineEdit * lineEdit()

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritSetLineEdit

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritSetLineEdit(f func(edit *QLineEdit))

void setLineEdit(class QLineEdit *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritShowEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritStepEnabled

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritStepEnabled(f func() int)

QAbstractSpinBox::StepEnabled stepEnabled()

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritTimerEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InitStyleOption

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionSpinBox_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QSpinBox. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSpinBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InputMethodQuery(arg0 int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) InterpretText

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) InterpretText()

This function interprets the text of the spin box. If the value has changed since last interpretation it will emit signals.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) IsAccelerated

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) IsAccelerated() bool

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) IsGroupSeparatorShown

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) IsGroupSeparatorShown() bool

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) IsReadOnly

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) IsReadOnly() bool

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

This function handles keyboard input.

The following keys are handled specifically:

Enter/ReturnThis will reinterpret the text and emit a signal even if the value has not changed since last time a signal was emitted.

UpThis will invoke stepBy(1) DownThis will invoke stepBy(-1) Page upThis will invoke stepBy(10) Page downThis will invoke stepBy(-10)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) KeyReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) KeyboardTracking

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) KeyboardTracking() bool

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) LineEdit

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) LineEdit() *QLineEdit

This function returns a pointer to the line edit of the spin box.

See also setLineEdit().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) MetaObject

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) MouseMoveEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) MousePressEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) MouseReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAbstractSpinBox

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) PaintEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) QAbstractSpinBox_PTR

func (ptr *QAbstractSpinBox) QAbstractSpinBox_PTR() *QAbstractSpinBox

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) ResizeEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SelectAll

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SelectAll()

Selects all the text in the spinbox except the prefix and suffix.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetAccelerated

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetAccelerated(on bool)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetAlignment

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetAlignment(flag int)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetButtonSymbols

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetButtonSymbols(bs int)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetCorrectionMode

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetCorrectionMode(cm int)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetCthis

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetFrame

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetFrame(arg0 bool)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetGroupSeparatorShown

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetGroupSeparatorShown(shown bool)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetKeyboardTracking

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetKeyboardTracking(kt bool)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetLineEdit

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetLineEdit(edit QLineEdit_ITF)

Sets the line edit of the spinbox to be lineEdit instead of the current line edit widget. lineEdit can not be 0.

QAbstractSpinBox takes ownership of the new lineEdit

If QLineEdit::validator() for the lineEdit returns 0, the internal validator of the spinbox will be set on the line edit.

See also lineEdit().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetReadOnly

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetReadOnly(r bool)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetSpecialValueText

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetSpecialValueText(txt string)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SetWrapping

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SetWrapping(w bool)

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) ShowEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) ShowEvent(event qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SizeHint

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) SpecialValueText

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) SpecialValueText() string

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) StepBy

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) StepBy(steps int)

Virtual function that is called whenever the user triggers a step. The steps parameter indicates how many steps were taken, e.g. Pressing Qt::Key_Down will trigger a call to stepBy(-1), whereas pressing Qt::Key_Prior will trigger a call to stepBy(10).

If you subclass QAbstractSpinBox you must reimplement this function. Note that this function is called even if the resulting value will be outside the bounds of minimum and maximum. It's this function's job to handle these situations.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) StepDown

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) StepDown()

Steps down by one linestep Calling this slot is analogous to calling stepBy(-1);

See also stepBy() and stepUp().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) StepEnabled

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) StepEnabled() int

Virtual function that determines whether stepping up and down is legal at any given time.

The up arrow will be painted as disabled unless (stepEnabled() & StepUpEnabled) != 0.

The default implementation will return (StepUpEnabled| StepDownEnabled) if wrapping is turned on. Else it will return StepDownEnabled if value is > minimum() or'ed with StepUpEnabled if value < maximum().

If you subclass QAbstractSpinBox you will need to reimplement this function.

See also QSpinBox::minimum(), QSpinBox::maximum(), and wrapping().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) StepUp

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) StepUp()

Steps up by one linestep Calling this slot is analogous to calling stepBy(1);

See also stepBy() and stepDown().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) Text

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) Text() string

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) TimerEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) TimerEvent(event qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) Validate

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) Validate(input string, pos int) int

This virtual function is called by the QAbstractSpinBox to determine whether input is valid. The pos parameter indicates the position in the string. Reimplemented in the various subclasses.

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) WheelEvent

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) WheelEvent(event qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

func (*QAbstractSpinBox) Wrapping

func (this *QAbstractSpinBox) Wrapping() bool

type QAbstractSpinBox_ITF

type QAbstractSpinBox_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QAbstractSpinBox_PTR() *QAbstractSpinBox
}

type QAbstractSpinBox__ButtonSymbols

type QAbstractSpinBox__ButtonSymbols = int

This enum type describes the symbols that can be displayed on the buttons in a spin box.

See also QAbstractSpinBox::buttonSymbols.

const QAbstractSpinBox__NoButtons QAbstractSpinBox__ButtonSymbols = 2

Don't display buttons.

const QAbstractSpinBox__PlusMinus QAbstractSpinBox__ButtonSymbols = 1

+ and - symbols.

const QAbstractSpinBox__UpDownArrows QAbstractSpinBox__ButtonSymbols = 0

Little arrows in the classic style.

type QAbstractSpinBox__CorrectionMode

type QAbstractSpinBox__CorrectionMode = int

This enum type describes the mode the spinbox will use to correct an Intermediate value if editing finishes.

See also correctionMode.

const QAbstractSpinBox__CorrectToNearestValue QAbstractSpinBox__CorrectionMode = 1

The spinbox will revert to the nearest valid value.

const QAbstractSpinBox__CorrectToPreviousValue QAbstractSpinBox__CorrectionMode = 0

The spinbox will revert to the last valid value.

type QAbstractSpinBox__StepEnabledFlag

type QAbstractSpinBox__StepEnabledFlag = int
const QAbstractSpinBox__StepDownEnabled QAbstractSpinBox__StepEnabledFlag = 2
const QAbstractSpinBox__StepNone QAbstractSpinBox__StepEnabledFlag = 0
const QAbstractSpinBox__StepUpEnabled QAbstractSpinBox__StepEnabledFlag = 1

type QAccessibleWidget

type QAccessibleWidget struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQAccessibleWidget

func NewQAccessibleWidget(o QWidget_ITF, r int, name string) *QAccessibleWidget

Creates a QAccessibleWidget object for widget w. role and name are optional parameters that set the object's role and name properties.

func NewQAccessibleWidgetFromPointer

func NewQAccessibleWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAccessibleWidget

func NewQAccessibleWidget__

func NewQAccessibleWidget__(o QWidget_ITF) *QAccessibleWidget

Creates a QAccessibleWidget object for widget w. role and name are optional parameters that set the object's role and name properties.

func NewQAccessibleWidget__1

func NewQAccessibleWidget__1(o QWidget_ITF, r int) *QAccessibleWidget

Creates a QAccessibleWidget object for widget w. role and name are optional parameters that set the object's role and name properties.

func (*QAccessibleWidget) ActionNames

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) ActionNames() *qtcore.QStringList

Reimplemented from QAccessibleActionInterface::actionNames().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) AddControllingSignal

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) AddControllingSignal(signal string)

Registers signal as a controlling signal.

An object is a Controller to any other object connected to a controlling signal.

func (*QAccessibleWidget) BackgroundColor

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) BackgroundColor() *qtgui.QColor

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::backgroundColor().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Child

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) Child(index int) *qtgui.QAccessibleInterface

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::child().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) ChildCount

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) ChildCount() int

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::childCount().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) DoAction

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) DoAction(actionName string)

Reimplemented from QAccessibleActionInterface::doAction().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) FocusChild

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) FocusChild() *qtgui.QAccessibleInterface

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::focusChild().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) ForegroundColor

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) ForegroundColor() *qtgui.QColor

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::foregroundColor().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAccessibleWidget) IndexOfChild

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) IndexOfChild(child qtgui.QAccessibleInterface_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::indexOfChild().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) InheritAddControllingSignal

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) InheritAddControllingSignal(f func(signal string))

void addControllingSignal(const class QString &)

func (*QAccessibleWidget) InheritParentObject

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) InheritParentObject(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QObject * parentObject()

func (*QAccessibleWidget) InheritWidget

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) InheritWidget(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QWidget * widget()

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Interface_cast

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) Interface_cast(t int) unsafe.Pointer

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::interface_cast().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) IsValid

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) IsValid() bool

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::isValid().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) KeyBindingsForAction

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) KeyBindingsForAction(actionName string) *qtcore.QStringList

Reimplemented from QAccessibleActionInterface::keyBindingsForAction().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QAccessibleWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAccessibleWidget

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Parent

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::parent().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) ParentObject

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) ParentObject() *qtcore.QObject

Returns the associated widget's parent object, which is either the parent widget, or qApp for top-level widgets.

func (*QAccessibleWidget) QAccessibleWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QAccessibleWidget) QAccessibleWidget_PTR() *QAccessibleWidget

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Rect

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) Rect() *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::rect().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Role

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) Role() int

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::role().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAccessibleWidget) State

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) State() int

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::state().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Text

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) Text(t int) string

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::text().

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Widget

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) Widget() *QWidget

Returns the associated widget.

func (*QAccessibleWidget) Window

func (this *QAccessibleWidget) Window() *qtgui.QWindow

Reimplemented from QAccessibleInterface::window().

type QAccessibleWidget_ITF

type QAccessibleWidget_ITF interface {
	QAccessibleWidget_PTR() *QAccessibleWidget
}

type QAction

type QAction struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQAction

func NewQAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Constructs an action with parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.

Note: The parent argument is optional since Qt 5.7.

func NewQActionFromPointer

func NewQActionFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAction

func NewQAction_1

func NewQAction_1(text string, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Constructs an action with parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.

Note: The parent argument is optional since Qt 5.7.

func NewQAction_1_

func NewQAction_1_(text string) *QAction

Constructs an action with parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.

Note: The parent argument is optional since Qt 5.7.

func NewQAction_2

func NewQAction_2(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Constructs an action with parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.

Note: The parent argument is optional since Qt 5.7.

func NewQAction_2_

func NewQAction_2_(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QAction

Constructs an action with parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.

Note: The parent argument is optional since Qt 5.7.

func NewQAction__

func NewQAction__() *QAction

Constructs an action with parent. If parent is an action group the action will be automatically inserted into the group.

Note: The parent argument is optional since Qt 5.7.

func QWhatsThis_CreateAction

func QWhatsThis_CreateAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

func (*QAction) ActionGroup

func (this *QAction) ActionGroup() *QActionGroup

Returns the action group for this action. If no action group manages this action then 0 will be returned.

See also QActionGroup and QAction::setActionGroup().

func (*QAction) Activate

func (this *QAction) Activate(event int)

Sends the relevant signals for ActionEvent event.

Action based widgets use this API to cause the QAction to emit signals as well as emitting their own.

func (*QAction) AutoRepeat

func (this *QAction) AutoRepeat() bool

func (*QAction) Changed

func (this *QAction) Changed()

This signal is emitted when an action has changed. If you are only interested in actions in a given widget, you can watch for QWidget::actionEvent() sent with an QEvent::ActionChanged.

Note: Notifier signal for property autoRepeat. Notifier signal for property checkable. Notifier signal for property enabled. Notifier signal for property font. Notifier signal for property icon. Notifier signal for property iconText. Notifier signal for property iconVisibleInMenu. Notifier signal for property menuRole. Notifier signal for property shortcut. Notifier signal for property shortcutContext. Notifier signal for property shortcutVisibleInContextMenu. Notifier signal for property statusTip. Notifier signal for property text. Notifier signal for property toolTip. Notifier signal for property visible. Notifier signal for property whatsThis.

See also QWidget::actionEvent().

func (*QAction) Data

func (this *QAction) Data() *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the user data as set in QAction::setData.

See also setData().

func (*QAction) Event

func (this *QAction) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QAction) Font

func (this *QAction) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QAction) GetCthis

func (this *QAction) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QAction) Hover

func (this *QAction) Hover()

This is a convenience slot that calls activate(Hover).

func (*QAction) Hovered

func (this *QAction) Hovered()

This signal is emitted when an action is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.

See also QAction::activate().

func (*QAction) Icon

func (this *QAction) Icon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QAction) IconText

func (this *QAction) IconText() string

func (*QAction) InheritEvent

func (this *QAction) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QAction) IsCheckable

func (this *QAction) IsCheckable() bool

func (*QAction) IsChecked

func (this *QAction) IsChecked() bool

func (*QAction) IsEnabled

func (this *QAction) IsEnabled() bool

func (*QAction) IsIconVisibleInMenu

func (this *QAction) IsIconVisibleInMenu() bool

func (*QAction) IsSeparator

func (this *QAction) IsSeparator() bool

Returns true if this action is a separator action; otherwise it returns false.

See also QAction::setSeparator().

func (*QAction) IsShortcutVisibleInContextMenu

func (this *QAction) IsShortcutVisibleInContextMenu() bool

func (*QAction) IsVisible

func (this *QAction) IsVisible() bool

func (*QAction) Menu

func (this *QAction) Menu() *QMenu

Returns the menu contained by this action. Actions that contain menus can be used to create menu items with submenus, or inserted into toolbars to create buttons with popup menus.

See also setMenu() and QMenu::addAction().

func (*QAction) MenuRole

func (this *QAction) MenuRole() int

func (*QAction) MetaObject

func (this *QAction) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QAction) NewFromPointer

func (*QAction) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QAction

func (*QAction) ParentWidget

func (this *QAction) ParentWidget() *QWidget

Returns the parent widget.

func (*QAction) Priority

func (this *QAction) Priority() int

func (*QAction) QAction_PTR

func (ptr *QAction) QAction_PTR() *QAction

func (*QAction) SetActionGroup

func (this *QAction) SetActionGroup(group QActionGroup_ITF)

Sets this action group to group. The action will be automatically added to the group's list of actions.

Actions within the group will be mutually exclusive.

See also QActionGroup and QAction::actionGroup().

func (*QAction) SetAutoRepeat

func (this *QAction) SetAutoRepeat(arg0 bool)

func (*QAction) SetCheckable

func (this *QAction) SetCheckable(arg0 bool)

func (*QAction) SetChecked

func (this *QAction) SetChecked(arg0 bool)

func (*QAction) SetCthis

func (this *QAction) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QAction) SetData

func (this *QAction) SetData(var_ qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Sets the action's internal data to the given userData.

See also data().

func (*QAction) SetDisabled

func (this *QAction) SetDisabled(b bool)

This is a convenience function for the enabled property, that is useful for signals--slots connections. If b is true the action is disabled; otherwise it is enabled.

func (*QAction) SetEnabled

func (this *QAction) SetEnabled(arg0 bool)

func (*QAction) SetFont

func (this *QAction) SetFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QAction) SetIcon

func (this *QAction) SetIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QAction) SetIconText

func (this *QAction) SetIconText(text string)

func (*QAction) SetIconVisibleInMenu

func (this *QAction) SetIconVisibleInMenu(visible bool)

func (*QAction) SetMenu

func (this *QAction) SetMenu(menu QMenu_ITF)

Sets the menu contained by this action to the specified menu.

See also menu().

func (*QAction) SetMenuRole

func (this *QAction) SetMenuRole(menuRole int)

func (*QAction) SetPriority

func (this *QAction) SetPriority(priority int)

func (*QAction) SetSeparator

func (this *QAction) SetSeparator(b bool)

If b is true then this action will be considered a separator.

How a separator is represented depends on the widget it is inserted into. Under most circumstances the text, submenu, and icon will be ignored for separator actions.

See also QAction::isSeparator().

func (*QAction) SetShortcut

func (this *QAction) SetShortcut(shortcut qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF)

func (*QAction) SetShortcutContext

func (this *QAction) SetShortcutContext(context int)

func (*QAction) SetShortcutVisibleInContextMenu

func (this *QAction) SetShortcutVisibleInContextMenu(show bool)

func (*QAction) SetShortcuts

func (this *QAction) SetShortcuts(arg0 int)

Sets shortcuts as the list of shortcuts that trigger the action. The first element of the list is the primary shortcut.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also shortcuts() and shortcut.

func (*QAction) SetStatusTip

func (this *QAction) SetStatusTip(statusTip string)

func (*QAction) SetText

func (this *QAction) SetText(text string)

func (*QAction) SetToolTip

func (this *QAction) SetToolTip(tip string)

func (*QAction) SetVisible

func (this *QAction) SetVisible(arg0 bool)

func (*QAction) SetWhatsThis

func (this *QAction) SetWhatsThis(what string)

func (*QAction) Shortcut

func (this *QAction) Shortcut() *qtgui.QKeySequence

Returns the primary shortcut.

Note: Getter function for property shortcut.

See also setShortcuts().

func (*QAction) ShortcutContext

func (this *QAction) ShortcutContext() int

func (*QAction) ShowStatusText

func (this *QAction) ShowStatusText(widget QWidget_ITF) bool

Updates the relevant status bar for the widget specified by sending a QStatusTipEvent to its parent widget. Returns true if an event was sent; otherwise returns false.

If a null widget is specified, the event is sent to the action's parent.

See also statusTip.

func (*QAction) ShowStatusText__

func (this *QAction) ShowStatusText__() bool

Updates the relevant status bar for the widget specified by sending a QStatusTipEvent to its parent widget. Returns true if an event was sent; otherwise returns false.

If a null widget is specified, the event is sent to the action's parent.

See also statusTip.

func (*QAction) StatusTip

func (this *QAction) StatusTip() string

func (*QAction) Text

func (this *QAction) Text() string

func (*QAction) Toggle

func (this *QAction) Toggle()

This is a convenience function for the checked property. Connect to it to change the checked state to its opposite state.

func (*QAction) Toggled

func (this *QAction) Toggled(arg0 bool)

This signal is emitted whenever a checkable action changes its isChecked() status. This can be the result of a user interaction, or because setChecked() was called.

checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.

Note: Notifier signal for property checked.

See also QAction::activate(), QAction::triggered(), and checked.

func (*QAction) ToolTip

func (this *QAction) ToolTip() string

func (*QAction) Trigger

func (this *QAction) Trigger()

This is a convenience slot that calls activate(Trigger).

func (*QAction) Triggered

func (this *QAction) Triggered(checked bool)

This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination, or when trigger() was called. Notably, it is not emitted when setChecked() or toggle() is called.

If the action is checkable, checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.

See also QAction::activate(), QAction::toggled(), and checked.

func (*QAction) Triggered__

func (this *QAction) Triggered__()

This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination, or when trigger() was called. Notably, it is not emitted when setChecked() or toggle() is called.

If the action is checkable, checked is true if the action is checked, or false if the action is unchecked.

See also QAction::activate(), QAction::toggled(), and checked.

func (*QAction) WhatsThis

func (this *QAction) WhatsThis() string

type QActionGroup

type QActionGroup struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQActionGroup

func NewQActionGroup(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QActionGroup

Constructs an action group for the parent object.

The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(false) to make the action group non-exclusive.

func NewQActionGroupFromPointer

func NewQActionGroupFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QActionGroup

func (*QActionGroup) AddAction

func (this *QActionGroup) AddAction(a QAction_ITF) *QAction

Adds the action to this group, and returns it.

Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the group as its parent, so this function is not usually used.

See also QAction::setActionGroup().

func (*QActionGroup) AddAction_1

func (this *QActionGroup) AddAction_1(text string) *QAction

Adds the action to this group, and returns it.

Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the group as its parent, so this function is not usually used.

See also QAction::setActionGroup().

func (*QActionGroup) AddAction_2

func (this *QActionGroup) AddAction_2(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QAction

Adds the action to this group, and returns it.

Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the group as its parent, so this function is not usually used.

See also QAction::setActionGroup().

func (*QActionGroup) CheckedAction

func (this *QActionGroup) CheckedAction() *QAction

Returns the currently checked action in the group, or 0 if none are checked.

func (*QActionGroup) GetCthis

func (this *QActionGroup) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QActionGroup) Hovered

func (this *QActionGroup) Hovered(arg0 QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is highlighted by the user; for example, when the user pauses with the cursor over a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.

See also QAction::activate().

func (*QActionGroup) IsEnabled

func (this *QActionGroup) IsEnabled() bool

func (*QActionGroup) IsExclusive

func (this *QActionGroup) IsExclusive() bool

func (*QActionGroup) IsVisible

func (this *QActionGroup) IsVisible() bool

func (*QActionGroup) MetaObject

func (this *QActionGroup) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QActionGroup) NewFromPointer

func (*QActionGroup) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QActionGroup

func (*QActionGroup) QActionGroup_PTR

func (ptr *QActionGroup) QActionGroup_PTR() *QActionGroup

func (*QActionGroup) RemoveAction

func (this *QActionGroup) RemoveAction(a QAction_ITF)

Removes the action from this group. The action will have no parent as a result.

See also QAction::setActionGroup().

func (*QActionGroup) SetCthis

func (this *QActionGroup) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QActionGroup) SetDisabled

func (this *QActionGroup) SetDisabled(b bool)

This is a convenience function for the enabled property, that is useful for signals--slots connections. If b is true the action group is disabled; otherwise it is enabled.

func (*QActionGroup) SetEnabled

func (this *QActionGroup) SetEnabled(arg0 bool)

func (*QActionGroup) SetExclusive

func (this *QActionGroup) SetExclusive(arg0 bool)

func (*QActionGroup) SetVisible

func (this *QActionGroup) SetVisible(arg0 bool)

func (*QActionGroup) Triggered

func (this *QActionGroup) Triggered(arg0 QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the given action in the action group is activated by the user; for example, when the user clicks a menu option, toolbar button, or presses an action's shortcut key combination.

Connect to this signal for command actions.

See also QAction::activate().

type QActionGroup_ITF

type QActionGroup_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QActionGroup_PTR() *QActionGroup
}

type QAction_ITF

type QAction_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QAction_PTR() *QAction
}

type QAction__ActionEvent

type QAction__ActionEvent = int

This enum type is used when calling QAction::activate()

const QAction__Hover QAction__ActionEvent = 1

this will cause the QAction::hovered() signal to be emitted.

const QAction__Trigger QAction__ActionEvent = 0

this will cause the QAction::triggered() signal to be emitted.

type QAction__MenuRole

type QAction__MenuRole = int

This enum describes how an action should be moved into the application menu on macOS.

Setting this value only has effect on items that are in the immediate menus of the menubar, not the submenus of those menus. For example, if you have File menu in your menubar and the File menu has a submenu, setting the MenuRole for the actions in that submenu have no effect. They will never be moved.

const QAction__AboutQtRole QAction__MenuRole = 3

This action handles the "About Qt" menu item.

const QAction__AboutRole QAction__MenuRole = 4

This action should be placed where the "About" menu item is in the application menu. The text of the menu item will be set to "About <application name>". The application name is fetched from the Info.plist file in the application's bundle (See Qt for macOS - Deployment).

const QAction__ApplicationSpecificRole QAction__MenuRole = 2

This action should be put in the application menu with an application specific role

const QAction__NoRole QAction__MenuRole = 0

This action should not be put into the application menu

const QAction__PreferencesRole QAction__MenuRole = 5

This action should be placed where the "Preferences..." menu item is in the application menu.

const QAction__QuitRole QAction__MenuRole = 6

This action should be placed where the Quit menu item is in the application menu.

const QAction__TextHeuristicRole QAction__MenuRole = 1

This action should be put in the application menu based on the action's text as described in the QMenuBar documentation.

type QAction__Priority

type QAction__Priority = int

This enum defines priorities for actions in user interface.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.6.

See also priority.

const QAction__HighPriority QAction__Priority = 256
const QAction__LowPriority QAction__Priority = 0

The action should not be prioritized in the user interface.

const QAction__NormalPriority QAction__Priority = 128

type QApplication

type QApplication struct {
	*qtgui.QGuiApplication
}

func NewQApplication

func NewQApplication(argc int, argv []string, arg2 int) *QApplication

Initializes the window system and constructs an application object with argc command line arguments in argv.

Warning: The data referred to by argc and argv must stay valid for the entire lifetime of the QApplication object. In addition, argc must be greater than zero and argv must contain at least one valid character string.

The global qApp pointer refers to this application object. Only one application object should be created.

This application object must be constructed before any paint devices (including widgets, pixmaps, bitmaps etc.).

Note: argc and argv might be changed as Qt removes command line arguments that it recognizes.

All Qt programs automatically support the following command line options:

-style= style, sets the application GUI style. Possible values depend on your system configuration. If you compiled Qt with additional styles or have additional styles as plugins these will be available to the -style command line option. You can also set the style for all Qt applications by setting the QT_STYLE_OVERRIDE environment variable. -style style, is the same as listed above. -stylesheet= stylesheet, sets the application styleSheet. The value must be a path to a file that contains the Style Sheet.Note: Relative URLs in the Style Sheet file are relative to the Style Sheet file's path. -stylesheet stylesheet, is the same as listed above. -widgetcount, prints debug message at the end about number of widgets left undestroyed and maximum number of widgets existed at the same time -reverse, sets the application's layout direction to Qt::RightToLeft -qmljsdebugger=, activates the QML/JS debugger with a specified port. The value must be of format port:1234[,block], where block is optional and will make the application wait until a debugger connects to it.

See also QCoreApplication::arguments().

func NewQApplicationFromPointer

func NewQApplicationFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QApplication

func NewQApplication__

func NewQApplication__(argc int, argv []string) *QApplication

Initializes the window system and constructs an application object with argc command line arguments in argv.

Warning: The data referred to by argc and argv must stay valid for the entire lifetime of the QApplication object. In addition, argc must be greater than zero and argv must contain at least one valid character string.

The global qApp pointer refers to this application object. Only one application object should be created.

This application object must be constructed before any paint devices (including widgets, pixmaps, bitmaps etc.).

Note: argc and argv might be changed as Qt removes command line arguments that it recognizes.

All Qt programs automatically support the following command line options:

-style= style, sets the application GUI style. Possible values depend on your system configuration. If you compiled Qt with additional styles or have additional styles as plugins these will be available to the -style command line option. You can also set the style for all Qt applications by setting the QT_STYLE_OVERRIDE environment variable. -style style, is the same as listed above. -stylesheet= stylesheet, sets the application styleSheet. The value must be a path to a file that contains the Style Sheet.Note: Relative URLs in the Style Sheet file are relative to the Style Sheet file's path. -stylesheet stylesheet, is the same as listed above. -widgetcount, prints debug message at the end about number of widgets left undestroyed and maximum number of widgets existed at the same time -reverse, sets the application's layout direction to Qt::RightToLeft -qmljsdebugger=, activates the QML/JS debugger with a specified port. The value must be of format port:1234[,block], where block is optional and will make the application wait until a debugger connects to it.

See also QCoreApplication::arguments().

func (*QApplication) AboutQt

func (this *QApplication) AboutQt()

Displays a simple message box about Qt. The message includes the version number of Qt being used by the application.

This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application, as shown in the Menus example.

This function is a convenience slot for QMessageBox::aboutQt().

func (*QApplication) ActiveModalWidget

func (this *QApplication) ActiveModalWidget() *QWidget

Returns the active modal widget.

A modal widget is a special top-level widget which is a subclass of QDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as true. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program.

Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active modal widget at the top of the stack.

See also activePopupWidget() and topLevelWidgets().

func (*QApplication) ActivePopupWidget

func (this *QApplication) ActivePopupWidget() *QWidget

Returns the active popup widget.

A popup widget is a special top-level widget that sets the Qt::WType_Popup widget flag, e.g. the QMenu widget. When the application opens a popup widget, all events are sent to the popup. Normal widgets and modal widgets cannot be accessed before the popup widget is closed.

Only other popup widgets may be opened when a popup widget is shown. The popup widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active popup widget at the top of the stack.

See also activeModalWidget() and topLevelWidgets().

func (*QApplication) ActiveWindow

func (this *QApplication) ActiveWindow() *QWidget

Returns the application top-level window that has the keyboard input focus, or 0 if no application window has the focus. There might be an activeWindow() even if there is no focusWidget(), for example if no widget in that window accepts key events.

See also setActiveWindow(), QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::hasFocus(), and focusWidget().

func (*QApplication) Alert

func (this *QApplication) Alert(widget QWidget_ITF, duration int)

Causes an alert to be shown for widget if the window is not the active window. The alert is shown for msec miliseconds. If msec is zero (the default), then the alert is shown indefinitely until the window becomes active again.

Currently this function does nothing on Qt for Embedded Linux.

On macOS, this works more at the application level and will cause the application icon to bounce in the dock.

On Windows, this causes the window's taskbar entry to flash for a time. If msec is zero, the flashing will stop and the taskbar entry will turn a different color (currently orange).

On X11, this will cause the window to be marked as "demands attention", the window must not be hidden (i.e. not have hide() called on it, but be visible in some sort of way) in order for this to work.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QApplication) Alert__

func (this *QApplication) Alert__(widget QWidget_ITF)

Causes an alert to be shown for widget if the window is not the active window. The alert is shown for msec miliseconds. If msec is zero (the default), then the alert is shown indefinitely until the window becomes active again.

Currently this function does nothing on Qt for Embedded Linux.

On macOS, this works more at the application level and will cause the application icon to bounce in the dock.

On Windows, this causes the window's taskbar entry to flash for a time. If msec is zero, the flashing will stop and the taskbar entry will turn a different color (currently orange).

On X11, this will cause the window to be marked as "demands attention", the window must not be hidden (i.e. not have hide() called on it, but be visible in some sort of way) in order for this to work.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QApplication) AllWidgets

func (this *QApplication) AllWidgets() *QWidgetList

Returns a list of all the widgets in the application.

The list is empty (QList::isEmpty()) if there are no widgets.

Note: Some of the widgets may be hidden.

Example:

void updateAllWidgets()
{
    foreach (QWidget *widget, QApplication::allWidgets())
        widget->update();
}

See also topLevelWidgets() and QWidget::isVisible().

func (*QApplication) AutoSipEnabled

func (this *QApplication) AutoSipEnabled() bool

func (*QApplication) Beep

func (this *QApplication) Beep()

Sounds the bell, using the default volume and sound. The function is not available in Qt for Embedded Linux.

func (*QApplication) CloseAllWindows

func (this *QApplication) CloseAllWindows()

Closes all top-level windows.

This function is particularly useful for applications with many top-level windows. It could, for example, be connected to a Exit entry in the File menu:

const QIcon exitIcon = QIcon::fromTheme("application-exit");
QAction *exitAct = fileMenu->addAction(exitIcon, tr("E&xit"), qApp, &QApplication::closeAllWindows);
exitAct->setShortcuts(QKeySequence::Quit);
exitAct->setStatusTip(tr("Exit the application"));
fileMenu->addAction(exitAct);

The windows are closed in random order, until one window does not accept the close event. The application quits when the last window was successfully closed; this can be turned off by setting quitOnLastWindowClosed to false.

See also quitOnLastWindowClosed, lastWindowClosed(), QWidget::close(), QWidget::closeEvent(), lastWindowClosed(), QCoreApplication::quit(), topLevelWidgets(), and QWidget::isWindow().

func (*QApplication) ColorSpec

func (this *QApplication) ColorSpec() int

func (*QApplication) CursorFlashTime

func (this *QApplication) CursorFlashTime() int

func (*QApplication) Desktop

func (this *QApplication) Desktop() *QDesktopWidget

Returns the desktop widget (also called the root window).

The desktop may be composed of multiple screens, so it would be incorrect, for example, to attempt to center some widget in the desktop's geometry. QDesktopWidget has various functions for obtaining useful geometries upon the desktop, such as QDesktopWidget::screenGeometry() and QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry().

On X11, it is also possible to draw on the desktop.

func (*QApplication) DoubleClickInterval

func (this *QApplication) DoubleClickInterval() int

func (*QApplication) Event

func (this *QApplication) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

func (*QApplication) Exec

func (this *QApplication) Exec() int

Enters the main event loop and waits until exit() is called, then returns the value that was set to exit() (which is 0 if exit() is called via quit()).

It is necessary to call this function to start event handling. The main event loop receives events from the window system and dispatches these to the application widgets.

Generally, no user interaction can take place before calling exec(). As a special case, modal widgets like QMessageBox can be used before calling exec(), because modal widgets call exec() to start a local event loop.

To make your application perform idle processing, i.e., executing a special function whenever there are no pending events, use a QTimer with 0 timeout. More advanced idle processing schemes can be achieved using processEvents().

We recommend that you connect clean-up code to the aboutToQuit() signal, instead of putting it in your application's main() function. This is because, on some platforms the QApplication::exec() call may not return. For example, on the Windows platform, when the user logs off, the system terminates the process after Qt closes all top-level windows. Hence, there is no guarantee that the application will have time to exit its event loop and execute code at the end of the main() function, after the QApplication::exec() call.

See also quitOnLastWindowClosed, QCoreApplication::quit(), QCoreApplication::exit(), QCoreApplication::processEvents(), and QCoreApplication::exec().

func (*QApplication) FocusChanged

func (this *QApplication) FocusChanged(old QWidget_ITF, now QWidget_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the widget that has keyboard focus changed from old to now, i.e., because the user pressed the tab-key, clicked into a widget or changed the active window. Both old and now can be the null-pointer.

The signal is emitted after both widget have been notified about the change through QFocusEvent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::clearFocus(), and Qt::FocusReason.

func (*QApplication) FocusWidget

func (this *QApplication) FocusWidget() *QWidget

Returns the application widget that has the keyboard input focus, or 0 if no widget in this application has the focus.

See also QWidget::setFocus(), QWidget::hasFocus(), activeWindow(), and focusChanged().

func (*QApplication) Font

func (this *QApplication) Font() *qtgui.QFont

Returns the default application font.

See also setFont(), fontMetrics(), and QWidget::font().

func (*QApplication) FontMetrics

func (this *QApplication) FontMetrics() *qtgui.QFontMetrics

Returns display (screen) font metrics for the application font.

See also font(), setFont(), QWidget::fontMetrics(), and QPainter::fontMetrics().

func (*QApplication) Font_1

func (this *QApplication) Font_1(arg0 QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QFont

Returns the default application font.

See also setFont(), fontMetrics(), and QWidget::font().

func (*QApplication) Font_2

func (this *QApplication) Font_2(className string) *qtgui.QFont

Returns the default application font.

See also setFont(), fontMetrics(), and QWidget::font().

func (*QApplication) GetCthis

func (this *QApplication) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QApplication) GlobalStrut

func (this *QApplication) GlobalStrut() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QApplication) InheritEvent

func (this *QApplication) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QApplication) IsEffectEnabled

func (this *QApplication) IsEffectEnabled(arg0 int) bool

Returns true if effect is enabled; otherwise returns false.

By default, Qt will try to use the desktop settings. To prevent this, call setDesktopSettingsAware(false).

Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth.

See also setEffectEnabled() and Qt::UIEffect.

func (*QApplication) KeyboardInputInterval

func (this *QApplication) KeyboardInputInterval() int

func (*QApplication) MetaObject

func (this *QApplication) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QApplication) NewFromPointer

func (*QApplication) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QApplication

func (*QApplication) Notify

func (this *QApplication) Notify(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

func (*QApplication) Palette

func (this *QApplication) Palette(arg0 QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QPalette

This is an overloaded function.

If a widget is passed, the default palette for the widget's class is returned. This may or may not be the application palette. In most cases there is no special palette for certain types of widgets, but one notable exception is the popup menu under Windows, if the user has defined a special background color for menus in the display settings.

See also setPalette() and QWidget::palette().

func (*QApplication) Palette_1

func (this *QApplication) Palette_1(className string) *qtgui.QPalette

This is an overloaded function.

If a widget is passed, the default palette for the widget's class is returned. This may or may not be the application palette. In most cases there is no special palette for certain types of widgets, but one notable exception is the popup menu under Windows, if the user has defined a special background color for menus in the display settings.

See also setPalette() and QWidget::palette().

func (*QApplication) QApplication_PTR

func (ptr *QApplication) QApplication_PTR() *QApplication

func (*QApplication) SetActiveWindow

func (this *QApplication) SetActiveWindow(act QWidget_ITF)

Sets the active window to the active widget in response to a system event. The function is called from the platform specific event handlers.

Warning: This function does not set the keyboard focus to the active widget. Call QWidget::activateWindow() instead.

It sets the activeWindow() and focusWidget() attributes and sends proper WindowActivate/WindowDeactivate and FocusIn/FocusOut events to all appropriate widgets. The window will then be painted in active state (e.g. cursors in line edits will blink), and it will have tool tips enabled.

See also activeWindow() and QWidget::activateWindow().

func (*QApplication) SetAutoSipEnabled

func (this *QApplication) SetAutoSipEnabled(enabled bool)

func (*QApplication) SetColorSpec

func (this *QApplication) SetColorSpec(arg0 int)

func (*QApplication) SetCthis

func (this *QApplication) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QApplication) SetCursorFlashTime

func (this *QApplication) SetCursorFlashTime(arg0 int)

func (*QApplication) SetDoubleClickInterval

func (this *QApplication) SetDoubleClickInterval(arg0 int)

func (*QApplication) SetEffectEnabled

func (this *QApplication) SetEffectEnabled(arg0 int, enable bool)

Enables the UI effect effect if enable is true, otherwise the effect will not be used.

Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth.

See also isEffectEnabled(), Qt::UIEffect, and setDesktopSettingsAware().

func (*QApplication) SetEffectEnabled__

func (this *QApplication) SetEffectEnabled__(arg0 int)

Enables the UI effect effect if enable is true, otherwise the effect will not be used.

Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth.

See also isEffectEnabled(), Qt::UIEffect, and setDesktopSettingsAware().

func (*QApplication) SetFont

func (this *QApplication) SetFont(arg0 qtgui.QFont_ITF, className string)

Changes the default application font to font. If className is passed, the change applies only to classes that inherit className (as reported by QObject::inherits()).

On application start-up, the default font depends on the window system. It can vary depending on both the window system version and the locale. This function lets you override the default font; but overriding may be a bad idea because, for example, some locales need extra large fonts to support their special characters.

Warning: Do not use this function in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. The font of an application can be customized using the "font" style sheet property. To set a bold font for all QPushButtons, set the application styleSheet() as "QPushButton { font: bold }"

See also font(), fontMetrics(), and QWidget::setFont().

func (*QApplication) SetFont__

func (this *QApplication) SetFont__(arg0 qtgui.QFont_ITF)

Changes the default application font to font. If className is passed, the change applies only to classes that inherit className (as reported by QObject::inherits()).

On application start-up, the default font depends on the window system. It can vary depending on both the window system version and the locale. This function lets you override the default font; but overriding may be a bad idea because, for example, some locales need extra large fonts to support their special characters.

Warning: Do not use this function in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. The font of an application can be customized using the "font" style sheet property. To set a bold font for all QPushButtons, set the application styleSheet() as "QPushButton { font: bold }"

See also font(), fontMetrics(), and QWidget::setFont().

func (*QApplication) SetGlobalStrut

func (this *QApplication) SetGlobalStrut(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QApplication) SetKeyboardInputInterval

func (this *QApplication) SetKeyboardInputInterval(arg0 int)

func (*QApplication) SetPalette

func (this *QApplication) SetPalette(arg0 qtgui.QPalette_ITF, className string)

Changes the default application palette to palette.

If className is passed, the change applies only to widgets that inherit className (as reported by QObject::inherits()). If className is left 0, the change affects all widgets, thus overriding any previously set class specific palettes.

The palette may be changed according to the current GUI style in QStyle::polish().

Warning: Do not use this function in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. When using style sheets, the palette of a widget can be customized using the "color", "background-color", "selection-color", "selection-background-color" and "alternate-background-color".

Note: Some styles do not use the palette for all drawing, for instance, if they make use of native theme engines. This is the case for the Windows Vista and macOS styles.

See also QWidget::setPalette(), palette(), and QStyle::polish().

func (*QApplication) SetPalette__

func (this *QApplication) SetPalette__(arg0 qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

Changes the default application palette to palette.

If className is passed, the change applies only to widgets that inherit className (as reported by QObject::inherits()). If className is left 0, the change affects all widgets, thus overriding any previously set class specific palettes.

The palette may be changed according to the current GUI style in QStyle::polish().

Warning: Do not use this function in conjunction with Qt Style Sheets. When using style sheets, the palette of a widget can be customized using the "color", "background-color", "selection-color", "selection-background-color" and "alternate-background-color".

Note: Some styles do not use the palette for all drawing, for instance, if they make use of native theme engines. This is the case for the Windows Vista and macOS styles.

See also QWidget::setPalette(), palette(), and QStyle::polish().

func (*QApplication) SetStartDragDistance

func (this *QApplication) SetStartDragDistance(l int)

func (*QApplication) SetStartDragTime

func (this *QApplication) SetStartDragTime(ms int)

func (*QApplication) SetStyle

func (this *QApplication) SetStyle(arg0 QStyle_ITF)

Sets the application's GUI style to style. Ownership of the style object is transferred to QApplication, so QApplication will delete the style object on application exit or when a new style is set and the old style is still the parent of the application object.

Example usage:

QApplication::setStyle(QStyleFactory::create("Fusion"));

When switching application styles, the color palette is set back to the initial colors or the system defaults. This is necessary since certain styles have to adapt the color palette to be fully style-guide compliant.

Setting the style before a palette has been set, i.e., before creating QApplication, will cause the application to use QStyle::standardPalette() for the palette.

Warning: Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.

See also style(), QStyle, setPalette(), and desktopSettingsAware().

func (*QApplication) SetStyleSheet

func (this *QApplication) SetStyleSheet(sheet string)

func (*QApplication) SetStyle_1

func (this *QApplication) SetStyle_1(arg0 string) *QStyle

Sets the application's GUI style to style. Ownership of the style object is transferred to QApplication, so QApplication will delete the style object on application exit or when a new style is set and the old style is still the parent of the application object.

Example usage:

QApplication::setStyle(QStyleFactory::create("Fusion"));

When switching application styles, the color palette is set back to the initial colors or the system defaults. This is necessary since certain styles have to adapt the color palette to be fully style-guide compliant.

Setting the style before a palette has been set, i.e., before creating QApplication, will cause the application to use QStyle::standardPalette() for the palette.

Warning: Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.

See also style(), QStyle, setPalette(), and desktopSettingsAware().

func (*QApplication) SetWheelScrollLines

func (this *QApplication) SetWheelScrollLines(arg0 int)

func (*QApplication) SetWindowIcon

func (this *QApplication) SetWindowIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QApplication) StartDragDistance

func (this *QApplication) StartDragDistance() int

func (*QApplication) StartDragTime

func (this *QApplication) StartDragTime() int

func (*QApplication) Style

func (this *QApplication) Style() *QStyle

Returns the application's style object.

See also setStyle() and QStyle.

func (*QApplication) StyleSheet

func (this *QApplication) StyleSheet() string

func (*QApplication) TopLevelAt

func (this *QApplication) TopLevelAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the top-level widget at the given point; returns 0 if there is no such widget.

func (*QApplication) TopLevelAt_1

func (this *QApplication) TopLevelAt_1(x int, y int) *QWidget

Returns the top-level widget at the given point; returns 0 if there is no such widget.

func (*QApplication) TopLevelWidgets

func (this *QApplication) TopLevelWidgets() *QWidgetList

Returns a list of the top-level widgets (windows) in the application.

Note: Some of the top-level widgets may be hidden, for example a tooltip if no tooltip is currently shown.

Example:

void showAllHiddenTopLevelWidgets()
{
    foreach (QWidget *widget, QApplication::topLevelWidgets()) {
        if (widget->isHidden())
            widget->show();
    }
}

See also allWidgets(), QWidget::isWindow(), and QWidget::isHidden().

func (*QApplication) WheelScrollLines

func (this *QApplication) WheelScrollLines() int

func (*QApplication) WidgetAt

func (this *QApplication) WidgetAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the widget at global screen position point, or 0 if there is no Qt widget there.

This function can be slow.

See also QCursor::pos(), QWidget::grabMouse(), and QWidget::grabKeyboard().

func (*QApplication) WidgetAt_1

func (this *QApplication) WidgetAt_1(x int, y int) *QWidget

Returns the widget at global screen position point, or 0 if there is no Qt widget there.

This function can be slow.

See also QCursor::pos(), QWidget::grabMouse(), and QWidget::grabKeyboard().

func (*QApplication) WindowIcon

func (this *QApplication) WindowIcon() *qtgui.QIcon

type QApplication_ITF

type QApplication_ITF interface {
	qtgui.QGuiApplication_ITF
	QApplication_PTR() *QApplication
}

type QApplication__ColorSpec

type QApplication__ColorSpec = int
const QApplication__CustomColor QApplication__ColorSpec = 1
const QApplication__ManyColor QApplication__ColorSpec = 2
const QApplication__NormalColor QApplication__ColorSpec = 0

type QBoxLayout

type QBoxLayout struct {
	*QLayout
}

func NewQBoxLayout

func NewQBoxLayout(arg0 int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QBoxLayout

Constructs a new QBoxLayout with direction dir and parent widget parent.

See also direction().

func NewQBoxLayoutFromPointer

func NewQBoxLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QBoxLayout

func NewQBoxLayout__

func NewQBoxLayout__(arg0 int) *QBoxLayout

Constructs a new QBoxLayout with direction dir and parent widget parent.

See also direction().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddItem

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddItem(arg0 QLayoutItem_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayout::addItem().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddLayout

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddLayout(layout QLayout_ITF, stretch int)

Adds layout to the end of the box, with serial stretch factor stretch.

See also insertLayout(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddLayout__

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddLayout__(layout QLayout_ITF)

Adds layout to the end of the box, with serial stretch factor stretch.

See also insertLayout(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddSpacerItem

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddSpacerItem(spacerItem QSpacerItem_ITF)

Adds spacerItem to the end of this box layout.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also addSpacing() and addStretch().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddSpacing

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddSpacing(size int)

Adds a non-stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) with size size to the end of this box layout. QBoxLayout provides default margin and spacing. This function adds additional space.

See also insertSpacing(), addItem(), and QSpacerItem.

func (*QBoxLayout) AddStretch

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddStretch(stretch int)

Adds a stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) with zero minimum size and stretch factor stretch to the end of this box layout.

See also insertStretch(), addItem(), and QSpacerItem.

func (*QBoxLayout) AddStretch__

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddStretch__()

Adds a stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) with zero minimum size and stretch factor stretch to the end of this box layout.

See also insertStretch(), addItem(), and QSpacerItem.

func (*QBoxLayout) AddStrut

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddStrut(arg0 int)

Limits the perpendicular dimension of the box (e.g. height if the box is LeftToRight) to a minimum of size. Other constraints may increase the limit.

See also addItem().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddWidget

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddWidget(arg0 QWidget_ITF, stretch int, alignment int)

Adds widget to the end of this box layout, with a stretch factor of stretch and alignment alignment.

The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.

If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

See also insertWidget(), addItem(), addLayout(), addStretch(), addSpacing(), and addStrut().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddWidget__

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddWidget__(arg0 QWidget_ITF)

Adds widget to the end of this box layout, with a stretch factor of stretch and alignment alignment.

The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.

If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

See also insertWidget(), addItem(), addLayout(), addStretch(), addSpacing(), and addStrut().

func (*QBoxLayout) AddWidget__1

func (this *QBoxLayout) AddWidget__1(arg0 QWidget_ITF, stretch int)

Adds widget to the end of this box layout, with a stretch factor of stretch and alignment alignment.

The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.

If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

See also insertWidget(), addItem(), addLayout(), addStretch(), addSpacing(), and addStrut().

func (*QBoxLayout) Count

func (this *QBoxLayout) Count() int

Reimplemented from QLayout::count().

func (*QBoxLayout) Direction

func (this *QBoxLayout) Direction() int

Returns the direction of the box. addWidget() and addSpacing() work in this direction; the stretch stretches in this direction.

See also setDirection(), QBoxLayout::Direction, addWidget(), and addSpacing().

func (*QBoxLayout) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QBoxLayout) ExpandingDirections() int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().

func (*QBoxLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QBoxLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QBoxLayout) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QBoxLayout) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QBoxLayout) HeightForWidth

func (this *QBoxLayout) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertItem

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertItem(index int, arg1 QLayoutItem_ITF)

Inserts item into this box layout at position index. If index is negative, the item is added at the end.

See also addItem(), insertWidget(), insertLayout(), insertStretch(), and insertSpacing().

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertLayout

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertLayout(index int, layout QLayout_ITF, stretch int)

Inserts layout at position index, with stretch factor stretch. If index is negative, the layout is added at the end.

layout becomes a child of the box layout.

See also addLayout() and insertItem().

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertLayout__

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertLayout__(index int, layout QLayout_ITF)

Inserts layout at position index, with stretch factor stretch. If index is negative, the layout is added at the end.

layout becomes a child of the box layout.

See also addLayout() and insertItem().

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertSpacerItem

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertSpacerItem(index int, spacerItem QSpacerItem_ITF)

Inserts spacerItem at position index, with zero minimum size and stretch factor. If index is negative the space is added at the end.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also addSpacerItem(), insertStretch(), and insertSpacing().

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertSpacing

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertSpacing(index int, size int)

Inserts a non-stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) at position index, with size size. If index is negative the space is added at the end.

The box layout has default margin and spacing. This function adds additional space.

See also addSpacing(), insertItem(), and QSpacerItem.

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertStretch

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertStretch(index int, stretch int)

Inserts a stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) at position index, with zero minimum size and stretch factor stretch. If index is negative the space is added at the end.

See also addStretch(), insertItem(), and QSpacerItem.

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertStretch__

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertStretch__(index int)

Inserts a stretchable space (a QSpacerItem) at position index, with zero minimum size and stretch factor stretch. If index is negative the space is added at the end.

See also addStretch(), insertItem(), and QSpacerItem.

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertWidget

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertWidget(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, stretch int, alignment int)

Inserts widget at position index, with stretch factor stretch and alignment alignment. If index is negative, the widget is added at the end.

The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.

If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

See also addWidget() and insertItem().

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertWidget__

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertWidget__(index int, widget QWidget_ITF)

Inserts widget at position index, with stretch factor stretch and alignment alignment. If index is negative, the widget is added at the end.

The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.

If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

See also addWidget() and insertItem().

func (*QBoxLayout) InsertWidget__1

func (this *QBoxLayout) InsertWidget__1(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, stretch int)

Inserts widget at position index, with stretch factor stretch and alignment alignment. If index is negative, the widget is added at the end.

The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the QBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and widgets in this QBoxLayout. Widgets and boxes with higher stretch factors grow more.

If the stretch factor is 0 and nothing else in the QBoxLayout has a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed according to the QWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's involved.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

See also addWidget() and insertItem().

func (*QBoxLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QBoxLayout) Invalidate()

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().

Resets cached information.

func (*QBoxLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QBoxLayout) ItemAt(arg0 int) *QLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QLayout::itemAt().

func (*QBoxLayout) MaximumSize

func (this *QBoxLayout) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().

func (*QBoxLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QBoxLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QBoxLayout) MinimumHeightForWidth

func (this *QBoxLayout) MinimumHeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumHeightForWidth().

func (*QBoxLayout) MinimumSize

func (this *QBoxLayout) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().

func (*QBoxLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QBoxLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QBoxLayout

func (*QBoxLayout) QBoxLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QBoxLayout) QBoxLayout_PTR() *QBoxLayout

func (*QBoxLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QBoxLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QBoxLayout) SetDirection

func (this *QBoxLayout) SetDirection(arg0 int)

Sets the direction of this layout to direction.

See also direction().

func (*QBoxLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QBoxLayout) SetGeometry(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().

func (*QBoxLayout) SetSpacing

func (this *QBoxLayout) SetSpacing(spacing int)

Reimplements QLayout::setSpacing(). Sets the spacing property to spacing.

See also QLayout::setSpacing() and spacing().

func (*QBoxLayout) SetStretch

func (this *QBoxLayout) SetStretch(index int, stretch int)

Sets the stretch factor at position index. to stretch.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also stretch().

func (*QBoxLayout) SetStretchFactor

func (this *QBoxLayout) SetStretchFactor(w QWidget_ITF, stretch int) bool

Sets the stretch factor for widget to stretch and returns true if widget is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.

See also setAlignment().

func (*QBoxLayout) SetStretchFactor_1

func (this *QBoxLayout) SetStretchFactor_1(l QLayout_ITF, stretch int) bool

Sets the stretch factor for widget to stretch and returns true if widget is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.

See also setAlignment().

func (*QBoxLayout) SizeHint

func (this *QBoxLayout) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QBoxLayout) Spacing

func (this *QBoxLayout) Spacing() int

Reimplements QLayout::spacing(). If the spacing property is valid, that value is returned. Otherwise, a value for the spacing property is computed and returned. Since layout spacing in a widget is style dependent, if the parent is a widget, it queries the style for the (horizontal or vertical) spacing of the layout. Otherwise, the parent is a layout, and it queries the parent layout for the spacing().

See also QLayout::spacing() and setSpacing().

func (*QBoxLayout) Stretch

func (this *QBoxLayout) Stretch(index int) int

Returns the stretch factor at position index.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also setStretch().

func (*QBoxLayout) TakeAt

func (this *QBoxLayout) TakeAt(arg0 int) *QLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().

type QBoxLayout_ITF

type QBoxLayout_ITF interface {
	QLayout_ITF
	QBoxLayout_PTR() *QBoxLayout
}

type QBoxLayout__Direction

type QBoxLayout__Direction = int

This type is used to determine the direction of a box layout.

const QBoxLayout__BottomToTop QBoxLayout__Direction = 3

Vertical from bottom to top.

const QBoxLayout__Down QBoxLayout__Direction = 2
const QBoxLayout__LeftToRight QBoxLayout__Direction = 0

Horizontal from left to right.

const QBoxLayout__RightToLeft QBoxLayout__Direction = 1

Horizontal from right to left.

const QBoxLayout__TopToBottom QBoxLayout__Direction = 2

Vertical from top to bottom.

const QBoxLayout__Up QBoxLayout__Direction = 3

type QButtonGroup

type QButtonGroup struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQButtonGroup

func NewQButtonGroup(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QButtonGroup

Constructs a new, empty button group with the given parent.

See also addButton() and setExclusive().

func NewQButtonGroupFromPointer

func NewQButtonGroupFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QButtonGroup

func NewQButtonGroup__

func NewQButtonGroup__() *QButtonGroup

Constructs a new, empty button group with the given parent.

See also addButton() and setExclusive().

func (*QButtonGroup) AddButton

func (this *QButtonGroup) AddButton(arg0 QAbstractButton_ITF, id int)

Adds the given button to the button group. If id is -1, an id will be assigned to the button. Automatically assigned ids are guaranteed to be negative, starting with -2. If you are assigning your own ids, use positive values to avoid conflicts.

See also removeButton() and buttons().

func (*QButtonGroup) AddButton__

func (this *QButtonGroup) AddButton__(arg0 QAbstractButton_ITF)

Adds the given button to the button group. If id is -1, an id will be assigned to the button. Automatically assigned ids are guaranteed to be negative, starting with -2. If you are assigning your own ids, use positive values to avoid conflicts.

See also removeButton() and buttons().

func (*QButtonGroup) Button

func (this *QButtonGroup) Button(id int) *QAbstractButton

Returns the button with the specified id, or 0 if no such button exists.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonClicked

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonClicked(arg0 QAbstractButton_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the given button is clicked. A button is clicked when it is first pressed and then released, when its shortcut key is typed, or when QAbstractButton::click() or QAbstractButton::animateClick() is programmatically called.

Note: Signal buttonClicked is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonClicked),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button){ \/* ... *\/ });

See also checkedButton() and QAbstractButton::clicked().

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonClicked_1

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonClicked_1(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted when the given button is clicked. A button is clicked when it is first pressed and then released, when its shortcut key is typed, or when QAbstractButton::click() or QAbstractButton::animateClick() is programmatically called.

Note: Signal buttonClicked is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonClicked),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button){ \/* ... *\/ });

See also checkedButton() and QAbstractButton::clicked().

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonPressed

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonPressed(arg0 QAbstractButton_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the given button is pressed down.

Note: Signal buttonPressed is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonPressed),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also QAbstractButton::pressed().

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonPressed_1

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonPressed_1(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted when the given button is pressed down.

Note: Signal buttonPressed is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonPressed),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also QAbstractButton::pressed().

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonReleased

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonReleased(arg0 QAbstractButton_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the given button is released.

Note: Signal buttonReleased is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonReleased),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also QAbstractButton::released().

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonReleased_1

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonReleased_1(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted when the given button is released.

Note: Signal buttonReleased is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonReleased),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also QAbstractButton::released().

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonToggled

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonToggled(arg0 QAbstractButton_ITF, arg1 bool)

This signal is emitted when the given button is toggled. checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.

Note: Signal buttonToggled is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *, bool>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonToggled),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button, bool checked){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also QAbstractButton::toggled().

func (*QButtonGroup) ButtonToggled_1

func (this *QButtonGroup) ButtonToggled_1(arg0 int, arg1 bool)

This signal is emitted when the given button is toggled. checked is true if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked.

Note: Signal buttonToggled is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(buttonGroup, QOverload<QAbstractButton *, bool>::of(&QButtonGroup::buttonToggled),
    [=](QAbstractButton *button, bool checked){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also QAbstractButton::toggled().

func (*QButtonGroup) CheckedButton

func (this *QButtonGroup) CheckedButton() *QAbstractButton

Returns the button group's checked button, or 0 if no buttons are checked.

See also buttonClicked().

func (*QButtonGroup) CheckedId

func (this *QButtonGroup) CheckedId() int

Returns the id of the checkedButton(), or -1 if no button is checked.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setId().

func (*QButtonGroup) Exclusive

func (this *QButtonGroup) Exclusive() bool

func (*QButtonGroup) GetCthis

func (this *QButtonGroup) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QButtonGroup) Id

func (this *QButtonGroup) Id(button QAbstractButton_ITF) int

Returns the id for the specified button, or -1 if no such button exists.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setId().

func (*QButtonGroup) MetaObject

func (this *QButtonGroup) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QButtonGroup) NewFromPointer

func (*QButtonGroup) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QButtonGroup

func (*QButtonGroup) QButtonGroup_PTR

func (ptr *QButtonGroup) QButtonGroup_PTR() *QButtonGroup

func (*QButtonGroup) RemoveButton

func (this *QButtonGroup) RemoveButton(arg0 QAbstractButton_ITF)

Removes the given button from the button group.

See also addButton() and buttons().

func (*QButtonGroup) SetCthis

func (this *QButtonGroup) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QButtonGroup) SetExclusive

func (this *QButtonGroup) SetExclusive(arg0 bool)

func (*QButtonGroup) SetId

func (this *QButtonGroup) SetId(button QAbstractButton_ITF, id int)

Sets the id for the specified button. Note that id cannot be -1.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also id().

type QButtonGroup_ITF

type QButtonGroup_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QButtonGroup_PTR() *QButtonGroup
}

type QCalendarWidget

type QCalendarWidget struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQCalendarWidget

func NewQCalendarWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QCalendarWidget

Constructs a calendar widget with the given parent.

The widget is initialized with the current month and year, and the currently selected date is today.

See also setCurrentPage().

func NewQCalendarWidgetFromPointer

func NewQCalendarWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCalendarWidget

func NewQCalendarWidget__

func NewQCalendarWidget__() *QCalendarWidget

Constructs a calendar widget with the given parent.

The widget is initialized with the current month and year, and the currently selected date is today.

See also setCurrentPage().

func (*QCalendarWidget) Activated

func (this *QCalendarWidget) Activated(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the Return or Enter key or double-clicks a date in the calendar widget.

func (*QCalendarWidget) Clicked

func (this *QCalendarWidget) Clicked(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a mouse button is clicked. The date the mouse was clicked on is specified by date. The signal is only emitted when clicked on a valid date, e.g., dates are not outside the minimumDate() and maximumDate(). If the selection mode is NoSelection, this signal will not be emitted.

func (*QCalendarWidget) CurrentPageChanged

func (this *QCalendarWidget) CurrentPageChanged(year int, month int)

This signal is emitted when the currently shown month is changed. The new year and month are passed as parameters.

See also setCurrentPage().

func (*QCalendarWidget) DateEditAcceptDelay

func (this *QCalendarWidget) DateEditAcceptDelay() int

func (*QCalendarWidget) DateTextFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) DateTextFormat(date qtcore.QDate_ITF) *qtgui.QTextCharFormat

Returns a QMap from QDate to QTextCharFormat showing all dates that use a special format that alters their rendering.

See also setDateTextFormat().

func (*QCalendarWidget) Event

func (this *QCalendarWidget) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QCalendarWidget) EventFilter

func (this *QCalendarWidget) EventFilter(watched qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QCalendarWidget) FirstDayOfWeek

func (this *QCalendarWidget) FirstDayOfWeek() int

func (*QCalendarWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QCalendarWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QCalendarWidget) HeaderTextFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) HeaderTextFormat() *qtgui.QTextCharFormat

Returns the text char format for rendering the header.

See also setHeaderTextFormat().

func (*QCalendarWidget) HorizontalHeaderFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) HorizontalHeaderFormat() int

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritEventFilter(f func(watched *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritPaintCell

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritPaintCell(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRect, date *qtcore.QDate))

void paintCell(class QPainter *, const class QRect &, const class QDate &)

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritUpdateCell

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritUpdateCell(f func(date *qtcore.QDate))

void updateCell(const class QDate &)

func (*QCalendarWidget) InheritUpdateCells

func (this *QCalendarWidget) InheritUpdateCells(f func())

void updateCells()

func (*QCalendarWidget) IsDateEditEnabled

func (this *QCalendarWidget) IsDateEditEnabled() bool

func (*QCalendarWidget) IsGridVisible

func (this *QCalendarWidget) IsGridVisible() bool

func (*QCalendarWidget) IsNavigationBarVisible

func (this *QCalendarWidget) IsNavigationBarVisible() bool

func (*QCalendarWidget) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QCalendarWidget) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QCalendarWidget) MaximumDate

func (this *QCalendarWidget) MaximumDate() *qtcore.QDate

func (*QCalendarWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QCalendarWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QCalendarWidget) MinimumDate

func (this *QCalendarWidget) MinimumDate() *qtcore.QDate

func (*QCalendarWidget) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QCalendarWidget) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QCalendarWidget) MonthShown

func (this *QCalendarWidget) MonthShown() int

Returns the currently displayed month. Months are numbered from 1 to 12.

See also yearShown() and setCurrentPage().

func (*QCalendarWidget) MousePressEvent

func (this *QCalendarWidget) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QCalendarWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QCalendarWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCalendarWidget

func (*QCalendarWidget) PaintCell

func (this *QCalendarWidget) PaintCell(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

Paints the cell specified by the given date, using the given painter and rect.

func (*QCalendarWidget) QCalendarWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QCalendarWidget) QCalendarWidget_PTR() *QCalendarWidget

func (*QCalendarWidget) ResizeEvent

func (this *QCalendarWidget) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QCalendarWidget) SelectedDate

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SelectedDate() *qtcore.QDate

func (*QCalendarWidget) SelectionChanged

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted when the currently selected date is changed.

The currently selected date can be changed by the user using the mouse or keyboard, or by the programmer using setSelectedDate().

See also selectedDate().

func (*QCalendarWidget) SelectionMode

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SelectionMode() int

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetCurrentPage

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetCurrentPage(year int, month int)

Displays the given month of the given year without changing the selected date. Use the setSelectedDate() function to alter the selected date.

The currently displayed month and year can be retrieved using the monthShown() and yearShown() functions respectively.

See also yearShown(), monthShown(), showPreviousMonth(), showNextMonth(), showPreviousYear(), and showNextYear().

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetDateEditAcceptDelay

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetDateEditAcceptDelay(delay int)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetDateEditEnabled

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetDateEditEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetDateRange

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetDateRange(min qtcore.QDate_ITF, max qtcore.QDate_ITF)

Defines a date range by setting the minimumDate and maximumDate properties.

The date range restricts the user selection, i.e. the user can only select dates within the specified date range. Note that

QCalendarWidget *calendar;

calendar->setDateRange(min, max);

is analogous to

QCalendarWidget *calendar;

calendar->setMinimumDate(min);
calendar->setMaximumDate(max);

If either the min or max parameters are not valid QDate objects, this function does nothing.

See also setMinimumDate() and setMaximumDate().

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetDateTextFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetDateTextFormat(date qtcore.QDate_ITF, format qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

Sets the format used to render the given date to that specified by format.

If date is null, all date formats are cleared.

See also dateTextFormat().

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetFirstDayOfWeek

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetFirstDayOfWeek(dayOfWeek int)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetGridVisible

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetGridVisible(show bool)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetHeaderTextFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetHeaderTextFormat(format qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

Sets the text char format for rendering the header to format. If you also set a weekday text format, this format's foreground and background color will take precedence over the header's format. The other formatting information will still be decided by the header's format.

See also headerTextFormat().

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetHorizontalHeaderFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetHorizontalHeaderFormat(format int)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetMaximumDate

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetMaximumDate(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetMinimumDate

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetMinimumDate(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetNavigationBarVisible

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetNavigationBarVisible(visible bool)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetSelectedDate

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetSelectedDate(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetSelectionMode

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetSelectionMode(mode int)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetVerticalHeaderFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetVerticalHeaderFormat(format int)

func (*QCalendarWidget) SetWeekdayTextFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SetWeekdayTextFormat(dayOfWeek int, format qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

Sets the text char format for rendering of day in the week dayOfWeek to format. The format will take precedence over the header format in case of foreground and background color. Other text formatting information is taken from the headers format.

See also weekdayTextFormat() and setHeaderTextFormat().

func (*QCalendarWidget) ShowNextMonth

func (this *QCalendarWidget) ShowNextMonth()

Shows the next month relative to the currently displayed month. Note that the selected date is not changed.

See also showPreviousMonth(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().

func (*QCalendarWidget) ShowNextYear

func (this *QCalendarWidget) ShowNextYear()

Shows the currently displayed month in the next year relative to the currently displayed year. Note that the selected date is not changed.

See also showPreviousYear(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().

func (*QCalendarWidget) ShowPreviousMonth

func (this *QCalendarWidget) ShowPreviousMonth()

Shows the previous month relative to the currently displayed month. Note that the selected date is not changed.

See also showNextMonth(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().

func (*QCalendarWidget) ShowPreviousYear

func (this *QCalendarWidget) ShowPreviousYear()

Shows the currently displayed month in the previous year relative to the currently displayed year. Note that the selected date is not changed.

See also showNextYear(), setCurrentPage(), and setSelectedDate().

func (*QCalendarWidget) ShowSelectedDate

func (this *QCalendarWidget) ShowSelectedDate()

Shows the month of the selected date.

See also selectedDate() and setCurrentPage().

func (*QCalendarWidget) ShowToday

func (this *QCalendarWidget) ShowToday()

Shows the month of the today's date.

See also selectedDate() and setCurrentPage().

func (*QCalendarWidget) SizeHint

func (this *QCalendarWidget) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QCalendarWidget) UpdateCell

func (this *QCalendarWidget) UpdateCell(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

Updates the cell specified by the given date unless updates are disabled or the cell is hidden.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also updateCells(), yearShown(), and monthShown().

func (*QCalendarWidget) UpdateCells

func (this *QCalendarWidget) UpdateCells()

Updates all visible cells unless updates are disabled.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also updateCell().

func (*QCalendarWidget) VerticalHeaderFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) VerticalHeaderFormat() int

func (*QCalendarWidget) WeekdayTextFormat

func (this *QCalendarWidget) WeekdayTextFormat(dayOfWeek int) *qtgui.QTextCharFormat

Returns the text char format for rendering of day in the week dayOfWeek.

See also setWeekdayTextFormat() and headerTextFormat().

func (*QCalendarWidget) YearShown

func (this *QCalendarWidget) YearShown() int

Returns the year of the currently displayed month. Months are numbered from 1 to 12.

See also monthShown() and setCurrentPage().

type QCalendarWidget_ITF

type QCalendarWidget_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QCalendarWidget_PTR() *QCalendarWidget
}

type QCalendarWidget__HorizontalHeaderFormat

type QCalendarWidget__HorizontalHeaderFormat = int

This enum type defines the various formats the horizontal header can display.

See also horizontalHeaderFormat() and VerticalHeaderFormat.

const QCalendarWidget__LongDayNames QCalendarWidget__HorizontalHeaderFormat = 3

The header displays complete day names (e.g. Monday).

const QCalendarWidget__NoHorizontalHeader QCalendarWidget__HorizontalHeaderFormat = 0

The header is hidden.

const QCalendarWidget__ShortDayNames QCalendarWidget__HorizontalHeaderFormat = 2

The header displays a short abbreviation for day names (e.g. Mon for Monday).

const QCalendarWidget__SingleLetterDayNames QCalendarWidget__HorizontalHeaderFormat = 1

The header displays a single letter abbreviation for day names (e.g. M for Monday).

type QCalendarWidget__SelectionMode

type QCalendarWidget__SelectionMode = int

This enum describes the types of selection offered to the user for selecting dates in the calendar.

See also selectionMode.

const QCalendarWidget__NoSelection QCalendarWidget__SelectionMode = 0

Dates cannot be selected.

const QCalendarWidget__SingleSelection QCalendarWidget__SelectionMode = 1

Single dates can be selected.

type QCalendarWidget__VerticalHeaderFormat

type QCalendarWidget__VerticalHeaderFormat = int

This enum type defines the various formats the vertical header can display.

See also verticalHeaderFormat() and HorizontalHeaderFormat.

const QCalendarWidget__ISOWeekNumbers QCalendarWidget__VerticalHeaderFormat = 1

The header displays ISO week numbers as described by QDate::weekNumber().

const QCalendarWidget__NoVerticalHeader QCalendarWidget__VerticalHeaderFormat = 0

The header is hidden.

type QCheckBox

type QCheckBox struct {
	*QAbstractButton
}

func NewQCheckBox

func NewQCheckBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QCheckBox

Constructs a checkbox with the given parent, but with no text.

parent is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func NewQCheckBoxFromPointer

func NewQCheckBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCheckBox

func NewQCheckBox_1

func NewQCheckBox_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QCheckBox

Constructs a checkbox with the given parent, but with no text.

parent is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func NewQCheckBox_1_

func NewQCheckBox_1_(text string) *QCheckBox

Constructs a checkbox with the given parent, but with no text.

parent is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func NewQCheckBox__

func NewQCheckBox__() *QCheckBox

Constructs a checkbox with the given parent, but with no text.

parent is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func (*QCheckBox) CheckState

func (this *QCheckBox) CheckState() int

Returns the checkbox's check state. If you do not need tristate support, you can also use QAbstractButton::isChecked(), which returns a boolean.

See also setCheckState() and Qt::CheckState.

func (*QCheckBox) CheckStateSet

func (this *QCheckBox) CheckStateSet()

Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::checkStateSet().

func (*QCheckBox) Event

func (this *QCheckBox) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QCheckBox) GetCthis

func (this *QCheckBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QCheckBox) HitButton

func (this *QCheckBox) HitButton(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::hitButton().

func (*QCheckBox) InheritCheckStateSet

func (this *QCheckBox) InheritCheckStateSet(f func())

void checkStateSet()

func (*QCheckBox) InheritEvent

func (this *QCheckBox) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QCheckBox) InheritHitButton

func (this *QCheckBox) InheritHitButton(f func(pos *qtcore.QPoint) bool)

bool hitButton(const class QPoint &)

func (*QCheckBox) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QCheckBox) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionButton))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionButton *)

func (*QCheckBox) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QCheckBox) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QCheckBox) InheritNextCheckState

func (this *QCheckBox) InheritNextCheckState(f func())

void nextCheckState()

func (*QCheckBox) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QCheckBox) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QCheckBox) InitStyleOption

func (this *QCheckBox) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionButton_ITF)

Initializes option with the values from this QCheckBox. This method is useful for subclasses that require a QStyleOptionButton, but do not want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QCheckBox) IsTristate

func (this *QCheckBox) IsTristate() bool

func (*QCheckBox) MetaObject

func (this *QCheckBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QCheckBox) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QCheckBox) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QCheckBox) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QCheckBox) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QCheckBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QCheckBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCheckBox

func (*QCheckBox) NextCheckState

func (this *QCheckBox) NextCheckState()

Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::nextCheckState().

func (*QCheckBox) PaintEvent

func (this *QCheckBox) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QCheckBox) QCheckBox_PTR

func (ptr *QCheckBox) QCheckBox_PTR() *QCheckBox

func (*QCheckBox) SetCheckState

func (this *QCheckBox) SetCheckState(state int)

Sets the checkbox's check state to state. If you do not need tristate support, you can also use QAbstractButton::setChecked(), which takes a boolean.

See also checkState() and Qt::CheckState.

func (*QCheckBox) SetCthis

func (this *QCheckBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QCheckBox) SetTristate

func (this *QCheckBox) SetTristate(y bool)

func (*QCheckBox) SetTristate__

func (this *QCheckBox) SetTristate__()

func (*QCheckBox) SizeHint

func (this *QCheckBox) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QCheckBox) StateChanged

func (this *QCheckBox) StateChanged(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted whenever the checkbox's state changes, i.e., whenever the user checks or unchecks it.

state contains the checkbox's new Qt::CheckState.

type QCheckBox_ITF

type QCheckBox_ITF interface {
	QAbstractButton_ITF
	QCheckBox_PTR() *QCheckBox
}

type QColorDialog

type QColorDialog struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQColorDialog

func NewQColorDialog(parent QWidget_ITF) *QColorDialog

Constructs a color dialog with the given parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func NewQColorDialogFromPointer

func NewQColorDialogFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QColorDialog

func NewQColorDialog_1

func NewQColorDialog_1(initial qtgui.QColor_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QColorDialog

Constructs a color dialog with the given parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func NewQColorDialog_1_

func NewQColorDialog_1_(initial qtgui.QColor_ITF) *QColorDialog

Constructs a color dialog with the given parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func NewQColorDialog__

func NewQColorDialog__() *QColorDialog

Constructs a color dialog with the given parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QColorDialog) ChangeEvent

func (this *QColorDialog) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QColorDialog) ColorSelected

func (this *QColorDialog) ColorSelected(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

This signal is emitted just after the user has clicked OK to select a color to use. The chosen color is specified by color.

See also color and currentColorChanged().

func (*QColorDialog) CurrentColor

func (this *QColorDialog) CurrentColor() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QColorDialog) CurrentColorChanged

func (this *QColorDialog) CurrentColorChanged(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the current color changes in the dialog. The current color is specified by color.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentColor.

See also color and colorSelected().

func (*QColorDialog) CustomColor

func (this *QColorDialog) CustomColor(index int) *qtgui.QColor

Returns the custom color at the given index as a QColor value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also setCustomColor().

func (*QColorDialog) CustomCount

func (this *QColorDialog) CustomCount() int

Returns the number of custom colors supported by QColorDialog. All color dialogs share the same custom colors.

func (*QColorDialog) Done

func (this *QColorDialog) Done(result int)

Reimplemented from QDialog::done().

Closes the dialog and sets its result code to result. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return result.

See also QDialog::done().

func (*QColorDialog) GetColor

func (this *QColorDialog) GetColor(initial qtgui.QColor_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, title string, options int) *qtgui.QColor

Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or "Select Color" if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.

The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QColorDialog) GetColor__

func (this *QColorDialog) GetColor__() *qtgui.QColor

Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or "Select Color" if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.

The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QColorDialog) GetColor__1

func (this *QColorDialog) GetColor__1(initial qtgui.QColor_ITF) *qtgui.QColor

Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or "Select Color" if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.

The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QColorDialog) GetColor__2

func (this *QColorDialog) GetColor__2(initial qtgui.QColor_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QColor

Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or "Select Color" if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.

The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QColorDialog) GetColor__3

func (this *QColorDialog) GetColor__3(initial qtgui.QColor_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, title string) *qtgui.QColor

Pops up a modal color dialog with the given window title (or "Select Color" if none is specified), lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent. It returns an invalid (see QColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog.

The options argument allows you to customize the dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QColorDialog) GetCthis

func (this *QColorDialog) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QColorDialog) GetRgba

func (this *QColorDialog) GetRgba(rgba uint, ok *bool, parent QWidget_ITF) uint

func (*QColorDialog) GetRgba__

func (this *QColorDialog) GetRgba__() uint

func (*QColorDialog) GetRgba__1

func (this *QColorDialog) GetRgba__1(rgba uint) uint

func (*QColorDialog) GetRgba__2

func (this *QColorDialog) GetRgba__2(rgba uint, ok *bool) uint

func (*QColorDialog) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QColorDialog) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QColorDialog) InheritDone

func (this *QColorDialog) InheritDone(f func(result int))

void done(int)

func (*QColorDialog) MetaObject

func (this *QColorDialog) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QColorDialog) NewFromPointer

func (*QColorDialog) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QColorDialog

func (*QColorDialog) Open

func (this *QColorDialog) Open(receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string)

This is an overloaded function.

Opens the dialog and connects its colorSelected() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.

The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QColorDialog) Options

func (this *QColorDialog) Options() int

func (*QColorDialog) QColorDialog_PTR

func (ptr *QColorDialog) QColorDialog_PTR() *QColorDialog

func (*QColorDialog) SelectedColor

func (this *QColorDialog) SelectedColor() *qtgui.QColor

Returns the color that the user selected by clicking the OK or equivalent button.

Note: This color is not always the same as the color held by the currentColor property since the user can choose different colors before finally selecting the one to use.

func (*QColorDialog) SetCthis

func (this *QColorDialog) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QColorDialog) SetCurrentColor

func (this *QColorDialog) SetCurrentColor(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QColorDialog) SetCustomColor

func (this *QColorDialog) SetCustomColor(index int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

Sets the custom color at index to the QColor color value.

Note: This function does not apply to the Native Color Dialog on the macOS platform. If you still require this function, use the QColorDialog::DontUseNativeDialog option.

See also customColor().

func (*QColorDialog) SetOption

func (this *QColorDialog) SetOption(option int, on bool)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QColorDialog) SetOption__

func (this *QColorDialog) SetOption__(option int)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QColorDialog) SetOptions

func (this *QColorDialog) SetOptions(options int)

func (*QColorDialog) SetStandardColor

func (this *QColorDialog) SetStandardColor(index int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

Sets the standard color at index to the QColor color value.

Note: This function does not apply to the Native Color Dialog on the macOS platform. If you still require this function, use the QColorDialog::DontUseNativeDialog option.

See also standardColor().

func (*QColorDialog) SetVisible

func (this *QColorDialog) SetVisible(visible bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

Changes the visibility of the dialog. If visible is true, the dialog is shown; otherwise, it is hidden.

func (*QColorDialog) StandardColor

func (this *QColorDialog) StandardColor(index int) *qtgui.QColor

Returns the standard color at the given index as a QColor value.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also setStandardColor().

func (*QColorDialog) TestOption

func (this *QColorDialog) TestOption(option int) bool

Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also options and setOption().

type QColorDialog_ITF

type QColorDialog_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QColorDialog_PTR() *QColorDialog
}

type QColorDialog__ColorDialogOption

type QColorDialog__ColorDialogOption = int
const QColorDialog__DontUseNativeDialog QColorDialog__ColorDialogOption = 4
const QColorDialog__NoButtons QColorDialog__ColorDialogOption = 2
const QColorDialog__ShowAlphaChannel QColorDialog__ColorDialogOption = 1

type QColormap

type QColormap struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQColormapFromPointer

func NewQColormapFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QColormap

func QColormap_Instance

func QColormap_Instance(screen int) *QColormap

func (*QColormap) Cleanup

func (this *QColormap) Cleanup()

func (*QColormap) ColorAt

func (this *QColormap) ColorAt(pixel uint) *qtgui.QColor

Returns a QColor for the pixel.

See also pixel().

func (*QColormap) Depth

func (this *QColormap) Depth() int

Returns the depth of the device.

See also size().

func (*QColormap) GetCthis

func (this *QColormap) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QColormap) Initialize

func (this *QColormap) Initialize()

func (*QColormap) Instance

func (this *QColormap) Instance(screen int) *QColormap

Returns the colormap for the specified screen. If screen is -1, this function returns the colormap for the default screen.

func (*QColormap) Instance__

func (this *QColormap) Instance__() *QColormap

Returns the colormap for the specified screen. If screen is -1, this function returns the colormap for the default screen.

func (*QColormap) Mode

func (this *QColormap) Mode() int

Returns the mode of this colormap.

See also QColormap::Mode.

func (*QColormap) NewFromPointer

func (*QColormap) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QColormap

func (*QColormap) Operator_equal

func (this *QColormap) Operator_equal(colormap QColormap_ITF) *QColormap

func (*QColormap) Pixel

func (this *QColormap) Pixel(color qtgui.QColor_ITF) uint

Returns a device dependent pixel value for the color.

See also colorAt().

func (*QColormap) QColormap_PTR

func (ptr *QColormap) QColormap_PTR() *QColormap

func (*QColormap) SetCthis

func (this *QColormap) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QColormap) Size

func (this *QColormap) Size() int

Returns the size of the colormap for Indexed and Gray modes; Returns -1 for Direct mode.

See also colormap().

type QColormap_ITF

type QColormap_ITF interface {
	QColormap_PTR() *QColormap
}

type QColormap__Mode

type QColormap__Mode = int

This enum describes how QColormap maps device independent RGB values to device dependent pixel values.

const QColormap__Direct QColormap__Mode = 0

Pixel values are derived directly from the RGB values, also known as "True Color."

const QColormap__Gray QColormap__Mode = 2

Similar to Indexed, pixel values represent a vector of available gray tones. QColormap uses the index of the gray tone that most closely matches the computed gray tone of an RGB value.

const QColormap__Indexed QColormap__Mode = 1

Pixel values represent indexes into a vector of available colors, i.e. QColormap uses the index of the color that most closely matches an RGB value.

type QColumnView

type QColumnView struct {
	*QAbstractItemView
}

func NewQColumnView

func NewQColumnView(parent QWidget_ITF) *QColumnView

Constructs a column view with a parent to represent a model's data. Use setModel() to set the model.

See also QAbstractItemModel.

func NewQColumnViewFromPointer

func NewQColumnViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QColumnView

func NewQColumnView__

func NewQColumnView__() *QColumnView

Constructs a column view with a parent to represent a model's data. Use setModel() to set the model.

See also QAbstractItemModel.

func (*QColumnView) CreateColumn

func (this *QColumnView) CreateColumn(rootIndex qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QAbstractItemView

To use a custom widget for the final column when you select an item overload this function and return a widget. index is the root index that will be assigned to the view.

Return the new view. QColumnView will automatically take ownership of the widget.

See also setPreviewWidget().

func (*QColumnView) CurrentChanged

func (this *QColumnView) CurrentChanged(current qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, previous qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().

func (*QColumnView) GetCthis

func (this *QColumnView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QColumnView) HorizontalOffset

func (this *QColumnView) HorizontalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().

func (*QColumnView) IndexAt

func (this *QColumnView) IndexAt(point qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().

func (*QColumnView) InheritCreateColumn

func (this *QColumnView) InheritCreateColumn(f func(rootIndex *qtcore.QModelIndex) unsafe.Pointer)

QAbstractItemView * createColumn(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QColumnView) InheritCurrentChanged

func (this *QColumnView) InheritCurrentChanged(f func(current *qtcore.QModelIndex, previous *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void currentChanged(const class QModelIndex &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QColumnView) InheritHorizontalOffset

func (this *QColumnView) InheritHorizontalOffset(f func() int)

int horizontalOffset()

func (*QColumnView) InheritInitializeColumn

func (this *QColumnView) InheritInitializeColumn(f func(column *QAbstractItemView))

void initializeColumn(class QAbstractItemView *)

func (*QColumnView) InheritIsIndexHidden

func (this *QColumnView) InheritIsIndexHidden(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool isIndexHidden(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QColumnView) InheritMoveCursor

func (this *QColumnView) InheritMoveCursor(f func(cursorAction int, modifiers int) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex moveCursor(enum QAbstractItemView::CursorAction, Qt::KeyboardModifiers)

func (*QColumnView) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QColumnView) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QColumnView) InheritRowsInserted

func (this *QColumnView) InheritRowsInserted(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsInserted(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QColumnView) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QColumnView) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QColumnView) InheritSetSelection

func (this *QColumnView) InheritSetSelection(f func(rect *qtcore.QRect, command int))

void setSelection(const class QRect &, class QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags)

func (*QColumnView) InheritVerticalOffset

func (this *QColumnView) InheritVerticalOffset(f func() int)

int verticalOffset()

func (*QColumnView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QColumnView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection(f func(selection *qtcore.QItemSelection) unsafe.Pointer)

QRegion visualRegionForSelection(const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QColumnView) InitializeColumn

func (this *QColumnView) InitializeColumn(column QAbstractItemView_ITF)

Copies the behavior and options of the column view and applies them to the column such as the iconSize(), textElideMode() and alternatingRowColors(). This can be useful when reimplementing createColumn().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also createColumn().

func (*QColumnView) IsIndexHidden

func (this *QColumnView) IsIndexHidden(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().

func (*QColumnView) MetaObject

func (this *QColumnView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QColumnView) MoveCursor

func (this *QColumnView) MoveCursor(cursorAction int, modifiers int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().

Move left should go to the parent index Move right should go to the child index or down if there is no child

func (*QColumnView) NewFromPointer

func (*QColumnView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QColumnView

func (*QColumnView) PreviewWidget

func (this *QColumnView) PreviewWidget() *QWidget

Returns the preview widget, or 0 if there is none.

See also setPreviewWidget() and updatePreviewWidget().

func (*QColumnView) QColumnView_PTR

func (ptr *QColumnView) QColumnView_PTR() *QColumnView

func (*QColumnView) ResizeEvent

func (this *QColumnView) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QColumnView) ResizeGripsVisible

func (this *QColumnView) ResizeGripsVisible() bool

func (*QColumnView) RowsInserted

func (this *QColumnView) RowsInserted(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsInserted().

func (*QColumnView) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QColumnView) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().

func (*QColumnView) ScrollTo

func (this *QColumnView) ScrollTo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, hint int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().

func (*QColumnView) ScrollTo__

func (this *QColumnView) ScrollTo__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().

func (*QColumnView) SelectAll

func (this *QColumnView) SelectAll()

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectAll().

func (*QColumnView) SetCthis

func (this *QColumnView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QColumnView) SetModel

func (this *QColumnView) SetModel(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().

func (*QColumnView) SetPreviewWidget

func (this *QColumnView) SetPreviewWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the preview widget.

The widget becomes a child of the column view, and will be destroyed when the column area is deleted or when a new widget is set.

See also previewWidget() and updatePreviewWidget().

func (*QColumnView) SetResizeGripsVisible

func (this *QColumnView) SetResizeGripsVisible(visible bool)

func (*QColumnView) SetRootIndex

func (this *QColumnView) SetRootIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setRootIndex().

func (*QColumnView) SetSelection

func (this *QColumnView) SetSelection(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, command int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().

func (*QColumnView) SetSelectionModel

func (this *QColumnView) SetSelectionModel(selectionModel qtcore.QItemSelectionModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().

func (*QColumnView) SizeHint

func (this *QColumnView) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QColumnView) UpdatePreviewWidget

func (this *QColumnView) UpdatePreviewWidget(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the preview widget should be updated to provide rich information about index

See also previewWidget().

func (*QColumnView) VerticalOffset

func (this *QColumnView) VerticalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().

func (*QColumnView) VisualRect

func (this *QColumnView) VisualRect(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRect().

func (*QColumnView) VisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QColumnView) VisualRegionForSelection(selection qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF) *qtgui.QRegion

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRegionForSelection().

type QColumnView_ITF

type QColumnView_ITF interface {
	QAbstractItemView_ITF
	QColumnView_PTR() *QColumnView
}

type QComboBox

type QComboBox struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQComboBox

func NewQComboBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QComboBox

Constructs a combobox with the given parent, using the default model QStandardItemModel.

func NewQComboBoxFromPointer

func NewQComboBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QComboBox

func NewQComboBox__

func NewQComboBox__() *QComboBox

Constructs a combobox with the given parent, using the default model QStandardItemModel.

func (*QComboBox) Activated

func (this *QComboBox) Activated(index int)

This signal is sent when the user chooses an item in the combobox. The item's index is passed. Note that this signal is sent even when the choice is not changed. If you need to know when the choice actually changes, use signal currentIndexChanged().

Note: Signal activated is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(comboBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QComboBox::activated),
    [=](int index){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QComboBox) Activated_1

func (this *QComboBox) Activated_1(arg0 string)

This signal is sent when the user chooses an item in the combobox. The item's index is passed. Note that this signal is sent even when the choice is not changed. If you need to know when the choice actually changes, use signal currentIndexChanged().

Note: Signal activated is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(comboBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QComboBox::activated),
    [=](int index){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QComboBox) AddItem

func (this *QComboBox) AddItem(text string, userData qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.

func (*QComboBox) AddItem_1

func (this *QComboBox) AddItem_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, userData qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.

func (*QComboBox) AddItem_1_

func (this *QComboBox) AddItem_1_(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string)

Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.

func (*QComboBox) AddItem__

func (this *QComboBox) AddItem__(text string)

Adds an item to the combobox with the given text, and containing the specified userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole). The item is appended to the list of existing items.

func (*QComboBox) AddItems

func (this *QComboBox) AddItems(texts qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Adds each of the strings in the given texts to the combobox. Each item is appended to the list of existing items in turn.

func (*QComboBox) AutoCompletion

func (this *QComboBox) AutoCompletion() bool

func (*QComboBox) AutoCompletionCaseSensitivity

func (this *QComboBox) AutoCompletionCaseSensitivity() int

func (*QComboBox) ChangeEvent

func (this *QComboBox) ChangeEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QComboBox) Clear

func (this *QComboBox) Clear()

Clears the combobox, removing all items.

Note: If you have set an external model on the combobox this model will still be cleared when calling this function.

func (*QComboBox) ClearEditText

func (this *QComboBox) ClearEditText()

Clears the contents of the line edit used for editing in the combobox.

func (*QComboBox) Completer

func (this *QComboBox) Completer() *QCompleter

Returns the completer that is used to auto complete text input for the combobox.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setCompleter() and editable.

func (*QComboBox) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QComboBox) ContextMenuEvent(e qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QComboBox) Count

func (this *QComboBox) Count() int

func (*QComboBox) CurrentData

func (this *QComboBox) CurrentData(role int) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QComboBox) CurrentData__

func (this *QComboBox) CurrentData__() *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QComboBox) CurrentIndex

func (this *QComboBox) CurrentIndex() int

func (*QComboBox) CurrentIndexChanged

func (this *QComboBox) CurrentIndexChanged(index int)

This signal is sent whenever the currentIndex in the combobox changes either through user interaction or programmatically. The item's index is passed or -1 if the combobox becomes empty or the currentIndex was reset.

Note: Signal currentIndexChanged is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(comboBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QComboBox::currentIndexChanged),
    [=](int index){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

func (*QComboBox) CurrentIndexChanged_1

func (this *QComboBox) CurrentIndexChanged_1(arg0 string)

This signal is sent whenever the currentIndex in the combobox changes either through user interaction or programmatically. The item's index is passed or -1 if the combobox becomes empty or the currentIndex was reset.

Note: Signal currentIndexChanged is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(comboBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QComboBox::currentIndexChanged),
    [=](int index){ \/* ... *\/ });

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

func (*QComboBox) CurrentText

func (this *QComboBox) CurrentText() string

func (*QComboBox) CurrentTextChanged

func (this *QComboBox) CurrentTextChanged(arg0 string)

This signal is sent whenever currentText changes. The new value is passed as text.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentText.

func (*QComboBox) DuplicatesEnabled

func (this *QComboBox) DuplicatesEnabled() bool

func (*QComboBox) EditTextChanged

func (this *QComboBox) EditTextChanged(arg0 string)

This signal is emitted when the text in the combobox's line edit widget is changed. The new text is specified by text.

func (*QComboBox) Event

func (this *QComboBox) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QComboBox) FindData

func (this *QComboBox) FindData(data qtcore.QVariant_ITF, role int, flags int) int

Returns the index of the item containing the given data for the given role; otherwise returns -1.

The flags specify how the items in the combobox are searched.

func (*QComboBox) FindData__

func (this *QComboBox) FindData__(data qtcore.QVariant_ITF) int

Returns the index of the item containing the given data for the given role; otherwise returns -1.

The flags specify how the items in the combobox are searched.

func (*QComboBox) FindData__1

func (this *QComboBox) FindData__1(data qtcore.QVariant_ITF, role int) int

Returns the index of the item containing the given data for the given role; otherwise returns -1.

The flags specify how the items in the combobox are searched.

func (*QComboBox) FindText

func (this *QComboBox) FindText(text string, flags int) int

Returns the index of the item containing the given text; otherwise returns -1.

The flags specify how the items in the combobox are searched.

func (*QComboBox) FindText__

func (this *QComboBox) FindText__(text string) int

Returns the index of the item containing the given text; otherwise returns -1.

The flags specify how the items in the combobox are searched.

func (*QComboBox) FocusInEvent

func (this *QComboBox) FocusInEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QComboBox) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QComboBox) FocusOutEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QComboBox) GetCthis

func (this *QComboBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QComboBox) HasFrame

func (this *QComboBox) HasFrame() bool

func (*QComboBox) HideEvent

func (this *QComboBox) HideEvent(e qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QComboBox) HidePopup

func (this *QComboBox) HidePopup()

Hides the list of items in the combobox if it is currently visible and resets the internal state, so that if the custom pop-up was shown inside the reimplemented showPopup(), then you also need to reimplement the hidePopup() function to hide your custom pop-up and call the base class implementation to reset the internal state whenever your custom pop-up widget is hidden.

See also showPopup().

func (*QComboBox) Highlighted

func (this *QComboBox) Highlighted(index int)

This signal is sent when an item in the combobox popup list is highlighted by the user. The item's index is passed.

Note: Signal highlighted is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(comboBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QComboBox::highlighted),
    [=](int index){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QComboBox) Highlighted_1

func (this *QComboBox) Highlighted_1(arg0 string)

This signal is sent when an item in the combobox popup list is highlighted by the user. The item's index is passed.

Note: Signal highlighted is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(comboBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QComboBox::highlighted),
    [=](int index){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QComboBox) IconSize

func (this *QComboBox) IconSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QComboBox) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritChangeEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritHideEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QComboBox) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionComboBox))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionComboBox *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritResizeEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritShowEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InheritWheelEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QComboBox) InitStyleOption

func (this *QComboBox) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionComboBox_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QComboBox. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionComboBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QComboBox) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QComboBox) InputMethodEvent(arg0 qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QComboBox) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QComboBox) InputMethodQuery(arg0 int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QComboBox) InputMethodQuery_1

func (this *QComboBox) InputMethodQuery_1(query int, argument qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QComboBox) InsertItem

func (this *QComboBox) InsertItem(index int, text string, userData qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.

If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.

See also insertItems().

func (*QComboBox) InsertItem_1

func (this *QComboBox) InsertItem_1(index int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, userData qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.

If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.

See also insertItems().

func (*QComboBox) InsertItem_1_

func (this *QComboBox) InsertItem_1_(index int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string)

Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.

If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.

See also insertItems().

func (*QComboBox) InsertItem__

func (this *QComboBox) InsertItem__(index int, text string)

Inserts the text and userData (stored in the Qt::UserRole) into the combobox at the given index.

If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.

See also insertItems().

func (*QComboBox) InsertItems

func (this *QComboBox) InsertItems(index int, texts qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Inserts the strings from the list into the combobox as separate items, starting at the index specified.

If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new items are appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new items are prepended to the list of existing items.

See also insertItem().

func (*QComboBox) InsertPolicy

func (this *QComboBox) InsertPolicy() int

func (*QComboBox) InsertSeparator

func (this *QComboBox) InsertSeparator(index int)

Inserts a separator item into the combobox at the given index.

If the index is equal to or higher than the total number of items, the new item is appended to the list of existing items. If the index is zero or negative, the new item is prepended to the list of existing items.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also insertItem().

func (*QComboBox) IsEditable

func (this *QComboBox) IsEditable() bool

func (*QComboBox) ItemData

func (this *QComboBox) ItemData(index int, role int) *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the data for the given role in the given index in the combobox, or QVariant::Invalid if there is no data for this role.

See also setItemData().

func (*QComboBox) ItemData__

func (this *QComboBox) ItemData__(index int) *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the data for the given role in the given index in the combobox, or QVariant::Invalid if there is no data for this role.

See also setItemData().

func (*QComboBox) ItemDelegate

func (this *QComboBox) ItemDelegate() *QAbstractItemDelegate

Returns the item delegate used by the popup list view.

See also setItemDelegate().

func (*QComboBox) ItemIcon

func (this *QComboBox) ItemIcon(index int) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns the icon for the given index in the combobox.

See also setItemIcon().

func (*QComboBox) ItemText

func (this *QComboBox) ItemText(index int) string

Returns the text for the given index in the combobox.

See also setItemText().

func (*QComboBox) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QComboBox) KeyPressEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QComboBox) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QComboBox) KeyReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QComboBox) LineEdit

func (this *QComboBox) LineEdit() *QLineEdit

Returns the line edit used to edit items in the combobox, or 0 if there is no line edit.

Only editable combo boxes have a line edit.

See also setLineEdit().

func (*QComboBox) MaxCount

func (this *QComboBox) MaxCount() int

func (*QComboBox) MaxVisibleItems

func (this *QComboBox) MaxVisibleItems() int

func (*QComboBox) MetaObject

func (this *QComboBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QComboBox) MinimumContentsLength

func (this *QComboBox) MinimumContentsLength() int

func (*QComboBox) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QComboBox) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QComboBox) Model

func (this *QComboBox) Model() *qtcore.QAbstractItemModel

Returns the model used by the combobox.

See also setModel().

func (*QComboBox) ModelColumn

func (this *QComboBox) ModelColumn() int

func (*QComboBox) MousePressEvent

func (this *QComboBox) MousePressEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QComboBox) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QComboBox) MouseReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QComboBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QComboBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QComboBox

func (*QComboBox) PaintEvent

func (this *QComboBox) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QComboBox) QComboBox_PTR

func (ptr *QComboBox) QComboBox_PTR() *QComboBox

func (*QComboBox) RemoveItem

func (this *QComboBox) RemoveItem(index int)

Removes the item at the given index from the combobox. This will update the current index if the index is removed.

This function does nothing if index is out of range.

func (*QComboBox) ResizeEvent

func (this *QComboBox) ResizeEvent(e qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QComboBox) RootModelIndex

func (this *QComboBox) RootModelIndex() *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the root model item index for the items in the combobox.

See also setRootModelIndex().

func (*QComboBox) SetAutoCompletion

func (this *QComboBox) SetAutoCompletion(enable bool)

func (*QComboBox) SetAutoCompletionCaseSensitivity

func (this *QComboBox) SetAutoCompletionCaseSensitivity(sensitivity int)

func (*QComboBox) SetCompleter

func (this *QComboBox) SetCompleter(c QCompleter_ITF)

Sets the completer to use instead of the current completer. If completer is 0, auto completion is disabled.

By default, for an editable combo box, a QCompleter that performs case insensitive inline completion is automatically created.

Note: The completer is removed when the editable property becomes false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also completer().

func (*QComboBox) SetCthis

func (this *QComboBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QComboBox) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QComboBox) SetCurrentIndex(index int)

func (*QComboBox) SetCurrentText

func (this *QComboBox) SetCurrentText(text string)

func (*QComboBox) SetDuplicatesEnabled

func (this *QComboBox) SetDuplicatesEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QComboBox) SetEditText

func (this *QComboBox) SetEditText(text string)

Sets the text in the combobox's text edit.

func (*QComboBox) SetEditable

func (this *QComboBox) SetEditable(editable bool)

func (*QComboBox) SetFrame

func (this *QComboBox) SetFrame(arg0 bool)

func (*QComboBox) SetIconSize

func (this *QComboBox) SetIconSize(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QComboBox) SetInsertPolicy

func (this *QComboBox) SetInsertPolicy(policy int)

func (*QComboBox) SetItemData

func (this *QComboBox) SetItemData(index int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF, role int)

Sets the data role for the item on the given index in the combobox to the specified value.

See also itemData().

func (*QComboBox) SetItemData__

func (this *QComboBox) SetItemData__(index int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Sets the data role for the item on the given index in the combobox to the specified value.

See also itemData().

func (*QComboBox) SetItemDelegate

func (this *QComboBox) SetItemDelegate(delegate QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF)

Sets the item delegate for the popup list view. The combobox takes ownership of the delegate.

Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between comboboxes, widget mappers or views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.

See also itemDelegate().

func (*QComboBox) SetItemIcon

func (this *QComboBox) SetItemIcon(index int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

Sets the icon for the item on the given index in the combobox.

See also itemIcon().

func (*QComboBox) SetItemText

func (this *QComboBox) SetItemText(index int, text string)

Sets the text for the item on the given index in the combobox.

See also itemText().

func (*QComboBox) SetLineEdit

func (this *QComboBox) SetLineEdit(edit QLineEdit_ITF)

Sets the line edit to use instead of the current line edit widget.

The combo box takes ownership of the line edit.

See also lineEdit().

func (*QComboBox) SetMaxCount

func (this *QComboBox) SetMaxCount(max int)

func (*QComboBox) SetMaxVisibleItems

func (this *QComboBox) SetMaxVisibleItems(maxItems int)

func (*QComboBox) SetMinimumContentsLength

func (this *QComboBox) SetMinimumContentsLength(characters int)

func (*QComboBox) SetModel

func (this *QComboBox) SetModel(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Sets the model to be model. model must not be 0. If you want to clear the contents of a model, call clear().

See also model() and clear().

func (*QComboBox) SetModelColumn

func (this *QComboBox) SetModelColumn(visibleColumn int)

func (*QComboBox) SetRootModelIndex

func (this *QComboBox) SetRootModelIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the root model item index for the items in the combobox.

See also rootModelIndex().

func (*QComboBox) SetSizeAdjustPolicy

func (this *QComboBox) SetSizeAdjustPolicy(policy int)

func (*QComboBox) SetValidator

func (this *QComboBox) SetValidator(v qtgui.QValidator_ITF)

Sets the validator to use instead of the current validator.

Note: The validator is removed when the editable property becomes false.

See also validator().

func (*QComboBox) SetView

func (this *QComboBox) SetView(itemView QAbstractItemView_ITF)

Sets the view to be used in the combobox popup to the given itemView. The combobox takes ownership of the view.

Note: If you want to use the convenience views (like QListWidget, QTableWidget or QTreeWidget), make sure to call setModel() on the combobox with the convenience widgets model before calling this function.

See also view().

func (*QComboBox) ShowEvent

func (this *QComboBox) ShowEvent(e qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QComboBox) ShowPopup

func (this *QComboBox) ShowPopup()

Displays the list of items in the combobox. If the list is empty then the no items will be shown.

If you reimplement this function to show a custom pop-up, make sure you call hidePopup() to reset the internal state.

See also hidePopup().

func (*QComboBox) SizeAdjustPolicy

func (this *QComboBox) SizeAdjustPolicy() int

func (*QComboBox) SizeHint

func (this *QComboBox) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

This implementation caches the size hint to avoid resizing when the contents change dynamically. To invalidate the cached value change the sizeAdjustPolicy.

func (*QComboBox) Validator

func (this *QComboBox) Validator() *qtgui.QValidator

Returns the validator that is used to constrain text input for the combobox.

See also setValidator() and editable.

func (*QComboBox) View

func (this *QComboBox) View() *QAbstractItemView

Returns the list view used for the combobox popup.

See also setView().

func (*QComboBox) WheelEvent

func (this *QComboBox) WheelEvent(e qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QComboBox_ITF

type QComboBox_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QComboBox_PTR() *QComboBox
}

type QComboBox__InsertPolicy

type QComboBox__InsertPolicy = int

This enum specifies what the QComboBox should do when a new string is entered by the user.

const QComboBox__InsertAfterCurrent QComboBox__InsertPolicy = 4

The string is inserted after the current item in the combobox.

const QComboBox__InsertAlphabetically QComboBox__InsertPolicy = 6

The string is inserted in the alphabetic order in the combobox.

const QComboBox__InsertAtBottom QComboBox__InsertPolicy = 3

The string will be inserted after the last item in the combobox.

const QComboBox__InsertAtCurrent QComboBox__InsertPolicy = 2

The current item will be replaced by the string.

const QComboBox__InsertAtTop QComboBox__InsertPolicy = 1

The string will be inserted as the first item in the combobox.

const QComboBox__InsertBeforeCurrent QComboBox__InsertPolicy = 5

The string is inserted before the current item in the combobox.

const QComboBox__NoInsert QComboBox__InsertPolicy = 0

The string will not be inserted into the combobox.

type QComboBox__SizeAdjustPolicy

type QComboBox__SizeAdjustPolicy = int

This enum specifies how the size hint of the QComboBox should adjust when new content is added or content changes.

const QComboBox__AdjustToContents QComboBox__SizeAdjustPolicy = 0

The combobox will always adjust to the contents

const QComboBox__AdjustToContentsOnFirstShow QComboBox__SizeAdjustPolicy = 1

The combobox will adjust to its contents the first time it is shown.

const QComboBox__AdjustToMinimumContentsLength QComboBox__SizeAdjustPolicy = 2

Use AdjustToContents or AdjustToContentsOnFirstShow instead.

const QComboBox__AdjustToMinimumContentsLengthWithIcon QComboBox__SizeAdjustPolicy = 3

The combobox will adjust to minimumContentsLength plus space for an icon. For performance reasons use this policy on large models.

type QCommandLinkButton

type QCommandLinkButton struct {
	*QPushButton
}

func NewQCommandLinkButton

func NewQCommandLinkButton(parent QWidget_ITF) *QCommandLinkButton

Constructs a command link with no text and a parent.

func NewQCommandLinkButtonFromPointer

func NewQCommandLinkButtonFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCommandLinkButton

func NewQCommandLinkButton_1

func NewQCommandLinkButton_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QCommandLinkButton

Constructs a command link with no text and a parent.

func NewQCommandLinkButton_1_

func NewQCommandLinkButton_1_(text string) *QCommandLinkButton

Constructs a command link with no text and a parent.

func NewQCommandLinkButton_2

func NewQCommandLinkButton_2(text string, description string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QCommandLinkButton

Constructs a command link with no text and a parent.

func NewQCommandLinkButton_2_

func NewQCommandLinkButton_2_(text string, description string) *QCommandLinkButton

Constructs a command link with no text and a parent.

func NewQCommandLinkButton__

func NewQCommandLinkButton__() *QCommandLinkButton

Constructs a command link with no text and a parent.

func (*QCommandLinkButton) Description

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) Description() string

func (*QCommandLinkButton) Event

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QCommandLinkButton) GetCthis

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QCommandLinkButton) HeightForWidth

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().

func (*QCommandLinkButton) InheritEvent

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QCommandLinkButton) InheritHeightForWidth

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) InheritHeightForWidth(f func(arg0 int) int)

int heightForWidth(int)

func (*QCommandLinkButton) InheritMinimumSizeHint

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) InheritMinimumSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize minimumSizeHint()

func (*QCommandLinkButton) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QCommandLinkButton) InheritSizeHint

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) InheritSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize sizeHint()

func (*QCommandLinkButton) MetaObject

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QCommandLinkButton) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QCommandLinkButton) NewFromPointer

func (*QCommandLinkButton) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCommandLinkButton

func (*QCommandLinkButton) PaintEvent

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QCommandLinkButton) QCommandLinkButton_PTR

func (ptr *QCommandLinkButton) QCommandLinkButton_PTR() *QCommandLinkButton

func (*QCommandLinkButton) SetCthis

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QCommandLinkButton) SetDescription

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) SetDescription(description string)

func (*QCommandLinkButton) SizeHint

func (this *QCommandLinkButton) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

type QCommandLinkButton_ITF

type QCommandLinkButton_ITF interface {
	QPushButton_ITF
	QCommandLinkButton_PTR() *QCommandLinkButton
}

type QCommonStyle

type QCommonStyle struct {
	*QStyle
}

func NewQCommonStyle

func NewQCommonStyle() *QCommonStyle

Constructs a QCommonStyle.

func NewQCommonStyleFromPointer

func NewQCommonStyleFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCommonStyle

func (*QCommonStyle) DrawComplexControl

func (this *QCommonStyle) DrawComplexControl(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, w QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawComplexControl().

func (*QCommonStyle) DrawComplexControl__

func (this *QCommonStyle) DrawComplexControl__(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawComplexControl().

func (*QCommonStyle) DrawControl

func (this *QCommonStyle) DrawControl(element int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, w QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawControl().

func (*QCommonStyle) DrawControl__

func (this *QCommonStyle) DrawControl__(element int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawControl().

func (*QCommonStyle) DrawPrimitive

func (this *QCommonStyle) DrawPrimitive(pe int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, w QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawPrimitive().

func (*QCommonStyle) DrawPrimitive__

func (this *QCommonStyle) DrawPrimitive__(pe int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawPrimitive().

func (*QCommonStyle) GeneratedIconPixmap

func (this *QCommonStyle) GeneratedIconPixmap(iconMode int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Reimplemented from QStyle::generatedIconPixmap().

func (*QCommonStyle) GetCthis

func (this *QCommonStyle) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QCommonStyle) HitTestComplexControl

func (this *QCommonStyle) HitTestComplexControl(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, pt qtcore.QPoint_ITF, w QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::hitTestComplexControl().

func (*QCommonStyle) HitTestComplexControl__

func (this *QCommonStyle) HitTestComplexControl__(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, pt qtcore.QPoint_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::hitTestComplexControl().

func (*QCommonStyle) LayoutSpacing

func (this *QCommonStyle) LayoutSpacing(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::layoutSpacing().

func (*QCommonStyle) LayoutSpacing__

func (this *QCommonStyle) LayoutSpacing__(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::layoutSpacing().

func (*QCommonStyle) LayoutSpacing__1

func (this *QCommonStyle) LayoutSpacing__1(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::layoutSpacing().

func (*QCommonStyle) MetaObject

func (this *QCommonStyle) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QCommonStyle) NewFromPointer

func (*QCommonStyle) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCommonStyle

func (*QCommonStyle) PixelMetric

func (this *QCommonStyle) PixelMetric(m int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().

func (*QCommonStyle) PixelMetric__

func (this *QCommonStyle) PixelMetric__(m int) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().

func (*QCommonStyle) PixelMetric__1

func (this *QCommonStyle) PixelMetric__1(m int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().

func (*QCommonStyle) Polish

func (this *QCommonStyle) Polish(arg0 qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().

func (*QCommonStyle) Polish_1

func (this *QCommonStyle) Polish_1(app QApplication_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().

func (*QCommonStyle) Polish_2

func (this *QCommonStyle) Polish_2(widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().

func (*QCommonStyle) QCommonStyle_PTR

func (ptr *QCommonStyle) QCommonStyle_PTR() *QCommonStyle

func (*QCommonStyle) SetCthis

func (this *QCommonStyle) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QCommonStyle) SizeFromContents

func (this *QCommonStyle) SizeFromContents(ct int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, contentsSize qtcore.QSize_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QStyle::sizeFromContents().

func (*QCommonStyle) SizeFromContents__

func (this *QCommonStyle) SizeFromContents__(ct int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, contentsSize qtcore.QSize_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QStyle::sizeFromContents().

func (*QCommonStyle) StandardIcon

func (this *QCommonStyle) StandardIcon(standardIcon int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QCommonStyle) StandardIcon__

func (this *QCommonStyle) StandardIcon__(standardIcon int) *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QCommonStyle) StandardIcon__1

func (this *QCommonStyle) StandardIcon__1(standardIcon int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QCommonStyle) StandardPixmap

func (this *QCommonStyle) StandardPixmap(sp int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().

func (*QCommonStyle) StandardPixmap__

func (this *QCommonStyle) StandardPixmap__(sp int) *qtgui.QPixmap

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().

func (*QCommonStyle) StandardPixmap__1

func (this *QCommonStyle) StandardPixmap__1(sp int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().

func (*QCommonStyle) StyleHint

func (this *QCommonStyle) StyleHint(sh int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, w QWidget_ITF, shret QStyleHintReturn_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QCommonStyle) StyleHint__

func (this *QCommonStyle) StyleHint__(sh int) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QCommonStyle) StyleHint__1

func (this *QCommonStyle) StyleHint__1(sh int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QCommonStyle) StyleHint__2

func (this *QCommonStyle) StyleHint__2(sh int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, w QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QCommonStyle) SubControlRect

func (this *QCommonStyle) SubControlRect(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, sc int, w QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::subControlRect().

func (*QCommonStyle) SubControlRect__

func (this *QCommonStyle) SubControlRect__(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, sc int) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::subControlRect().

func (*QCommonStyle) SubElementRect

func (this *QCommonStyle) SubElementRect(r int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::subElementRect().

func (*QCommonStyle) SubElementRect__

func (this *QCommonStyle) SubElementRect__(r int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::subElementRect().

func (*QCommonStyle) Unpolish

func (this *QCommonStyle) Unpolish(widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().

func (*QCommonStyle) Unpolish_1

func (this *QCommonStyle) Unpolish_1(application QApplication_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().

type QCommonStyle_ITF

type QCommonStyle_ITF interface {
	QStyle_ITF
	QCommonStyle_PTR() *QCommonStyle
}

type QCompleter

type QCompleter struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQCompleter

func NewQCompleter(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QCompleter

Constructs a completer object with the given parent.

func NewQCompleterFromPointer

func NewQCompleterFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCompleter

func NewQCompleter_1

func NewQCompleter_1(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QCompleter

Constructs a completer object with the given parent.

func NewQCompleter_1_

func NewQCompleter_1_(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF) *QCompleter

Constructs a completer object with the given parent.

func NewQCompleter_2

func NewQCompleter_2(completions qtcore.QStringList_ITF, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QCompleter

Constructs a completer object with the given parent.

func NewQCompleter_2_

func NewQCompleter_2_(completions qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *QCompleter

Constructs a completer object with the given parent.

func NewQCompleter__

func NewQCompleter__() *QCompleter

Constructs a completer object with the given parent.

func (*QCompleter) Activated

func (this *QCompleter) Activated(text string)

This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is activated by the user (by clicking or pressing return). The item's text is given.

Note: Signal activated is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(completer, QOverload<const QString &>::of(&QCompleter::activated),
    [=](const QString &text){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QCompleter) Activated_1

func (this *QCompleter) Activated_1(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is activated by the user (by clicking or pressing return). The item's text is given.

Note: Signal activated is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(completer, QOverload<const QString &>::of(&QCompleter::activated),
    [=](const QString &text){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QCompleter) CaseSensitivity

func (this *QCompleter) CaseSensitivity() int

func (*QCompleter) Complete

func (this *QCompleter) Complete(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF)

For QCompleter::PopupCompletion and QCompletion::UnfilteredPopupCompletion modes, calling this function displays the popup displaying the current completions. By default, if rect is not specified, the popup is displayed on the bottom of the widget(). If rect is specified the popup is displayed on the left edge of the rectangle.

For QCompleter::InlineCompletion mode, the highlighted() signal is fired with the current completion.

func (*QCompleter) Complete__

func (this *QCompleter) Complete__()

For QCompleter::PopupCompletion and QCompletion::UnfilteredPopupCompletion modes, calling this function displays the popup displaying the current completions. By default, if rect is not specified, the popup is displayed on the bottom of the widget(). If rect is specified the popup is displayed on the left edge of the rectangle.

For QCompleter::InlineCompletion mode, the highlighted() signal is fired with the current completion.

func (*QCompleter) CompletionColumn

func (this *QCompleter) CompletionColumn() int

func (*QCompleter) CompletionCount

func (this *QCompleter) CompletionCount() int

Returns the number of completions for the current prefix. For an unsorted model with a large number of items this can be expensive. Use setCurrentRow() and currentCompletion() to iterate through all the completions.

func (*QCompleter) CompletionMode

func (this *QCompleter) CompletionMode() int

func (*QCompleter) CompletionModel

func (this *QCompleter) CompletionModel() *qtcore.QAbstractItemModel

Returns the completion model. The completion model is a read-only list model that contains all the possible matches for the current completion prefix. The completion model is auto-updated to reflect the current completions.

Note: The return value of this function is defined to be an QAbstractItemModel purely for generality. This actual kind of model returned is an instance of an QAbstractProxyModel subclass.

See also completionPrefix and model().

func (*QCompleter) CompletionPrefix

func (this *QCompleter) CompletionPrefix() string

func (*QCompleter) CompletionRole

func (this *QCompleter) CompletionRole() int

func (*QCompleter) CurrentCompletion

func (this *QCompleter) CurrentCompletion() string

Returns the current completion string. This includes the completionPrefix. When used alongside setCurrentRow(), it can be used to iterate through all the matches.

See also setCurrentRow() and currentIndex().

func (*QCompleter) CurrentIndex

func (this *QCompleter) CurrentIndex() *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the model index of the current completion in the completionModel().

See also setCurrentRow(), currentCompletion(), and model().

func (*QCompleter) CurrentRow

func (this *QCompleter) CurrentRow() int

Returns the current row.

See also setCurrentRow().

func (*QCompleter) Event

func (this *QCompleter) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QCompleter) EventFilter

func (this *QCompleter) EventFilter(o qtcore.QObject_ITF, e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QCompleter) FilterMode

func (this *QCompleter) FilterMode() int

func (*QCompleter) GetCthis

func (this *QCompleter) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QCompleter) Highlighted

func (this *QCompleter) Highlighted(text string)

This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is highlighted by the user. It is also sent if complete() is called with the completionMode() set to QCompleter::InlineCompletion. The item's text is given.

Note: Signal highlighted is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(completer, QOverload<const QString &>::of(&QCompleter::highlighted),
    [=](const QString &text){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QCompleter) Highlighted_1

func (this *QCompleter) Highlighted_1(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is sent when an item in the popup() is highlighted by the user. It is also sent if complete() is called with the completionMode() set to QCompleter::InlineCompletion. The item's text is given.

Note: Signal highlighted is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(completer, QOverload<const QString &>::of(&QCompleter::highlighted),
    [=](const QString &text){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QCompleter) InheritEvent

func (this *QCompleter) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QCompleter) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QCompleter) InheritEventFilter(f func(o *qtcore.QObject, e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QCompleter) MaxVisibleItems

func (this *QCompleter) MaxVisibleItems() int

func (*QCompleter) MetaObject

func (this *QCompleter) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QCompleter) Model

func (this *QCompleter) Model() *qtcore.QAbstractItemModel

Returns the model that provides completion strings.

See also setModel() and completionModel().

func (*QCompleter) ModelSorting

func (this *QCompleter) ModelSorting() int

func (*QCompleter) NewFromPointer

func (*QCompleter) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QCompleter

func (*QCompleter) PathFromIndex

func (this *QCompleter) PathFromIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) string

Returns the path for the given index. The completer object uses this to obtain the completion text from the underlying model.

The default implementation returns the edit role of the item for list models. It returns the absolute file path if the model is a QFileSystemModel.

See also splitPath().

func (*QCompleter) Popup

func (this *QCompleter) Popup() *QAbstractItemView

Returns the popup used to display completions.

See also setPopup().

func (*QCompleter) QCompleter_PTR

func (ptr *QCompleter) QCompleter_PTR() *QCompleter

func (*QCompleter) SetCaseSensitivity

func (this *QCompleter) SetCaseSensitivity(caseSensitivity int)

func (*QCompleter) SetCompletionColumn

func (this *QCompleter) SetCompletionColumn(column int)

func (*QCompleter) SetCompletionMode

func (this *QCompleter) SetCompletionMode(mode int)

func (*QCompleter) SetCompletionPrefix

func (this *QCompleter) SetCompletionPrefix(prefix string)

func (*QCompleter) SetCompletionRole

func (this *QCompleter) SetCompletionRole(role int)

func (*QCompleter) SetCthis

func (this *QCompleter) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QCompleter) SetCurrentRow

func (this *QCompleter) SetCurrentRow(row int) bool

Sets the current row to the row specified. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.

This function may be used along with currentCompletion() to iterate through all the possible completions.

See also currentRow(), currentCompletion(), and completionCount().

func (*QCompleter) SetFilterMode

func (this *QCompleter) SetFilterMode(filterMode int)

func (*QCompleter) SetMaxVisibleItems

func (this *QCompleter) SetMaxVisibleItems(maxItems int)

func (*QCompleter) SetModel

func (this *QCompleter) SetModel(c qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Sets the model which provides completions to model. The model can be list model or a tree model. If a model has been already previously set and it has the QCompleter as its parent, it is deleted.

For convenience, if model is a QFileSystemModel, QCompleter switches its caseSensitivity to Qt::CaseInsensitive on Windows and Qt::CaseSensitive on other platforms.

See also completionModel(), modelSorting, and Handling Tree Models.

func (*QCompleter) SetModelSorting

func (this *QCompleter) SetModelSorting(sorting int)

func (*QCompleter) SetPopup

func (this *QCompleter) SetPopup(popup QAbstractItemView_ITF)

Sets the popup used to display completions to popup. QCompleter takes ownership of the view.

A QListView is automatically created when the completionMode() is set to QCompleter::PopupCompletion or QCompleter::UnfilteredPopupCompletion. The default popup displays the completionColumn().

Ensure that this function is called before the view settings are modified. This is required since view's properties may require that a model has been set on the view (for example, hiding columns in the view requires a model to be set on the view).

See also popup().

func (*QCompleter) SetWidget

func (this *QCompleter) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the widget for which completion are provided for to widget. This function is automatically called when a QCompleter is set on a QLineEdit using QLineEdit::setCompleter() or on a QComboBox using QComboBox::setCompleter(). The widget needs to be set explicitly when providing completions for custom widgets.

See also widget(), setModel(), and setPopup().

func (*QCompleter) SetWrapAround

func (this *QCompleter) SetWrapAround(wrap bool)

func (*QCompleter) SplitPath

func (this *QCompleter) SplitPath(path string) *qtcore.QStringList

Splits the given path into strings that are used to match at each level in the model().

The default implementation of splitPath() splits a file system path based on QDir::separator() when the sourceModel() is a QFileSystemModel.

When used with list models, the first item in the returned list is used for matching.

See also pathFromIndex() and Handling Tree Models.

func (*QCompleter) Widget

func (this *QCompleter) Widget() *QWidget

Returns the widget for which the completer object is providing completions.

See also setWidget().

func (*QCompleter) WrapAround

func (this *QCompleter) WrapAround() bool

type QCompleter_ITF

type QCompleter_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QCompleter_PTR() *QCompleter
}

type QCompleter__CompletionMode

type QCompleter__CompletionMode = int

This enum specifies how completions are provided to the user.

See also setCompletionMode().

const QCompleter__InlineCompletion QCompleter__CompletionMode = 2

Completions appear inline (as selected text).

const QCompleter__PopupCompletion QCompleter__CompletionMode = 0

Current completions are displayed in a popup window.

const QCompleter__UnfilteredPopupCompletion QCompleter__CompletionMode = 1

All possible completions are displayed in a popup window with the most likely suggestion indicated as current.

type QCompleter__ModelSorting

type QCompleter__ModelSorting = int

This enum specifies how the items in the model are sorted.

See also setModelSorting().

const QCompleter__CaseInsensitivelySortedModel QCompleter__ModelSorting = 2

The model is sorted case insensitively.

const QCompleter__CaseSensitivelySortedModel QCompleter__ModelSorting = 1

The model is sorted case sensitively.

const QCompleter__UnsortedModel QCompleter__ModelSorting = 0

The model is unsorted.

type QDataWidgetMapper

type QDataWidgetMapper struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQDataWidgetMapper

func NewQDataWidgetMapper(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QDataWidgetMapper

Constructs a new QDataWidgetMapper with parent object parent. By default, the orientation is horizontal and the submit policy is AutoSubmit.

See also setOrientation() and setSubmitPolicy().

func NewQDataWidgetMapperFromPointer

func NewQDataWidgetMapperFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDataWidgetMapper

func NewQDataWidgetMapper__

func NewQDataWidgetMapper__() *QDataWidgetMapper

Constructs a new QDataWidgetMapper with parent object parent. By default, the orientation is horizontal and the submit policy is AutoSubmit.

See also setOrientation() and setSubmitPolicy().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) AddMapping

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) AddMapping(widget QWidget_ITF, section int)

Adds a mapping between a widget and a section from the model. The section is a column in the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise a row.

For the following example, we assume a model myModel that has two columns: the first one contains the names of people in a group, and the second column contains their ages. The first column is mapped to the QLineEdit nameLineEdit, and the second is mapped to the QSpinBox ageSpinBox:

QDataWidgetMapper *mapper = new QDataWidgetMapper();
mapper->setModel(myModel);
mapper->addMapping(nameLineEdit, 0);
mapper->addMapping(ageSpinBox, 1);

Notes:

If the widget is already mapped to a section, the old mapping will be replaced by the new one. Only one-to-one mappings between sections and widgets are allowed. It is not possible to map a single section to multiple widgets, or to map a single widget to multiple sections.

See also removeMapping(), mappedSection(), and clearMapping().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) AddMapping_1

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) AddMapping_1(widget QWidget_ITF, section int, propertyName qtcore.QByteArray_ITF)

Adds a mapping between a widget and a section from the model. The section is a column in the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise a row.

For the following example, we assume a model myModel that has two columns: the first one contains the names of people in a group, and the second column contains their ages. The first column is mapped to the QLineEdit nameLineEdit, and the second is mapped to the QSpinBox ageSpinBox:

QDataWidgetMapper *mapper = new QDataWidgetMapper();
mapper->setModel(myModel);
mapper->addMapping(nameLineEdit, 0);
mapper->addMapping(ageSpinBox, 1);

Notes:

If the widget is already mapped to a section, the old mapping will be replaced by the new one. Only one-to-one mappings between sections and widgets are allowed. It is not possible to map a single section to multiple widgets, or to map a single widget to multiple sections.

See also removeMapping(), mappedSection(), and clearMapping().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) ClearMapping

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) ClearMapping()

Clears all mappings.

See also addMapping() and removeMapping().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) CurrentIndex

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) CurrentIndex() int

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) CurrentIndexChanged

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) CurrentIndexChanged(index int)

This signal is emitted after the current index has changed and all widgets were populated with new data. index is the new current index.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

See also currentIndex() and setCurrentIndex().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) GetCthis

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) ItemDelegate

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) ItemDelegate() *QAbstractItemDelegate

Returns the current item delegate.

See also setItemDelegate().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) MappedPropertyName

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) MappedPropertyName(widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QByteArray

Returns the name of the property that is used when mapping data to the given widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also mappedSection(), addMapping(), and removeMapping().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) MappedSection

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) MappedSection(widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the section the widget is mapped to or -1 if the widget is not mapped.

See also addMapping() and removeMapping().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) MappedWidgetAt

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) MappedWidgetAt(section int) *QWidget

Returns the widget that is mapped at section, or 0 if no widget is mapped at that section.

See also addMapping() and removeMapping().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) MetaObject

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) Model

Returns the current model.

See also setModel().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) NewFromPointer

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDataWidgetMapper

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) Orientation

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) Orientation() int

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) QDataWidgetMapper_PTR

func (ptr *QDataWidgetMapper) QDataWidgetMapper_PTR() *QDataWidgetMapper

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) RemoveMapping

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) RemoveMapping(widget QWidget_ITF)

Removes the mapping for the given widget.

See also addMapping() and clearMapping().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) Revert

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) Revert()

Repopulates all widgets with the current data of the model. All unsubmitted changes will be lost.

See also submit() and setSubmitPolicy().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) RootIndex

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) RootIndex() *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the current root index.

See also setRootIndex().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetCthis

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetCurrentIndex(index int)

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetCurrentModelIndex

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetCurrentModelIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the current index to the row of the index if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise to the column of the index.

Calls setCurrentIndex() internally. This convenience slot can be connected to the signal currentRowChanged() or currentColumnChanged() of another view's selection model.

The following example illustrates how to update all widgets with new data whenever the selection of a QTableView named myTableView changes:

QDataWidgetMapper *mapper = new QDataWidgetMapper();
connect(myTableView->selectionModel(), SIGNAL(currentRowChanged(QModelIndex,QModelIndex)),
        mapper, SLOT(setCurrentModelIndex(QModelIndex)));

See also currentIndex().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetItemDelegate

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetItemDelegate(delegate QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF)

Sets the item delegate to delegate. The delegate will be used to write data from the model into the widget and from the widget to the model, using QAbstractItemDelegate::setEditorData() and QAbstractItemDelegate::setModelData().

The delegate also decides when to apply data and when to change the editor, using QAbstractItemDelegate::commitData() and QAbstractItemDelegate::closeEditor().

Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between widget mappers or views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.

See also itemDelegate().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetModel

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetModel(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Sets the current model to model. If another model was set, all mappings to that old model are cleared.

See also model().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetOrientation

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetOrientation(aOrientation int)

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetRootIndex

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetRootIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the root item to index. This can be used to display a branch of a tree. Pass an invalid model index to display the top-most branch.

See also rootIndex().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SetSubmitPolicy

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SetSubmitPolicy(policy int)

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) Submit

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) Submit() bool

Submits all changes from the mapped widgets to the model.

For every mapped section, the item delegate reads the current value from the widget and sets it in the model. Finally, the model's submit() method is invoked.

Returns true if all the values were submitted, otherwise false.

Note: For database models, QSqlQueryModel::lastError() can be used to retrieve the last error.

See also revert() and setSubmitPolicy().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) SubmitPolicy

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) SubmitPolicy() int

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) ToFirst

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) ToFirst()

Populates the widgets with data from the first row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the first column.

This is equivalent to calling setCurrentIndex(0).

See also toLast() and setCurrentIndex().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) ToLast

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) ToLast()

Populates the widgets with data from the last row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the last column.

Calls setCurrentIndex() internally.

See also toFirst() and setCurrentIndex().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) ToNext

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) ToNext()

Populates the widgets with data from the next row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the next column.

Calls setCurrentIndex() internally. Does nothing if there is no next row in the model.

See also toPrevious() and setCurrentIndex().

func (*QDataWidgetMapper) ToPrevious

func (this *QDataWidgetMapper) ToPrevious()

Populates the widgets with data from the previous row of the model if the orientation is horizontal (the default), otherwise with data from the previous column.

Calls setCurrentIndex() internally. Does nothing if there is no previous row in the model.

See also toNext() and setCurrentIndex().

type QDataWidgetMapper_ITF

type QDataWidgetMapper_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QDataWidgetMapper_PTR() *QDataWidgetMapper
}

type QDataWidgetMapper__SubmitPolicy

type QDataWidgetMapper__SubmitPolicy = int

This enum describes the possible submit policies a QDataWidgetMapper supports.

const QDataWidgetMapper__AutoSubmit QDataWidgetMapper__SubmitPolicy = 0

Whenever a widget loses focus, the widget's current value is set to the item model.

const QDataWidgetMapper__ManualSubmit QDataWidgetMapper__SubmitPolicy = 1

The model is not updated until submit() is called.

type QDateEdit

type QDateEdit struct {
	*QDateTimeEdit
}

func NewQDateEdit

func NewQDateEdit(parent QWidget_ITF) *QDateEdit

func NewQDateEditFromPointer

func NewQDateEditFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDateEdit

func NewQDateEdit_1

func NewQDateEdit_1(date qtcore.QDate_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDateEdit

func NewQDateEdit_1_

func NewQDateEdit_1_(date qtcore.QDate_ITF) *QDateEdit

func NewQDateEdit__

func NewQDateEdit__() *QDateEdit

func (*QDateEdit) GetCthis

func (this *QDateEdit) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDateEdit) MetaObject

func (this *QDateEdit) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDateEdit) NewFromPointer

func (*QDateEdit) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDateEdit

func (*QDateEdit) QDateEdit_PTR

func (ptr *QDateEdit) QDateEdit_PTR() *QDateEdit

func (*QDateEdit) SetCthis

func (this *QDateEdit) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDateEdit) UserDateChanged

func (this *QDateEdit) UserDateChanged(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

type QDateEdit_ITF

type QDateEdit_ITF interface {
	QDateTimeEdit_ITF
	QDateEdit_PTR() *QDateEdit
}

type QDateTimeEdit

type QDateTimeEdit struct {
	*QAbstractSpinBox
}

func NewQDateTimeEdit

func NewQDateTimeEdit(parent QWidget_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEditFromPointer

func NewQDateTimeEditFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDateTimeEdit

func NewQDateTimeEdit_1

func NewQDateTimeEdit_1(dt qtcore.QDateTime_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit_1_

func NewQDateTimeEdit_1_(dt qtcore.QDateTime_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit_2

func NewQDateTimeEdit_2(d qtcore.QDate_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit_2_

func NewQDateTimeEdit_2_(d qtcore.QDate_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit_3

func NewQDateTimeEdit_3(t qtcore.QTime_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit_3_

func NewQDateTimeEdit_3_(t qtcore.QTime_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit_4

func NewQDateTimeEdit_4(val qtcore.QVariant_ITF, parserType int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit_4_

func NewQDateTimeEdit_4_(val qtcore.QVariant_ITF, parserType int) *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func NewQDateTimeEdit__

func NewQDateTimeEdit__() *QDateTimeEdit

Constructs an empty date time editor with a parent.

func (*QDateTimeEdit) CalendarPopup

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) CalendarPopup() bool

func (*QDateTimeEdit) CalendarWidget

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) CalendarWidget() *QCalendarWidget

Returns the calendar widget for the editor if calendarPopup is set to true and (sections() & DateSections_Mask) != 0.

This function creates and returns a calendar widget if none has been set.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setCalendarWidget().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) Clear

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) Clear()

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::clear().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) ClearMaximumDate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) ClearMaximumDate()

func (*QDateTimeEdit) ClearMaximumDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) ClearMaximumDateTime()

func (*QDateTimeEdit) ClearMaximumTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) ClearMaximumTime()

func (*QDateTimeEdit) ClearMinimumDate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) ClearMinimumDate()

func (*QDateTimeEdit) ClearMinimumDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) ClearMinimumDateTime()

func (*QDateTimeEdit) ClearMinimumTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) ClearMinimumTime()

func (*QDateTimeEdit) CurrentSection

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) CurrentSection() int

func (*QDateTimeEdit) CurrentSectionIndex

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) CurrentSectionIndex() int

func (*QDateTimeEdit) Date

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) Date() *qtcore.QDate

Returns the date of the date time edit.

Note: Getter function for property date.

See also setDate().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) DateChanged

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) DateChanged(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the date is changed. The new date is passed in date.

Note: Notifier signal for property date.

func (*QDateTimeEdit) DateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) DateTime() *qtcore.QDateTime

func (*QDateTimeEdit) DateTimeChanged

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) DateTimeChanged(dateTime qtcore.QDateTime_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the date or time is changed. The new date and time is passed in datetime.

Note: Notifier signal for property dateTime.

func (*QDateTimeEdit) DateTimeFromText

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) DateTimeFromText(text string) *qtcore.QDateTime

Returns an appropriate datetime for the given text.

This virtual function is used by the datetime edit whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value.

See also textFromDateTime() and validate().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) DisplayFormat

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) DisplayFormat() string

func (*QDateTimeEdit) DisplayedSections

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) DisplayedSections() int

func (*QDateTimeEdit) Event

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) Fixup

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) Fixup(input string)

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::fixup().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) FocusInEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) GetCthis

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritDateTimeFromText

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritDateTimeFromText(f func(text string) unsafe.Pointer)

QDateTime dateTimeFromText(const class QString &)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritFixup

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritFixup(f func(input string))

void fixup(class QString &)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionSpinBox))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionSpinBox *)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritStepEnabled

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritStepEnabled(f func() int)

QAbstractSpinBox::StepEnabled stepEnabled()

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritTextFromDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritTextFromDateTime(f func(dt *qtcore.QDateTime) unsafe.Pointer)

QString textFromDateTime(const class QDateTime &)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritValidate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritValidate(f func(input string, pos int) int)

QValidator::State validate(class QString &, int &)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) InitStyleOption

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionSpinBox_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QDataTimeEdit. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSpinBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MaximumDate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MaximumDate() *qtcore.QDate

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MaximumDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MaximumDateTime() *qtcore.QDateTime

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MaximumTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MaximumTime() *qtcore.QTime

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MetaObject

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MinimumDate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MinimumDate() *qtcore.QDate

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MinimumDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MinimumDateTime() *qtcore.QDateTime

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MinimumTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MinimumTime() *qtcore.QTime

func (*QDateTimeEdit) MousePressEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) NewFromPointer

func (*QDateTimeEdit) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDateTimeEdit

func (*QDateTimeEdit) PaintEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) QDateTimeEdit_PTR

func (ptr *QDateTimeEdit) QDateTimeEdit_PTR() *QDateTimeEdit

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SectionAt

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SectionAt(index int) int

Returns the Section at index.

If the format is 'yyyy/MM/dd', sectionAt(0) returns YearSection, sectionAt(1) returns MonthSection, and sectionAt(2) returns YearSection,

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SectionCount

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SectionCount() int

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SectionText

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SectionText(section int) string

Returns the text from the given section.

See also currentSection().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetCalendarPopup

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetCalendarPopup(enable bool)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetCalendarWidget

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetCalendarWidget(calendarWidget QCalendarWidget_ITF)

Sets the given calendarWidget as the widget to be used for the calendar pop-up. The editor does not automatically take ownership of the calendar widget.

Note: calendarPopup must be set to true before setting the calendar widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also calendarWidget() and calendarPopup.

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetCthis

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetCurrentSection

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetCurrentSection(section int)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetCurrentSectionIndex

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetCurrentSectionIndex(index int)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetDate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetDate(date qtcore.QDate_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetDateRange

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetDateRange(min qtcore.QDate_ITF, max qtcore.QDate_ITF)

Convenience function to set minimum and maximum date with one function call.

setDateRange(min, max);

is analogous to:

setMinimumDate(min);
setMaximumDate(max);

If either min or max are not valid, this function does nothing.

See also setMinimumDate(), maximumDate(), setMaximumDate(), clearMinimumDate(), setMinimumTime(), maximumTime(), setMaximumTime(), clearMinimumTime(), and QDate::isValid().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetDateTime(dateTime qtcore.QDateTime_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetDateTimeRange

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetDateTimeRange(min qtcore.QDateTime_ITF, max qtcore.QDateTime_ITF)

Convenience function to set minimum and maximum date time with one function call.

setDateTimeRange(min, max);

is analogous to:

setMinimumDateTime(min);
setMaximumDateTime(max);

If either min or max are not valid, this function does nothing.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setMinimumDate(), maximumDate(), setMaximumDate(), clearMinimumDate(), setMinimumTime(), maximumTime(), setMaximumTime(), clearMinimumTime(), and QDateTime::isValid().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetDisplayFormat

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetDisplayFormat(format string)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetMaximumDate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetMaximumDate(max qtcore.QDate_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetMaximumDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetMaximumDateTime(dt qtcore.QDateTime_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetMaximumTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetMaximumTime(max qtcore.QTime_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetMinimumDate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetMinimumDate(min qtcore.QDate_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetMinimumDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetMinimumDateTime(dt qtcore.QDateTime_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetMinimumTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetMinimumTime(min qtcore.QTime_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetSelectedSection

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetSelectedSection(section int)

Selects section. If section doesn't exist in the currently displayed sections, this function does nothing. If section is NoSection, this function will unselect all text in the editor. Otherwise, this function will move the cursor and the current section to the selected section.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also currentSection().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetTime(time qtcore.QTime_ITF)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetTimeRange

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetTimeRange(min qtcore.QTime_ITF, max qtcore.QTime_ITF)

Convenience function to set minimum and maximum time with one function call.

setTimeRange(min, max);

is analogous to:

setMinimumTime(min);
setMaximumTime(max);

If either min or max are not valid, this function does nothing.

See also setMinimumDate(), maximumDate(), setMaximumDate(), clearMinimumDate(), setMinimumTime(), maximumTime(), setMaximumTime(), clearMinimumTime(), and QTime::isValid().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SetTimeSpec

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SetTimeSpec(spec int)

func (*QDateTimeEdit) SizeHint

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) StepBy

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) StepBy(steps int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::stepBy().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) StepEnabled

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) StepEnabled() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::stepEnabled().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) TextFromDateTime

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) TextFromDateTime(dt qtcore.QDateTime_ITF) string

This virtual function is used by the date time edit whenever it needs to display dateTime.

If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement validate().

See also dateTimeFromText() and validate().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) Time

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) Time() *qtcore.QTime

Returns the time of the date time edit.

Note: Getter function for property time.

See also setTime().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) TimeChanged

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) TimeChanged(time qtcore.QTime_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the time is changed. The new time is passed in time.

Note: Notifier signal for property time.

func (*QDateTimeEdit) TimeSpec

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) TimeSpec() int

func (*QDateTimeEdit) Validate

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) Validate(input string, pos int) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::validate().

func (*QDateTimeEdit) WheelEvent

func (this *QDateTimeEdit) WheelEvent(event qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QDateTimeEdit_ITF

type QDateTimeEdit_ITF interface {
	QAbstractSpinBox_ITF
	QDateTimeEdit_PTR() *QDateTimeEdit
}

type QDateTimeEdit__Section

type QDateTimeEdit__Section = int
const QDateTimeEdit__AmPmSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 1
const QDateTimeEdit__DateSections_Mask QDateTimeEdit__Section = 1792
const QDateTimeEdit__DaySection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 256
const QDateTimeEdit__HourSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 16
const QDateTimeEdit__MSecSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 2
const QDateTimeEdit__MinuteSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 8
const QDateTimeEdit__MonthSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 512
const QDateTimeEdit__NoSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 0
const QDateTimeEdit__SecondSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 4
const QDateTimeEdit__TimeSections_Mask QDateTimeEdit__Section = 31
const QDateTimeEdit__YearSection QDateTimeEdit__Section = 1024

type QDesktopWidget

type QDesktopWidget struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQDesktopWidget

func NewQDesktopWidget() *QDesktopWidget

func NewQDesktopWidgetFromPointer

func NewQDesktopWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDesktopWidget

func QApplication_Desktop

func QApplication_Desktop() *QDesktopWidget

func (*QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry

func (this *QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry(screen int) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the available geometry of the screen with index screen. What is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the platform decides is available (for example excludes the dock and menu bar on macOS, or the task bar on Windows). The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber(), screenGeometry(), and QScreen::availableGeometry().

func (*QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry_1

func (this *QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry_1(widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the available geometry of the screen with index screen. What is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the platform decides is available (for example excludes the dock and menu bar on macOS, or the task bar on Windows). The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber(), screenGeometry(), and QScreen::availableGeometry().

func (*QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry_2

func (this *QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry_2(point qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the available geometry of the screen with index screen. What is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the platform decides is available (for example excludes the dock and menu bar on macOS, or the task bar on Windows). The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber(), screenGeometry(), and QScreen::availableGeometry().

func (*QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry__

func (this *QDesktopWidget) AvailableGeometry__() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the available geometry of the screen with index screen. What is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the platform decides is available (for example excludes the dock and menu bar on macOS, or the task bar on Windows). The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber(), screenGeometry(), and QScreen::availableGeometry().

func (*QDesktopWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QDesktopWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDesktopWidget) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QDesktopWidget) InheritResizeEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QDesktopWidget) IsVirtualDesktop

func (this *QDesktopWidget) IsVirtualDesktop() bool

func (*QDesktopWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QDesktopWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDesktopWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QDesktopWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDesktopWidget

func (*QDesktopWidget) NumScreens

func (this *QDesktopWidget) NumScreens() int

func (*QDesktopWidget) PrimaryScreen

func (this *QDesktopWidget) PrimaryScreen() int

func (*QDesktopWidget) PrimaryScreenChanged

func (this *QDesktopWidget) PrimaryScreenChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the primary screen changes.

Note: This doesn't mean the QDesktopWidget::primaryScreen index will necessarily be different, but now it will refer to the new primary screen.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.6.

Note: Notifier signal for property primaryScreen.

See also primaryScreen and screenGeometry().

func (*QDesktopWidget) QDesktopWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QDesktopWidget) QDesktopWidget_PTR() *QDesktopWidget

func (*QDesktopWidget) ResizeEvent

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ResizeEvent(e qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QDesktopWidget) Resized

func (this *QDesktopWidget) Resized(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted when the size of screen changes.

func (*QDesktopWidget) Screen

func (this *QDesktopWidget) Screen(screen int) *QWidget

Returns a widget that represents the screen with index screen (a value of -1 means the default screen).

If the system uses a virtual desktop, the returned widget will have the geometry of the entire virtual desktop; i.e., bounding every screen.

See also primaryScreen, screenCount, and virtualDesktop.

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenCount

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenCount() int

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenCountChanged

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenCountChanged(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted when the number of screens changes to newCount.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

Note: Notifier signal for property screenCount.

See also screenCount.

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry(screen int) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of the screen with index screen. The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber().

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry_1

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry_1(widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of the screen with index screen. The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber().

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry_2

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry_2(point qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of the screen with index screen. The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber().

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry__

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenGeometry__() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of the screen with index screen. The default screen is used if screen is -1.

See also screenNumber().

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenNumber

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenNumber(widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the index of the screen that contains the largest part of widget, or -1 if the widget not on a screen.

See also primaryScreen.

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenNumber_1

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenNumber_1(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) int

Returns the index of the screen that contains the largest part of widget, or -1 if the widget not on a screen.

See also primaryScreen.

func (*QDesktopWidget) ScreenNumber__

func (this *QDesktopWidget) ScreenNumber__() int

Returns the index of the screen that contains the largest part of widget, or -1 if the widget not on a screen.

See also primaryScreen.

func (*QDesktopWidget) Screen__

func (this *QDesktopWidget) Screen__() *QWidget

Returns a widget that represents the screen with index screen (a value of -1 means the default screen).

If the system uses a virtual desktop, the returned widget will have the geometry of the entire virtual desktop; i.e., bounding every screen.

See also primaryScreen, screenCount, and virtualDesktop.

func (*QDesktopWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QDesktopWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDesktopWidget) WorkAreaResized

func (this *QDesktopWidget) WorkAreaResized(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted when the work area available on screen changes.

type QDesktopWidget_ITF

type QDesktopWidget_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QDesktopWidget_PTR() *QDesktopWidget
}

type QDial

type QDial struct {
	*QAbstractSlider
}

func NewQDial

func NewQDial(parent QWidget_ITF) *QDial

Constructs a dial.

The parent argument is sent to the QAbstractSlider constructor.

func NewQDialFromPointer

func NewQDialFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDial

func NewQDial__

func NewQDial__() *QDial

Constructs a dial.

The parent argument is sent to the QAbstractSlider constructor.

func (*QDial) Event

func (this *QDial) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QDial) GetCthis

func (this *QDial) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDial) InheritEvent

func (this *QDial) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QDial) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QDial) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionSlider))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionSlider *)

func (*QDial) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QDial) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(me *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QDial) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QDial) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(me *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QDial) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QDial) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(me *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QDial) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QDial) InheritPaintEvent(f func(pe *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QDial) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QDial) InheritResizeEvent(f func(re *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QDial) InheritSliderChange

func (this *QDial) InheritSliderChange(f func(change int))

void sliderChange(enum QAbstractSlider::SliderChange)

func (*QDial) InitStyleOption

func (this *QDial) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionSlider_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QDial. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSlider, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QDial) MetaObject

func (this *QDial) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDial) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QDial) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QDial) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QDial) MouseMoveEvent(me qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QDial) MousePressEvent

func (this *QDial) MousePressEvent(me qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QDial) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QDial) MouseReleaseEvent(me qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QDial) NewFromPointer

func (*QDial) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDial

func (*QDial) NotchSize

func (this *QDial) NotchSize() int

func (*QDial) NotchTarget

func (this *QDial) NotchTarget() float64

func (*QDial) NotchesVisible

func (this *QDial) NotchesVisible() bool

func (*QDial) PaintEvent

func (this *QDial) PaintEvent(pe qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QDial) QDial_PTR

func (ptr *QDial) QDial_PTR() *QDial

func (*QDial) ResizeEvent

func (this *QDial) ResizeEvent(re qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QDial) SetCthis

func (this *QDial) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDial) SetNotchTarget

func (this *QDial) SetNotchTarget(target float64)

func (*QDial) SetNotchesVisible

func (this *QDial) SetNotchesVisible(visible bool)

func (*QDial) SetWrapping

func (this *QDial) SetWrapping(on bool)

func (*QDial) SizeHint

func (this *QDial) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QDial) SliderChange

func (this *QDial) SliderChange(change int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractSlider::sliderChange().

func (*QDial) Wrapping

func (this *QDial) Wrapping() bool

type QDial_ITF

type QDial_ITF interface {
	QAbstractSlider_ITF
	QDial_PTR() *QDial
}

type QDialog

type QDialog struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQDialog

func NewQDialog(parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QDialog

Constructs a dialog with parent parent.

A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also share the parent's taskbar entry.

The widget flags f are passed on to the QWidget constructor. If, for example, you don't want a What's This button in the title bar of the dialog, pass Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint in f.

See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().

func NewQDialogFromPointer

func NewQDialogFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDialog

func NewQDialog__

func NewQDialog__() *QDialog

Constructs a dialog with parent parent.

A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also share the parent's taskbar entry.

The widget flags f are passed on to the QWidget constructor. If, for example, you don't want a What's This button in the title bar of the dialog, pass Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint in f.

See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().

func NewQDialog__1

func NewQDialog__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QDialog

Constructs a dialog with parent parent.

A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also share the parent's taskbar entry.

The widget flags f are passed on to the QWidget constructor. If, for example, you don't want a What's This button in the title bar of the dialog, pass Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint in f.

See also QWidget::setWindowFlags().

func (*QDialog) Accept

func (this *QDialog) Accept()

Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Accepted.

See also reject() and done().

func (*QDialog) Accepted

func (this *QDialog) Accepted()

This signal is emitted when the dialog has been accepted either by the user or by calling accept() or done() with the QDialog::Accepted argument.

Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also finished() and rejected().

func (*QDialog) AdjustPosition

func (this *QDialog) AdjustPosition(arg0 QWidget_ITF)

func (*QDialog) CloseEvent

func (this *QDialog) CloseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().

func (*QDialog) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QDialog) ContextMenuEvent(arg0 qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QDialog) Done

func (this *QDialog) Done(arg0 int)

Closes the dialog and sets its result code to r. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return r.

As with QWidget::close(), done() deletes the dialog if the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose flag is set. If the dialog is the application's main widget, the application terminates. If the dialog is the last window closed, the QApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted.

See also accept(), reject(), QApplication::activeWindow(), and QCoreApplication::quit().

func (*QDialog) EventFilter

func (this *QDialog) EventFilter(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QDialog) Exec

func (this *QDialog) Exec() int

Shows the dialog as a modal dialog, blocking until the user closes it. The function returns a DialogCode result.

If the dialog is application modal, users cannot interact with any other window in the same application until they close the dialog. If the dialog is window modal, only interaction with the parent window is blocked while the dialog is open. By default, the dialog is application modal.

See also open(), show(), result(), and setWindowModality().

func (*QDialog) Extension

func (this *QDialog) Extension() *QWidget

func (*QDialog) Finished

func (this *QDialog) Finished(result int)

This signal is emitted when the dialog's result code has been set, either by the user or by calling done(), accept(), or reject().

Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also accepted() and rejected().

func (*QDialog) GetCthis

func (this *QDialog) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDialog) InheritAdjustPosition

func (this *QDialog) InheritAdjustPosition(f func(arg0 *QWidget))

void adjustPosition(class QWidget *)

func (*QDialog) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QDialog) InheritCloseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QDialog) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QDialog) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QDialog) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QDialog) InheritEventFilter(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QObject, arg1 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QDialog) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QDialog) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QDialog) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QDialog) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QDialog) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QDialog) InheritShowEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QDialog) IsSizeGripEnabled

func (this *QDialog) IsSizeGripEnabled() bool

func (*QDialog) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QDialog) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QDialog) MetaObject

func (this *QDialog) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDialog) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QDialog) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QDialog) NewFromPointer

func (*QDialog) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDialog

func (*QDialog) Open

func (this *QDialog) Open()

Shows the dialog as a window modal dialog, returning immediately.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also exec(), show(), result(), and setWindowModality().

func (*QDialog) Orientation

func (this *QDialog) Orientation() int

func (*QDialog) QDialog_PTR

func (ptr *QDialog) QDialog_PTR() *QDialog

func (*QDialog) Reject

func (this *QDialog) Reject()

Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Rejected.

See also accept() and done().

func (*QDialog) Rejected

func (this *QDialog) Rejected()

This signal is emitted when the dialog has been rejected either by the user or by calling reject() or done() with the QDialog::Rejected argument.

Note that this signal is not emitted when hiding the dialog with hide() or setVisible(false). This includes deleting the dialog while it is visible.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also finished() and accepted().

func (*QDialog) ResizeEvent

func (this *QDialog) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QDialog) Result

func (this *QDialog) Result() int

In general returns the modal dialog's result code, Accepted or Rejected.

Note: When called on a QMessageBox instance, the returned value is a value of the QMessageBox::StandardButton enum.

Do not call this function if the dialog was constructed with the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose attribute.

See also setResult().

func (*QDialog) SetCthis

func (this *QDialog) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDialog) SetExtension

func (this *QDialog) SetExtension(extension QWidget_ITF)

func (*QDialog) SetModal

func (this *QDialog) SetModal(modal bool)

func (*QDialog) SetOrientation

func (this *QDialog) SetOrientation(orientation int)

func (*QDialog) SetResult

func (this *QDialog) SetResult(r int)

Sets the modal dialog's result code to i.

Note: We recommend that you use one of the values defined by QDialog::DialogCode.

See also result().

func (*QDialog) SetSizeGripEnabled

func (this *QDialog) SetSizeGripEnabled(arg0 bool)

func (*QDialog) SetVisible

func (this *QDialog) SetVisible(visible bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QDialog) ShowEvent

func (this *QDialog) ShowEvent(arg0 qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QDialog) ShowExtension

func (this *QDialog) ShowExtension(arg0 bool)

func (*QDialog) SizeHint

func (this *QDialog) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

type QDialogButtonBox

type QDialogButtonBox struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQDialogButtonBox

func NewQDialogButtonBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func NewQDialogButtonBoxFromPointer

func NewQDialogButtonBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDialogButtonBox

func NewQDialogButtonBox_1

func NewQDialogButtonBox_1(orientation int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func NewQDialogButtonBox_1_

func NewQDialogButtonBox_1_(orientation int) *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func NewQDialogButtonBox_2

func NewQDialogButtonBox_2(buttons int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func NewQDialogButtonBox_2_

func NewQDialogButtonBox_2_(buttons int) *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func NewQDialogButtonBox_3

func NewQDialogButtonBox_3(buttons int, orientation int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func NewQDialogButtonBox_3_

func NewQDialogButtonBox_3_(buttons int, orientation int) *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func NewQDialogButtonBox__

func NewQDialogButtonBox__() *QDialogButtonBox

Constructs an empty, horizontal button box with the given parent.

See also orientation and addButton().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) Accepted

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) Accepted()

This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the AcceptRole or YesRole.

See also rejected(), clicked(), and helpRequested().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) AddButton

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) AddButton(button QAbstractButton_ITF, role int)

Adds the given button to the button box with the specified role. If the role is invalid, the button is not added.

If the button has already been added, it is removed and added again with the new role.

Note: The button box takes ownership of the button.

See also removeButton() and clear().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) AddButton_1

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) AddButton_1(text string, role int) *QPushButton

Adds the given button to the button box with the specified role. If the role is invalid, the button is not added.

If the button has already been added, it is removed and added again with the new role.

Note: The button box takes ownership of the button.

See also removeButton() and clear().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) AddButton_2

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) AddButton_2(button int) *QPushButton

Adds the given button to the button box with the specified role. If the role is invalid, the button is not added.

If the button has already been added, it is removed and added again with the new role.

Note: The button box takes ownership of the button.

See also removeButton() and clear().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) Button

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) Button(which int) *QPushButton

Returns the QPushButton corresponding to the standard button which, or 0 if the standard button doesn't exist in this button box.

See also standardButton(), standardButtons(), and buttons().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) ButtonRole

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) ButtonRole(button QAbstractButton_ITF) int

Returns the button role for the specified button. This function returns InvalidRole if button is 0 or has not been added to the button box.

See also buttons() and addButton().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) CenterButtons

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) CenterButtons() bool

func (*QDialogButtonBox) ChangeEvent

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) Clear

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) Clear()

Clears the button box, deleting all buttons within it.

See also removeButton() and addButton().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) Clicked

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) Clicked(button QAbstractButton_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked. The specific button that was pressed is specified by button.

See also accepted(), rejected(), and helpRequested().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) Event

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) GetCthis

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDialogButtonBox) HelpRequested

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) HelpRequested()

This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the HelpRole.

See also accepted(), rejected(), and clicked().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QDialogButtonBox) InheritEvent

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QDialogButtonBox) MetaObject

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDialogButtonBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QDialogButtonBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDialogButtonBox

func (*QDialogButtonBox) Orientation

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) Orientation() int

func (*QDialogButtonBox) QDialogButtonBox_PTR

func (ptr *QDialogButtonBox) QDialogButtonBox_PTR() *QDialogButtonBox

func (*QDialogButtonBox) Rejected

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) Rejected()

This signal is emitted when a button inside the button box is clicked, as long as it was defined with the RejectRole or NoRole.

See also accepted(), helpRequested(), and clicked().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) RemoveButton

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) RemoveButton(button QAbstractButton_ITF)

Removes button from the button box without deleting it and sets its parent to zero.

See also clear(), buttons(), and addButton().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) SetCenterButtons

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) SetCenterButtons(center bool)

func (*QDialogButtonBox) SetCthis

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDialogButtonBox) SetOrientation

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) SetOrientation(orientation int)

func (*QDialogButtonBox) SetStandardButtons

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) SetStandardButtons(buttons int)

func (*QDialogButtonBox) StandardButton

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) StandardButton(button QAbstractButton_ITF) int

Returns the standard button enum value corresponding to the given button, or NoButton if the given button isn't a standard button.

See also button(), buttons(), and standardButtons().

func (*QDialogButtonBox) StandardButtons

func (this *QDialogButtonBox) StandardButtons() int

type QDialogButtonBox_ITF

type QDialogButtonBox_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QDialogButtonBox_PTR() *QDialogButtonBox
}

type QDialogButtonBox__ButtonLayout

type QDialogButtonBox__ButtonLayout = int

This enum describes the layout policy to be used when arranging the buttons contained in the button box.

The button layout is specified by the current style. However, on the X11 platform, it may be influenced by the desktop environment.

const QDialogButtonBox__AndroidLayout QDialogButtonBox__ButtonLayout = 5
const QDialogButtonBox__GnomeLayout QDialogButtonBox__ButtonLayout = 3

Use a policy appropriate for applications on GNOME.

const QDialogButtonBox__KdeLayout QDialogButtonBox__ButtonLayout = 2

Use a policy appropriate for applications on KDE.

const QDialogButtonBox__MacLayout QDialogButtonBox__ButtonLayout = 1

Use a policy appropriate for applications on macOS.

const QDialogButtonBox__WinLayout QDialogButtonBox__ButtonLayout = 0

Use a policy appropriate for applications on Windows.

type QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole

type QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = int

This enum describes the roles that can be used to describe buttons in the button box. Combinations of these roles are as flags used to describe different aspects of their behavior.

See also StandardButton.

const QDialogButtonBox__AcceptRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 0

Clicking the button causes the dialog to be accepted (e.g. OK).

const QDialogButtonBox__ActionRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 3

Clicking the button causes changes to the elements within the dialog.

const QDialogButtonBox__ApplyRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 8

The button applies current changes.

const QDialogButtonBox__DestructiveRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 2

Clicking the button causes a destructive change (e.g. for Discarding Changes) and closes the dialog.

const QDialogButtonBox__HelpRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 4

The button can be clicked to request help.

const QDialogButtonBox__InvalidRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = -1
const QDialogButtonBox__NRoles QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 9
const QDialogButtonBox__NoRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 6

The button is a "No"-like button.

const QDialogButtonBox__RejectRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 1

Clicking the button causes the dialog to be rejected (e.g. Cancel).

const QDialogButtonBox__ResetRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 7

The button resets the dialog's fields to default values.

const QDialogButtonBox__YesRole QDialogButtonBox__ButtonRole = 5

The button is a "Yes"-like button.

type QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton

type QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = int
const QDialogButtonBox__Abort QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 262144
const QDialogButtonBox__Apply QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 33554432
const QDialogButtonBox__Cancel QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 4194304
const QDialogButtonBox__Close QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 2097152
const QDialogButtonBox__Discard QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 8388608
const QDialogButtonBox__FirstButton QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 1024
const QDialogButtonBox__Help QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 16777216
const QDialogButtonBox__Ignore QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 1048576
const QDialogButtonBox__LastButton QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 134217728
const QDialogButtonBox__No QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 65536
const QDialogButtonBox__NoButton QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 0
const QDialogButtonBox__NoToAll QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 131072
const QDialogButtonBox__Ok QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 1024
const QDialogButtonBox__Open QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 8192
const QDialogButtonBox__Reset QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 67108864
const QDialogButtonBox__RestoreDefaults QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 134217728
const QDialogButtonBox__Retry QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 524288
const QDialogButtonBox__Save QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 2048
const QDialogButtonBox__SaveAll QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 4096
const QDialogButtonBox__Yes QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 16384
const QDialogButtonBox__YesToAll QDialogButtonBox__StandardButton = 32768

type QDialog_ITF

type QDialog_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QDialog_PTR() *QDialog
}

type QDialog__DialogCode

type QDialog__DialogCode = int

The value returned by a modal dialog.

ConstantValue QDialog::Accepted1 QDialog::Rejected0

const QDialog__Accepted QDialog__DialogCode = 1
const QDialog__Rejected QDialog__DialogCode = 0

type QDirModel

type QDirModel struct {
	*qtcore.QAbstractItemModel
}

func NewQDirModel

func NewQDirModel(nameFilters qtcore.QStringList_ITF, filters int, sort int, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QDirModel

Constructs a new directory model with the given parent. Only those files matching the nameFilters and the filters are included in the model. The sort order is given by the sort flags.

func NewQDirModelFromPointer

func NewQDirModelFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDirModel

func NewQDirModel_1

func NewQDirModel_1(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QDirModel

Constructs a new directory model with the given parent. Only those files matching the nameFilters and the filters are included in the model. The sort order is given by the sort flags.

func NewQDirModel_1_

func NewQDirModel_1_() *QDirModel

Constructs a new directory model with the given parent. Only those files matching the nameFilters and the filters are included in the model. The sort order is given by the sort flags.

func NewQDirModel__

func NewQDirModel__(nameFilters qtcore.QStringList_ITF, filters int, sort int) *QDirModel

Constructs a new directory model with the given parent. Only those files matching the nameFilters and the filters are included in the model. The sort order is given by the sort flags.

func (*QDirModel) ColumnCount

func (this *QDirModel) ColumnCount(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().

Returns the number of columns in the parent model item.

func (*QDirModel) ColumnCount__

func (this *QDirModel) ColumnCount__() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().

Returns the number of columns in the parent model item.

func (*QDirModel) Data

func (this *QDirModel) Data(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, role int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().

Returns the data for the model item index with the given role.

See also setData().

func (*QDirModel) Data__

func (this *QDirModel) Data__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().

Returns the data for the model item index with the given role.

See also setData().

func (*QDirModel) DropMimeData

func (this *QDirModel) DropMimeData(data qtcore.QMimeData_ITF, action int, row int, column int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::dropMimeData().

Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action over the row in the model specified by the row and column and by the parent index.

Returns true if the drop was successful, and false otherwise.

See also supportedDropActions().

func (*QDirModel) FileIcon

func (this *QDirModel) FileIcon(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns the icons for the item stored in the model under the given index.

func (*QDirModel) FileInfo

func (this *QDirModel) FileInfo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QFileInfo

Returns the file information for the specified model index.

Note: If the model index represents a symbolic link in the underlying filing system, the file information returned will contain information about the symbolic link itself, regardless of whether resolveSymlinks is enabled or not.

See also QFileInfo::symLinkTarget().

func (*QDirModel) FileName

func (this *QDirModel) FileName(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) string

Returns the name of the item stored in the model under the index given.

func (*QDirModel) FilePath

func (this *QDirModel) FilePath(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) string

Returns the path of the item stored in the model under the index given.

func (*QDirModel) Filter

func (this *QDirModel) Filter() int

Returns the filter specification for the directory model.

See also setFilter() and QDir::Filters.

func (*QDirModel) Flags

func (this *QDirModel) Flags(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().

Returns the item flags for the given index in the model.

See also Qt::ItemFlags.

func (*QDirModel) GetCthis

func (this *QDirModel) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDirModel) HasChildren

func (this *QDirModel) HasChildren(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().

Returns true if the parent model item has children; otherwise returns false.

func (*QDirModel) HasChildren__

func (this *QDirModel) HasChildren__() bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().

Returns true if the parent model item has children; otherwise returns false.

func (*QDirModel) HeaderData

func (this *QDirModel) HeaderData(section int, orientation int, role int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

Returns the data stored under the given role for the specified section of the header with the given orientation.

func (*QDirModel) HeaderData__

func (this *QDirModel) HeaderData__(section int, orientation int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

Returns the data stored under the given role for the specified section of the header with the given orientation.

func (*QDirModel) IconProvider

func (this *QDirModel) IconProvider() *QFileIconProvider

Returns the file icon provider for this directory model.

See also setIconProvider().

func (*QDirModel) Index

func (this *QDirModel) Index(row int, column int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

Returns the model item index for the item in the parent with the given row and column.

func (*QDirModel) Index_1

func (this *QDirModel) Index_1(path string, column int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

Returns the model item index for the item in the parent with the given row and column.

func (*QDirModel) Index_1_

func (this *QDirModel) Index_1_(path string) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

Returns the model item index for the item in the parent with the given row and column.

func (*QDirModel) Index__

func (this *QDirModel) Index__(row int, column int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

Returns the model item index for the item in the parent with the given row and column.

func (*QDirModel) IsDir

func (this *QDirModel) IsDir(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Returns true if the model item index represents a directory; otherwise returns false.

func (*QDirModel) IsReadOnly

func (this *QDirModel) IsReadOnly() bool

func (*QDirModel) LazyChildCount

func (this *QDirModel) LazyChildCount() bool

func (*QDirModel) MetaObject

func (this *QDirModel) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDirModel) MimeTypes

func (this *QDirModel) MimeTypes() *qtcore.QStringList

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().

Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of items in the model.

func (*QDirModel) Mkdir

func (this *QDirModel) Mkdir(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, name string) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Create a directory with the name in the parent model item.

func (*QDirModel) NameFilters

func (this *QDirModel) NameFilters() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns a list of filters applied to the names in the model.

See also setNameFilters().

func (*QDirModel) NewFromPointer

func (*QDirModel) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDirModel

func (*QDirModel) Parent

func (this *QDirModel) Parent(child qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().

Return the parent of the given child model item.

func (*QDirModel) QDirModel_PTR

func (ptr *QDirModel) QDirModel_PTR() *QDirModel

func (*QDirModel) Refresh

func (this *QDirModel) Refresh(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

QDirModel caches file information. This function updates the cache. The parent parameter is the directory from which the model is updated; the default value will update the model from root directory of the file system (the entire model).

func (*QDirModel) Refresh__

func (this *QDirModel) Refresh__()

QDirModel caches file information. This function updates the cache. The parent parameter is the directory from which the model is updated; the default value will update the model from root directory of the file system (the entire model).

func (*QDirModel) Remove

func (this *QDirModel) Remove(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Removes the model item index from the directory model and deletes the corresponding file from the file system, returning true if successful. If the item cannot be removed, false is returned.

Warning: This function deletes files from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.

See also rmdir().

func (this *QDirModel) ResolveSymlinks() bool

func (*QDirModel) Rmdir

func (this *QDirModel) Rmdir(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Removes the directory corresponding to the model item index in the directory model and deletes the corresponding directory from the file system, returning true if successful. If the directory cannot be removed, false is returned.

Warning: This function deletes directories from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.

See also remove().

func (*QDirModel) RowCount

func (this *QDirModel) RowCount(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().

Returns the number of rows in the parent model item.

func (*QDirModel) RowCount__

func (this *QDirModel) RowCount__() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().

Returns the number of rows in the parent model item.

func (*QDirModel) SetCthis

func (this *QDirModel) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDirModel) SetData

func (this *QDirModel) SetData(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF, role int) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().

Sets the data for the model item index with the given role to the data referenced by the value. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.

See also data() and Qt::ItemDataRole.

func (*QDirModel) SetData__

func (this *QDirModel) SetData__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().

Sets the data for the model item index with the given role to the data referenced by the value. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.

See also data() and Qt::ItemDataRole.

func (*QDirModel) SetFilter

func (this *QDirModel) SetFilter(filters int)

Sets the directory model's filter to that specified by filters.

Note that the filter you set should always include the QDir::AllDirs enum value, otherwise QDirModel won't be able to read the directory structure.

See also filter() and QDir::Filters.

func (*QDirModel) SetIconProvider

func (this *QDirModel) SetIconProvider(provider QFileIconProvider_ITF)

Sets the provider of file icons for the directory model.

See also iconProvider().

func (*QDirModel) SetLazyChildCount

func (this *QDirModel) SetLazyChildCount(enable bool)

func (*QDirModel) SetNameFilters

func (this *QDirModel) SetNameFilters(filters qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Sets the name filters for the directory model.

See also nameFilters().

func (*QDirModel) SetReadOnly

func (this *QDirModel) SetReadOnly(enable bool)
func (this *QDirModel) SetResolveSymlinks(enable bool)

func (*QDirModel) SetSorting

func (this *QDirModel) SetSorting(sort int)

Sets the directory model's sorting order to that specified by sort.

See also sorting() and QDir::SortFlags.

func (*QDirModel) Sort

func (this *QDirModel) Sort(column int, order int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().

Sort the model items in the column using the order given. The order is a value defined in Qt::SortOrder.

func (*QDirModel) Sort__

func (this *QDirModel) Sort__(column int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().

Sort the model items in the column using the order given. The order is a value defined in Qt::SortOrder.

func (*QDirModel) Sorting

func (this *QDirModel) Sorting() int

Returns the sorting method used for the directory model.

See also setSorting() and QDir::SortFlags.

func (*QDirModel) SupportedDropActions

func (this *QDirModel) SupportedDropActions() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().

Returns the drop actions supported by this model.

See also Qt::DropActions.

type QDirModel_ITF

type QDirModel_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF
	QDirModel_PTR() *QDirModel
}

type QDirModel__Roles

type QDirModel__Roles = int

ConstantValue QDirModel::FileIconRoleQt::DecorationRole QDirModel::FilePathRoleQt::UserRole + 1 QDirModel::FileNameRole?

const QDirModel__FileIconRole QDirModel__Roles = 1
const QDirModel__FileNameRole QDirModel__Roles = 258
const QDirModel__FilePathRole QDirModel__Roles = 257

type QDockWidget

type QDockWidget struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQDockWidget

func NewQDockWidget(title string, parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QDockWidget

Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.

The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQDockWidgetFromPointer

func NewQDockWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDockWidget

func NewQDockWidget_1

func NewQDockWidget_1(parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QDockWidget

Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.

The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQDockWidget_1_

func NewQDockWidget_1_() *QDockWidget

Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.

The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQDockWidget_1_1

func NewQDockWidget_1_1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QDockWidget

Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.

The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQDockWidget__

func NewQDockWidget__(title string) *QDockWidget

Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.

The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQDockWidget__1

func NewQDockWidget__1(title string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QDockWidget

Constructs a QDockWidget with parent parent and window flags flags. The dock widget will be placed in the left dock widget area.

The window title is set to title. This title is used when the QDockWidget is docked and undocked. It is also used in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func (*QDockWidget) AllowedAreas

func (this *QDockWidget) AllowedAreas() int

func (*QDockWidget) AllowedAreasChanged

func (this *QDockWidget) AllowedAreasChanged(allowedAreas int)

This signal is emitted when the allowedAreas property changes. The allowedAreas parameter gives the new value of the property.

Note: Notifier signal for property allowedAreas.

func (*QDockWidget) ChangeEvent

func (this *QDockWidget) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QDockWidget) CloseEvent

func (this *QDockWidget) CloseEvent(event qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().

func (*QDockWidget) DockLocationChanged

func (this *QDockWidget) DockLocationChanged(area int)

This signal is emitted when the dock widget is moved to another dock area, or is moved to a different location in its current dock area. This happens when the dock widget is moved programmatically or is dragged to a new location by the user.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QDockWidget) Event

func (this *QDockWidget) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QDockWidget) Features

func (this *QDockWidget) Features() int

func (*QDockWidget) FeaturesChanged

func (this *QDockWidget) FeaturesChanged(features int)

This signal is emitted when the features property changes. The features parameter gives the new value of the property.

Note: Notifier signal for property features.

func (*QDockWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QDockWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDockWidget) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QDockWidget) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QDockWidget) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QDockWidget) InheritCloseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QDockWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QDockWidget) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QDockWidget) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QDockWidget) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionDockWidget))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionDockWidget *)

func (*QDockWidget) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QDockWidget) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QDockWidget) InitStyleOption

func (this *QDockWidget) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionDockWidget_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QDockWidget. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionDockWidget, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QDockWidget) IsAreaAllowed

func (this *QDockWidget) IsAreaAllowed(area int) bool

Returns true if this dock widget can be placed in the given area; otherwise returns false.

func (*QDockWidget) IsFloating

func (this *QDockWidget) IsFloating() bool

func (*QDockWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QDockWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDockWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QDockWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDockWidget

func (*QDockWidget) PaintEvent

func (this *QDockWidget) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QDockWidget) QDockWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QDockWidget) QDockWidget_PTR() *QDockWidget

func (*QDockWidget) SetAllowedAreas

func (this *QDockWidget) SetAllowedAreas(areas int)

func (*QDockWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QDockWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDockWidget) SetFeatures

func (this *QDockWidget) SetFeatures(features int)

func (*QDockWidget) SetFloating

func (this *QDockWidget) SetFloating(floating bool)

func (*QDockWidget) SetTitleBarWidget

func (this *QDockWidget) SetTitleBarWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets an arbitrary widget as the dock widget's title bar. If widget is 0, any custom title bar widget previously set on the dock widget is removed, but not deleted, and the default title bar will be used instead.

If a title bar widget is set, QDockWidget will not use native window decorations when it is floated.

Here are some tips for implementing custom title bars:

Mouse events that are not explicitly handled by the title bar widget must be ignored by calling QMouseEvent::ignore(). These events then propagate to the QDockWidget parent, which handles them in the usual manner, moving when the title bar is dragged, docking and undocking when it is double-clicked, etc. When DockWidgetVerticalTitleBar is set on QDockWidget, the title bar widget is repositioned accordingly. In resizeEvent(), the title bar should check what orientation it should assume:

QDockWidget *dockWidget = qobject_cast<QDockWidget*>(parentWidget());
if (dockWidget->features() & QDockWidget::DockWidgetVerticalTitleBar) {
    // I need to be vertical
} else {
    // I need to be horizontal
}

The title bar widget must have a valid QWidget::sizeHint() and QWidget::minimumSizeHint(). These functions should take into account the current orientation of the title bar. It is not possible to remove a title bar from a dock widget. However, a similar effect can be achieved by setting a default constructed QWidget as the title bar widget.

Using qobject_cast() as shown above, the title bar widget has full access to its parent QDockWidget. Hence it can perform such operations as docking and hiding in response to user actions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also titleBarWidget() and DockWidgetVerticalTitleBar.

func (*QDockWidget) SetWidget

func (this *QDockWidget) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the widget for the dock widget to widget.

If the dock widget is visible when widget is added, you must show() it explicitly.

Note that you must add the layout of the widget before you call this function; if not, the widget will not be visible.

See also widget().

func (*QDockWidget) TitleBarWidget

func (this *QDockWidget) TitleBarWidget() *QWidget

Returns the custom title bar widget set on the QDockWidget, or 0 if no custom title bar has been set.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setTitleBarWidget().

func (*QDockWidget) ToggleViewAction

func (this *QDockWidget) ToggleViewAction() *QAction

Returns a checkable action that can be used to show or close this dock widget.

The action's text is set to the dock widget's window title.

See also QAction::text and QWidget::windowTitle.

func (*QDockWidget) TopLevelChanged

func (this *QDockWidget) TopLevelChanged(topLevel bool)

This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the dock widget is now floating; otherwise it is false.

See also isWindow().

func (*QDockWidget) VisibilityChanged

func (this *QDockWidget) VisibilityChanged(visible bool)

This signal is emitted when the dock widget becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown, as well as when it is docked in a tabbed dock area and its tab becomes selected or unselected.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QDockWidget) Widget

func (this *QDockWidget) Widget() *QWidget

Returns the widget for the dock widget. This function returns zero if the widget has not been set.

See also setWidget().

type QDockWidget_ITF

type QDockWidget_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QDockWidget_PTR() *QDockWidget
}

type QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature

type QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = int
const QDockWidget__AllDockWidgetFeatures QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 7
const QDockWidget__DockWidgetClosable QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 1
const QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeatureMask QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 15
const QDockWidget__DockWidgetFloatable QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 4
const QDockWidget__DockWidgetMovable QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 2
const QDockWidget__DockWidgetVerticalTitleBar QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 8
const QDockWidget__NoDockWidgetFeatures QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 0
const QDockWidget__Reserved QDockWidget__DockWidgetFeature = 255

type QDoubleSpinBox

type QDoubleSpinBox struct {
	*QAbstractSpinBox
}

func NewQDoubleSpinBox

func NewQDoubleSpinBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QDoubleSpinBox

func NewQDoubleSpinBoxFromPointer

func NewQDoubleSpinBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDoubleSpinBox

func NewQDoubleSpinBox__

func NewQDoubleSpinBox__() *QDoubleSpinBox

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) CleanText

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) CleanText() string

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Decimals

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Decimals() int

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Fixup

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Fixup(str string)

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::fixup().

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) GetCthis

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Maximum

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Maximum() float64

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) MetaObject

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Minimum

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Minimum() float64

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QDoubleSpinBox

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Prefix

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Prefix() string

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) QDoubleSpinBox_PTR

func (ptr *QDoubleSpinBox) QDoubleSpinBox_PTR() *QDoubleSpinBox

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetCthis

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetDecimals

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetDecimals(prec int)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetMaximum

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetMaximum(max float64)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetMinimum

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetMinimum(min float64)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetPrefix

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetPrefix(prefix string)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetRange

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetRange(min float64, max float64)

Convenience function to set the minimum, and maximum values with a single function call.

setRange(minimum, maximum);

is equivalent to:

setMinimum(minimum);
setMaximum(maximum);

See also minimum and maximum.

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetSingleStep

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetSingleStep(val float64)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetSuffix

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetSuffix(suffix string)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SetValue

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SetValue(val float64)

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) SingleStep

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) SingleStep() float64

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Suffix

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Suffix() string

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) TextFromValue

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) TextFromValue(val float64) string

This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to display the given value. The default implementation returns a string containing value printed in the standard way using QWidget::locale().toString(), but with the thousand separator removed unless setGroupSeparatorShown() is set. Reimplementations may return anything. (See the example in the detailed description.)

Note: QSpinBox does not call this function for specialValueText() and that neither prefix() nor suffix() should be included in the return value.

If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement valueFromText() and validate()

See also valueFromText(), validate(), and QLocale::groupSeparator().

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Validate

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Validate(input string, pos int) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::validate().

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) Value

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) Value() float64

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) ValueChanged

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) ValueChanged(arg0 float64)

This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value's integer value is passed in i.

Note: Signal valueChanged is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(spinBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QSpinBox::valueChanged),
    [=](int i){ \/* ... *\/ });

Note: Notifier signal for property value.

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) ValueChanged_1

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) ValueChanged_1(arg0 string)

This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value's integer value is passed in i.

Note: Signal valueChanged is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(spinBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QSpinBox::valueChanged),
    [=](int i){ \/* ... *\/ });

Note: Notifier signal for property value.

func (*QDoubleSpinBox) ValueFromText

func (this *QDoubleSpinBox) ValueFromText(text string) float64

This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value.

Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric way need to reimplement this function.

Note: QSpinBox handles specialValueText() separately; this function is only concerned with the other values.

See also textFromValue() and validate().

type QDoubleSpinBox_ITF

type QDoubleSpinBox_ITF interface {
	QAbstractSpinBox_ITF
	QDoubleSpinBox_PTR() *QDoubleSpinBox
}

type QErrorMessage

type QErrorMessage struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQErrorMessage

func NewQErrorMessage(parent QWidget_ITF) *QErrorMessage

Constructs and installs an error handler window with the given parent.

func NewQErrorMessageFromPointer

func NewQErrorMessageFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QErrorMessage

func NewQErrorMessage__

func NewQErrorMessage__() *QErrorMessage

Constructs and installs an error handler window with the given parent.

func QErrorMessage_QtHandler

func QErrorMessage_QtHandler() *QErrorMessage

func (*QErrorMessage) ChangeEvent

func (this *QErrorMessage) ChangeEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QErrorMessage) Done

func (this *QErrorMessage) Done(arg0 int)

Reimplemented from QDialog::done().

func (*QErrorMessage) GetCthis

func (this *QErrorMessage) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QErrorMessage) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QErrorMessage) InheritChangeEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QErrorMessage) InheritDone

func (this *QErrorMessage) InheritDone(f func(arg0 int))

void done(int)

func (*QErrorMessage) MetaObject

func (this *QErrorMessage) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QErrorMessage) NewFromPointer

func (*QErrorMessage) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QErrorMessage

func (*QErrorMessage) QErrorMessage_PTR

func (ptr *QErrorMessage) QErrorMessage_PTR() *QErrorMessage

func (*QErrorMessage) QtHandler

func (this *QErrorMessage) QtHandler() *QErrorMessage

Returns a pointer to a QErrorMessage object that outputs the default Qt messages. This function creates such an object, if there isn't one already.

func (*QErrorMessage) SetCthis

func (this *QErrorMessage) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QErrorMessage) ShowMessage

func (this *QErrorMessage) ShowMessage(message string)

Shows the given message, message, and returns immediately. If the user has requested for the message not to be shown again, this function does nothing.

Normally, the message is displayed immediately. However, if there are pending messages, it will be queued to be displayed later.

func (*QErrorMessage) ShowMessage_1

func (this *QErrorMessage) ShowMessage_1(message string, type_ string)

Shows the given message, message, and returns immediately. If the user has requested for the message not to be shown again, this function does nothing.

Normally, the message is displayed immediately. However, if there are pending messages, it will be queued to be displayed later.

type QErrorMessage_ITF

type QErrorMessage_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QErrorMessage_PTR() *QErrorMessage
}

type QFileDialog

type QFileDialog struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQFileDialog

func NewQFileDialog(parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QFileDialog

Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.

func NewQFileDialogFromPointer

func NewQFileDialogFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFileDialog

func NewQFileDialog_1

func NewQFileDialog_1(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, directory string, filter string) *QFileDialog

Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.

func NewQFileDialog_1_

func NewQFileDialog_1_() *QFileDialog

Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.

func NewQFileDialog_1_1

func NewQFileDialog_1_1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QFileDialog

Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.

func NewQFileDialog_1_2

func NewQFileDialog_1_2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) *QFileDialog

Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.

func NewQFileDialog_1_3

func NewQFileDialog_1_3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, directory string) *QFileDialog

Constructs a file dialog with the given parent and widget flags.

func (*QFileDialog) Accept

func (this *QFileDialog) Accept()

Reimplemented from QDialog::accept().

func (*QFileDialog) AcceptMode

func (this *QFileDialog) AcceptMode() int

func (*QFileDialog) ChangeEvent

func (this *QFileDialog) ChangeEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QFileDialog) ConfirmOverwrite

func (this *QFileDialog) ConfirmOverwrite() bool

func (*QFileDialog) CurrentChanged

func (this *QFileDialog) CurrentChanged(path string)

When the current file changes for local operations, this signal is emitted with the new file name as the path parameter.

See also filesSelected().

func (*QFileDialog) CurrentUrlChanged

func (this *QFileDialog) CurrentUrlChanged(url qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

When the current file changes, this signal is emitted with the new file URL as the url parameter.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also urlsSelected().

func (*QFileDialog) DefaultSuffix

func (this *QFileDialog) DefaultSuffix() string

func (*QFileDialog) Directory

func (this *QFileDialog) Directory() *qtcore.QDir

Returns the directory currently being displayed in the dialog.

See also setDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) DirectoryEntered

func (this *QFileDialog) DirectoryEntered(directory string)

This signal is emitted for local operations when the user enters a directory.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QFileDialog) DirectoryUrl

func (this *QFileDialog) DirectoryUrl() *qtcore.QUrl

Returns the url of the directory currently being displayed in the dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also setDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) DirectoryUrlEntered

func (this *QFileDialog) DirectoryUrlEntered(directory qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the user enters a directory.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QFileDialog) Done

func (this *QFileDialog) Done(result int)

Reimplemented from QDialog::done().

func (*QFileDialog) FileMode

func (this *QFileDialog) FileMode() int

func (*QFileDialog) FileSelected

func (this *QFileDialog) FileSelected(file string)

When the selection changes for local operations and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) selected file.

See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.

func (*QFileDialog) FilesSelected

func (this *QFileDialog) FilesSelected(files qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

When the selection changes for local operations and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) list of selected files.

See also currentChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.

func (*QFileDialog) Filter

func (this *QFileDialog) Filter() int

Returns the filter that is used when displaying files.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setFilter().

func (*QFileDialog) FilterSelected

func (this *QFileDialog) FilterSelected(filter string)

This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QFileDialog) GetCthis

func (this *QFileDialog) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, options int) string

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user.

QString dir = QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(this, tr("Open Directory"),
                                                "/home",
                                                QFileDialog::ShowDirsOnly
                                                | QFileDialog::DontResolveSymlinks);

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is set to caption. Either of these may be an empty string in which case the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass. To ensure a native file dialog, ShowDirsOnly must be set.

On Windows and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. However, the native Windows file dialog does not support displaying files in the directory chooser. You need to pass DontUseNativeDialog to display files using a QFileDialog.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

On Windows, the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, options int, supportedSchemes qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(). In particular parent, caption, dir and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote directory. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getExistingDirectory(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getSaveFileUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__() *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(). In particular parent, caption, dir and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote directory. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getExistingDirectory(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getSaveFileUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__1

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(). In particular parent, caption, dir and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote directory. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getExistingDirectory(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getSaveFileUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__2

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(). In particular parent, caption, dir and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote directory. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getExistingDirectory(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getSaveFileUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__3

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(). In particular parent, caption, dir and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote directory. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getExistingDirectory(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getSaveFileUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__4

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectoryUrl__4(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, options int) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(). In particular parent, caption, dir and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote directory. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getExistingDirectory(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getSaveFileUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__() string

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user.

QString dir = QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(this, tr("Open Directory"),
                                                "/home",
                                                QFileDialog::ShowDirsOnly
                                                | QFileDialog::DontResolveSymlinks);

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is set to caption. Either of these may be an empty string in which case the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass. To ensure a native file dialog, ShowDirsOnly must be set.

On Windows and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. However, the native Windows file dialog does not support displaying files in the directory chooser. You need to pass DontUseNativeDialog to display files using a QFileDialog.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

On Windows, the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__1

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__1(parent QWidget_ITF) string

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user.

QString dir = QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(this, tr("Open Directory"),
                                                "/home",
                                                QFileDialog::ShowDirsOnly
                                                | QFileDialog::DontResolveSymlinks);

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is set to caption. Either of these may be an empty string in which case the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass. To ensure a native file dialog, ShowDirsOnly must be set.

On Windows and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. However, the native Windows file dialog does not support displaying files in the directory chooser. You need to pass DontUseNativeDialog to display files using a QFileDialog.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

On Windows, the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__2

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) string

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user.

QString dir = QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(this, tr("Open Directory"),
                                                "/home",
                                                QFileDialog::ShowDirsOnly
                                                | QFileDialog::DontResolveSymlinks);

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is set to caption. Either of these may be an empty string in which case the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass. To ensure a native file dialog, ShowDirsOnly must be set.

On Windows and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. However, the native Windows file dialog does not support displaying files in the directory chooser. You need to pass DontUseNativeDialog to display files using a QFileDialog.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

On Windows, the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().

func (*QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__3

func (this *QFileDialog) GetExistingDirectory__3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string) string

This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user.

QString dir = QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(this, tr("Open Directory"),
                                                "/home",
                                                QFileDialog::ShowDirsOnly
                                                | QFileDialog::DontResolveSymlinks);

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is set to caption. Either of these may be an empty string in which case the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass. To ensure a native file dialog, ShowDirsOnly must be set.

On Windows and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. However, the native Windows file dialog does not support displaying files in the directory chooser. You need to pass DontUseNativeDialog to display files using a QFileDialog.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

On Windows, the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) string

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr("Open File"),
                                                "/home",
                                                tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__() string

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr("Open File"),
                                                "/home",
                                                tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__1

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__1(parent QWidget_ITF) string

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr("Open File"),
                                                "/home",
                                                tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__2

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) string

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr("Open File"),
                                                "/home",
                                                tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__3

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string) string

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr("Open File"),
                                                "/home",
                                                tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__4

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__4(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string) string

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr("Open File"),
                                                "/home",
                                                tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__5

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileName__5(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string) string

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns a null string.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(this, tr("Open File"),
                                                "/home",
                                                tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the given filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. If you want multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for example:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) *qtcore.QStringList

This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.

QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
                        this,
                        "Select one or more files to open",
                        "/home",
                        "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)");

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__() *qtcore.QStringList

This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.

QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
                        this,
                        "Select one or more files to open",
                        "/home",
                        "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)");

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__1

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QStringList

This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.

QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
                        this,
                        "Select one or more files to open",
                        "/home",
                        "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)");

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__2

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) *qtcore.QStringList

This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.

QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
                        this,
                        "Select one or more files to open",
                        "/home",
                        "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)");

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__3

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string) *qtcore.QStringList

This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.

QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
                        this,
                        "Select one or more files to open",
                        "/home",
                        "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)");

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__4

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__4(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string) *qtcore.QStringList

This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.

QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
                        this,
                        "Select one or more files to open",
                        "/home",
                        "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)");

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__5

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileNames__5(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string) *qtcore.QStringList

This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.

QStringList files = QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
                        this,
                        "Select one or more files to open",
                        "/home",
                        "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)");

This function creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter and filter may be empty strings. If you need multiple filters, separate them with ';;', for instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified then a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int, supportedSchemes qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__() *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__1

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__2

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__3

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__4

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__4(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__5

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__5(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__6

func (this *QFileDialog) GetOpenFileUrl__6(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to fetch the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileUrls(), getSaveFileUrl(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) string

This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.

It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr("Save File"),
                           "/home/jana/untitled.png",
                           tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On macOS, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__() string

This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.

It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr("Save File"),
                           "/home/jana/untitled.png",
                           tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On macOS, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__1

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__1(parent QWidget_ITF) string

This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.

It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr("Save File"),
                           "/home/jana/untitled.png",
                           tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On macOS, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__2

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) string

This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.

It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr("Save File"),
                           "/home/jana/untitled.png",
                           tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On macOS, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__3

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string) string

This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.

It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr("Save File"),
                           "/home/jana/untitled.png",
                           tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On macOS, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__4

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__4(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string) string

This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.

It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr("Save File"),
                           "/home/jana/untitled.png",
                           tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On macOS, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__5

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileName__5(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir string, filter string, selectedFilter string) string

This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.

It creates a modal file dialog with the given parent widget. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent widget.

QString fileName = QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(this, tr("Save File"),
                           "/home/jana/untitled.png",
                           tr("Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"));

The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. Only files that match the filter are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters dir, selectedFilter, and filter may be empty strings. Multiple filters are separated with ';;'. For instance:

"Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"

The options argument holds various options about how to run the dialog, see the QFileDialog::Option enum for more information on the flags you can pass.

The default filter can be chosen by setting selectedFilter to the desired value.

The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not specified, a default caption will be used.

On Windows, and macOS, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog.

On Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any QTimers, and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just below the parent's title bar. On macOS, with its native file dialog, the filter argument is ignored.

On Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If options includes DontResolveSymlinks the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFileDialog constructors.

See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int, supportedSchemes qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__() *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__1

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__2

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__2(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__3

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__3(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__4

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__4(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__5

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__5(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__6

func (this *QFileDialog) GetSaveFileUrl__6(parent QWidget_ITF, caption string, dir qtcore.QUrl_ITF, filter string, selectedFilter string, options int) *qtcore.QUrl

This is a convenience static function that returns a file selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the user presses Cancel, it returns an empty url.

The function is used similarly to QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). In particular parent, caption, dir, filter, selectedFilter and options are used in the exact same way.

The main difference with QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() comes from the ability offered to the user to select a remote file. That's why the return type and the type of dir is QUrl.

The supportedSchemes argument allows to restrict the type of URLs the user will be able to select. It is a way for the application to declare the protocols it will support to save the file content. An empty list means that no restriction is applied (the default). Supported for local files ("file" scheme) is implicit and always enabled; it is not necessary to include it in the restriction.

When possible, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a QFileDialog. On platforms which don't support selecting remote files, Qt will allow to select only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getSaveFileName(), getOpenFileUrl(), getOpenFileUrls(), and getExistingDirectoryUrl().

func (*QFileDialog) History

func (this *QFileDialog) History() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns the browsing history of the filedialog as a list of paths.

See also setHistory().

func (*QFileDialog) IconProvider

func (this *QFileDialog) IconProvider() *QFileIconProvider

Returns the icon provider used by the filedialog.

See also setIconProvider().

func (*QFileDialog) InheritAccept

func (this *QFileDialog) InheritAccept(f func())

void accept()

func (*QFileDialog) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QFileDialog) InheritChangeEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QFileDialog) InheritDone

func (this *QFileDialog) InheritDone(f func(result int))

void done(int)

func (*QFileDialog) IsNameFilterDetailsVisible

func (this *QFileDialog) IsNameFilterDetailsVisible() bool

func (*QFileDialog) IsReadOnly

func (this *QFileDialog) IsReadOnly() bool

func (*QFileDialog) ItemDelegate

func (this *QFileDialog) ItemDelegate() *QAbstractItemDelegate

Returns the item delegate used to render the items in the views in the filedialog.

See also setItemDelegate().

func (*QFileDialog) LabelText

func (this *QFileDialog) LabelText(label int) string

Returns the text shown in the filedialog in the specified label.

See also setLabelText().

func (*QFileDialog) MetaObject

func (this *QFileDialog) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QFileDialog) MimeTypeFilters

func (this *QFileDialog) MimeTypeFilters() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns the MIME type filters that are in operation on this file dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also setMimeTypeFilters().

func (*QFileDialog) NameFilters

func (this *QFileDialog) NameFilters() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns the file type filters that are in operation on this file dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setNameFilters().

func (*QFileDialog) NewFromPointer

func (*QFileDialog) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFileDialog

func (*QFileDialog) Open

func (this *QFileDialog) Open(receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string)

This is an overloaded function.

This function connects one of its signals to the slot specified by receiver and member. The specific signal depends is filesSelected() if fileMode is ExistingFiles and fileSelected() if fileMode is anything else.

The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QFileDialog) Options

func (this *QFileDialog) Options() int

func (*QFileDialog) ProxyModel

func (this *QFileDialog) ProxyModel() *qtcore.QAbstractProxyModel

Returns the proxy model used by the file dialog. By default no proxy is set.

See also setProxyModel().

func (*QFileDialog) QFileDialog_PTR

func (ptr *QFileDialog) QFileDialog_PTR() *QFileDialog
func (this *QFileDialog) ResolveSymlinks() bool

func (*QFileDialog) RestoreState

func (this *QFileDialog) RestoreState(state qtcore.QByteArray_ITF) bool

Restores the dialogs's layout, history and current directory to the state specified.

Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to restore the size from a past session.

Returns false if there are errors

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QFileDialog) SaveState

func (this *QFileDialog) SaveState() *qtcore.QByteArray

Saves the state of the dialog's layout, history and current directory.

Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to remember the size for a future session. A version number is stored as part of the data.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QFileDialog) SelectFile

func (this *QFileDialog) SelectFile(filename string)

Selects the given filename in the file dialog.

See also selectedFiles().

func (*QFileDialog) SelectMimeTypeFilter

func (this *QFileDialog) SelectMimeTypeFilter(filter string)

Sets the current MIME type filter.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QFileDialog) SelectNameFilter

func (this *QFileDialog) SelectNameFilter(filter string)

Sets the current file type filter. Multiple filters can be passed in filter by separating them with semicolons or spaces.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setNameFilter(), setNameFilters(), and selectedNameFilter().

func (*QFileDialog) SelectUrl

func (this *QFileDialog) SelectUrl(url qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

Selects the given url in the file dialog.

Note: The non-native QFileDialog supports only local files.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also selectedUrls().

func (*QFileDialog) SelectedFiles

func (this *QFileDialog) SelectedFiles() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns a list of strings containing the absolute paths of the selected files in the dialog. If no files are selected, or the mode is not ExistingFiles or ExistingFile, selectedFiles() contains the current path in the viewport.

See also selectedNameFilter() and selectFile().

func (*QFileDialog) SelectedMimeTypeFilter

func (this *QFileDialog) SelectedMimeTypeFilter() string

Returns The mimetype of the file that the user selected in the file dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.9.

func (*QFileDialog) SelectedNameFilter

func (this *QFileDialog) SelectedNameFilter() string

Returns the filter that the user selected in the file dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also selectedFiles().

func (*QFileDialog) SetAcceptMode

func (this *QFileDialog) SetAcceptMode(mode int)

func (*QFileDialog) SetConfirmOverwrite

func (this *QFileDialog) SetConfirmOverwrite(enabled bool)

func (*QFileDialog) SetCthis

func (this *QFileDialog) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFileDialog) SetDefaultSuffix

func (this *QFileDialog) SetDefaultSuffix(suffix string)

func (*QFileDialog) SetDirectory

func (this *QFileDialog) SetDirectory(directory string)

Sets the file dialog's current directory.

Note: On iOS, if you set directory to QStandardPaths::standardLocations(QStandardPaths::PicturesLocation).last(), a native image picker dialog will be used for accessing the user's photo album. The filename returned can be loaded using QFile and related APIs. For this to be enabled, the Info.plist assigned to QMAKE_INFO_PLIST in the project file must contain the key NSPhotoLibraryUsageDescription. See Info.plist documentation from Apple for more information regarding this key. This feature was added in Qt 5.5.

See also directory().

func (*QFileDialog) SetDirectoryUrl

func (this *QFileDialog) SetDirectoryUrl(directory qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

Sets the file dialog's current directory url.

Note: The non-native QFileDialog supports only local files.

Note: On Windows, it is possible to pass URLs representing one of the virtual folders, such as "Computer" or "Network". This is done by passing a QUrl using the scheme clsid followed by the CLSID value with the curly braces removed. For example the URL clsid:374DE290-123F-4565-9164-39C4925E467B denotes the download location. For a complete list of possible values, see the MSDN documentation on KNOWNFOLDERID. This feature was added in Qt 5.5.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also directoryUrl() and QUuid.

func (*QFileDialog) SetDirectory_1

func (this *QFileDialog) SetDirectory_1(directory qtcore.QDir_ITF)

Sets the file dialog's current directory.

Note: On iOS, if you set directory to QStandardPaths::standardLocations(QStandardPaths::PicturesLocation).last(), a native image picker dialog will be used for accessing the user's photo album. The filename returned can be loaded using QFile and related APIs. For this to be enabled, the Info.plist assigned to QMAKE_INFO_PLIST in the project file must contain the key NSPhotoLibraryUsageDescription. See Info.plist documentation from Apple for more information regarding this key. This feature was added in Qt 5.5.

See also directory().

func (*QFileDialog) SetFileMode

func (this *QFileDialog) SetFileMode(mode int)

func (*QFileDialog) SetFilter

func (this *QFileDialog) SetFilter(filters int)

Sets the filter used by the model to filters. The filter is used to specify the kind of files that should be shown.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also filter().

func (*QFileDialog) SetHistory

func (this *QFileDialog) SetHistory(paths qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Sets the browsing history of the filedialog to contain the given paths.

See also history().

func (*QFileDialog) SetIconProvider

func (this *QFileDialog) SetIconProvider(provider QFileIconProvider_ITF)

Sets the icon provider used by the filedialog to the specified provider.

See also iconProvider().

func (*QFileDialog) SetItemDelegate

func (this *QFileDialog) SetItemDelegate(delegate QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF)

Sets the item delegate used to render items in the views in the file dialog to the given delegate.

Warning: You should not share the same instance of a delegate between views. Doing so can cause incorrect or unintuitive editing behavior since each view connected to a given delegate may receive the closeEditor() signal, and attempt to access, modify or close an editor that has already been closed.

Note that the model used is QFileSystemModel. It has custom item data roles, which is described by the Roles enum. You can use a QFileIconProvider if you only want custom icons.

See also itemDelegate(), setIconProvider(), and QFileSystemModel.

func (*QFileDialog) SetLabelText

func (this *QFileDialog) SetLabelText(label int, text string)

Sets the text shown in the filedialog in the specified label.

See also labelText().

func (*QFileDialog) SetMimeTypeFilters

func (this *QFileDialog) SetMimeTypeFilters(filters qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Sets the filters used in the file dialog, from a list of MIME types.

Convenience method for setNameFilters(). Uses QMimeType to create a name filter from the glob patterns and description defined in each MIME type.

Use application/octet-stream for the "All files (*)" filter, since that is the base MIME type for all files.

Calling setMimeTypeFilters overrides any previously set name filters, and changes the return value of nameFilters().

QStringList mimeTypeFilters;
mimeTypeFilters << "image/jpeg" // will show "JPEG image (*.jpeg *.jpg *.jpe)
            << "image/png"  // will show "PNG image (*.png)"
            << "application/octet-stream"; // will show "All files (*)"

QFileDialog dialog(this);
dialog.setMimeTypeFilters(mimeTypeFilters);
dialog.exec();

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also mimeTypeFilters().

func (*QFileDialog) SetNameFilter

func (this *QFileDialog) SetNameFilter(filter string)

Sets the filter used in the file dialog to the given filter.

If filter contains a pair of parentheses containing one or more filename-wildcard patterns, separated by spaces, then only the text contained in the parentheses is used as the filter. This means that these calls are all equivalent:

dialog.setNameFilter("All C++ files (*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++)");
dialog.setNameFilter("*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++");

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setMimeTypeFilters() and setNameFilters().

func (*QFileDialog) SetNameFilterDetailsVisible

func (this *QFileDialog) SetNameFilterDetailsVisible(enabled bool)

func (*QFileDialog) SetNameFilters

func (this *QFileDialog) SetNameFilters(filters qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Sets the filters used in the file dialog.

Note that the filter *.* is not portable, because the historical assumption that the file extension determines the file type is not consistent on every operating system. It is possible to have a file with no dot in its name (for example, Makefile). In a native Windows file dialog, *.* will match such files, while in other types of file dialogs it may not. So it is better to use * if you mean to select any file.

QStringList filters;
filters << "Image files (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)"
        << "Text files (*.txt)"
        << "Any files (*)";

QFileDialog dialog(this);
dialog.setNameFilters(filters);
dialog.exec();

setMimeTypeFilters() has the advantage of providing all possible name filters for each file type. For example, JPEG images have three possible extensions; if your application can open such files, selecting the image/jpeg mime type as a filter will allow you to open all of them.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also nameFilters().

func (*QFileDialog) SetOption

func (this *QFileDialog) SetOption(option int, on bool)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QFileDialog) SetOption__

func (this *QFileDialog) SetOption__(option int)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QFileDialog) SetOptions

func (this *QFileDialog) SetOptions(options int)

func (*QFileDialog) SetProxyModel

func (this *QFileDialog) SetProxyModel(model qtcore.QAbstractProxyModel_ITF)

Sets the model for the views to the given proxyModel. This is useful if you want to modify the underlying model; for example, to add columns, filter data or add drives.

Any existing proxy model will be removed, but not deleted. The file dialog will take ownership of the proxyModel.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also proxyModel().

func (*QFileDialog) SetReadOnly

func (this *QFileDialog) SetReadOnly(enabled bool)
func (this *QFileDialog) SetResolveSymlinks(enabled bool)

func (*QFileDialog) SetSupportedSchemes

func (this *QFileDialog) SetSupportedSchemes(schemes qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

func (*QFileDialog) SetViewMode

func (this *QFileDialog) SetViewMode(mode int)

func (*QFileDialog) SetVisible

func (this *QFileDialog) SetVisible(visible bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QFileDialog) SupportedSchemes

func (this *QFileDialog) SupportedSchemes() *qtcore.QStringList

func (*QFileDialog) TestOption

func (this *QFileDialog) TestOption(option int) bool

Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also options and setOption().

func (*QFileDialog) UrlSelected

func (this *QFileDialog) UrlSelected(url qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

When the selection changes and the dialog is accepted, this signal is emitted with the (possibly empty) selected url.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also currentUrlChanged() and QDialog::Accepted.

func (*QFileDialog) ViewMode

func (this *QFileDialog) ViewMode() int

type QFileDialog_ITF

type QFileDialog_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QFileDialog_PTR() *QFileDialog
}

type QFileDialog__AcceptMode

type QFileDialog__AcceptMode = int

ConstantValue QFileDialog::AcceptOpen0 QFileDialog::AcceptSave1

const QFileDialog__AcceptOpen QFileDialog__AcceptMode = 0
const QFileDialog__AcceptSave QFileDialog__AcceptMode = 1

type QFileDialog__DialogLabel

type QFileDialog__DialogLabel = int

ConstantValue QFileDialog::LookIn0 QFileDialog::FileName1 QFileDialog::FileType2 QFileDialog::Accept3 QFileDialog::Reject4

const QFileDialog__Accept QFileDialog__DialogLabel = 3
const QFileDialog__FileName QFileDialog__DialogLabel = 1
const QFileDialog__FileType QFileDialog__DialogLabel = 2
const QFileDialog__LookIn QFileDialog__DialogLabel = 0
const QFileDialog__Reject QFileDialog__DialogLabel = 4

type QFileDialog__FileMode

type QFileDialog__FileMode = int

This enum is used to indicate what the user may select in the file dialog; i.e. what the dialog will return if the user clicks OK.

This value is obsolete since Qt 4.5:

See also setFileMode().

const QFileDialog__AnyFile QFileDialog__FileMode = 0

The name of a file, whether it exists or not.

const QFileDialog__Directory QFileDialog__FileMode = 2

The name of a directory. Both files and directories are displayed. However, the native Windows file dialog does not support displaying files in the directory chooser.

const QFileDialog__DirectoryOnly QFileDialog__FileMode = 4

Use Directory and setOption(ShowDirsOnly, true) instead.

const QFileDialog__ExistingFile QFileDialog__FileMode = 1

The name of a single existing file.

const QFileDialog__ExistingFiles QFileDialog__FileMode = 3

The names of zero or more existing files.

type QFileDialog__Option

type QFileDialog__Option = int
const QFileDialog__DontConfirmOverwrite QFileDialog__Option = 4
const QFileDialog__DontResolveSymlinks QFileDialog__Option = 2
const QFileDialog__DontUseCustomDirectoryIcons QFileDialog__Option = 128
const QFileDialog__DontUseNativeDialog QFileDialog__Option = 16
const QFileDialog__DontUseSheet QFileDialog__Option = 8
const QFileDialog__HideNameFilterDetails QFileDialog__Option = 64
const QFileDialog__ReadOnly QFileDialog__Option = 32
const QFileDialog__ShowDirsOnly QFileDialog__Option = 1

type QFileDialog__ViewMode

type QFileDialog__ViewMode = int

This enum describes the view mode of the file dialog; i.e. what information about each file will be displayed.

See also setViewMode().

const QFileDialog__Detail QFileDialog__ViewMode = 0

Displays an icon, a name, and details for each item in the directory.

const QFileDialog__List QFileDialog__ViewMode = 1

Displays only an icon and a name for each item in the directory.

type QFileIconProvider

type QFileIconProvider struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQFileIconProvider

func NewQFileIconProvider() *QFileIconProvider

Constructs a file icon provider.

func NewQFileIconProviderFromPointer

func NewQFileIconProviderFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFileIconProvider

func (*QFileIconProvider) GetCthis

func (this *QFileIconProvider) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFileIconProvider) Icon

func (this *QFileIconProvider) Icon(type_ int) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns an icon set for the given type.

func (*QFileIconProvider) Icon_1

func (this *QFileIconProvider) Icon_1(info qtcore.QFileInfo_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns an icon set for the given type.

func (*QFileIconProvider) NewFromPointer

func (*QFileIconProvider) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFileIconProvider

func (*QFileIconProvider) Options

func (this *QFileIconProvider) Options() int

Returns all the options that affect the icon provider. By default, all options are disabled.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also setOptions().

func (*QFileIconProvider) QFileIconProvider_PTR

func (ptr *QFileIconProvider) QFileIconProvider_PTR() *QFileIconProvider

func (*QFileIconProvider) SetCthis

func (this *QFileIconProvider) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFileIconProvider) SetOptions

func (this *QFileIconProvider) SetOptions(options int)

Sets options that affect the icon provider.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also options().

func (*QFileIconProvider) Type

func (this *QFileIconProvider) Type(info qtcore.QFileInfo_ITF) string

Returns the type of the file described by info.

type QFileIconProvider_ITF

type QFileIconProvider_ITF interface {
	QFileIconProvider_PTR() *QFileIconProvider
}

type QFileIconProvider__IconType

type QFileIconProvider__IconType = int

ConstantValue QFileIconProvider::Computer0 QFileIconProvider::Desktop1 QFileIconProvider::Trashcan2 QFileIconProvider::Network3 QFileIconProvider::Drive4 QFileIconProvider::Folder5 QFileIconProvider::File6

const QFileIconProvider__Computer QFileIconProvider__IconType = 0
const QFileIconProvider__Desktop QFileIconProvider__IconType = 1
const QFileIconProvider__Drive QFileIconProvider__IconType = 4
const QFileIconProvider__File QFileIconProvider__IconType = 6
const QFileIconProvider__Folder QFileIconProvider__IconType = 5
const QFileIconProvider__Network QFileIconProvider__IconType = 3
const QFileIconProvider__Trashcan QFileIconProvider__IconType = 2

type QFileIconProvider__Option

type QFileIconProvider__Option = int
const QFileIconProvider__DontUseCustomDirectoryIcons QFileIconProvider__Option = 1

type QFileSystemModel

type QFileSystemModel struct {
	*qtcore.QAbstractItemModel
}

func NewQFileSystemModel

func NewQFileSystemModel(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QFileSystemModel

Constructs a file system model with the given parent.

func NewQFileSystemModelFromPointer

func NewQFileSystemModelFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFileSystemModel

func NewQFileSystemModel__

func NewQFileSystemModel__() *QFileSystemModel

Constructs a file system model with the given parent.

func (*QFileSystemModel) CanFetchMore

func (this *QFileSystemModel) CanFetchMore(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::canFetchMore().

func (*QFileSystemModel) ColumnCount

func (this *QFileSystemModel) ColumnCount(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().

func (*QFileSystemModel) ColumnCount__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) ColumnCount__() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::columnCount().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Data

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Data(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, role int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().

See also setData().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Data__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Data__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::data().

See also setData().

func (*QFileSystemModel) DirectoryLoaded

func (this *QFileSystemModel) DirectoryLoaded(path string)

This signal is emitted when the gatherer thread has finished to load the path.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

func (*QFileSystemModel) DropMimeData

func (this *QFileSystemModel) DropMimeData(data qtcore.QMimeData_ITF, action int, row int, column int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::dropMimeData().

Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action over the row in the model specified by the row and column and by the parent index.

See also supportedDropActions().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Event

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QFileSystemModel) FetchMore

func (this *QFileSystemModel) FetchMore(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::fetchMore().

func (*QFileSystemModel) FileIcon

func (this *QFileSystemModel) FileIcon(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns the icon for the item stored in the model under the given index.

func (*QFileSystemModel) FileInfo

func (this *QFileSystemModel) FileInfo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QFileInfo

Returns the QFileInfo for the item stored in the model under the given index.

func (*QFileSystemModel) FileName

func (this *QFileSystemModel) FileName(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) string

Returns the file name for the item stored in the model under the given index.

func (*QFileSystemModel) FilePath

func (this *QFileSystemModel) FilePath(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) string

Returns the path of the item stored in the model under the index given.

func (*QFileSystemModel) FileRenamed

func (this *QFileSystemModel) FileRenamed(path string, oldName string, newName string)

This signal is emitted whenever a file with the oldName is successfully renamed to newName. The file is located in in the directory path.

func (*QFileSystemModel) Filter

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Filter() int

Returns the filter specified for the directory model.

If a filter has not been set, the default filter is QDir::AllEntries | QDir::NoDotAndDotDot | QDir::AllDirs.

See also setFilter() and QDir::Filters.

func (*QFileSystemModel) Flags

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Flags(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::flags().

func (*QFileSystemModel) GetCthis

func (this *QFileSystemModel) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFileSystemModel) HasChildren

func (this *QFileSystemModel) HasChildren(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().

func (*QFileSystemModel) HasChildren__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) HasChildren__() bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::hasChildren().

func (*QFileSystemModel) HeaderData

func (this *QFileSystemModel) HeaderData(section int, orientation int, role int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

func (*QFileSystemModel) HeaderData__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) HeaderData__(section int, orientation int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

func (*QFileSystemModel) IconProvider

func (this *QFileSystemModel) IconProvider() *QFileIconProvider

Returns the file icon provider for this directory model.

See also setIconProvider().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Index

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Index(row int, column int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Index_1

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Index_1(path string, column int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Index_1_

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Index_1_(path string) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Index__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Index__(row int, column int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::index().

func (*QFileSystemModel) InheritEvent

func (this *QFileSystemModel) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QFileSystemModel) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QFileSystemModel) InheritTimerEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QFileSystemModel) IsDir

func (this *QFileSystemModel) IsDir(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Returns true if the model item index represents a directory; otherwise returns false.

func (*QFileSystemModel) IsReadOnly

func (this *QFileSystemModel) IsReadOnly() bool

func (*QFileSystemModel) LastModified

func (this *QFileSystemModel) LastModified(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QDateTime

Returns the date and time when index was last modified.

func (*QFileSystemModel) MetaObject

func (this *QFileSystemModel) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QFileSystemModel) MimeTypes

func (this *QFileSystemModel) MimeTypes() *qtcore.QStringList

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::mimeTypes().

Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of items in the model.

func (*QFileSystemModel) Mkdir

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Mkdir(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, name string) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Create a directory with the name in the parent model index.

func (*QFileSystemModel) MyComputer

func (this *QFileSystemModel) MyComputer(role int) *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the data stored under the given role for the item "My Computer".

See also Qt::ItemDataRole.

func (*QFileSystemModel) MyComputer__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) MyComputer__() *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the data stored under the given role for the item "My Computer".

See also Qt::ItemDataRole.

func (*QFileSystemModel) NameFilterDisables

func (this *QFileSystemModel) NameFilterDisables() bool

func (*QFileSystemModel) NameFilters

func (this *QFileSystemModel) NameFilters() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns a list of filters applied to the names in the model.

See also setNameFilters().

func (*QFileSystemModel) NewFromPointer

func (*QFileSystemModel) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFileSystemModel

func (*QFileSystemModel) Parent

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::parent().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Permissions

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Permissions(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Returns the complete OR-ed together combination of QFile::Permission for the index.

func (*QFileSystemModel) QFileSystemModel_PTR

func (ptr *QFileSystemModel) QFileSystemModel_PTR() *QFileSystemModel

func (*QFileSystemModel) Remove

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Remove(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Removes the model item index from the file system model and deletes the corresponding file from the file system, returning true if successful. If the item cannot be removed, false is returned.

Warning: This function deletes files from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.

See also rmdir().

func (this *QFileSystemModel) ResolveSymlinks() bool

func (*QFileSystemModel) Rmdir

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Rmdir(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Removes the directory corresponding to the model item index in the file system model and deletes the corresponding directory from the file system, returning true if successful. If the directory cannot be removed, false is returned.

Warning: This function deletes directories from the file system; it does not move them to a location where they can be recovered.

See also remove().

func (*QFileSystemModel) RootDirectory

func (this *QFileSystemModel) RootDirectory() *qtcore.QDir

The currently set directory

See also rootPath().

func (*QFileSystemModel) RootPath

func (this *QFileSystemModel) RootPath() string

The currently set root path

See also setRootPath() and rootDirectory().

func (*QFileSystemModel) RootPathChanged

func (this *QFileSystemModel) RootPathChanged(newPath string)

This signal is emitted whenever the root path has been changed to a newPath.

func (*QFileSystemModel) RowCount

func (this *QFileSystemModel) RowCount(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().

func (*QFileSystemModel) RowCount__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) RowCount__() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::rowCount().

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetCthis

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetData

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetData(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF, role int) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().

See also data().

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetData__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetData__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::setData().

See also data().

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetFilter

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetFilter(filters int)

Sets the directory model's filter to that specified by filters.

Note that the filter you set should always include the QDir::AllDirs enum value, otherwise QFileSystemModel won't be able to read the directory structure.

See also filter() and QDir::Filters.

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetIconProvider

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetIconProvider(provider QFileIconProvider_ITF)

Sets the provider of file icons for the directory model.

See also iconProvider().

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetNameFilterDisables

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetNameFilterDisables(enable bool)

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetNameFilters

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetNameFilters(filters qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Sets the name filters to apply against the existing files.

See also nameFilters().

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetReadOnly

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetReadOnly(enable bool)
func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetResolveSymlinks(enable bool)

func (*QFileSystemModel) SetRootPath

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SetRootPath(path string) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Sets the directory that is being watched by the model to newPath by installing a file system watcher on it. Any changes to files and directories within this directory will be reflected in the model.

If the path is changed, the rootPathChanged() signal will be emitted.

Note: This function does not change the structure of the model or modify the data available to views. In other words, the "root" of the model is not changed to include only files and directories within the directory specified by newPath in the file system.

See also rootPath().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Sibling

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Sibling(row int, column int, idx qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sibling().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Size

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Size(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int64

Returns the size in bytes of index. If the file does not exist, 0 is returned.

func (*QFileSystemModel) Sort

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Sort(column int, order int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Sort__

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Sort__(column int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::sort().

func (*QFileSystemModel) SupportedDropActions

func (this *QFileSystemModel) SupportedDropActions() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemModel::supportedDropActions().

func (*QFileSystemModel) TimerEvent

func (this *QFileSystemModel) TimerEvent(event qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QFileSystemModel) Type

func (this *QFileSystemModel) Type(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) string

Returns the type of file index such as "Directory" or "JPEG file".

type QFileSystemModel_ITF

type QFileSystemModel_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF
	QFileSystemModel_PTR() *QFileSystemModel
}

type QFileSystemModel__Roles

type QFileSystemModel__Roles = int

ConstantValue QFileSystemModel::FileIconRoleQt::DecorationRole QFileSystemModel::FilePathRoleQt::UserRole + 1 QFileSystemModel::FileNameRoleQt::UserRole + 2 QFileSystemModel::FilePermissionsQt::UserRole + 3

const QFileSystemModel__FileIconRole QFileSystemModel__Roles = 1
const QFileSystemModel__FileNameRole QFileSystemModel__Roles = 258
const QFileSystemModel__FilePathRole QFileSystemModel__Roles = 257
const QFileSystemModel__FilePermissions QFileSystemModel__Roles = 259

type QFocusFrame

type QFocusFrame struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQFocusFrame

func NewQFocusFrame(parent QWidget_ITF) *QFocusFrame

Constructs a QFocusFrame.

The focus frame will not monitor parent for updates but rather can be placed manually or by using QFocusFrame::setWidget. A QFocusFrame sets Qt::WA_NoChildEventsForParent attribute; as a result the parent will not receive a QEvent::ChildAdded event, this will make it possible to manually set the geometry of the QFocusFrame inside of a QSplitter or other child event monitoring widget.

See also QFocusFrame::setWidget().

func NewQFocusFrameFromPointer

func NewQFocusFrameFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFocusFrame

func NewQFocusFrame__

func NewQFocusFrame__() *QFocusFrame

Constructs a QFocusFrame.

The focus frame will not monitor parent for updates but rather can be placed manually or by using QFocusFrame::setWidget. A QFocusFrame sets Qt::WA_NoChildEventsForParent attribute; as a result the parent will not receive a QEvent::ChildAdded event, this will make it possible to manually set the geometry of the QFocusFrame inside of a QSplitter or other child event monitoring widget.

See also QFocusFrame::setWidget().

func (*QFocusFrame) Event

func (this *QFocusFrame) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QFocusFrame) EventFilter

func (this *QFocusFrame) EventFilter(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QFocusFrame) GetCthis

func (this *QFocusFrame) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFocusFrame) InheritEvent

func (this *QFocusFrame) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QFocusFrame) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QFocusFrame) InheritEventFilter(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QObject, arg1 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QFocusFrame) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QFocusFrame) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOption))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOption *)

func (*QFocusFrame) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QFocusFrame) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QFocusFrame) InitStyleOption

func (this *QFocusFrame) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOption_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QFocusFrame. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOption, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QFocusFrame) MetaObject

func (this *QFocusFrame) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QFocusFrame) NewFromPointer

func (*QFocusFrame) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFocusFrame

func (*QFocusFrame) PaintEvent

func (this *QFocusFrame) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QFocusFrame) QFocusFrame_PTR

func (ptr *QFocusFrame) QFocusFrame_PTR() *QFocusFrame

func (*QFocusFrame) SetCthis

func (this *QFocusFrame) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFocusFrame) SetWidget

func (this *QFocusFrame) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

QFocusFrame will track changes to widget and resize itself automatically. If the monitored widget's parent changes, QFocusFrame will follow the widget and place itself around the widget automatically. If the monitored widget is deleted, QFocusFrame will set it to zero.

See also QFocusFrame::widget().

func (*QFocusFrame) Widget

func (this *QFocusFrame) Widget() *QWidget

Returns the currently monitored widget for automatically resize and update.

See also QFocusFrame::setWidget().

type QFocusFrame_ITF

type QFocusFrame_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QFocusFrame_PTR() *QFocusFrame
}

type QFontComboBox

type QFontComboBox struct {
	*QComboBox
}

func NewQFontComboBox

func NewQFontComboBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QFontComboBox

Constructs a font combobox with the given parent.

func NewQFontComboBoxFromPointer

func NewQFontComboBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFontComboBox

func NewQFontComboBox__

func NewQFontComboBox__() *QFontComboBox

Constructs a font combobox with the given parent.

func (*QFontComboBox) CurrentFont

func (this *QFontComboBox) CurrentFont() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QFontComboBox) CurrentFontChanged

func (this *QFontComboBox) CurrentFontChanged(f qtgui.QFont_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the current font changes, with the new font.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentFont.

See also currentFont.

func (*QFontComboBox) Event

func (this *QFontComboBox) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QFontComboBox) FontFilters

func (this *QFontComboBox) FontFilters() int

func (*QFontComboBox) GetCthis

func (this *QFontComboBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFontComboBox) InheritEvent

func (this *QFontComboBox) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QFontComboBox) MetaObject

func (this *QFontComboBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QFontComboBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QFontComboBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFontComboBox

func (*QFontComboBox) QFontComboBox_PTR

func (ptr *QFontComboBox) QFontComboBox_PTR() *QFontComboBox

func (*QFontComboBox) SetCthis

func (this *QFontComboBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFontComboBox) SetCurrentFont

func (this *QFontComboBox) SetCurrentFont(f qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QFontComboBox) SetFontFilters

func (this *QFontComboBox) SetFontFilters(filters int)

func (*QFontComboBox) SetWritingSystem

func (this *QFontComboBox) SetWritingSystem(arg0 int)

func (*QFontComboBox) SizeHint

func (this *QFontComboBox) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QFontComboBox) WritingSystem

func (this *QFontComboBox) WritingSystem() int

type QFontComboBox_ITF

type QFontComboBox_ITF interface {
	QComboBox_ITF
	QFontComboBox_PTR() *QFontComboBox
}

type QFontComboBox__FontFilter

type QFontComboBox__FontFilter = int
const QFontComboBox__AllFonts QFontComboBox__FontFilter = 0
const QFontComboBox__MonospacedFonts QFontComboBox__FontFilter = 4
const QFontComboBox__NonScalableFonts QFontComboBox__FontFilter = 2
const QFontComboBox__ProportionalFonts QFontComboBox__FontFilter = 8
const QFontComboBox__ScalableFonts QFontComboBox__FontFilter = 1

type QFontDialog

type QFontDialog struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQFontDialog

func NewQFontDialog(parent QWidget_ITF) *QFontDialog

Constructs a standard font dialog.

Use setCurrentFont() to set the initial font attributes.

The parent parameter is passed to the QDialog constructor.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getFont().

func NewQFontDialogFromPointer

func NewQFontDialogFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFontDialog

func NewQFontDialog_1

func NewQFontDialog_1(initial qtgui.QFont_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QFontDialog

Constructs a standard font dialog.

Use setCurrentFont() to set the initial font attributes.

The parent parameter is passed to the QDialog constructor.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getFont().

func NewQFontDialog_1_

func NewQFontDialog_1_(initial qtgui.QFont_ITF) *QFontDialog

Constructs a standard font dialog.

Use setCurrentFont() to set the initial font attributes.

The parent parameter is passed to the QDialog constructor.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getFont().

func NewQFontDialog__

func NewQFontDialog__() *QFontDialog

Constructs a standard font dialog.

Use setCurrentFont() to set the initial font attributes.

The parent parameter is passed to the QDialog constructor.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getFont().

func (*QFontDialog) ChangeEvent

func (this *QFontDialog) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QFontDialog) CurrentFont

func (this *QFontDialog) CurrentFont() *qtgui.QFont

Returns the current font.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

Note: Getter function for property currentFont.

See also setCurrentFont() and selectedFont().

func (*QFontDialog) CurrentFontChanged

func (this *QFontDialog) CurrentFontChanged(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the current font is changed. The new font is specified in font.

The signal is emitted while a user is selecting a font. Ultimately, the chosen font may differ from the font currently selected.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentFont.

See also currentFont, fontSelected(), and selectedFont().

func (*QFontDialog) Done

func (this *QFontDialog) Done(result int)

Reimplemented from QDialog::done().

Closes the dialog and sets its result code to result. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return result.

See also QDialog::done().

func (*QFontDialog) EventFilter

func (this *QFontDialog) EventFilter(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

func (*QFontDialog) FontSelected

func (this *QFontDialog) FontSelected(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a font has been selected. The selected font is specified in font.

The signal is only emitted when a user has chosen the final font to be used. It is not emitted while the user is changing the current font in the font dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also selectedFont(), currentFontChanged(), and currentFont.

func (*QFontDialog) GetCthis

func (this *QFontDialog) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFontDialog) GetFont

func (this *QFontDialog) GetFont(ok *bool, parent QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QFont

Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.

If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.

The dialog is constructed with the given parent and the options specified in options. title is shown as the window title of the dialog and initial is the initially selected font. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and set to false if the user clicks Cancel.

Examples:

bool ok;
QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&ok, QFont("Times", 12), this);
if (ok) {
    // font is set to the font the user selected
} else {
    // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
    // value, in this case Times, 12.
}

The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:

myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));

In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.

func (*QFontDialog) GetFont_1

func (this *QFontDialog) GetFont_1(ok *bool, initial qtgui.QFont_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, title string, options int) *qtgui.QFont

Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.

If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.

The dialog is constructed with the given parent and the options specified in options. title is shown as the window title of the dialog and initial is the initially selected font. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and set to false if the user clicks Cancel.

Examples:

bool ok;
QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&ok, QFont("Times", 12), this);
if (ok) {
    // font is set to the font the user selected
} else {
    // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
    // value, in this case Times, 12.
}

The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:

myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));

In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.

func (*QFontDialog) GetFont_1_

func (this *QFontDialog) GetFont_1_(ok *bool, initial qtgui.QFont_ITF) *qtgui.QFont

Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.

If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.

The dialog is constructed with the given parent and the options specified in options. title is shown as the window title of the dialog and initial is the initially selected font. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and set to false if the user clicks Cancel.

Examples:

bool ok;
QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&ok, QFont("Times", 12), this);
if (ok) {
    // font is set to the font the user selected
} else {
    // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
    // value, in this case Times, 12.
}

The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:

myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));

In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.

func (*QFontDialog) GetFont_1_1

func (this *QFontDialog) GetFont_1_1(ok *bool, initial qtgui.QFont_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QFont

Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.

If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.

The dialog is constructed with the given parent and the options specified in options. title is shown as the window title of the dialog and initial is the initially selected font. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and set to false if the user clicks Cancel.

Examples:

bool ok;
QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&ok, QFont("Times", 12), this);
if (ok) {
    // font is set to the font the user selected
} else {
    // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
    // value, in this case Times, 12.
}

The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:

myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));

In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.

func (*QFontDialog) GetFont_1_2

func (this *QFontDialog) GetFont_1_2(ok *bool, initial qtgui.QFont_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, title string) *qtgui.QFont

Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.

If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.

The dialog is constructed with the given parent and the options specified in options. title is shown as the window title of the dialog and initial is the initially selected font. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and set to false if the user clicks Cancel.

Examples:

bool ok;
QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&ok, QFont("Times", 12), this);
if (ok) {
    // font is set to the font the user selected
} else {
    // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
    // value, in this case Times, 12.
}

The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:

myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));

In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.

func (*QFontDialog) GetFont__

func (this *QFontDialog) GetFont__(ok *bool) *qtgui.QFont

Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.

If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.

The dialog is constructed with the given parent and the options specified in options. title is shown as the window title of the dialog and initial is the initially selected font. If the ok parameter is not-null, the value it refers to is set to true if the user clicks OK, and set to false if the user clicks Cancel.

Examples:

bool ok;
QFont font = QFontDialog::getFont(&ok, QFont("Times", 12), this);
if (ok) {
    // font is set to the font the user selected
} else {
    // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
    // value, in this case Times, 12.
}

The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:

myWidget.setFont(QFontDialog::getFont(0, myWidget.font()));

In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QFontDialog constructors.

func (*QFontDialog) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QFontDialog) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QFontDialog) InheritDone

func (this *QFontDialog) InheritDone(f func(result int))

void done(int)

func (*QFontDialog) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QFontDialog) InheritEventFilter(f func(object *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QFontDialog) MetaObject

func (this *QFontDialog) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QFontDialog) NewFromPointer

func (*QFontDialog) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFontDialog

func (*QFontDialog) Open

func (this *QFontDialog) Open(receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string)

This is an overloaded function.

Opens the dialog and connects its fontSelected() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.

The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QFontDialog) Options

func (this *QFontDialog) Options() int

func (*QFontDialog) QFontDialog_PTR

func (ptr *QFontDialog) QFontDialog_PTR() *QFontDialog

func (*QFontDialog) SelectedFont

func (this *QFontDialog) SelectedFont() *qtgui.QFont

Returns the font that the user selected by clicking the OK or equivalent button.

Note: This font is not always the same as the font held by the currentFont property since the user can choose different fonts before finally selecting the one to use.

func (*QFontDialog) SetCthis

func (this *QFontDialog) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFontDialog) SetCurrentFont

func (this *QFontDialog) SetCurrentFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

Sets the font highlighted in the QFontDialog to the given font.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

Note: Setter function for property currentFont.

See also currentFont() and selectedFont().

func (*QFontDialog) SetOption

func (this *QFontDialog) SetOption(option int, on bool)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QFontDialog) SetOption__

func (this *QFontDialog) SetOption__(option int)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QFontDialog) SetOptions

func (this *QFontDialog) SetOptions(options int)

func (*QFontDialog) SetVisible

func (this *QFontDialog) SetVisible(visible bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QFontDialog) TestOption

func (this *QFontDialog) TestOption(option int) bool

Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.

See also options and setOption().

type QFontDialog_ITF

type QFontDialog_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QFontDialog_PTR() *QFontDialog
}

type QFontDialog__FontDialogOption

type QFontDialog__FontDialogOption = int
const QFontDialog__DontUseNativeDialog QFontDialog__FontDialogOption = 2
const QFontDialog__MonospacedFonts QFontDialog__FontDialogOption = 16
const QFontDialog__NoButtons QFontDialog__FontDialogOption = 1
const QFontDialog__NonScalableFonts QFontDialog__FontDialogOption = 8
const QFontDialog__ProportionalFonts QFontDialog__FontDialogOption = 32
const QFontDialog__ScalableFonts QFontDialog__FontDialogOption = 4

type QFormLayout

type QFormLayout struct {
	*QLayout
}

func NewQFormLayout

func NewQFormLayout(parent QWidget_ITF) *QFormLayout

Constructs a new form layout with the given parent widget.

See also QWidget::setLayout().

func NewQFormLayoutFromPointer

func NewQFormLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFormLayout

func NewQFormLayout__

func NewQFormLayout__() *QFormLayout

Constructs a new form layout with the given parent widget.

See also QWidget::setLayout().

func (*QFormLayout) AddItem

func (this *QFormLayout) AddItem(item QLayoutItem_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayout::addItem().

func (*QFormLayout) AddRow

func (this *QFormLayout) AddRow(label QWidget_ITF, field QWidget_ITF)

Adds a new row to the bottom of this form layout, with the given label and field.

See also insertRow().

func (*QFormLayout) AddRow_1

func (this *QFormLayout) AddRow_1(label QWidget_ITF, field QLayout_ITF)

Adds a new row to the bottom of this form layout, with the given label and field.

See also insertRow().

func (*QFormLayout) AddRow_2

func (this *QFormLayout) AddRow_2(labelText string, field QWidget_ITF)

Adds a new row to the bottom of this form layout, with the given label and field.

See also insertRow().

func (*QFormLayout) AddRow_3

func (this *QFormLayout) AddRow_3(labelText string, field QLayout_ITF)

Adds a new row to the bottom of this form layout, with the given label and field.

See also insertRow().

func (*QFormLayout) AddRow_4

func (this *QFormLayout) AddRow_4(widget QWidget_ITF)

Adds a new row to the bottom of this form layout, with the given label and field.

See also insertRow().

func (*QFormLayout) AddRow_5

func (this *QFormLayout) AddRow_5(layout QLayout_ITF)

Adds a new row to the bottom of this form layout, with the given label and field.

See also insertRow().

func (*QFormLayout) Count

func (this *QFormLayout) Count() int

Reimplemented from QLayout::count().

func (*QFormLayout) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QFormLayout) ExpandingDirections() int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().

func (*QFormLayout) FieldGrowthPolicy

func (this *QFormLayout) FieldGrowthPolicy() int

func (*QFormLayout) FormAlignment

func (this *QFormLayout) FormAlignment() int

func (*QFormLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QFormLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFormLayout) GetItemPosition

func (this *QFormLayout) GetItemPosition(index int, rowPtr unsafe.Pointer, rolePtr unsafe.Pointer)

Retrieves the row and role (column) of the item at the specified index. If index is out of bounds, *rowPtr is set to -1; otherwise the row is stored in *rowPtr and the role is stored in *rolePtr.

See also itemAt(), count(), getLayoutPosition(), and getWidgetPosition().

func (*QFormLayout) GetLayoutPosition

func (this *QFormLayout) GetLayoutPosition(layout QLayout_ITF, rowPtr unsafe.Pointer, rolePtr unsafe.Pointer)

Retrieves the row and role (column) of the specified child layout. If layout is not in the form layout, *rowPtr is set to -1; otherwise the row is stored in *rowPtr and the role is stored in *rolePtr.

func (*QFormLayout) GetWidgetPosition

func (this *QFormLayout) GetWidgetPosition(widget QWidget_ITF, rowPtr unsafe.Pointer, rolePtr unsafe.Pointer)

Retrieves the row and role (column) of the specified widget in the layout. If widget is not in the layout, *rowPtr is set to -1; otherwise the row is stored in *rowPtr and the role is stored in *rolePtr.

See also getItemPosition() and itemAt().

func (*QFormLayout) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QFormLayout) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QFormLayout) HeightForWidth

func (this *QFormLayout) HeightForWidth(width int) int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().

func (*QFormLayout) HorizontalSpacing

func (this *QFormLayout) HorizontalSpacing() int

func (*QFormLayout) InsertRow

func (this *QFormLayout) InsertRow(row int, label QWidget_ITF, field QWidget_ITF)

Inserts a new row at position row in this form layout, with the given label and field. If row is out of bounds, the new row is added at the end.

See also addRow().

func (*QFormLayout) InsertRow_1

func (this *QFormLayout) InsertRow_1(row int, label QWidget_ITF, field QLayout_ITF)

Inserts a new row at position row in this form layout, with the given label and field. If row is out of bounds, the new row is added at the end.

See also addRow().

func (*QFormLayout) InsertRow_2

func (this *QFormLayout) InsertRow_2(row int, labelText string, field QWidget_ITF)

Inserts a new row at position row in this form layout, with the given label and field. If row is out of bounds, the new row is added at the end.

See also addRow().

func (*QFormLayout) InsertRow_3

func (this *QFormLayout) InsertRow_3(row int, labelText string, field QLayout_ITF)

Inserts a new row at position row in this form layout, with the given label and field. If row is out of bounds, the new row is added at the end.

See also addRow().

func (*QFormLayout) InsertRow_4

func (this *QFormLayout) InsertRow_4(row int, widget QWidget_ITF)

Inserts a new row at position row in this form layout, with the given label and field. If row is out of bounds, the new row is added at the end.

See also addRow().

func (*QFormLayout) InsertRow_5

func (this *QFormLayout) InsertRow_5(row int, layout QLayout_ITF)

Inserts a new row at position row in this form layout, with the given label and field. If row is out of bounds, the new row is added at the end.

See also addRow().

func (*QFormLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QFormLayout) Invalidate()

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().

func (*QFormLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QFormLayout) ItemAt(row int, role int) *QLayoutItem

Returns the layout item in the given row with the specified role (column). Returns 0 if there is no such item.

See also QLayout::itemAt() and setItem().

func (*QFormLayout) ItemAt_1

func (this *QFormLayout) ItemAt_1(index int) *QLayoutItem

Returns the layout item in the given row with the specified role (column). Returns 0 if there is no such item.

See also QLayout::itemAt() and setItem().

func (*QFormLayout) LabelAlignment

func (this *QFormLayout) LabelAlignment() int

func (*QFormLayout) LabelForField

func (this *QFormLayout) LabelForField(field QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the label associated with the given field.

See also itemAt().

func (*QFormLayout) LabelForField_1

func (this *QFormLayout) LabelForField_1(field QLayout_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the label associated with the given field.

See also itemAt().

func (*QFormLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QFormLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QFormLayout) MinimumSize

func (this *QFormLayout) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().

func (*QFormLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QFormLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFormLayout

func (*QFormLayout) QFormLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QFormLayout) QFormLayout_PTR() *QFormLayout

func (*QFormLayout) RemoveRow

func (this *QFormLayout) RemoveRow(row int)

Deletes row row from this form layout.

row must be non-negative and less than rowCount().

After this call, rowCount() is decremented by one. All widgets and nested layouts that occupied this row are deleted. That includes both the field widget(s) and the label, if any. All following rows are shifted up one row and the freed vertical space is redistributed amongst the remaining rows.

You can use this function to undo a previous addRow() or insertRow():

QFormLayout *flay = ...;
QPointer<QLineEdit> le = new QLineEdit;
flay->insertRow(2, "User:", le);
// later:
flay->removeRow(2); // le == nullptr at this point

If you want to remove the row from the layout without deleting the widgets, use takeRow() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also takeRow().

func (*QFormLayout) RemoveRow_1

func (this *QFormLayout) RemoveRow_1(widget QWidget_ITF)

Deletes row row from this form layout.

row must be non-negative and less than rowCount().

After this call, rowCount() is decremented by one. All widgets and nested layouts that occupied this row are deleted. That includes both the field widget(s) and the label, if any. All following rows are shifted up one row and the freed vertical space is redistributed amongst the remaining rows.

You can use this function to undo a previous addRow() or insertRow():

QFormLayout *flay = ...;
QPointer<QLineEdit> le = new QLineEdit;
flay->insertRow(2, "User:", le);
// later:
flay->removeRow(2); // le == nullptr at this point

If you want to remove the row from the layout without deleting the widgets, use takeRow() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also takeRow().

func (*QFormLayout) RemoveRow_2

func (this *QFormLayout) RemoveRow_2(layout QLayout_ITF)

Deletes row row from this form layout.

row must be non-negative and less than rowCount().

After this call, rowCount() is decremented by one. All widgets and nested layouts that occupied this row are deleted. That includes both the field widget(s) and the label, if any. All following rows are shifted up one row and the freed vertical space is redistributed amongst the remaining rows.

You can use this function to undo a previous addRow() or insertRow():

QFormLayout *flay = ...;
QPointer<QLineEdit> le = new QLineEdit;
flay->insertRow(2, "User:", le);
// later:
flay->removeRow(2); // le == nullptr at this point

If you want to remove the row from the layout without deleting the widgets, use takeRow() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also takeRow().

func (*QFormLayout) RowCount

func (this *QFormLayout) RowCount() int

Returns the number of rows in the form.

See also QLayout::count().

func (*QFormLayout) RowWrapPolicy

func (this *QFormLayout) RowWrapPolicy() int

func (*QFormLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QFormLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFormLayout) SetFieldGrowthPolicy

func (this *QFormLayout) SetFieldGrowthPolicy(policy int)

func (*QFormLayout) SetFormAlignment

func (this *QFormLayout) SetFormAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QFormLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QFormLayout) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().

func (*QFormLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing

func (this *QFormLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing(spacing int)

func (*QFormLayout) SetItem

func (this *QFormLayout) SetItem(row int, role int, item QLayoutItem_ITF)

Sets the item in the given row for the given role to item, extending the layout with empty rows if necessary.

If the cell is already occupied, the item is not inserted and an error message is sent to the console. The item spans both columns.

Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use setLayout() or setWidget() instead.

See also setLayout().

func (*QFormLayout) SetLabelAlignment

func (this *QFormLayout) SetLabelAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QFormLayout) SetLayout

func (this *QFormLayout) SetLayout(row int, role int, layout QLayout_ITF)

Sets the sub-layout in the given row for the given role to layout, extending the form layout with empty rows if necessary.

If the cell is already occupied, the layout is not inserted and an error message is sent to the console.

Note: For most applications, addRow() or insertRow() should be used instead of setLayout().

See also setWidget().

func (*QFormLayout) SetRowWrapPolicy

func (this *QFormLayout) SetRowWrapPolicy(policy int)

func (*QFormLayout) SetSpacing

func (this *QFormLayout) SetSpacing(arg0 int)

This function sets both the vertical and horizontal spacing to spacing.

See also spacing(), setVerticalSpacing(), and setHorizontalSpacing().

func (*QFormLayout) SetVerticalSpacing

func (this *QFormLayout) SetVerticalSpacing(spacing int)

func (*QFormLayout) SetWidget

func (this *QFormLayout) SetWidget(row int, role int, widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the widget in the given row for the given role to widget, extending the layout with empty rows if necessary.

If the cell is already occupied, the widget is not inserted and an error message is sent to the console.

Note: For most applications, addRow() or insertRow() should be used instead of setWidget().

See also setLayout().

func (*QFormLayout) SizeHint

func (this *QFormLayout) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QFormLayout) Spacing

func (this *QFormLayout) Spacing() int

If the vertical spacing is equal to the horizontal spacing, this function returns that value; otherwise it returns -1.

See also setSpacing(), verticalSpacing(), and horizontalSpacing().

func (*QFormLayout) TakeAt

func (this *QFormLayout) TakeAt(index int) *QLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().

func (*QFormLayout) TakeRow

func (this *QFormLayout) TakeRow(row int) unsafe.Pointer

Removes the specified row from this form layout.

row must be non-negative and less than rowCount().

Note: This function doesn't delete anything.

After this call, rowCount() is decremented by one. All following rows are shifted up one row and the freed vertical space is redistributed amongst the remaining rows.

You can use this function to undo a previous addRow() or insertRow():

QFormLayout *flay = ...;
QPointer<QLineEdit> le = new QLineEdit;
flay->insertRow(2, "User:", le);
// later:
QFormLayout::TakeRowResult result = flay->takeRow(2);

If you want to remove the row from the layout and delete the widgets, use removeRow() instead.

Returns A structure containing both the widget and corresponding label layout items

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also removeRow().

func (*QFormLayout) TakeRow_1

func (this *QFormLayout) TakeRow_1(widget QWidget_ITF) unsafe.Pointer

Removes the specified row from this form layout.

row must be non-negative and less than rowCount().

Note: This function doesn't delete anything.

After this call, rowCount() is decremented by one. All following rows are shifted up one row and the freed vertical space is redistributed amongst the remaining rows.

You can use this function to undo a previous addRow() or insertRow():

QFormLayout *flay = ...;
QPointer<QLineEdit> le = new QLineEdit;
flay->insertRow(2, "User:", le);
// later:
QFormLayout::TakeRowResult result = flay->takeRow(2);

If you want to remove the row from the layout and delete the widgets, use removeRow() instead.

Returns A structure containing both the widget and corresponding label layout items

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also removeRow().

func (*QFormLayout) TakeRow_2

func (this *QFormLayout) TakeRow_2(layout QLayout_ITF) unsafe.Pointer

Removes the specified row from this form layout.

row must be non-negative and less than rowCount().

Note: This function doesn't delete anything.

After this call, rowCount() is decremented by one. All following rows are shifted up one row and the freed vertical space is redistributed amongst the remaining rows.

You can use this function to undo a previous addRow() or insertRow():

QFormLayout *flay = ...;
QPointer<QLineEdit> le = new QLineEdit;
flay->insertRow(2, "User:", le);
// later:
QFormLayout::TakeRowResult result = flay->takeRow(2);

If you want to remove the row from the layout and delete the widgets, use removeRow() instead.

Returns A structure containing both the widget and corresponding label layout items

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also removeRow().

func (*QFormLayout) VerticalSpacing

func (this *QFormLayout) VerticalSpacing() int

type QFormLayout_ITF

type QFormLayout_ITF interface {
	QLayout_ITF
	QFormLayout_PTR() *QFormLayout
}

type QFormLayout__FieldGrowthPolicy

type QFormLayout__FieldGrowthPolicy = int

This enum specifies the different policies that can be used to control the way in which the form's fields grow.

See also fieldGrowthPolicy.

const QFormLayout__AllNonFixedFieldsGrow QFormLayout__FieldGrowthPolicy = 2

All fields with a size policy that allows them to grow will grow to fill the available space. This is the default policy for most styles.

const QFormLayout__ExpandingFieldsGrow QFormLayout__FieldGrowthPolicy = 1

Fields with an horizontal size policy of Expanding or MinimumExpanding will grow to fill the available space. The other fields will not grow beyond their effective size hint. This is the default policy for Plastique.

const QFormLayout__FieldsStayAtSizeHint QFormLayout__FieldGrowthPolicy = 0

The fields never grow beyond their effective size hint. This is the default for QMacStyle.

type QFormLayout__ItemRole

type QFormLayout__ItemRole = int

This enum specifies the types of widgets (or other layout items) that may appear in a row.

See also itemAt() and getItemPosition().

const QFormLayout__FieldRole QFormLayout__ItemRole = 1

A field widget.

const QFormLayout__LabelRole QFormLayout__ItemRole = 0

A label widget.

const QFormLayout__SpanningRole QFormLayout__ItemRole = 2

A widget that spans label and field columns.

type QFormLayout__RowWrapPolicy

type QFormLayout__RowWrapPolicy = int

This enum specifies the different policies that can be used to control the way in which the form's rows wrap.

See also rowWrapPolicy.

const QFormLayout__DontWrapRows QFormLayout__RowWrapPolicy = 0

Fields are always laid out next to their label. This is the default policy for all styles except Qt Extended styles.

const QFormLayout__WrapAllRows QFormLayout__RowWrapPolicy = 2

Fields are always laid out below their label.

const QFormLayout__WrapLongRows QFormLayout__RowWrapPolicy = 1

Labels are given enough horizontal space to fit the widest label, and the rest of the space is given to the fields. If the minimum size of a field pair is wider than the available space, the field is wrapped to the next line. This is the default policy for Qt Extended styles.

type QFrame

type QFrame struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQFrame

func NewQFrame(parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QFrame

Constructs a frame widget with frame style NoFrame and a 1-pixel frame width.

The parent and f arguments are passed to the QWidget constructor.

func NewQFrameFromPointer

func NewQFrameFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFrame

func NewQFrame__

func NewQFrame__() *QFrame

Constructs a frame widget with frame style NoFrame and a 1-pixel frame width.

The parent and f arguments are passed to the QWidget constructor.

func NewQFrame__1

func NewQFrame__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QFrame

Constructs a frame widget with frame style NoFrame and a 1-pixel frame width.

The parent and f arguments are passed to the QWidget constructor.

func (*QFrame) ChangeEvent

func (this *QFrame) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QFrame) DrawFrame

func (this *QFrame) DrawFrame(arg0 qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

func (*QFrame) Event

func (this *QFrame) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QFrame) FrameRect

func (this *QFrame) FrameRect() *qtcore.QRect

func (*QFrame) FrameShadow

func (this *QFrame) FrameShadow() int

func (*QFrame) FrameShape

func (this *QFrame) FrameShape() int

func (*QFrame) FrameStyle

func (this *QFrame) FrameStyle() int

Returns the frame style.

The default value is QFrame::Plain.

See also setFrameStyle(), frameShape(), and frameShadow().

func (*QFrame) FrameWidth

func (this *QFrame) FrameWidth() int

func (*QFrame) GetCthis

func (this *QFrame) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QFrame) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QFrame) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QFrame) InheritDrawFrame

func (this *QFrame) InheritDrawFrame(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPainter))

void drawFrame(class QPainter *)

func (*QFrame) InheritEvent

func (this *QFrame) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QFrame) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QFrame) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionFrame))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionFrame *)

func (*QFrame) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QFrame) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QFrame) InitStyleOption

func (this *QFrame) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionFrame_ITF)

Initializes option with the values from this QFrame. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionFrame but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.5.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QFrame) LineWidth

func (this *QFrame) LineWidth() int

func (*QFrame) MetaObject

func (this *QFrame) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QFrame) MidLineWidth

func (this *QFrame) MidLineWidth() int

func (*QFrame) NewFromPointer

func (*QFrame) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QFrame

func (*QFrame) PaintEvent

func (this *QFrame) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QFrame) QFrame_PTR

func (ptr *QFrame) QFrame_PTR() *QFrame

func (*QFrame) SetCthis

func (this *QFrame) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QFrame) SetFrameRect

func (this *QFrame) SetFrameRect(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

func (*QFrame) SetFrameShadow

func (this *QFrame) SetFrameShadow(arg0 int)

func (*QFrame) SetFrameShape

func (this *QFrame) SetFrameShape(arg0 int)

func (*QFrame) SetFrameStyle

func (this *QFrame) SetFrameStyle(arg0 int)

Sets the frame style to style.

The style is the bitwise OR between a frame shape and a frame shadow style. See the picture of the frames in the main class documentation.

The frame shapes are given in QFrame::Shape and the shadow styles in QFrame::Shadow.

If a mid-line width greater than 0 is specified, an additional line is drawn for Raised or Sunken Box, HLine, and VLine frames. The mid-color of the current color group is used for drawing middle lines.

See also frameStyle().

func (*QFrame) SetLineWidth

func (this *QFrame) SetLineWidth(arg0 int)

func (*QFrame) SetMidLineWidth

func (this *QFrame) SetMidLineWidth(arg0 int)

func (*QFrame) SizeHint

func (this *QFrame) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

type QFrame_ITF

type QFrame_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QFrame_PTR() *QFrame
}

type QFrame__Shadow

type QFrame__Shadow = int

This enum type defines the types of shadow that are used to give a 3D effect to frames.

Shadow interacts with QFrame::Shape, the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth(). See the picture of the frames in the main class documentation.

See also QFrame::Shape, lineWidth(), and midLineWidth().

const QFrame__Plain QFrame__Shadow = 16
const QFrame__Raised QFrame__Shadow = 32
const QFrame__Sunken QFrame__Shadow = 48

type QFrame__Shape

type QFrame__Shape = int

This enum type defines the shapes of frame available.

When it does not call QStyle, Shape interacts with QFrame::Shadow, the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth() to create the total result. See the picture of the frames in the main class documentation.

See also QFrame::Shadow, QFrame::style(), and QStyle::drawPrimitive().

const QFrame__Box QFrame__Shape = 1
const QFrame__HLine QFrame__Shape = 4
const QFrame__NoFrame QFrame__Shape = 0

QFrame draws nothing

const QFrame__Panel QFrame__Shape = 2
const QFrame__StyledPanel QFrame__Shape = 6
const QFrame__VLine QFrame__Shape = 5
const QFrame__WinPanel QFrame__Shape = 3

type QFrame__StyleMask

type QFrame__StyleMask = int

This enum defines two constants that can be used to extract the two components of frameStyle():

Normally, you don't need to use these, since frameShadow() and frameShape() already extract the Shadow and the Shape parts of frameStyle().

See also frameStyle() and setFrameStyle().

const QFrame__Shadow_Mask QFrame__StyleMask = 240
const QFrame__Shape_Mask QFrame__StyleMask = 15

type QGesture

type QGesture struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQGesture

func NewQGesture(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGesture

Constructs a new gesture object with the given parent.

QGesture objects are created by gesture recognizers in the QGestureRecognizer::create() function.

func NewQGestureFromPointer

func NewQGestureFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGesture

func NewQGesture__

func NewQGesture__() *QGesture

Constructs a new gesture object with the given parent.

QGesture objects are created by gesture recognizers in the QGestureRecognizer::create() function.

func (*QGesture) GestureCancelPolicy

func (this *QGesture) GestureCancelPolicy() int

func (*QGesture) GestureType

func (this *QGesture) GestureType() int

func (*QGesture) GetCthis

func (this *QGesture) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGesture) HasHotSpot

func (this *QGesture) HasHotSpot() bool

func (*QGesture) HotSpot

func (this *QGesture) HotSpot() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGesture) MetaObject

func (this *QGesture) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGesture) NewFromPointer

func (*QGesture) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGesture

func (*QGesture) QGesture_PTR

func (ptr *QGesture) QGesture_PTR() *QGesture

func (*QGesture) SetCthis

func (this *QGesture) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGesture) SetGestureCancelPolicy

func (this *QGesture) SetGestureCancelPolicy(policy int)

func (*QGesture) SetHotSpot

func (this *QGesture) SetHotSpot(value qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGesture) State

func (this *QGesture) State() int

func (*QGesture) UnsetHotSpot

func (this *QGesture) UnsetHotSpot()

type QGestureEvent

type QGestureEvent struct {
	*qtcore.QEvent
}

func NewQGestureEventFromPointer

func NewQGestureEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGestureEvent

func (*QGestureEvent) Accept

func (this *QGestureEvent) Accept(arg0 QGesture_ITF)

func (*QGestureEvent) Accept_1

func (this *QGestureEvent) Accept_1(arg0 int)

func (*QGestureEvent) Gesture

func (this *QGestureEvent) Gesture(type_ int) *QGesture

func (*QGestureEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGestureEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGestureEvent) Ignore

func (this *QGestureEvent) Ignore(arg0 QGesture_ITF)

func (*QGestureEvent) Ignore_1

func (this *QGestureEvent) Ignore_1(arg0 int)

func (*QGestureEvent) IsAccepted

func (this *QGestureEvent) IsAccepted(arg0 QGesture_ITF) bool

func (*QGestureEvent) IsAccepted_1

func (this *QGestureEvent) IsAccepted_1(arg0 int) bool

func (*QGestureEvent) MapToGraphicsScene

func (this *QGestureEvent) MapToGraphicsScene(gesturePoint qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGestureEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGestureEvent) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGestureEvent

func (*QGestureEvent) QGestureEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGestureEvent) QGestureEvent_PTR() *QGestureEvent

func (*QGestureEvent) SetAccepted

func (this *QGestureEvent) SetAccepted(arg0 QGesture_ITF, arg1 bool)

func (*QGestureEvent) SetAccepted_1

func (this *QGestureEvent) SetAccepted_1(arg0 int, arg1 bool)

func (*QGestureEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGestureEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGestureEvent) SetWidget

func (this *QGestureEvent) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

func (*QGestureEvent) Widget

func (this *QGestureEvent) Widget() *QWidget

type QGestureEvent_ITF

type QGestureEvent_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QEvent_ITF
	QGestureEvent_PTR() *QGestureEvent
}

type QGestureRecognizer

type QGestureRecognizer struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQGestureRecognizer

func NewQGestureRecognizer() *QGestureRecognizer

Constructs a new gesture recognizer object.

func NewQGestureRecognizerFromPointer

func NewQGestureRecognizerFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGestureRecognizer

func (*QGestureRecognizer) Create

func (this *QGestureRecognizer) Create(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGesture

This function is called by Qt to create a new QGesture object for the given target (QWidget or QGraphicsObject).

Reimplement this function to create a custom QGesture-derived gesture object if necessary.

The application takes ownership of the created gesture object.

func (*QGestureRecognizer) GetCthis

func (this *QGestureRecognizer) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGestureRecognizer) NewFromPointer

func (*QGestureRecognizer) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGestureRecognizer

func (*QGestureRecognizer) QGestureRecognizer_PTR

func (ptr *QGestureRecognizer) QGestureRecognizer_PTR() *QGestureRecognizer

func (*QGestureRecognizer) Recognize

func (this *QGestureRecognizer) Recognize(state QGesture_ITF, watched qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) int

Handles the given event for the watched object, updating the state of the gesture object as required, and returns a suitable result for the current recognition step.

This function is called by the framework to allow the recognizer to filter input events dispatched to QWidget or QGraphicsObject instances that it is monitoring.

The result reflects how much of the gesture has been recognized. The state of the gesture object is set depending on the result.

See also QGestureRecognizer::Result.

func (*QGestureRecognizer) RegisterRecognizer

func (this *QGestureRecognizer) RegisterRecognizer(recognizer QGestureRecognizer_ITF) int

Registers the given recognizer in the gesture framework and returns a gesture ID for it.

The application takes ownership of the recognizer and returns the gesture type ID associated with it. For gesture recognizers which handle custom QGesture objects (i.e., those which return Qt::CustomGesture in a QGesture::gestureType() function) the return value is a generated gesture ID with the Qt::CustomGesture flag set.

See also unregisterRecognizer(), QGestureRecognizer::create(), and QGesture.

func (*QGestureRecognizer) Reset

func (this *QGestureRecognizer) Reset(state QGesture_ITF)

This function is called by the framework to reset a given gesture.

Reimplement this function to implement additional requirements for custom QGesture objects. This may be necessary if you implement a custom QGesture whose properties need special handling when the gesture is reset.

func (*QGestureRecognizer) SetCthis

func (this *QGestureRecognizer) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGestureRecognizer) UnregisterRecognizer

func (this *QGestureRecognizer) UnregisterRecognizer(type_ int)

Unregisters all gesture recognizers of the specified type.

See also registerRecognizer().

type QGestureRecognizer_ITF

type QGestureRecognizer_ITF interface {
	QGestureRecognizer_PTR() *QGestureRecognizer
}

type QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag

type QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = int
const QGestureRecognizer__CancelGesture QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 16
const QGestureRecognizer__ConsumeEventHint QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 256
const QGestureRecognizer__FinishGesture QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 8
const QGestureRecognizer__Ignore QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 1
const QGestureRecognizer__MayBeGesture QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 2
const QGestureRecognizer__ResultHint_Mask QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 65280
const QGestureRecognizer__ResultState_Mask QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 255
const QGestureRecognizer__TriggerGesture QGestureRecognizer__ResultFlag = 4

type QGesture_ITF

type QGesture_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QGesture_PTR() *QGesture
}

type QGesture__GestureCancelPolicy

type QGesture__GestureCancelPolicy = int

This enum describes how accepting a gesture can cancel other gestures automatically.

const QGesture__CancelAllInContext QGesture__GestureCancelPolicy = 1

On accepting this gesture all gestures that are active in the context (respecting the Qt::GestureFlag that were specified when subscribed to the gesture) will be cancelled.

const QGesture__CancelNone QGesture__GestureCancelPolicy = 0

On accepting this gesture no other gestures will be affected.

type QGraphicsAnchor

type QGraphicsAnchor struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQGraphicsAnchorFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsAnchorFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsAnchor

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsAnchor

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) QGraphicsAnchor_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsAnchor) QGraphicsAnchor_PTR() *QGraphicsAnchor

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) SetSizePolicy

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) SetSizePolicy(policy int)

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) SetSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) SetSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the default horizontal and the default vertical spacing for the anchor layout to spacing.

If an item is anchored with no spacing associated with the anchor, it will use the default spacing.

QGraphicsAnchorLayout does not support negative spacings. Setting a negative value will unset the previous spacing and make the layout use the spacing provided by the current widget style.

See also setHorizontalSpacing() and setVerticalSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) SizePolicy

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) SizePolicy() int

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) Spacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) Spacing() float64

func (*QGraphicsAnchor) UnsetSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchor) UnsetSpacing()

type QGraphicsAnchorLayout

type QGraphicsAnchorLayout struct {
	*QGraphicsLayout
}

func NewQGraphicsAnchorLayout

func NewQGraphicsAnchorLayout(parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) *QGraphicsAnchorLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsAnchorLayout instance. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsAnchorLayoutFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsAnchorLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsAnchorLayout

func NewQGraphicsAnchorLayout__

func NewQGraphicsAnchorLayout__() *QGraphicsAnchorLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsAnchorLayout instance. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddAnchor

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddAnchor(firstItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, firstEdge int, secondItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, secondEdge int) *QGraphicsAnchor

Creates an anchor between the edge firstEdge of item firstItem and the edge secondEdge of item secondItem. The spacing of the anchor is picked up from the style. Anchors between a layout edge and an item edge will have a size of 0. If there is already an anchor between the edges, the new anchor will replace the old one.

firstItem and secondItem are automatically added to the layout if they are not part of the layout. This means that count() can increase by up to 2.

The spacing an anchor will get depends on the type of anchor. For instance, anchors from the Right edge of one item to the Left edge of another (or vice versa) will use the default horizontal spacing. The same behaviour applies to Bottom to Top anchors, (but they will use the default vertical spacing). For all other anchor combinations, the spacing will be 0. All anchoring functions will follow this rule.

The spacing can also be set manually by using QGraphicsAnchor::setSpacing() method.

Calling this function where firstItem or secondItem are ancestors of the layout have undefined behaviour.

See also addAnchors() and addCornerAnchors().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddAnchors

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddAnchors(firstItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, secondItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, orientations int)

Anchors two or four edges of firstItem with the corresponding edges of secondItem, so that firstItem has the same size as secondItem in the dimensions specified by orientations.

For example, the following example anchors the left and right edges of two items to match their widths:

layout->addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorLeft, c, Qt::AnchorLeft);
layout->addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorRight, c, Qt::AnchorRight);

This can also be achieved using the following line of code:

layout->addAnchors(b, c, Qt::Horizontal);

See also addAnchor() and addCornerAnchors().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddAnchors__

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddAnchors__(firstItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, secondItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF)

Anchors two or four edges of firstItem with the corresponding edges of secondItem, so that firstItem has the same size as secondItem in the dimensions specified by orientations.

For example, the following example anchors the left and right edges of two items to match their widths:

layout->addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorLeft, c, Qt::AnchorLeft);
layout->addAnchor(b, Qt::AnchorRight, c, Qt::AnchorRight);

This can also be achieved using the following line of code:

layout->addAnchors(b, c, Qt::Horizontal);

See also addAnchor() and addCornerAnchors().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddCornerAnchors

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) AddCornerAnchors(firstItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, firstCorner int, secondItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, secondCorner int)

Creates two anchors between firstItem and secondItem specified by the corners, firstCorner and secondCorner, where one is for the horizontal edge and another one for the vertical edge.

This is a convenience function, since anchoring corners can be expressed as anchoring two edges. For instance:

layout->addAnchor(a, Qt::AnchorTop, layout, Qt::AnchorTop);
layout->addAnchor(a, Qt::AnchorLeft, layout, Qt::AnchorLeft);

This can also be achieved with the following line of code:

layout->addCornerAnchors(a, Qt::TopLeftCorner, layout, Qt::TopLeftCorner);

If there is already an anchor between the edge pairs, it will be replaced by the anchors that this function specifies.

firstItem and secondItem are automatically added to the layout if they are not part of the layout. This means that count() can increase by up to 2.

See also addAnchor() and addAnchors().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) Anchor

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) Anchor(firstItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, firstEdge int, secondItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, secondEdge int) *QGraphicsAnchor

Returns the anchor between the anchor points defined by firstItem and firstEdge and secondItem and secondEdge. If there is no such anchor, the function will return 0.

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) Count

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) Count() int

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::count().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) HorizontalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) HorizontalSpacing() float64

Returns the default horizontal spacing for the anchor layout.

See also verticalSpacing() and setHorizontalSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) InheritSizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) InheritSizeHint(f func(which int, constraint *qtcore.QSizeF) unsafe.Pointer)

QSizeF sizeHint(Qt::SizeHint, const class QSizeF &)

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) Invalidate()

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) ItemAt(index int) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::itemAt().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) QGraphicsAnchorLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) QGraphicsAnchorLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsAnchorLayout

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) RemoveAt

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) RemoveAt(index int)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::removeAt().

Removes the layout item at index without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.

Removing an item will also remove any of the anchors associated with it.

See also itemAt() and count().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the default horizontal spacing for the anchor layout to spacing.

See also horizontalSpacing(), setVerticalSpacing(), and setSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the default horizontal and the default vertical spacing for the anchor layout to spacing.

If an item is anchored with no spacing associated with the anchor, it will use the default spacing.

QGraphicsAnchorLayout does not support negative spacings. Setting a negative value will unset the previous spacing and make the layout use the spacing provided by the current widget style.

See also setHorizontalSpacing() and setVerticalSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetVerticalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SetVerticalSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the default vertical spacing for the anchor layout to spacing.

See also verticalSpacing(), setHorizontalSpacing(), and setSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SizeHint(which int, constraint qtcore.QSizeF_ITF) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SizeHint__

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) SizeHint__(which int) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsAnchorLayout) VerticalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsAnchorLayout) VerticalSpacing() float64

Returns the default vertical spacing for the anchor layout.

See also horizontalSpacing() and setVerticalSpacing().

type QGraphicsAnchorLayout_ITF

type QGraphicsAnchorLayout_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsLayout_ITF
	QGraphicsAnchorLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsAnchorLayout
}

type QGraphicsAnchor_ITF

type QGraphicsAnchor_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QGraphicsAnchor_PTR() *QGraphicsAnchor
}

type QGraphicsBlurEffect

type QGraphicsBlurEffect struct {
	*QGraphicsEffect
}

func NewQGraphicsBlurEffect

func NewQGraphicsBlurEffect(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsBlurEffect

func NewQGraphicsBlurEffectFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsBlurEffectFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsBlurEffect

func NewQGraphicsBlurEffect__

func NewQGraphicsBlurEffect__() *QGraphicsBlurEffect

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurHints

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurHints() int

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurHintsChanged

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurHintsChanged(hints int)

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurRadius

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurRadius() float64

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurRadiusChanged

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) BlurRadiusChanged(blurRadius float64)

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) BoundingRectFor

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) BoundingRectFor(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the effective bounding rectangle for this effect, given the provided rect in the device coordinates. When writing you own custom effect, you must call updateBoundingRect() whenever any parameters are changed that may cause this this function to return a different value.

See also sourceBoundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) Draw

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) Draw(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

This pure virtual function draws the effect and is called whenever the source needs to be drawn.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsEffect subclass to provide the effect's drawing implementation, using painter.

For example:

MyGraphicsEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)
{
    ...
    QPoint offset;
    if (sourceIsPixmap()) {
        // No point in drawing in device coordinates (pixmap will be scaled anyways).
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::LogicalCoordinates, &offset);
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    } else {
        // Draw pixmap in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling;
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::DeviceCoordinates, &offset);
        painter->setWorldTransform(QTransform());
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    }
    ...
}

This function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it is meant for reimplementation purposes only.

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) InheritDraw

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) InheritDraw(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void draw(class QPainter *)

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsBlurEffect

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) QGraphicsBlurEffect_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsBlurEffect) QGraphicsBlurEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsBlurEffect

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) SetBlurHints

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) SetBlurHints(hints int)

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) SetBlurRadius

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) SetBlurRadius(blurRadius float64)

func (*QGraphicsBlurEffect) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsBlurEffect) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QGraphicsBlurEffect_ITF

type QGraphicsBlurEffect_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsEffect_ITF
	QGraphicsBlurEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsBlurEffect
}

type QGraphicsBlurEffect__BlurHint

type QGraphicsBlurEffect__BlurHint = int
const QGraphicsBlurEffect__AnimationHint QGraphicsBlurEffect__BlurHint = 2
const QGraphicsBlurEffect__PerformanceHint QGraphicsBlurEffect__BlurHint = 0
const QGraphicsBlurEffect__QualityHint QGraphicsBlurEffect__BlurHint = 1

type QGraphicsColorizeEffect

type QGraphicsColorizeEffect struct {
	*QGraphicsEffect
}

func NewQGraphicsColorizeEffect

func NewQGraphicsColorizeEffect(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsColorizeEffect

func NewQGraphicsColorizeEffectFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsColorizeEffectFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsColorizeEffect

func NewQGraphicsColorizeEffect__

func NewQGraphicsColorizeEffect__() *QGraphicsColorizeEffect

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) Color

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) Color() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) ColorChanged

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) ColorChanged(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) Draw

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) Draw(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

This pure virtual function draws the effect and is called whenever the source needs to be drawn.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsEffect subclass to provide the effect's drawing implementation, using painter.

For example:

MyGraphicsEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)
{
    ...
    QPoint offset;
    if (sourceIsPixmap()) {
        // No point in drawing in device coordinates (pixmap will be scaled anyways).
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::LogicalCoordinates, &offset);
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    } else {
        // Draw pixmap in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling;
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::DeviceCoordinates, &offset);
        painter->setWorldTransform(QTransform());
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    }
    ...
}

This function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it is meant for reimplementation purposes only.

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) InheritDraw

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) InheritDraw(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void draw(class QPainter *)

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) QGraphicsColorizeEffect_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) QGraphicsColorizeEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsColorizeEffect

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) SetColor

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) SetColor(c qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) SetStrength

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) SetStrength(strength float64)

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) Strength

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) Strength() float64

func (*QGraphicsColorizeEffect) StrengthChanged

func (this *QGraphicsColorizeEffect) StrengthChanged(strength float64)

type QGraphicsColorizeEffect_ITF

type QGraphicsColorizeEffect_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsEffect_ITF
	QGraphicsColorizeEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsColorizeEffect
}

type QGraphicsDropShadowEffect

type QGraphicsDropShadowEffect struct {
	*QGraphicsEffect
}

func NewQGraphicsDropShadowEffect

func NewQGraphicsDropShadowEffect(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect

func NewQGraphicsDropShadowEffectFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsDropShadowEffectFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect

func NewQGraphicsDropShadowEffect__

func NewQGraphicsDropShadowEffect__() *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) BlurRadius

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) BlurRadius() float64

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) BlurRadiusChanged

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) BlurRadiusChanged(blurRadius float64)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) BoundingRectFor

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) BoundingRectFor(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the effective bounding rectangle for this effect, given the provided rect in the device coordinates. When writing you own custom effect, you must call updateBoundingRect() whenever any parameters are changed that may cause this this function to return a different value.

See also sourceBoundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) Color

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) Color() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) ColorChanged

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) ColorChanged(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) Draw

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) Draw(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

This pure virtual function draws the effect and is called whenever the source needs to be drawn.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsEffect subclass to provide the effect's drawing implementation, using painter.

For example:

MyGraphicsEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)
{
    ...
    QPoint offset;
    if (sourceIsPixmap()) {
        // No point in drawing in device coordinates (pixmap will be scaled anyways).
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::LogicalCoordinates, &offset);
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    } else {
        // Draw pixmap in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling;
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::DeviceCoordinates, &offset);
        painter->setWorldTransform(QTransform());
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    }
    ...
}

This function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it is meant for reimplementation purposes only.

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) InheritDraw

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) InheritDraw(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void draw(class QPainter *)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) Offset

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) Offset() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) OffsetChanged

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) OffsetChanged(offset qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) QGraphicsDropShadowEffect_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) QGraphicsDropShadowEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetBlurRadius

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetBlurRadius(blurRadius float64)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetColor

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetColor(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetOffset

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetOffset(ofs qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetOffset_1

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetOffset_1(dx float64, dy float64)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetOffset_2

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetOffset_2(d float64)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetXOffset

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetXOffset(dx float64)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetYOffset

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) SetYOffset(dy float64)

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) XOffset

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) XOffset() float64

func (*QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) YOffset

func (this *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect) YOffset() float64

type QGraphicsDropShadowEffect_ITF

type QGraphicsDropShadowEffect_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsEffect_ITF
	QGraphicsDropShadowEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsDropShadowEffect
}

type QGraphicsEffect

type QGraphicsEffect struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQGraphicsEffect

func NewQGraphicsEffect(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsEffect

Constructs a new QGraphicsEffect instance having the specified parent.

func NewQGraphicsEffectFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsEffectFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsEffect

func NewQGraphicsEffect__

func NewQGraphicsEffect__() *QGraphicsEffect

Constructs a new QGraphicsEffect instance having the specified parent.

func (*QGraphicsEffect) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the effective bounding rectangle for this effect, i.e., the bounding rectangle of the source in device coordinates, adjusted by any margins applied by the effect itself.

See also boundingRectFor() and updateBoundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) BoundingRectFor

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) BoundingRectFor(sourceRect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the effective bounding rectangle for this effect, given the provided rect in the device coordinates. When writing you own custom effect, you must call updateBoundingRect() whenever any parameters are changed that may cause this this function to return a different value.

See also sourceBoundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) Draw

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) Draw(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

This pure virtual function draws the effect and is called whenever the source needs to be drawn.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsEffect subclass to provide the effect's drawing implementation, using painter.

For example:

MyGraphicsEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)
{
    ...
    QPoint offset;
    if (sourceIsPixmap()) {
        // No point in drawing in device coordinates (pixmap will be scaled anyways).
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::LogicalCoordinates, &offset);
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    } else {
        // Draw pixmap in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling;
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::DeviceCoordinates, &offset);
        painter->setWorldTransform(QTransform());
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    }
    ...
}

This function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it is meant for reimplementation purposes only.

func (*QGraphicsEffect) DrawSource

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) DrawSource(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Draws the source directly using the given painter.

This function should only be called from QGraphicsEffect::draw().

For example:

MyGraphicsOpacityEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)
{
    // Fully opaque; draw directly without going through a pixmap.
    if (qFuzzyCompare(m_opacity, 1)) {
        drawSource(painter);
        return;
    }
    ...
}

See also QGraphicsEffect::draw().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) EnabledChanged

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) EnabledChanged(enabled bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the effect is enabled or disabled. The enabled parameter holds the effects's new enabled state.

Note: Notifier signal for property enabled.

See also isEnabled().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsEffect) InheritDraw

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) InheritDraw(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void draw(class QPainter *)

func (*QGraphicsEffect) InheritDrawSource

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) InheritDrawSource(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void drawSource(class QPainter *)

func (*QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourceBoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourceBoundingRect(f func(system int) unsafe.Pointer)

QRectF sourceBoundingRect(Qt::CoordinateSystem)

func (*QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourceChanged

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourceChanged(f func(flags int))

void sourceChanged(QGraphicsEffect::ChangeFlags)

func (*QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourceIsPixmap

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourceIsPixmap(f func() bool)

bool sourceIsPixmap()

func (*QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourcePixmap

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) InheritSourcePixmap(f func(system int, offset *qtcore.QPoint, mode int) unsafe.Pointer)

QPixmap sourcePixmap(Qt::CoordinateSystem, class QPoint *, enum QGraphicsEffect::PixmapPadMode)

func (*QGraphicsEffect) InheritUpdateBoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) InheritUpdateBoundingRect(f func())

void updateBoundingRect()

func (*QGraphicsEffect) IsEnabled

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) IsEnabled() bool

func (*QGraphicsEffect) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsEffect) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsEffect) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsEffect

func (*QGraphicsEffect) QGraphicsEffect_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsEffect) QGraphicsEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsEffect

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SetEnabled

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SetEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourceBoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourceBoundingRect(system int) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the bounding rectangle of the source mapped to the given system.

Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.

See also draw().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourceBoundingRect__

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourceBoundingRect__() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the bounding rectangle of the source mapped to the given system.

Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.

See also draw().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourceChanged

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourceChanged(flags int)

This virtual function is called by QGraphicsEffect to notify the effect that the source has changed. If the effect applies any cache, then this cache must be purged in order to reflect the new appearance of the source.

The flags describes what has changed.

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourceIsPixmap

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourceIsPixmap() bool

Returns true if the source effectively is a pixmap, e.g., a QGraphicsPixmapItem.

This function is useful for optimization purposes. For instance, there's no point in drawing the source in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling if this function returns true - the source pixmap will be scaled anyways.

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap(system int, offset qtcore.QPoint_ITF, mode int) *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns a pixmap with the source painted into it.

The system specifies which coordinate system to be used for the source. The optional offset parameter returns the offset where the pixmap should be painted at using the current painter. For control on how the pixmap is padded use the mode parameter.

The returned pixmap is clipped to the current painter's device rectangle when system is Qt::DeviceCoordinates.

Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.

See also draw() and boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap__

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap__() *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns a pixmap with the source painted into it.

The system specifies which coordinate system to be used for the source. The optional offset parameter returns the offset where the pixmap should be painted at using the current painter. For control on how the pixmap is padded use the mode parameter.

The returned pixmap is clipped to the current painter's device rectangle when system is Qt::DeviceCoordinates.

Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.

See also draw() and boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap__1

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap__1(system int) *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns a pixmap with the source painted into it.

The system specifies which coordinate system to be used for the source. The optional offset parameter returns the offset where the pixmap should be painted at using the current painter. For control on how the pixmap is padded use the mode parameter.

The returned pixmap is clipped to the current painter's device rectangle when system is Qt::DeviceCoordinates.

Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.

See also draw() and boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap__2

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) SourcePixmap__2(system int, offset qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns a pixmap with the source painted into it.

The system specifies which coordinate system to be used for the source. The optional offset parameter returns the offset where the pixmap should be painted at using the current painter. For control on how the pixmap is padded use the mode parameter.

The returned pixmap is clipped to the current painter's device rectangle when system is Qt::DeviceCoordinates.

Calling this function with Qt::DeviceCoordinates outside of QGraphicsEffect::draw() will give undefined results, as there is no device context available.

See also draw() and boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) Update

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) Update()

Schedules a redraw of the effect. Call this function whenever the effect needs to be redrawn. This function does not trigger a redraw of the source.

See also updateBoundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsEffect) UpdateBoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsEffect) UpdateBoundingRect()

This function notifies the effect framework when the effect's bounding rectangle has changed. As a custom effect author, you must call this function whenever you change any parameters that will cause the virtual boundingRectFor() function to return a different value.

This function will call update() if this is necessary.

See also boundingRectFor(), boundingRect(), and sourceBoundingRect().

type QGraphicsEffect_ITF

type QGraphicsEffect_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QGraphicsEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsEffect
}

type QGraphicsEffect__ChangeFlag

type QGraphicsEffect__ChangeFlag = int
const QGraphicsEffect__SourceAttached QGraphicsEffect__ChangeFlag = 1
const QGraphicsEffect__SourceBoundingRectChanged QGraphicsEffect__ChangeFlag = 4
const QGraphicsEffect__SourceDetached QGraphicsEffect__ChangeFlag = 2
const QGraphicsEffect__SourceInvalidated QGraphicsEffect__ChangeFlag = 8

type QGraphicsEffect__PixmapPadMode

type QGraphicsEffect__PixmapPadMode = int

This enum describes how the pixmap returned from sourcePixmap should be padded.

const QGraphicsEffect__NoPad QGraphicsEffect__PixmapPadMode = 0

The pixmap should not receive any additional padding.

const QGraphicsEffect__PadToEffectiveBoundingRect QGraphicsEffect__PixmapPadMode = 2

The pixmap should be padded to match the effective bounding rectangle of the effect.

const QGraphicsEffect__PadToTransparentBorder QGraphicsEffect__PixmapPadMode = 1

The pixmap should be padded to ensure it has a completely transparent border.

type QGraphicsEllipseItem

type QGraphicsEllipseItem struct {
	*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem
}

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_1

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_1_(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_2

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_2(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_2_

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem_2_(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem__

func NewQGraphicsEllipseItem__() *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) Paint

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) Paint__

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) QGraphicsEllipseItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsEllipseItem) QGraphicsEllipseItem_PTR() *QGraphicsEllipseItem

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) Rect

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) Rect() *qtcore.QRectF

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetRect

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetRect(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetRect_1

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetRect_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetSpanAngle

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetSpanAngle(angle int)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetStartAngle

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SetStartAngle(angle int)

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SpanAngle

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SpanAngle() int

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) StartAngle

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) StartAngle() int

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsEllipseItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsEllipseItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsEllipseItem_ITF

type QGraphicsEllipseItem_ITF interface {
	QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_ITF
	QGraphicsEllipseItem_PTR() *QGraphicsEllipseItem
}

type QGraphicsEllipseItem__

type QGraphicsEllipseItem__ = int
const QGraphicsEllipseItem__Type QGraphicsEllipseItem__ = 4

type QGraphicsGridLayout

type QGraphicsGridLayout struct {
	*QGraphicsLayout
}

func NewQGraphicsGridLayout

func NewQGraphicsGridLayout(parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) *QGraphicsGridLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsGridLayout instance. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsGridLayoutFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsGridLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsGridLayout

func NewQGraphicsGridLayout__

func NewQGraphicsGridLayout__() *QGraphicsGridLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsGridLayout instance. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int, alignment int)

Adds item to the grid on row and column. You can specify a rowSpan and columnSpan and an optional alignment.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem_1

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem_1(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int, alignment int)

Adds item to the grid on row and column. You can specify a rowSpan and columnSpan and an optional alignment.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem_1_

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem_1_(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int)

Adds item to the grid on row and column. You can specify a rowSpan and columnSpan and an optional alignment.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem__

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) AddItem__(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int)

Adds item to the grid on row and column. You can specify a rowSpan and columnSpan and an optional alignment.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) Alignment

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) Alignment(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) int

Returns the alignment for item.

See also setAlignment().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnAlignment

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnAlignment(column int) int

Returns the alignment for column.

See also setColumnAlignment().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnCount

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnCount() int

Returns the number of columns in the grid layout. This is always one more than the index of the last column that is occupied by a layout item (empty columns are counted except for those at the end).

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnMaximumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnMaximumWidth(column int) float64

Returns the maximum width for column.

See also setColumnMaximumWidth().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnMinimumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnMinimumWidth(column int) float64

Returns the minimum width for column.

See also setColumnMinimumWidth().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnPreferredWidth

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnPreferredWidth(column int) float64

Returns the preferred width for column.

See also setColumnPreferredWidth().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnSpacing(column int) float64

Returns the column spacing for column.

See also setColumnSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnStretchFactor

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ColumnStretchFactor(column int) int

Returns the stretch factor for column.

See also setColumnStretchFactor().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) Count

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) Count() int

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::count().

Returns the number of layout items in this grid layout.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) HorizontalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) HorizontalSpacing() float64

Returns the default horizontal spacing for the grid layout.

See also setHorizontalSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) Invalidate()

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ItemAt(row int, column int) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Returns a pointer to the layout item at (row, column).

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) ItemAt_1

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) ItemAt_1(index int) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Returns a pointer to the layout item at (row, column).

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsGridLayout

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) QGraphicsGridLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsGridLayout) QGraphicsGridLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsGridLayout

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RemoveAt

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RemoveAt(index int)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::removeAt().

Removes the layout item at index without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.

See also addItem().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RemoveItem

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RemoveItem(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF)

Removes the layout item item without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.

See also addItem().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RowAlignment

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RowAlignment(row int) int

Returns the alignment of row.

See also setRowAlignment().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RowCount

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RowCount() int

Returns the number of rows in the grid layout. This is always one more than the index of the last row that is occupied by a layout item (empty rows are counted except for those at the end).

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RowMaximumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RowMaximumHeight(row int) float64

Returns the maximum height for row, row.

See also setRowMaximumHeight().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RowMinimumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RowMinimumHeight(row int) float64

Returns the minimum height for row, row.

See also setRowMinimumHeight().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RowPreferredHeight

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RowPreferredHeight(row int) float64

Returns the preferred height for row, row.

See also setRowPreferredHeight().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RowSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RowSpacing(row int) float64

Returns the row spacing for row.

See also setRowSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) RowStretchFactor

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) RowStretchFactor(row int) int

Returns the stretch factor for row.

See also setRowStretchFactor().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetAlignment

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetAlignment(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, alignment int)

Sets the alignment for item to alignment.

See also alignment().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnAlignment

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnAlignment(column int, alignment int)

Sets the alignment for column to alignment.

See also columnAlignment().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnFixedWidth

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnFixedWidth(column int, width float64)

Sets the fixed width of column to width.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnMaximumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnMaximumWidth(column int, width float64)

Sets the maximum width of column to width.

See also columnMaximumWidth().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnMinimumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnMinimumWidth(column int, width float64)

Sets the minimum width for column to width.

See also columnMinimumWidth().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnPreferredWidth

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnPreferredWidth(column int, width float64)

Sets the preferred width for column to width.

See also columnPreferredWidth().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnSpacing(column int, spacing float64)

Sets the spacing for column to spacing.

See also columnSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnStretchFactor

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetColumnStretchFactor(column int, stretch int)

Sets the stretch factor for column to stretch.

See also columnStretchFactor().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().

Sets the bounding geometry of the grid layout to rect.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the default horizontal spacing for the grid layout to spacing.

See also horizontalSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowAlignment

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowAlignment(row int, alignment int)

Sets the alignment of row to alignment.

See also rowAlignment().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowFixedHeight

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowFixedHeight(row int, height float64)

Sets the fixed height for row, row, to height.

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowMaximumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowMaximumHeight(row int, height float64)

Sets the maximum height for row, row, to height.

See also rowMaximumHeight().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowMinimumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowMinimumHeight(row int, height float64)

Sets the minimum height for row, row, to height.

See also rowMinimumHeight().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowPreferredHeight

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowPreferredHeight(row int, height float64)

Sets the preferred height for row, row, to height.

See also rowPreferredHeight().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowSpacing(row int, spacing float64)

Sets the spacing for row to spacing.

See also rowSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowStretchFactor

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetRowStretchFactor(row int, stretch int)

Sets the stretch factor for row to stretch.

See also rowStretchFactor().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the grid layout's default spacing, both vertical and horizontal, to spacing.

See also rowSpacing() and columnSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SetVerticalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SetVerticalSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the default vertical spacing for the grid layout to spacing.

See also verticalSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SizeHint(which int, constraint qtcore.QSizeF_ITF) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) SizeHint__

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) SizeHint__(which int) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsGridLayout) VerticalSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsGridLayout) VerticalSpacing() float64

Returns the default vertical spacing for the grid layout.

See also setVerticalSpacing().

type QGraphicsGridLayout_ITF

type QGraphicsGridLayout_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsLayout_ITF
	QGraphicsGridLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsGridLayout
}

type QGraphicsItem

type QGraphicsItem struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQGraphicsItem

func NewQGraphicsItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsItem

Constructs a QGraphicsItem with the given parent item. It does not modify the parent object returned by QObject::parent().

If parent is 0, you can add the item to a scene by calling QGraphicsScene::addItem(). The item will then become a top-level item.

See also QGraphicsScene::addItem() and setParentItem().

func NewQGraphicsItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsItem

func NewQGraphicsItem__

func NewQGraphicsItem__() *QGraphicsItem

Constructs a QGraphicsItem with the given parent item. It does not modify the parent object returned by QObject::parent().

If parent is 0, you can add the item to a scene by calling QGraphicsScene::addItem(). The item will then become a top-level item.

See also QGraphicsScene::addItem() and setParentItem().

func (*QGraphicsItem) AcceptDrops

func (this *QGraphicsItem) AcceptDrops() bool

Returns true if this item can accept drag and drop events; otherwise, returns false. By default, items do not accept drag and drop events; items are transparent to drag and drop.

See also setAcceptDrops().

func (*QGraphicsItem) AcceptHoverEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) AcceptHoverEvents() bool

Returns true if an item accepts hover events (QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent); otherwise, returns false. By default, items do not accept hover events.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setAcceptHoverEvents() and setAcceptedMouseButtons().

func (*QGraphicsItem) AcceptTouchEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) AcceptTouchEvents() bool

Returns true if an item accepts touch events; otherwise, returns false. By default, items do not accept touch events.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setAcceptTouchEvents().

func (*QGraphicsItem) AcceptedMouseButtons

func (this *QGraphicsItem) AcceptedMouseButtons() int

Returns the mouse buttons that this item accepts mouse events for. By default, all mouse buttons are accepted.

If an item accepts a mouse button, it will become the mouse grabber item when a mouse press event is delivered for that mouse button. However, if the item does not accept the button, QGraphicsScene will forward the mouse events to the first item beneath it that does.

See also setAcceptedMouseButtons() and mousePressEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) AddToIndex

func (this *QGraphicsItem) AddToIndex()

func (*QGraphicsItem) Advance

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Advance(phase int)

This virtual function is called twice for all items by the QGraphicsScene::advance() slot. In the first phase, all items are called with phase == 0, indicating that items on the scene are about to advance, and then all items are called with phase == 1. Reimplement this function to update your item if you need simple scene-controlled animation.

The default implementation does nothing.

This function is intended for animations. An alternative is to multiple-inherit from QObject and QGraphicsItem and use the Animation Framework.

See also QGraphicsScene::advance() and QTimeLine.

func (*QGraphicsItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsItem) BoundingRegion

func (this *QGraphicsItem) BoundingRegion(itemToDeviceTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF) *qtgui.QRegion

Returns the bounding region for this item. The coordinate space of the returned region depends on itemToDeviceTransform. If you pass an identity QTransform as a parameter, this function will return a local coordinate region.

The bounding region describes a coarse outline of the item's visual contents. Although it's expensive to calculate, it's also more precise than boundingRect(), and it can help to avoid unnecessary repainting when an item is updated. This is particularly efficient for thin items (e.g., lines or simple polygons). You can tune the granularity for the bounding region by calling setBoundingRegionGranularity(). The default granularity is 0; in which the item's bounding region is the same as its bounding rect.

itemToDeviceTransform is the transformation from item coordinates to device coordinates. If you want this function to return a QRegion in scene coordinates, you can pass sceneTransform() as an argument.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also boundingRegionGranularity().

func (*QGraphicsItem) BoundingRegionGranularity

func (this *QGraphicsItem) BoundingRegionGranularity() float64

Returns the item's bounding region granularity; a value between and including 0 and 1. The default value is 0 (i.e., the lowest granularity, where the bounding region corresponds to the item's bounding rectangle).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setBoundingRegionGranularity().

func (*QGraphicsItem) CacheMode

func (this *QGraphicsItem) CacheMode() int

Returns the cache mode for this item. The default mode is NoCache (i.e., cache is disabled and all painting is immediate).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setCacheMode().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ChildrenBoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ChildrenBoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the bounding rect of this item's descendants (i.e., its children, their children, etc.) in local coordinates. The rectangle will contain all descendants after they have been mapped to local coordinates. If the item has no children, this function returns an empty QRectF.

This does not include this item's own bounding rect; it only returns its descendants' accumulated bounding rect. If you need to include this item's bounding rect, you can add boundingRect() to childrenBoundingRect() using QRectF::operator|().

This function is linear in complexity; it determines the size of the returned bounding rect by iterating through all descendants.

See also boundingRect() and sceneBoundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ClearFocus

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ClearFocus()

Takes keyboard input focus from the item.

If it has focus, a focus out event is sent to this item to tell it that it is about to lose the focus.

Only items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, or widgets that set an appropriate focus policy, can accept keyboard focus.

See also setFocus(), hasFocus(), and QGraphicsWidget::focusPolicy.

func (*QGraphicsItem) ClipPath

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ClipPath() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns this item's clip path, or an empty QPainterPath if this item is not clipped. The clip path constrains the item's appearance and interaction (i.e., restricts the area the item can draw within and receive events for).

You can enable clipping by setting the ItemClipsToShape or ItemClipsChildrenToShape flags. The item's clip path is calculated by intersecting all clipping ancestors' shapes. If the item sets ItemClipsToShape, the final clip is intersected with the item's own shape.

Note: Clipping introduces a performance penalty for all items involved; you should generally avoid using clipping if you can (e.g., if your items always draw inside boundingRect() or shape() boundaries, clipping is not necessary).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also isClipped(), shape(), and setFlags().

func (*QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithItem(other QGraphicsItem_ITF, mode int) bool

Returns true if this item collides with other; otherwise returns false.

The mode is applied to other, and the resulting shape or bounding rectangle is then compared to this item's shape. The default value for mode is Qt::IntersectsItemShape; other collides with this item if it either intersects, contains, or is contained by this item's shape (see Qt::ItemSelectionMode for details).

The default implementation is based on shape intersection, and it calls shape() on both items. Because the complexity of arbitrary shape-shape intersection grows with an order of magnitude when the shapes are complex, this operation can be noticably time consuming. You have the option of reimplementing this function in a subclass of QGraphicsItem to provide a custom algorithm. This allows you to make use of natural constraints in the shapes of your own items, in order to improve the performance of the collision detection. For instance, two untransformed perfectly circular items' collision can be determined very efficiently by comparing their positions and radii.

Keep in mind that when reimplementing this function and calling shape() or boundingRect() on other, the returned coordinates must be mapped to this item's coordinate system before any intersection can take place.

See also contains() and shape().

func (*QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithItem__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithItem__(other QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item collides with other; otherwise returns false.

The mode is applied to other, and the resulting shape or bounding rectangle is then compared to this item's shape. The default value for mode is Qt::IntersectsItemShape; other collides with this item if it either intersects, contains, or is contained by this item's shape (see Qt::ItemSelectionMode for details).

The default implementation is based on shape intersection, and it calls shape() on both items. Because the complexity of arbitrary shape-shape intersection grows with an order of magnitude when the shapes are complex, this operation can be noticably time consuming. You have the option of reimplementing this function in a subclass of QGraphicsItem to provide a custom algorithm. This allows you to make use of natural constraints in the shapes of your own items, in order to improve the performance of the collision detection. For instance, two untransformed perfectly circular items' collision can be determined very efficiently by comparing their positions and radii.

Keep in mind that when reimplementing this function and calling shape() or boundingRect() on other, the returned coordinates must be mapped to this item's coordinate system before any intersection can take place.

See also contains() and shape().

func (*QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithPath

func (this *QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithPath(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, mode int) bool

Returns true if this item collides with path.

The collision is determined by mode. The default value for mode is Qt::IntersectsItemShape; path collides with this item if it either intersects, contains, or is contained by this item's shape.

Note that this function checks whether the item's shape or bounding rectangle (depending on mode) is contained within path, and not whether path is contained within the items shape or bounding rectangle.

See also collidesWithItem(), contains(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithPath__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) CollidesWithPath__(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item collides with path.

The collision is determined by mode. The default value for mode is Qt::IntersectsItemShape; path collides with this item if it either intersects, contains, or is contained by this item's shape.

Note that this function checks whether the item's shape or bounding rectangle (depending on mode) is contained within path, and not whether path is contained within the items shape or bounding rectangle.

See also collidesWithItem(), contains(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsItem) CommonAncestorItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) CommonAncestorItem(other QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsItem

Returns the closest common ancestor item of this item and other, or 0 if either other is 0, or there is no common ancestor.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also isAncestorOf().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ContextMenuEvent(event QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to process context menu events. The event parameter contains details about the event to be handled.

If you ignore the event (i.e., by calling QEvent::ignore()), event will propagate to any item beneath this item. If no items accept the event, it will be ignored by the scene and propagate to the view.

It's common to open a QMenu in response to receiving a context menu event. Example:

void CustomItem::contextMenuEvent(QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent *event)
{
    QMenu menu;
    QAction *removeAction = menu.addAction("Remove");
    QAction *markAction = menu.addAction("Mark");
    QAction *selectedAction = menu.exec(event->screenPos());
    // ...
}

The default implementation ignores the event.

See also sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Cursor

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Cursor() *qtgui.QCursor

Returns the current cursor shape for the item. The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this item. See the list of predefined cursor objects for a range of useful shapes.

An editor item might want to use an I-beam cursor:

item->setCursor(Qt::IBeamCursor);

If no cursor has been set, the cursor of the item beneath is used.

See also setCursor(), hasCursor(), unsetCursor(), QWidget::cursor, and QApplication::overrideCursor().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Data

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Data(key int) *qtcore.QVariant

Returns this item's custom data for the key key as a QVariant.

Custom item data is useful for storing arbitrary properties in any item. Example:

static const int ObjectName = 0;

QGraphicsItem *item = scene.itemAt(100, 50);
if (item->data(ObjectName).toString().isEmpty()) {
    if (qgraphicsitem_cast<ButtonItem *>(item))
        item->setData(ObjectName, "Button");
}

Qt does not use this feature for storing data; it is provided solely for the convenience of the user.

See also setData().

func (*QGraphicsItem) DeviceTransform

func (this *QGraphicsItem) DeviceTransform(viewportTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF) *qtgui.QTransform

Returns this item's device transformation matrix, using viewportTransform to map from scene to device coordinates. This matrix can be used to map coordinates and geometrical shapes from this item's local coordinate system to the viewport's (or any device's) coordinate system. To map coordinates from the viewport, you must first invert the returned matrix.

Example:

QGraphicsRectItem rect;
rect.setPos(100, 100);

rect.deviceTransform(view->viewportTransform()).map(QPointF(0, 0));
// returns the item's (0, 0) point in view's viewport coordinates

rect.deviceTransform(view->viewportTransform()).inverted().map(QPointF(100, 100));
// returns view's viewport's (100, 100) coordinate in item coordinates

This function is the same as combining this item's scene transform with the view's viewport transform, but it also understands the ItemIgnoresTransformations flag. The device transform can be used to do accurate coordinate mapping (and collision detection) for untransformable items.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also transform(), setTransform(), scenePos(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and itemTransform().

func (*QGraphicsItem) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) DragEnterEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag enter events for this item. Drag enter events are generated as the cursor enters the item's area.

By accepting the event (i.e., by calling QEvent::accept()), the item will accept drop events, in addition to receiving drag move and drag leave. Otherwise, the event will be ignored and propagate to the item beneath. If the event is accepted, the item will receive a drag move event before control goes back to the event loop.

A common implementation of dragEnterEvent accepts or ignores event depending on the associated mime data in event. Example:

CustomItem::CustomItem()
{
    setAcceptDrops(true);
    ...
}

void CustomItem::dragEnterEvent(QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *event)
{
    event->setAccepted(event->mimeData()->hasFormat("text/plain"));
}

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dropEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) DragLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag leave events for this item. Drag leave events are generated as the cursor leaves the item's area. Most often you will not need to reimplement this function, but it can be useful for resetting state in your item (e.g., highlighting).

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dragEnterEvent(), dropEvent(), and dragMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) DragMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag move events for this item. Drag move events are generated as the cursor moves around inside the item's area. Most often you will not need to reimplement this function; it is used to indicate that only parts of the item can accept drops.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event toggles whether or not the item will accept drops at the position from the event. By default, event is accepted, indicating that the item allows drops at the specified position.

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dropEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) DropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) DropEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drop events for this item. Items can only receive drop events if the last drag move event was accepted.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) EffectiveOpacity

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EffectiveOpacity() float64

Returns this item's effective opacity, which is between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (opaque). This value is a combination of this item's local opacity, and its parent and ancestors' opacities. The effective opacity decides how the item is rendered.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also opacity(), setOpacity(), paint(), ItemIgnoresParentOpacity, and ItemDoesntPropagateOpacityToChildren.

func (*QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, xmargin int, ymargin int)

If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.

If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.

If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, xmargin int, ymargin int)

If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.

If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.

If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible_1_

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible_1_(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.

If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.

If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible_1_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible_1_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, xmargin int)

If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.

If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.

If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible__()

If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.

If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.

If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible__1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible__1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.

If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.

If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible__2

func (this *QGraphicsItem) EnsureVisible__2(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, xmargin int)

If this item is part of a scene that is viewed by a QGraphicsView, this convenience function will attempt to scroll the view to ensure that rect is visible inside the view's viewport. If rect is a null rect (the default), QGraphicsItem will default to the item's bounding rect. xmargin and ymargin are the number of pixels the view should use for margins.

If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position.

If this item is not viewed by a QGraphicsView, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsView::ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsItem) FiltersChildEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) FiltersChildEvents() bool

Returns true if this item filters child events (i.e., all events intended for any of its children are instead sent to this item); otherwise, false is returned.

The default value is false; child events are not filtered.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setFiltersChildEvents().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Flags

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Flags() int

Returns this item's flags. The flags describe what configurable features of the item are enabled and not. For example, if the flags include ItemIsFocusable, the item can accept input focus.

By default, no flags are enabled.

See also setFlags() and setFlag().

func (*QGraphicsItem) FocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive focus in events for this item. The default implementation calls ensureVisible().

See also focusOutEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setFocus().

func (*QGraphicsItem) FocusItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) FocusItem() *QGraphicsItem

If this item, a child or descendant of this item currently has input focus, this function will return a pointer to that item. If no descendant has input focus, 0 is returned.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also hasFocus(), setFocus(), and QWidget::focusWidget().

func (*QGraphicsItem) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive focus out events for this item. The default implementation does nothing.

See also focusInEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setFocus().

func (*QGraphicsItem) FocusProxy

func (this *QGraphicsItem) FocusProxy() *QGraphicsItem

Returns this item's focus proxy, or 0 if this item has no focus proxy.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setFocusProxy(), setFocus(), and hasFocus().

func (*QGraphicsItem) FocusScopeItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) FocusScopeItem() *QGraphicsItem

func (*QGraphicsItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsItem) GrabKeyboard

func (this *QGraphicsItem) GrabKeyboard()

Grabs the keyboard input.

The item will receive all keyboard input to the scene until one of the following events occur:

The item becomes invisible The item is removed from the scene The item is deleted The item calls ungrabKeyboard() Another item calls grabKeyboard(); the item will regain the keyboard grab when the other item calls ungrabKeyboard().

When an item gains the keyboard grab, it receives a QEvent::GrabKeyboard event. When it loses the keyboard grab, it receives a QEvent::UngrabKeyboard event. These events can be used to detect when your item gains or loses the keyboard grab through other means than gaining input focus.

It is almost never necessary to explicitly grab the keyboard in Qt, as Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the keyboard when your item gains input focus, and releases it when your item loses input focus, or when the item is hidden.

Note that only visible items can grab keyboard input. Calling grabKeyboard() on an invisible item has no effect.

Keyboard events are not affected.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also ungrabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), and setFocus().

func (*QGraphicsItem) GrabMouse

func (this *QGraphicsItem) GrabMouse()

Grabs the mouse input.

This item will receive all mouse events for the scene until any of the following events occurs:

The item becomes invisible The item is removed from the scene The item is deleted The item call ungrabMouse() Another item calls grabMouse(); the item will regain the mouse grab when the other item calls ungrabMouse().

When an item gains the mouse grab, it receives a QEvent::GrabMouse event. When it loses the mouse grab, it receives a QEvent::UngrabMouse event. These events can be used to detect when your item gains or loses the mouse grab through other means than receiving mouse button events.

It is almost never necessary to explicitly grab the mouse in Qt, as Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the mouse when you press a mouse button, and keeps the mouse grabbed until you release the last mouse button. Also, Qt::Popup widgets implicitly call grabMouse() when shown, and ungrabMouse() when hidden.

Note that only visible items can grab mouse input. Calling grabMouse() on an invisible item has no effect.

Keyboard events are not affected.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also QGraphicsScene::mouseGrabberItem(), ungrabMouse(), and grabKeyboard().

func (*QGraphicsItem) GraphicsEffect

func (this *QGraphicsItem) GraphicsEffect() *QGraphicsEffect

Returns a pointer to this item's effect if it has one; otherwise 0.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setGraphicsEffect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Group

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Group() *QGraphicsItemGroup

Returns a pointer to this item's item group, or 0 if this item is not member of a group.

See also setGroup(), QGraphicsItemGroup, and QGraphicsScene::createItemGroup().

func (*QGraphicsItem) HandlesChildEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) HandlesChildEvents() bool

func (*QGraphicsItem) HasCursor

func (this *QGraphicsItem) HasCursor() bool

Returns true if this item has a cursor set; otherwise, false is returned.

By default, items don't have any cursor set. cursor() will return a standard pointing arrow cursor.

See also unsetCursor().

func (*QGraphicsItem) HasFocus

func (this *QGraphicsItem) HasFocus() bool

Returns true if this item is active, and it or its focus proxy has keyboard input focus; otherwise, returns false.

See also focusItem(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and isActive().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Hide

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Hide()

Hides the item (items are visible by default).

This convenience function is equivalent to calling setVisible(false).

See also show() and setVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) HoverEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) HoverEnterEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover enter events for this item. The default implementation calls update(); otherwise it does nothing.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

See also hoverMoveEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().

func (*QGraphicsItem) HoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) HoverLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover leave events for this item. The default implementation calls update(); otherwise it does nothing.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

See also hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().

func (*QGraphicsItem) HoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) HoverMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover move events for this item. The default implementation does nothing.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

See also hoverEnterEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritAddToIndex

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritAddToIndex(f func())

void addToIndex()

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritHoverEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritHoverEnterEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverEnterEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritHoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritHoverLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritHoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritHoverMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritInputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritInputMethodQuery(f func(query int) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant inputMethodQuery(Qt::InputMethodQuery)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritItemChange

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritItemChange(f func(change int, value *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant itemChange(enum QGraphicsItem::GraphicsItemChange, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritPrepareGeometryChange

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritPrepareGeometryChange(f func())

void prepareGeometryChange()

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritRemoveFromIndex

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritRemoveFromIndex(f func())

void removeFromIndex()

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritSceneEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritSceneEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool sceneEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritSceneEventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritSceneEventFilter(f func(watched *QGraphicsItem, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool sceneEventFilter(class QGraphicsItem *, class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritUpdateMicroFocus

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritUpdateMicroFocus(f func())

void updateMicroFocus()

func (*QGraphicsItem) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsItem) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InputMethodEvent(event qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive input method events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event.

See also inputMethodQuery() and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) InputMethodHints

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InputMethodHints() int

Returns the current input method hints of this item.

Input method hints are only relevant for input items. The hints are used by the input method to indicate how it should operate. For example, if the Qt::ImhNumbersOnly flag is set, the input method may change its visual components to reflect that only numbers can be entered.

The effect may vary between input method implementations.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setInputMethodHints() and inputMethodQuery().

func (*QGraphicsItem) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InputMethodQuery(query int) *qtcore.QVariant

This method is only relevant for input items. It is used by the input method to query a set of properties of the item to be able to support complex input method operations, such as support for surrounding text and reconversions. query specifies which property is queried.

See also inputMethodEvent() and QInputMethodEvent.

func (*QGraphicsItem) InstallSceneEventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsItem) InstallSceneEventFilter(filterItem QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Installs an event filter for this item on filterItem, causing all events for this item to first pass through filterItem's sceneEventFilter() function.

To filter another item's events, install this item as an event filter for the other item. Example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
QGraphicsEllipseItem *ellipse = scene.addEllipse(QRectF(-10, -10, 20, 20));
QGraphicsLineItem *line = scene.addLine(QLineF(-10, -10, 20, 20));

line->installSceneEventFilter(ellipse);
// line's events are filtered by ellipse's sceneEventFilter() function.

ellipse->installSceneEventFilter(line);
// ellipse's events are filtered by line's sceneEventFilter() function.

An item can only filter events for other items in the same scene. Also, an item cannot filter its own events; instead, you can reimplement sceneEvent() directly.

Items must belong to a scene for scene event filters to be installed and used.

See also removeSceneEventFilter(), sceneEventFilter(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsActive

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsActive() bool

Returns true if this item is active; otherwise returns false.

An item can only be active if the scene is active. An item is active if it is, or is a descendent of, an active panel. Items in non-active panels are not active.

Items that are not part of a panel follow scene activation when the scene has no active panel.

Only active items can gain input focus.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also QGraphicsScene::isActive(), QGraphicsScene::activePanel(), panel(), and isPanel().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsAncestorOf

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsAncestorOf(child QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item is an ancestor of child (i.e., if this item is child's parent, or one of child's parent's ancestors).

See also parentItem().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsBlockedByModalPanel

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsBlockedByModalPanel(blockingPanel QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item is blocked by a modal panel, false otherwise. If blockingPanel is non-zero, blockingPanel will be set to the modal panel that is blocking this item. If this item is not blocked, blockingPanel will not be set by this function.

This function always returns false for items not in a scene.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also panelModality(), setPanelModality(), and PanelModality.

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsBlockedByModalPanel__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsBlockedByModalPanel__() bool

Returns true if this item is blocked by a modal panel, false otherwise. If blockingPanel is non-zero, blockingPanel will be set to the modal panel that is blocking this item. If this item is not blocked, blockingPanel will not be set by this function.

This function always returns false for items not in a scene.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also panelModality(), setPanelModality(), and PanelModality.

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsClipped

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsClipped() bool

Returns true if this item is clipped. An item is clipped if it has either set the ItemClipsToShape flag, or if it or any of its ancestors has set the ItemClipsChildrenToShape flag.

Clipping affects the item's appearance (i.e., painting), as well as mouse and hover event delivery.

See also clipPath(), shape(), and setFlags().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsEnabled

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsEnabled() bool

Returns true if the item is enabled; otherwise, false is returned.

See also setEnabled().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsObscured

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsObscured(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) bool

This is an overloaded function.

Returns true if rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of any of colliding items above it (i.e., with a higher Z value than this item).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also opaqueArea().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsObscured_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsObscured_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) bool

This is an overloaded function.

Returns true if rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of any of colliding items above it (i.e., with a higher Z value than this item).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also opaqueArea().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsObscured__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsObscured__() bool

This is an overloaded function.

Returns true if rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of any of colliding items above it (i.e., with a higher Z value than this item).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also opaqueArea().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsPanel

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsPanel() bool

Returns true if the item is a panel; otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also QGraphicsItem::panel() and ItemIsPanel.

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsSelected

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsSelected() bool

Returns true if this item is selected; otherwise, false is returned.

Items that are in a group inherit the group's selected state.

Items are not selected by default.

See also setSelected() and QGraphicsScene::setSelectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsUnderMouse

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsUnderMouse() bool

Returns true if this item is currently under the mouse cursor in one of the views; otherwise, false is returned.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also QGraphicsScene::views() and QCursor::pos().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsVisible

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsVisible() bool

Returns true if the item is visible; otherwise, false is returned.

Note that the item's general visibility is unrelated to whether or not it is actually being visualized by a QGraphicsView.

See also setVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsVisibleTo

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsVisibleTo(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if the item is visible to parent; otherwise, false is returned. parent can be 0, in which case this function will return whether the item is visible to the scene or not.

An item may not be visible to its ancestors even if isVisible() is true. It may also be visible to its ancestors even if isVisible() is false. If any ancestor is hidden, the item itself will be implicitly hidden, in which case this function will return false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also isVisible() and setVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsWidget

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsWidget() bool

Returns true if this item is a widget (i.e., QGraphicsWidget); otherwise, returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QGraphicsItem) IsWindow

func (this *QGraphicsItem) IsWindow() bool

Returns true if the item is a QGraphicsWidget window, otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also QGraphicsWidget::windowFlags().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ItemChange

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ItemChange(change int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

This virtual function is called by QGraphicsItem to notify custom items that some part of the item's state changes. By reimplementing this function, you can react to a change, and in some cases (depending on change), adjustments can be made.

change is the parameter of the item that is changing. value is the new value; the type of the value depends on change.

Example:

QVariant Component::itemChange(GraphicsItemChange change, const QVariant &value)
{
    if (change == ItemPositionChange && scene()) {
        // value is the new position.
        QPointF newPos = value.toPointF();
        QRectF rect = scene()->sceneRect();
        if (!rect.contains(newPos)) {
            // Keep the item inside the scene rect.
            newPos.setX(qMin(rect.right(), qMax(newPos.x(), rect.left())));
            newPos.setY(qMin(rect.bottom(), qMax(newPos.y(), rect.top())));
            return newPos;
        }
    }
    return QGraphicsItem::itemChange(change, value);
}

The default implementation does nothing, and returns value.

Note: Certain QGraphicsItem functions cannot be called in a reimplementation of this function; see the GraphicsItemChange documentation for details.

See also GraphicsItemChange.

func (*QGraphicsItem) ItemTransform

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ItemTransform(other QGraphicsItem_ITF, ok *bool) *qtgui.QTransform

Returns a QTransform that maps coordinates from this item to other. If ok is not null, and if there is no such transform, the boolean pointed to by ok will be set to false; otherwise it will be set to true.

This transform provides an alternative to the mapToItem() or mapFromItem() functions, by returning the appropriate transform so that you can map shapes and coordinates yourself. It also helps you write more efficient code when repeatedly mapping between the same two items.

Note: In rare circumstances, there is no transform that maps between two items.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also mapToItem(), mapFromItem(), and deviceTransform().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ItemTransform__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ItemTransform__(other QGraphicsItem_ITF) *qtgui.QTransform

Returns a QTransform that maps coordinates from this item to other. If ok is not null, and if there is no such transform, the boolean pointed to by ok will be set to false; otherwise it will be set to true.

This transform provides an alternative to the mapToItem() or mapFromItem() functions, by returning the appropriate transform so that you can map shapes and coordinates yourself. It also helps you write more efficient code when repeatedly mapping between the same two items.

Note: In rare circumstances, there is no transform that maps between two items.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also mapToItem(), mapFromItem(), and deviceTransform().

func (*QGraphicsItem) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive key press events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event. If you reimplement this handler, the event will by default be accepted.

Note that key events are only received for items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, and that have keyboard input focus.

See also keyReleaseEvent(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) KeyReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive key release events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event. If you reimplement this handler, the event will by default be accepted.

Note that key events are only received for items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, and that have keyboard input focus.

See also keyPressEvent(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_1(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_2

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_2(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_3

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_3(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *qtgui.QPainterPath

Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_4

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_4(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, x float64, y float64) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_5

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromItem_5(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapFromScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapFromParent(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_2

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_2(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_3

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_3(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *qtgui.QPainterPath

Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_4

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_4(x float64, y float64) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_5

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromParent_5(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromScene(), transform(), mapToParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_2

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_2(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_3

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_3(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *qtgui.QPainterPath

Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_4

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_4(x float64, y float64) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_5

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapFromScene_5(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's scene's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapFromItem(), mapFromParent(), transform(), mapToScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectFromScene().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromItem_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromItem_1(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in item's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectFromScene().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromParent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromParent(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromParent_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromParent_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's parent's coordinate system, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromScene

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromScene(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in scene coordinates, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromScene_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectFromScene_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in scene coordinates, to this item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectToItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectToItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectToScene().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectToItem_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectToItem_1(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapRectToScene().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectToParent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectToParent(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectToParent_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectToParent_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectToScene

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectToScene(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapRectToScene_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapRectToScene_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtcore.QRectF

Maps the rectangle rect, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene coordinate system, and returns the mapped rectangle as a new rectangle (i.e., the bounding rectangle of the resulting polygon).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_1(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_2

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_2(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_3

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_4

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_4(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, x float64, y float64) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_5

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToItem_5(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to item's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

If item is 0, this function returns the same as mapToScene().

See also itemTransform(), mapToParent(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromItem(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToParent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToParent(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.

See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.

See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_2

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_2(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.

See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_3

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_3(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *qtgui.QPainterPath

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.

See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_4

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_4(x float64, y float64) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.

See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_5

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToParent_5(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to its parent's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate. If the item has no parent, point will be mapped to the scene's coordinate system.

See also mapToItem(), mapToScene(), transform(), mapFromParent(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToScene

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToScene(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_2

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_2(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_3

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_3(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *qtgui.QPainterPath

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_4

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_4(x float64, y float64) *qtcore.QPointF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_5

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MapToScene_5(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Maps the point point, which is in this item's coordinate system, to the scene's coordinate system, and returns the mapped coordinate.

See also mapToItem(), mapToParent(), transform(), mapFromScene(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Matrix

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Matrix() *qtgui.QMatrix

func (*QGraphicsItem) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse doubleclick events for this item.

When doubleclicking an item, the item will first receive a mouse press event, followed by a release event (i.e., a click), then a doubleclick event, and finally a release event.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

The default implementation calls mousePressEvent(). If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent() in your reimplementation.

Note that an item will not receive double click events if it is neither selectable nor movable (single mouse clicks are ignored in this case, and that stops the generation of double clicks).

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MouseMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse move events for this item. If you do receive this event, you can be certain that this item also received a mouse press event, and that this item is the current mouse grabber.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent() in your reimplementation.

Please note that mousePressEvent() decides which graphics item it is that receives mouse events. See the mousePressEvent() description for details.

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) MousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MousePressEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse press events for this item. Mouse press events are only delivered to items that accept the mouse button that is pressed. By default, an item accepts all mouse buttons, but you can change this by calling setAcceptedMouseButtons().

The mouse press event decides which item should become the mouse grabber (see QGraphicsScene::mouseGrabberItem()). If you do not reimplement this function, the press event will propagate to any topmost item beneath this item, and no other mouse events will be delivered to this item.

If you do reimplement this function, event will by default be accepted (see QEvent::accept()), and this item is then the mouse grabber. This allows the item to receive future move, release and doubleclick events. If you call QEvent::ignore() on event, this item will lose the mouse grab, and event will propagate to any topmost item beneath. No further mouse events will be delivered to this item unless a new mouse press event is received.

The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent() in your reimplementation.

The event is QEvent::ignore()d for items that are neither movable nor selectable.

See also mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MouseReleaseEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse release events for this item.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent() in your reimplementation.

Please note that mousePressEvent() decides which graphics item it is that receives mouse events. See the mousePressEvent() description for details.

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) MoveBy

func (this *QGraphicsItem) MoveBy(dx float64, dy float64)

Moves the item by dx points horizontally, and dy point vertically. This function is equivalent to calling setPos(pos() + QPointF(dx, dy)).

func (*QGraphicsItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsItem

func (*QGraphicsItem) Opacity

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Opacity() float64

Returns this item's local opacity, which is between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (opaque). This value is combined with parent and ancestor values into the effectiveOpacity(). The effective opacity decides how the item is rendered and also affects its visibility when queried by functions such as QGraphicsView::items().

The opacity property decides the state of the painter passed to the paint() function. If the item is cached, i.e., ItemCoordinateCache or DeviceCoordinateCache, the effective property will be applied to the item's cache as it is rendered.

The default opacity is 1.0; fully opaque.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also setOpacity(), paint(), ItemIgnoresParentOpacity, and ItemDoesntPropagateOpacityToChildren.

func (*QGraphicsItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Paint__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Paint__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Panel

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Panel() *QGraphicsItem

Returns the item's panel, or 0 if this item does not have a panel. If the item is a panel, it will return itself. Otherwise it will return the closest ancestor that is a panel.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also isPanel() and ItemIsPanel.

func (*QGraphicsItem) PanelModality

func (this *QGraphicsItem) PanelModality() int

Returns the modality for this item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setPanelModality().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ParentItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ParentItem() *QGraphicsItem

Returns a pointer to this item's parent item. If this item does not have a parent, 0 is returned.

See also setParentItem() and childItems().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ParentWidget

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ParentWidget() *QGraphicsWidget

Returns a pointer to the item's parent widget. The item's parent widget is the closest parent item that is a widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also parentItem() and childItems().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Pos

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Pos() *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the position of the item in parent coordinates. If the item has no parent, its position is given in scene coordinates.

The position of the item describes its origin (local coordinate (0, 0)) in parent coordinates; this function returns the same as mapToParent(0, 0).

For convenience, you can also call scenePos() to determine the item's position in scene coordinates, regardless of its parent.

See also x(), y(), setPos(), transform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) PrepareGeometryChange

func (this *QGraphicsItem) PrepareGeometryChange()

Prepares the item for a geometry change. Call this function before changing the bounding rect of an item to keep QGraphicsScene's index up to date.

prepareGeometryChange() will call update() if this is necessary.

Example:

void CircleItem::setRadius(qreal newRadius)
{
    if (radius != newRadius) {
        prepareGeometryChange();
        radius = newRadius;
    }
}

See also boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) QGraphicsItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsItem) QGraphicsItem_PTR() *QGraphicsItem

func (*QGraphicsItem) RemoveFromIndex

func (this *QGraphicsItem) RemoveFromIndex()

func (*QGraphicsItem) RemoveSceneEventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsItem) RemoveSceneEventFilter(filterItem QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Removes an event filter on this item from filterItem.

See also installSceneEventFilter().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ResetMatrix

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ResetMatrix()

func (*QGraphicsItem) ResetTransform

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ResetTransform()

Resets this item's transformation matrix to the identity matrix or all the transformation properties to their default values. This is equivalent to calling setTransform(QTransform()).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setTransform() and transform().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Rotation

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Rotation() float64

Returns the clockwise rotation, in degrees, around the Z axis. The default value is 0 (i.e., the item is not rotated).

The rotation is combined with the item's scale(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setRotation(), transformOriginPoint(), and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Scale

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Scale() float64

Returns the scale factor of the item. The default scale factor is 1.0 (i.e., the item is not scaled).

The scale is combined with the item's rotation(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setScale(), rotation(), and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Scene

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Scene() *QGraphicsScene

Returns the current scene for the item, or 0 if the item is not stored in a scene.

To add or move an item to a scene, call QGraphicsScene::addItem().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SceneBoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SceneBoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the bounding rect of this item in scene coordinates, by combining sceneTransform() with boundingRect().

See also boundingRect() and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SceneEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SceneEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

This virtual function receives events to this item. Reimplement this function to intercept events before they are dispatched to the specialized event handlers contextMenuEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and mouseDoubleClickEvent().

Returns true if the event was recognized and handled; otherwise, (e.g., if the event type was not recognized,) false is returned.

event is the intercepted event.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SceneEventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SceneEventFilter(watched QGraphicsItem_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Filters events for the item watched. event is the filtered event.

Reimplementing this function in a subclass makes it possible for the item to be used as an event filter for other items, intercepting all the events sent to those items before they are able to respond.

Reimplementations must return true to prevent further processing of a given event, ensuring that it will not be delivered to the watched item, or return false to indicate that the event should be propagated further by the event system.

See also installSceneEventFilter().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SceneMatrix

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SceneMatrix() *qtgui.QMatrix

func (*QGraphicsItem) ScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the item's position in scene coordinates. This is equivalent to calling mapToScene(0, 0).

See also pos(), sceneTransform(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SceneTransform

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SceneTransform() *qtgui.QTransform

Returns this item's scene transformation matrix. This matrix can be used to map coordinates and geometrical shapes from this item's local coordinate system to the scene's coordinate system. To map coordinates from the scene, you must first invert the returned matrix.

Example:

QGraphicsRectItem rect;
rect.setPos(100, 100);

rect.sceneTransform().map(QPointF(0, 0));
// returns QPointF(100, 100);

rect.sceneTransform().inverted().map(QPointF(100, 100));
// returns QPointF(0, 0);

Unlike transform(), which returns only an item's local transformation, this function includes the item's (and any parents') position, and all the transfomation properties.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also transform(), setTransform(), scenePos(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Scroll

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Scroll(dx float64, dy float64, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Scrolls the contents of rect by dx, dy. If rect is a null rect (the default), the item's bounding rect is scrolled.

Scrolling provides a fast alternative to simply redrawing when the contents of the item (or parts of the item) are shifted vertically or horizontally. Depending on the current transformation and the capabilities of the paint device (i.e., the viewport), this operation may consist of simply moving pixels from one location to another using memmove(). In most cases this is faster than rerendering the entire area.

After scrolling, the item will issue an update for the newly exposed areas. If scrolling is not supported (e.g., you are rendering to an OpenGL viewport, which does not benefit from scroll optimizations), this function is equivalent to calling update(rect).

Note: Scrolling is only supported when QGraphicsItem::ItemCoordinateCache is enabled; in all other cases calling this function is equivalent to calling update(rect). If you for sure know that the item is opaque and not overlapped by other items, you can map the rect to viewport coordinates and scroll the viewport.

QTransform xform = item->deviceTransform(view->viewportTransform());
QRect deviceRect = xform.mapRect(rect).toAlignedRect();
view->viewport()->scroll(dx, dy, deviceRect);

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Scroll__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Scroll__(dx float64, dy float64)

Scrolls the contents of rect by dx, dy. If rect is a null rect (the default), the item's bounding rect is scrolled.

Scrolling provides a fast alternative to simply redrawing when the contents of the item (or parts of the item) are shifted vertically or horizontally. Depending on the current transformation and the capabilities of the paint device (i.e., the viewport), this operation may consist of simply moving pixels from one location to another using memmove(). In most cases this is faster than rerendering the entire area.

After scrolling, the item will issue an update for the newly exposed areas. If scrolling is not supported (e.g., you are rendering to an OpenGL viewport, which does not benefit from scroll optimizations), this function is equivalent to calling update(rect).

Note: Scrolling is only supported when QGraphicsItem::ItemCoordinateCache is enabled; in all other cases calling this function is equivalent to calling update(rect). If you for sure know that the item is opaque and not overlapped by other items, you can map the rect to viewport coordinates and scroll the viewport.

QTransform xform = item->deviceTransform(view->viewportTransform());
QRect deviceRect = xform.mapRect(rect).toAlignedRect();
view->viewport()->scroll(dx, dy, deviceRect);

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptDrops

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptDrops(on bool)

If on is true, this item will accept drag and drop events; otherwise, it is transparent for drag and drop events. By default, items do not accept drag and drop events.

See also acceptDrops().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptHoverEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptHoverEvents(enabled bool)

If enabled is true, this item will accept hover events; otherwise, it will ignore them. By default, items do not accept hover events.

Hover events are delivered when there is no current mouse grabber item. They are sent when the mouse cursor enters an item, when it moves around inside the item, and when the cursor leaves an item. Hover events are commonly used to highlight an item when it's entered, and for tracking the mouse cursor as it hovers over the item (equivalent to QWidget::mouseTracking).

Parent items receive hover enter events before their children, and leave events after their children. The parent does not receive a hover leave event if the cursor enters a child, though; the parent stays "hovered" until the cursor leaves its area, including its children's areas.

If a parent item handles child events, it will receive hover move, drag move, and drop events as the cursor passes through its children, but it does not receive hover enter and hover leave, nor drag enter and drag leave events on behalf of its children.

A QGraphicsWidget with window decorations will accept hover events regardless of the value of acceptHoverEvents().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also acceptHoverEvents(), hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), and hoverLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptTouchEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptTouchEvents(enabled bool)

If enabled is true, this item will accept touch events; otherwise, it will ignore them. By default, items do not accept touch events.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also acceptTouchEvents().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptedMouseButtons

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetAcceptedMouseButtons(buttons int)

Sets the mouse buttons that this item accepts mouse events for.

By default, all mouse buttons are accepted. If an item accepts a mouse button, it will become the mouse grabber item when a mouse press event is delivered for that button. However, if the item does not accept the mouse button, QGraphicsScene will forward the mouse events to the first item beneath it that does.

To disable mouse events for an item (i.e., make it transparent for mouse events), call setAcceptedMouseButtons(0).

See also acceptedMouseButtons() and mousePressEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetActive

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetActive(active bool)

If active is true, and the scene is active, this item's panel will be activated. Otherwise, the panel is deactivated.

If the item is not part of an active scene, active will decide what happens to the panel when the scene becomes active or the item is added to the scene. If true, the item's panel will be activated when the item is either added to the scene or the scene is activated. Otherwise, the item will stay inactive independent of the scene's activated state.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also isPanel(), QGraphicsScene::setActivePanel(), and QGraphicsScene::isActive().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetBoundingRegionGranularity

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetBoundingRegionGranularity(granularity float64)

Sets the bounding region granularity to granularity; a value between and including 0 and 1. The default value is 0 (i.e., the lowest granularity, where the bounding region corresponds to the item's bounding rectangle).

The granularity is used by boundingRegion() to calculate how fine the bounding region of the item should be. The highest achievable granularity is 1, where boundingRegion() will return the finest outline possible for the respective device (e.g., for a QGraphicsView viewport, this gives you a pixel-perfect bounding region). The lowest possible granularity is 0. The value of granularity describes the ratio between device resolution and the resolution of the bounding region (e.g., a value of 0.25 will provide a region where each chunk corresponds to 4x4 device units / pixels).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also boundingRegionGranularity().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetCacheMode

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetCacheMode(mode int, cacheSize qtcore.QSize_ITF)

Sets the item's cache mode to mode.

The optional logicalCacheSize argument is used only by ItemCoordinateCache mode, and describes the resolution of the cache buffer; if logicalCacheSize is (100, 100), QGraphicsItem will fit the item into 100x100 pixels in graphics memory, regardless of the logical size of the item itself. By default QGraphicsItem uses the size of boundingRect(). For all other cache modes than ItemCoordinateCache, logicalCacheSize is ignored.

Caching can speed up rendering if your item spends a significant time redrawing itself. In some cases the cache can also slow down rendering, in particular when the item spends less time redrawing than QGraphicsItem spends redrawing from the cache.

When caching is enabled, an item's paint() function will generally draw into an offscreen pixmap cache; for any subsequent repaint requests, the Graphics View framework will redraw from the cache. This approach works particularly well with QGLWidget, which stores all the cache as OpenGL textures.

Be aware that QPixmapCache's cache limit may need to be changed to obtain optimal performance.

You can read more about the different cache modes in the CacheMode documentation.

Note: Enabling caching does not imply that the item's paint() function will be called only in response to an explicit update() call. For instance, under memory pressure, Qt may decide to drop some of the cache information; in such cases an item's paint() function will be called even if there was no update() call (that is, exactly as if there were no caching enabled).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also cacheMode(), CacheMode, and QPixmapCache::setCacheLimit().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetCacheMode__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetCacheMode__(mode int)

Sets the item's cache mode to mode.

The optional logicalCacheSize argument is used only by ItemCoordinateCache mode, and describes the resolution of the cache buffer; if logicalCacheSize is (100, 100), QGraphicsItem will fit the item into 100x100 pixels in graphics memory, regardless of the logical size of the item itself. By default QGraphicsItem uses the size of boundingRect(). For all other cache modes than ItemCoordinateCache, logicalCacheSize is ignored.

Caching can speed up rendering if your item spends a significant time redrawing itself. In some cases the cache can also slow down rendering, in particular when the item spends less time redrawing than QGraphicsItem spends redrawing from the cache.

When caching is enabled, an item's paint() function will generally draw into an offscreen pixmap cache; for any subsequent repaint requests, the Graphics View framework will redraw from the cache. This approach works particularly well with QGLWidget, which stores all the cache as OpenGL textures.

Be aware that QPixmapCache's cache limit may need to be changed to obtain optimal performance.

You can read more about the different cache modes in the CacheMode documentation.

Note: Enabling caching does not imply that the item's paint() function will be called only in response to an explicit update() call. For instance, under memory pressure, Qt may decide to drop some of the cache information; in such cases an item's paint() function will be called even if there was no update() call (that is, exactly as if there were no caching enabled).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also cacheMode(), CacheMode, and QPixmapCache::setCacheLimit().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetCursor

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetCursor(cursor qtgui.QCursor_ITF)

Sets the current cursor shape for the item to cursor. The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this item. See the list of predefined cursor objects for a range of useful shapes.

An editor item might want to use an I-beam cursor:

item->setCursor(Qt::IBeamCursor);

If no cursor has been set, the cursor of the item beneath is used.

See also cursor(), hasCursor(), unsetCursor(), QWidget::cursor, and QApplication::overrideCursor().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetData

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetData(key int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Sets this item's custom data for the key key to value.

Custom item data is useful for storing arbitrary properties for any item. Qt does not use this feature for storing data; it is provided solely for the convenience of the user.

See also data().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetEnabled

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetEnabled(enabled bool)

If enabled is true, the item is enabled; otherwise, it is disabled.

Disabled items are visible, but they do not receive any events, and cannot take focus nor be selected. Mouse events are discarded; they are not propagated unless the item is also invisible, or if it does not accept mouse events (see acceptedMouseButtons()). A disabled item cannot become the mouse grabber, and as a result of this, an item loses the grab if it becomes disabled when grabbing the mouse, just like it loses focus if it had focus when it was disabled.

Disabled items are traditionally drawn using grayed-out colors (see QPalette::Disabled).

If you disable a parent item, all its children will also be disabled. If you enable a parent item, all children will be enabled, unless they have been explicitly disabled (i.e., if you call setEnabled(false) on a child, it will not be reenabled if its parent is disabled, and then enabled again).

Items are enabled by default.

Note: If you install an event filter, you can still intercept events before they are delivered to items; this mechanism disregards the item's enabled state.

See also isEnabled().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetFiltersChildEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetFiltersChildEvents(enabled bool)

If enabled is true, this item is set to filter all events for all its children (i.e., all events intented for any of its children are instead sent to this item); otherwise, if enabled is false, this item will only handle its own events. The default value is false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also filtersChildEvents().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetFlag

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetFlag(flag int, enabled bool)

If enabled is true, the item flag flag is enabled; otherwise, it is disabled.

See also flags() and setFlags().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetFlag__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetFlag__(flag int)

If enabled is true, the item flag flag is enabled; otherwise, it is disabled.

See also flags() and setFlags().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetFlags

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetFlags(flags int)

Sets the item flags to flags. All flags in flags are enabled; all flags not in flags are disabled.

If the item had focus and flags does not enable ItemIsFocusable, the item loses focus as a result of calling this function. Similarly, if the item was selected, and flags does not enabled ItemIsSelectable, the item is automatically unselected.

By default, no flags are enabled. (QGraphicsWidget enables the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag by default in order to track position changes.)

See also flags() and setFlag().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetFocus

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetFocus(focusReason int)

Gives keyboard input focus to this item. The focusReason argument will be passed into any focus event generated by this function; it is used to give an explanation of what caused the item to get focus.

Only enabled items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag can accept keyboard focus.

If this item is not visible, not active, or not associated with a scene, it will not gain immediate input focus. However, it will be registered as the preferred focus item for its subtree of items, should it later become visible.

As a result of calling this function, this item will receive a focus in event with focusReason. If another item already has focus, that item will first receive a focus out event indicating that it has lost input focus.

See also clearFocus(), hasFocus(), focusItem(), and focusProxy().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetFocusProxy

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetFocusProxy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Sets the item's focus proxy to item.

If an item has a focus proxy, the focus proxy will receive input focus when the item gains input focus. The item itself will still have focus (i.e., hasFocus() will return true), but only the focus proxy will receive the keyboard input.

A focus proxy can itself have a focus proxy, and so on. In such case, keyboard input will be handled by the outermost focus proxy.

The focus proxy item must belong to the same scene as this item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also focusProxy(), setFocus(), and hasFocus().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetFocus__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetFocus__()

Gives keyboard input focus to this item. The focusReason argument will be passed into any focus event generated by this function; it is used to give an explanation of what caused the item to get focus.

Only enabled items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag can accept keyboard focus.

If this item is not visible, not active, or not associated with a scene, it will not gain immediate input focus. However, it will be registered as the preferred focus item for its subtree of items, should it later become visible.

As a result of calling this function, this item will receive a focus in event with focusReason. If another item already has focus, that item will first receive a focus out event indicating that it has lost input focus.

See also clearFocus(), hasFocus(), focusItem(), and focusProxy().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetGraphicsEffect

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetGraphicsEffect(effect QGraphicsEffect_ITF)

Sets effect as the item's effect. If there already is an effect installed on this item, QGraphicsItem will delete the existing effect before installing the new effect. You can delete an existing effect by calling setGraphicsEffect(0).

If effect is the installed effect on a different item, setGraphicsEffect() will remove the effect from the item and install it on this item.

QGraphicsItem takes ownership of effect.

Note: This function will apply the effect on itself and all its children.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also graphicsEffect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetGroup

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetGroup(group QGraphicsItemGroup_ITF)

Adds this item to the item group group. If group is 0, this item is removed from any current group and added as a child of the previous group's parent.

See also group() and QGraphicsScene::createItemGroup().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetHandlesChildEvents

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetHandlesChildEvents(enabled bool)

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetInputMethodHints

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetInputMethodHints(hints int)

Sets the current input method hints of this item to hints.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also inputMethodHints() and inputMethodQuery().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetMatrix

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetMatrix(matrix qtgui.QMatrix_ITF, combine bool)

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetMatrix__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetMatrix__(matrix qtgui.QMatrix_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetOpacity

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetOpacity(opacity float64)

Sets this item's local opacity, between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (opaque). The item's local opacity is combined with parent and ancestor opacities into the effectiveOpacity().

By default, opacity propagates from parent to child, so if a parent's opacity is 0.5 and the child is also 0.5, the child's effective opacity will be 0.25.

The opacity property decides the state of the painter passed to the paint() function. If the item is cached, i.e., ItemCoordinateCache or DeviceCoordinateCache, the effective property will be applied to the item's cache as it is rendered.

There are two item flags that affect how the item's opacity is combined with the parent: ItemIgnoresParentOpacity and ItemDoesntPropagateOpacityToChildren.

Note: Setting the opacity of an item to 0 will not make the item invisible (according to isVisible()), but the item will be treated like an invisible one. See the documentation of setVisible() for more information.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also opacity(), effectiveOpacity(), and setVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetPanelModality

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetPanelModality(panelModality int)

Sets the modality for this item to panelModality.

Changing the modality of a visible item takes effect immediately.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also panelModality().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetParentItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetParentItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Sets this item's parent item to newParent. If this item already has a parent, it is first removed from the previous parent. If newParent is 0, this item will become a top-level item.

Note that this implicitly adds this graphics item to the scene of the parent. You should not add the item to the scene yourself.

The behavior when calling this function on an item that is an ancestor of newParent is undefined.

See also parentItem() and childItems().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetPos

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

Sets the position of the item to pos, which is in parent coordinates. For items with no parent, pos is in scene coordinates.

The position of the item describes its origin (local coordinate (0, 0)) in parent coordinates.

See also pos(), scenePos(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetPos_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetPos_1(x float64, y float64)

Sets the position of the item to pos, which is in parent coordinates. For items with no parent, pos is in scene coordinates.

The position of the item describes its origin (local coordinate (0, 0)) in parent coordinates.

See also pos(), scenePos(), and The Graphics View Coordinate System.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetRotation

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetRotation(angle float64)

Sets the clockwise rotation angle, in degrees, around the Z axis. The default value is 0 (i.e., the item is not rotated). Assigning a negative value will rotate the item counter-clockwise. Normally the rotation angle is in the range (-360, 360), but it's also possible to assign values outside of this range (e.g., a rotation of 370 degrees is the same as a rotation of 10 degrees).

The item is rotated around its transform origin point, which by default is (0, 0). You can select a different transformation origin by calling setTransformOriginPoint().

The rotation is combined with the item's scale(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also rotation(), setTransformOriginPoint(), and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetScale

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetScale(scale float64)

Sets the scale factor of the item. The default scale factor is 1.0 (i.e., the item is not scaled). A scale factor of 0.0 will collapse the item to a single point. If you provide a negative scale factor, the item will be flipped and mirrored (i.e., rotated 180 degrees).

The item is scaled around its transform origin point, which by default is (0, 0). You can select a different transformation origin by calling setTransformOriginPoint().

The scale is combined with the item's rotation(), transform() and transformations() to map the item's coordinate system to the parent item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also scale(), setTransformOriginPoint(), and Transformations Example.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetSelected

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetSelected(selected bool)

If selected is true and this item is selectable, this item is selected; otherwise, it is unselected.

If the item is in a group, the whole group's selected state is toggled by this function. If the group is selected, all items in the group are also selected, and if the group is not selected, no item in the group is selected.

Only visible, enabled, selectable items can be selected. If selected is true and this item is either invisible or disabled or unselectable, this function does nothing.

By default, items cannot be selected. To enable selection, set the ItemIsSelectable flag.

This function is provided for convenience, allowing individual toggling of the selected state of an item. However, a more common way of selecting items is to call QGraphicsScene::setSelectionArea(), which will call this function for all visible, enabled, and selectable items within a specified area on the scene.

See also isSelected() and QGraphicsScene::selectedItems().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetToolTip

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetToolTip(toolTip string)

Sets the item's tool tip to toolTip. If toolTip is empty, the item's tool tip is cleared.

See also toolTip() and QToolTip.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetTransform

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetTransform(matrix qtgui.QTransform_ITF, combine bool)

Sets the item's current transformation matrix to matrix.

If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.

To simplify interaction with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsItem provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between items' and the scene's coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map an item coordiate to a scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from scene coordinates to item coordinates.

The transformation matrix is combined with the item's rotation(), scale() and transformations() into a combined transformation that maps the item's coordinate system to its parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also transform(), setRotation(), setScale(), setTransformOriginPoint(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetTransformOriginPoint

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetTransformOriginPoint(origin qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

Sets the origin point for the transformation in item coordinates.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also transformOriginPoint() and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetTransformOriginPoint_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetTransformOriginPoint_1(ax float64, ay float64)

Sets the origin point for the transformation in item coordinates.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also transformOriginPoint() and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetTransform__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetTransform__(matrix qtgui.QTransform_ITF)

Sets the item's current transformation matrix to matrix.

If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.

To simplify interaction with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsItem provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between items' and the scene's coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map an item coordiate to a scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from scene coordinates to item coordinates.

The transformation matrix is combined with the item's rotation(), scale() and transformations() into a combined transformation that maps the item's coordinate system to its parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also transform(), setRotation(), setScale(), setTransformOriginPoint(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetVisible

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetVisible(visible bool)

If visible is true, the item is made visible. Otherwise, the item is made invisible. Invisible items are not painted, nor do they receive any events. In particular, mouse events pass right through invisible items, and are delivered to any item that may be behind. Invisible items are also unselectable, they cannot take input focus, and are not detected by QGraphicsScene's item location functions.

If an item becomes invisible while grabbing the mouse, (i.e., while it is receiving mouse events,) it will automatically lose the mouse grab, and the grab is not regained by making the item visible again; it must receive a new mouse press to regain the mouse grab.

Similarly, an invisible item cannot have focus, so if the item has focus when it becomes invisible, it will lose focus, and the focus is not regained by simply making the item visible again.

If you hide a parent item, all its children will also be hidden. If you show a parent item, all children will be shown, unless they have been explicitly hidden (i.e., if you call setVisible(false) on a child, it will not be reshown even if its parent is hidden, and then shown again).

Items are visible by default; it is unnecessary to call setVisible() on a new item.

Note: An item with opacity set to 0 will still be considered visible, although it will be treated like an invisible item: mouse events will pass through it, it will not be included in the items returned by QGraphicsView::items(), and so on. However, the item will retain the focus.

See also isVisible(), show(), hide(), and setOpacity().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetX

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetX(x float64)

Set's the x coordinate of the item's position. Equivalent to calling setPos(x, y()).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also x() and setPos().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetY

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetY(y float64)

Set's the y coordinate of the item's position. Equivalent to calling setPos(x(), y).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also y(), x(), and setPos().

func (*QGraphicsItem) SetZValue

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SetZValue(z float64)

Sets the Z-value of the item to z. The Z value decides the stacking order of sibling (neighboring) items. A sibling item of high Z value will always be drawn on top of another sibling item with a lower Z value.

If you restore the Z value, the item's insertion order will decide its stacking order.

The Z-value does not affect the item's size in any way.

The default Z-value is 0.

See also zValue(), Sorting, stackBefore(), and ItemStacksBehindParent.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Show

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Show()

Shows the item (items are visible by default).

This convenience function is equivalent to calling setVisible(true).

See also hide() and setVisible().

func (*QGraphicsItem) StackBefore

func (this *QGraphicsItem) StackBefore(sibling QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Stacks this item before sibling, which must be a sibling item (i.e., the two items must share the same parent item, or must both be toplevel items). The sibling must have the same Z value as this item, otherwise calling this function will have no effect.

By default, all sibling items are stacked by insertion order (i.e., the first item you add is drawn before the next item you add). If two items' Z values are different, then the item with the highest Z value is drawn on top. When the Z values are the same, the insertion order will decide the stacking order.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setZValue(), ItemStacksBehindParent, and Sorting.

func (*QGraphicsItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsItem) ToolTip

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ToolTip() string

Returns the item's tool tip, or an empty QString if no tool tip has been set.

See also setToolTip() and QToolTip.

func (*QGraphicsItem) TopLevelItem

func (this *QGraphicsItem) TopLevelItem() *QGraphicsItem

Returns this item's top-level item. The top-level item is the item's topmost ancestor item whose parent is 0. If an item has no parent, its own pointer is returned (i.e., a top-level item is its own top-level item).

See also parentItem().

func (*QGraphicsItem) TopLevelWidget

func (this *QGraphicsItem) TopLevelWidget() *QGraphicsWidget

Returns a pointer to the item's top level widget (i.e., the item's ancestor whose parent is 0, or whose parent is not a widget), or 0 if this item does not have a top level widget. If the item is its own top level widget, this function returns a pointer to the item itself.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Transform

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Transform() *qtgui.QTransform

Returns this item's transformation matrix.

The transformation matrix is combined with the item's rotation(), scale() and transformations() into a combined transformations for the item.

The default transformation matrix is an identity matrix.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setTransform() and sceneTransform().

func (*QGraphicsItem) TransformOriginPoint

func (this *QGraphicsItem) TransformOriginPoint() *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the origin point for the transformation in item coordinates.

The default is QPointF(0,0).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setTransformOriginPoint() and Transformations.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

func (*QGraphicsItem) UngrabKeyboard

func (this *QGraphicsItem) UngrabKeyboard()

Releases the keyboard grab.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also grabKeyboard() and ungrabMouse().

func (*QGraphicsItem) UngrabMouse

func (this *QGraphicsItem) UngrabMouse()

Releases the mouse grab.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also grabMouse() and ungrabKeyboard().

func (*QGraphicsItem) UnsetCursor

func (this *QGraphicsItem) UnsetCursor()

Clears the cursor from this item.

See also hasCursor() and setCursor().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Update

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Update(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Schedules a redraw of the area covered by rect in this item. You can call this function whenever your item needs to be redrawn, such as if it changes appearance or size.

This function does not cause an immediate paint; instead it schedules a paint request that is processed by QGraphicsView after control reaches the event loop. The item will only be redrawn if it is visible in any associated view.

As a side effect of the item being repainted, other items that overlap the area rect may also be repainted.

If the item is invisible (i.e., isVisible() returns false), this function does nothing.

See also paint() and boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) UpdateMicroFocus

func (this *QGraphicsItem) UpdateMicroFocus()

Updates the item's micro focus.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

See also QInputMethod.

func (*QGraphicsItem) Update_1

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Update_1(x float64, y float64, width float64, height float64)

Schedules a redraw of the area covered by rect in this item. You can call this function whenever your item needs to be redrawn, such as if it changes appearance or size.

This function does not cause an immediate paint; instead it schedules a paint request that is processed by QGraphicsView after control reaches the event loop. The item will only be redrawn if it is visible in any associated view.

As a side effect of the item being repainted, other items that overlap the area rect may also be repainted.

If the item is invisible (i.e., isVisible() returns false), this function does nothing.

See also paint() and boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Update__

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Update__()

Schedules a redraw of the area covered by rect in this item. You can call this function whenever your item needs to be redrawn, such as if it changes appearance or size.

This function does not cause an immediate paint; instead it schedules a paint request that is processed by QGraphicsView after control reaches the event loop. The item will only be redrawn if it is visible in any associated view.

As a side effect of the item being repainted, other items that overlap the area rect may also be repainted.

If the item is invisible (i.e., isVisible() returns false), this function does nothing.

See also paint() and boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsItem) WheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsItem) WheelEvent(event QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive wheel events for this item. If you reimplement this function, event will be accepted by default.

If you ignore the event, (i.e., by calling QEvent::ignore(),) it will propagate to any item beneath this item. If no items accept the event, it will be ignored by the scene, and propagate to the view (e.g., the view's vertical scroll bar).

The default implementation ignores the event.

See also sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Window

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Window() *QGraphicsWidget

Returns the item's window, or 0 if this item does not have a window. If the item is a window, it will return itself. Otherwise it will return the closest ancestor that is a window.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also QGraphicsWidget::isWindow().

func (*QGraphicsItem) X

func (this *QGraphicsItem) X() float64

This convenience function is equivalent to calling pos().x().

See also setX() and y().

func (*QGraphicsItem) Y

func (this *QGraphicsItem) Y() float64

This convenience function is equivalent to calling pos().y().

See also setY() and x().

func (*QGraphicsItem) ZValue

func (this *QGraphicsItem) ZValue() float64

Returns the Z-value of the item. The Z-value affects the stacking order of sibling (neighboring) items.

The default Z-value is 0.

See also setZValue(), Sorting, stackBefore(), and ItemStacksBehindParent.

type QGraphicsItemAnimation

type QGraphicsItemAnimation struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQGraphicsItemAnimation

func NewQGraphicsItemAnimation(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsItemAnimation

Constructs an animation object with the given parent.

func NewQGraphicsItemAnimationFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsItemAnimationFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsItemAnimation

func NewQGraphicsItemAnimation__

func NewQGraphicsItemAnimation__() *QGraphicsItemAnimation

Constructs an animation object with the given parent.

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) AfterAnimationStep

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) AfterAnimationStep(step float64)

This method is meant to be overridden in subclasses that need to execute additional code after a new step has taken place. The animation step is provided for use in cases where the action depends on its value.

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) BeforeAnimationStep

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) BeforeAnimationStep(step float64)

This method is meant to be overridden by subclassed that needs to execute additional code before a new step takes place. The animation step is provided for use in cases where the action depends on its value.

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) Clear

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) Clear()

Clears the scheduled transformations used for the animation, but retains the item and timeline.

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) HorizontalScaleAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) HorizontalScaleAt(step float64) float64

Returns the horizontal scale for the item at the specified step value.

See also setScaleAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) HorizontalShearAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) HorizontalShearAt(step float64) float64

Returns the horizontal shear for the item at the specified step value.

See also setShearAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) InheritAfterAnimationStep

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) InheritAfterAnimationStep(f func(step float64))

void afterAnimationStep(qreal)

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) InheritBeforeAnimationStep

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) InheritBeforeAnimationStep(f func(step float64))

void beforeAnimationStep(qreal)

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) Item

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) Item() *QGraphicsItem

Returns the item on which the animation object operates.

See also setItem().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) MatrixAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) MatrixAt(step float64) *qtgui.QMatrix

Returns the matrix used to transform the item at the specified step value.

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) PosAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) PosAt(step float64) *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the position of the item at the given step value.

See also setPosAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) QGraphicsItemAnimation_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsItemAnimation) QGraphicsItemAnimation_PTR() *QGraphicsItemAnimation

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) Reset

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) Reset()

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) RotationAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) RotationAt(step float64) float64

Returns the angle at which the item is rotated at the specified step value.

See also setRotationAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetItem

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Sets the specified item to be used in the animation.

See also item().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetPosAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetPosAt(step float64, pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

Sets the position of the item at the given step value to the point specified.

See also posAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetRotationAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetRotationAt(step float64, angle float64)

Sets the rotation of the item at the given step value to the angle specified.

See also rotationAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetScaleAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetScaleAt(step float64, sx float64, sy float64)

Sets the scale of the item at the given step value using the horizontal and vertical scale factors specified by sx and sy.

See also verticalScaleAt() and horizontalScaleAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetShearAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetShearAt(step float64, sh float64, sv float64)

Sets the shear of the item at the given step value using the horizontal and vertical shear factors specified by sh and sv.

See also verticalShearAt() and horizontalShearAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetStep

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetStep(x float64)

Sets the current step value for the animation, causing the transformations scheduled at this step to be performed.

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetTimeLine

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetTimeLine(timeLine qtcore.QTimeLine_ITF)

Sets the timeline object used to control the rate of animation to the timeLine specified.

See also timeLine().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetTranslationAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) SetTranslationAt(step float64, dx float64, dy float64)

Sets the translation of the item at the given step value using the horizontal and vertical coordinates specified by dx and dy.

See also xTranslationAt() and yTranslationAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) TimeLine

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) TimeLine() *qtcore.QTimeLine

Returns the timeline object used to control the rate at which the animation occurs.

See also setTimeLine().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) VerticalScaleAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) VerticalScaleAt(step float64) float64

Returns the vertical scale for the item at the specified step value.

See also setScaleAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) VerticalShearAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) VerticalShearAt(step float64) float64

Returns the vertical shear for the item at the specified step value.

See also setShearAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) XTranslationAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) XTranslationAt(step float64) float64

Returns the horizontal translation of the item at the specified step value.

See also setTranslationAt().

func (*QGraphicsItemAnimation) YTranslationAt

func (this *QGraphicsItemAnimation) YTranslationAt(step float64) float64

Returns the vertical translation of the item at the specified step value.

See also setTranslationAt().

type QGraphicsItemAnimation_ITF

type QGraphicsItemAnimation_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QGraphicsItemAnimation_PTR() *QGraphicsItemAnimation
}

type QGraphicsItemGroup

type QGraphicsItemGroup struct {
	*QGraphicsItem
}

func NewQGraphicsItemGroup

func NewQGraphicsItemGroup(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsItemGroup

func NewQGraphicsItemGroupFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsItemGroupFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsItemGroup

func NewQGraphicsItemGroup__

func NewQGraphicsItemGroup__() *QGraphicsItemGroup

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) AddToGroup

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) AddToGroup(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsItemGroup

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) Paint__

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) Paint__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) QGraphicsItemGroup_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsItemGroup) QGraphicsItemGroup_PTR() *QGraphicsItemGroup

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) RemoveFromGroup

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) RemoveFromGroup(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsItemGroup) Type

func (this *QGraphicsItemGroup) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsItemGroup_ITF

type QGraphicsItemGroup_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsItem_ITF
	QGraphicsItemGroup_PTR() *QGraphicsItemGroup
}

type QGraphicsItemGroup__

type QGraphicsItemGroup__ = int
const QGraphicsItemGroup__Type QGraphicsItemGroup__ = 10

type QGraphicsItem_ITF

type QGraphicsItem_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsItem_PTR() *QGraphicsItem
}

type QGraphicsItem__

type QGraphicsItem__ = int
const QGraphicsItem__Type QGraphicsItem__ = 1
const QGraphicsItem__UserType QGraphicsItem__ = 65536

type QGraphicsItem__CacheMode

type QGraphicsItem__CacheMode = int

This enum describes QGraphicsItem's cache modes. Caching is used to speed up rendering by allocating and rendering to an off-screen pixel buffer, which can be reused when the item requires redrawing. For some paint devices, the cache is stored directly in graphics memory, which makes rendering very quick.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.

See also QGraphicsItem::setCacheMode().

const QGraphicsItem__DeviceCoordinateCache QGraphicsItem__CacheMode = 2

Caching is enabled at the paint device level, in device coordinates. This mode is for items that can move, but are not rotated, scaled or sheared. If the item is transformed directly or indirectly, the cache will be regenerated automatically. Unlike ItemCoordinateCacheMode, DeviceCoordinateCache always renders at maximum quality.

const QGraphicsItem__ItemCoordinateCache QGraphicsItem__CacheMode = 1

Caching is enabled for the item's logical (local) coordinate system. QGraphicsItem creates an off-screen pixel buffer with a configurable size / resolution that you can pass to QGraphicsItem::setCacheMode(). Rendering quality will typically degrade, depending on the resolution of the cache and the item transformation. The first time the item is redrawn, it will render itself into the cache, and the cache is then reused for every subsequent expose. The cache is also reused as the item is transformed. To adjust the resolution of the cache, you can call setCacheMode() again.

const QGraphicsItem__NoCache QGraphicsItem__CacheMode = 0

The default; all item caching is disabled. QGraphicsItem::paint() is called every time the item needs redrawing.

type QGraphicsItem__Extension

type QGraphicsItem__Extension = int
const QGraphicsItem__UserExtension QGraphicsItem__Extension = -2147483648

type QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange

type QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = int

This enum describes the state changes that are notified by QGraphicsItem::itemChange(). The notifications are sent as the state changes, and in some cases, adjustments can be made (see the documentation for each change for details).

Note: Be careful with calling functions on the QGraphicsItem itself inside itemChange(), as certain function calls can lead to unwanted recursion. For example, you cannot call setPos() in itemChange() on an ItemPositionChange notification, as the setPos() function will again call itemChange(ItemPositionChange). Instead, you can return the new, adjusted position from itemChange().

const QGraphicsItem__ItemChildAddedChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 6

A child is added to this item. The value argument is the new child item (i.e., a QGraphicsItem pointer). Do not pass this item to any item's setParentItem() function as this notification is delivered. The return value is unused; you cannot adjust anything in this notification. Note that the new child might not be fully constructed when this notification is sent; calling pure virtual functions on the child can lead to a crash.

const QGraphicsItem__ItemChildRemovedChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 7

A child is removed from this item. The value argument is the child item that is about to be removed (i.e., a QGraphicsItem pointer). The return value is unused; you cannot adjust anything in this notification.

const QGraphicsItem__ItemCursorChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 17
const QGraphicsItem__ItemCursorHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 18
const QGraphicsItem__ItemEnabledChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 3

The item's enabled state changes. If the item is presently enabled, it will become disabled, and vice verca. The value argument is the new enabled state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setEnabled() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered. Instead, you can return the new state from itemChange().

const QGraphicsItem__ItemEnabledHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 13
const QGraphicsItem__ItemFlagsChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 21
const QGraphicsItem__ItemFlagsHaveChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 22
const QGraphicsItem__ItemMatrixChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 1

The item's affine transformation matrix is changing. This value is obsolete; you can use ItemTransformChange instead.

const QGraphicsItem__ItemOpacityChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 25
const QGraphicsItem__ItemOpacityHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 26
const QGraphicsItem__ItemParentChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 5

The item's parent changes. The value argument is the new parent item (i.e., a QGraphicsItem pointer). Do not call setParentItem() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new parent from itemChange().

const QGraphicsItem__ItemParentHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 15
const QGraphicsItem__ItemPositionChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 0

The item's position changes. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and when the item's local position changes, relative to its parent (i.e., as a result of calling setPos() or moveBy()). The value argument is the new position (i.e., a QPointF). You can call pos() to get the original position. Do not call setPos() or moveBy() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new, adjusted position from itemChange(). After this notification, QGraphicsItem immediately sends the ItemPositionHasChanged notification if the position changed.

const QGraphicsItem__ItemPositionHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 9

The item's position has changed. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and after the item's local position, relative to its parent, has changed. The value argument is the new position (the same as pos()), and QGraphicsItem ignores the return value for this notification (i.e., a read-only notification).

const QGraphicsItem__ItemRotationChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 28
const QGraphicsItem__ItemRotationHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 29
const QGraphicsItem__ItemScaleChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 30
const QGraphicsItem__ItemScaleHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 31
const QGraphicsItem__ItemSceneChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 11
const QGraphicsItem__ItemSceneHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 16
const QGraphicsItem__ItemScenePositionHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 27
const QGraphicsItem__ItemSelectedChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 4

The item's selected state changes. If the item is presently selected, it will become unselected, and vice verca. The value argument is the new selected state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setSelected() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new selected state from itemChange().

const QGraphicsItem__ItemSelectedHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 14
const QGraphicsItem__ItemToolTipChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 19
const QGraphicsItem__ItemToolTipHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 20
const QGraphicsItem__ItemTransformChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 8

The item's transformation matrix changes. This notification is sent if the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag is enabled, and when the item's local transformation matrix changes (i.e., as a result of calling setTransform(). The value argument is the new matrix (i.e., a QTransform); to get the old matrix, call transform(). Do not call setTransform() or set any of the transformation properties in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new matrix from itemChange(). This notification is not sent if you change the transformation properties.

const QGraphicsItem__ItemTransformHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 10
const QGraphicsItem__ItemTransformOriginPointChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 32
const QGraphicsItem__ItemTransformOriginPointHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 33
const QGraphicsItem__ItemVisibleChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 2

The item's visible state changes. If the item is presently visible, it will become invisible, and vice verca. The value argument is the new visible state (i.e., true or false). Do not call setVisible() in itemChange() as this notification is delivered; instead, you can return the new visible state from itemChange().

const QGraphicsItem__ItemVisibleHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 12
const QGraphicsItem__ItemZValueChange QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 23
const QGraphicsItem__ItemZValueHasChanged QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemChange = 24

type QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag

type QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = int
const QGraphicsItem__ItemAcceptsInputMethod QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 4096
const QGraphicsItem__ItemClipsChildrenToShape QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 16
const QGraphicsItem__ItemClipsToShape QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 8
const QGraphicsItem__ItemContainsChildrenInShape QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 524288
const QGraphicsItem__ItemDoesntPropagateOpacityToChildren QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 128
const QGraphicsItem__ItemHasNoContents QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 1024
const QGraphicsItem__ItemIgnoresParentOpacity QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 64
const QGraphicsItem__ItemIgnoresTransformations QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 32
const QGraphicsItem__ItemIsFocusScope QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 32768
const QGraphicsItem__ItemIsFocusable QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 4
const QGraphicsItem__ItemIsMovable QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 1
const QGraphicsItem__ItemIsPanel QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 16384
const QGraphicsItem__ItemIsSelectable QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 2
const QGraphicsItem__ItemNegativeZStacksBehindParent QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 8192
const QGraphicsItem__ItemSendsGeometryChanges QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 2048
const QGraphicsItem__ItemSendsScenePositionChanges QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 65536
const QGraphicsItem__ItemStacksBehindParent QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 256
const QGraphicsItem__ItemStopsClickFocusPropagation QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 131072
const QGraphicsItem__ItemStopsFocusHandling QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 262144
const QGraphicsItem__ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption QGraphicsItem__GraphicsItemFlag = 512

type QGraphicsItem__PanelModality

type QGraphicsItem__PanelModality = int

This enum specifies the behavior of a modal panel. A modal panel is one that blocks input to other panels. Note that items that are children of a modal panel are not blocked.

The values are:

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.6.

See also QGraphicsItem::setPanelModality(), QGraphicsItem::panelModality(), and QGraphicsItem::ItemIsPanel.

const QGraphicsItem__NonModal QGraphicsItem__PanelModality = 0

The panel is not modal and does not block input to other panels. This is the default value for panels.

const QGraphicsItem__PanelModal QGraphicsItem__PanelModality = 1

The panel is modal to a single item hierarchy and blocks input to its parent pane, all grandparent panels, and all siblings of its parent and grandparent panels.

const QGraphicsItem__SceneModal QGraphicsItem__PanelModality = 2

The window is modal to the entire scene and blocks input to all panels.

type QGraphicsLayout

type QGraphicsLayout struct {
	*QGraphicsLayoutItem
}

func NewQGraphicsLayout

func NewQGraphicsLayout(parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) *QGraphicsLayout

Contructs a QGraphicsLayout object.

parent is passed to QGraphicsLayoutItem's constructor and the QGraphicsLayoutItem's isLayout argument is set to true.

If parent is a QGraphicsWidget the layout will be installed on that widget. (Note that installing a layout will delete the old one installed.)

func NewQGraphicsLayoutFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsLayout

func NewQGraphicsLayout__

func NewQGraphicsLayout__() *QGraphicsLayout

Contructs a QGraphicsLayout object.

parent is passed to QGraphicsLayoutItem's constructor and the QGraphicsLayoutItem's isLayout argument is set to true.

If parent is a QGraphicsWidget the layout will be installed on that widget. (Note that installing a layout will delete the old one installed.)

func (*QGraphicsLayout) Activate

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) Activate()

Activates the layout, causing all items in the layout to be immediately rearranged. This function is based on calling count() and itemAt(), and then calling setGeometry() on all items sequentially. When activated, the layout will adjust its geometry to its parent's contentsRect(). The parent will then invalidate any layout of its own.

If called in sequence or recursively, e.g., by one of the arranged items in response to being resized, this function will do nothing.

Note that the layout is free to use geometry caching to optimize this process. To forcefully invalidate any such cache, you can call invalidate() before calling activate().

See also invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) AddChildLayoutItem

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) AddChildLayoutItem(layoutItem QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF)

This function is a convenience function provided for custom layouts, and will go through all items in the layout and reparent their graphics items to the closest QGraphicsWidget ancestor of the layout.

If layoutItem is already in a different layout, it will be removed from that layout.

If custom layouts want special behaviour they can ignore to use this function, and implement their own behaviour.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also graphicsItem().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) Count

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) Count() int

This pure virtual function must be reimplemented in a subclass of QGraphicsLayout to return the number of items in the layout.

The subclass is free to decide how to store the items.

See also itemAt() and removeAt().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) GetContentsMargins

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) GetContentsMargins(left unsafe.Pointer, top unsafe.Pointer, right unsafe.Pointer, bottom unsafe.Pointer)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::getContentsMargins().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsLayout) InheritAddChildLayoutItem

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) InheritAddChildLayoutItem(f func(layoutItem *QGraphicsLayoutItem))

void addChildLayoutItem(class QGraphicsLayoutItem *)

func (*QGraphicsLayout) InstantInvalidatePropagation

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) InstantInvalidatePropagation() bool

func (*QGraphicsLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) Invalidate()

Clears any cached geometry and size hint information in the layout, and posts a LayoutRequest event to the managed parent QGraphicsLayoutItem.

See also activate() and setGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) IsActivated

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) IsActivated() bool

Returns true if the layout is currently being activated; otherwise, returns false. If the layout is being activated, this means that it is currently in the process of rearranging its items (i.e., the activate() function has been called, and has not yet returned).

See also activate() and invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) ItemAt(i int) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

This pure virtual function must be reimplemented in a subclass of QGraphicsLayout to return a pointer to the item at index i. The reimplementation can assume that i is valid (i.e., it respects the value of count()). Together with count(), it is provided as a means of iterating over all items in a layout.

The subclass is free to decide how to store the items, and the visual arrangement does not have to be reflected through this function.

See also count() and removeAt().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsLayout

func (*QGraphicsLayout) QGraphicsLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsLayout) QGraphicsLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsLayout

func (*QGraphicsLayout) RemoveAt

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) RemoveAt(index int)

This pure virtual function must be reimplemented in a subclass of QGraphicsLayout to remove the item at index. The reimplementation can assume that index is valid (i.e., it respects the value of count()).

The implementation must ensure that the parentLayoutItem() of the removed item does not point to this layout, since the item is considered to be removed from the layout hierarchy.

If the layout is to be reused between applications, we recommend that the layout deletes the item, but the graphics view framework does not depend on this.

The subclass is free to decide how to store the items.

See also itemAt() and count().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) SetContentsMargins

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) SetContentsMargins(left float64, top float64, right float64, bottom float64)

Sets the contents margins to left, top, right and bottom. The default contents margins for toplevel layouts are style dependent (by querying the pixelMetric for QStyle::PM_LayoutLeftMargin, QStyle::PM_LayoutTopMargin, QStyle::PM_LayoutRightMargin and QStyle::PM_LayoutBottomMargin).

For sublayouts the default margins are 0.

Changing the contents margins automatically invalidates the layout.

See also invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsLayout) SetInstantInvalidatePropagation

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) SetInstantInvalidatePropagation(enable bool)

func (*QGraphicsLayout) UpdateGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) UpdateGeometry()

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::updateGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsLayout) WidgetEvent

func (this *QGraphicsLayout) WidgetEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This virtual event handler receives all events for the managed widget. QGraphicsLayout uses this event handler to listen for layout related events such as geometry changes, layout changes or layout direction changes.

e is a pointer to the event.

You can reimplement this event handler to track similar events for your own custom layout.

See also QGraphicsWidget::event() and QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent().

type QGraphicsLayoutItem

type QGraphicsLayoutItem struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItem

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItem(parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, isLayout bool) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Constructs the QGraphicsLayoutItem object. parent becomes the object's parent. If isLayout is true the item is a layout, otherwise isLayout is false.

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItem__

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItem__() *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Constructs the QGraphicsLayoutItem object. parent becomes the object's parent. If isLayout is true the item is a layout, otherwise isLayout is false.

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItem__1

func NewQGraphicsLayoutItem__1(parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Constructs the QGraphicsLayoutItem object. parent becomes the object's parent. If isLayout is true the item is a layout, otherwise isLayout is false.

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) ContentsRect

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) ContentsRect() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the contents rect in local coordinates.

The contents rect defines the subrectangle used by an associated layout when arranging subitems. This function is a convenience function that adjusts the item's geometry() by its contents margins. Note that getContentsMargins() is a virtual function that you can reimplement to return the item's contents margins.

See also getContentsMargins() and geometry().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) EffectiveSizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) EffectiveSizeHint(which int, constraint qtcore.QSizeF_ITF) *qtcore.QSizeF

Returns the effective size hint for this QGraphicsLayoutItem.

which is the size hint in question. constraint is an optional argument that defines a special constrain when calculating the effective size hint. By default, constraint is QSizeF(-1, -1), which means there is no constraint to the size hint.

If you want to specify the widget's size hint for a given width or height, you can provide the fixed dimension in constraint. This is useful for widgets that can grow only either vertically or horizontally, and need to set either their width or their height to a special value.

For example, a text paragraph item fit into a column width of 200 may grow vertically. You can pass QSizeF(200, -1) as a constraint to get a suitable minimum, preferred and maximum height).

You can adjust the effective size hint by reimplementing sizeHint() in a QGraphicsLayoutItem subclass, or by calling one of the following functions: setMinimumSize(), setPreferredSize, or setMaximumSize() (or a combination of both).

This function caches each of the size hints and guarantees that sizeHint() will be called only once for each value of which - unless constraint is not specified and updateGeometry() has been called.

See also sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) EffectiveSizeHint__

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) EffectiveSizeHint__(which int) *qtcore.QSizeF

Returns the effective size hint for this QGraphicsLayoutItem.

which is the size hint in question. constraint is an optional argument that defines a special constrain when calculating the effective size hint. By default, constraint is QSizeF(-1, -1), which means there is no constraint to the size hint.

If you want to specify the widget's size hint for a given width or height, you can provide the fixed dimension in constraint. This is useful for widgets that can grow only either vertically or horizontally, and need to set either their width or their height to a special value.

For example, a text paragraph item fit into a column width of 200 may grow vertically. You can pass QSizeF(200, -1) as a constraint to get a suitable minimum, preferred and maximum height).

You can adjust the effective size hint by reimplementing sizeHint() in a QGraphicsLayoutItem subclass, or by calling one of the following functions: setMinimumSize(), setPreferredSize, or setMaximumSize() (or a combination of both).

This function caches each of the size hints and guarantees that sizeHint() will be called only once for each value of which - unless constraint is not specified and updateGeometry() has been called.

See also sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) Geometry

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) Geometry() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the item's geometry (e.g., position and size) as a QRectF. This function is equivalent to QRectF(pos(), size()).

See also setGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) GetContentsMargins

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) GetContentsMargins(left unsafe.Pointer, top unsafe.Pointer, right unsafe.Pointer, bottom unsafe.Pointer)

This virtual function provides the left, top, right and bottom contents margins for this QGraphicsLayoutItem. The default implementation assumes all contents margins are 0. The parameters point to values stored in qreals. If any of the pointers is 0, that value will not be updated.

See also QGraphicsWidget::setContentsMargins().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) GraphicsItem

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) GraphicsItem() *QGraphicsItem

Returns the QGraphicsItem that this layout item represents. For QGraphicsWidget it will return itself. For custom items it can return an aggregated value.

See also setGraphicsItem().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) InheritSetGraphicsItem

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) InheritSetGraphicsItem(f func(item *QGraphicsItem))

void setGraphicsItem(class QGraphicsItem *)

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) InheritSetOwnedByLayout

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) InheritSetOwnedByLayout(f func(ownedByLayout bool))

void setOwnedByLayout(_Bool)

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) InheritSizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) InheritSizeHint(f func(which int, constraint *qtcore.QSizeF) unsafe.Pointer)

QSizeF sizeHint(Qt::SizeHint, const class QSizeF &)

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) IsLayout

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) IsLayout() bool

Returns true if this QGraphicsLayoutItem is a layout (e.g., is inherited by an object that arranges other QGraphicsLayoutItem objects); otherwise returns false.

See also QGraphicsLayout.

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) MaximumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) MaximumHeight() float64

Returns the maximum height.

See also setMaximumHeight(), setMaximumSize(), and maximumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) MaximumSize

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSizeF

Returns the maximum size.

See also setMaximumSize(), minimumSize(), preferredSize(), Qt::MaximumSize, and sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) MaximumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) MaximumWidth() float64

Returns the maximum width.

See also setMaximumWidth(), setMaximumSize(), and maximumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) MinimumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) MinimumHeight() float64

Returns the minimum height.

See also setMinimumHeight(), setMinimumSize(), and minimumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) MinimumSize

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSizeF

Returns the minimum size.

See also setMinimumSize(), preferredSize(), maximumSize(), Qt::MinimumSize, and sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) MinimumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) MinimumWidth() float64

Returns the minimum width.

See also setMinimumWidth(), setMinimumSize(), and minimumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) OwnedByLayout

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) OwnedByLayout() bool

Returns whether a layout should delete this item in its destructor. If its true, then the layout will delete it. If its false, then it is assumed that another object has the ownership of it, and the layout won't delete this item.

If the item inherits both QGraphicsItem and QGraphicsLayoutItem (such as QGraphicsWidget does) the item is really part of two ownership hierarchies. This property informs what the layout should do with its child items when it is destructed. In the case of QGraphicsWidget, it is preferred that when the layout is deleted it won't delete its children (since they are also part of the graphics item hierarchy).

By default this value is initialized to false in QGraphicsLayoutItem, but it is overridden by QGraphicsLayout to return true. This is because QGraphicsLayout is not normally part of the QGraphicsItem hierarchy, so the parent layout should delete it. Subclasses might override this default behaviour by calling setOwnedByLayout(true).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setOwnedByLayout().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) ParentLayoutItem

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) ParentLayoutItem() *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Returns the parent of this QGraphicsLayoutItem, or 0 if there is no parent, or if the parent does not inherit from QGraphicsLayoutItem (QGraphicsLayoutItem is often used through multiple inheritance with QObject-derived classes).

See also setParentLayoutItem().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) PreferredHeight

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) PreferredHeight() float64

Returns the preferred height.

See also setPreferredHeight(), setPreferredSize(), and preferredSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) PreferredSize

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) PreferredSize() *qtcore.QSizeF

Returns the preferred size.

See also setPreferredSize(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), Qt::PreferredSize, and sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) PreferredWidth

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) PreferredWidth() float64

Returns the preferred width.

See also setPreferredWidth(), setPreferredSize(), and preferredSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) QGraphicsLayoutItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsLayoutItem) QGraphicsLayoutItem_PTR() *QGraphicsLayoutItem

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

This virtual function sets the geometry of the QGraphicsLayoutItem to rect, which is in parent coordinates (e.g., the top-left corner of rect is equivalent to the item's position in parent coordinates).

You must reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsLayoutItem to receive geometry updates. The layout will call this function when it does a rearrangement.

If rect is outside of the bounds of minimumSize and maximumSize, it will be adjusted to its closest size so that it is within the legal bounds.

See also geometry().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetGraphicsItem

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetGraphicsItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

If the QGraphicsLayoutItem represents a QGraphicsItem, and it wants to take advantage of the automatic reparenting capabilities of QGraphicsLayout it should set this value. Note that if you delete item and not delete the layout item, you are responsible of calling setGraphicsItem(0) in order to avoid having a dangling pointer.

See also graphicsItem().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumHeight(height float64)

Sets the maximum height to height.

See also maximumHeight(), setMaximumSize(), and maximumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumSize

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumSize(size qtcore.QSizeF_ITF)

Sets the maximum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MaximumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size larger than size. In order to unset the maximum size, use an invalid size.

See also maximumSize(), minimumSize(), preferredSize(), Qt::MaximumSize, and sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumSize_1

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumSize_1(w float64, h float64)

Sets the maximum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MaximumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size larger than size. In order to unset the maximum size, use an invalid size.

See also maximumSize(), minimumSize(), preferredSize(), Qt::MaximumSize, and sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMaximumWidth(width float64)

Sets the maximum width to width.

See also maximumWidth(), setMaximumSize(), and maximumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumHeight

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumHeight(height float64)

Sets the minimum height to height.

See also minimumHeight(), setMinimumSize(), and minimumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumSize

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumSize(size qtcore.QSizeF_ITF)

Sets the minimum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MinimumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size smaller than size. In order to unset the minimum size, use an invalid size.

See also minimumSize(), maximumSize(), preferredSize(), Qt::MinimumSize, sizeHint(), setMinimumWidth(), and setMinimumHeight().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumSize_1

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumSize_1(w float64, h float64)

Sets the minimum size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::MinimumSize and ensures that effectiveSizeHint() will never return a size smaller than size. In order to unset the minimum size, use an invalid size.

See also minimumSize(), maximumSize(), preferredSize(), Qt::MinimumSize, sizeHint(), setMinimumWidth(), and setMinimumHeight().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumWidth

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetMinimumWidth(width float64)

Sets the minimum width to width.

See also minimumWidth(), setMinimumSize(), and minimumSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetOwnedByLayout

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetOwnedByLayout(ownedByLayout bool)

Sets whether a layout should delete this item in its destructor or not. ownership must be true to in order for the layout to delete it.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also ownedByLayout().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetParentLayoutItem

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetParentLayoutItem(parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF)

Sets the parent of this QGraphicsLayoutItem to parent.

See also parentLayoutItem().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredHeight

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredHeight(height float64)

Sets the preferred height to height.

See also preferredHeight(), preferredWidth(), setPreferredSize(), and preferredSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredSize

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredSize(size qtcore.QSizeF_ITF)

Sets the preferred size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::PreferredSize and provides the default value for effectiveSizeHint(). In order to unset the preferred size, use an invalid size.

See also preferredSize(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), Qt::PreferredSize, and sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredSize_1

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredSize_1(w float64, h float64)

Sets the preferred size to size. This property overrides sizeHint() for Qt::PreferredSize and provides the default value for effectiveSizeHint(). In order to unset the preferred size, use an invalid size.

See also preferredSize(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), Qt::PreferredSize, and sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredWidth

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetPreferredWidth(width float64)

Sets the preferred width to width.

See also preferredWidth(), preferredHeight(), setPreferredSize(), and preferredSize().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetSizePolicy

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetSizePolicy(policy QSizePolicy_ITF)

Sets the size policy to policy. The size policy describes how the item should grow horizontally and vertically when arranged in a layout.

QGraphicsLayoutItem's default size policy is (QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::DefaultType), but it is common for subclasses to change the default. For example, QGraphicsWidget defaults to (QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::DefaultType).

See also sizePolicy() and QWidget::sizePolicy().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetSizePolicy_1

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetSizePolicy_1(hPolicy int, vPolicy int, controlType int)

Sets the size policy to policy. The size policy describes how the item should grow horizontally and vertically when arranged in a layout.

QGraphicsLayoutItem's default size policy is (QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::DefaultType), but it is common for subclasses to change the default. For example, QGraphicsWidget defaults to (QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::DefaultType).

See also sizePolicy() and QWidget::sizePolicy().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetSizePolicy_1_

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SetSizePolicy_1_(hPolicy int, vPolicy int)

Sets the size policy to policy. The size policy describes how the item should grow horizontally and vertically when arranged in a layout.

QGraphicsLayoutItem's default size policy is (QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::Fixed, QSizePolicy::DefaultType), but it is common for subclasses to change the default. For example, QGraphicsWidget defaults to (QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::DefaultType).

See also sizePolicy() and QWidget::sizePolicy().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SizeHint(which int, constraint qtcore.QSizeF_ITF) *qtcore.QSizeF

This pure virtual function returns the size hint for which of the QGraphicsLayoutItem, using the width or height of constraint to constrain the output.

Reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsLayoutItem to provide the necessary size hints for your items.

See also effectiveSizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SizeHint__

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SizeHint__(which int) *qtcore.QSizeF

This pure virtual function returns the size hint for which of the QGraphicsLayoutItem, using the width or height of constraint to constrain the output.

Reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsLayoutItem to provide the necessary size hints for your items.

See also effectiveSizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) SizePolicy

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) SizePolicy() *QSizePolicy

Returns the current size policy.

See also setSizePolicy() and QWidget::sizePolicy().

func (*QGraphicsLayoutItem) UpdateGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsLayoutItem) UpdateGeometry()

This virtual function discards any cached size hint information. You should always call this function if you change the return value of the sizeHint() function. Subclasses must always call the base implementation when reimplementing this function.

See also effectiveSizeHint().

type QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF

type QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsLayoutItem_PTR() *QGraphicsLayoutItem
}

type QGraphicsLayout_ITF

type QGraphicsLayout_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF
	QGraphicsLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsLayout
}

type QGraphicsLineItem

type QGraphicsLineItem struct {
	*QGraphicsItem
}

func NewQGraphicsLineItem

func NewQGraphicsLineItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsLineItem

func NewQGraphicsLineItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsLineItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsLineItem

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_1

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_1(line qtcore.QLineF_ITF, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsLineItem

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_1_(line qtcore.QLineF_ITF) *QGraphicsLineItem

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_2

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_2(x1 float64, y1 float64, x2 float64, y2 float64, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsLineItem

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_2_

func NewQGraphicsLineItem_2_(x1 float64, y1 float64, x2 float64, y2 float64) *QGraphicsLineItem

func NewQGraphicsLineItem__

func NewQGraphicsLineItem__() *QGraphicsLineItem

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Line

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Line() *qtcore.QLineF

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsLineItem

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Paint__

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Paint__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Pen

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Pen() *qtgui.QPen

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) QGraphicsLineItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsLineItem) QGraphicsLineItem_PTR() *QGraphicsLineItem

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) SetLine

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) SetLine(line qtcore.QLineF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) SetLine_1

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) SetLine_1(x1 float64, y1 float64, x2 float64, y2 float64)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) SetPen

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) SetPen(pen qtgui.QPen_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsLineItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsLineItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsLineItem_ITF

type QGraphicsLineItem_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsItem_ITF
	QGraphicsLineItem_PTR() *QGraphicsLineItem
}

type QGraphicsLineItem__

type QGraphicsLineItem__ = int
const QGraphicsLineItem__Type QGraphicsLineItem__ = 6

type QGraphicsLinearLayout

type QGraphicsLinearLayout struct {
	*QGraphicsLayout
}

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout(parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) *QGraphicsLinearLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsLinearLayout instance using Qt::Horizontal orientation. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayoutFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsLinearLayout

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout_1

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout_1(orientation int, parent QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) *QGraphicsLinearLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsLinearLayout instance using Qt::Horizontal orientation. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout_1_

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout_1_(orientation int) *QGraphicsLinearLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsLinearLayout instance using Qt::Horizontal orientation. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout__

func NewQGraphicsLinearLayout__() *QGraphicsLinearLayout

Constructs a QGraphicsLinearLayout instance using Qt::Horizontal orientation. parent is passed to QGraphicsLayout's constructor.

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) AddItem

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) AddItem(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF)

This convenience function is equivalent to calling insertItem(-1, item).

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) AddStretch

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) AddStretch(stretch int)

This convenience function is equivalent to calling insertStretch(-1, stretch).

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) AddStretch__

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) AddStretch__()

This convenience function is equivalent to calling insertStretch(-1, stretch).

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) Alignment

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) Alignment(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) int

Returns the alignment for item. The default alignment is Qt::AlignTop | Qt::AlignLeft.

The alignment decides how the item is positioned within its assigned space in the case where there's more space available in the layout than the widgets can occupy.

See also setAlignment().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) Count

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) Count() int

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::count().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) Dump

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) Dump(indent int)

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) Dump__

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) Dump__()

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) InsertItem

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) InsertItem(index int, item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF)

Inserts item into the layout at index, or before any item that is currently at index.

See also addItem(), itemAt(), insertStretch(), and setItemSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) InsertStretch

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) InsertStretch(index int, stretch int)

Inserts a stretch of stretch at index, or before any item that is currently at index.

See also addStretch(), setStretchFactor(), setItemSpacing(), and insertItem().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) InsertStretch__

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) InsertStretch__(index int)

Inserts a stretch of stretch at index, or before any item that is currently at index.

See also addStretch(), setStretchFactor(), setItemSpacing(), and insertItem().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) Invalidate()

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) ItemAt(index int) *QGraphicsLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::itemAt().

When iterating from 0 and up, it will return the items in the visual arranged order.

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) ItemSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) ItemSpacing(index int) float64

Returns the spacing after item at index.

See also setItemSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) Orientation

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) Orientation() int

Returns the layout orientation.

See also setOrientation().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) QGraphicsLinearLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsLinearLayout) QGraphicsLinearLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsLinearLayout

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) RemoveAt

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) RemoveAt(index int)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayout::removeAt().

Removes the item at index without destroying it. Ownership of the item is transferred to the caller.

See also removeItem() and insertItem().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) RemoveItem

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) RemoveItem(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF)

Removes item from the layout without destroying it. Ownership of item is transferred to the caller.

See also removeAt() and insertItem().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetAlignment

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetAlignment(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, alignment int)

Sets the alignment of item to alignment. If item's alignment changes, the layout is automatically invalidated.

See also alignment() and invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetItemSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetItemSpacing(index int, spacing float64)

Sets the spacing after item at index to spacing.

See also itemSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetOrientation

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetOrientation(orientation int)

Change the layout orientation to orientation. Changing the layout orientation will automatically invalidate the layout.

See also orientation().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetSpacing

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetSpacing(spacing float64)

Sets the layout's spacing to spacing. Spacing refers to the vertical and horizontal distances between items.

See also spacing(), setItemSpacing(), setStretchFactor(), and QGraphicsGridLayout::setSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetStretchFactor

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SetStretchFactor(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF, stretch int)

Sets the stretch factor for item to stretch. If an item's stretch factor changes, this function will invalidate the layout.

Setting stretch to 0 removes the stretch factor from the item, and is effectively equivalent to setting stretch to 1.

See also stretchFactor().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SizeHint(which int, constraint qtcore.QSizeF_ITF) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) SizeHint__

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) SizeHint__(which int) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) Spacing

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) Spacing() float64

Returns the layout's spacing. Spacing refers to the vertical and horizontal distances between items.

See also setSpacing().

func (*QGraphicsLinearLayout) StretchFactor

func (this *QGraphicsLinearLayout) StretchFactor(item QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF) int

Returns the stretch factor for item. The default stretch factor is 0, meaning that the item has no assigned stretch factor.

See also setStretchFactor().

type QGraphicsLinearLayout_ITF

type QGraphicsLinearLayout_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsLayout_ITF
	QGraphicsLinearLayout_PTR() *QGraphicsLinearLayout
}

type QGraphicsOpacityEffect

type QGraphicsOpacityEffect struct {
	*QGraphicsEffect
}

func NewQGraphicsOpacityEffect

func NewQGraphicsOpacityEffect(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsOpacityEffect

func NewQGraphicsOpacityEffectFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsOpacityEffectFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsOpacityEffect

func NewQGraphicsOpacityEffect__

func NewQGraphicsOpacityEffect__() *QGraphicsOpacityEffect

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) Draw

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) Draw(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

This pure virtual function draws the effect and is called whenever the source needs to be drawn.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsEffect subclass to provide the effect's drawing implementation, using painter.

For example:

MyGraphicsEffect::draw(QPainter *painter)
{
    ...
    QPoint offset;
    if (sourceIsPixmap()) {
        // No point in drawing in device coordinates (pixmap will be scaled anyways).
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::LogicalCoordinates, &offset);
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    } else {
        // Draw pixmap in device coordinates to avoid pixmap scaling;
        const QPixmap pixmap = sourcePixmap(Qt::DeviceCoordinates, &offset);
        painter->setWorldTransform(QTransform());
        ...
        painter->drawPixmap(offset, pixmap);
    }
    ...
}

This function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it is meant for reimplementation purposes only.

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) InheritDraw

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) InheritDraw(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void draw(class QPainter *)

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) Opacity

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) Opacity() float64

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) OpacityChanged

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) OpacityChanged(opacity float64)

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) OpacityMask

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) OpacityMask() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) OpacityMaskChanged

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) OpacityMaskChanged(mask qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) QGraphicsOpacityEffect_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) QGraphicsOpacityEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsOpacityEffect

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) SetOpacity

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) SetOpacity(opacity float64)

func (*QGraphicsOpacityEffect) SetOpacityMask

func (this *QGraphicsOpacityEffect) SetOpacityMask(mask qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

type QGraphicsOpacityEffect_ITF

type QGraphicsOpacityEffect_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsEffect_ITF
	QGraphicsOpacityEffect_PTR() *QGraphicsOpacityEffect
}

type QGraphicsPathItem

type QGraphicsPathItem struct {
	*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem
}

func NewQGraphicsPathItem

func NewQGraphicsPathItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsPathItem

func NewQGraphicsPathItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsPathItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsPathItem

func NewQGraphicsPathItem_1

func NewQGraphicsPathItem_1(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsPathItem

func NewQGraphicsPathItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsPathItem_1_(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *QGraphicsPathItem

func NewQGraphicsPathItem__

func NewQGraphicsPathItem__() *QGraphicsPathItem

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsPathItem

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) Paint__

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) Paint__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) Path

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) Path() *qtgui.QPainterPath

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) QGraphicsPathItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsPathItem) QGraphicsPathItem_PTR() *QGraphicsPathItem

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) SetPath

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) SetPath(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsPathItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsPathItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsPathItem_ITF

type QGraphicsPathItem_ITF interface {
	QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_ITF
	QGraphicsPathItem_PTR() *QGraphicsPathItem
}

type QGraphicsPathItem__

type QGraphicsPathItem__ = int
const QGraphicsPathItem__Type QGraphicsPathItem__ = 2

type QGraphicsPixmapItem

type QGraphicsPixmapItem struct {
	*QGraphicsItem
}

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsPixmapItem

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsPixmapItem

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem_1

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem_1(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsPixmapItem

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem_1_(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF) *QGraphicsPixmapItem

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem__

func NewQGraphicsPixmapItem__() *QGraphicsPixmapItem

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsPixmapItem

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) Offset

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) Offset() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) Pixmap

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) Pixmap() *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) QGraphicsPixmapItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsPixmapItem) QGraphicsPixmapItem_PTR() *QGraphicsPixmapItem

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetOffset

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetOffset(offset qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetOffset_1

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetOffset_1(x float64, y float64)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetPixmap

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetPixmap(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetShapeMode

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetShapeMode(mode int)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetTransformationMode

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SetTransformationMode(mode int)

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) ShapeMode

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) ShapeMode() int

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) TransformationMode

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) TransformationMode() int

func (*QGraphicsPixmapItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsPixmapItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsPixmapItem_ITF

type QGraphicsPixmapItem_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsItem_ITF
	QGraphicsPixmapItem_PTR() *QGraphicsPixmapItem
}

type QGraphicsPixmapItem__

type QGraphicsPixmapItem__ = int
const QGraphicsPixmapItem__Type QGraphicsPixmapItem__ = 7

type QGraphicsPixmapItem__ShapeMode

type QGraphicsPixmapItem__ShapeMode = int
const QGraphicsPixmapItem__BoundingRectShape QGraphicsPixmapItem__ShapeMode = 1
const QGraphicsPixmapItem__HeuristicMaskShape QGraphicsPixmapItem__ShapeMode = 2
const QGraphicsPixmapItem__MaskShape QGraphicsPixmapItem__ShapeMode = 0

type QGraphicsPolygonItem

type QGraphicsPolygonItem struct {
	*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem
}

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem_1

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem_1(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem_1_(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem__

func NewQGraphicsPolygonItem__() *QGraphicsPolygonItem

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) FillRule

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) FillRule() int

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) Paint

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) Paint__

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) Polygon

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) Polygon() *qtgui.QPolygonF

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) QGraphicsPolygonItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsPolygonItem) QGraphicsPolygonItem_PTR() *QGraphicsPolygonItem

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetFillRule

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetFillRule(rule int)

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetPolygon

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) SetPolygon(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsPolygonItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsPolygonItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsPolygonItem_ITF

type QGraphicsPolygonItem_ITF interface {
	QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_ITF
	QGraphicsPolygonItem_PTR() *QGraphicsPolygonItem
}

type QGraphicsPolygonItem__

type QGraphicsPolygonItem__ = int
const QGraphicsPolygonItem__Type QGraphicsPolygonItem__ = 5

type QGraphicsProxyWidget

type QGraphicsProxyWidget struct {
	*QGraphicsWidget
}

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidget

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidget(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF, wFlags int) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Constructs a new QGraphicsProxy widget. parent and wFlags are passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidgetFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidget__

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidget__() *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Constructs a new QGraphicsProxy widget. parent and wFlags are passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidget__1

func NewQGraphicsProxyWidget__1(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Constructs a new QGraphicsProxy widget. parent and wFlags are passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor.

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) ContextMenuEvent(event QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) CreateProxyForChildWidget

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) CreateProxyForChildWidget(child QWidget_ITF) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Creates a proxy widget for the given child of the widget contained in this proxy.

This function makes it possible to acquire proxies for non top-level widgets. For instance, you can embed a dialog, and then transform only one of its widgets.

If the widget is already embedded, return the existing proxy widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also newProxyWidget() and QGraphicsScene::addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) DragEnterEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragEnterEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) DragLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) DragMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) DropEvent

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::dropEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) Event

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) EventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) EventFilter(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) FocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) GrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) GrabMouseEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::grabMouseEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) HideEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) HideEvent(event qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) HoverEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) HoverEnterEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverEnterEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) HoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) HoverLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) HoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) HoverMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritEventFilter(f func(object *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritGrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritGrabMouseEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void grabMouseEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHideEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHoverEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHoverEnterEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverEnterEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHoverLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritHoverMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritInputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritInputMethodQuery(f func(query int) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant inputMethodQuery(Qt::InputMethodQuery)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritItemChange

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritItemChange(f func(change int, value *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant itemChange(enum QGraphicsItem::GraphicsItemChange, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritNewProxyWidget

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritNewProxyWidget(f func(arg0 *QWidget) unsafe.Pointer)

QGraphicsProxyWidget * newProxyWidget(const class QWidget *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritShowEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritSizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritSizeHint(f func(which int, constraint *qtcore.QSizeF) unsafe.Pointer)

QSizeF sizeHint(Qt::SizeHint, const class QSizeF &)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritUngrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritUngrabMouseEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void ungrabMouseEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InputMethodEvent(event qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) InputMethodQuery(query int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) ItemChange

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) ItemChange(change int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::itemChange().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::keyPressEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) KeyReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) MouseMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) MousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) MousePressEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) MouseReleaseEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) NewProxyWidget

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) NewProxyWidget(arg0 QWidget_ITF) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Creates a proxy widget for the given child of the widget contained in this proxy.

You should not call this function directly; use QGraphicsProxyWidget::createProxyForChildWidget() instead.

This function is a fake virtual slot that you can reimplement in your subclass in order to control how new proxy widgets are created. The default implementation returns a proxy created with the QGraphicsProxyWidget() constructor with this proxy widget as the parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also createProxyForChildWidget().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) Paint

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) QGraphicsProxyWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsProxyWidget) QGraphicsProxyWidget_PTR() *QGraphicsProxyWidget

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) ResizeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) ResizeEvent(event QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) SetGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::setGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) SetWidget

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Embeds widget into this proxy widget. The embedded widget must reside exclusively either inside or outside of Graphics View. You cannot embed a widget as long as it is is visible elsewhere in the UI, at the same time.

widget must be a top-level widget whose parent is 0.

When the widget is embedded, its state (e.g., visible, enabled, geometry, size hints) is copied into the proxy widget. If the embedded widget is explicitly hidden or disabled, the proxy widget will become explicitly hidden or disabled after embedding is complete. The class documentation has a full overview over the shared state.

QGraphicsProxyWidget's window flags determine whether the widget, after embedding, will be given window decorations or not.

After this function returns, QGraphicsProxyWidget will keep its state synchronized with that of widget whenever possible.

If a widget is already embedded by this proxy when this function is called, that widget will first be automatically unembedded. Passing 0 for the widget argument will only unembed the widget, and the ownership of the currently embedded widget will be passed on to the caller. Every child widget that are embedded will also be embedded and their proxy widget destroyed.

Note that widgets with the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen widget attribute set and widgets that wrap an external application or controller cannot be embedded. Examples are QGLWidget and QAxWidget.

See also widget().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) ShowEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) ShowEvent(event qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::showEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) SizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) SizeHint(which int, constraint qtcore.QSizeF_ITF) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) SizeHint__

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) SizeHint__(which int) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) SubWidgetRect

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) SubWidgetRect(widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the rectangle for widget, which must be a descendant of widget(), or widget() itself, in this proxy item's local coordinates.

If no widget is embedded, widget is 0, or widget is not a descendant of the embedded widget, this function returns an empty QRectF.

See also widget().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) Type

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) Type() int

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) UngrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) UngrabMouseEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsWidget::ungrabMouseEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) WheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) WheelEvent(event QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::wheelEvent().

func (*QGraphicsProxyWidget) Widget

func (this *QGraphicsProxyWidget) Widget() *QWidget

Returns a pointer to the embedded widget.

See also setWidget().

type QGraphicsProxyWidget_ITF

type QGraphicsProxyWidget_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsWidget_ITF
	QGraphicsProxyWidget_PTR() *QGraphicsProxyWidget
}

type QGraphicsProxyWidget__

type QGraphicsProxyWidget__ = int
const QGraphicsProxyWidget__Type QGraphicsProxyWidget__ = 12

type QGraphicsRectItem

type QGraphicsRectItem struct {
	*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem
}

func NewQGraphicsRectItem

func NewQGraphicsRectItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

func NewQGraphicsRectItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsRectItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsRectItem

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_1

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_1_(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_2

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_2(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_2_

func NewQGraphicsRectItem_2_(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *QGraphicsRectItem

func NewQGraphicsRectItem__

func NewQGraphicsRectItem__() *QGraphicsRectItem

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsRectItem

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) Paint__

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) Paint__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) QGraphicsRectItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsRectItem) QGraphicsRectItem_PTR() *QGraphicsRectItem

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) Rect

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) Rect() *qtcore.QRectF

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) SetRect

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) SetRect(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) SetRect_1

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) SetRect_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsRectItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsRectItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsRectItem_ITF

type QGraphicsRectItem_ITF interface {
	QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_ITF
	QGraphicsRectItem_PTR() *QGraphicsRectItem
}

type QGraphicsRectItem__

type QGraphicsRectItem__ = int
const QGraphicsRectItem__Type QGraphicsRectItem__ = 3

type QGraphicsRotation

type QGraphicsRotation struct {
	*QGraphicsTransform
}

func NewQGraphicsRotation

func NewQGraphicsRotation(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsRotation

func NewQGraphicsRotationFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsRotationFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsRotation

func NewQGraphicsRotation__

func NewQGraphicsRotation__() *QGraphicsRotation

func (*QGraphicsRotation) Angle

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) Angle() float64

func (*QGraphicsRotation) AngleChanged

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) AngleChanged()

func (*QGraphicsRotation) ApplyTo

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) ApplyTo(matrix qtgui.QMatrix4x4_ITF)

This pure virtual method has to be reimplemented in derived classes.

It applies this transformation to matrix.

See also QGraphicsItem::transform() and QMatrix4x4::toTransform().

func (*QGraphicsRotation) Axis

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) Axis() *qtgui.QVector3D

func (*QGraphicsRotation) AxisChanged

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) AxisChanged()

func (*QGraphicsRotation) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsRotation) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsRotation) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsRotation) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsRotation

func (*QGraphicsRotation) Origin

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) Origin() *qtgui.QVector3D

func (*QGraphicsRotation) OriginChanged

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) OriginChanged()

func (*QGraphicsRotation) QGraphicsRotation_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsRotation) QGraphicsRotation_PTR() *QGraphicsRotation

func (*QGraphicsRotation) SetAngle

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) SetAngle(arg0 float64)

func (*QGraphicsRotation) SetAxis

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) SetAxis(axis qtgui.QVector3D_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsRotation) SetAxis_1

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) SetAxis_1(axis int)

func (*QGraphicsRotation) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsRotation) SetOrigin

func (this *QGraphicsRotation) SetOrigin(point qtgui.QVector3D_ITF)

type QGraphicsRotation_ITF

type QGraphicsRotation_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsTransform_ITF
	QGraphicsRotation_PTR() *QGraphicsRotation
}

type QGraphicsScale

type QGraphicsScale struct {
	*QGraphicsTransform
}

func NewQGraphicsScale

func NewQGraphicsScale(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsScale

func NewQGraphicsScaleFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsScaleFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsScale

func NewQGraphicsScale__

func NewQGraphicsScale__() *QGraphicsScale

func (*QGraphicsScale) ApplyTo

func (this *QGraphicsScale) ApplyTo(matrix qtgui.QMatrix4x4_ITF)

This pure virtual method has to be reimplemented in derived classes.

It applies this transformation to matrix.

See also QGraphicsItem::transform() and QMatrix4x4::toTransform().

func (*QGraphicsScale) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsScale) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsScale) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsScale) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsScale) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsScale) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsScale

func (*QGraphicsScale) Origin

func (this *QGraphicsScale) Origin() *qtgui.QVector3D

func (*QGraphicsScale) OriginChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScale) OriginChanged()

func (*QGraphicsScale) QGraphicsScale_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsScale) QGraphicsScale_PTR() *QGraphicsScale

func (*QGraphicsScale) ScaleChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScale) ScaleChanged()

func (*QGraphicsScale) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsScale) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsScale) SetOrigin

func (this *QGraphicsScale) SetOrigin(point qtgui.QVector3D_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsScale) SetXScale

func (this *QGraphicsScale) SetXScale(arg0 float64)

func (*QGraphicsScale) SetYScale

func (this *QGraphicsScale) SetYScale(arg0 float64)

func (*QGraphicsScale) SetZScale

func (this *QGraphicsScale) SetZScale(arg0 float64)

func (*QGraphicsScale) XScale

func (this *QGraphicsScale) XScale() float64

func (*QGraphicsScale) XScaleChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScale) XScaleChanged()

func (*QGraphicsScale) YScale

func (this *QGraphicsScale) YScale() float64

func (*QGraphicsScale) YScaleChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScale) YScaleChanged()

func (*QGraphicsScale) ZScale

func (this *QGraphicsScale) ZScale() float64

func (*QGraphicsScale) ZScaleChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScale) ZScaleChanged()

type QGraphicsScale_ITF

type QGraphicsScale_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsTransform_ITF
	QGraphicsScale_PTR() *QGraphicsScale
}

type QGraphicsScene

type QGraphicsScene struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQGraphicsScene

func NewQGraphicsScene(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsScene

Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsSceneFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsScene

func NewQGraphicsScene_1

func NewQGraphicsScene_1(sceneRect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsScene

Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsScene_1_

func NewQGraphicsScene_1_(sceneRect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *QGraphicsScene

Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsScene_2

func NewQGraphicsScene_2(x float64, y float64, width float64, height float64, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsScene

Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsScene_2_

func NewQGraphicsScene_2_(x float64, y float64, width float64, height float64) *QGraphicsScene

Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsScene__

func NewQGraphicsScene__() *QGraphicsScene

Constructs a QGraphicsScene object. The parent parameter is passed to QObject's constructor.

func (*QGraphicsScene) ActivePanel

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ActivePanel() *QGraphicsItem

Returns the current active panel, or 0 if no panel is currently active.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also QGraphicsScene::setActivePanel().

func (*QGraphicsScene) ActiveWindow

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ActiveWindow() *QGraphicsWidget

Returns the current active window, or 0 if no window is currently active.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also QGraphicsScene::setActiveWindow().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF, brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF, brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse_1_

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse_1_(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse_1_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse_1_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse__(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse__1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddEllipse__1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF) *QGraphicsEllipseItem

Creates and adds an ellipse item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the ellipse is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddItem

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Adds or moves the item and all its childen to this scene. This scene takes ownership of the item.

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

If the item is already in a different scene, it will first be removed from its old scene, and then added to this scene as a top-level.

QGraphicsScene will send ItemSceneChange notifications to item while it is added to the scene. If item does not currently belong to a scene, only one notification is sent. If it does belong to scene already (i.e., it is moved to this scene), QGraphicsScene will send an addition notification as the item is removed from its previous scene.

If the item is a panel, the scene is active, and there is no active panel in the scene, then the item will be activated.

See also removeItem(), addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addWidget(), and Sorting.

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddLine

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddLine(line qtcore.QLineF_ITF, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF) *QGraphicsLineItem

Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddLine_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddLine_1(x1 float64, y1 float64, x2 float64, y2 float64, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF) *QGraphicsLineItem

Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddLine_1_

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddLine_1_(x1 float64, y1 float64, x2 float64, y2 float64) *QGraphicsLineItem

Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddLine__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddLine__(line qtcore.QLineF_ITF) *QGraphicsLineItem

Creates and adds a line item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the line is defined by line, and its pen is initialized to pen.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addPath(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddPath

Creates and adds a path item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the path is defined by path, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddPath__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddPath__(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *QGraphicsPathItem

Creates and adds a path item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the path is defined by path, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddPath__1

Creates and adds a path item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the path is defined by path, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddPixmap

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddPixmap(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF) *QGraphicsPixmapItem

Creates and adds a pixmap item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The pixmap is defined by pixmap.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddPolygon

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddPolygon(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF, brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

Creates and adds a polygon item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The polygon is defined by polygon, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddPolygon__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddPolygon__(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

Creates and adds a polygon item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The polygon is defined by polygon, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddPolygon__1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddPolygon__1(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF) *QGraphicsPolygonItem

Creates and adds a polygon item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The polygon is defined by polygon, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPath(), addRect(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddRect

Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddRect_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddRect_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF, brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddRect_1_

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddRect_1_(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *QGraphicsRectItem

Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddRect_1_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddRect_1_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddRect__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddRect__(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddRect__1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddRect__1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, pen qtgui.QPen_ITF) *QGraphicsRectItem

Creates and adds a rectangle item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The geometry of the rectangle is defined by rect, and its pen and brush are initialized to pen and brush.

Note that the item's geometry is provided in item coordinates, and its position is initialized to (0, 0). For example, if a QRect(50, 50, 100, 100) is added, its top-left corner will be at (50, 50) relative to the origin in the items coordinate system.

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addText(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddSimpleText

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddSimpleText(text string, font qtgui.QFont_ITF) *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

Creates and adds a QGraphicsSimpleTextItem to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.

The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddSimpleText__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddSimpleText__(text string) *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

Creates and adds a QGraphicsSimpleTextItem to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.

The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddText

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddText(text string, font qtgui.QFont_ITF) *QGraphicsTextItem

Creates and adds a text item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.

The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddText__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddText__(text string) *QGraphicsTextItem

Creates and adds a text item to the scene, and returns the item pointer. The text string is initialized to text, and its font is initialized to font.

The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addItem(), and addWidget().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddWidget

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddWidget(widget QWidget_ITF, wFlags int) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Creates a new QGraphicsProxyWidget for widget, adds it to the scene, and returns a pointer to the proxy. wFlags set the default window flags for the embedding proxy widget.

The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

Note that widgets with the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen widget attribute set and widgets that wrap an external application or controller are not supported. Examples are QGLWidget and QAxWidget.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addSimpleText(), and addItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) AddWidget__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) AddWidget__(widget QWidget_ITF) *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Creates a new QGraphicsProxyWidget for widget, adds it to the scene, and returns a pointer to the proxy. wFlags set the default window flags for the embedding proxy widget.

The item's position is initialized to (0, 0).

If the item is visible (i.e., QGraphicsItem::isVisible() returns true), QGraphicsScene will emit changed() once control goes back to the event loop.

Note that widgets with the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen widget attribute set and widgets that wrap an external application or controller are not supported. Examples are QGLWidget and QAxWidget.

See also addEllipse(), addLine(), addPixmap(), addPixmap(), addRect(), addText(), addSimpleText(), and addItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Advance

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Advance()

This slot advances the scene by one step, by calling QGraphicsItem::advance() for all items on the scene. This is done in two phases: in the first phase, all items are notified that the scene is about to change, and in the second phase all items are notified that they can move. In the first phase, QGraphicsItem::advance() is called passing a value of 0 as an argument, and 1 is passed in the second phase.

Note that you can also use the Animation Framework for animations.

See also QGraphicsItem::advance() and QTimeLine.

func (*QGraphicsScene) BackgroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsScene) BackgroundBrush() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QGraphicsScene) BspTreeDepth

func (this *QGraphicsScene) BspTreeDepth() int

func (*QGraphicsScene) Clear

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Clear()

Removes and deletes all items from the scene, but otherwise leaves the state of the scene unchanged.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also addItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) ClearFocus

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ClearFocus()

Clears focus from the scene. If any item has focus when this function is called, it will lose focus, and regain focus again once the scene regains focus.

A scene that does not have focus ignores key events.

See also hasFocus(), setFocus(), and setFocusItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) ClearSelection

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ClearSelection()

Clears the current selection.

See also setSelectionArea() and selectedItems().

func (*QGraphicsScene) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ContextMenuEvent(event QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event contextMenuEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive context menu events. The default implementation forwards the event to the topmost visible item that accepts context menu events at the position of the event. If no items accept context menu events at this position, the event is ignored.

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

See also QGraphicsItem::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) DestroyItemGroup

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DestroyItemGroup(group QGraphicsItemGroup_ITF)

Reparents all items in group to group's parent item, then removes group from the scene, and finally deletes it. The items' positions and transformations are mapped from the group to the group's parent.

See also createItemGroup() and QGraphicsItemGroup::removeFromGroup().

func (*QGraphicsScene) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DragEnterEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag enter events for the scene.

The default implementation accepts the event and prepares the scene to accept drag move events.

See also QGraphicsItem::dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), and dropEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DragLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag leave events for the scene.

See also QGraphicsItem::dragLeaveEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dropEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DragMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drag move events for the scene.

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

See also QGraphicsItem::dragMoveEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragLeaveEvent(), and dropEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) DrawBackground

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DrawBackground(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Draws the background of the scene using painter, before any items and the foreground are drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom background for the scene.

All painting is done in scene coordinates. The rect parameter is the exposed rectangle.

If all you want is to define a color, texture, or gradient for the background, you can call setBackgroundBrush() instead.

See also drawForeground() and drawItems().

func (*QGraphicsScene) DrawForeground

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DrawForeground(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Draws the foreground of the scene using painter, after the background and all items have been drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom foreground for the scene.

All painting is done in scene coordinates. The rect parameter is the exposed rectangle.

If all you want is to define a color, texture or gradient for the foreground, you can call setForegroundBrush() instead.

See also drawBackground() and drawItems().

func (*QGraphicsScene) DrawItems

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DrawItems(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, numItems int, items []interface{}, options []interface{}, widget QWidget_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsScene) DrawItems__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DrawItems__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, numItems int, items []interface{}, options []interface{})

func (*QGraphicsScene) DropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) DropEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive drop events for the scene.

See also QGraphicsItem::dropEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Event

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

Processes the event event, and dispatches it to the respective event handlers.

In addition to calling the convenience event handlers, this function is responsible for converting mouse move events to hover events for when there is no mouse grabber item. Hover events are delivered directly to items; there is no convenience function for them.

Unlike QWidget, QGraphicsScene does not have the convenience functions enterEvent() and leaveEvent(). Use this function to obtain those events instead.

See also contextMenuEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), focusInEvent(), and focusOutEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) EventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsScene) EventFilter(watched qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

QGraphicsScene filters QApplication's events to detect palette and font changes.

func (*QGraphicsScene) FocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event focusEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive focus in events.

The default implementation sets focus on the scene, and then on the last focus item.

See also QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) FocusItem

func (this *QGraphicsScene) FocusItem() *QGraphicsItem

When the scene is active, this functions returns the scene's current focus item, or 0 if no item currently has focus. When the scene is inactive, this functions returns the item that will gain input focus when the scene becomes active.

The focus item receives keyboard input when the scene receives a key event.

See also setFocusItem(), QGraphicsItem::hasFocus(), and isActive().

func (*QGraphicsScene) FocusItemChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScene) FocusItemChanged(newFocus QGraphicsItem_ITF, oldFocus QGraphicsItem_ITF, reason int)

This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever focus changes in the scene (i.e., when an item gains or loses input focus, or when focus passes from one item to another). You can connect to this signal if you need to keep track of when other items gain input focus. It is particularly useful for implementing virtual keyboards, input methods, and cursor items.

oldFocusItem is a pointer to the item that previously had focus, or 0 if no item had focus before the signal was emitted. newFocusItem is a pointer to the item that gained input focus, or 0 if focus was lost. reason is the reason for the focus change (e.g., if the scene was deactivated while an input field had focus, oldFocusItem would point to the input field item, newFocusItem would be 0, and reason would be Qt::ActiveWindowFocusReason.

func (*QGraphicsScene) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsScene) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it cannot. If next is true, this function searches forward; if next is false, it searches backward.

You can reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsScene to provide fine-grained control over how tab focus passes inside your scene. The default implementation is based on the tab focus chain defined by QGraphicsWidget::setTabOrder().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QGraphicsScene) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event focusEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive focus out events.

The default implementation removes focus from any focus item, then removes focus from the scene.

See also QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Font

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QGraphicsScene) ForegroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ForegroundBrush() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QGraphicsScene) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsScene) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsScene) HasFocus

func (this *QGraphicsScene) HasFocus() bool

Returns true if the scene has focus; otherwise returns false. If the scene has focus, it will will forward key events from QKeyEvent to any item that has focus.

See also setFocus() and setFocusItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Height

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Height() float64

This convenience function is equivalent to calling sceneRect().height().

See also width().

func (*QGraphicsScene) HelpEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) HelpEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event helpEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive help events. The events are of type QEvent::ToolTip, which are created when a tooltip is requested.

The default implementation shows the tooltip of the topmost visible item, i.e., the item with the highest z-value, at the mouse cursor position. If no item has a tooltip set, this function does nothing.

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

See also QGraphicsItem::toolTip() and QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent.

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritDrawBackground

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritDrawBackground(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRectF))

void drawBackground(class QPainter *, const class QRectF &)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritDrawForeground

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritDrawForeground(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRectF))

void drawForeground(class QPainter *, const class QRectF &)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritDrawItems

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritDrawItems(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, numItems int, items []interface{}, options []interface{}, widget *QWidget))

void drawItems(class QPainter *, int, class QGraphicsItem **, const class QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *, class QWidget *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritEventFilter(f func(watched *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritHelpEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritHelpEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent))

void helpEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsScene) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InputMethodEvent(event qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive input method events for the scene.

The default implementation forwards the event to the focusItem(). If no item currently has focus or the current focus item does not accept input methods, this function does nothing.

See also QGraphicsItem::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsScene) InputMethodQuery(query int) *qtcore.QVariant

This method is used by input methods to query a set of properties of the scene to be able to support complex input method operations as support for surrounding text and reconversions.

The query parameter specifies which property is queried.

See also QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Invalidate

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Invalidate(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, layers int)

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.

Example:

QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const
{
    // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).
    return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);
}

void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &pixmap)
{
    // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.
    if (x >= 0 && x < numTilesH && y >= 0 && y < numTilesV) {
        tiles[y][x] = pixmap;
        invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);
    }
}

void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &exposed)
{
    // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.
    for (int y = 0; y < numTilesV; ++y) {
        for (int x = 0; x < numTilesH; ++x) {
            QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);
            if (exposed.intersects(rect))
                painter->drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);
        }
    }
}

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Invalidate_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Invalidate_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, layers int)

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.

Example:

QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const
{
    // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).
    return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);
}

void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &pixmap)
{
    // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.
    if (x >= 0 && x < numTilesH && y >= 0 && y < numTilesV) {
        tiles[y][x] = pixmap;
        invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);
    }
}

void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &exposed)
{
    // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.
    for (int y = 0; y < numTilesV; ++y) {
        for (int x = 0; x < numTilesH; ++x) {
            QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);
            if (exposed.intersects(rect))
                painter->drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);
        }
    }
}

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Invalidate_1_

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Invalidate_1_()

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.

Example:

QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const
{
    // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).
    return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);
}

void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &pixmap)
{
    // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.
    if (x >= 0 && x < numTilesH && y >= 0 && y < numTilesV) {
        tiles[y][x] = pixmap;
        invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);
    }
}

void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &exposed)
{
    // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.
    for (int y = 0; y < numTilesV; ++y) {
        for (int x = 0; x < numTilesH; ++x) {
            QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);
            if (exposed.intersects(rect))
                painter->drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);
        }
    }
}

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Invalidate_1_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Invalidate_1_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.

Example:

QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const
{
    // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).
    return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);
}

void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &pixmap)
{
    // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.
    if (x >= 0 && x < numTilesH && y >= 0 && y < numTilesV) {
        tiles[y][x] = pixmap;
        invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);
    }
}

void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &exposed)
{
    // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.
    for (int y = 0; y < numTilesV; ++y) {
        for (int x = 0; x < numTilesH; ++x) {
            QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);
            if (exposed.intersects(rect))
                painter->drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);
        }
    }
}

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Invalidate__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Invalidate__(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of the layers in rect on the scene. Any cached content in layers is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can use this function overload to notify QGraphicsScene of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. This function is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled CacheBackground.

Example:

QRectF TileScene::rectForTile(int x, int y) const
{
    // Return the rectangle for the tile at position (x, y).
    return QRectF(x * tileWidth, y * tileHeight, tileWidth, tileHeight);
}

void TileScene::setTile(int x, int y, const QPixmap &pixmap)
{
    // Sets or replaces the tile at position (x, y) with pixmap.
    if (x >= 0 && x < numTilesH && y >= 0 && y < numTilesV) {
        tiles[y][x] = pixmap;
        invalidate(rectForTile(x, y), BackgroundLayer);
    }
}

void TileScene::drawBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRectF &exposed)
{
    // Draws all tiles that intersect the exposed area.
    for (int y = 0; y < numTilesV; ++y) {
        for (int x = 0; x < numTilesH; ++x) {
            QRectF rect = rectForTile(x, y);
            if (exposed.intersects(rect))
                painter->drawPixmap(rect.topLeft(), tiles[y][x]);
        }
    }
}

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsView::resetCachedContent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) IsActive

func (this *QGraphicsScene) IsActive() bool

Returns true if the scene is active (e.g., it's viewed by at least one QGraphicsView that is active); otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also QGraphicsItem::isActive() and QWidget::isActiveWindow().

func (*QGraphicsScene) IsSortCacheEnabled

func (this *QGraphicsScene) IsSortCacheEnabled() bool

func (*QGraphicsScene) ItemAt

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ItemAt(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF, deviceTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF) *QGraphicsItem

Returns the topmost visible item at the specified position, or 0 if there are no items at this position.

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also items(), collidingItems(), and Sorting.

func (*QGraphicsScene) ItemAt_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ItemAt_1(x float64, y float64, deviceTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF) *QGraphicsItem

Returns the topmost visible item at the specified position, or 0 if there are no items at this position.

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also items(), collidingItems(), and Sorting.

func (*QGraphicsScene) ItemIndexMethod

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ItemIndexMethod() int

func (*QGraphicsScene) ItemsBoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsScene) ItemsBoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

Calculates and returns the bounding rect of all items on the scene. This function works by iterating over all items, and because of this, it can be slow for large scenes.

See also sceneRect().

func (*QGraphicsScene) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event keyEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keypress events. The default implementation forwards the event to current focus item.

See also QGraphicsItem::keyPressEvent() and focusItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) KeyReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event keyEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key release events. The default implementation forwards the event to current focus item.

See also QGraphicsItem::keyReleaseEvent() and focusItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsScene) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsScene) MinimumRenderSize

func (this *QGraphicsScene) MinimumRenderSize() float64

func (*QGraphicsScene) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse doubleclick events for the scene.

If someone doubleclicks on the scene, the scene will first receive a mouse press event, followed by a release event (i.e., a click), then a doubleclick event, and finally a release event. If the doubleclick event is delivered to a different item than the one that received the first press and release, it will be delivered as a press event. However, tripleclick events are not delivered as doubleclick events in this case.

The default implementation is similar to mousePressEvent().

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent(), and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().

func (*QGraphicsScene) MouseGrabberItem

func (this *QGraphicsScene) MouseGrabberItem() *QGraphicsItem

Returns the current mouse grabber item, or 0 if no item is currently grabbing the mouse. The mouse grabber item is the item that receives all mouse events sent to the scene.

An item becomes a mouse grabber when it receives and accepts a mouse press event, and it stays the mouse grabber until either of the following events occur:

If the item receives a mouse release event when there are no other buttons pressed, it loses the mouse grab. If the item becomes invisible (i.e., someone calls item->setVisible(false)), or if it becomes disabled (i.e., someone calls item->setEnabled(false)), it loses the mouse grab. If the item is removed from the scene, it loses the mouse grab.

If the item loses its mouse grab, the scene will ignore all mouse events until a new item grabs the mouse (i.e., until a new item receives a mouse press event).

func (*QGraphicsScene) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) MouseMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the scene.

The default implementation depends on the mouse grabber state. If there is a mouse grabber item, the event is sent to the mouse grabber. If there are any items that accept hover events at the current position, the event is translated into a hover event and accepted; otherwise it's ignored.

See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().

func (*QGraphicsScene) MousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) MousePressEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the scene.

The default implementation depends on the state of the scene. If there is a mouse grabber item, then the event is sent to the mouse grabber. Otherwise, it is forwarded to the topmost visible item that accepts mouse events at the scene position from the event, and that item promptly becomes the mouse grabber item.

If there is no item at the given position on the scene, the selection area is reset, any focus item loses its input focus, and the event is then ignored.

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent() and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().

func (*QGraphicsScene) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) MouseReleaseEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event mouseEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the scene.

The default implementation depends on the mouse grabber state. If there is no mouse grabber, the event is ignored. Otherwise, if there is a mouse grabber item, the event is sent to the mouse grabber. If this mouse release represents the last pressed button on the mouse, the mouse grabber item then loses the mouse grab.

See also QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent(), QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and QGraphicsItem::setAcceptedMouseButtons().

func (*QGraphicsScene) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsScene) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsScene

func (*QGraphicsScene) Palette

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Palette() *qtgui.QPalette

func (*QGraphicsScene) QGraphicsScene_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsScene) QGraphicsScene_PTR() *QGraphicsScene

func (*QGraphicsScene) RemoveItem

func (this *QGraphicsScene) RemoveItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Removes the item item and all its children from the scene. The ownership of item is passed on to the caller (i.e., QGraphicsScene will no longer delete item when destroyed).

See also addItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Render

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Render(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, target qtcore.QRectF_ITF, source qtcore.QRectF_ITF, aspectRatioMode int)

Renders the source rect from scene into target, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the scene onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing with QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...
QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPaperSize(QPrinter::A4);

QPainter painter(&printer);
scene.render(&painter);

If source is a null rect, this function will use sceneRect() to determine what to render. If target is a null rect, the dimensions of painter's paint device will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsView::render().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Render__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Render__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Renders the source rect from scene into target, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the scene onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing with QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...
QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPaperSize(QPrinter::A4);

QPainter painter(&printer);
scene.render(&painter);

If source is a null rect, this function will use sceneRect() to determine what to render. If target is a null rect, the dimensions of painter's paint device will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsView::render().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Render__1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Render__1(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, target qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Renders the source rect from scene into target, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the scene onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing with QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...
QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPaperSize(QPrinter::A4);

QPainter painter(&printer);
scene.render(&painter);

If source is a null rect, this function will use sceneRect() to determine what to render. If target is a null rect, the dimensions of painter's paint device will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsView::render().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Render__2

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Render__2(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, target qtcore.QRectF_ITF, source qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Renders the source rect from scene into target, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the scene onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing with QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...
QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPaperSize(QPrinter::A4);

QPainter painter(&printer);
scene.render(&painter);

If source is a null rect, this function will use sceneRect() to determine what to render. If target is a null rect, the dimensions of painter's paint device will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsView::render().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SceneRect

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SceneRect() *qtcore.QRectF

func (*QGraphicsScene) SceneRectChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SceneRectChanged(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the scene rect changes. The rect parameter is the new scene rectangle.

See also QGraphicsView::updateSceneRect().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SelectionArea

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SelectionArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the selection area that was previously set with setSelectionArea(), or an empty QPainterPath if no selection area has been set.

See also setSelectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SelectionChanged

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted by QGraphicsScene whenever the selection changes. You can call selectedItems() to get the new list of selected items.

The selection changes whenever an item is selected or unselected, a selection area is set, cleared or otherwise changed, if a preselected item is added to the scene, or if a selected item is removed from the scene.

QGraphicsScene emits this signal only once for group selection operations. For example, if you set a selection area, select or unselect a QGraphicsItemGroup, or if you add or remove from the scene a parent item that contains several selected items, selectionChanged() is emitted only once after the operation has completed (instead of once for each item).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setSelectionArea(), selectedItems(), and QGraphicsItem::setSelected().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SendEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SendEvent(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Sends event event to item item through possible event filters.

The event is sent only if the item is enabled.

Returns false if the event was filtered or if the item is disabled. Otherwise returns the value that was returned from the event handler.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent() and QGraphicsItem::sceneEventFilter().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetActivePanel

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetActivePanel(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Activates item, which must be an item in this scene. You can also pass 0 for item, in which case QGraphicsScene will deactivate any currently active panel.

If the scene is currently inactive, item remains inactive until the scene becomes active (or, ir item is 0, no item will be activated).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also activePanel(), isActive(), and QGraphicsItem::isActive().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetActiveWindow

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetActiveWindow(widget QGraphicsWidget_ITF)

Activates widget, which must be a widget in this scene. You can also pass 0 for widget, in which case QGraphicsScene will deactivate any currently active window.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also activeWindow() and QGraphicsWidget::isActiveWindow().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetBackgroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetBackgroundBrush(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetBspTreeDepth

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetBspTreeDepth(depth int)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetFocus

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetFocus(focusReason int)

Sets focus on the scene by sending a QFocusEvent to the scene, passing focusReason as the reason. If the scene regains focus after having previously lost it while an item had focus, the last focus item will receive focus with focusReason as the reason.

If the scene already has focus, this function does nothing.

See also hasFocus(), clearFocus(), and setFocusItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetFocusItem

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetFocusItem(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, focusReason int)

Sets the scene's focus item to item, with the focus reason focusReason, after removing focus from any previous item that may have had focus.

If item is 0, or if it either does not accept focus (i.e., it does not have the QGraphicsItem::ItemIsFocusable flag enabled), or is not visible or not enabled, this function only removes focus from any previous focusitem.

If item is not 0, and the scene does not currently have focus (i.e., hasFocus() returns false), this function will call setFocus() automatically.

See also focusItem(), hasFocus(), and setFocus().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetFocusItem__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetFocusItem__(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Sets the scene's focus item to item, with the focus reason focusReason, after removing focus from any previous item that may have had focus.

If item is 0, or if it either does not accept focus (i.e., it does not have the QGraphicsItem::ItemIsFocusable flag enabled), or is not visible or not enabled, this function only removes focus from any previous focusitem.

If item is not 0, and the scene does not currently have focus (i.e., hasFocus() returns false), this function will call setFocus() automatically.

See also focusItem(), hasFocus(), and setFocus().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetFocus__

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetFocus__()

Sets focus on the scene by sending a QFocusEvent to the scene, passing focusReason as the reason. If the scene regains focus after having previously lost it while an item had focus, the last focus item will receive focus with focusReason as the reason.

If the scene already has focus, this function does nothing.

See also hasFocus(), clearFocus(), and setFocusItem().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetFont

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetForegroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetForegroundBrush(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetItemIndexMethod

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetItemIndexMethod(method int)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetMinimumRenderSize

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetMinimumRenderSize(minSize float64)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetPalette

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetPalette(palette qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSceneRect

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSceneRect(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSceneRect_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSceneRect_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, deviceTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF)

Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_1(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, mode int, deviceTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF)

Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_1_

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_1_(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF)

Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_1_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_1_1(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, mode int)

Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_2

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_2(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, selectionOperation int, mode int, deviceTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF)

Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_2_

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_2_(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, selectionOperation int)

Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_2_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSelectionArea_2_1(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF, selectionOperation int, mode int)

Sets the selection area to path. All items within this area are immediately selected, and all items outside are unselected. You can get the list of all selected items by calling selectedItems().

deviceTransform is the transformation that applies to the view, and needs to be provided if the scene contains items that ignore transformations.

For an item to be selected, it must be marked as selectable (QGraphicsItem::ItemIsSelectable).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also clearSelection() and selectionArea().

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetSortCacheEnabled

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetSortCacheEnabled(enabled bool)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetStickyFocus

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetStickyFocus(enabled bool)

func (*QGraphicsScene) SetStyle

func (this *QGraphicsScene) SetStyle(style QStyle_ITF)

Sets or replaces the style of the scene to style, and reparents the style to this scene. Any previously assigned style is deleted. The scene's style defaults to QApplication::style(), and serves as the default for all QGraphicsWidget items in the scene.

Changing the style, either directly by calling this function, or indirectly by calling QApplication::setStyle(), will automatically update the style for all widgets in the scene that do not have a style explicitly assigned to them.

If style is 0, QGraphicsScene will revert to QApplication::style().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also style().

func (*QGraphicsScene) StickyFocus

func (this *QGraphicsScene) StickyFocus() bool

func (*QGraphicsScene) Style

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Style() *QStyle

Returns the scene's style, or the same as QApplication::style() if the scene has not been explicitly assigned a style.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setStyle().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Update

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Update(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

Schedules a redraw of the area rect on the scene.

See also sceneRect() and changed().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Update_1

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Update_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Schedules a redraw of the area rect on the scene.

See also sceneRect() and changed().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Update_1_

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Update_1_()

Schedules a redraw of the area rect on the scene.

See also sceneRect() and changed().

func (*QGraphicsScene) WheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsScene) WheelEvent(event QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event wheelEvent, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse wheel events for the scene.

By default, the event is delivered to the topmost visible item under the cursor. If ignored, the event propagates to the item beneath, and again until the event is accepted, or it reaches the scene. If no items accept the event, it is ignored.

Note: See items() for a definition of which items are considered visible by this function.

See also QGraphicsItem::wheelEvent().

func (*QGraphicsScene) Width

func (this *QGraphicsScene) Width() float64

This convenience function is equivalent to calling sceneRect().width().

See also height().

type QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent

type QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent(type_ int) *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__

func NewQGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__() *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) GetCthis

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) Modifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) Modifiers() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) Pos

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) Reason

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) Reason() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) ScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) ScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) ScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) ScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetModifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetModifiers(modifiers int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetPos

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetReason

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetReason(reason int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent) SetScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

type QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Reason

type QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Reason = int
const QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Keyboard QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Reason = 1
const QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Mouse QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Reason = 0
const QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Other QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent__Reason = 2

type QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent

type QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent(type_ int) *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneDragDropEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneDragDropEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent__

func NewQGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent__() *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) AcceptProposedAction

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) AcceptProposedAction()

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) Buttons

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) Buttons() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) DropAction

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) DropAction() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) MimeData

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) MimeData() *qtcore.QMimeData

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) Modifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) Modifiers() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) Pos

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) PossibleActions

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) PossibleActions() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) ProposedAction

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) ProposedAction() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) ScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) ScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) ScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) ScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetButtons

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetButtons(buttons int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetDropAction

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetDropAction(action int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetMimeData

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetMimeData(data qtcore.QMimeData_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetModifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetModifiers(modifiers int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetPos

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetPossibleActions

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetPossibleActions(actions int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetProposedAction

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetProposedAction(action int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetSource

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) SetSource(source QWidget_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) Source

func (this *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent) Source() *QWidget

type QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneEvent

type QGraphicsSceneEvent struct {
	*qtcore.QEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneEvent(type_ int) *QGraphicsSceneEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneEvent) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneEvent) QGraphicsSceneEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneEvent) QGraphicsSceneEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneEvent) SetWidget

func (this *QGraphicsSceneEvent) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneEvent) Widget

func (this *QGraphicsSceneEvent) Widget() *QWidget

Returns the widget where the event originated, or 0 if the event originates from another application.

type QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent

type QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneHelpEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneHelpEvent(type_ int) *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneHelpEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneHelpEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneHelpEvent__

func NewQGraphicsSceneHelpEvent__() *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) ScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) ScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) ScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) ScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) SetScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) SetScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) SetScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent) SetScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

type QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent

type QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneHoverEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneHoverEvent(type_ int) *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneHoverEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneHoverEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneHoverEvent__

func NewQGraphicsSceneHoverEvent__() *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) LastPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) LastPos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) LastScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) LastScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) LastScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) LastScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) Modifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) Modifiers() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) Pos

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) ScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) ScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) ScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) ScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetLastPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetLastPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetLastScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetLastScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetLastScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetLastScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetModifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetModifiers(modifiers int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent) SetScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

type QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent

type QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneMouseEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneMouseEvent(type_ int) *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneMouseEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneMouseEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneMouseEvent__

func NewQGraphicsSceneMouseEvent__() *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Button

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Button() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ButtonDownPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ButtonDownPos(button int) *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ButtonDownScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ButtonDownScenePos(button int) *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ButtonDownScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ButtonDownScreenPos(button int) *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Buttons

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Buttons() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Flags

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Flags() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) LastPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) LastPos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) LastScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) LastScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) LastScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) LastScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Modifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Modifiers() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Pos

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) ScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButton

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButton(button int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtonDownPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtonDownPos(button int, pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtonDownScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtonDownScenePos(button int, pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtonDownScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtonDownScreenPos(button int, pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtons

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetButtons(buttons int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetFlags

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetFlags(arg0 int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetLastPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetLastPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetLastScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetLastScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetLastScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetLastScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetModifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetModifiers(modifiers int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetSource

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) SetSource(source int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Source

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent) Source() int

type QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent

type QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneMoveEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneMoveEvent() *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneMoveEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneMoveEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) NewPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) NewPos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) OldPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) OldPos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) SetNewPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) SetNewPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) SetOldPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent) SetOldPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

type QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent

type QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneResizeEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneResizeEvent() *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneResizeEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneResizeEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) NewSize

func (this *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) NewSize() *qtcore.QSizeF

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) OldSize

func (this *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) OldSize() *qtcore.QSizeF

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) SetNewSize

func (this *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) SetNewSize(size qtcore.QSizeF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) SetOldSize

func (this *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent) SetOldSize(size qtcore.QSizeF_ITF)

type QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent
}

type QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent

type QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent struct {
	*QGraphicsSceneEvent
}

func NewQGraphicsSceneWheelEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneWheelEvent(type_ int) *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneWheelEventFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSceneWheelEventFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent

func NewQGraphicsSceneWheelEvent__

func NewQGraphicsSceneWheelEvent__() *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Buttons

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Buttons() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Delta

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Delta() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Modifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Modifiers() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Orientation

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Orientation() int

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) Pos

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) ScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) ScenePos() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) ScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) ScreenPos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetButtons

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetButtons(buttons int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetDelta

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetDelta(delta int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetModifiers

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetModifiers(modifiers int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetOrientation

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetOrientation(orientation int)

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetPos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetScenePos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetScenePos(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetScreenPos

func (this *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent) SetScreenPos(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

type QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_ITF

type QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsSceneEvent_ITF
	QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent_PTR() *QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent
}

type QGraphicsScene_ITF

type QGraphicsScene_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QGraphicsScene_PTR() *QGraphicsScene
}

type QGraphicsScene__ItemIndexMethod

type QGraphicsScene__ItemIndexMethod = int

This enum describes the indexing algorithms QGraphicsScene provides for managing positional information about items on the scene.

See also setItemIndexMethod() and bspTreeDepth.

const QGraphicsScene__BspTreeIndex QGraphicsScene__ItemIndexMethod = 0

A Binary Space Partitioning tree is applied. All QGraphicsScene's item location algorithms are of an order close to logarithmic complexity, by making use of binary search. Adding, moving and removing items is logarithmic. This approach is best for static scenes (i.e., scenes where most items do not move).

const QGraphicsScene__NoIndex QGraphicsScene__ItemIndexMethod = -1

type QGraphicsScene__SceneLayer

type QGraphicsScene__SceneLayer = int
const QGraphicsScene__AllLayers QGraphicsScene__SceneLayer = 65535
const QGraphicsScene__BackgroundLayer QGraphicsScene__SceneLayer = 2
const QGraphicsScene__ForegroundLayer QGraphicsScene__SceneLayer = 4
const QGraphicsScene__ItemLayer QGraphicsScene__SceneLayer = 1

type QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

type QGraphicsSimpleTextItem struct {
	*QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem
}

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem_1

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem_1(text string, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem_1_(text string) *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem__

func NewQGraphicsSimpleTextItem__() *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Font

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Paint

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) QGraphicsSimpleTextItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) QGraphicsSimpleTextItem_PTR() *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetFont

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetText

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SetText(text string)

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Shape

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Text

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Text() string

func (*QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsSimpleTextItem_ITF

type QGraphicsSimpleTextItem_ITF interface {
	QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem_ITF
	QGraphicsSimpleTextItem_PTR() *QGraphicsSimpleTextItem
}

type QGraphicsSimpleTextItem__

type QGraphicsSimpleTextItem__ = int
const QGraphicsSimpleTextItem__Type QGraphicsSimpleTextItem__ = 9

type QGraphicsTextItem

type QGraphicsTextItem struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQGraphicsTextItem

func NewQGraphicsTextItem(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsTextItem

func NewQGraphicsTextItemFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsTextItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsTextItem

func NewQGraphicsTextItem_1

func NewQGraphicsTextItem_1(text string, parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsTextItem

func NewQGraphicsTextItem_1_

func NewQGraphicsTextItem_1_(text string) *QGraphicsTextItem

func NewQGraphicsTextItem__

func NewQGraphicsTextItem__() *QGraphicsTextItem

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) AdjustSize

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) AdjustSize()

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

This pure virtual function defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle; all painting must be restricted to inside an item's bounding rect. QGraphicsView uses this to determine whether the item requires redrawing.

Although the item's shape can be arbitrary, the bounding rect is always rectangular, and it is unaffected by the items' transformation.

If you want to change the item's bounding rectangle, you must first call prepareGeometryChange(). This notifies the scene of the imminent change, so that it can update its item geometry index; otherwise, the scene will be unaware of the item's new geometry, and the results are undefined (typically, rendering artifacts are left within the view).

Reimplement this function to let QGraphicsView determine what parts of the widget, if any, need to be redrawn.

Note: For shapes that paint an outline / stroke, it is important to include half the pen width in the bounding rect. It is not necessary to compensate for antialiasing, though.

Example:

QRectF CircleItem::boundingRect() const
{
    qreal penWidth = 1;
    return QRectF(-radius - penWidth / 2, -radius - penWidth / 2,
                  diameter + penWidth, diameter + penWidth);
}

See also boundingRegion(), shape(), contains(), The Graphics View Coordinate System, and prepareGeometryChange().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) Contains

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) Contains(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item contains point, which is in local coordinates; otherwise, false is returned. It is most often called from QGraphicsView to determine what item is under the cursor, and for that reason, the implementation of this function should be as light-weight as possible.

By default, this function calls shape(), but you can reimplement it in a subclass to provide a (perhaps more efficient) implementation.

See also shape(), boundingRect(), and collidesWithPath().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) ContextMenuEvent(event QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to process context menu events. The event parameter contains details about the event to be handled.

If you ignore the event (i.e., by calling QEvent::ignore()), event will propagate to any item beneath this item. If no items accept the event, it will be ignored by the scene and propagate to the view.

It's common to open a QMenu in response to receiving a context menu event. Example:

void CustomItem::contextMenuEvent(QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent *event)
{
    QMenu menu;
    QAction *removeAction = menu.addAction("Remove");
    QAction *markAction = menu.addAction("Mark");
    QAction *selectedAction = menu.exec(event->screenPos());
    // ...
}

The default implementation ignores the event.

See also sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) DefaultTextColor

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) DefaultTextColor() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) Document

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) Document() *qtgui.QTextDocument

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) DragEnterEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag enter events for this item. Drag enter events are generated as the cursor enters the item's area.

By accepting the event (i.e., by calling QEvent::accept()), the item will accept drop events, in addition to receiving drag move and drag leave. Otherwise, the event will be ignored and propagate to the item beneath. If the event is accepted, the item will receive a drag move event before control goes back to the event loop.

A common implementation of dragEnterEvent accepts or ignores event depending on the associated mime data in event. Example:

CustomItem::CustomItem()
{
    setAcceptDrops(true);
    ...
}

void CustomItem::dragEnterEvent(QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *event)
{
    event->setAccepted(event->mimeData()->hasFormat("text/plain"));
}

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dropEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) DragLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag leave events for this item. Drag leave events are generated as the cursor leaves the item's area. Most often you will not need to reimplement this function, but it can be useful for resetting state in your item (e.g., highlighting).

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dragEnterEvent(), dropEvent(), and dragMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) DragMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drag move events for this item. Drag move events are generated as the cursor moves around inside the item's area. Most often you will not need to reimplement this function; it is used to indicate that only parts of the item can accept drops.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event toggles whether or not the item will accept drops at the position from the event. By default, event is accepted, indicating that the item allows drops at the specified position.

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dropEvent(), dragEnterEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) DropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) DropEvent(event QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive drop events for this item. Items can only receive drop events if the last drag move event was accepted.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

Items do not receive drag and drop events by default; to enable this feature, call setAcceptDrops(true).

The default implementation does nothing.

See also dragEnterEvent(), dragMoveEvent(), and dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) Extension

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) Extension(variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) FocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive focus in events for this item. The default implementation calls ensureVisible().

See also focusOutEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setFocus().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive focus out events for this item. The default implementation does nothing.

See also focusInEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setFocus().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) Font

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) HoverEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) HoverEnterEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover enter events for this item. The default implementation calls update(); otherwise it does nothing.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

See also hoverMoveEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) HoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) HoverLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover leave events for this item. The default implementation calls update(); otherwise it does nothing.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

See also hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) HoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) HoverMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive hover move events for this item. The default implementation does nothing.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

See also hoverEnterEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), sceneEvent(), and setAcceptHoverEvents().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritExtension

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritExtension(f func(variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant extension(const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritHoverEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritHoverEnterEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverEnterEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritHoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritHoverLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritHoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritHoverMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritInputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritInputMethodQuery(f func(query int) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant inputMethodQuery(Qt::InputMethodQuery)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritSceneEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritSceneEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool sceneEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritSetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritSetExtension(f func(extension int, variant *qtcore.QVariant))

void setExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InheritSupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InheritSupportsExtension(f func(extension int) bool)

bool supportsExtension(enum QGraphicsItem::Extension)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InputMethodEvent(event qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive input method events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event.

See also inputMethodQuery() and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) InputMethodQuery(query int) *qtcore.QVariant

This method is only relevant for input items. It is used by the input method to query a set of properties of the item to be able to support complex input method operations, such as support for surrounding text and reconversions. query specifies which property is queried.

See also inputMethodEvent() and QInputMethodEvent.

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) IsObscuredBy

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) IsObscuredBy(item QGraphicsItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if this item's bounding rect is completely obscured by the opaque shape of item.

The base implementation maps item's opaqueArea() to this item's coordinate system, and then checks if this item's boundingRect() is fully contained within the mapped shape.

You can reimplement this function to provide a custom algorithm for determining whether this item is obscured by item.

See also opaqueArea() and isObscured().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive key press events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event. If you reimplement this handler, the event will by default be accepted.

Note that key events are only received for items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, and that have keyboard input focus.

See also keyReleaseEvent(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) KeyReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive key release events for this item. The default implementation ignores the event. If you reimplement this handler, the event will by default be accepted.

Note that key events are only received for items that set the ItemIsFocusable flag, and that have keyboard input focus.

See also keyPressEvent(), setFocus(), QGraphicsScene::setFocusItem(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) LinkActivated

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) LinkActivated(arg0 string)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) LinkHovered

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) LinkHovered(arg0 string)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse doubleclick events for this item.

When doubleclicking an item, the item will first receive a mouse press event, followed by a release event (i.e., a click), then a doubleclick event, and finally a release event.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

The default implementation calls mousePressEvent(). If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseDoubleClickEvent() in your reimplementation.

Note that an item will not receive double click events if it is neither selectable nor movable (single mouse clicks are ignored in this case, and that stops the generation of double clicks).

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) MouseMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse move events for this item. If you do receive this event, you can be certain that this item also received a mouse press event, and that this item is the current mouse grabber.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseMoveEvent() in your reimplementation.

Please note that mousePressEvent() decides which graphics item it is that receives mouse events. See the mousePressEvent() description for details.

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) MousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) MousePressEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse press events for this item. Mouse press events are only delivered to items that accept the mouse button that is pressed. By default, an item accepts all mouse buttons, but you can change this by calling setAcceptedMouseButtons().

The mouse press event decides which item should become the mouse grabber (see QGraphicsScene::mouseGrabberItem()). If you do not reimplement this function, the press event will propagate to any topmost item beneath this item, and no other mouse events will be delivered to this item.

If you do reimplement this function, event will by default be accepted (see QEvent::accept()), and this item is then the mouse grabber. This allows the item to receive future move, release and doubleclick events. If you call QEvent::ignore() on event, this item will lose the mouse grab, and event will propagate to any topmost item beneath. No further mouse events will be delivered to this item unless a new mouse press event is received.

The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mousePressEvent() in your reimplementation.

The event is QEvent::ignore()d for items that are neither movable nor selectable.

See also mouseMoveEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) MouseReleaseEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented to receive mouse release events for this item.

Calling QEvent::ignore() or QEvent::accept() on event has no effect.

The default implementation handles basic item interaction, such as selection and moving. If you want to keep the base implementation when reimplementing this function, call QGraphicsItem::mouseReleaseEvent() in your reimplementation.

Please note that mousePressEvent() decides which graphics item it is that receives mouse events. See the mousePressEvent() description for details.

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), and sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsTextItem

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) OpaqueArea

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) OpaqueArea() *qtgui.QPainterPath

This virtual function returns a shape representing the area where this item is opaque. An area is opaque if it is filled using an opaque brush or color (i.e., not transparent).

This function is used by isObscuredBy(), which is called by underlying items to determine if they are obscured by this item.

The default implementation returns an empty QPainterPath, indicating that this item is completely transparent and does not obscure any other items.

See also isObscuredBy(), isObscured(), and shape().

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) OpenExternalLinks() bool

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This function, which is usually called by QGraphicsView, paints the contents of an item in local coordinates.

Reimplement this function in a QGraphicsItem subclass to provide the item's painting implementation, using painter. The option parameter provides style options for the item, such as its state, exposed area and its level-of-detail hints. The widget argument is optional. If provided, it points to the widget that is being painted on; otherwise, it is 0. For cached painting, widget is always 0.

void RoundRectItem::paint(QPainter *painter,
                          const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *option,
                          QWidget *widget)
{
    painter->drawRoundedRect(-10, -10, 20, 20, 5, 5);
}

The painter's pen is 0-width by default, and its pen is initialized to the QPalette::Text brush from the paint device's palette. The brush is initialized to QPalette::Window.

Make sure to constrain all painting inside the boundaries of boundingRect() to avoid rendering artifacts (as QGraphicsView does not clip the painter for you). In particular, when QPainter renders the outline of a shape using an assigned QPen, half of the outline will be drawn outside, and half inside, the shape you're rendering (e.g., with a pen width of 2 units, you must draw outlines 1 unit inside boundingRect()). QGraphicsItem does not support use of cosmetic pens with a non-zero width.

All painting is done in local coordinates.

Note: It is mandatory that an item will always redraw itself in the exact same way, unless update() was called; otherwise visual artifacts may occur. In other words, two subsequent calls to paint() must always produce the same output, unless update() was called between them.

Note: Enabling caching for an item does not guarantee that paint() will be invoked only once by the Graphics View framework, even without any explicit call to update(). See the documentation of setCacheMode() for more details.

See also setCacheMode(), QPen::width(), Item Coordinates, and ItemUsesExtendedStyleOption.

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) QGraphicsTextItem_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsTextItem) QGraphicsTextItem_PTR() *QGraphicsTextItem

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SceneEvent

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SceneEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

This virtual function receives events to this item. Reimplement this function to intercept events before they are dispatched to the specialized event handlers contextMenuEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), hoverEnterEvent(), hoverMoveEvent(), hoverLeaveEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and mouseDoubleClickEvent().

Returns true if the event was recognized and handled; otherwise, (e.g., if the event type was not recognized,) false is returned.

event is the intercepted event.

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetDefaultTextColor

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetDefaultTextColor(c qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetDocument

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetDocument(document qtgui.QTextDocument_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetExtension

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetExtension(extension int, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetFont

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetHtml

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetHtml(html string)
func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetOpenExternalLinks(open bool)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetPlainText

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetPlainText(text string)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetTabChangesFocus

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetTabChangesFocus(b bool)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetTextCursor

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetTextCursor(cursor qtgui.QTextCursor_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetTextInteractionFlags

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetTextInteractionFlags(flags int)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SetTextWidth

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SetTextWidth(width float64)

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the shape of this item as a QPainterPath in local coordinates. The shape is used for many things, including collision detection, hit tests, and for the QGraphicsScene::items() functions.

The default implementation calls boundingRect() to return a simple rectangular shape, but subclasses can reimplement this function to return a more accurate shape for non-rectangular items. For example, a round item may choose to return an elliptic shape for better collision detection. For example:

QPainterPath RoundItem::shape() const
{
    QPainterPath path;
    path.addEllipse(boundingRect());
    return path;
}

The outline of a shape can vary depending on the width and style of the pen used when drawing. If you want to include this outline in the item's shape, you can create a shape from the stroke using QPainterPathStroker.

This function is called by the default implementations of contains() and collidesWithPath().

See also boundingRect(), contains(), prepareGeometryChange(), and QPainterPathStroker.

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) SupportsExtension

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) SupportsExtension(extension int) bool

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) TabChangesFocus

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) TabChangesFocus() bool

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) TextCursor

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) TextCursor() *qtgui.QTextCursor

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) TextInteractionFlags

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) TextInteractionFlags() int

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) TextWidth

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) TextWidth() float64

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) ToHtml

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) ToHtml() string

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) ToPlainText

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) ToPlainText() string

func (*QGraphicsTextItem) Type

func (this *QGraphicsTextItem) Type() int

Returns the type of an item as an int. All standard graphicsitem classes are associated with a unique value; see QGraphicsItem::Type. This type information is used by qgraphicsitem_cast() to distinguish between types.

The default implementation (in QGraphicsItem) returns UserType.

To enable use of qgraphicsitem_cast() with a custom item, reimplement this function and declare a Type enum value equal to your custom item's type. Custom items must return a value larger than or equal to UserType (65536).

For example:

class CustomItem : public QGraphicsItem
{
public:
   enum { Type = UserType + 1 };

   int type() const
   {
       // Enable the use of qgraphicsitem_cast with this item.
       return Type;
   }
   ...
};

See also UserType.

type QGraphicsTextItem_ITF

type QGraphicsTextItem_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsTextItem_PTR() *QGraphicsTextItem
}

type QGraphicsTextItem__

type QGraphicsTextItem__ = int
const QGraphicsTextItem__Type QGraphicsTextItem__ = 8

type QGraphicsTransform

type QGraphicsTransform struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQGraphicsTransform

func NewQGraphicsTransform(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QGraphicsTransform

Constructs a new QGraphicsTransform with the given parent.

func NewQGraphicsTransformFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsTransformFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsTransform

func NewQGraphicsTransform__

func NewQGraphicsTransform__() *QGraphicsTransform

Constructs a new QGraphicsTransform with the given parent.

func (*QGraphicsTransform) ApplyTo

func (this *QGraphicsTransform) ApplyTo(matrix qtgui.QMatrix4x4_ITF)

This pure virtual method has to be reimplemented in derived classes.

It applies this transformation to matrix.

See also QGraphicsItem::transform() and QMatrix4x4::toTransform().

func (*QGraphicsTransform) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsTransform) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsTransform) InheritUpdate

func (this *QGraphicsTransform) InheritUpdate(f func())

void update()

func (*QGraphicsTransform) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsTransform) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsTransform) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsTransform) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsTransform

func (*QGraphicsTransform) QGraphicsTransform_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsTransform) QGraphicsTransform_PTR() *QGraphicsTransform

func (*QGraphicsTransform) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsTransform) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsTransform) Update

func (this *QGraphicsTransform) Update()

Notifies that this transform operation has changed its parameters in such a way that applyTo() will return a different result than before.

When implementing you own custom graphics transform, you must call this function every time you change a parameter, to let QGraphicsItem know that its transformation needs to be updated.

See also applyTo().

type QGraphicsTransform_ITF

type QGraphicsTransform_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QGraphicsTransform_PTR() *QGraphicsTransform
}

type QGraphicsView

type QGraphicsView struct {
	*QAbstractScrollArea
}

func NewQGraphicsView

func NewQGraphicsView(parent QWidget_ITF) *QGraphicsView

Constructs a QGraphicsView. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsViewFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsView

func NewQGraphicsView_1

func NewQGraphicsView_1(scene QGraphicsScene_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QGraphicsView

Constructs a QGraphicsView. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsView_1_

func NewQGraphicsView_1_(scene QGraphicsScene_ITF) *QGraphicsView

Constructs a QGraphicsView. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.

func NewQGraphicsView__

func NewQGraphicsView__() *QGraphicsView

Constructs a QGraphicsView. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.

func (*QGraphicsView) Alignment

func (this *QGraphicsView) Alignment() int

func (*QGraphicsView) BackgroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsView) BackgroundBrush() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QGraphicsView) CacheMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) CacheMode() int

func (*QGraphicsView) CenterOn

func (this *QGraphicsView) CenterOn(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport to ensure that the scene coordinate pos, is centered in the view.

Because pos is a floating point coordinate, and the scroll bars operate on integer coordinates, the centering is only an approximation.

Note: If the item is close to or outside the border, it will be visible in the view, but not centered.

See also ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsView) CenterOn_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) CenterOn_1(x float64, y float64)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport to ensure that the scene coordinate pos, is centered in the view.

Because pos is a floating point coordinate, and the scroll bars operate on integer coordinates, the centering is only an approximation.

Note: If the item is close to or outside the border, it will be visible in the view, but not centered.

See also ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsView) CenterOn_2

func (this *QGraphicsView) CenterOn_2(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport to ensure that the scene coordinate pos, is centered in the view.

Because pos is a floating point coordinate, and the scroll bars operate on integer coordinates, the centering is only an approximation.

Note: If the item is close to or outside the border, it will be visible in the view, but not centered.

See also ensureVisible().

func (*QGraphicsView) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) ContextMenuEvent(event qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) DragEnterEvent(event qtgui.QDragEnterEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) DragLeaveEvent(event qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) DragMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) DragMode() int

func (*QGraphicsView) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) DragMoveEvent(event qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) DrawBackground

func (this *QGraphicsView) DrawBackground(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Draws the background of the scene using painter, before any items and the foreground are drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom background for this view.

If all you want is to define a color, texture or gradient for the background, you can call setBackgroundBrush() instead.

All painting is done in scene coordinates. rect is the exposed rectangle.

The default implementation fills rect using the view's backgroundBrush. If no such brush is defined (the default), the scene's drawBackground() function is called instead.

See also drawForeground() and QGraphicsScene::drawBackground().

func (*QGraphicsView) DrawForeground

func (this *QGraphicsView) DrawForeground(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Draws the foreground of the scene using painter, after the background and all items are drawn. Reimplement this function to provide a custom foreground for this view.

If all you want is to define a color, texture or gradient for the foreground, you can call setForegroundBrush() instead.

All painting is done in scene coordinates. rect is the exposed rectangle.

The default implementation fills rect using the view's foregroundBrush. If no such brush is defined (the default), the scene's drawForeground() function is called instead.

See also drawBackground() and QGraphicsScene::drawForeground().

func (*QGraphicsView) DrawItems

func (this *QGraphicsView) DrawItems(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, numItems int, items []interface{}, options []interface{})

func (*QGraphicsView) DropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) DropEvent(event qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, xmargin int, ymargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, xmargin int, ymargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_1_

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_1_(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_1_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_1_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, xmargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_2

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_2(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, xmargin int, ymargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_2_

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_2_(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_2_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible_2_1(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, xmargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible__

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible__(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible__1

func (this *QGraphicsView) EnsureVisible__1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, xmargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the viewport so that the scene rectangle rect is visible, with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified rect cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

See also centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) Event

func (this *QGraphicsView) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QGraphicsView) FitInView

func (this *QGraphicsView) FitInView(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, aspectRadioMode int)

Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.

This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.

It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).

If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.

See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) FitInView_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) FitInView_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64, aspectRadioMode int)

Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.

This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.

It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).

If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.

See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) FitInView_1_

func (this *QGraphicsView) FitInView_1_(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.

This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.

It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).

If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.

See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) FitInView_2

func (this *QGraphicsView) FitInView_2(item QGraphicsItem_ITF, aspectRadioMode int)

Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.

This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.

It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).

If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.

See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) FitInView_2_

func (this *QGraphicsView) FitInView_2_(item QGraphicsItem_ITF)

Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.

This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.

It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).

If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.

See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) FitInView__

func (this *QGraphicsView) FitInView__(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Scales the view matrix and scrolls the scroll bars to ensure that the scene rectangle rect fits inside the viewport. rect must be inside the scene rect; otherwise, fitInView() cannot guarantee that the whole rect is visible.

This function keeps the view's rotation, translation, or shear. The view is scaled according to aspectRatioMode. rect will be centered in the view if it does not fit tightly.

It's common to call fitInView() from inside a reimplementation of resizeEvent(), to ensure that the whole scene, or parts of the scene, scales automatically to fit the new size of the viewport as the view is resized. Note though, that calling fitInView() from inside resizeEvent() can lead to unwanted resize recursion, if the new transformation toggles the automatic state of the scrollbars. You can toggle the scrollbar policies to always on or always off to prevent this (see horizontalScrollBarPolicy() and verticalScrollBarPolicy()).

If rect is empty, or if the viewport is too small, this function will do nothing.

See also setTransform(), ensureVisible(), and centerOn().

func (*QGraphicsView) FocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsView) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QGraphicsView) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) ForegroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsView) ForegroundBrush() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QGraphicsView) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragEnterEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QDragEnterEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritDrawBackground

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritDrawBackground(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRectF))

void drawBackground(class QPainter *, const class QRectF &)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritDrawForeground

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritDrawForeground(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRectF))

void drawForeground(class QPainter *, const class QRectF &)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritDrawItems

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritDrawItems(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, numItems int, items []interface{}, options []interface{}))

void drawItems(class QPainter *, int, class QGraphicsItem **, const class QStyleOptionGraphicsItem *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritSetupViewport

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritSetupViewport(f func(widget *QWidget))

void setupViewport(class QWidget *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritShowEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritViewportEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritViewportEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool viewportEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsView) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) InputMethodEvent(event qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QGraphicsView) InputMethodQuery(query int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QGraphicsView) InvalidateScene

func (this *QGraphicsView) InvalidateScene(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, layers int)

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of layers inside rect. rect is in scene coordinates. Any cached content for layers inside rect is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can call this function to notify QGraphicsView of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. It is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled background caching.

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but QGraphicsScene::BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsScene::invalidate() and update().

func (*QGraphicsView) InvalidateScene__

func (this *QGraphicsView) InvalidateScene__()

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of layers inside rect. rect is in scene coordinates. Any cached content for layers inside rect is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can call this function to notify QGraphicsView of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. It is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled background caching.

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but QGraphicsScene::BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsScene::invalidate() and update().

func (*QGraphicsView) InvalidateScene__1

func (this *QGraphicsView) InvalidateScene__1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Invalidates and schedules a redraw of layers inside rect. rect is in scene coordinates. Any cached content for layers inside rect is unconditionally invalidated and redrawn.

You can call this function to notify QGraphicsView of changes to the background or the foreground of the scene. It is commonly used for scenes with tile-based backgrounds to notify changes when QGraphicsView has enabled background caching.

Note that QGraphicsView currently supports background caching only (see QGraphicsView::CacheBackground). This function is equivalent to calling update() if any layer but QGraphicsScene::BackgroundLayer is passed.

See also QGraphicsScene::invalidate() and update().

func (*QGraphicsView) IsInteractive

func (this *QGraphicsView) IsInteractive() bool

func (*QGraphicsView) IsTransformed

func (this *QGraphicsView) IsTransformed() bool

Returns true if the view is transformed (i.e., a non-identity transform has been assigned, or the scrollbars are adjusted).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setTransform(), horizontalScrollBar(), and verticalScrollBar().

func (*QGraphicsView) ItemAt

func (this *QGraphicsView) ItemAt(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QGraphicsItem

Returns the item at position pos, which is in viewport coordinates. If there are several items at this position, this function returns the topmost item.

Example:

void CustomView::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
{
    if (QGraphicsItem *item = itemAt(event->pos())) {
        qDebug() << "You clicked on item" << item;
    } else {
        qDebug("You didn't click on an item.");
    }
}

See also items() and Sorting.

func (*QGraphicsView) ItemAt_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) ItemAt_1(x int, y int) *QGraphicsItem

Returns the item at position pos, which is in viewport coordinates. If there are several items at this position, this function returns the topmost item.

Example:

void CustomView::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
{
    if (QGraphicsItem *item = itemAt(event->pos())) {
        qDebug() << "You clicked on item" << item;
    } else {
        qDebug("You didn't click on an item.");
    }
}

See also items() and Sorting.

func (*QGraphicsView) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) KeyReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapFromScene

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapFromScene(point qtcore.QPointF_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.

See also mapToScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygon

Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.

See also mapToScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_2

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_2(polygon qtgui.QPolygonF_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygon

Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.

See also mapToScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_3

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_3(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.

See also mapToScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_4

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_4(x float64, y float64) *qtcore.QPoint

Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.

See also mapToScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_5

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapFromScene_5(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64) *qtgui.QPolygon

Returns the scene coordinate point to viewport coordinates.

See also mapToScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapToScene

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapToScene(point qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the viewport coordinate point mapped to scene coordinates.

Note: It can be useful to map the whole rectangle covered by the pixel at point instead of the point itself. To do this, you can call mapToScene(QRect(point, QSize(2, 2))).

See also mapFromScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapToScene_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapToScene_1(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Returns the viewport coordinate point mapped to scene coordinates.

Note: It can be useful to map the whole rectangle covered by the pixel at point instead of the point itself. To do this, you can call mapToScene(QRect(point, QSize(2, 2))).

See also mapFromScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapToScene_2

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapToScene_2(polygon qtgui.QPolygon_ITF) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Returns the viewport coordinate point mapped to scene coordinates.

Note: It can be useful to map the whole rectangle covered by the pixel at point instead of the point itself. To do this, you can call mapToScene(QRect(point, QSize(2, 2))).

See also mapFromScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapToScene_3

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapToScene_3(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF) *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the viewport coordinate point mapped to scene coordinates.

Note: It can be useful to map the whole rectangle covered by the pixel at point instead of the point itself. To do this, you can call mapToScene(QRect(point, QSize(2, 2))).

See also mapFromScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapToScene_4

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapToScene_4(x int, y int) *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the viewport coordinate point mapped to scene coordinates.

Note: It can be useful to map the whole rectangle covered by the pixel at point instead of the point itself. To do this, you can call mapToScene(QRect(point, QSize(2, 2))).

See also mapFromScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) MapToScene_5

func (this *QGraphicsView) MapToScene_5(x int, y int, w int, h int) *qtgui.QPolygonF

Returns the viewport coordinate point mapped to scene coordinates.

Note: It can be useful to map the whole rectangle covered by the pixel at point instead of the point itself. To do this, you can call mapToScene(QRect(point, QSize(2, 2))).

See also mapFromScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) Matrix

func (this *QGraphicsView) Matrix() *qtgui.QMatrix

Returns the current transformation matrix for the view. If no current transformation is set, the identity matrix is returned.

See also setMatrix(), transform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsView) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) MouseMoveEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) MousePressEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) MouseReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsView

func (*QGraphicsView) OptimizationFlags

func (this *QGraphicsView) OptimizationFlags() int

func (*QGraphicsView) PaintEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) QGraphicsView_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsView) QGraphicsView_PTR() *QGraphicsView

func (*QGraphicsView) Render

func (this *QGraphicsView) Render(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, target qtcore.QRectF_ITF, source qtcore.QRect_ITF, aspectRatioMode int)

Renders the source rect, which is in view coordinates, from the scene into target, which is in paint device coordinates, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the view onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing to QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.show();
...

QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPageSize(QPrinter::A4);
QPainter painter(&printer);

// print, fitting the viewport contents into a full page
view.render(&painter);

// print the upper half of the viewport into the lower.
// half of the page.
QRect viewport = view.viewport()->rect();
view.render(&painter,
            QRectF(0, printer.height() / 2,
                   printer.width(), printer.height() / 2),
            viewport.adjusted(0, 0, 0, -viewport.height() / 2));

If source is a null rect, this function will use viewport()->rect() to determine what to draw. If target is a null rect, the full dimensions of painter's paint device (e.g., for a QPrinter, the page size) will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsScene::render().

func (*QGraphicsView) RenderHints

func (this *QGraphicsView) RenderHints() int

func (*QGraphicsView) Render__

func (this *QGraphicsView) Render__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Renders the source rect, which is in view coordinates, from the scene into target, which is in paint device coordinates, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the view onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing to QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.show();
...

QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPageSize(QPrinter::A4);
QPainter painter(&printer);

// print, fitting the viewport contents into a full page
view.render(&painter);

// print the upper half of the viewport into the lower.
// half of the page.
QRect viewport = view.viewport()->rect();
view.render(&painter,
            QRectF(0, printer.height() / 2,
                   printer.width(), printer.height() / 2),
            viewport.adjusted(0, 0, 0, -viewport.height() / 2));

If source is a null rect, this function will use viewport()->rect() to determine what to draw. If target is a null rect, the full dimensions of painter's paint device (e.g., for a QPrinter, the page size) will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsScene::render().

func (*QGraphicsView) Render__1

func (this *QGraphicsView) Render__1(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, target qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Renders the source rect, which is in view coordinates, from the scene into target, which is in paint device coordinates, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the view onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing to QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.show();
...

QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPageSize(QPrinter::A4);
QPainter painter(&printer);

// print, fitting the viewport contents into a full page
view.render(&painter);

// print the upper half of the viewport into the lower.
// half of the page.
QRect viewport = view.viewport()->rect();
view.render(&painter,
            QRectF(0, printer.height() / 2,
                   printer.width(), printer.height() / 2),
            viewport.adjusted(0, 0, 0, -viewport.height() / 2));

If source is a null rect, this function will use viewport()->rect() to determine what to draw. If target is a null rect, the full dimensions of painter's paint device (e.g., for a QPrinter, the page size) will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsScene::render().

func (*QGraphicsView) Render__2

func (this *QGraphicsView) Render__2(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, target qtcore.QRectF_ITF, source qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Renders the source rect, which is in view coordinates, from the scene into target, which is in paint device coordinates, using painter. This function is useful for capturing the contents of the view onto a paint device, such as a QImage (e.g., to take a screenshot), or for printing to QPrinter. For example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addItem(...
...

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.show();
...

QPrinter printer(QPrinter::HighResolution);
printer.setPageSize(QPrinter::A4);
QPainter painter(&printer);

// print, fitting the viewport contents into a full page
view.render(&painter);

// print the upper half of the viewport into the lower.
// half of the page.
QRect viewport = view.viewport()->rect();
view.render(&painter,
            QRectF(0, printer.height() / 2,
                   printer.width(), printer.height() / 2),
            viewport.adjusted(0, 0, 0, -viewport.height() / 2));

If source is a null rect, this function will use viewport()->rect() to determine what to draw. If target is a null rect, the full dimensions of painter's paint device (e.g., for a QPrinter, the page size) will be used.

The source rect contents will be transformed according to aspectRatioMode to fit into the target rect. By default, the aspect ratio is kept, and source is scaled to fit in target.

See also QGraphicsScene::render().

func (*QGraphicsView) ResetCachedContent

func (this *QGraphicsView) ResetCachedContent()

Resets any cached content. Calling this function will clear QGraphicsView's cache. If the current cache mode is CacheNone, this function does nothing.

This function is called automatically for you when the backgroundBrush or QGraphicsScene::backgroundBrush properties change; you only need to call this function if you have reimplemented QGraphicsScene::drawBackground() or QGraphicsView::drawBackground() to draw a custom background, and need to trigger a full redraw.

See also cacheMode().

func (*QGraphicsView) ResetMatrix

func (this *QGraphicsView) ResetMatrix()

Resets the view transformation matrix to the identity matrix.

See also resetTransform().

func (*QGraphicsView) ResetTransform

func (this *QGraphicsView) ResetTransform()

Resets the view transformation to the identity matrix.

See also transform() and setTransform().

func (*QGraphicsView) ResizeAnchor

func (this *QGraphicsView) ResizeAnchor() int

func (*QGraphicsView) ResizeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) Rotate

func (this *QGraphicsView) Rotate(angle float64)

Rotates the current view transformation angle degrees clockwise.

See also setTransform(), transform(), scale(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) RubberBandChanged

func (this *QGraphicsView) RubberBandChanged(viewportRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, fromScenePoint qtcore.QPointF_ITF, toScenePoint qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the rubber band rect is changed. The viewport Rect is specified by rubberBandRect. The drag start position and drag end position are provided in scene points with fromScenePoint and toScenePoint.

When rubberband selection ends this signal will be emitted with null vales.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.1.

See also rubberBandRect().

func (*QGraphicsView) RubberBandRect

func (this *QGraphicsView) RubberBandRect() *qtcore.QRect

This functions returns the current rubber band area (in viewport coordinates) if the user is currently doing an itemselection with rubber band. When the user is not using the rubber band this functions returns (a null) QRectF().

Notice that part of this QRect can be outise the visual viewport. It can e.g contain negative values.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.1.

See also rubberBandSelectionMode and rubberBandChanged().

func (*QGraphicsView) RubberBandSelectionMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) RubberBandSelectionMode() int

func (*QGraphicsView) Scale

func (this *QGraphicsView) Scale(sx float64, sy float64)

Scales the current view transformation by (sx, sy).

See also setTransform(), transform(), rotate(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) Scene

func (this *QGraphicsView) Scene() *QGraphicsScene

Returns a pointer to the scene that is currently visualized in the view. If no scene is currently visualized, 0 is returned.

See also setScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) SceneRect

func (this *QGraphicsView) SceneRect() *qtcore.QRectF

func (*QGraphicsView) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QGraphicsView) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().

func (*QGraphicsView) SetAlignment

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetBackgroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetBackgroundBrush(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetCacheMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetCacheMode(mode int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetDragMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetDragMode(mode int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetForegroundBrush

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetForegroundBrush(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetInteractive

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetInteractive(allowed bool)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetMatrix

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetMatrix(matrix qtgui.QMatrix_ITF, combine bool)

Sets the view's current transformation matrix to matrix.

If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.

The transformation matrix tranforms the scene into view coordinates. Using the default transformation, provided by the identity matrix, one pixel in the view represents one unit in the scene (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is drawn using 10x10 pixels in the view). If a 2x2 scaling matrix is applied, the scene will be drawn in 1:2 (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is then drawn using 20x20 pixels in the view).

Example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addText("GraphicsView rotated clockwise");

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.rotate(90); // the text is rendered with a 90 degree clockwise rotation
view.show();

To simplify interation with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsView provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between scene and view coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map a view coordinate to a floating point scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from floating point scene coordinates to view coordinates.

See also matrix(), setTransform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) SetMatrix__

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetMatrix__(matrix qtgui.QMatrix_ITF)

Sets the view's current transformation matrix to matrix.

If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.

The transformation matrix tranforms the scene into view coordinates. Using the default transformation, provided by the identity matrix, one pixel in the view represents one unit in the scene (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is drawn using 10x10 pixels in the view). If a 2x2 scaling matrix is applied, the scene will be drawn in 1:2 (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is then drawn using 20x20 pixels in the view).

Example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addText("GraphicsView rotated clockwise");

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.rotate(90); // the text is rendered with a 90 degree clockwise rotation
view.show();

To simplify interation with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsView provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between scene and view coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map a view coordinate to a floating point scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from floating point scene coordinates to view coordinates.

See also matrix(), setTransform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) SetOptimizationFlag

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetOptimizationFlag(flag int, enabled bool)

Enables flag if enabled is true; otherwise disables flag.

See also optimizationFlags.

func (*QGraphicsView) SetOptimizationFlag__

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetOptimizationFlag__(flag int)

Enables flag if enabled is true; otherwise disables flag.

See also optimizationFlags.

func (*QGraphicsView) SetOptimizationFlags

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetOptimizationFlags(flags int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetRenderHint

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetRenderHint(hint int, enabled bool)

If enabled is true, the render hint hint is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.

See also renderHints.

func (*QGraphicsView) SetRenderHint__

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetRenderHint__(hint int)

If enabled is true, the render hint hint is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.

See also renderHints.

func (*QGraphicsView) SetRenderHints

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetRenderHints(hints int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetResizeAnchor

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetResizeAnchor(anchor int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetRubberBandSelectionMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetRubberBandSelectionMode(mode int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetScene

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetScene(scene QGraphicsScene_ITF)

Sets the current scene to scene. If scene is already being viewed, this function does nothing.

When a scene is set on a view, the QGraphicsScene::changed() signal is automatically connected to this view's updateScene() slot, and the view's scroll bars are adjusted to fit the size of the scene.

The view does not take ownership of scene.

See also scene().

func (*QGraphicsView) SetSceneRect

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetSceneRect(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetSceneRect_1

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetSceneRect_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetTransform

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetTransform(matrix qtgui.QTransform_ITF, combine bool)

Sets the view's current transformation matrix to matrix.

If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.

The transformation matrix tranforms the scene into view coordinates. Using the default transformation, provided by the identity matrix, one pixel in the view represents one unit in the scene (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is drawn using 10x10 pixels in the view). If a 2x2 scaling matrix is applied, the scene will be drawn in 1:2 (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is then drawn using 20x20 pixels in the view).

Example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addText("GraphicsView rotated clockwise");

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.rotate(90); // the text is rendered with a 90 degree clockwise rotation
view.show();

To simplify interation with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsView provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between scene and view coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map a view coordiate to a floating point scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from floating point scene coordinates to view coordinates.

See also transform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) SetTransform__

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetTransform__(matrix qtgui.QTransform_ITF)

Sets the view's current transformation matrix to matrix.

If combine is true, then matrix is combined with the current matrix; otherwise, matrix replaces the current matrix. combine is false by default.

The transformation matrix tranforms the scene into view coordinates. Using the default transformation, provided by the identity matrix, one pixel in the view represents one unit in the scene (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is drawn using 10x10 pixels in the view). If a 2x2 scaling matrix is applied, the scene will be drawn in 1:2 (e.g., a 10x10 rectangular item is then drawn using 20x20 pixels in the view).

Example:

QGraphicsScene scene;
scene.addText("GraphicsView rotated clockwise");

QGraphicsView view(&scene);
view.rotate(90); // the text is rendered with a 90 degree clockwise rotation
view.show();

To simplify interation with items using a transformed view, QGraphicsView provides mapTo... and mapFrom... functions that can translate between scene and view coordinates. For example, you can call mapToScene() to map a view coordiate to a floating point scene coordinate, or mapFromScene() to map from floating point scene coordinates to view coordinates.

See also transform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) SetTransformationAnchor

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetTransformationAnchor(anchor int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetViewportUpdateMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetViewportUpdateMode(mode int)

func (*QGraphicsView) SetupViewport

func (this *QGraphicsView) SetupViewport(widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::setupViewport().

This slot is called by QAbstractScrollArea after setViewport() has been called. Reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsView to initialize the new viewport widget before it is used.

See also setViewport().

func (*QGraphicsView) Shear

func (this *QGraphicsView) Shear(sh float64, sv float64)

Shears the current view transformation by (sh, sv).

See also setTransform(), transform(), rotate(), scale(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) ShowEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) ShowEvent(event qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) SizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsView) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsView) Transform

func (this *QGraphicsView) Transform() *qtgui.QTransform

Returns the current transformation matrix for the view. If no current transformation is set, the identity matrix is returned.

See also setTransform(), rotate(), scale(), shear(), and translate().

func (*QGraphicsView) TransformationAnchor

func (this *QGraphicsView) TransformationAnchor() int

func (*QGraphicsView) Translate

func (this *QGraphicsView) Translate(dx float64, dy float64)

Translates the current view transformation by (dx, dy).

See also setTransform(), transform(), rotate(), and shear().

func (*QGraphicsView) UpdateSceneRect

func (this *QGraphicsView) UpdateSceneRect(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

Notifies QGraphicsView that the scene's scene rect has changed. rect is the new scene rect. If the view already has an explicitly set scene rect, this function does nothing.

See also sceneRect and QGraphicsScene::sceneRectChanged().

func (*QGraphicsView) ViewportEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) ViewportEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().

func (*QGraphicsView) ViewportTransform

func (this *QGraphicsView) ViewportTransform() *qtgui.QTransform

Returns a matrix that maps scene coordinates to viewport coordinates.

See also mapToScene() and mapFromScene().

func (*QGraphicsView) ViewportUpdateMode

func (this *QGraphicsView) ViewportUpdateMode() int

func (*QGraphicsView) WheelEvent

func (this *QGraphicsView) WheelEvent(event qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QGraphicsView_ITF

type QGraphicsView_ITF interface {
	QAbstractScrollArea_ITF
	QGraphicsView_PTR() *QGraphicsView
}

type QGraphicsView__CacheModeFlag

type QGraphicsView__CacheModeFlag = int
const QGraphicsView__CacheBackground QGraphicsView__CacheModeFlag = 1
const QGraphicsView__CacheNone QGraphicsView__CacheModeFlag = 0

type QGraphicsView__DragMode

type QGraphicsView__DragMode = int

This enum describes the default action for the view when pressing and dragging the mouse over the viewport.

See also dragMode and QGraphicsScene::setSelectionArea().

const QGraphicsView__NoDrag QGraphicsView__DragMode = 0

Nothing happens; the mouse event is ignored.

const QGraphicsView__RubberBandDrag QGraphicsView__DragMode = 2

A rubber band will appear. Dragging the mouse will set the rubber band geometry, and all items covered by the rubber band are selected. This mode is disabled for non-interactive views.

const QGraphicsView__ScrollHandDrag QGraphicsView__DragMode = 1

The cursor changes into a pointing hand, and dragging the mouse around will scroll the scrolbars. This mode works both in interactive and non-interactive mode.

type QGraphicsView__OptimizationFlag

type QGraphicsView__OptimizationFlag = int
const QGraphicsView__DontAdjustForAntialiasing QGraphicsView__OptimizationFlag = 4
const QGraphicsView__DontClipPainter QGraphicsView__OptimizationFlag = 1
const QGraphicsView__DontSavePainterState QGraphicsView__OptimizationFlag = 2
const QGraphicsView__IndirectPainting QGraphicsView__OptimizationFlag = 8

type QGraphicsView__ViewportAnchor

type QGraphicsView__ViewportAnchor = int

This enums describe the possible anchors that QGraphicsView can use when the user resizes the view or when the view is transformed.

See also resizeAnchor and transformationAnchor.

const QGraphicsView__AnchorUnderMouse QGraphicsView__ViewportAnchor = 2

The point under the mouse is used as the anchor.

const QGraphicsView__AnchorViewCenter QGraphicsView__ViewportAnchor = 1

The scene point at the center of the view is used as the anchor.

const QGraphicsView__NoAnchor QGraphicsView__ViewportAnchor = 0

No anchor, i.e. the view leaves the scene's position unchanged.

type QGraphicsView__ViewportUpdateMode

type QGraphicsView__ViewportUpdateMode = int

This enum describes how QGraphicsView updates its viewport when the scene contents change or are exposed.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.3.

See also viewportUpdateMode.

const QGraphicsView__BoundingRectViewportUpdate QGraphicsView__ViewportUpdateMode = 4

The bounding rectangle of all changes in the viewport will be redrawn. This mode has the advantage that QGraphicsView searches only one region for changes, minimizing time spent determining what needs redrawing. The disadvantage is that areas that have not changed also need to be redrawn.

const QGraphicsView__FullViewportUpdate QGraphicsView__ViewportUpdateMode = 0

When any visible part of the scene changes or is reexposed, QGraphicsView will update the entire viewport. This approach is fastest when QGraphicsView spends more time figuring out what to draw than it would spend drawing (e.g., when very many small items are repeatedly updated). This is the preferred update mode for viewports that do not support partial updates, such as QGLWidget, and for viewports that need to disable scroll optimization.

const QGraphicsView__MinimalViewportUpdate QGraphicsView__ViewportUpdateMode = 1

QGraphicsView will determine the minimal viewport region that requires a redraw, minimizing the time spent drawing by avoiding a redraw of areas that have not changed. This is QGraphicsView's default mode. Although this approach provides the best performance in general, if there are many small visible changes on the scene, QGraphicsView might end up spending more time finding the minimal approach than it will spend drawing.

const QGraphicsView__NoViewportUpdate QGraphicsView__ViewportUpdateMode = 3

QGraphicsView will never update its viewport when the scene changes; the user is expected to control all updates. This mode disables all (potentially slow) item visibility testing in QGraphicsView, and is suitable for scenes that either require a fixed frame rate, or where the viewport is otherwise updated externally.

const QGraphicsView__SmartViewportUpdate QGraphicsView__ViewportUpdateMode = 2

QGraphicsView will attempt to find an optimal update mode by analyzing the areas that require a redraw.

type QGraphicsWidget

type QGraphicsWidget struct {
	*QGraphicsLayoutItem
}

func NewQGraphicsWidget

func NewQGraphicsWidget(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF, wFlags int) *QGraphicsWidget

Constructs a QGraphicsWidget instance. The optional parent argument is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor. The optional wFlags argument specifies the widget's window flags (e.g., whether the widget should be a window, a tool, a popup, etc).

func NewQGraphicsWidgetFromPointer

func NewQGraphicsWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsWidget

func NewQGraphicsWidget__

func NewQGraphicsWidget__() *QGraphicsWidget

Constructs a QGraphicsWidget instance. The optional parent argument is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor. The optional wFlags argument specifies the widget's window flags (e.g., whether the widget should be a window, a tool, a popup, etc).

func NewQGraphicsWidget__1

func NewQGraphicsWidget__1(parent QGraphicsItem_ITF) *QGraphicsWidget

Constructs a QGraphicsWidget instance. The optional parent argument is passed to QGraphicsItem's constructor. The optional wFlags argument specifies the widget's window flags (e.g., whether the widget should be a window, a tool, a popup, etc).

func (*QGraphicsWidget) AddAction

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) AddAction(action QAction_ITF)

Appends the action action to this widget's list of actions.

All QGraphicsWidgets have a list of QActions, however they can be represented graphically in many different ways. The default use of the QAction list (as returned by actions()) is to create a context QMenu.

A QGraphicsWidget should only have one of each action and adding an action it already has will not cause the same action to be in the widget twice.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also removeAction(), insertAction(), actions(), and QWidget::addAction().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) AdjustSize

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) AdjustSize()

Adjusts the size of the widget to its effective preferred size hint.

This function is called implicitly when the item is shown for the first time.

See also effectiveSizeHint() and Qt::MinimumSize.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) AutoFillBackground

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) AutoFillBackground() bool

func (*QGraphicsWidget) BoundingRect

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) BoundingRect() *qtcore.QRectF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) ChangeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented to handle state changes.

The state being changed in this event can be retrieved through event.

Change events include: QEvent::ActivationChange, QEvent::EnabledChange, QEvent::FontChange, QEvent::StyleChange, QEvent::PaletteChange, QEvent::ParentChange, QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange, and QEvent::ContentsRectChange.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Close

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Close() bool

Call this function to close the widget.

Returns true if the widget was closed; otherwise returns false. This slot will first send a QCloseEvent to the widget, which may or may not accept the event. If the event was ignored, nothing happens. If the event was accepted, it will hide() the widget.

If the widget has the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose attribute set it will be deleted.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) CloseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) CloseEvent(event qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget close events. The default implementation accepts the event.

See also close() and QCloseEvent.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Event

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

Handles the event. QGraphicsWidget handles the following events:

EventUsage

PolishDelivered to the widget some time after it has been shown. GraphicsSceneMoveDelivered to the widget after its local position has changed. GraphicsSceneResizeDelivered to the widget after its size has changed. ShowDelivered to the widget before it has been shown. HideDelivered to the widget after it has been hidden. PaletteChangeDelivered to the widget after its palette has changed. FontChangeDelivered to the widget after its font has changed. EnabledChangeDelivered to the widget after its enabled state has changed. StyleChangeDelivered to the widget after its style has changed. LayoutDirectionChangeDelivered to the widget after its layout direction has changed. ContentsRectChangeDelivered to the widget after its contents margins/ contents rect has changed.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) FocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusInEvent().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget; returns false otherwise. If next is true, this function searches forward; if next is false, it searches backward.

Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function to provide special focus handling for your widget and its subwidgets. For example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its current active link forward or backward, and call the base implementation only when it reaches the last or first link on the page.

Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets, but only the window that contains the child widgets decides where to redirect focus. By reimplementing this function for an object, you gain control of focus traversal for all child widgets.

See also focusPolicy().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::focusOutEvent().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) FocusPolicy

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) FocusPolicy() int

func (*QGraphicsWidget) FocusWidget

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) FocusWidget() *QGraphicsWidget

If this widget, a child or descendant of this widget currently has input focus, this function will return a pointer to that widget. If no descendant widget has input focus, 0 is returned.

See also QGraphicsItem::focusItem() and QWidget::focusWidget().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Font

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GeometryChanged

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GeometryChanged()

This signal gets emitted whenever the geometry is changed in setGeometry().

Note: Notifier signal for property geometry. Notifier signal for property size.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GetContentsMargins

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GetContentsMargins(left unsafe.Pointer, top unsafe.Pointer, right unsafe.Pointer, bottom unsafe.Pointer)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::getContentsMargins().

Gets the widget's contents margins. The margins are stored in left, top, right and bottom, as pointers to qreals. Each argument can be omitted by passing 0.

See also setContentsMargins().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GetWindowFrameMargins

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GetWindowFrameMargins(left unsafe.Pointer, top unsafe.Pointer, right unsafe.Pointer, bottom unsafe.Pointer)

Gets the widget's window frame margins. The margins are stored in left, top, right and bottom as pointers to qreals. Each argument can be omitted by passing 0.

See also setWindowFrameMargins() and windowFrameRect().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GrabKeyboardEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GrabKeyboardEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::GrabKeyboard events.

See also grabKeyboard() and grabMouse().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GrabMouseEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::GrabMouse events.

See also grabMouse() and grabKeyboard().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GrabShortcut

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GrabShortcut(sequence qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF, context int) int

Adds a shortcut to Qt's shortcut system that watches for the given key sequence in the given context. If the context is Qt::ApplicationShortcut, the shortcut applies to the application as a whole. Otherwise, it is either local to this widget, Qt::WidgetShortcut, or to the window itself, Qt::WindowShortcut. For widgets that are not part of a window (i.e., top-level widgets and their children), Qt::WindowShortcut shortcuts apply to the scene.

If the same key sequence has been grabbed by several widgets, when the key sequence occurs a QEvent::Shortcut event is sent to all the widgets to which it applies in a non-deterministic order, but with the “ambiguous” flag set to true.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function; instead create QActions with the shortcut key sequences you require (if you also want equivalent menu options and toolbar buttons), or create QShortcuts if you just need key sequences. Both QAction and QShortcut handle all the event filtering for you, and provide signals which are triggered when the user triggers the key sequence, so are much easier to use than this low-level function.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also releaseShortcut(), setShortcutEnabled(), and QWidget::grabShortcut().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) GrabShortcut__

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) GrabShortcut__(sequence qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF) int

Adds a shortcut to Qt's shortcut system that watches for the given key sequence in the given context. If the context is Qt::ApplicationShortcut, the shortcut applies to the application as a whole. Otherwise, it is either local to this widget, Qt::WidgetShortcut, or to the window itself, Qt::WindowShortcut. For widgets that are not part of a window (i.e., top-level widgets and their children), Qt::WindowShortcut shortcuts apply to the scene.

If the same key sequence has been grabbed by several widgets, when the key sequence occurs a QEvent::Shortcut event is sent to all the widgets to which it applies in a non-deterministic order, but with the “ambiguous” flag set to true.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function; instead create QActions with the shortcut key sequences you require (if you also want equivalent menu options and toolbar buttons), or create QShortcuts if you just need key sequences. Both QAction and QShortcut handle all the event filtering for you, and provide signals which are triggered when the user triggers the key sequence, so are much easier to use than this low-level function.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also releaseShortcut(), setShortcutEnabled(), and QWidget::grabShortcut().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) HideEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) HideEvent(event qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for Hide events, is delivered after the widget has been hidden, for example, setVisible(false) has been called for the widget or one of its ancestors when the widget was previously shown.

You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget is hidden. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.

See also showEvent(), QWidget::hideEvent(), and ItemVisibleChange.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) HoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) HoverLeaveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverLeaveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) HoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) HoverMoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::hoverMoveEvent().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritCloseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritGrabKeyboardEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritGrabKeyboardEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void grabKeyboardEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritGrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritGrabMouseEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void grabMouseEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritHideEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritHoverLeaveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritHoverLeaveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverLeaveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritHoverMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritHoverMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent))

void hoverMoveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOption))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOption *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritItemChange

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritItemChange(f func(change int, value *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant itemChange(enum QGraphicsItem::GraphicsItemChange, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritMoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritMoveEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent))

void moveEvent(class QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritPolishEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritPolishEvent(f func())

void polishEvent()

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritPropertyChange

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritPropertyChange(f func(propertyName string, value *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant propertyChange(const class QString &, const class QVariant &)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritSceneEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritSceneEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool sceneEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritShowEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritSizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritSizeHint(f func(which int, constraint *qtcore.QSizeF) unsafe.Pointer)

QSizeF sizeHint(Qt::SizeHint, const class QSizeF &)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritUngrabKeyboardEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritUngrabKeyboardEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void ungrabKeyboardEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritUngrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritUngrabMouseEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void ungrabMouseEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritUpdateGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritUpdateGeometry(f func())

void updateGeometry()

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritWindowFrameEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritWindowFrameEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool windowFrameEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InheritWindowFrameSectionAt

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InheritWindowFrameSectionAt(f func(pos *qtcore.QPointF) int)

Qt::WindowFrameSection windowFrameSectionAt(const class QPointF &)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InitStyleOption

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOption_ITF)

Populates a style option object for this widget based on its current state, and stores the output in option. The default implementation populates option with the following properties.

Style Option PropertyValue

state & QStyle::State_EnabledCorresponds to QGraphicsItem::isEnabled(). state & QStyle::State_HasFocusCorresponds to QGraphicsItem::hasFocus(). state & QStyle::State_MouseOverCorresponds to QGraphicsItem::isUnderMouse(). directionCorresponds to QGraphicsWidget::layoutDirection(). rectCorresponds to QGraphicsWidget::rect().toRect(). paletteCorresponds to QGraphicsWidget::palette(). fontMetricsCorresponds to QFontMetrics(QGraphicsWidget::font()).

Subclasses of QGraphicsWidget should call the base implementation, and then test the type of option using qstyleoption_cast<>() or test QStyleOption::Type before storing widget-specific options.

For example:

void MyGroupBoxWidget::initStyleOption(QStyleOption *option) const
{
    QGraphicsWidget::initStyleOption(option);
    if (QStyleOptionGroupBox *box = qstyleoption_cast<QStyleOptionGroupBox *>(option)) {
        // Add group box specific state.
        box->flat = isFlat();
        ...
    }
}

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) InsertAction

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) InsertAction(before QAction_ITF, action QAction_ITF)

Inserts the action action to this widget's list of actions, before the action before. It appends the action if before is 0 or before is not a valid action for this widget.

A QGraphicsWidget should only have one of each action.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also removeAction(), addAction(), QMenu, actions(), and QWidget::insertActions().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) IsActiveWindow

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) IsActiveWindow() bool

Returns true if this widget's window is in the active window, or if the widget does not have a window but is in an active scene (i.e., a scene that currently has focus).

The active window is the window that either contains a child widget that currently has input focus, or that itself has input focus.

See also QGraphicsScene::activeWindow(), QGraphicsScene::setActiveWindow(), and isActive().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) ItemChange

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) ItemChange(change int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::itemChange().

QGraphicsWidget uses the base implementation of this function to catch and deliver events related to state changes in the item. Because of this, it is very important that subclasses call the base implementation.

change specifies the type of change, and value is the new value.

For example, QGraphicsWidget uses ItemVisibleChange to deliver Show and Hide events, ItemPositionHasChanged to deliver Move events, and ItemParentChange both to deliver ParentChange events, and for managing the focus chain.

QGraphicsWidget enables the ItemSendsGeometryChanges flag by default in order to track position changes.

See also QGraphicsItem::itemChange().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Layout

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Layout() *QGraphicsLayout

Returns this widget's layout, or 0 if no layout is currently managing this widget.

Note: Getter function for property layout.

See also setLayout().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) LayoutChanged

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) LayoutChanged()

func (*QGraphicsWidget) LayoutDirection

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) LayoutDirection() int

func (*QGraphicsWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGraphicsWidget) MoveEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) MoveEvent(event QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for GraphicsSceneMove events, is delivered after the widget has moved (e.g., its local position has changed).

This event is only delivered when the item is moved locally. Calling setTransform() or moving any of the item's ancestors does not affect the item's local position.

You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget has moved. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.

See also ItemPositionChange and ItemPositionHasChanged.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QGraphicsWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGraphicsWidget

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Paint

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) PaintWindowFrame

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) PaintWindowFrame(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

This virtual function is called by QGraphicsScene to draw the window frame for windows using painter, option, and widget, in local coordinates. The base implementation uses the current style to render the frame and title bar.

You can reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsWidget to provide custom rendering of the widget's window frame.

See also QGraphicsItem::paint().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) PaintWindowFrame__

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) PaintWindowFrame__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF)

This virtual function is called by QGraphicsScene to draw the window frame for windows using painter, option, and widget, in local coordinates. The base implementation uses the current style to render the frame and title bar.

You can reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsWidget to provide custom rendering of the widget's window frame.

See also QGraphicsItem::paint().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Paint__

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Paint__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF)

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::paint().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Palette

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Palette() *qtgui.QPalette

func (*QGraphicsWidget) PolishEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) PolishEvent()

This event is delivered to the item by the scene at some point after it has been constructed, but before it is shown or otherwise accessed through the scene. You can use this event handler to do last-minute initializations of the widget which require the item to be fully constructed.

The base implementation does nothing.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) PropertyChange

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) PropertyChange(propertyName string, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QGraphicsWidget) QGraphicsWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QGraphicsWidget) QGraphicsWidget_PTR() *QGraphicsWidget

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Rect

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Rect() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the item's local rect as a QRectF. This function is equivalent to QRectF(QPointF(), size()).

See also setGeometry() and resize().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) ReleaseShortcut

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) ReleaseShortcut(id int)

Removes the shortcut with the given id from Qt's shortcut system. The widget will no longer receive QEvent::Shortcut events for the shortcut's key sequence (unless it has other shortcuts with the same key sequence).

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system removes shortcuts automatically when their parent widget is destroyed. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function. Note also that this is an expensive operation.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also grabShortcut(), setShortcutEnabled(), and QWidget::releaseShortcut().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) RemoveAction

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) RemoveAction(action QAction_ITF)

Removes the action action from this widget's list of actions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also insertAction(), actions(), insertAction(), and QWidget::removeAction().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Resize

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Resize(size qtcore.QSizeF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) ResizeEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) ResizeEvent(event QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for GraphicsSceneResize events, is delivered after the widget has been resized (i.e., its local size has changed). event contains both the old and the new size.

This event is only delivered when the widget is resized locally; calling setTransform() on the widget or any of its ancestors or view, does not affect the widget's local size.

You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget has been resized. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.

See also geometry() and setGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Resize_1

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Resize_1(w float64, h float64)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SceneEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SceneEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent().

QGraphicsWidget's implementation of sceneEvent() simply passes event to QGraphicsWidget::event(). You can handle all events for your widget in event() or in any of the convenience functions; you should not have to reimplement this function in a subclass of QGraphicsWidget.

See also QGraphicsItem::sceneEvent().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetAttribute

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetAttribute(attribute int, on bool)

If on is true, this function enables attribute; otherwise attribute is disabled.

See the class documentation for QGraphicsWidget for a complete list of which attributes are supported, and what they are for.

See also testAttribute() and QWidget::setAttribute().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetAttribute__

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetAttribute__(attribute int)

If on is true, this function enables attribute; otherwise attribute is disabled.

See the class documentation for QGraphicsWidget for a complete list of which attributes are supported, and what they are for.

See also testAttribute() and QWidget::setAttribute().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetAutoFillBackground

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetAutoFillBackground(enabled bool)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetContentsMargins

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetContentsMargins(left float64, top float64, right float64, bottom float64)

Sets the widget's contents margins to left, top, right and bottom.

Contents margins are used by the assigned layout to define the placement of subwidgets and layouts. Margins are particularly useful for widgets that constrain subwidgets to only a section of its own geometry. For example, a group box with a layout will place subwidgets inside its frame, but below the title.

Changing a widget's contents margins will always trigger an update(), and any assigned layout will be activated automatically. The widget will then receive a ContentsRectChange event.

See also getContentsMargins() and setGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetFocusPolicy

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetFocusPolicy(policy int)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetFont

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetGeometry_1

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetGeometry_1(x float64, y float64, w float64, h float64)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetLayout

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetLayout(layout QGraphicsLayout_ITF)

Sets the layout for this widget to layout. Any existing layout manager is deleted before the new layout is assigned. If layout is 0, the widget is left without a layout. Existing subwidgets' geometries will remain unaffected.

All widgets that are currently managed by layout or all of its sublayouts, are automatically reparented to this item. The layout is then invalidated, and the child widget geometries are adjusted according to this item's geometry() and contentsMargins(). Children who are not explicitly managed by layout remain unaffected by the layout after it has been assigned to this widget.

QGraphicsWidget takes ownership of layout.

Note: Setter function for property layout.

See also layout(), QGraphicsLinearLayout::addItem(), and QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetLayoutDirection

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetLayoutDirection(direction int)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetPalette

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetPalette(palette qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat(id int, enabled bool)

If enabled is true, auto repeat of the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also grabShortcut(), releaseShortcut(), and QWidget::setShortcutAutoRepeat().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat__

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat__(id int)

If enabled is true, auto repeat of the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also grabShortcut(), releaseShortcut(), and QWidget::setShortcutAutoRepeat().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutEnabled

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutEnabled(id int, enabled bool)

If enabled is true, the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise the shortcut is disabled.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system enables/disables shortcuts automatically as widgets become hidden/visible and gain or lose focus. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also grabShortcut(), releaseShortcut(), and QWidget::setShortcutEnabled().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutEnabled__

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetShortcutEnabled__(id int)

If enabled is true, the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise the shortcut is disabled.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system enables/disables shortcuts automatically as widgets become hidden/visible and gain or lose focus. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also grabShortcut(), releaseShortcut(), and QWidget::setShortcutEnabled().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetStyle

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetStyle(style QStyle_ITF)

Sets the widget's style to style. QGraphicsWidget does not take ownership of style.

If no style is assigned, or style is 0, the widget will use QGraphicsScene::style() (if this has been set). Otherwise the widget will use QApplication::style().

This function sets the Qt::WA_SetStyle attribute if style is not 0; otherwise it clears the attribute.

See also style().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetTabOrder

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetTabOrder(first QGraphicsWidget_ITF, second QGraphicsWidget_ITF)

Moves the second widget around the ring of focus widgets so that keyboard focus moves from the first widget to the second widget when the Tab key is pressed.

Note that since the tab order of the second widget is changed, you should order a chain like this:

setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b
setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c
setTabOrder(c, d); // a to b to c to d

not like this:

// WRONG
setTabOrder(c, d); // c to d
setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b AND c to d
setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c, but not c to d

If first is 0, this indicates that second should be the first widget to receive input focus should the scene gain Tab focus (i.e., the user hits Tab so that focus passes into the scene). If second is 0, this indicates that first should be the first widget to gain focus if the scene gained BackTab focus.

By default, tab order is defined implicitly using widget creation order.

See also focusPolicy and Keyboard Focus in Widgets.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetWindowFlags

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetWindowFlags(wFlags int)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetWindowFrameMargins

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetWindowFrameMargins(left float64, top float64, right float64, bottom float64)

Sets the widget's window frame margins to left, top, right and bottom. The default frame margins are provided by the style, and they depend on the current window flags.

If you would like to draw your own window decoration, you can set your own frame margins to override the default margins.

See also unsetWindowFrameMargins(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and windowFrameRect().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SetWindowTitle

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SetWindowTitle(title string)

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Shape

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Shape() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::shape().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) ShowEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) ShowEvent(event qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for Show events, is delivered before the widget has been shown, for example, setVisible(true) has been called for the widget or one of its ancestors when the widget was previously hidden.

You can reimplement this event handler to detect when your widget is shown. Calling QEvent::accept() or QEvent::ignore() on event has no effect.

See also hideEvent(), QWidget::showEvent(), and ItemVisibleChange.

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Size

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Size() *qtcore.QSizeF

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SizeHint

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SizeHint(which int, constraint qtcore.QSizeF_ITF) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) SizeHint__

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) SizeHint__(which int) *qtcore.QSizeF

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Style

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Style() *QStyle

Returns a pointer to the widget's style. If this widget does not have any explicitly assigned style, the scene's style is returned instead. In turn, if the scene does not have any assigned style, this function returns QApplication::style().

See also setStyle().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) TestAttribute

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) TestAttribute(attribute int) bool

Returns true if attribute is enabled for this widget; otherwise, returns false.

See also setAttribute().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) Type

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) Type() int

Reimplemented from QGraphicsItem::type().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) UngrabKeyboardEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) UngrabKeyboardEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::UngrabKeyboard events.

See also ungrabKeyboard() and ungrabMouse().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) UngrabMouseEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) UngrabMouseEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive notifications for QEvent::UngrabMouse events.

See also ungrabMouse() and ungrabKeyboard().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) UnsetLayoutDirection

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) UnsetLayoutDirection()

func (*QGraphicsWidget) UnsetWindowFrameMargins

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) UnsetWindowFrameMargins()

Resets the window frame margins to the default value, provided by the style.

See also setWindowFrameMargins(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and windowFrameRect().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) UpdateGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) UpdateGeometry()

Reimplemented from QGraphicsLayoutItem::updateGeometry().

If this widget is currently managed by a layout, this function notifies the layout that the widget's size hints have changed and the layout may need to resize and reposition the widget accordingly.

Call this function if the widget's sizeHint() has changed.

See also QGraphicsLayout::invalidate().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) WindowFlags

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) WindowFlags() int

func (*QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameEvent

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

This event handler, for event, receives events for the window frame if this widget is a window. Its base implementation provides support for default window frame interaction such as moving, resizing, etc.

You can reimplement this handler in a subclass of QGraphicsWidget to provide your own custom window frame interaction support.

Returns true if event has been recognized and processed; otherwise, returns false.

See also event().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameGeometry

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameGeometry() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the widget's geometry in parent coordinates including any window frame.

See also windowFrameRect(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and setWindowFrameMargins().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameRect

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameRect() *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the widget's local rect including any window frame.

See also windowFrameGeometry(), getWindowFrameMargins(), and setWindowFrameMargins().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameSectionAt

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) WindowFrameSectionAt(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF) int

Returns the window frame section at position pos, or Qt::NoSection if there is no window frame section at this position.

This function is used in QGraphicsWidget's base implementation for window frame interaction.

You can reimplement this function if you want to customize how a window can be interactively moved or resized. For instance, if you only want to allow a window to be resized by the bottom right corner, you can reimplement this function to return Qt::NoSection for all sections except Qt::BottomRightSection.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also windowFrameEvent(), paintWindowFrame(), and windowFrameGeometry().

func (*QGraphicsWidget) WindowTitle

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) WindowTitle() string

func (*QGraphicsWidget) WindowType

func (this *QGraphicsWidget) WindowType() int

Returns the widgets window type.

See also windowFlags(), isWindow(), and isPanel().

type QGraphicsWidget_ITF

type QGraphicsWidget_ITF interface {
	QGraphicsLayoutItem_ITF
	QGraphicsWidget_PTR() *QGraphicsWidget
}

type QGraphicsWidget__

type QGraphicsWidget__ = int
const QGraphicsWidget__Type QGraphicsWidget__ = 11

type QGridLayout

type QGridLayout struct {
	*QLayout
}

func NewQGridLayout

func NewQGridLayout(parent QWidget_ITF) *QGridLayout

Constructs a new QGridLayout with parent widget, parent. The layout has one row and one column initially, and will expand when new items are inserted.

func NewQGridLayoutFromPointer

func NewQGridLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGridLayout

func NewQGridLayout_1

func NewQGridLayout_1() *QGridLayout

Constructs a new QGridLayout with parent widget, parent. The layout has one row and one column initially, and will expand when new items are inserted.

func (*QGridLayout) AddItem

func (this *QGridLayout) AddItem(item QLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int, arg5 int)

Adds item at position row, column, spanning rowSpan rows and columnSpan columns, and aligns it according to alignment. If rowSpan and/or columnSpan is -1, then the item will extend to the bottom and/or right edge, respectively. The layout takes ownership of the item.

Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use addLayout() or addWidget() instead.

func (*QGridLayout) AddItem_1

func (this *QGridLayout) AddItem_1(arg0 QLayoutItem_ITF)

Adds item at position row, column, spanning rowSpan rows and columnSpan columns, and aligns it according to alignment. If rowSpan and/or columnSpan is -1, then the item will extend to the bottom and/or right edge, respectively. The layout takes ownership of the item.

Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use addLayout() or addWidget() instead.

func (*QGridLayout) AddItem__

func (this *QGridLayout) AddItem__(item QLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int)

Adds item at position row, column, spanning rowSpan rows and columnSpan columns, and aligns it according to alignment. If rowSpan and/or columnSpan is -1, then the item will extend to the bottom and/or right edge, respectively. The layout takes ownership of the item.

Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use addLayout() or addWidget() instead.

func (*QGridLayout) AddItem__1

func (this *QGridLayout) AddItem__1(item QLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int)

Adds item at position row, column, spanning rowSpan rows and columnSpan columns, and aligns it according to alignment. If rowSpan and/or columnSpan is -1, then the item will extend to the bottom and/or right edge, respectively. The layout takes ownership of the item.

Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use addLayout() or addWidget() instead.

func (*QGridLayout) AddItem__2

func (this *QGridLayout) AddItem__2(item QLayoutItem_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int)

Adds item at position row, column, spanning rowSpan rows and columnSpan columns, and aligns it according to alignment. If rowSpan and/or columnSpan is -1, then the item will extend to the bottom and/or right edge, respectively. The layout takes ownership of the item.

Warning: Do not use this function to add child layouts or child widget items. Use addLayout() or addWidget() instead.

func (*QGridLayout) AddLayout

func (this *QGridLayout) AddLayout(arg0 QLayout_ITF, row int, column int, arg3 int)

Places the layout at position (row, column) in the grid. The top-left position is (0, 0).

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

A non-zero alignment indicates that the layout should not grow to fill the available space but should be sized according to sizeHint().

layout becomes a child of the grid layout.

func (*QGridLayout) AddLayout_1

func (this *QGridLayout) AddLayout_1(arg0 QLayout_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int, arg5 int)

Places the layout at position (row, column) in the grid. The top-left position is (0, 0).

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

A non-zero alignment indicates that the layout should not grow to fill the available space but should be sized according to sizeHint().

layout becomes a child of the grid layout.

func (*QGridLayout) AddLayout_1_

func (this *QGridLayout) AddLayout_1_(arg0 QLayout_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int)

Places the layout at position (row, column) in the grid. The top-left position is (0, 0).

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

A non-zero alignment indicates that the layout should not grow to fill the available space but should be sized according to sizeHint().

layout becomes a child of the grid layout.

func (*QGridLayout) AddLayout__

func (this *QGridLayout) AddLayout__(arg0 QLayout_ITF, row int, column int)

Places the layout at position (row, column) in the grid. The top-left position is (0, 0).

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

A non-zero alignment indicates that the layout should not grow to fill the available space but should be sized according to sizeHint().

layout becomes a child of the grid layout.

func (*QGridLayout) AddWidget

func (this *QGridLayout) AddWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

func (*QGridLayout) AddWidget_1

func (this *QGridLayout) AddWidget_1(arg0 QWidget_ITF, row int, column int, arg3 int)

Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

func (*QGridLayout) AddWidget_1_

func (this *QGridLayout) AddWidget_1_(arg0 QWidget_ITF, row int, column int)

Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

func (*QGridLayout) AddWidget_2

func (this *QGridLayout) AddWidget_2(arg0 QWidget_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int, arg5 int)

Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

func (*QGridLayout) AddWidget_2_

func (this *QGridLayout) AddWidget_2_(arg0 QWidget_ITF, row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int)

Adds the given widget to the cell grid at row, column. The top-left position is (0, 0) by default.

The alignment is specified by alignment. The default alignment is 0, which means that the widget fills the entire cell.

func (*QGridLayout) CellRect

func (this *QGridLayout) CellRect(row int, column int) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of the cell with row row and column column in the grid. Returns an invalid rectangle if row or column is outside the grid.

Warning: in the current version of Qt this function does not return valid results until setGeometry() has been called, i.e. after the parentWidget() is visible.

func (*QGridLayout) ColumnCount

func (this *QGridLayout) ColumnCount() int

Returns the number of columns in this grid.

func (*QGridLayout) ColumnMinimumWidth

func (this *QGridLayout) ColumnMinimumWidth(column int) int

Returns the column spacing for column column.

See also setColumnMinimumWidth().

func (*QGridLayout) ColumnStretch

func (this *QGridLayout) ColumnStretch(column int) int

Returns the stretch factor for column column.

See also setColumnStretch().

func (*QGridLayout) Count

func (this *QGridLayout) Count() int

Reimplemented from QLayout::count().

func (*QGridLayout) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QGridLayout) ExpandingDirections() int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().

func (*QGridLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QGridLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGridLayout) GetItemPosition

func (this *QGridLayout) GetItemPosition(idx int, row unsafe.Pointer, column unsafe.Pointer, rowSpan unsafe.Pointer, columnSpan unsafe.Pointer)

Returns the position information of the item with the given index.

The variables passed as row and column are updated with the position of the item in the layout, and the rowSpan and columnSpan variables are updated with the vertical and horizontal spans of the item.

See also itemAtPosition() and itemAt().

func (*QGridLayout) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QGridLayout) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QGridLayout) HeightForWidth

func (this *QGridLayout) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().

func (*QGridLayout) HorizontalSpacing

func (this *QGridLayout) HorizontalSpacing() int

func (*QGridLayout) InheritAddItem

func (this *QGridLayout) InheritAddItem(f func(arg0 *QLayoutItem))

void addItem(class QLayoutItem *)

func (*QGridLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QGridLayout) Invalidate()

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().

func (*QGridLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QGridLayout) ItemAt(index int) *QLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QLayout::itemAt().

func (*QGridLayout) ItemAtPosition

func (this *QGridLayout) ItemAtPosition(row int, column int) *QLayoutItem

Returns the layout item that occupies cell (row, column), or 0 if the cell is empty.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also getItemPosition() and indexOf().

func (*QGridLayout) MaximumSize

func (this *QGridLayout) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().

func (*QGridLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QGridLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGridLayout) MinimumHeightForWidth

func (this *QGridLayout) MinimumHeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumHeightForWidth().

func (*QGridLayout) MinimumSize

func (this *QGridLayout) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().

func (*QGridLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QGridLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGridLayout

func (*QGridLayout) OriginCorner

func (this *QGridLayout) OriginCorner() int

Returns the corner that's used for the grid's origin, i.e. for position (0, 0).

See also setOriginCorner().

func (*QGridLayout) QGridLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QGridLayout) QGridLayout_PTR() *QGridLayout

func (*QGridLayout) RowCount

func (this *QGridLayout) RowCount() int

Returns the number of rows in this grid.

func (*QGridLayout) RowMinimumHeight

func (this *QGridLayout) RowMinimumHeight(row int) int

Returns the minimum width set for row row.

See also setRowMinimumHeight().

func (*QGridLayout) RowStretch

func (this *QGridLayout) RowStretch(row int) int

Returns the stretch factor for row row.

See also setRowStretch().

func (*QGridLayout) SetColumnMinimumWidth

func (this *QGridLayout) SetColumnMinimumWidth(column int, minSize int)

Sets the minimum width of column column to minSize pixels.

See also columnMinimumWidth() and setRowMinimumHeight().

func (*QGridLayout) SetColumnStretch

func (this *QGridLayout) SetColumnStretch(column int, stretch int)

Sets the stretch factor of column column to stretch. The first column is number 0.

The stretch factor is relative to the other columns in this grid. Columns with a higher stretch factor take more of the available space.

The default stretch factor is 0. If the stretch factor is 0 and no other column in this table can grow at all, the column may still grow.

An alternative approach is to add spacing using addItem() with a QSpacerItem.

See also columnStretch() and setRowStretch().

func (*QGridLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QGridLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGridLayout) SetDefaultPositioning

func (this *QGridLayout) SetDefaultPositioning(n int, orient int)

func (*QGridLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QGridLayout) SetGeometry(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().

func (*QGridLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing

func (this *QGridLayout) SetHorizontalSpacing(spacing int)

func (*QGridLayout) SetOriginCorner

func (this *QGridLayout) SetOriginCorner(arg0 int)

Sets the grid's origin corner, i.e. position (0, 0), to corner.

See also originCorner().

func (*QGridLayout) SetRowMinimumHeight

func (this *QGridLayout) SetRowMinimumHeight(row int, minSize int)

Sets the minimum height of row row to minSize pixels.

See also rowMinimumHeight() and setColumnMinimumWidth().

func (*QGridLayout) SetRowStretch

func (this *QGridLayout) SetRowStretch(row int, stretch int)

Sets the stretch factor of row row to stretch. The first row is number 0.

The stretch factor is relative to the other rows in this grid. Rows with a higher stretch factor take more of the available space.

The default stretch factor is 0. If the stretch factor is 0 and no other row in this table can grow at all, the row may still grow.

See also rowStretch(), setRowMinimumHeight(), and setColumnStretch().

func (*QGridLayout) SetSpacing

func (this *QGridLayout) SetSpacing(spacing int)

This function sets both the vertical and horizontal spacing to spacing.

See also spacing(), setVerticalSpacing(), and setHorizontalSpacing().

func (*QGridLayout) SetVerticalSpacing

func (this *QGridLayout) SetVerticalSpacing(spacing int)

func (*QGridLayout) SizeHint

func (this *QGridLayout) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QGridLayout) Spacing

func (this *QGridLayout) Spacing() int

If the vertical spacing is equal to the horizontal spacing, this function returns that value; otherwise it return -1.

See also setSpacing(), verticalSpacing(), and horizontalSpacing().

func (*QGridLayout) TakeAt

func (this *QGridLayout) TakeAt(index int) *QLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().

func (*QGridLayout) VerticalSpacing

func (this *QGridLayout) VerticalSpacing() int

type QGridLayout_ITF

type QGridLayout_ITF interface {
	QLayout_ITF
	QGridLayout_PTR() *QGridLayout
}

type QGroupBox

type QGroupBox struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQGroupBox

func NewQGroupBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QGroupBox

Constructs a group box widget with the given parent but with no title.

func NewQGroupBoxFromPointer

func NewQGroupBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGroupBox

func NewQGroupBox_1

func NewQGroupBox_1(title string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QGroupBox

Constructs a group box widget with the given parent but with no title.

func NewQGroupBox_1_

func NewQGroupBox_1_(title string) *QGroupBox

Constructs a group box widget with the given parent but with no title.

func NewQGroupBox__

func NewQGroupBox__() *QGroupBox

Constructs a group box widget with the given parent but with no title.

func (*QGroupBox) Alignment

func (this *QGroupBox) Alignment() int

func (*QGroupBox) ChangeEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) ChildEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) ChildEvent(event qtcore.QChildEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) Clicked

func (this *QGroupBox) Clicked(checked bool)

This signal is emitted when the check box is activated (i.e., pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), or when the shortcut key is typed. Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setChecked().

If the check box is checked, checked is true; it is false if the check box is unchecked.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also checkable, toggled(), and checked.

func (*QGroupBox) Clicked__

func (this *QGroupBox) Clicked__()

This signal is emitted when the check box is activated (i.e., pressed down then released while the mouse cursor is inside the button), or when the shortcut key is typed. Notably, this signal is not emitted if you call setChecked().

If the check box is checked, checked is true; it is false if the check box is unchecked.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also checkable, toggled(), and checked.

func (*QGroupBox) Event

func (this *QGroupBox) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QGroupBox) FocusInEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) GetCthis

func (this *QGroupBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QGroupBox) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritChildEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritChildEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QChildEvent))

void childEvent(class QChildEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionGroupBox))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionGroupBox *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QGroupBox) InitStyleOption

func (this *QGroupBox) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionGroupBox_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QGroupBox. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionGroupBox, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QGroupBox) IsCheckable

func (this *QGroupBox) IsCheckable() bool

func (*QGroupBox) IsChecked

func (this *QGroupBox) IsChecked() bool

func (*QGroupBox) IsFlat

func (this *QGroupBox) IsFlat() bool

func (*QGroupBox) MetaObject

func (this *QGroupBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QGroupBox) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QGroupBox) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QGroupBox) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) MouseMoveEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) MousePressEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) MouseReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QGroupBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QGroupBox

func (*QGroupBox) PaintEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) QGroupBox_PTR

func (ptr *QGroupBox) QGroupBox_PTR() *QGroupBox

func (*QGroupBox) ResizeEvent

func (this *QGroupBox) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QGroupBox) SetAlignment

func (this *QGroupBox) SetAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QGroupBox) SetCheckable

func (this *QGroupBox) SetCheckable(checkable bool)

func (*QGroupBox) SetChecked

func (this *QGroupBox) SetChecked(checked bool)

func (*QGroupBox) SetCthis

func (this *QGroupBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QGroupBox) SetFlat

func (this *QGroupBox) SetFlat(flat bool)

func (*QGroupBox) SetTitle

func (this *QGroupBox) SetTitle(title string)

func (*QGroupBox) Title

func (this *QGroupBox) Title() string

func (*QGroupBox) Toggled

func (this *QGroupBox) Toggled(arg0 bool)

If the group box is checkable, this signal is emitted when the check box is toggled. on is true if the check box is checked; otherwise, it is false.

Note: Notifier signal for property checked.

See also checkable.

type QGroupBox_ITF

type QGroupBox_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QGroupBox_PTR() *QGroupBox
}

type QHBoxLayout

type QHBoxLayout struct {
	*QBoxLayout
}

func NewQHBoxLayout

func NewQHBoxLayout() *QHBoxLayout

func NewQHBoxLayoutFromPointer

func NewQHBoxLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QHBoxLayout

func NewQHBoxLayout_1

func NewQHBoxLayout_1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QHBoxLayout

func (*QHBoxLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QHBoxLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QHBoxLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QHBoxLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QHBoxLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QHBoxLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QHBoxLayout

func (*QHBoxLayout) QHBoxLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QHBoxLayout) QHBoxLayout_PTR() *QHBoxLayout

func (*QHBoxLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QHBoxLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QHBoxLayout_ITF

type QHBoxLayout_ITF interface {
	QBoxLayout_ITF
	QHBoxLayout_PTR() *QHBoxLayout
}

type QHeaderView

type QHeaderView struct {
	*QAbstractItemView
}

func NewQHeaderView

func NewQHeaderView(orientation int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QHeaderView

Creates a new generic header with the given orientation and parent.

func NewQHeaderViewFromPointer

func NewQHeaderViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QHeaderView

func NewQHeaderView__

func NewQHeaderView__(orientation int) *QHeaderView

Creates a new generic header with the given orientation and parent.

func (*QHeaderView) CascadingSectionResizes

func (this *QHeaderView) CascadingSectionResizes() bool

func (*QHeaderView) Count

func (this *QHeaderView) Count() int

Returns the number of sections in the header.

See also sectionCountChanged() and length().

func (*QHeaderView) CurrentChanged

func (this *QHeaderView) CurrentChanged(current qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, old qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().

func (*QHeaderView) DefaultAlignment

func (this *QHeaderView) DefaultAlignment() int

func (*QHeaderView) DefaultSectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) DefaultSectionSize() int

func (*QHeaderView) DoItemsLayout

func (this *QHeaderView) DoItemsLayout()

func (*QHeaderView) Event

func (this *QHeaderView) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QHeaderView) GeometriesChanged

func (this *QHeaderView) GeometriesChanged()

This signal is emitted when the header's geometries have changed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QHeaderView) GetCthis

func (this *QHeaderView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QHeaderView) HeaderDataChanged

func (this *QHeaderView) HeaderDataChanged(orientation int, logicalFirst int, logicalLast int)

Updates the changed header sections with the given orientation, from logicalFirst to logicalLast inclusive.

func (*QHeaderView) HiddenSectionCount

func (this *QHeaderView) HiddenSectionCount() int

Returns the number of sections in the header that has been hidden.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setSectionHidden() and isSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) HideSection

func (this *QHeaderView) HideSection(logicalIndex int)

Hides the section specified by logicalIndex.

See also showSection(), isSectionHidden(), hiddenSectionCount(), and setSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) HighlightSections

func (this *QHeaderView) HighlightSections() bool

func (*QHeaderView) HorizontalOffset

func (this *QHeaderView) HorizontalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().

Returns the horizontal offset of the header. This is 0 for vertical headers.

See also offset().

func (*QHeaderView) IndexAt

func (this *QHeaderView) IndexAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

func (*QHeaderView) InheritCurrentChanged

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritCurrentChanged(f func(current *qtcore.QModelIndex, old *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void currentChanged(const class QModelIndex &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritHorizontalOffset

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritHorizontalOffset(f func() int)

int horizontalOffset()

func (*QHeaderView) InheritIndexAt

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritIndexAt(f func(p *qtcore.QPoint) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex indexAt(const class QPoint &)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionHeader))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionHeader *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritInitialize

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritInitialize(f func())

void initialize()

func (*QHeaderView) InheritInitializeSections

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritInitializeSections(f func())

void initializeSections()

func (*QHeaderView) InheritIsIndexHidden

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritIsIndexHidden(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool isIndexHidden(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritMoveCursor

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritMoveCursor(f func(arg0 int, arg1 int) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex moveCursor(enum QAbstractItemView::CursorAction, Qt::KeyboardModifiers)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritPaintSection

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritPaintSection(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRect, logicalIndex int))

void paintSection(class QPainter *, const class QRect &, int)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritResizeSections

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritResizeSections(f func())

void resizeSections()

func (*QHeaderView) InheritRowsInserted

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritRowsInserted(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsInserted(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritScrollTo

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritScrollTo(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex, hint int))

void scrollTo(const class QModelIndex &, enum QAbstractItemView::ScrollHint)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritSectionSizeFromContents

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritSectionSizeFromContents(f func(logicalIndex int) unsafe.Pointer)

QSize sectionSizeFromContents(int)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritSectionsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritSectionsAboutToBeRemoved(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, logicalFirst int, logicalLast int))

void sectionsAboutToBeRemoved(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritSectionsInserted

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritSectionsInserted(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, logicalFirst int, logicalLast int))

void sectionsInserted(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritSetSelection

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritSetSelection(f func(rect *qtcore.QRect, flags int))

void setSelection(const class QRect &, class QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritUpdateGeometries

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritUpdateGeometries(f func())

void updateGeometries()

func (*QHeaderView) InheritUpdateSection

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritUpdateSection(f func(logicalIndex int))

void updateSection(int)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritVerticalOffset

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritVerticalOffset(f func() int)

int verticalOffset()

func (*QHeaderView) InheritViewportEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritViewportEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool viewportEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritVisualRect

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritVisualRect(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) unsafe.Pointer)

QRect visualRect(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QHeaderView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QHeaderView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection(f func(selection *qtcore.QItemSelection) unsafe.Pointer)

QRegion visualRegionForSelection(const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QHeaderView) InitStyleOption

func (this *QHeaderView) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionHeader_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QHeaderView. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionHeader, but do not want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QHeaderView) Initialize

func (this *QHeaderView) Initialize()

func (*QHeaderView) InitializeSections

func (this *QHeaderView) InitializeSections()

func (*QHeaderView) InitializeSections_1

func (this *QHeaderView) InitializeSections_1(start int, end int)

func (*QHeaderView) IsIndexHidden

func (this *QHeaderView) IsIndexHidden(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

func (*QHeaderView) IsSectionHidden

func (this *QHeaderView) IsSectionHidden(logicalIndex int) bool

Returns true if the section specified by logicalIndex is explicitly hidden from the user; otherwise returns false.

See also hideSection(), showSection(), setSectionHidden(), and hiddenSectionCount().

func (*QHeaderView) IsSortIndicatorShown

func (this *QHeaderView) IsSortIndicatorShown() bool

func (*QHeaderView) Length

func (this *QHeaderView) Length() int

Returns the length along the orientation of the header.

See also sizeHint(), setSectionResizeMode(), and offset().

func (*QHeaderView) LogicalIndex

func (this *QHeaderView) LogicalIndex(visualIndex int) int

Returns the logicalIndex for the section at the given visualIndex position, or -1 if visualIndex < 0 or visualIndex >= QHeaderView::count().

Note that the visualIndex is not affected by hidden sections.

See also visualIndex() and sectionPosition().

func (*QHeaderView) LogicalIndexAt

func (this *QHeaderView) LogicalIndexAt(position int) int

Returns the section that covers the given position in the viewport.

See also visualIndexAt() and isSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) LogicalIndexAt_1

func (this *QHeaderView) LogicalIndexAt_1(x int, y int) int

Returns the section that covers the given position in the viewport.

See also visualIndexAt() and isSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) LogicalIndexAt_2

func (this *QHeaderView) LogicalIndexAt_2(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) int

Returns the section that covers the given position in the viewport.

See also visualIndexAt() and isSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) MaximumSectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) MaximumSectionSize() int

func (*QHeaderView) MetaObject

func (this *QHeaderView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QHeaderView) MinimumSectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) MinimumSectionSize() int

func (*QHeaderView) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) MouseDoubleClickEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QHeaderView) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) MouseMoveEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QHeaderView) MousePressEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) MousePressEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QHeaderView) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) MouseReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QHeaderView) MoveCursor

func (this *QHeaderView) MoveCursor(arg0 int, arg1 int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

func (*QHeaderView) MoveSection

func (this *QHeaderView) MoveSection(from int, to int)

Moves the section at visual index from to occupy visual index to.

See also sectionsMoved().

func (*QHeaderView) NewFromPointer

func (*QHeaderView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QHeaderView

func (*QHeaderView) Offset

func (this *QHeaderView) Offset() int

Returns the offset of the header: this is the header's left-most (or top-most for vertical headers) visible pixel.

See also setOffset().

func (*QHeaderView) Orientation

func (this *QHeaderView) Orientation() int

Returns the orientation of the header.

See also Qt::Orientation.

func (*QHeaderView) PaintEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QHeaderView) PaintSection

func (this *QHeaderView) PaintSection(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, logicalIndex int)

Paints the section specified by the given logicalIndex, using the given painter and rect.

Normally, you do not have to call this function.

func (*QHeaderView) QHeaderView_PTR

func (ptr *QHeaderView) QHeaderView_PTR() *QHeaderView

func (*QHeaderView) Reset

func (this *QHeaderView) Reset()

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::reset().

func (*QHeaderView) ResetDefaultSectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) ResetDefaultSectionSize()

func (*QHeaderView) ResizeContentsPrecision

func (this *QHeaderView) ResizeContentsPrecision() int

Returns how precise QHeaderView will calculate on ResizeToContents.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also setResizeContentsPrecision() and setSectionResizeMode().

func (*QHeaderView) ResizeSection

func (this *QHeaderView) ResizeSection(logicalIndex int, size int)

Resizes the section specified by logicalIndex to size measured in pixels. The size parameter must be a value larger or equal to zero. A size equal to zero is however not recommended. In that situation hideSection should be used instead.

See also sectionResized(), resizeMode(), sectionSize(), and hideSection().

func (*QHeaderView) ResizeSections

func (this *QHeaderView) ResizeSections(mode int)

Resizes the sections according to the given mode, ignoring the current resize mode.

See also resizeMode() and sectionResized().

func (*QHeaderView) ResizeSections_1

func (this *QHeaderView) ResizeSections_1()

Resizes the sections according to the given mode, ignoring the current resize mode.

See also resizeMode() and sectionResized().

func (*QHeaderView) RestoreState

func (this *QHeaderView) RestoreState(state qtcore.QByteArray_ITF) bool

Restores the state of this header view. This function returns true if the state was restored; otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also saveState().

func (*QHeaderView) RowsInserted

func (this *QHeaderView) RowsInserted(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

func (*QHeaderView) SaveState

func (this *QHeaderView) SaveState() *qtcore.QByteArray

Saves the current state of this header view.

To restore the saved state, pass the return value to restoreState().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also restoreState().

func (*QHeaderView) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QHeaderView) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

func (*QHeaderView) ScrollTo

func (this *QHeaderView) ScrollTo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, hint int)

func (*QHeaderView) SectionClicked

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionClicked(logicalIndex int)

This signal is emitted when a section is clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.

Note that the sectionPressed signal will also be emitted.

See also setSectionsClickable() and sectionPressed().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionCountChanged

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionCountChanged(oldCount int, newCount int)

This signal is emitted when the number of sections changes, i.e., when sections are added or deleted. The original count is specified by oldCount, and the new count by newCount.

See also count(), length(), and headerDataChanged().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionDoubleClicked

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionDoubleClicked(logicalIndex int)

This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.

See also setSectionsClickable().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionEntered

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionEntered(logicalIndex int)

This signal is emitted when the cursor moves over the section and the left mouse button is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setSectionsClickable() and sectionPressed().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionHandleDoubleClicked

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionHandleDoubleClicked(logicalIndex int)

This signal is emitted when a section is double-clicked. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.

See also setSectionsClickable().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionMoved

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionMoved(logicalIndex int, oldVisualIndex int, newVisualIndex int)

This signal is emitted when a section is moved. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex, the old index by oldVisualIndex, and the new index position by newVisualIndex.

See also moveSection().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionPosition

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionPosition(logicalIndex int) int

Returns the section position of the given logicalIndex, or -1 if the section is hidden. The position is measured in pixels from the first visible item's top-left corner to the top-left corner of the item with logicalIndex. The measurement is along the x-axis for horizontal headers and along the y-axis for vertical headers.

See also sectionViewportPosition().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionPressed

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionPressed(logicalIndex int)

This signal is emitted when a section is pressed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex.

See also setSectionsClickable().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionResizeMode

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionResizeMode(logicalIndex int) int

Returns the resize mode that applies to the section specified by the given logicalIndex.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also setSectionResizeMode().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionResized

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionResized(logicalIndex int, oldSize int, newSize int)

This signal is emitted when a section is resized. The section's logical number is specified by logicalIndex, the old size by oldSize, and the new size by newSize.

See also resizeSection().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionSize(logicalIndex int) int

Returns the width (or height for vertical headers) of the given logicalIndex.

See also length(), setSectionResizeMode(), and defaultSectionSize().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionSizeFromContents

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionSizeFromContents(logicalIndex int) *qtcore.QSize

Returns the size of the contents of the section specified by the given logicalIndex.

See also defaultSectionSize().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionSizeHint

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionSizeHint(logicalIndex int) int

Returns a suitable size hint for the section specified by logicalIndex.

Qt::SizeHintRole

See also sizeHint(), defaultSectionSize(), minimumSectionSize(), and maximumSectionSize().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionViewportPosition

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionViewportPosition(logicalIndex int) int

Returns the section viewport position of the given logicalIndex.

If the section is hidden, the return value is undefined.

See also sectionPosition() and isSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionsAboutToBeRemoved(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, logicalFirst int, logicalLast int)

This slot is called when sections are removed from the parent. logicalFirst and logicalLast signify where the sections were removed.

If only one section is removed, logicalFirst and logicalLast will be the same.

func (*QHeaderView) SectionsClickable

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionsClickable() bool

Returns true if the header is clickable; otherwise returns false. A clickable header could be set up to allow the user to change the representation of the data in the view related to the header.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also setSectionsClickable().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionsHidden

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionsHidden() bool

Returns true if sections in the header has been hidden; otherwise returns false;

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionsInserted

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionsInserted(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, logicalFirst int, logicalLast int)

This slot is called when sections are inserted into the parent. logicalFirst and logicalLast indices signify where the new sections were inserted.

If only one section is inserted, logicalFirst and logicalLast will be the same.

func (*QHeaderView) SectionsMovable

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionsMovable() bool

Returns true if the header can be moved by the user; otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also setSectionsMovable().

func (*QHeaderView) SectionsMoved

func (this *QHeaderView) SectionsMoved() bool

Returns true if sections in the header has been moved; otherwise returns false;

See also moveSection().

func (*QHeaderView) SetCascadingSectionResizes

func (this *QHeaderView) SetCascadingSectionResizes(enable bool)

func (*QHeaderView) SetCthis

func (this *QHeaderView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QHeaderView) SetDefaultAlignment

func (this *QHeaderView) SetDefaultAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QHeaderView) SetDefaultSectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) SetDefaultSectionSize(size int)

func (*QHeaderView) SetHighlightSections

func (this *QHeaderView) SetHighlightSections(highlight bool)

func (*QHeaderView) SetMaximumSectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) SetMaximumSectionSize(size int)

func (*QHeaderView) SetMinimumSectionSize

func (this *QHeaderView) SetMinimumSectionSize(size int)

func (*QHeaderView) SetModel

func (this *QHeaderView) SetModel(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().

func (*QHeaderView) SetOffset

func (this *QHeaderView) SetOffset(offset int)

Sets the header's offset to offset.

See also offset() and length().

func (*QHeaderView) SetOffsetToLastSection

func (this *QHeaderView) SetOffsetToLastSection()

Sets the offset to make the last section visible.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setOffset(), sectionPosition(), and setOffsetToSectionPosition().

func (*QHeaderView) SetOffsetToSectionPosition

func (this *QHeaderView) SetOffsetToSectionPosition(visualIndex int)

Sets the offset to the start of the section at the given visualSectionNumber. visualSectionNumber is the actual visible section when hiddenSections are not considered. That is not always the same as visualIndex().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setOffset() and sectionPosition().

func (*QHeaderView) SetResizeContentsPrecision

func (this *QHeaderView) SetResizeContentsPrecision(precision int)

Sets how precise QHeaderView should calculate the size when ResizeToContents is used. A low value will provide a less accurate but fast auto resize while a higher value will provide a more accurate resize that however can be slow.

The number precision specifies how many sections that should be consider when calculating the preferred size.

The default value is 1000 meaning that a horizontal column with auto-resize will look at maximum 1000 rows on calculating when doing an auto resize.

Special value 0 means that it will look at only the visible area. Special value -1 will imply looking at all elements.

This value is used in QTableView::sizeHintForColumn(), QTableView::sizeHintForRow() and QTreeView::sizeHintForColumn(). Reimplementing these functions can make this function not having an effect.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also resizeContentsPrecision(), setSectionResizeMode(), resizeSections(), QTableView::sizeHintForColumn(), QTableView::sizeHintForRow(), and QTreeView::sizeHintForColumn().

func (*QHeaderView) SetSectionHidden

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSectionHidden(logicalIndex int, hide bool)

If hide is true the section specified by logicalIndex is hidden; otherwise the section is shown.

See also isSectionHidden() and hiddenSectionCount().

func (*QHeaderView) SetSectionResizeMode

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSectionResizeMode(mode int)

Sets the constraints on how the header can be resized to those described by the given mode.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also sectionResizeMode(), resizeMode(), length(), and sectionResized().

func (*QHeaderView) SetSectionResizeMode_1

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSectionResizeMode_1(logicalIndex int, mode int)

Sets the constraints on how the header can be resized to those described by the given mode.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also sectionResizeMode(), resizeMode(), length(), and sectionResized().

func (*QHeaderView) SetSectionsClickable

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSectionsClickable(clickable bool)

If clickable is true, the header will respond to single clicks.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also sectionsClickable(), sectionClicked(), sectionPressed(), and setSortIndicatorShown().

func (*QHeaderView) SetSectionsMovable

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSectionsMovable(movable bool)

If movable is true, the header may be moved by the user; otherwise it is fixed in place.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also sectionsMovable() and sectionMoved().

func (*QHeaderView) SetSelection

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSelection(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().

Selects the items in the given rect according to the specified flags.

The base class implementation does nothing.

func (*QHeaderView) SetSortIndicator

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSortIndicator(logicalIndex int, order int)

Sets the sort indicator for the section specified by the given logicalIndex in the direction specified by order, and removes the sort indicator from any other section that was showing it.

logicalIndex may be -1, in which case no sort indicator will be shown and the model will return to its natural, unsorted order. Note that not all models support this and may even crash in this case.

See also sortIndicatorSection() and sortIndicatorOrder().

func (*QHeaderView) SetSortIndicatorShown

func (this *QHeaderView) SetSortIndicatorShown(show bool)

func (*QHeaderView) SetStretchLastSection

func (this *QHeaderView) SetStretchLastSection(stretch bool)

func (*QHeaderView) SetVisible

func (this *QHeaderView) SetVisible(v bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QHeaderView) ShowSection

func (this *QHeaderView) ShowSection(logicalIndex int)

Shows the section specified by logicalIndex.

See also hideSection(), isSectionHidden(), hiddenSectionCount(), and setSectionHidden().

func (*QHeaderView) SizeHint

func (this *QHeaderView) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

Returns a suitable size hint for this header.

See also sectionSizeHint().

func (*QHeaderView) SortIndicatorChanged

func (this *QHeaderView) SortIndicatorChanged(logicalIndex int, order int)

This signal is emitted when the section containing the sort indicator or the order indicated is changed. The section's logical index is specified by logicalIndex and the sort order is specified by order.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setSortIndicator().

func (*QHeaderView) SortIndicatorOrder

func (this *QHeaderView) SortIndicatorOrder() int

Returns the order for the sort indicator. If no section has a sort indicator the return value of this function is undefined.

See also setSortIndicator() and sortIndicatorSection().

func (*QHeaderView) SortIndicatorSection

func (this *QHeaderView) SortIndicatorSection() int

Returns the logical index of the section that has a sort indicator. By default this is section 0.

See also setSortIndicator(), sortIndicatorOrder(), and setSortIndicatorShown().

func (*QHeaderView) StretchLastSection

func (this *QHeaderView) StretchLastSection() bool

func (*QHeaderView) StretchSectionCount

func (this *QHeaderView) StretchSectionCount() int

Returns the number of sections that are set to resize mode stretch. In views, this can be used to see if the headerview needs to resize the sections when the view's geometry changes.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also stretchLastSection and resizeMode().

func (*QHeaderView) SwapSections

func (this *QHeaderView) SwapSections(first int, second int)

Swaps the section at visual index first with the section at visual index second.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also moveSection().

func (*QHeaderView) UpdateGeometries

func (this *QHeaderView) UpdateGeometries()

func (*QHeaderView) UpdateSection

func (this *QHeaderView) UpdateSection(logicalIndex int)

func (*QHeaderView) VerticalOffset

func (this *QHeaderView) VerticalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().

Returns the vertical offset of the header. This is 0 for horizontal headers.

See also offset().

func (*QHeaderView) ViewportEvent

func (this *QHeaderView) ViewportEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().

func (*QHeaderView) VisualIndex

func (this *QHeaderView) VisualIndex(logicalIndex int) int

Returns the visual index position of the section specified by the given logicalIndex, or -1 otherwise.

Hidden sections still have valid visual indexes.

See also logicalIndex().

func (*QHeaderView) VisualIndexAt

func (this *QHeaderView) VisualIndexAt(position int) int

Returns the visual index of the section that covers the given position in the viewport.

See also logicalIndexAt().

func (*QHeaderView) VisualRect

func (this *QHeaderView) VisualRect(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

func (*QHeaderView) VisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QHeaderView) VisualRegionForSelection(selection qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF) *qtgui.QRegion

type QHeaderView_ITF

type QHeaderView_ITF interface {
	QAbstractItemView_ITF
	QHeaderView_PTR() *QHeaderView
}

type QHeaderView__ResizeMode

type QHeaderView__ResizeMode = int

The resize mode specifies the behavior of the header sections. It can be set on the entire header view or on individual sections using setSectionResizeMode().

The following values are obsolete:

QHeaderView::CustomFixedUse Fixed instead.

See also setResizeMode(), setSectionResizeMode(), stretchLastSection, and minimumSectionSize.

const QHeaderView__Custom QHeaderView__ResizeMode = 2
const QHeaderView__Fixed QHeaderView__ResizeMode = 2

The user cannot resize the section. The section can only be resized programmatically using resizeSection(). The section size defaults to defaultSectionSize.

const QHeaderView__Interactive QHeaderView__ResizeMode = 0

The user can resize the section. The section can also be resized programmatically using resizeSection(). The section size defaults to defaultSectionSize. (See also cascadingSectionResizes.)

const QHeaderView__ResizeToContents QHeaderView__ResizeMode = 3
const QHeaderView__Stretch QHeaderView__ResizeMode = 1

QHeaderView will automatically resize the section to fill the available space. The size cannot be changed by the user or programmatically.

type QInputDialog

type QInputDialog struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQInputDialog

func NewQInputDialog(parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QInputDialog

Constructs a new input dialog with the given parent and window flags.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func NewQInputDialogFromPointer

func NewQInputDialogFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QInputDialog

func NewQInputDialog__

func NewQInputDialog__() *QInputDialog

Constructs a new input dialog with the given parent and window flags.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func NewQInputDialog__1

func NewQInputDialog__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QInputDialog

Constructs a new input dialog with the given parent and window flags.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QInputDialog) CancelButtonText

func (this *QInputDialog) CancelButtonText() string

func (*QInputDialog) ComboBoxItems

func (this *QInputDialog) ComboBoxItems() *qtcore.QStringList

func (*QInputDialog) Done

func (this *QInputDialog) Done(result int)

Reimplemented from QDialog::done().

Closes the dialog and sets its result code to result. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return result.

See also QDialog::done().

func (*QInputDialog) DoubleDecimals

func (this *QInputDialog) DoubleDecimals() int

func (*QInputDialog) DoubleMaximum

func (this *QInputDialog) DoubleMaximum() float64

func (*QInputDialog) DoubleMinimum

func (this *QInputDialog) DoubleMinimum() float64

func (*QInputDialog) DoubleStep

func (this *QInputDialog) DoubleStep() float64

func (*QInputDialog) DoubleValue

func (this *QInputDialog) DoubleValue() float64

func (*QInputDialog) DoubleValueChanged

func (this *QInputDialog) DoubleValueChanged(value float64)

This signal is emitted whenever the double value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.

This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.

Note: Notifier signal for property doubleValue.

func (*QInputDialog) DoubleValueSelected

func (this *QInputDialog) DoubleValueSelected(value float64)

This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a double value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.

This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in DoubleInput mode.

func (*QInputDialog) GetCthis

func (this *QInputDialog) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64, maxValue float64, decimals int, ok *bool, flags int) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble_1

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64, maxValue float64, decimals int, ok *bool, flags int, step float64) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble__

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble__1

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble__2

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble__2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble__3

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble__3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64, maxValue float64) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble__4

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble__4(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64, maxValue float64, decimals int) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetDouble__5

func (this *QInputDialog) GetDouble__5(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value float64, minValue float64, maxValue float64, decimals int, ok *bool) float64

Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.

If ok is nonnull, *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
double d = QInputDialog::getDouble(this, tr("QInputDialog::getDouble()"),
                                   tr("Amount:"), 37.56, -10000, 10000, 2, &ok);
if (ok)
    doubleLabel->setText(QString("$%1").arg(d));

See also getText(), getInt(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetInt

func (this *QInputDialog) GetInt(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value int, minValue int, maxValue int, step int, ok *bool, flags int) int

Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.

If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr("QInputDialog::getInteger()"),
                             tr("Percentage:"), 25, 0, 100, 1, &ok);
if (ok)
    integerLabel->setText(tr("%1%").arg(i));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getText(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetInt__

func (this *QInputDialog) GetInt__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string) int

Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.

If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr("QInputDialog::getInteger()"),
                             tr("Percentage:"), 25, 0, 100, 1, &ok);
if (ok)
    integerLabel->setText(tr("%1%").arg(i));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getText(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetInt__1

func (this *QInputDialog) GetInt__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value int) int

Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.

If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr("QInputDialog::getInteger()"),
                             tr("Percentage:"), 25, 0, 100, 1, &ok);
if (ok)
    integerLabel->setText(tr("%1%").arg(i));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getText(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetInt__2

func (this *QInputDialog) GetInt__2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value int, minValue int) int

Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.

If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr("QInputDialog::getInteger()"),
                             tr("Percentage:"), 25, 0, 100, 1, &ok);
if (ok)
    integerLabel->setText(tr("%1%").arg(i));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getText(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetInt__3

func (this *QInputDialog) GetInt__3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value int, minValue int, maxValue int) int

Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.

If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr("QInputDialog::getInteger()"),
                             tr("Percentage:"), 25, 0, 100, 1, &ok);
if (ok)
    integerLabel->setText(tr("%1%").arg(i));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getText(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetInt__4

func (this *QInputDialog) GetInt__4(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value int, minValue int, maxValue int, step int) int

Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.

If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr("QInputDialog::getInteger()"),
                             tr("Percentage:"), 25, 0, 100, 1, &ok);
if (ok)
    integerLabel->setText(tr("%1%").arg(i));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getText(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetInt__5

func (this *QInputDialog) GetInt__5(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, value int, minValue int, maxValue int, step int, ok *bool) int

Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). value is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. min and max are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose. step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.

If ok is nonnull *ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

On success, this function returns the integer which has been entered by the user; on failure, it returns the initial value.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
int i = QInputDialog::getInt(this, tr("QInputDialog::getInteger()"),
                             tr("Percentage:"), 25, 0, 100, 1, &ok);
if (ok)
    integerLabel->setText(tr("%1%").arg(i));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also getText(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetItem

func (this *QInputDialog) GetItem(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, items qtcore.QStringList_ITF, current int, editable bool, ok *bool, flags int, inputMethodHints int) string

Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combo box. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combo box is editable and an input method is active.

If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise, the user may only select one of the existing items.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combo box.

Use this static function like this:

QStringList items;
items << tr("Spring") << tr("Summer") << tr("Fall") << tr("Winter");

bool ok;
QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr("QInputDialog::getItem()"),
                                     tr("Season:"), items, 0, false, &ok);
if (ok && !item.isEmpty())
    itemLabel->setText(item);

See also getText(), getInt(), getDouble(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetItem__

func (this *QInputDialog) GetItem__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, items qtcore.QStringList_ITF) string

Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combo box. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combo box is editable and an input method is active.

If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise, the user may only select one of the existing items.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combo box.

Use this static function like this:

QStringList items;
items << tr("Spring") << tr("Summer") << tr("Fall") << tr("Winter");

bool ok;
QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr("QInputDialog::getItem()"),
                                     tr("Season:"), items, 0, false, &ok);
if (ok && !item.isEmpty())
    itemLabel->setText(item);

See also getText(), getInt(), getDouble(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetItem__1

func (this *QInputDialog) GetItem__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, items qtcore.QStringList_ITF, current int) string

Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combo box. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combo box is editable and an input method is active.

If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise, the user may only select one of the existing items.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combo box.

Use this static function like this:

QStringList items;
items << tr("Spring") << tr("Summer") << tr("Fall") << tr("Winter");

bool ok;
QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr("QInputDialog::getItem()"),
                                     tr("Season:"), items, 0, false, &ok);
if (ok && !item.isEmpty())
    itemLabel->setText(item);

See also getText(), getInt(), getDouble(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetItem__2

func (this *QInputDialog) GetItem__2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, items qtcore.QStringList_ITF, current int, editable bool) string

Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combo box. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combo box is editable and an input method is active.

If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise, the user may only select one of the existing items.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combo box.

Use this static function like this:

QStringList items;
items << tr("Spring") << tr("Summer") << tr("Fall") << tr("Winter");

bool ok;
QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr("QInputDialog::getItem()"),
                                     tr("Season:"), items, 0, false, &ok);
if (ok && !item.isEmpty())
    itemLabel->setText(item);

See also getText(), getInt(), getDouble(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetItem__3

func (this *QInputDialog) GetItem__3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, items qtcore.QStringList_ITF, current int, editable bool, ok *bool) string

Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combo box. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combo box is editable and an input method is active.

If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise, the user may only select one of the existing items.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combo box.

Use this static function like this:

QStringList items;
items << tr("Spring") << tr("Summer") << tr("Fall") << tr("Winter");

bool ok;
QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr("QInputDialog::getItem()"),
                                     tr("Season:"), items, 0, false, &ok);
if (ok && !item.isEmpty())
    itemLabel->setText(item);

See also getText(), getInt(), getDouble(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetItem__4

func (this *QInputDialog) GetItem__4(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, items qtcore.QStringList_ITF, current int, editable bool, ok *bool, flags int) string

Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). items is the string list which is inserted into the combo box. current is the number of the item which should be the current item. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used if the combo box is editable and an input method is active.

If editable is true the user can enter their own text; otherwise, the user may only select one of the existing items.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the widget flags.

This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is true, the current text of the combo box.

Use this static function like this:

QStringList items;
items << tr("Spring") << tr("Summer") << tr("Fall") << tr("Winter");

bool ok;
QString item = QInputDialog::getItem(this, tr("QInputDialog::getItem()"),
                                     tr("Season:"), items, 0, false, &ok);
if (ok && !item.isEmpty())
    itemLabel->setText(item);

See also getText(), getInt(), getDouble(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText

func (this *QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, text string, ok *bool, flags int, inputMethodHints int) string

Static convenience function to get a multiline string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the plain text edit. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's plain text edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getMultiLineText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getMultiLineText()"),
                                              tr("Address:"), "John Doe\nFreedom Street", &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    multiLineTextLabel->setText(text);

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__

func (this *QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string) string

Static convenience function to get a multiline string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the plain text edit. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's plain text edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getMultiLineText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getMultiLineText()"),
                                              tr("Address:"), "John Doe\nFreedom Street", &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    multiLineTextLabel->setText(text);

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__1

func (this *QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, text string) string

Static convenience function to get a multiline string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the plain text edit. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's plain text edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getMultiLineText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getMultiLineText()"),
                                              tr("Address:"), "John Doe\nFreedom Street", &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    multiLineTextLabel->setText(text);

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__2

func (this *QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, text string, ok *bool) string

Static convenience function to get a multiline string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the plain text edit. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's plain text edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getMultiLineText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getMultiLineText()"),
                                              tr("Address:"), "John Doe\nFreedom Street", &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    multiLineTextLabel->setText(text);

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__3

func (this *QInputDialog) GetMultiLineText__3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, text string, ok *bool, flags int) string

Static convenience function to get a multiline string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the plain text edit. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's plain text edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getMultiLineText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getMultiLineText()"),
                                              tr("Address:"), "John Doe\nFreedom Street", &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    multiLineTextLabel->setText(text);

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetText

func (this *QInputDialog) GetText(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, echo int, text string, ok *bool, flags int, inputMethodHints int) string

Static convenience function to get a string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getText()"),
                                     tr("User name:"), QLineEdit::Normal,
                                     QDir::home().dirName(), &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    textLabel->setText(text);

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetText__

func (this *QInputDialog) GetText__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string) string

Static convenience function to get a string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getText()"),
                                     tr("User name:"), QLineEdit::Normal,
                                     QDir::home().dirName(), &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    textLabel->setText(text);

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetText__1

func (this *QInputDialog) GetText__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, echo int) string

Static convenience function to get a string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getText()"),
                                     tr("User name:"), QLineEdit::Normal,
                                     QDir::home().dirName(), &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    textLabel->setText(text);

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetText__2

func (this *QInputDialog) GetText__2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, echo int, text string) string

Static convenience function to get a string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getText()"),
                                     tr("User name:"), QLineEdit::Normal,
                                     QDir::home().dirName(), &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    textLabel->setText(text);

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetText__3

func (this *QInputDialog) GetText__3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, echo int, text string, ok *bool) string

Static convenience function to get a string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getText()"),
                                     tr("User name:"), QLineEdit::Normal,
                                     QDir::home().dirName(), &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    textLabel->setText(text);

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) GetText__4

func (this *QInputDialog) GetText__4(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, label string, echo int, text string, ok *bool, flags int) string

Static convenience function to get a string from the user.

title is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. inputMethodHints is the input method hints that will be used in the edit widget if an input method is active.

If ok is nonnull *a ok will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is parent. The dialog will be modal and uses the specified widget flags.

If the dialog is accepted, this function returns the text in the dialog's line edit. If the dialog is rejected, a null QString is returned.

Use this static function like this:

bool ok;
QString text = QInputDialog::getText(this, tr("QInputDialog::getText()"),
                                     tr("User name:"), QLineEdit::Normal,
                                     QDir::home().dirName(), &ok);
if (ok && !text.isEmpty())
    textLabel->setText(text);

See also getInt(), getDouble(), getItem(), and getMultiLineText().

func (*QInputDialog) InputMode

func (this *QInputDialog) InputMode() int

func (*QInputDialog) IntMaximum

func (this *QInputDialog) IntMaximum() int

func (*QInputDialog) IntMinimum

func (this *QInputDialog) IntMinimum() int

func (*QInputDialog) IntStep

func (this *QInputDialog) IntStep() int

func (*QInputDialog) IntValue

func (this *QInputDialog) IntValue() int

func (*QInputDialog) IntValueChanged

func (this *QInputDialog) IntValueChanged(value int)

This signal is emitted whenever the integer value changes in the dialog. The current value is specified by value.

This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.

Note: Notifier signal for property intValue.

func (*QInputDialog) IntValueSelected

func (this *QInputDialog) IntValueSelected(value int)

This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a integer value by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected value is specified by value.

This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in IntInput mode.

func (*QInputDialog) IsComboBoxEditable

func (this *QInputDialog) IsComboBoxEditable() bool

func (*QInputDialog) LabelText

func (this *QInputDialog) LabelText() string

func (*QInputDialog) MetaObject

func (this *QInputDialog) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QInputDialog) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QInputDialog) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QInputDialog) NewFromPointer

func (*QInputDialog) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QInputDialog

func (*QInputDialog) OkButtonText

func (this *QInputDialog) OkButtonText() string

func (*QInputDialog) Open

func (this *QInputDialog) Open(receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string)

This is an overloaded function.

This function connects one of its signals to the slot specified by receiver and member. The specific signal depends on the arguments that are specified in member. These are:

textValueSelected() if member has a QString for its first argument. intValueSelected() if member has an int for its first argument. doubleValueSelected() if member has a double for its first argument. accepted() if member has NO arguments.

The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QInputDialog) Options

func (this *QInputDialog) Options() int

func (*QInputDialog) QInputDialog_PTR

func (ptr *QInputDialog) QInputDialog_PTR() *QInputDialog

func (*QInputDialog) SetCancelButtonText

func (this *QInputDialog) SetCancelButtonText(text string)

func (*QInputDialog) SetComboBoxEditable

func (this *QInputDialog) SetComboBoxEditable(editable bool)

func (*QInputDialog) SetComboBoxItems

func (this *QInputDialog) SetComboBoxItems(items qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

func (*QInputDialog) SetCthis

func (this *QInputDialog) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QInputDialog) SetDoubleDecimals

func (this *QInputDialog) SetDoubleDecimals(decimals int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetDoubleMaximum

func (this *QInputDialog) SetDoubleMaximum(max float64)

func (*QInputDialog) SetDoubleMinimum

func (this *QInputDialog) SetDoubleMinimum(min float64)

func (*QInputDialog) SetDoubleRange

func (this *QInputDialog) SetDoubleRange(min float64, max float64)

Sets the range of double precision floating point values accepted by the dialog when used in DoubleInput mode, with minimum and maximum values specified by min and max respectively.

func (*QInputDialog) SetDoubleStep

func (this *QInputDialog) SetDoubleStep(step float64)

func (*QInputDialog) SetDoubleValue

func (this *QInputDialog) SetDoubleValue(value float64)

func (*QInputDialog) SetInputMode

func (this *QInputDialog) SetInputMode(mode int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetIntMaximum

func (this *QInputDialog) SetIntMaximum(max int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetIntMinimum

func (this *QInputDialog) SetIntMinimum(min int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetIntRange

func (this *QInputDialog) SetIntRange(min int, max int)

Sets the range of integer values accepted by the dialog when used in IntInput mode, with minimum and maximum values specified by min and max respectively.

func (*QInputDialog) SetIntStep

func (this *QInputDialog) SetIntStep(step int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetIntValue

func (this *QInputDialog) SetIntValue(value int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetLabelText

func (this *QInputDialog) SetLabelText(text string)

func (*QInputDialog) SetOkButtonText

func (this *QInputDialog) SetOkButtonText(text string)

func (*QInputDialog) SetOption

func (this *QInputDialog) SetOption(option int, on bool)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QInputDialog) SetOption__

func (this *QInputDialog) SetOption__(option int)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options and testOption().

func (*QInputDialog) SetOptions

func (this *QInputDialog) SetOptions(options int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetTextEchoMode

func (this *QInputDialog) SetTextEchoMode(mode int)

func (*QInputDialog) SetTextValue

func (this *QInputDialog) SetTextValue(text string)

func (*QInputDialog) SetVisible

func (this *QInputDialog) SetVisible(visible bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QInputDialog) SizeHint

func (this *QInputDialog) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QInputDialog) TestOption

func (this *QInputDialog) TestOption(option int) bool

Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.

See also options and setOption().

func (*QInputDialog) TextEchoMode

func (this *QInputDialog) TextEchoMode() int

func (*QInputDialog) TextValue

func (this *QInputDialog) TextValue() string

func (*QInputDialog) TextValueChanged

func (this *QInputDialog) TextValueChanged(text string)

This signal is emitted whenever the text string changes in the dialog. The current string is specified by text.

This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.

Note: Notifier signal for property textValue.

func (*QInputDialog) TextValueSelected

func (this *QInputDialog) TextValueSelected(text string)

This signal is emitted whenever the user selects a text string by accepting the dialog; for example, by clicking the OK button. The selected string is specified by text.

This signal is only relevant when the input dialog is used in TextInput mode.

type QInputDialog_ITF

type QInputDialog_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QInputDialog_PTR() *QInputDialog
}

type QInputDialog__InputDialogOption

type QInputDialog__InputDialogOption = int
const QInputDialog__NoButtons QInputDialog__InputDialogOption = 1
const QInputDialog__UseListViewForComboBoxItems QInputDialog__InputDialogOption = 2
const QInputDialog__UsePlainTextEditForTextInput QInputDialog__InputDialogOption = 4

type QInputDialog__InputMode

type QInputDialog__InputMode = int

This enum describes the different modes of input that can be selected for the dialog.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.

See also inputMode.

const QInputDialog__DoubleInput QInputDialog__InputMode = 2

Used to input floating point numbers with double precision accuracy.

const QInputDialog__IntInput QInputDialog__InputMode = 1

Used to input integers.

const QInputDialog__TextInput QInputDialog__InputMode = 0

Used to input text strings.

type QItemDelegate

type QItemDelegate struct {
	*QAbstractItemDelegate
}

func NewQItemDelegate

func NewQItemDelegate(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QItemDelegate

Constructs an item delegate with the given parent.

func NewQItemDelegateFromPointer

func NewQItemDelegateFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QItemDelegate

func NewQItemDelegate__

func NewQItemDelegate__() *QItemDelegate

Constructs an item delegate with the given parent.

func (*QItemDelegate) CreateEditor

func (this *QItemDelegate) CreateEditor(parent QWidget_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QWidget

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().

Returns the widget used to edit the item specified by index for editing. The parent widget and style option are used to control how the editor widget appears.

See also QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().

func (*QItemDelegate) Decoration

func (this *QItemDelegate) Decoration(option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QItemDelegate) DoCheck

func (this *QItemDelegate) DoCheck(option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, bounding qtcore.QRect_ITF, variant qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

func (*QItemDelegate) DoLayout

func (this *QItemDelegate) DoLayout(option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, checkRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, iconRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, textRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, hint bool)

func (*QItemDelegate) DrawBackground

func (this *QItemDelegate) DrawBackground(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Renders the item background for the given index, using the given painter and style option.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QItemDelegate) DrawCheck

func (this *QItemDelegate) DrawCheck(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, state int)

Renders a check indicator within the rectangle specified by rect, using the given painter and style option, using the given state.

func (*QItemDelegate) DrawDecoration

func (this *QItemDelegate) DrawDecoration(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

Renders the decoration pixmap within the rectangle specified by rect using the given painter and style option.

func (*QItemDelegate) DrawDisplay

func (this *QItemDelegate) DrawDisplay(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, text string)

Renders the item view text within the rectangle specified by rect using the given painter and style option.

func (*QItemDelegate) DrawFocus

func (this *QItemDelegate) DrawFocus(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Renders the region within the rectangle specified by rect, indicating that it has the focus, using the given painter and style option.

func (*QItemDelegate) EditorEvent

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::editorEvent().

func (*QItemDelegate) EventFilter

func (this *QItemDelegate) EventFilter(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

Returns true if the given editor is a valid QWidget and the given event is handled; otherwise returns false. The following key press events are handled by default:

Tab Backtab Enter Return Esc

In the case of Tab, Backtab, Enter and Return key press events, the editor's data is comitted to the model and the editor is closed. If the event is a Tab key press the view will open an editor on the next item in the view. Likewise, if the event is a Backtab key press the view will open an editor on the previous item in the view.

If the event is a Esc key press event, the editor is closed without committing its data.

See also commitData() and closeEditor().

func (*QItemDelegate) GetCthis

func (this *QItemDelegate) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QItemDelegate) HasClipping

func (this *QItemDelegate) HasClipping() bool

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDecoration

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDecoration(f func(option *QStyleOptionViewItem, variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QPixmap decoration(const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QVariant &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDoCheck

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDoCheck(f func(option *QStyleOptionViewItem, bounding *qtcore.QRect, variant *qtcore.QVariant) unsafe.Pointer)

QRect doCheck(const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QRect &, const class QVariant &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDoLayout

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDoLayout(f func(option *QStyleOptionViewItem, checkRect *qtcore.QRect, iconRect *qtcore.QRect, textRect *qtcore.QRect, hint bool))

void doLayout(const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, class QRect *, class QRect *, class QRect *, _Bool)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDrawBackground

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDrawBackground(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, option *QStyleOptionViewItem, index *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void drawBackground(class QPainter *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDrawCheck

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDrawCheck(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, option *QStyleOptionViewItem, rect *qtcore.QRect, state int))

void drawCheck(class QPainter *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QRect &, Qt::CheckState)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDrawDecoration

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDrawDecoration(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, option *QStyleOptionViewItem, rect *qtcore.QRect, pixmap *qtgui.QPixmap))

void drawDecoration(class QPainter *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QRect &, const class QPixmap &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDrawDisplay

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDrawDisplay(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, option *QStyleOptionViewItem, rect *qtcore.QRect, text string))

void drawDisplay(class QPainter *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QRect &, const class QString &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritDrawFocus

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritDrawFocus(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, option *QStyleOptionViewItem, rect *qtcore.QRect))

void drawFocus(class QPainter *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QRect &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritEditorEvent

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritEditorEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent, model *qtcore.QAbstractItemModel, option *QStyleOptionViewItem, index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool editorEvent(class QEvent *, class QAbstractItemModel *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritEventFilter(f func(object *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritRect

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritRect(f func(option *QStyleOptionViewItem, index *qtcore.QModelIndex, role int) unsafe.Pointer)

QRect rect(const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QModelIndex &, int)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritSelected

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritSelected(f func(pixmap *qtgui.QPixmap, palette *qtgui.QPalette, enabled bool) unsafe.Pointer)

QPixmap * selected(const class QPixmap &, const class QPalette &, _Bool)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritSetOptions

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritSetOptions(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex, option *QStyleOptionViewItem) unsafe.Pointer)

QStyleOptionViewItem setOptions(const class QModelIndex &, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &)

func (*QItemDelegate) InheritTextRectangle

func (this *QItemDelegate) InheritTextRectangle(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRect, font *qtgui.QFont, text string) unsafe.Pointer)

QRect textRectangle(class QPainter *, const class QRect &, const class QFont &, const class QString &)

func (*QItemDelegate) ItemEditorFactory

func (this *QItemDelegate) ItemEditorFactory() *QItemEditorFactory

Returns the editor factory used by the item delegate. If no editor factory is set, the function will return null.

See also setItemEditorFactory().

func (*QItemDelegate) MetaObject

func (this *QItemDelegate) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QItemDelegate) NewFromPointer

func (*QItemDelegate) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QItemDelegate

func (*QItemDelegate) Paint

func (this *QItemDelegate) Paint(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::paint().

Renders the delegate using the given painter and style option for the item specified by index.

When reimplementing this function in a subclass, you should update the area held by the option's rect variable, using the option's state variable to determine the state of the item to be displayed, and adjust the way it is painted accordingly.

For example, a selected item may need to be displayed differently to unselected items, as shown in the following code:

if (option.state & QStyle::State_Selected)
    painter->fillRect(option.rect, option.palette.highlight());

int size = qMin(option.rect.width(), option.rect.height());
int brightness = index.model()->data(index, Qt::DisplayRole).toInt();
double radius = (size / 2.0) - (brightness / 255.0 * size / 2.0);
if (radius == 0.0)
    return;

painter->save();
painter->setRenderHint(QPainter::Antialiasing, true);
painter->setPen(Qt::NoPen);
if (option.state & QStyle::State_Selected)
    painter->setBrush(option.palette.highlightedText());
else
...

After painting, you should ensure that the painter is returned to its the state it was supplied in when this function was called. For example, it may be useful to call QPainter::save() before painting and QPainter::restore() afterwards.

See also QStyle::State.

func (*QItemDelegate) QItemDelegate_PTR

func (ptr *QItemDelegate) QItemDelegate_PTR() *QItemDelegate

func (*QItemDelegate) Rect

func (this *QItemDelegate) Rect(option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, role int) *qtcore.QRect

func (*QItemDelegate) Selected

func (this *QItemDelegate) Selected(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, palette qtgui.QPalette_ITF, enabled bool) *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QItemDelegate) SetClipping

func (this *QItemDelegate) SetClipping(clip bool)

func (*QItemDelegate) SetCthis

func (this *QItemDelegate) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QItemDelegate) SetEditorData

func (this *QItemDelegate) SetEditorData(editor QWidget_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setEditorData().

Sets the data to be displayed and edited by the editor from the data model item specified by the model index.

The default implementation stores the data in the editor widget's user property.

See also QMetaProperty::isUser().

func (*QItemDelegate) SetItemEditorFactory

func (this *QItemDelegate) SetItemEditorFactory(factory QItemEditorFactory_ITF)

Sets the editor factory to be used by the item delegate to be the factory specified. If no editor factory is set, the item delegate will use the default editor factory.

See also itemEditorFactory().

func (*QItemDelegate) SetModelData

func (this *QItemDelegate) SetModelData(editor QWidget_ITF, model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setModelData().

Gets data from the editor widget and stores it in the specified model at the item index.

The default implementation gets the value to be stored in the data model from the editor widget's user property.

See also QMetaProperty::isUser().

func (*QItemDelegate) SetOptions

func (*QItemDelegate) SizeHint

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::sizeHint().

Returns the size needed by the delegate to display the item specified by index, taking into account the style information provided by option.

When reimplementing this function, note that in case of text items, QItemDelegate adds a margin (i.e. 2 * QStyle::PM_FocusFrameHMargin) to the length of the text.

func (*QItemDelegate) TextRectangle

func (this *QItemDelegate) TextRectangle(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, font qtgui.QFont_ITF, text string) *qtcore.QRect

func (*QItemDelegate) UpdateEditorGeometry

func (this *QItemDelegate) UpdateEditorGeometry(editor QWidget_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::updateEditorGeometry().

Updates the editor for the item specified by index according to the style option given.

type QItemDelegate_ITF

type QItemDelegate_ITF interface {
	QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF
	QItemDelegate_PTR() *QItemDelegate
}

type QItemEditorCreatorBase

type QItemEditorCreatorBase struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQItemEditorCreatorBaseFromPointer

func NewQItemEditorCreatorBaseFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QItemEditorCreatorBase

func (*QItemEditorCreatorBase) CreateWidget

func (this *QItemEditorCreatorBase) CreateWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

func (*QItemEditorCreatorBase) GetCthis

func (this *QItemEditorCreatorBase) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QItemEditorCreatorBase) NewFromPointer

func (*QItemEditorCreatorBase) QItemEditorCreatorBase_PTR

func (ptr *QItemEditorCreatorBase) QItemEditorCreatorBase_PTR() *QItemEditorCreatorBase

func (*QItemEditorCreatorBase) SetCthis

func (this *QItemEditorCreatorBase) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QItemEditorCreatorBase) ValuePropertyName

func (this *QItemEditorCreatorBase) ValuePropertyName() *qtcore.QByteArray

Returns the property name used to access data for the given userType of data.

type QItemEditorCreatorBase_ITF

type QItemEditorCreatorBase_ITF interface {
	QItemEditorCreatorBase_PTR() *QItemEditorCreatorBase
}

type QItemEditorFactory

type QItemEditorFactory struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQItemEditorFactory

func NewQItemEditorFactory() *QItemEditorFactory

Constructs a new item editor factory.

func NewQItemEditorFactoryFromPointer

func NewQItemEditorFactoryFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QItemEditorFactory

func QItemEditorFactory_DefaultFactory

func QItemEditorFactory_DefaultFactory() *QItemEditorFactory

func (*QItemEditorFactory) CreateEditor

func (this *QItemEditorFactory) CreateEditor(userType int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

Creates an editor widget with the given parent for the specified userType of data, and returns it as a QWidget.

See also registerEditor().

func (*QItemEditorFactory) DefaultFactory

func (this *QItemEditorFactory) DefaultFactory() *QItemEditorFactory

Returns the default item editor factory.

See also setDefaultFactory().

func (*QItemEditorFactory) GetCthis

func (this *QItemEditorFactory) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QItemEditorFactory) NewFromPointer

func (*QItemEditorFactory) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QItemEditorFactory

func (*QItemEditorFactory) QItemEditorFactory_PTR

func (ptr *QItemEditorFactory) QItemEditorFactory_PTR() *QItemEditorFactory

func (*QItemEditorFactory) RegisterEditor

func (this *QItemEditorFactory) RegisterEditor(userType int, creator QItemEditorCreatorBase_ITF)

Registers an item editor creator specified by creator for the given userType of data.

Note: The factory takes ownership of the item editor creator and will destroy it if a new creator for the same type is registered later.

See also createEditor().

func (*QItemEditorFactory) SetCthis

func (this *QItemEditorFactory) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QItemEditorFactory) SetDefaultFactory

func (this *QItemEditorFactory) SetDefaultFactory(factory QItemEditorFactory_ITF)

Sets the default item editor factory to the given factory. Both new and existing delegates will use the new factory.

See also defaultFactory().

func (*QItemEditorFactory) ValuePropertyName

func (this *QItemEditorFactory) ValuePropertyName(userType int) *qtcore.QByteArray

Returns the property name used to access data for the given userType of data.

type QItemEditorFactory_ITF

type QItemEditorFactory_ITF interface {
	QItemEditorFactory_PTR() *QItemEditorFactory
}

type QKeyEventTransition

type QKeyEventTransition struct {
	*qtcore.QEventTransition
}

func NewQKeyEventTransition

func NewQKeyEventTransition(sourceState qtcore.QState_ITF) *QKeyEventTransition

Constructs a new key event transition with the given sourceState.

func NewQKeyEventTransitionFromPointer

func NewQKeyEventTransitionFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QKeyEventTransition

func NewQKeyEventTransition_1

func NewQKeyEventTransition_1(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, type_ int, key int, sourceState qtcore.QState_ITF) *QKeyEventTransition

Constructs a new key event transition with the given sourceState.

func NewQKeyEventTransition_1_

func NewQKeyEventTransition_1_(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, type_ int, key int) *QKeyEventTransition

Constructs a new key event transition with the given sourceState.

func NewQKeyEventTransition__

func NewQKeyEventTransition__() *QKeyEventTransition

Constructs a new key event transition with the given sourceState.

func (*QKeyEventTransition) EventTest

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) EventTest(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::eventTest().

func (*QKeyEventTransition) GetCthis

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QKeyEventTransition) InheritEventTest

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) InheritEventTest(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventTest(class QEvent *)

func (*QKeyEventTransition) InheritOnTransition

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) InheritOnTransition(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void onTransition(class QEvent *)

func (*QKeyEventTransition) Key

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) Key() int

Returns the key that this key event transition checks for.

Note: Getter function for property key.

See also setKey().

func (*QKeyEventTransition) MetaObject

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QKeyEventTransition) ModifierMask

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) ModifierMask() int

Returns the keyboard modifier mask that this key event transition checks for.

Note: Getter function for property modifierMask.

See also setModifierMask().

func (*QKeyEventTransition) NewFromPointer

func (*QKeyEventTransition) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QKeyEventTransition

func (*QKeyEventTransition) OnTransition

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) OnTransition(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::onTransition().

func (*QKeyEventTransition) QKeyEventTransition_PTR

func (ptr *QKeyEventTransition) QKeyEventTransition_PTR() *QKeyEventTransition

func (*QKeyEventTransition) SetCthis

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QKeyEventTransition) SetKey

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) SetKey(key int)

Sets the key that this key event transition will check for.

Note: Setter function for property key.

See also key().

func (*QKeyEventTransition) SetModifierMask

func (this *QKeyEventTransition) SetModifierMask(modifiers int)

Sets the keyboard modifier mask that this key event transition will check for to modifierMask.

Note: Setter function for property modifierMask.

See also modifierMask().

type QKeyEventTransition_ITF

type QKeyEventTransition_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QEventTransition_ITF
	QKeyEventTransition_PTR() *QKeyEventTransition
}

type QKeySequenceEdit

type QKeySequenceEdit struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQKeySequenceEdit

func NewQKeySequenceEdit(parent QWidget_ITF) *QKeySequenceEdit

Constructs a QKeySequenceEdit widget with the given parent.

func NewQKeySequenceEditFromPointer

func NewQKeySequenceEditFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QKeySequenceEdit

func NewQKeySequenceEdit_1

func NewQKeySequenceEdit_1(keySequence qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QKeySequenceEdit

Constructs a QKeySequenceEdit widget with the given parent.

func NewQKeySequenceEdit_1_

func NewQKeySequenceEdit_1_(keySequence qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF) *QKeySequenceEdit

Constructs a QKeySequenceEdit widget with the given parent.

func NewQKeySequenceEdit__

func NewQKeySequenceEdit__() *QKeySequenceEdit

Constructs a QKeySequenceEdit widget with the given parent.

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) Clear

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) Clear()

Clears the current key sequence.

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) EditingFinished

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) EditingFinished()

This signal is emitted when the user finishes entering the shortcut.

Note: there is a one second delay before releasing the last key and emitting this signal.

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) Event

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) GetCthis

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) InheritEvent

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) InheritTimerEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) KeyReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) KeySequence

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) KeySequence() *qtgui.QKeySequence

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) KeySequenceChanged

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) KeySequenceChanged(keySequence qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF)

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) MetaObject

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) NewFromPointer

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QKeySequenceEdit

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) QKeySequenceEdit_PTR

func (ptr *QKeySequenceEdit) QKeySequenceEdit_PTR() *QKeySequenceEdit

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) SetCthis

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) SetKeySequence

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) SetKeySequence(keySequence qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF)

func (*QKeySequenceEdit) TimerEvent

func (this *QKeySequenceEdit) TimerEvent(arg0 qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

type QKeySequenceEdit_ITF

type QKeySequenceEdit_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QKeySequenceEdit_PTR() *QKeySequenceEdit
}

type QLCDNumber

type QLCDNumber struct {
	*QFrame
}

func NewQLCDNumber

func NewQLCDNumber(parent QWidget_ITF) *QLCDNumber

Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.

The parent argument is passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setDigitCount() and setSmallDecimalPoint().

func NewQLCDNumberFromPointer

func NewQLCDNumberFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLCDNumber

func NewQLCDNumber_1

func NewQLCDNumber_1(numDigits uint, parent QWidget_ITF) *QLCDNumber

Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.

The parent argument is passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setDigitCount() and setSmallDecimalPoint().

func NewQLCDNumber_1_

func NewQLCDNumber_1_(numDigits uint) *QLCDNumber

Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.

The parent argument is passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setDigitCount() and setSmallDecimalPoint().

func NewQLCDNumber__

func NewQLCDNumber__() *QLCDNumber

Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.

The parent argument is passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setDigitCount() and setSmallDecimalPoint().

func (*QLCDNumber) CheckOverflow

func (this *QLCDNumber) CheckOverflow(num float64) bool

Returns true if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns false.

See also display(), digitCount(), and smallDecimalPoint().

func (*QLCDNumber) CheckOverflow_1

func (this *QLCDNumber) CheckOverflow_1(num int) bool

Returns true if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns false.

See also display(), digitCount(), and smallDecimalPoint().

func (*QLCDNumber) DigitCount

func (this *QLCDNumber) DigitCount() int

Returns the current number of digits.

Note: Getter function for property digitCount.

See also setDigitCount().

func (*QLCDNumber) Display

func (this *QLCDNumber) Display(str string)

Displays the number represented by the string s.

This version of the function disregards mode() and smallDecimalPoint().

These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. QLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters.

Note: Setter function for property intValue. Setter function for property value.

func (*QLCDNumber) Display_1

func (this *QLCDNumber) Display_1(num int)

Displays the number represented by the string s.

This version of the function disregards mode() and smallDecimalPoint().

These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. QLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters.

Note: Setter function for property intValue. Setter function for property value.

func (*QLCDNumber) Display_2

func (this *QLCDNumber) Display_2(num float64)

Displays the number represented by the string s.

This version of the function disregards mode() and smallDecimalPoint().

These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. QLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters.

Note: Setter function for property intValue. Setter function for property value.

func (*QLCDNumber) Event

func (this *QLCDNumber) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QLCDNumber) GetCthis

func (this *QLCDNumber) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QLCDNumber) InheritEvent

func (this *QLCDNumber) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QLCDNumber) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QLCDNumber) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QLCDNumber) IntValue

func (this *QLCDNumber) IntValue() int

func (*QLCDNumber) MetaObject

func (this *QLCDNumber) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QLCDNumber) Mode

func (this *QLCDNumber) Mode() int

func (*QLCDNumber) NewFromPointer

func (*QLCDNumber) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLCDNumber

func (*QLCDNumber) Overflow

func (this *QLCDNumber) Overflow()

This signal is emitted whenever the QLCDNumber is asked to display a too-large number or a too-long string.

It is never emitted by setDigitCount().

func (*QLCDNumber) PaintEvent

func (this *QLCDNumber) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QLCDNumber) QLCDNumber_PTR

func (ptr *QLCDNumber) QLCDNumber_PTR() *QLCDNumber

func (*QLCDNumber) SegmentStyle

func (this *QLCDNumber) SegmentStyle() int

func (*QLCDNumber) SetBinMode

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetBinMode()

Calls setMode(Bin). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).

See also setMode(), setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), and mode().

func (*QLCDNumber) SetCthis

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QLCDNumber) SetDecMode

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetDecMode()

Calls setMode(Dec). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).

See also setMode(), setHexMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode().

func (*QLCDNumber) SetDigitCount

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetDigitCount(nDigits int)

Sets the current number of digits to numDigits. Must be in the range 0..99.

Note: Setter function for property digitCount.

See also digitCount().

func (*QLCDNumber) SetHexMode

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetHexMode()

Calls setMode(Hex). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).

See also setMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode().

func (*QLCDNumber) SetMode

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetMode(arg0 int)

func (*QLCDNumber) SetOctMode

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetOctMode()

Calls setMode(Oct). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it).

See also setMode(), setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setBinMode(), and mode().

func (*QLCDNumber) SetSegmentStyle

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetSegmentStyle(arg0 int)

func (*QLCDNumber) SetSmallDecimalPoint

func (this *QLCDNumber) SetSmallDecimalPoint(arg0 bool)

func (*QLCDNumber) SizeHint

func (this *QLCDNumber) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QLCDNumber) SmallDecimalPoint

func (this *QLCDNumber) SmallDecimalPoint() bool

func (*QLCDNumber) Value

func (this *QLCDNumber) Value() float64

type QLCDNumber_ITF

type QLCDNumber_ITF interface {
	QFrame_ITF
	QLCDNumber_PTR() *QLCDNumber
}

type QLCDNumber__Mode

type QLCDNumber__Mode = int

This type determines how numbers are shown.

If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the value is displayed.

const QLCDNumber__Bin QLCDNumber__Mode = 3

Binary

const QLCDNumber__Dec QLCDNumber__Mode = 1

Decimal

const QLCDNumber__Hex QLCDNumber__Mode = 0

Hexadecimal

const QLCDNumber__Oct QLCDNumber__Mode = 2

Octal

type QLCDNumber__SegmentStyle

type QLCDNumber__SegmentStyle = int

This type determines the visual appearance of the QLCDNumber widget.

const QLCDNumber__Filled QLCDNumber__SegmentStyle = 1

gives raised segments filled with the windowText color.

const QLCDNumber__Flat QLCDNumber__SegmentStyle = 2

gives flat segments filled with the windowText color.

const QLCDNumber__Outline QLCDNumber__SegmentStyle = 0

gives raised segments filled with the background color.

type QLabel

type QLabel struct {
	*QFrame
}

func NewQLabel

func NewQLabel(parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QLabel

Constructs an empty label.

The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().

func NewQLabelFromPointer

func NewQLabelFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLabel

func NewQLabel_1

func NewQLabel_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QLabel

Constructs an empty label.

The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().

func NewQLabel_1_

func NewQLabel_1_(text string) *QLabel

Constructs an empty label.

The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().

func NewQLabel_1_1

func NewQLabel_1_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QLabel

Constructs an empty label.

The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().

func NewQLabel__

func NewQLabel__() *QLabel

Constructs an empty label.

The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().

func NewQLabel__1

func NewQLabel__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QLabel

Constructs an empty label.

The parent and widget flag f, arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor.

See also setAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), and setIndent().

func (*QLabel) Alignment

func (this *QLabel) Alignment() int

func (*QLabel) Buddy

func (this *QLabel) Buddy() *QWidget

Returns this label's buddy, or 0 if no buddy is currently set.

See also setBuddy().

func (*QLabel) ChangeEvent

func (this *QLabel) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QLabel) Clear

func (this *QLabel) Clear()

Clears any label contents.

func (*QLabel) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QLabel) ContextMenuEvent(ev qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QLabel) Event

func (this *QLabel) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QLabel) FocusInEvent

func (this *QLabel) FocusInEvent(ev qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QLabel) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QLabel) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QLabel) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QLabel) FocusOutEvent(ev qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QLabel) GetCthis

func (this *QLabel) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QLabel) HasScaledContents

func (this *QLabel) HasScaledContents() bool

func (*QLabel) HasSelectedText

func (this *QLabel) HasSelectedText() bool

func (*QLabel) HeightForWidth

func (this *QLabel) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().

func (*QLabel) Indent

func (this *QLabel) Indent() int

func (*QLabel) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QLabel) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QLabel) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QLabel) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QLabel) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QLabel) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QLabel) KeyPressEvent(ev qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QLabel) LinkActivated

func (this *QLabel) LinkActivated(link string)

This signal is emitted when the user clicks a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also linkHovered().

func (*QLabel) LinkHovered

func (this *QLabel) LinkHovered(link string)

This signal is emitted when the user hovers over a link. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also linkActivated().

func (*QLabel) Margin

func (this *QLabel) Margin() int

func (*QLabel) MetaObject

func (this *QLabel) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QLabel) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QLabel) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QLabel) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QLabel) MouseMoveEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QLabel) MousePressEvent

func (this *QLabel) MousePressEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QLabel) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QLabel) MouseReleaseEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QLabel) Movie

func (this *QLabel) Movie() *qtgui.QMovie

Returns a pointer to the label's movie, or 0 if no movie has been set.

See also setMovie().

func (*QLabel) NewFromPointer

func (*QLabel) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLabel
func (this *QLabel) OpenExternalLinks() bool

func (*QLabel) PaintEvent

func (this *QLabel) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QLabel) Picture

func (this *QLabel) Picture() *qtgui.QPicture

Returns the label's picture or 0 if the label doesn't have a picture.

See also setPicture().

func (*QLabel) Pixmap

func (this *QLabel) Pixmap() *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QLabel) QLabel_PTR

func (ptr *QLabel) QLabel_PTR() *QLabel

func (*QLabel) SelectedText

func (this *QLabel) SelectedText() string

func (*QLabel) SelectionStart

func (this *QLabel) SelectionStart() int

selectionStart() returns the index of the first selected character in the label or -1 if no text is selected.

Note: The textInteractionFlags set on the label need to include either TextSelectableByMouse or TextSelectableByKeyboard.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

See also selectedText().

func (*QLabel) SetAlignment

func (this *QLabel) SetAlignment(arg0 int)

func (*QLabel) SetBuddy

func (this *QLabel) SetBuddy(arg0 QWidget_ITF)

Sets this label's buddy to buddy.

When the user presses the shortcut key indicated by this label, the keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy widget.

The buddy mechanism is only available for QLabels that contain text in which one character is prefixed with an ampersand, '&'. This character is set as the shortcut key. See the QKeySequence::mnemonic() documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&&').

In a dialog, you might create two data entry widgets and a label for each, and set up the geometry layout so each label is just to the left of its data entry widget (its "buddy"), for example:

QLineEdit *nameEdit  = new QLineEdit(this);
QLabel    *nameLabel = new QLabel("&Name:", this);
nameLabel->setBuddy(nameEdit);
QLineEdit *phoneEdit  = new QLineEdit(this);
QLabel    *phoneLabel = new QLabel("&Phone:", this);
phoneLabel->setBuddy(phoneEdit);
// (layout setup not shown)

With the code above, the focus jumps to the Name field when the user presses Alt+N, and to the Phone field when the user presses Alt+P.

To unset a previously set buddy, call this function with buddy set to 0.

See also buddy(), setText(), QShortcut, and setAlignment().

func (*QLabel) SetCthis

func (this *QLabel) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QLabel) SetIndent

func (this *QLabel) SetIndent(arg0 int)

func (*QLabel) SetMargin

func (this *QLabel) SetMargin(arg0 int)

func (*QLabel) SetMovie

func (this *QLabel) SetMovie(movie qtgui.QMovie_ITF)

Sets the label contents to movie. Any previous content is cleared. The label does NOT take ownership of the movie.

The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.

See also movie() and setBuddy().

func (*QLabel) SetNum

func (this *QLabel) SetNum(arg0 int)

Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual representation of integer num. Any previous content is cleared. Does nothing if the integer's string representation is the same as the current contents of the label.

The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.

See also setText(), QString::setNum(), and setBuddy().

func (*QLabel) SetNum_1

func (this *QLabel) SetNum_1(arg0 float64)

Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual representation of integer num. Any previous content is cleared. Does nothing if the integer's string representation is the same as the current contents of the label.

The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.

See also setText(), QString::setNum(), and setBuddy().

func (this *QLabel) SetOpenExternalLinks(open bool)

func (*QLabel) SetPicture

func (this *QLabel) SetPicture(arg0 qtgui.QPicture_ITF)

Sets the label contents to picture. Any previous content is cleared.

The buddy shortcut, if any, is disabled.

See also picture() and setBuddy().

func (*QLabel) SetPixmap

func (this *QLabel) SetPixmap(arg0 qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

func (*QLabel) SetScaledContents

func (this *QLabel) SetScaledContents(arg0 bool)

func (*QLabel) SetSelection

func (this *QLabel) SetSelection(arg0 int, arg1 int)

Selects text from position start and for length characters.

Note: The textInteractionFlags set on the label need to include either TextSelectableByMouse or TextSelectableByKeyboard.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

See also selectedText().

func (*QLabel) SetText

func (this *QLabel) SetText(arg0 string)

func (*QLabel) SetTextFormat

func (this *QLabel) SetTextFormat(arg0 int)

func (*QLabel) SetTextInteractionFlags

func (this *QLabel) SetTextInteractionFlags(flags int)

func (*QLabel) SetWordWrap

func (this *QLabel) SetWordWrap(on bool)

func (*QLabel) SizeHint

func (this *QLabel) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QLabel) Text

func (this *QLabel) Text() string

func (*QLabel) TextFormat

func (this *QLabel) TextFormat() int

func (*QLabel) TextInteractionFlags

func (this *QLabel) TextInteractionFlags() int

func (*QLabel) WordWrap

func (this *QLabel) WordWrap() bool

type QLabel_ITF

type QLabel_ITF interface {
	QFrame_ITF
	QLabel_PTR() *QLabel
}

type QLayout

type QLayout struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
	*QLayoutItem
}

func NewQLayout

func NewQLayout(parent QWidget_ITF) *QLayout

Constructs a new top-level QLayout, with parent parent. parent may not be 0.

There can be only one top-level layout for a widget. It is returned by QWidget::layout().

func NewQLayoutFromPointer

func NewQLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLayout

func NewQLayout_1

func NewQLayout_1() *QLayout

Constructs a new top-level QLayout, with parent parent. parent may not be 0.

There can be only one top-level layout for a widget. It is returned by QWidget::layout().

func (*QLayout) Activate

func (this *QLayout) Activate() bool

Redoes the layout for parentWidget() if necessary.

You should generally not need to call this because it is automatically called at the most appropriate times. It returns true if the layout was redone.

See also update() and QWidget::updateGeometry().

func (*QLayout) AddChildLayout

func (this *QLayout) AddChildLayout(l QLayout_ITF)

This function is called from addLayout() or insertLayout() functions in subclasses to add layout l as a sub-layout.

The only scenario in which you need to call it directly is if you implement a custom layout that supports nested layouts.

See also QBoxLayout::addLayout(), QBoxLayout::insertLayout(), and QGridLayout::addLayout().

func (*QLayout) AddChildWidget

func (this *QLayout) AddChildWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

This function is called from addWidget() functions in subclasses to add w as a managed widget of a layout.

If w is already managed by a layout, this function will give a warning and remove w from that layout. This function must therefore be called before adding w to the layout's data structure.

func (*QLayout) AddItem

func (this *QLayout) AddItem(arg0 QLayoutItem_ITF)

Implemented in subclasses to add an item. How it is added is specific to each subclass.

This function is not usually called in application code. To add a widget to a layout, use the addWidget() function; to add a child layout, use the addLayout() function provided by the relevant QLayout subclass.

Note: The ownership of item is transferred to the layout, and it's the layout's responsibility to delete it.

See also addWidget(), QBoxLayout::addLayout(), and QGridLayout::addLayout().

func (*QLayout) AddWidget

func (this *QLayout) AddWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

Adds widget w to this layout in a manner specific to the layout. This function uses addItem().

func (*QLayout) AdoptLayout

func (this *QLayout) AdoptLayout(layout QLayout_ITF) bool

func (*QLayout) AlignmentRect

func (this *QLayout) AlignmentRect(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle that should be covered when the geometry of this layout is set to r, provided that this layout supports setAlignment().

The result is derived from sizeHint() and expanding(). It is never larger than r.

func (*QLayout) ChildEvent

func (this *QLayout) ChildEvent(e qtcore.QChildEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().

func (*QLayout) ClosestAcceptableSize

func (this *QLayout) ClosestAcceptableSize(w QWidget_ITF, s qtcore.QSize_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

Returns a size that satisfies all size constraints on widget, including heightForWidth() and that is as close as possible to size.

func (*QLayout) ContentsMargins

func (this *QLayout) ContentsMargins() *qtcore.QMargins

Returns the margins used around the layout.

By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setContentsMargins().

func (*QLayout) ContentsRect

func (this *QLayout) ContentsRect() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the layout's geometry() rectangle, but taking into account the contents margins.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setContentsMargins() and getContentsMargins().

func (*QLayout) ControlTypes

func (this *QLayout) ControlTypes() int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::controlTypes().

func (*QLayout) Count

func (this *QLayout) Count() int

Must be implemented in subclasses to return the number of items in the layout.

See also itemAt().

func (*QLayout) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QLayout) ExpandingDirections() int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::expandingDirections().

Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Qt::Vertical or Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas Qt::Vertical | Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.

The default implementation returns Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical. Subclasses reimplement it to return a meaningful value based on their child widgets's size policies.

See also sizeHint().

func (*QLayout) Geometry

func (this *QLayout) Geometry() *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::geometry().

See also setGeometry().

func (*QLayout) GetContentsMargins

func (this *QLayout) GetContentsMargins(left unsafe.Pointer, top unsafe.Pointer, right unsafe.Pointer, bottom unsafe.Pointer)

Extracts the left, top, right, and bottom margins used around the layout, and assigns them to *left, *top, *right, and *bottom (unless they are null pointers).

By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setContentsMargins(), QStyle::pixelMetric(), PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin.

func (*QLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QLayout) IndexOf

func (this *QLayout) IndexOf(arg0 QWidget_ITF) int

Searches for widget widget in this layout (not including child layouts).

Returns the index of widget, or -1 if widget is not found.

The default implementation iterates over all items using itemAt()

func (*QLayout) InheritAddChildLayout

func (this *QLayout) InheritAddChildLayout(f func(l *QLayout))

void addChildLayout(class QLayout *)

func (*QLayout) InheritAddChildWidget

func (this *QLayout) InheritAddChildWidget(f func(w *QWidget))

void addChildWidget(class QWidget *)

func (*QLayout) InheritAdoptLayout

func (this *QLayout) InheritAdoptLayout(f func(layout *QLayout) bool)

bool adoptLayout(class QLayout *)

func (*QLayout) InheritAlignmentRect

func (this *QLayout) InheritAlignmentRect(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QRect) unsafe.Pointer)

QRect alignmentRect(const class QRect &)

func (*QLayout) InheritChildEvent

func (this *QLayout) InheritChildEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QChildEvent))

void childEvent(class QChildEvent *)

func (*QLayout) InheritWidgetEvent

func (this *QLayout) InheritWidgetEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void widgetEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QLayout) Invalidate

func (this *QLayout) Invalidate()

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::invalidate().

func (*QLayout) IsEmpty

func (this *QLayout) IsEmpty() bool

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::isEmpty().

func (*QLayout) IsEnabled

func (this *QLayout) IsEnabled() bool

Returns true if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns false.

See also setEnabled().

func (*QLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QLayout) ItemAt(index int) *QLayoutItem

Must be implemented in subclasses to return the layout item at index. If there is no such item, the function must return 0. Items are numbered consecutively from 0. If an item is deleted, other items will be renumbered.

This function can be used to iterate over a layout. The following code will draw a rectangle for each layout item in the layout structure of the widget.

static void paintLayout(QPainter *painter, QLayoutItem *item)
{
    QLayout *layout = item->layout();
    if (layout) {
        for (int i = 0; i < layout->count(); ++i)
            paintLayout(painter, layout->itemAt(i));
    }
    painter->drawRect(item->geometry());
}

void MyWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)
{
    QPainter painter(this);
    if (layout())
        paintLayout(&painter, layout());
}

See also count() and takeAt().

func (*QLayout) Layout

func (this *QLayout) Layout() *QLayout

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::layout().

func (*QLayout) Margin

func (this *QLayout) Margin() int

func (*QLayout) MaximumSize

func (this *QLayout) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::maximumSize().

Returns the maximum size of this layout. This is the largest size that the layout can have while still respecting the specifications.

The returned value doesn't include the space required by QWidget::setContentsMargins() or menuBar().

The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.

func (*QLayout) MenuBar

func (this *QLayout) MenuBar() *QWidget

Returns the menu bar set for this layout, or 0 if no menu bar is set.

See also setMenuBar().

func (*QLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QLayout) MinimumSize

func (this *QLayout) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().

Returns the minimum size of this layout. This is the smallest size that the layout can have while still respecting the specifications.

The returned value doesn't include the space required by QWidget::setContentsMargins() or menuBar().

The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.

func (*QLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLayout

func (*QLayout) ParentWidget

func (this *QLayout) ParentWidget() *QWidget

Returns the parent widget of this layout, or 0 if this layout is not installed on any widget.

If the layout is a sub-layout, this function returns the parent widget of the parent layout.

See also parent().

func (*QLayout) QLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QLayout) QLayout_PTR() *QLayout

func (*QLayout) RemoveItem

func (this *QLayout) RemoveItem(arg0 QLayoutItem_ITF)

Removes the layout item item from the layout. It is the caller's responsibility to delete the item.

Notice that item can be a layout (since QLayout inherits QLayoutItem).

See also removeWidget() and addItem().

func (*QLayout) RemoveWidget

func (this *QLayout) RemoveWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

Removes the widget widget from the layout. After this call, it is the caller's responsibility to give the widget a reasonable geometry or to put the widget back into a layout or to explicitly hide it if necessary.

Note: The ownership of widget remains the same as when it was added.

See also removeItem(), QWidget::setGeometry(), and addWidget().

func (*QLayout) ReplaceWidget

func (this *QLayout) ReplaceWidget(from QWidget_ITF, to QWidget_ITF, options int) *QLayoutItem

Searches for widget from and replaces it with widget to if found. Returns the layout item that contains the widget from on success. Otherwise 0 is returned. If options contains Qt::FindChildrenRecursively (the default), sub-layouts are searched for doing the replacement. Any other flag in options is ignored.

Notice that the returned item therefore might not belong to this layout, but to a sub-layout.

The returned layout item is no longer owned by the layout and should be either deleted or inserted to another layout. The widget from is no longer managed by the layout and may need to be deleted or hidden. The parent of widget from is left unchanged.

This function works for the built-in Qt layouts, but might not work for custom layouts.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also indexOf().

func (*QLayout) ReplaceWidget__

func (this *QLayout) ReplaceWidget__(from QWidget_ITF, to QWidget_ITF) *QLayoutItem

Searches for widget from and replaces it with widget to if found. Returns the layout item that contains the widget from on success. Otherwise 0 is returned. If options contains Qt::FindChildrenRecursively (the default), sub-layouts are searched for doing the replacement. Any other flag in options is ignored.

Notice that the returned item therefore might not belong to this layout, but to a sub-layout.

The returned layout item is no longer owned by the layout and should be either deleted or inserted to another layout. The widget from is no longer managed by the layout and may need to be deleted or hidden. The parent of widget from is left unchanged.

This function works for the built-in Qt layouts, but might not work for custom layouts.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also indexOf().

func (*QLayout) SetAlignment

func (this *QLayout) SetAlignment(w QWidget_ITF, alignment int) bool

Sets the alignment for widget w to alignment and returns true if w is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.

func (*QLayout) SetAlignment_1

func (this *QLayout) SetAlignment_1(l QLayout_ITF, alignment int) bool

Sets the alignment for widget w to alignment and returns true if w is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.

func (*QLayout) SetContentsMargins

func (this *QLayout) SetContentsMargins(left int, top int, right int, bottom int)

Sets the left, top, right, and bottom margins to use around the layout.

By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also contentsMargins(), getContentsMargins(), QStyle::pixelMetric(), PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin.

func (*QLayout) SetContentsMargins_1

func (this *QLayout) SetContentsMargins_1(margins qtcore.QMargins_ITF)

Sets the left, top, right, and bottom margins to use around the layout.

By default, QLayout uses the values provided by the style. On most platforms, the margin is 11 pixels in all directions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also contentsMargins(), getContentsMargins(), QStyle::pixelMetric(), PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin.

func (*QLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QLayout) SetEnabled

func (this *QLayout) SetEnabled(arg0 bool)

Enables this layout if enable is true, otherwise disables it.

An enabled layout adjusts dynamically to changes; a disabled layout acts as if it did not exist.

By default all layouts are enabled.

See also isEnabled().

func (*QLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QLayout) SetGeometry(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().

See also geometry().

func (*QLayout) SetMargin

func (this *QLayout) SetMargin(arg0 int)

func (*QLayout) SetMenuBar

func (this *QLayout) SetMenuBar(w QWidget_ITF)

Tells the geometry manager to place the menu bar widget at the top of parentWidget(), outside QWidget::contentsMargins(). All child widgets are placed below the bottom edge of the menu bar.

See also menuBar().

func (*QLayout) SetSizeConstraint

func (this *QLayout) SetSizeConstraint(arg0 int)

func (*QLayout) SetSpacing

func (this *QLayout) SetSpacing(arg0 int)

func (*QLayout) SizeConstraint

func (this *QLayout) SizeConstraint() int

func (*QLayout) Spacing

func (this *QLayout) Spacing() int

func (*QLayout) TakeAt

func (this *QLayout) TakeAt(index int) *QLayoutItem

Must be implemented in subclasses to remove the layout item at index from the layout, and return the item. If there is no such item, the function must do nothing and return 0. Items are numbered consecutively from 0. If an item is removed, other items will be renumbered.

The following code fragment shows a safe way to remove all items from a layout:

QLayoutItem *child;
while ((child = layout->takeAt(0)) != 0) {
    ...
    delete child;
}

See also itemAt() and count().

func (*QLayout) TotalHeightForWidth

func (this *QLayout) TotalHeightForWidth(w int) int

func (*QLayout) TotalMaximumSize

func (this *QLayout) TotalMaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QLayout) TotalMinimumSize

func (this *QLayout) TotalMinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QLayout) TotalSizeHint

func (this *QLayout) TotalSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QLayout) Update

func (this *QLayout) Update()

Updates the layout for parentWidget().

You should generally not need to call this because it is automatically called at the most appropriate times.

See also activate() and invalidate().

func (*QLayout) WidgetEvent

func (this *QLayout) WidgetEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

type QLayoutItem

type QLayoutItem struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQLayoutItem

func NewQLayoutItem(alignment int) *QLayoutItem

Constructs a layout item with an alignment. Not all subclasses support alignment.

func NewQLayoutItemFromPointer

func NewQLayoutItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLayoutItem

func NewQLayoutItem__

func NewQLayoutItem__() *QLayoutItem

Constructs a layout item with an alignment. Not all subclasses support alignment.

func (*QLayoutItem) Alignment

func (this *QLayoutItem) Alignment() int

Returns the alignment of this item.

See also setAlignment().

func (*QLayoutItem) ControlTypes

func (this *QLayoutItem) ControlTypes() int

Returns the control type(s) for the layout item. For a QWidgetItem, the control type comes from the widget's size policy; for a QLayoutItem, the control types is derived from the layout's contents.

See also QSizePolicy::controlType().

func (*QLayoutItem) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QLayoutItem) ExpandingDirections() int

Returns whether this layout item can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Qt::Vertical or Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas Qt::Vertical | Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.

func (*QLayoutItem) Geometry

func (this *QLayoutItem) Geometry() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle covered by this layout item.

See also setGeometry().

func (*QLayoutItem) GetCthis

func (this *QLayoutItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QLayoutItem) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QLayoutItem) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false. The default implementation returns false.

Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width.

See also heightForWidth() and QWidget::heightForWidth().

func (*QLayoutItem) HeightForWidth

func (this *QLayoutItem) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Returns the preferred height for this layout item, given the width w.

The default implementation returns -1, indicating that the preferred height is independent of the width of the item. Using the function hasHeightForWidth() will typically be much faster than calling this function and testing for -1.

Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width. A typical implementation will look like this:

int MyLayout::heightForWidth(int w) const
{
    if (cache_dirty || cached_width != w) {
        // not all C++ compilers support "mutable"
        MyLayout *that = (MyLayout*)this;
        int h = calculateHeightForWidth(w);
        that->cached_hfw = h;
        return h;
    }
    return cached_hfw;
}

Caching is strongly recommended; without it layout will take exponential time.

See also hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QLayoutItem) Invalidate

func (this *QLayoutItem) Invalidate()

Invalidates any cached information in this layout item.

func (*QLayoutItem) IsEmpty

func (this *QLayoutItem) IsEmpty() bool

Implemented in subclasses to return whether this item is empty, i.e. whether it contains any widgets.

func (*QLayoutItem) Layout

func (this *QLayoutItem) Layout() *QLayout

If this item is a QLayout, it is returned as a QLayout; otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.

See also spacerItem() and widget().

func (*QLayoutItem) MaximumSize

func (this *QLayoutItem) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the maximum size of this item.

func (*QLayoutItem) MinimumHeightForWidth

func (this *QLayoutItem) MinimumHeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Returns the minimum height this widget needs for the given width, w. The default implementation simply returns heightForWidth(w).

func (*QLayoutItem) MinimumSize

func (this *QLayoutItem) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the minimum size of this item.

func (*QLayoutItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QLayoutItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLayoutItem

func (*QLayoutItem) QLayoutItem_PTR

func (ptr *QLayoutItem) QLayoutItem_PTR() *QLayoutItem

func (*QLayoutItem) SetAlignment

func (this *QLayoutItem) SetAlignment(a int)

Sets the alignment of this item to alignment.

Note: Item alignment is only supported by QLayoutItem subclasses where it would have a visual effect. Except for QSpacerItem, which provides blank space for layouts, all public Qt classes that inherit QLayoutItem support item alignment.

See also alignment().

func (*QLayoutItem) SetCthis

func (this *QLayoutItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QLayoutItem) SetGeometry

func (this *QLayoutItem) SetGeometry(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Implemented in subclasses to set this item's geometry to r.

See also geometry().

func (*QLayoutItem) SizeHint

func (this *QLayoutItem) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the preferred size of this item.

func (*QLayoutItem) SpacerItem

func (this *QLayoutItem) SpacerItem() *QSpacerItem

If this item is a QSpacerItem, it is returned as a QSpacerItem; otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.

See also layout() and widget().

func (*QLayoutItem) Widget

func (this *QLayoutItem) Widget() *QWidget

If this item manages a QWidget, returns that widget. Otherwise, nullptr is returned.

Note: While the functions layout() and spacerItem() perform casts, this function returns another object: QLayout and QSpacerItem inherit QLayoutItem, while QWidget does not.

See also layout() and spacerItem().

type QLayoutItem_ITF

type QLayoutItem_ITF interface {
	QLayoutItem_PTR() *QLayoutItem
}

type QLayout_ITF

type QLayout_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QLayoutItem_ITF
	QLayout_PTR() *QLayout
}

type QLayout__SizeConstraint

type QLayout__SizeConstraint = int

The possible values are:

See also setSizeConstraint().

const QLayout__SetDefaultConstraint QLayout__SizeConstraint = 0

The main widget's minimum size is set to minimumSize(), unless the widget already has a minimum size.

const QLayout__SetFixedSize QLayout__SizeConstraint = 3

The main widget's size is set to sizeHint(); it cannot be resized at all.

const QLayout__SetMaximumSize QLayout__SizeConstraint = 4

The main widget's maximum size is set to maximumSize(); it cannot be larger.

const QLayout__SetMinAndMaxSize QLayout__SizeConstraint = 5

The main widget's minimum size is set to minimumSize() and its maximum size is set to maximumSize().

const QLayout__SetMinimumSize QLayout__SizeConstraint = 2

The main widget's minimum size is set to minimumSize(); it cannot be smaller.

const QLayout__SetNoConstraint QLayout__SizeConstraint = 1

The widget is not constrained.

type QLineEdit

type QLineEdit struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQLineEdit

func NewQLineEdit(parent QWidget_ITF) *QLineEdit

Constructs a line edit with no text.

The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

See also setText() and setMaxLength().

func NewQLineEditFromPointer

func NewQLineEditFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLineEdit

func NewQLineEdit_1

func NewQLineEdit_1(arg0 string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QLineEdit

Constructs a line edit with no text.

The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

See also setText() and setMaxLength().

func NewQLineEdit_1_

func NewQLineEdit_1_(arg0 string) *QLineEdit

Constructs a line edit with no text.

The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

See also setText() and setMaxLength().

func NewQLineEdit__

func NewQLineEdit__() *QLineEdit

Constructs a line edit with no text.

The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

See also setText() and setMaxLength().

func (*QLineEdit) AddAction

func (this *QLineEdit) AddAction(action QAction_ITF, position int)

This is an overloaded function.

Adds the action to the list of actions at the position.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QLineEdit) AddAction_1

func (this *QLineEdit) AddAction_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, position int) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

Adds the action to the list of actions at the position.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QLineEdit) Alignment

func (this *QLineEdit) Alignment() int

func (*QLineEdit) Backspace

func (this *QLineEdit) Backspace()

If no text is selected, deletes the character to the left of the text cursor and moves the cursor one position to the left. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted.

See also del().

func (*QLineEdit) ChangeEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) Clear

func (this *QLineEdit) Clear()

Clears the contents of the line edit.

See also setText() and insert().

func (*QLineEdit) Completer

func (this *QLineEdit) Completer() *QCompleter

Returns the current QCompleter that provides completions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setCompleter().

func (*QLineEdit) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) ContextMenuEvent(arg0 qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

Shows the standard context menu created with createStandardContextMenu().

If you do not want the line edit to have a context menu, you can set its contextMenuPolicy to Qt::NoContextMenu. If you want to customize the context menu, reimplement this function. If you want to extend the standard context menu, reimplement this function, call createStandardContextMenu() and extend the menu returned.

void LineEdit::contextMenuEvent(QContextMenuEvent *event)
{
    QMenu *menu = createStandardContextMenu();
    menu->addAction(tr("My Menu Item"));
    //...
    menu->exec(event->globalPos());
    delete menu;
}

The event parameter is used to obtain the position where the mouse cursor was when the event was generated.

See also setContextMenuPolicy().

func (*QLineEdit) Copy

func (this *QLineEdit) Copy()

Copies the selected text to the clipboard, if there is any, and if echoMode() is Normal.

See also cut() and paste().

func (*QLineEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu

func (this *QLineEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu() *QMenu

This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.

func (*QLineEdit) CursorBackward

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorBackward(mark bool, steps int)

Moves the cursor back steps characters. If mark is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is false the selection is cleared.

See also cursorForward().

func (*QLineEdit) CursorBackward__

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorBackward__(mark bool)

Moves the cursor back steps characters. If mark is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is false the selection is cleared.

See also cursorForward().

func (*QLineEdit) CursorForward

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorForward(mark bool, steps int)

Moves the cursor forward steps characters. If mark is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is false the selection is cleared.

See also cursorBackward().

func (*QLineEdit) CursorForward__

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorForward__(mark bool)

Moves the cursor forward steps characters. If mark is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is false the selection is cleared.

See also cursorBackward().

func (*QLineEdit) CursorMoveStyle

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorMoveStyle() int

func (*QLineEdit) CursorPosition

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorPosition() int

func (*QLineEdit) CursorPositionAt

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorPositionAt(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) int

Returns the cursor position under the point pos.

func (*QLineEdit) CursorPositionChanged

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorPositionChanged(arg0 int, arg1 int)

This signal is emitted whenever the cursor moves. The previous position is given by old, and the new position by new.

See also setCursorPosition() and cursorPosition().

func (*QLineEdit) CursorRect

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorRect() *qtcore.QRect

Returns a rectangle that includes the lineedit cursor.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QLineEdit) CursorWordBackward

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorWordBackward(mark bool)

Moves the cursor one word backward. If mark is true, the word is also selected.

See also cursorWordForward().

func (*QLineEdit) CursorWordForward

func (this *QLineEdit) CursorWordForward(mark bool)

Moves the cursor one word forward. If mark is true, the word is also selected.

See also cursorWordBackward().

func (*QLineEdit) Cut

func (this *QLineEdit) Cut()

Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it, if there is any, and if echoMode() is Normal.

If the current validator disallows deleting the selected text, cut() will copy without deleting.

See also copy(), paste(), and setValidator().

func (*QLineEdit) Del

func (this *QLineEdit) Del()

If no text is selected, deletes the character to the right of the text cursor. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted.

See also backspace().

func (*QLineEdit) Deselect

func (this *QLineEdit) Deselect()

Deselects any selected text.

See also setSelection() and selectAll().

func (*QLineEdit) DisplayText

func (this *QLineEdit) DisplayText() string

func (*QLineEdit) DragEnabled

func (this *QLineEdit) DragEnabled() bool

func (*QLineEdit) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) DragEnterEvent(arg0 qtgui.QDragEnterEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) DragLeaveEvent(e qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) DragMoveEvent(e qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) DropEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) DropEvent(arg0 qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) EchoMode

func (this *QLineEdit) EchoMode() int

func (*QLineEdit) EditingFinished

func (this *QLineEdit) EditingFinished()

This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed or the line edit loses focus. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit and enter/return is pressed, the editingFinished() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.

func (*QLineEdit) End

func (this *QLineEdit) End(mark bool)

Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already there. If mark is true, text is selected towards the last position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.

See also home().

func (*QLineEdit) Event

func (this *QLineEdit) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QLineEdit) FocusInEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) FocusInEvent(arg0 qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) FocusOutEvent(arg0 qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) GetCthis

func (this *QLineEdit) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QLineEdit) GetTextMargins

func (this *QLineEdit) GetTextMargins(left unsafe.Pointer, top unsafe.Pointer, right unsafe.Pointer, bottom unsafe.Pointer)

Returns the widget's text margins for left, top, right, and bottom.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also setTextMargins().

func (*QLineEdit) HasAcceptableInput

func (this *QLineEdit) HasAcceptableInput() bool

func (*QLineEdit) HasFrame

func (this *QLineEdit) HasFrame() bool

func (*QLineEdit) HasSelectedText

func (this *QLineEdit) HasSelectedText() bool

func (*QLineEdit) Home

func (this *QLineEdit) Home(mark bool)

Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is already there. If mark is true, text is selected towards the first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.

See also end().

func (*QLineEdit) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritCursorRect

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritCursorRect(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QRect cursorRect()

func (*QLineEdit) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QDragEnterEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QDragEnterEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritDropEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionFrame))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionFrame *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QLineEdit) InitStyleOption

func (this *QLineEdit) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionFrame_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QLineEdit. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionFrame, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QLineEdit) InputMask

func (this *QLineEdit) InputMask() string

func (*QLineEdit) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) InputMethodEvent(arg0 qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QLineEdit) InputMethodQuery(arg0 int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QLineEdit) InputMethodQuery_1

func (this *QLineEdit) InputMethodQuery_1(property int, argument qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QLineEdit) IsClearButtonEnabled

func (this *QLineEdit) IsClearButtonEnabled() bool

func (*QLineEdit) IsModified

func (this *QLineEdit) IsModified() bool

func (*QLineEdit) IsReadOnly

func (this *QLineEdit) IsReadOnly() bool

func (*QLineEdit) IsRedoAvailable

func (this *QLineEdit) IsRedoAvailable() bool

func (*QLineEdit) IsUndoAvailable

func (this *QLineEdit) IsUndoAvailable() bool

func (*QLineEdit) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

Converts the given key press event into a line edit action.

If Return or Enter is pressed and the current text is valid (or can be made valid by the validator), the signal returnPressed() is emitted.

The default key bindings are listed in the class's detailed description.

func (*QLineEdit) MaxLength

func (this *QLineEdit) MaxLength() int

func (*QLineEdit) MetaObject

func (this *QLineEdit) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QLineEdit) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QLineEdit) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

Returns a minimum size for the line edit.

The width returned is enough for at least one character.

func (*QLineEdit) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) MouseDoubleClickEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) MousePressEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) NewFromPointer

func (*QLineEdit) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QLineEdit

func (*QLineEdit) PaintEvent

func (this *QLineEdit) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QLineEdit) Paste

func (this *QLineEdit) Paste()

Inserts the clipboard's text at the cursor position, deleting any selected text, providing the line edit is not read-only.

If the end result would not be acceptable to the current validator, nothing happens.

See also copy() and cut().

func (*QLineEdit) PlaceholderText

func (this *QLineEdit) PlaceholderText() string

func (*QLineEdit) QLineEdit_PTR

func (ptr *QLineEdit) QLineEdit_PTR() *QLineEdit

func (*QLineEdit) Redo

func (this *QLineEdit) Redo()

Redoes the last operation if redo is available.

func (*QLineEdit) ReturnPressed

func (this *QLineEdit) ReturnPressed()

This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns QValidator::Acceptable.

func (*QLineEdit) SelectAll

func (this *QLineEdit) SelectAll()

Selects all the text (i.e. highlights it) and moves the cursor to the end. This is useful when a default value has been inserted because if the user types before clicking on the widget, the selected text will be deleted.

See also setSelection() and deselect().

func (*QLineEdit) SelectedText

func (this *QLineEdit) SelectedText() string

func (*QLineEdit) SelectionChanged

func (this *QLineEdit) SelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.

See also hasSelectedText() and selectedText().

func (*QLineEdit) SelectionEnd

func (this *QLineEdit) SelectionEnd() int

Returns the index of the character directly after the selection in the line edit or -1 if no text is selected.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.10.

See also selectedText(), selectionStart(), and selectionLength().

func (*QLineEdit) SelectionLength

func (this *QLineEdit) SelectionLength() int

Returns the length of the selection.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.10.

See also selectedText(), selectionStart(), and selectionEnd().

func (*QLineEdit) SelectionStart

func (this *QLineEdit) SelectionStart() int

Returns the index of the first selected character in the line edit or -1 if no text is selected.

See also selectedText(), selectionEnd(), and selectionLength().

func (*QLineEdit) SetAlignment

func (this *QLineEdit) SetAlignment(flag int)

func (*QLineEdit) SetClearButtonEnabled

func (this *QLineEdit) SetClearButtonEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QLineEdit) SetCompleter

func (this *QLineEdit) SetCompleter(completer QCompleter_ITF)

Sets this line edit to provide auto completions from the completer, c. The completion mode is set using QCompleter::setCompletionMode().

To use a QCompleter with a QValidator or QLineEdit::inputMask, you need to ensure that the model provided to QCompleter contains valid entries. You can use the QSortFilterProxyModel to ensure that the QCompleter's model contains only valid entries.

If c == 0, setCompleter() removes the current completer, effectively disabling auto completion.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also completer() and QCompleter.

func (*QLineEdit) SetCthis

func (this *QLineEdit) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QLineEdit) SetCursorMoveStyle

func (this *QLineEdit) SetCursorMoveStyle(style int)

func (*QLineEdit) SetCursorPosition

func (this *QLineEdit) SetCursorPosition(arg0 int)

func (*QLineEdit) SetDragEnabled

func (this *QLineEdit) SetDragEnabled(b bool)

func (*QLineEdit) SetEchoMode

func (this *QLineEdit) SetEchoMode(arg0 int)

func (*QLineEdit) SetFrame

func (this *QLineEdit) SetFrame(arg0 bool)

func (*QLineEdit) SetInputMask

func (this *QLineEdit) SetInputMask(inputMask string)

func (*QLineEdit) SetMaxLength

func (this *QLineEdit) SetMaxLength(arg0 int)

func (*QLineEdit) SetModified

func (this *QLineEdit) SetModified(arg0 bool)

func (*QLineEdit) SetPlaceholderText

func (this *QLineEdit) SetPlaceholderText(arg0 string)

func (*QLineEdit) SetReadOnly

func (this *QLineEdit) SetReadOnly(arg0 bool)

func (*QLineEdit) SetSelection

func (this *QLineEdit) SetSelection(arg0 int, arg1 int)

Selects text from position start and for length characters. Negative lengths are allowed.

See also deselect(), selectAll(), and selectedText().

func (*QLineEdit) SetText

func (this *QLineEdit) SetText(arg0 string)

func (*QLineEdit) SetTextMargins

func (this *QLineEdit) SetTextMargins(left int, top int, right int, bottom int)

Sets the margins around the text inside the frame to have the sizes left, top, right, and bottom.

See also getTextMargins().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also textMargins().

func (*QLineEdit) SetTextMargins_1

func (this *QLineEdit) SetTextMargins_1(margins qtcore.QMargins_ITF)

Sets the margins around the text inside the frame to have the sizes left, top, right, and bottom.

See also getTextMargins().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also textMargins().

func (*QLineEdit) SetValidator

func (this *QLineEdit) SetValidator(arg0 qtgui.QValidator_ITF)

Sets this line edit to only accept input that the validator, v, will accept. This allows you to place any arbitrary constraints on the text which may be entered.

If v == 0, setValidator() removes the current input validator. The initial setting is to have no input validator (i.e. any input is accepted up to maxLength()).

See also validator(), hasAcceptableInput(), QIntValidator, QDoubleValidator, and QRegExpValidator.

func (*QLineEdit) SizeHint

func (this *QLineEdit) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

Returns a recommended size for the widget.

The width returned, in pixels, is usually enough for about 15 to 20 characters.

func (*QLineEdit) Text

func (this *QLineEdit) Text() string

func (*QLineEdit) TextChanged

func (this *QLineEdit) TextChanged(arg0 string)

This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The text argument is the new text.

Unlike textEdited(), this signal is also emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().

Note: Notifier signal for property text.

func (*QLineEdit) TextEdited

func (this *QLineEdit) TextEdited(arg0 string)

This signal is emitted whenever the text is edited. The text argument is the new text.

Unlike textChanged(), this signal is not emitted when the text is changed programmatically, for example, by calling setText().

func (*QLineEdit) TextMargins

func (this *QLineEdit) TextMargins() *qtcore.QMargins

Returns the widget's text margins.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setTextMargins().

func (*QLineEdit) Undo

func (this *QLineEdit) Undo()

Undoes the last operation if undo is available. Deselects any current selection, and updates the selection start to the current cursor position.

func (*QLineEdit) Validator

func (this *QLineEdit) Validator() *qtgui.QValidator

Returns a pointer to the current input validator, or 0 if no validator has been set.

See also setValidator().

type QLineEdit_ITF

type QLineEdit_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QLineEdit_PTR() *QLineEdit
}

type QLineEdit__ActionPosition

type QLineEdit__ActionPosition = int

This enum type describes how a line edit should display the action widgets to be added.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 5.2.

See also addAction(), removeAction(), and QWidget::layoutDirection.

const QLineEdit__LeadingPosition QLineEdit__ActionPosition = 0

The widget is displayed to the left of the text when using layout direction Qt::LeftToRight or to the right when using Qt::RightToLeft, respectively.

const QLineEdit__TrailingPosition QLineEdit__ActionPosition = 1

The widget is displayed to the right of the text when using layout direction Qt::LeftToRight or to the left when using Qt::RightToLeft, respectively.

type QLineEdit__EchoMode

type QLineEdit__EchoMode = int

This enum type describes how a line edit should display its contents.

See also setEchoMode() and echoMode().

const QLineEdit__NoEcho QLineEdit__EchoMode = 1

Do not display anything. This may be appropriate for passwords where even the length of the password should be kept secret.

const QLineEdit__Normal QLineEdit__EchoMode = 0

Display characters as they are entered. This is the default.

const QLineEdit__Password QLineEdit__EchoMode = 2

Display platform-dependent password mask characters instead of the characters actually entered.

const QLineEdit__PasswordEchoOnEdit QLineEdit__EchoMode = 3

Display characters as they are entered while editing otherwise display characters as with Password.

type QListView

type QListView struct {
	*QAbstractItemView
}

func NewQListView

func NewQListView(parent QWidget_ITF) *QListView

Creates a new QListView with the given parent to view a model. Use setModel() to set the model.

func NewQListViewFromPointer

func NewQListViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QListView

func NewQListView__

func NewQListView__() *QListView

Creates a new QListView with the given parent to view a model. Use setModel() to set the model.

func (*QListView) BatchSize

func (this *QListView) BatchSize() int

func (*QListView) ClearPropertyFlags

func (this *QListView) ClearPropertyFlags()

Clears the QListView-specific property flags. See viewMode.

Properties inherited from QAbstractItemView are not covered by the property flags. Specifically, dragEnabled and acceptsDrops are computed by QListView when calling setMovement() or setViewMode().

func (*QListView) ContentsSize

func (this *QListView) ContentsSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QListView) CurrentChanged

func (this *QListView) CurrentChanged(current qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, previous qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().

func (*QListView) DoItemsLayout

func (this *QListView) DoItemsLayout()

func (*QListView) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QListView) DragLeaveEvent(e qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QListView) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QListView) DragMoveEvent(e qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QListView) DropEvent

func (this *QListView) DropEvent(e qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QListView) Event

func (this *QListView) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QListView) Flow

func (this *QListView) Flow() int

func (*QListView) GetCthis

func (this *QListView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QListView) GridSize

func (this *QListView) GridSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QListView) HorizontalOffset

func (this *QListView) HorizontalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().

func (*QListView) IndexAt

func (this *QListView) IndexAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().

func (*QListView) InheritContentsSize

func (this *QListView) InheritContentsSize(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize contentsSize()

func (*QListView) InheritCurrentChanged

func (this *QListView) InheritCurrentChanged(f func(current *qtcore.QModelIndex, previous *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void currentChanged(const class QModelIndex &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QListView) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritDropEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritHorizontalOffset

func (this *QListView) InheritHorizontalOffset(f func() int)

int horizontalOffset()

func (*QListView) InheritIsIndexHidden

func (this *QListView) InheritIsIndexHidden(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool isIndexHidden(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QListView) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritMoveCursor

func (this *QListView) InheritMoveCursor(f func(cursorAction int, modifiers int) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex moveCursor(enum QAbstractItemView::CursorAction, Qt::KeyboardModifiers)

func (*QListView) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritRectForIndex

func (this *QListView) InheritRectForIndex(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) unsafe.Pointer)

QRect rectForIndex(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QListView) InheritResizeContents

func (this *QListView) InheritResizeContents(f func(width int, height int))

void resizeContents(int, int)

func (*QListView) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritResizeEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritRowsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QListView) InheritRowsAboutToBeRemoved(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsAboutToBeRemoved(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QListView) InheritRowsInserted

func (this *QListView) InheritRowsInserted(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsInserted(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QListView) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QListView) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QListView) InheritSelectedIndexes

func (this *QListView) InheritSelectedIndexes(f func() *qtcore.QModelIndexList)

QModelIndexList selectedIndexes()

func (*QListView) InheritSelectionChanged

func (this *QListView) InheritSelectionChanged(f func(selected *qtcore.QItemSelection, deselected *qtcore.QItemSelection))

void selectionChanged(const class QItemSelection &, const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QListView) InheritSetPositionForIndex

func (this *QListView) InheritSetPositionForIndex(f func(position *qtcore.QPoint, index *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void setPositionForIndex(const class QPoint &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QListView) InheritSetSelection

func (this *QListView) InheritSetSelection(f func(rect *qtcore.QRect, command int))

void setSelection(const class QRect &, class QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags)

func (*QListView) InheritStartDrag

func (this *QListView) InheritStartDrag(f func(supportedActions int))

void startDrag(Qt::DropActions)

func (*QListView) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritTimerEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QListView) InheritUpdateGeometries

func (this *QListView) InheritUpdateGeometries(f func())

void updateGeometries()

func (*QListView) InheritVerticalOffset

func (this *QListView) InheritVerticalOffset(f func() int)

int verticalOffset()

func (*QListView) InheritViewOptions

func (this *QListView) InheritViewOptions(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QStyleOptionViewItem viewOptions()

func (*QListView) InheritViewportSizeHint

func (this *QListView) InheritViewportSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize viewportSizeHint()

func (*QListView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QListView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection(f func(selection *qtcore.QItemSelection) unsafe.Pointer)

QRegion visualRegionForSelection(const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QListView) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QListView) InheritWheelEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QListView) IsIndexHidden

func (this *QListView) IsIndexHidden(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().

func (*QListView) IsRowHidden

func (this *QListView) IsRowHidden(row int) bool

Returns true if the row is hidden; otherwise returns false.

func (*QListView) IsSelectionRectVisible

func (this *QListView) IsSelectionRectVisible() bool

func (*QListView) IsWrapping

func (this *QListView) IsWrapping() bool

func (*QListView) LayoutMode

func (this *QListView) LayoutMode() int

func (*QListView) MetaObject

func (this *QListView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QListView) ModelColumn

func (this *QListView) ModelColumn() int

func (*QListView) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QListView) MouseMoveEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QListView) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QListView) MouseReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QListView) MoveCursor

func (this *QListView) MoveCursor(cursorAction int, modifiers int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().

func (*QListView) Movement

func (this *QListView) Movement() int

func (*QListView) NewFromPointer

func (*QListView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QListView

func (*QListView) PaintEvent

func (this *QListView) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QListView) QListView_PTR

func (ptr *QListView) QListView_PTR() *QListView

func (*QListView) RectForIndex

func (this *QListView) RectForIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle of the item at position index in the model. The rectangle is in contents coordinates.

See also visualRect().

func (*QListView) Reset

func (this *QListView) Reset()

func (*QListView) ResizeContents

func (this *QListView) ResizeContents(width int, height int)

func (*QListView) ResizeEvent

func (this *QListView) ResizeEvent(e qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QListView) ResizeMode

func (this *QListView) ResizeMode() int

func (*QListView) RowsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QListView) RowsAboutToBeRemoved(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsAboutToBeRemoved().

func (*QListView) RowsInserted

func (this *QListView) RowsInserted(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsInserted().

func (*QListView) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QListView) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

func (*QListView) ScrollTo

func (this *QListView) ScrollTo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, hint int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().

func (*QListView) ScrollTo__

func (this *QListView) ScrollTo__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().

func (*QListView) SelectedIndexes

func (this *QListView) SelectedIndexes() *qtcore.QModelIndexList

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectedIndexes().

func (*QListView) SelectionChanged

func (this *QListView) SelectionChanged(selected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF, deselected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectionChanged().

func (*QListView) SetBatchSize

func (this *QListView) SetBatchSize(batchSize int)

func (*QListView) SetCthis

func (this *QListView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QListView) SetFlow

func (this *QListView) SetFlow(flow int)

func (*QListView) SetGridSize

func (this *QListView) SetGridSize(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QListView) SetLayoutMode

func (this *QListView) SetLayoutMode(mode int)

func (*QListView) SetModelColumn

func (this *QListView) SetModelColumn(column int)

func (*QListView) SetMovement

func (this *QListView) SetMovement(movement int)

func (*QListView) SetPositionForIndex

func (this *QListView) SetPositionForIndex(position qtcore.QPoint_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Sets the contents position of the item at index in the model to the given position. If the list view's movement mode is Static or its view mode is ListView, this function will have no effect.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QListView) SetResizeMode

func (this *QListView) SetResizeMode(mode int)

func (*QListView) SetRootIndex

func (this *QListView) SetRootIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

func (*QListView) SetRowHidden

func (this *QListView) SetRowHidden(row int, hide bool)

If hide is true, the given row will be hidden; otherwise the row will be shown.

See also isRowHidden().

func (*QListView) SetSelection

func (this *QListView) SetSelection(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, command int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().

func (*QListView) SetSelectionRectVisible

func (this *QListView) SetSelectionRectVisible(show bool)

func (*QListView) SetSpacing

func (this *QListView) SetSpacing(space int)

func (*QListView) SetUniformItemSizes

func (this *QListView) SetUniformItemSizes(enable bool)

func (*QListView) SetViewMode

func (this *QListView) SetViewMode(mode int)

func (*QListView) SetWordWrap

func (this *QListView) SetWordWrap(on bool)

func (*QListView) SetWrapping

func (this *QListView) SetWrapping(enable bool)

func (*QListView) Spacing

func (this *QListView) Spacing() int

func (*QListView) StartDrag

func (this *QListView) StartDrag(supportedActions int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::startDrag().

func (*QListView) TimerEvent

func (this *QListView) TimerEvent(e qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QListView) UniformItemSizes

func (this *QListView) UniformItemSizes() bool

func (*QListView) UpdateGeometries

func (this *QListView) UpdateGeometries()

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::updateGeometries().

func (*QListView) VerticalOffset

func (this *QListView) VerticalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().

func (*QListView) ViewMode

func (this *QListView) ViewMode() int

func (*QListView) ViewOptions

func (this *QListView) ViewOptions() *QStyleOptionViewItem

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::viewOptions().

func (*QListView) ViewportSizeHint

func (this *QListView) ViewportSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportSizeHint().

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QListView) VisualRect

func (this *QListView) VisualRect(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRect().

func (*QListView) VisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QListView) VisualRegionForSelection(selection qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF) *qtgui.QRegion

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRegionForSelection().

Since 4.7, the returned region only contains rectangles intersecting (or included in) the viewport.

func (*QListView) WheelEvent

func (this *QListView) WheelEvent(e qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

func (*QListView) WordWrap

func (this *QListView) WordWrap() bool

type QListView_ITF

type QListView_ITF interface {
	QAbstractItemView_ITF
	QListView_PTR() *QListView
}

type QListView__Flow

type QListView__Flow = int
const QListView__LeftToRight QListView__Flow = 0

The items are laid out in the view from the left to the right.

const QListView__TopToBottom QListView__Flow = 1

The items are laid out in the view from the top to the bottom.

type QListView__LayoutMode

type QListView__LayoutMode = int

See also batchSize.

const QListView__Batched QListView__LayoutMode = 1

The items are laid out in batches of batchSize items.

const QListView__SinglePass QListView__LayoutMode = 0

The items are laid out all at once.

type QListView__Movement

type QListView__Movement = int
const QListView__Free QListView__Movement = 1

The items can be moved freely by the user.

const QListView__Snap QListView__Movement = 2

The items snap to the specified grid when moved; see setGridSize().

const QListView__Static QListView__Movement = 0

The items cannot be moved by the user.

type QListView__ResizeMode

type QListView__ResizeMode = int
const QListView__Adjust QListView__ResizeMode = 1

The items will be laid out every time the view is resized.

const QListView__Fixed QListView__ResizeMode = 0

The items will only be laid out the first time the view is shown.

type QListView__ViewMode

type QListView__ViewMode = int
const QListView__IconMode QListView__ViewMode = 1

The items are laid out using LeftToRight flow, with Large size and Free movement

const QListView__ListMode QListView__ViewMode = 0

The items are laid out using TopToBottom flow, with Small size and Static movement

type QListWidget

type QListWidget struct {
	*QListView
}

func NewQListWidget

func NewQListWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QListWidget

Constructs an empty QListWidget with the given parent.

func NewQListWidgetFromPointer

func NewQListWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QListWidget

func NewQListWidget__

func NewQListWidget__() *QListWidget

Constructs an empty QListWidget with the given parent.

func (*QListWidget) AddItem

func (this *QListWidget) AddItem(label string)

Inserts an item with the text label at the end of the list widget.

func (*QListWidget) AddItem_1

func (this *QListWidget) AddItem_1(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Inserts an item with the text label at the end of the list widget.

func (*QListWidget) AddItems

func (this *QListWidget) AddItems(labels qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Inserts items with the text labels at the end of the list widget.

See also insertItems().

func (*QListWidget) Clear

func (this *QListWidget) Clear()

Removes all items and selections in the view.

Warning: All items will be permanently deleted.

func (*QListWidget) ClosePersistentEditor

func (this *QListWidget) ClosePersistentEditor(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Closes the persistent editor for the given item.

See also openPersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QListWidget) Count

func (this *QListWidget) Count() int

func (*QListWidget) CurrentItem

func (this *QListWidget) CurrentItem() *QListWidgetItem

Returns the current item.

See also setCurrentItem().

func (*QListWidget) CurrentItemChanged

func (this *QListWidget) CurrentItemChanged(current QListWidgetItem_ITF, previous QListWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.

previous is the item that previously had the focus; current is the new current item.

func (*QListWidget) CurrentRow

func (this *QListWidget) CurrentRow() int

func (*QListWidget) CurrentRowChanged

func (this *QListWidget) CurrentRowChanged(currentRow int)

This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.

currentRow is the row of the current item. If there is no current item, the currentRow is -1.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentRow.

func (*QListWidget) CurrentTextChanged

func (this *QListWidget) CurrentTextChanged(currentText string)

This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes.

currentText is the text data in the current item. If there is no current item, the currentText is invalid.

func (*QListWidget) DropEvent

func (this *QListWidget) DropEvent(event qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QListWidget) DropMimeData

func (this *QListWidget) DropMimeData(index int, data qtcore.QMimeData_ITF, action int) bool

Handles data supplied by an external drag and drop operation that ended with the given action in the given index. Returns true if data and action can be handled by the model; otherwise returns false.

See also supportedDropActions().

func (*QListWidget) EditItem

func (this *QListWidget) EditItem(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Starts editing the item if it is editable.

func (*QListWidget) Event

func (this *QListWidget) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QListWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QListWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QListWidget) IndexFromItem

func (this *QListWidget) IndexFromItem(item QListWidgetItem_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the QModelIndex associated with the given item.

func (*QListWidget) InheritDropMimeData

func (this *QListWidget) InheritDropMimeData(f func(index int, data *qtcore.QMimeData, action int) bool)

bool dropMimeData(int, const class QMimeData *, Qt::DropAction)

func (*QListWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QListWidget) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QListWidget) InheritIndexFromItem

func (this *QListWidget) InheritIndexFromItem(f func(item *QListWidgetItem) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex indexFromItem(class QListWidgetItem *)

func (*QListWidget) InheritItemFromIndex

func (this *QListWidget) InheritItemFromIndex(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) unsafe.Pointer)

QListWidgetItem * itemFromIndex(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QListWidget) InheritMimeTypes

func (this *QListWidget) InheritMimeTypes(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QStringList mimeTypes()

func (*QListWidget) InheritSupportedDropActions

func (this *QListWidget) InheritSupportedDropActions(f func() int)

Qt::DropActions supportedDropActions()

func (*QListWidget) InsertItem

func (this *QListWidget) InsertItem(row int, item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Inserts the item at the position in the list given by row.

See also addItem().

func (*QListWidget) InsertItem_1

func (this *QListWidget) InsertItem_1(row int, label string)

Inserts the item at the position in the list given by row.

See also addItem().

func (*QListWidget) InsertItems

func (this *QListWidget) InsertItems(row int, labels qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Inserts items from the list of labels into the list, starting at the given row.

See also insertItem() and addItem().

func (*QListWidget) IsItemHidden

func (this *QListWidget) IsItemHidden(item QListWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QListWidget) IsItemSelected

func (this *QListWidget) IsItemSelected(item QListWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QListWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen

func (this *QListWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen(item QListWidgetItem_ITF) bool

Returns whether a persistent editor is open for item item.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.10.

See also openPersistentEditor() and closePersistentEditor().

func (*QListWidget) IsSortingEnabled

func (this *QListWidget) IsSortingEnabled() bool

func (*QListWidget) Item

func (this *QListWidget) Item(row int) *QListWidgetItem

Returns the item that occupies the given row in the list if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.

See also row().

func (*QListWidget) ItemActivated

func (this *QListWidget) ItemActivated(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the item is activated. The item is activated when the user clicks or double clicks on it, depending on the system configuration. It is also activated when the user presses the activation key (on Windows and X11 this is the Return key, on Mac OS X it is Command+O).

func (*QListWidget) ItemAt

func (this *QListWidget) ItemAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QListWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates p. The coordinates are relative to the list widget's viewport().

func (*QListWidget) ItemAt_1

func (this *QListWidget) ItemAt_1(x int, y int) *QListWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates p. The coordinates are relative to the list widget's viewport().

func (*QListWidget) ItemChanged

func (this *QListWidget) ItemChanged(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.

func (*QListWidget) ItemClicked

func (this *QListWidget) ItemClicked(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is clicked on an item in the widget.

See also itemPressed() and itemDoubleClicked().

func (*QListWidget) ItemDoubleClicked

func (this *QListWidget) ItemDoubleClicked(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is double clicked on an item in the widget.

See also itemClicked() and itemPressed().

func (*QListWidget) ItemEntered

func (this *QListWidget) ItemEntered(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered. This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.

See also QWidget::setMouseTracking().

func (*QListWidget) ItemFromIndex

func (this *QListWidget) ItemFromIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QListWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the QListWidgetItem associated with the given index.

func (*QListWidget) ItemPressed

func (this *QListWidget) ItemPressed(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted with the specified item when a mouse button is pressed on an item in the widget.

See also itemClicked() and itemDoubleClicked().

func (*QListWidget) ItemSelectionChanged

func (this *QListWidget) ItemSelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.

See also selectedItems(), QListWidgetItem::isSelected(), and currentItemChanged().

func (*QListWidget) ItemWidget

func (this *QListWidget) ItemWidget(item QListWidgetItem_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the widget displayed in the given item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setItemWidget() and removeItemWidget().

func (*QListWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QListWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QListWidget) MimeTypes

func (this *QListWidget) MimeTypes() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of listwidget items.

See also mimeData().

func (*QListWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QListWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QListWidget

func (*QListWidget) OpenPersistentEditor

func (this *QListWidget) OpenPersistentEditor(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Opens an editor for the given item. The editor remains open after editing.

See also closePersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QListWidget) QListWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QListWidget) QListWidget_PTR() *QListWidget

func (*QListWidget) RemoveItemWidget

func (this *QListWidget) RemoveItemWidget(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Removes the widget set on the given item.

To remove an item (row) from the list entirely, either delete the item or use takeItem().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also itemWidget() and setItemWidget().

func (*QListWidget) Row

func (this *QListWidget) Row(item QListWidgetItem_ITF) int

Returns the row containing the given item.

See also item().

func (*QListWidget) ScrollToItem

func (this *QListWidget) ScrollToItem(item QListWidgetItem_ITF, hint int)

Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item is visible.

hint specifies where the item should be located after the operation.

func (*QListWidget) ScrollToItem__

func (this *QListWidget) ScrollToItem__(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item is visible.

hint specifies where the item should be located after the operation.

func (*QListWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QListWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QListWidget) SetCurrentItem

func (this *QListWidget) SetCurrentItem(item QListWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the current item to item.

Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected.

See also currentItem().

func (*QListWidget) SetCurrentItem_1

func (this *QListWidget) SetCurrentItem_1(item QListWidgetItem_ITF, command int)

Sets the current item to item.

Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected.

See also currentItem().

func (*QListWidget) SetCurrentRow

func (this *QListWidget) SetCurrentRow(row int)

func (*QListWidget) SetCurrentRow_1

func (this *QListWidget) SetCurrentRow_1(row int, command int)

func (*QListWidget) SetItemHidden

func (this *QListWidget) SetItemHidden(item QListWidgetItem_ITF, hide bool)

func (*QListWidget) SetItemSelected

func (this *QListWidget) SetItemSelected(item QListWidgetItem_ITF, select_ bool)

func (*QListWidget) SetItemWidget

func (this *QListWidget) SetItemWidget(item QListWidgetItem_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the widget to be displayed in the given item.

This function should only be used to display static content in the place of a list widget item. If you want to display custom dynamic content or implement a custom editor widget, use QListView and subclass QItemDelegate instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also itemWidget(), removeItemWidget(), and Delegate Classes.

func (*QListWidget) SetSelectionModel

func (this *QListWidget) SetSelectionModel(selectionModel qtcore.QItemSelectionModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().

func (*QListWidget) SetSortingEnabled

func (this *QListWidget) SetSortingEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QListWidget) SortItems

func (this *QListWidget) SortItems(order int)

Sorts all the items in the list widget according to the specified order.

func (*QListWidget) SortItems__

func (this *QListWidget) SortItems__()

Sorts all the items in the list widget according to the specified order.

func (*QListWidget) SupportedDropActions

func (this *QListWidget) SupportedDropActions() int

Returns the drop actions supported by this view.

See also Qt::DropActions.

func (*QListWidget) TakeItem

func (this *QListWidget) TakeItem(row int) *QListWidgetItem

Removes and returns the item from the given row in the list widget; otherwise returns 0.

Items removed from a list widget will not be managed by Qt, and will need to be deleted manually.

See also insertItem() and addItem().

func (*QListWidget) VisualItemRect

func (this *QListWidget) VisualItemRect(item QListWidgetItem_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at item.

type QListWidgetItem

type QListWidgetItem struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem(view QListWidget_ITF, type_ int) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItemFromPointer

func NewQListWidgetItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem_1

func NewQListWidgetItem_1(text string, view QListWidget_ITF, type_ int) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem_1_

func NewQListWidgetItem_1_(text string) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem_1_1

func NewQListWidgetItem_1_1(text string, view QListWidget_ITF) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem_2

func NewQListWidgetItem_2(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, view QListWidget_ITF, type_ int) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem_2_

func NewQListWidgetItem_2_(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem_2_1

func NewQListWidgetItem_2_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, view QListWidget_ITF) *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem__

func NewQListWidgetItem__() *QListWidgetItem

func NewQListWidgetItem__1

func NewQListWidgetItem__1(view QListWidget_ITF) *QListWidgetItem

func (*QListWidgetItem) Background

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Background() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QListWidgetItem) BackgroundColor

func (this *QListWidgetItem) BackgroundColor() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QListWidgetItem) CheckState

func (this *QListWidgetItem) CheckState() int

func (*QListWidgetItem) Clone

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Clone() *QListWidgetItem

func (*QListWidgetItem) Data

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Data(role int) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QListWidgetItem) Flags

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Flags() int

func (*QListWidgetItem) Font

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QListWidgetItem) Foreground

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Foreground() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QListWidgetItem) GetCthis

func (this *QListWidgetItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QListWidgetItem) Icon

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Icon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QListWidgetItem) IsHidden

func (this *QListWidgetItem) IsHidden() bool

func (*QListWidgetItem) IsSelected

func (this *QListWidgetItem) IsSelected() bool

func (*QListWidgetItem) ListWidget

func (this *QListWidgetItem) ListWidget() *QListWidget

func (*QListWidgetItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QListWidgetItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QListWidgetItem

func (*QListWidgetItem) Operator_equal

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Operator_equal(other QListWidgetItem_ITF) *QListWidgetItem

func (*QListWidgetItem) Operator_less_than

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Operator_less_than(other QListWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QListWidgetItem) QListWidgetItem_PTR

func (ptr *QListWidgetItem) QListWidgetItem_PTR() *QListWidgetItem

func (*QListWidgetItem) Read

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Read(in qtcore.QDataStream_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetBackground

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetBackground(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetBackgroundColor

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetBackgroundColor(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetCheckState

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetCheckState(state int)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetCthis

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetData

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetData(role int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetFlags

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetFlags(flags int)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetFont

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetForeground

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetForeground(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetHidden

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetHidden(hide bool)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetIcon

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetSelected

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetSelected(select_ bool)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetSizeHint

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetSizeHint(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetStatusTip

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetStatusTip(statusTip string)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetText

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetText(text string)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetTextAlignment

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetTextAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetTextColor

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetTextColor(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetToolTip

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetToolTip(toolTip string)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SetWhatsThis

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SetWhatsThis(whatsThis string)

func (*QListWidgetItem) SizeHint

func (this *QListWidgetItem) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QListWidgetItem) StatusTip

func (this *QListWidgetItem) StatusTip() string

func (*QListWidgetItem) Text

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Text() string

func (*QListWidgetItem) TextAlignment

func (this *QListWidgetItem) TextAlignment() int

func (*QListWidgetItem) TextColor

func (this *QListWidgetItem) TextColor() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QListWidgetItem) ToolTip

func (this *QListWidgetItem) ToolTip() string

func (*QListWidgetItem) Type

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Type() int

func (*QListWidgetItem) WhatsThis

func (this *QListWidgetItem) WhatsThis() string

func (*QListWidgetItem) Write

func (this *QListWidgetItem) Write(out qtcore.QDataStream_ITF)

type QListWidgetItem_ITF

type QListWidgetItem_ITF interface {
	QListWidgetItem_PTR() *QListWidgetItem
}

type QListWidgetItem__ItemType

type QListWidgetItem__ItemType = int
const QListWidgetItem__Type QListWidgetItem__ItemType = 0
const QListWidgetItem__UserType QListWidgetItem__ItemType = 1000

type QListWidget_ITF

type QListWidget_ITF interface {
	QListView_ITF
	QListWidget_PTR() *QListWidget
}

type QMainWindow

type QMainWindow struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQMainWindow

func NewQMainWindow(parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QMainWindow

Constructs a QMainWindow with the given parent and the specified widget flags.

QMainWindow sets the Qt::Window flag itself, and will hence always be created as a top-level widget.

func NewQMainWindowFromPointer

func NewQMainWindowFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMainWindow

func NewQMainWindow__

func NewQMainWindow__() *QMainWindow

Constructs a QMainWindow with the given parent and the specified widget flags.

QMainWindow sets the Qt::Window flag itself, and will hence always be created as a top-level widget.

func NewQMainWindow__1

func NewQMainWindow__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QMainWindow

Constructs a QMainWindow with the given parent and the specified widget flags.

QMainWindow sets the Qt::Window flag itself, and will hence always be created as a top-level widget.

func (*QMainWindow) AddDockWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) AddDockWidget(area int, dockwidget QDockWidget_ITF)

Adds the given dockwidget to the specified area.

func (*QMainWindow) AddDockWidget_1

func (this *QMainWindow) AddDockWidget_1(area int, dockwidget QDockWidget_ITF, orientation int)

Adds the given dockwidget to the specified area.

func (*QMainWindow) AddToolBar

func (this *QMainWindow) AddToolBar(area int, toolbar QToolBar_ITF)

Adds the toolbar into the specified area in this main window. The toolbar is placed at the end of the current tool bar block (i.e. line). If the main window already manages toolbar then it will only move the toolbar to area.

See also insertToolBar(), addToolBarBreak(), and insertToolBarBreak().

func (*QMainWindow) AddToolBarBreak

func (this *QMainWindow) AddToolBarBreak(area int)

Adds a toolbar break to the given area after all the other objects that are present.

func (*QMainWindow) AddToolBarBreak__

func (this *QMainWindow) AddToolBarBreak__()

Adds a toolbar break to the given area after all the other objects that are present.

func (*QMainWindow) AddToolBar_1

func (this *QMainWindow) AddToolBar_1(toolbar QToolBar_ITF)

Adds the toolbar into the specified area in this main window. The toolbar is placed at the end of the current tool bar block (i.e. line). If the main window already manages toolbar then it will only move the toolbar to area.

See also insertToolBar(), addToolBarBreak(), and insertToolBarBreak().

func (*QMainWindow) AddToolBar_2

func (this *QMainWindow) AddToolBar_2(title string) *QToolBar

Adds the toolbar into the specified area in this main window. The toolbar is placed at the end of the current tool bar block (i.e. line). If the main window already manages toolbar then it will only move the toolbar to area.

See also insertToolBar(), addToolBarBreak(), and insertToolBarBreak().

func (*QMainWindow) CentralWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) CentralWidget() *QWidget

Returns the central widget for the main window. This function returns zero if the central widget has not been set.

See also setCentralWidget().

func (*QMainWindow) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QMainWindow) ContextMenuEvent(event qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QMainWindow) Corner

func (this *QMainWindow) Corner(corner int) int

Returns the dock widget area that occupies the specified corner.

See also setCorner().

func (*QMainWindow) CreatePopupMenu

func (this *QMainWindow) CreatePopupMenu() *QMenu

Returns a popup menu containing checkable entries for the toolbars and dock widgets present in the main window. If there are no toolbars and dock widgets present, this function returns a null pointer.

By default, this function is called by the main window when the user activates a context menu, typically by right-clicking on a toolbar or a dock widget.

If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function and return a newly-created popup menu. Ownership of the popup menu is transferred to the caller.

See also addDockWidget(), addToolBar(), and menuBar().

func (*QMainWindow) DockOptions

func (this *QMainWindow) DockOptions() int

func (*QMainWindow) DockWidgetArea

func (this *QMainWindow) DockWidgetArea(dockwidget QDockWidget_ITF) int

Returns the Qt::DockWidgetArea for dockwidget. If dockwidget has not been added to the main window, this function returns Qt::NoDockWidgetArea.

See also addDockWidget(), splitDockWidget(), and Qt::DockWidgetArea.

func (*QMainWindow) DocumentMode

func (this *QMainWindow) DocumentMode() bool

func (*QMainWindow) Event

func (this *QMainWindow) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QMainWindow) GetCthis

func (this *QMainWindow) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QMainWindow) IconSize

func (this *QMainWindow) IconSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QMainWindow) IconSizeChanged

func (this *QMainWindow) IconSizeChanged(iconSize qtcore.QSize_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the size of the icons used in the window is changed. The new icon size is passed in iconSize.

You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.

See also setIconSize().

func (*QMainWindow) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QMainWindow) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QMainWindow) InheritEvent

func (this *QMainWindow) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QMainWindow) InsertToolBar

func (this *QMainWindow) InsertToolBar(before QToolBar_ITF, toolbar QToolBar_ITF)

Inserts the toolbar into the area occupied by the before toolbar so that it appears before it. For example, in normal left-to-right layout operation, this means that toolbar will appear to the left of the toolbar specified by before in a horizontal toolbar area.

See also insertToolBarBreak(), addToolBar(), and addToolBarBreak().

func (*QMainWindow) InsertToolBarBreak

func (this *QMainWindow) InsertToolBarBreak(before QToolBar_ITF)

Inserts a toolbar break before the toolbar specified by before.

func (*QMainWindow) IsAnimated

func (this *QMainWindow) IsAnimated() bool

func (*QMainWindow) IsDockNestingEnabled

func (this *QMainWindow) IsDockNestingEnabled() bool

func (*QMainWindow) IsSeparator

func (this *QMainWindow) IsSeparator(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) bool

func (*QMainWindow) MenuBar

func (this *QMainWindow) MenuBar() *QMenuBar

Returns the menu bar for the main window. This function creates and returns an empty menu bar if the menu bar does not exist.

If you want all windows in a Mac application to share one menu bar, don't use this function to create it, because the menu bar created here will have this QMainWindow as its parent. Instead, you must create a menu bar that does not have a parent, which you can then share among all the Mac windows. Create a parent-less menu bar this way:

QMenuBar *menuBar = new QMenuBar(0);

See also setMenuBar().

func (*QMainWindow) MenuWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) MenuWidget() *QWidget

Returns the menu bar for the main window. This function returns null if a menu bar hasn't been constructed yet.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setMenuWidget().

func (*QMainWindow) MetaObject

func (this *QMainWindow) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QMainWindow) NewFromPointer

func (*QMainWindow) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMainWindow

func (*QMainWindow) QMainWindow_PTR

func (ptr *QMainWindow) QMainWindow_PTR() *QMainWindow

func (*QMainWindow) RemoveDockWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) RemoveDockWidget(dockwidget QDockWidget_ITF)

Removes the dockwidget from the main window layout and hides it. Note that the dockwidget is not deleted.

func (*QMainWindow) RemoveToolBar

func (this *QMainWindow) RemoveToolBar(toolbar QToolBar_ITF)

Removes the toolbar from the main window layout and hides it. Note that the toolbar is not deleted.

func (*QMainWindow) RemoveToolBarBreak

func (this *QMainWindow) RemoveToolBarBreak(before QToolBar_ITF)

Removes a toolbar break previously inserted before the toolbar specified by before.

func (*QMainWindow) RestoreDockWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) RestoreDockWidget(dockwidget QDockWidget_ITF) bool

Restores the state of dockwidget if it is created after the call to restoreState(). Returns true if the state was restored; otherwise returns false.

See also restoreState() and saveState().

func (*QMainWindow) RestoreState

func (this *QMainWindow) RestoreState(state qtcore.QByteArray_ITF, version int) bool

Restores the state of this mainwindow's toolbars and dockwidgets. Also restores the corner settings too. The version number is compared with that stored in state. If they do not match, the mainwindow's state is left unchanged, and this function returns false; otherwise, the state is restored, and this function returns true.

To restore geometry saved using QSettings, you can use code like this:

void MainWindow::readSettings()
{
    QSettings settings("MyCompany", "MyApp");
    restoreGeometry(settings.value("myWidget/geometry").toByteArray());
    restoreState(settings.value("myWidget/windowState").toByteArray());
}

See also saveState(), QWidget::saveGeometry(), QWidget::restoreGeometry(), and restoreDockWidget().

func (*QMainWindow) RestoreState__

func (this *QMainWindow) RestoreState__(state qtcore.QByteArray_ITF) bool

Restores the state of this mainwindow's toolbars and dockwidgets. Also restores the corner settings too. The version number is compared with that stored in state. If they do not match, the mainwindow's state is left unchanged, and this function returns false; otherwise, the state is restored, and this function returns true.

To restore geometry saved using QSettings, you can use code like this:

void MainWindow::readSettings()
{
    QSettings settings("MyCompany", "MyApp");
    restoreGeometry(settings.value("myWidget/geometry").toByteArray());
    restoreState(settings.value("myWidget/windowState").toByteArray());
}

See also saveState(), QWidget::saveGeometry(), QWidget::restoreGeometry(), and restoreDockWidget().

func (*QMainWindow) SaveState

func (this *QMainWindow) SaveState(version int) *qtcore.QByteArray

Saves the current state of this mainwindow's toolbars and dockwidgets. This includes the corner settings which can be set with setCorner(). The version number is stored as part of the data.

The objectName property is used to identify each QToolBar and QDockWidget. You should make sure that this property is unique for each QToolBar and QDockWidget you add to the QMainWindow

To restore the saved state, pass the return value and version number to restoreState().

To save the geometry when the window closes, you can implement a close event like this:

void MyMainWindow::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)
{
    QSettings settings("MyCompany", "MyApp");
    settings.setValue("geometry", saveGeometry());
    settings.setValue("windowState", saveState());
    QMainWindow::closeEvent(event);
}

See also restoreState(), QWidget::saveGeometry(), and QWidget::restoreGeometry().

func (*QMainWindow) SaveState__

func (this *QMainWindow) SaveState__() *qtcore.QByteArray

Saves the current state of this mainwindow's toolbars and dockwidgets. This includes the corner settings which can be set with setCorner(). The version number is stored as part of the data.

The objectName property is used to identify each QToolBar and QDockWidget. You should make sure that this property is unique for each QToolBar and QDockWidget you add to the QMainWindow

To restore the saved state, pass the return value and version number to restoreState().

To save the geometry when the window closes, you can implement a close event like this:

void MyMainWindow::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)
{
    QSettings settings("MyCompany", "MyApp");
    settings.setValue("geometry", saveGeometry());
    settings.setValue("windowState", saveState());
    QMainWindow::closeEvent(event);
}

See also restoreState(), QWidget::saveGeometry(), and QWidget::restoreGeometry().

func (*QMainWindow) SetAnimated

func (this *QMainWindow) SetAnimated(enabled bool)

func (*QMainWindow) SetCentralWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) SetCentralWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the given widget to be the main window's central widget.

Note: QMainWindow takes ownership of the widget pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.

See also centralWidget().

func (*QMainWindow) SetCorner

func (this *QMainWindow) SetCorner(corner int, area int)

Sets the given dock widget area to occupy the specified corner.

See also corner().

func (*QMainWindow) SetCthis

func (this *QMainWindow) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QMainWindow) SetDockNestingEnabled

func (this *QMainWindow) SetDockNestingEnabled(enabled bool)

func (*QMainWindow) SetDockOptions

func (this *QMainWindow) SetDockOptions(options int)

func (*QMainWindow) SetDocumentMode

func (this *QMainWindow) SetDocumentMode(enabled bool)

func (*QMainWindow) SetIconSize

func (this *QMainWindow) SetIconSize(iconSize qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QMainWindow) SetMenuBar

func (this *QMainWindow) SetMenuBar(menubar QMenuBar_ITF)

Sets the menu bar for the main window to menuBar.

Note: QMainWindow takes ownership of the menuBar pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.

See also menuBar().

func (*QMainWindow) SetMenuWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) SetMenuWidget(menubar QWidget_ITF)

Sets the menu bar for the main window to menuBar.

QMainWindow takes ownership of the menuBar pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also menuWidget().

func (*QMainWindow) SetStatusBar

func (this *QMainWindow) SetStatusBar(statusbar QStatusBar_ITF)

Sets the status bar for the main window to statusbar.

Setting the status bar to 0 will remove it from the main window. Note that QMainWindow takes ownership of the statusbar pointer and deletes it at the appropriate time.

See also statusBar().

func (*QMainWindow) SetTabPosition

func (this *QMainWindow) SetTabPosition(areas int, tabPosition int)

Sets the tab position for the given dock widget areas to the specified tabPosition. By default, all dock areas show their tabs at the bottom.

Note: The VerticalTabs dock option overrides the tab positions set by this method.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also tabPosition() and setTabShape().

func (*QMainWindow) SetTabShape

func (this *QMainWindow) SetTabShape(tabShape int)

func (*QMainWindow) SetToolButtonStyle

func (this *QMainWindow) SetToolButtonStyle(toolButtonStyle int)

func (*QMainWindow) SetUnifiedTitleAndToolBarOnMac

func (this *QMainWindow) SetUnifiedTitleAndToolBarOnMac(set bool)

func (*QMainWindow) SplitDockWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) SplitDockWidget(after QDockWidget_ITF, dockwidget QDockWidget_ITF, orientation int)

Splits the space covered by the first dock widget into two parts, moves the first dock widget into the first part, and moves the second dock widget into the second part.

The orientation specifies how the space is divided: A Qt::Horizontal split places the second dock widget to the right of the first; a Qt::Vertical split places the second dock widget below the first.

Note: if first is currently in a tabbed docked area, second will be added as a new tab, not as a neighbor of first. This is because a single tab can contain only one dock widget.

Note: The Qt::LayoutDirection influences the order of the dock widgets in the two parts of the divided area. When right-to-left layout direction is enabled, the placing of the dock widgets will be reversed.

See also tabifyDockWidget(), addDockWidget(), and removeDockWidget().

func (*QMainWindow) StatusBar

func (this *QMainWindow) StatusBar() *QStatusBar

Returns the status bar for the main window. This function creates and returns an empty status bar if the status bar does not exist.

See also setStatusBar().

func (*QMainWindow) TabPosition

func (this *QMainWindow) TabPosition(area int) int

Returns the tab position for area.

Note: The VerticalTabs dock option overrides the tab positions returned by this function.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also setTabPosition() and tabShape().

func (*QMainWindow) TabShape

func (this *QMainWindow) TabShape() int

func (*QMainWindow) TabifiedDockWidgetActivated

func (this *QMainWindow) TabifiedDockWidgetActivated(dockWidget QDockWidget_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the tabified dock widget is activated by selecting the tab. The activated dock widget is passed in dockWidget.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also tabifyDockWidget() and tabifiedDockWidgets().

func (*QMainWindow) TabifyDockWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) TabifyDockWidget(first QDockWidget_ITF, second QDockWidget_ITF)

Moves second dock widget on top of first dock widget, creating a tabbed docked area in the main window.

See also tabifiedDockWidgets().

func (*QMainWindow) TakeCentralWidget

func (this *QMainWindow) TakeCentralWidget() *QWidget

Removes the central widget from this main window.

The ownership of the removed widget is passed to the caller.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QMainWindow) ToolBarArea

func (this *QMainWindow) ToolBarArea(toolbar QToolBar_ITF) int

Returns the Qt::ToolBarArea for toolbar. If toolbar has not been added to the main window, this function returns Qt::NoToolBarArea.

See also addToolBar(), addToolBarBreak(), and Qt::ToolBarArea.

func (*QMainWindow) ToolBarBreak

func (this *QMainWindow) ToolBarBreak(toolbar QToolBar_ITF) bool

Returns whether there is a toolbar break before the toolbar.

See also addToolBarBreak() and insertToolBarBreak().

func (*QMainWindow) ToolButtonStyle

func (this *QMainWindow) ToolButtonStyle() int

func (*QMainWindow) ToolButtonStyleChanged

func (this *QMainWindow) ToolButtonStyleChanged(toolButtonStyle int)

This signal is emitted when the style used for tool buttons in the window is changed. The new style is passed in toolButtonStyle.

You can connect this signal to other components to help maintain a consistent appearance for your application.

See also setToolButtonStyle().

func (*QMainWindow) UnifiedTitleAndToolBarOnMac

func (this *QMainWindow) UnifiedTitleAndToolBarOnMac() bool

type QMainWindow_ITF

type QMainWindow_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QMainWindow_PTR() *QMainWindow
}

type QMainWindow__DockOption

type QMainWindow__DockOption = int
const QMainWindow__AllowNestedDocks QMainWindow__DockOption = 2
const QMainWindow__AllowTabbedDocks QMainWindow__DockOption = 4
const QMainWindow__AnimatedDocks QMainWindow__DockOption = 1
const QMainWindow__ForceTabbedDocks QMainWindow__DockOption = 8
const QMainWindow__GroupedDragging QMainWindow__DockOption = 32
const QMainWindow__VerticalTabs QMainWindow__DockOption = 16

type QMdiArea

type QMdiArea struct {
	*QAbstractScrollArea
}

func NewQMdiArea

func NewQMdiArea(parent QWidget_ITF) *QMdiArea

Constructs an empty mdi area. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.

func NewQMdiAreaFromPointer

func NewQMdiAreaFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMdiArea

func NewQMdiArea__

func NewQMdiArea__() *QMdiArea

Constructs an empty mdi area. parent is passed to QWidget's constructor.

func (*QMdiArea) ActivateNextSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) ActivateNextSubWindow()

Gives the keyboard focus to another window in the list of child windows. The window activated will be the next one determined by the current activation order.

See also activatePreviousSubWindow() and QMdiArea::WindowOrder.

func (*QMdiArea) ActivatePreviousSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) ActivatePreviousSubWindow()

Gives the keyboard focus to another window in the list of child windows. The window activated will be the previous one determined by the current activation order.

See also activateNextSubWindow() and QMdiArea::WindowOrder.

func (*QMdiArea) ActivationOrder

func (this *QMdiArea) ActivationOrder() int

func (*QMdiArea) ActiveSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) ActiveSubWindow() *QMdiSubWindow

Returns a pointer to the current active subwindow. If no window is currently active, 0 is returned.

Subwindows are treated as top-level windows with respect to window state, i.e., if a widget outside the MDI area is the active window, no subwindow will be active. Note that if a widget in the window in which the MDI area lives gains focus, the window will be activated.

See also setActiveSubWindow() and Qt::WindowState.

func (*QMdiArea) AddSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) AddSubWindow(widget QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QMdiSubWindow

Adds widget as a new subwindow to the MDI area. If windowFlags are non-zero, they will override the flags set on the widget.

The widget can be either a QMdiSubWindow or another QWidget (in which case the MDI area will create a subwindow and set the widget as the internal widget).

Note: Once the subwindow has been added, its parent will be the viewport widget of the QMdiArea.

QMdiArea mdiArea;
QMdiSubWindow *subWindow1 = new QMdiSubWindow;
subWindow1->setWidget(internalWidget1);
subWindow1->setAttribute(Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose);
mdiArea.addSubWindow(subWindow1);

QMdiSubWindow *subWindow2 =
    mdiArea.addSubWindow(internalWidget2);

When you create your own subwindow, you must set the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose widget attribute if you want the window to be deleted when closed in the MDI area. If not, the window will be hidden and the MDI area will not activate the next subwindow.

Returns the QMdiSubWindow that is added to the MDI area.

See also removeSubWindow().

func (*QMdiArea) AddSubWindow__

func (this *QMdiArea) AddSubWindow__(widget QWidget_ITF) *QMdiSubWindow

Adds widget as a new subwindow to the MDI area. If windowFlags are non-zero, they will override the flags set on the widget.

The widget can be either a QMdiSubWindow or another QWidget (in which case the MDI area will create a subwindow and set the widget as the internal widget).

Note: Once the subwindow has been added, its parent will be the viewport widget of the QMdiArea.

QMdiArea mdiArea;
QMdiSubWindow *subWindow1 = new QMdiSubWindow;
subWindow1->setWidget(internalWidget1);
subWindow1->setAttribute(Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose);
mdiArea.addSubWindow(subWindow1);

QMdiSubWindow *subWindow2 =
    mdiArea.addSubWindow(internalWidget2);

When you create your own subwindow, you must set the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose widget attribute if you want the window to be deleted when closed in the MDI area. If not, the window will be hidden and the MDI area will not activate the next subwindow.

Returns the QMdiSubWindow that is added to the MDI area.

See also removeSubWindow().

func (*QMdiArea) Background

func (this *QMdiArea) Background() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QMdiArea) CascadeSubWindows

func (this *QMdiArea) CascadeSubWindows()

Arranges all the child windows in a cascade pattern.

See also tileSubWindows().

func (*QMdiArea) ChildEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) ChildEvent(childEvent qtcore.QChildEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().

func (*QMdiArea) CloseActiveSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) CloseActiveSubWindow()

Closes the active subwindow.

See also closeAllSubWindows().

func (*QMdiArea) CloseAllSubWindows

func (this *QMdiArea) CloseAllSubWindows()

Closes all subwindows by sending a QCloseEvent to each window. You may receive subWindowActivated() signals from subwindows before they are closed (if the MDI area activates the subwindow when another is closing).

Subwindows that ignore the close event will remain open.

See also closeActiveSubWindow().

func (*QMdiArea) CurrentSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) CurrentSubWindow() *QMdiSubWindow

Returns a pointer to the current subwindow, or 0 if there is no current subwindow.

This function will return the same as activeSubWindow() if the QApplication containing QMdiArea is active.

See also activeSubWindow() and QApplication::activeWindow().

func (*QMdiArea) DocumentMode

func (this *QMdiArea) DocumentMode() bool

func (*QMdiArea) Event

func (this *QMdiArea) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QMdiArea) EventFilter

func (this *QMdiArea) EventFilter(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QMdiArea) GetCthis

func (this *QMdiArea) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QMdiArea) InheritChildEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritChildEvent(f func(childEvent *qtcore.QChildEvent))

void childEvent(class QChildEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritEventFilter(f func(object *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritPaintEvent(f func(paintEvent *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritResizeEvent(f func(resizeEvent *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritSetupViewport

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritSetupViewport(f func(viewport *QWidget))

void setupViewport(class QWidget *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritShowEvent(f func(showEvent *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritTimerEvent(f func(timerEvent *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) InheritViewportEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) InheritViewportEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool viewportEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMdiArea) MetaObject

func (this *QMdiArea) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QMdiArea) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QMdiArea) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QMdiArea) NewFromPointer

func (*QMdiArea) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMdiArea

func (*QMdiArea) PaintEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) PaintEvent(paintEvent qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QMdiArea) QMdiArea_PTR

func (ptr *QMdiArea) QMdiArea_PTR() *QMdiArea

func (*QMdiArea) RemoveSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) RemoveSubWindow(widget QWidget_ITF)

Removes widget from the MDI area. The widget must be either a QMdiSubWindow or a widget that is the internal widget of a subwindow. Note widget is never actually deleted by QMdiArea. If a QMdiSubWindow is passed in its parent is set to 0 and it is removed, but if an internal widget is passed in the child widget is set to 0 but the QMdiSubWindow is not removed.

See also addSubWindow().

func (*QMdiArea) ResizeEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) ResizeEvent(resizeEvent qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QMdiArea) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QMdiArea) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().

func (*QMdiArea) SetActivationOrder

func (this *QMdiArea) SetActivationOrder(order int)

func (*QMdiArea) SetActiveSubWindow

func (this *QMdiArea) SetActiveSubWindow(window QMdiSubWindow_ITF)

Activates the subwindow window. If window is 0, any current active window is deactivated.

See also activeSubWindow().

func (*QMdiArea) SetBackground

func (this *QMdiArea) SetBackground(background qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QMdiArea) SetCthis

func (this *QMdiArea) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QMdiArea) SetDocumentMode

func (this *QMdiArea) SetDocumentMode(enabled bool)

func (*QMdiArea) SetOption

func (this *QMdiArea) SetOption(option int, on bool)

If on is true, option is enabled on the MDI area; otherwise it is disabled. See AreaOption for the effect of each option.

See also AreaOption and testOption().

func (*QMdiArea) SetOption__

func (this *QMdiArea) SetOption__(option int)

If on is true, option is enabled on the MDI area; otherwise it is disabled. See AreaOption for the effect of each option.

See also AreaOption and testOption().

func (*QMdiArea) SetTabPosition

func (this *QMdiArea) SetTabPosition(position int)

func (*QMdiArea) SetTabShape

func (this *QMdiArea) SetTabShape(shape int)

func (*QMdiArea) SetTabsClosable

func (this *QMdiArea) SetTabsClosable(closable bool)

func (*QMdiArea) SetTabsMovable

func (this *QMdiArea) SetTabsMovable(movable bool)

func (*QMdiArea) SetViewMode

func (this *QMdiArea) SetViewMode(mode int)

func (*QMdiArea) SetupViewport

func (this *QMdiArea) SetupViewport(viewport QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::setupViewport().

This slot is called by QAbstractScrollArea after setViewport() has been called. Reimplement this function in a subclass of QMdiArea to initialize the new viewport before it is used.

See also setViewport().

func (*QMdiArea) ShowEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) ShowEvent(showEvent qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QMdiArea) SizeHint

func (this *QMdiArea) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QMdiArea) SubWindowActivated

func (this *QMdiArea) SubWindowActivated(arg0 QMdiSubWindow_ITF)

QMdiArea emits this signal after window has been activated. When window is 0, QMdiArea has just deactivated its last active window, and there are no active windows on the workspace.

See also QMdiArea::activeSubWindow().

func (*QMdiArea) TabPosition

func (this *QMdiArea) TabPosition() int

func (*QMdiArea) TabShape

func (this *QMdiArea) TabShape() int

func (*QMdiArea) TabsClosable

func (this *QMdiArea) TabsClosable() bool

func (*QMdiArea) TabsMovable

func (this *QMdiArea) TabsMovable() bool

func (*QMdiArea) TestOption

func (this *QMdiArea) TestOption(opton int) bool

Returns true if option is enabled; otherwise returns false.

See also AreaOption and setOption().

func (*QMdiArea) TileSubWindows

func (this *QMdiArea) TileSubWindows()

Arranges all child windows in a tile pattern.

See also cascadeSubWindows().

func (*QMdiArea) TimerEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) TimerEvent(timerEvent qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QMdiArea) ViewMode

func (this *QMdiArea) ViewMode() int

func (*QMdiArea) ViewportEvent

func (this *QMdiArea) ViewportEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().

type QMdiArea_ITF

type QMdiArea_ITF interface {
	QAbstractScrollArea_ITF
	QMdiArea_PTR() *QMdiArea
}

type QMdiArea__AreaOption

type QMdiArea__AreaOption = int
const QMdiArea__DontMaximizeSubWindowOnActivation QMdiArea__AreaOption = 1

type QMdiArea__ViewMode

type QMdiArea__ViewMode = int

This enum describes the view mode of the area; i.e. how sub-windows will be displayed.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.

See also setViewMode().

const QMdiArea__SubWindowView QMdiArea__ViewMode = 0

Display sub-windows with window frames (default).

const QMdiArea__TabbedView QMdiArea__ViewMode = 1

Display sub-windows with tabs in a tab bar.

type QMdiArea__WindowOrder

type QMdiArea__WindowOrder = int

Specifies the criteria to use for ordering the list of child windows returned by subWindowList(). The functions cascadeSubWindows() and tileSubWindows() follow this order when arranging the windows.

See also subWindowList().

const QMdiArea__ActivationHistoryOrder QMdiArea__WindowOrder = 2

The windows are returned in the order in which they were activated.

const QMdiArea__CreationOrder QMdiArea__WindowOrder = 0

The windows are returned in the order of their creation.

const QMdiArea__StackingOrder QMdiArea__WindowOrder = 1

The windows are returned in the order in which they are stacked, with the top-most window being last in the list.

type QMdiSubWindow

type QMdiSubWindow struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQMdiSubWindow

func NewQMdiSubWindow(parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QMdiSubWindow

Constructs a new QMdiSubWindow widget. The parent and flags arguments are passed to QWidget's constructor.

Instead of using addSubWindow(), it is also simply possible to use setParent() when you add the subwindow to a QMdiArea.

Note that only QMdiSubWindows can be set as children of QMdiArea; you cannot, for instance, write:

//bad code
QMdiArea mdiArea;
QTextEdit editor(&mdiArea); // invalid child widget

See also QMdiArea::addSubWindow().

func NewQMdiSubWindowFromPointer

func NewQMdiSubWindowFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMdiSubWindow

func NewQMdiSubWindow__

func NewQMdiSubWindow__() *QMdiSubWindow

Constructs a new QMdiSubWindow widget. The parent and flags arguments are passed to QWidget's constructor.

Instead of using addSubWindow(), it is also simply possible to use setParent() when you add the subwindow to a QMdiArea.

Note that only QMdiSubWindows can be set as children of QMdiArea; you cannot, for instance, write:

//bad code
QMdiArea mdiArea;
QTextEdit editor(&mdiArea); // invalid child widget

See also QMdiArea::addSubWindow().

func NewQMdiSubWindow__1

func NewQMdiSubWindow__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QMdiSubWindow

Constructs a new QMdiSubWindow widget. The parent and flags arguments are passed to QWidget's constructor.

Instead of using addSubWindow(), it is also simply possible to use setParent() when you add the subwindow to a QMdiArea.

Note that only QMdiSubWindows can be set as children of QMdiArea; you cannot, for instance, write:

//bad code
QMdiArea mdiArea;
QTextEdit editor(&mdiArea); // invalid child widget

See also QMdiArea::addSubWindow().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) AboutToActivate

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) AboutToActivate()

QMdiSubWindow emits this signal immediately before it is activated. After the subwindow has been activated, the QMdiArea that manages the subwindow will also emit the subWindowActivated() signal.

See also QMdiArea::subWindowActivated().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) ChangeEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) ChangeEvent(changeEvent qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) ChildEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) ChildEvent(childEvent qtcore.QChildEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) CloseEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) CloseEvent(closeEvent qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) ContextMenuEvent(contextMenuEvent qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) Event

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) EventFilter

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) EventFilter(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) FocusInEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) FocusInEvent(focusInEvent qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) FocusOutEvent(focusOutEvent qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) GetCthis

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QMdiSubWindow) HideEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) HideEvent(hideEvent qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritChangeEvent(f func(changeEvent *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritChildEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritChildEvent(f func(childEvent *qtcore.QChildEvent))

void childEvent(class QChildEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritCloseEvent(f func(closeEvent *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(contextMenuEvent *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritEventFilter(f func(object *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(focusInEvent *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(focusOutEvent *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritHideEvent(f func(hideEvent *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(keyEvent *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritLeaveEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritLeaveEvent(f func(leaveEvent *qtcore.QEvent))

void leaveEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(mouseEvent *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(mouseEvent *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(mouseEvent *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(mouseEvent *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritMoveEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritMoveEvent(f func(moveEvent *qtgui.QMoveEvent))

void moveEvent(class QMoveEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritPaintEvent(f func(paintEvent *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritResizeEvent(f func(resizeEvent *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritShowEvent(f func(showEvent *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) InheritTimerEvent(f func(timerEvent *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) IsShaded

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) IsShaded() bool

Returns true if this window is shaded; otherwise returns false.

A window is shaded if it is collapsed so that only the title bar is visible.

func (*QMdiSubWindow) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) KeyPressEvent(keyEvent qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) KeyboardPageStep

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) KeyboardPageStep() int

func (*QMdiSubWindow) KeyboardSingleStep

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) KeyboardSingleStep() int

func (*QMdiSubWindow) LeaveEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) LeaveEvent(leaveEvent qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MaximizedButtonsWidget

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MaximizedButtonsWidget() *QWidget

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MaximizedSystemMenuIconWidget

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MaximizedSystemMenuIconWidget() *QWidget

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MdiArea

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MdiArea() *QMdiArea

Returns the area containing this sub-window, or 0 if there is none.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also QMdiArea::addSubWindow().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MetaObject

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MouseDoubleClickEvent(mouseEvent qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MouseMoveEvent(mouseEvent qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MousePressEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MousePressEvent(mouseEvent qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MouseReleaseEvent(mouseEvent qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) MoveEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) MoveEvent(moveEvent qtgui.QMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::moveEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) NewFromPointer

func (*QMdiSubWindow) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMdiSubWindow

func (*QMdiSubWindow) PaintEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) PaintEvent(paintEvent qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) QMdiSubWindow_PTR

func (ptr *QMdiSubWindow) QMdiSubWindow_PTR() *QMdiSubWindow

func (*QMdiSubWindow) ResizeEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) ResizeEvent(resizeEvent qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

Warning: When maximizing or restoring a subwindow, the resulting call to this function may have an invalid QResizeEvent::oldSize().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SetCthis

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SetKeyboardPageStep

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SetKeyboardPageStep(step int)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SetKeyboardSingleStep

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SetKeyboardSingleStep(step int)

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SetOption

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SetOption(option int, on bool)

If on is true, option is enabled on the subwindow; otherwise it is disabled. See SubWindowOption for the effect of each option.

See also SubWindowOption and testOption().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SetOption__

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SetOption__(option int)

If on is true, option is enabled on the subwindow; otherwise it is disabled. See SubWindowOption for the effect of each option.

See also SubWindowOption and testOption().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SetSystemMenu

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SetSystemMenu(systemMenu QMenu_ITF)

Sets systemMenu as the current system menu for this subwindow.

By default, each QMdiSubWindow has a standard system menu.

QActions for the system menu created by QMdiSubWindow will automatically be updated depending on the current window state; e.g., the minimize action will be disabled after the window is minimized.

QActions added by the user are not updated by QMdiSubWindow.

QMdiSubWindow takes ownership of systemMenu; you do not have to delete it. Any existing menus will be deleted.

See also systemMenu() and showSystemMenu().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SetWidget

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets widget as the internal widget of this subwindow. The internal widget is displayed in the center of the subwindow beneath the title bar.

QMdiSubWindow takes temporary ownership of widget; you do not have to delete it. Any existing internal widget will be removed and reparented to the root window.

See also widget().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) ShowEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) ShowEvent(showEvent qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) ShowShaded

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) ShowShaded()

Calling this function makes the subwindow enter the shaded mode. When the subwindow is shaded, only the title bar is visible.

Although shading is not supported by all styles, this function will still show the subwindow as shaded, regardless of whether support for shading is available. However, when used with styles without shading support, the user will be unable to return from shaded mode through the user interface (e.g., through a shade button in the title bar).

See also isShaded().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) ShowSystemMenu

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) ShowSystemMenu()

Shows the system menu below the system menu icon in the title bar.

See also setSystemMenu() and systemMenu().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SizeHint

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) SystemMenu

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) SystemMenu() *QMenu

Returns a pointer to the current system menu, or zero if no system menu is set. QMdiSubWindow provides a default system menu, but you can also set the menu with setSystemMenu().

See also setSystemMenu() and showSystemMenu().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) TestOption

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) TestOption(arg0 int) bool

Returns true if option is enabled; otherwise returns false.

See also SubWindowOption and setOption().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) TimerEvent

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) TimerEvent(timerEvent qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) Widget

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) Widget() *QWidget

Returns the current internal widget.

See also setWidget().

func (*QMdiSubWindow) WindowStateChanged

func (this *QMdiSubWindow) WindowStateChanged(oldState int, newState int)

QMdiSubWindow emits this signal after the window state changes. oldState is the window state before it changed, and newState is the new, current state.

type QMdiSubWindow_ITF

type QMdiSubWindow_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QMdiSubWindow_PTR() *QMdiSubWindow
}

type QMdiSubWindow__SubWindowOption

type QMdiSubWindow__SubWindowOption = int
const QMdiSubWindow__AllowOutsideAreaHorizontally QMdiSubWindow__SubWindowOption = 1
const QMdiSubWindow__AllowOutsideAreaVertically QMdiSubWindow__SubWindowOption = 2
const QMdiSubWindow__RubberBandMove QMdiSubWindow__SubWindowOption = 8
const QMdiSubWindow__RubberBandResize QMdiSubWindow__SubWindowOption = 4

type QMenu

type QMenu struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQMenu

func NewQMenu(parent QWidget_ITF) *QMenu

Constructs a menu with parent parent.

Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other QObject).

func NewQMenuFromPointer

func NewQMenuFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMenu

func NewQMenu_1

func NewQMenu_1(title string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QMenu

Constructs a menu with parent parent.

Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other QObject).

func NewQMenu_1_

func NewQMenu_1_(title string) *QMenu

Constructs a menu with parent parent.

Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other QObject).

func NewQMenu__

func NewQMenu__() *QMenu

Constructs a menu with parent parent.

Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other QObject).

func (*QMenu) AboutToHide

func (this *QMenu) AboutToHide()

This signal is emitted just before the menu is hidden from the user.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also aboutToShow() and hide().

func (*QMenu) AboutToShow

func (this *QMenu) AboutToShow()

This signal is emitted just before the menu is shown to the user.

See also aboutToHide() and show().

func (*QMenu) ActionAt

func (this *QMenu) ActionAt(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QAction

Returns the item at pt; returns 0 if there is no item there.

func (*QMenu) ActionEvent

func (this *QMenu) ActionEvent(arg0 qtgui.QActionEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().

func (*QMenu) ActionGeometry

func (this *QMenu) ActionGeometry(arg0 QAction_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of action act.

func (*QMenu) ActiveAction

func (this *QMenu) ActiveAction() *QAction

Returns the currently highlighted action, or 0 if no action is currently highlighted.

See also setActiveAction().

func (*QMenu) AddAction

func (this *QMenu) AddAction(text string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddAction_1

func (this *QMenu) AddAction_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddAction_2

func (this *QMenu) AddAction_2(text string, receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string, shortcut qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddAction_2_

func (this *QMenu) AddAction_2_(text string, receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddAction_3

func (this *QMenu) AddAction_3(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string, shortcut qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddAction_3_

func (this *QMenu) AddAction_3_(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddMenu

func (this *QMenu) AddMenu(menu QMenu_ITF) *QAction

This convenience function adds menu as a submenu to this menu. It returns menu's menuAction(). This menu does not take ownership of menu.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().

func (*QMenu) AddMenu_1

func (this *QMenu) AddMenu_1(title string) *QMenu

This convenience function adds menu as a submenu to this menu. It returns menu's menuAction(). This menu does not take ownership of menu.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().

func (*QMenu) AddMenu_2

func (this *QMenu) AddMenu_2(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, title string) *QMenu

This convenience function adds menu as a submenu to this menu. It returns menu's menuAction(). This menu does not take ownership of menu.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().

func (*QMenu) AddSection

func (this *QMenu) AddSection(text string) *QAction

This convenience function creates a new section action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true but also having text hint, and adds the new action to this menu's list of actions. It returns the newly created action.

The rendering of the hint is style and platform dependent. Widget styles can use the text information in the rendering for sections, or can choose to ignore it and render sections like simple separators.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.1.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddSection_1

func (this *QMenu) AddSection_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QAction

This convenience function creates a new section action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true but also having text hint, and adds the new action to this menu's list of actions. It returns the newly created action.

The rendering of the hint is style and platform dependent. Widget styles can use the text information in the rendering for sections, or can choose to ignore it and render sections like simple separators.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.1.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) AddSeparator

func (this *QMenu) AddSeparator() *QAction

This convenience function creates a new separator action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true, and adds the new action to this menu's list of actions. It returns the newly created action.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::addAction().

func (*QMenu) ChangeEvent

func (this *QMenu) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QMenu) Clear

func (this *QMenu) Clear()

Removes all the menu's actions. Actions owned by the menu and not shown in any other widget are deleted.

See also removeAction().

func (*QMenu) ColumnCount

func (this *QMenu) ColumnCount() int

If a menu does not fit on the screen it lays itself out so that it does fit. It is style dependent what layout means (for example, on Windows it will use multiple columns).

This functions returns the number of columns necessary.

func (*QMenu) DefaultAction

func (this *QMenu) DefaultAction() *QAction

Returns the current default action.

See also setDefaultAction().

func (*QMenu) EnterEvent

func (this *QMenu) EnterEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::enterEvent().

func (*QMenu) Event

func (this *QMenu) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QMenu) Exec

func (this *QMenu) Exec() *QAction

Executes this menu synchronously.

This is equivalent to exec(pos()).

This returns the triggered QAction in either the popup menu or one of its submenus, or 0 if no item was triggered (normally because the user pressed Esc).

In most situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for example, the current mouse position:

exec(QCursor::pos());

or aligned to a widget:

exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0)));

or in reaction to a QMouseEvent *e:

exec(e->globalPos());

func (*QMenu) Exec_1

func (this *QMenu) Exec_1(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, at QAction_ITF) *QAction

Executes this menu synchronously.

This is equivalent to exec(pos()).

This returns the triggered QAction in either the popup menu or one of its submenus, or 0 if no item was triggered (normally because the user pressed Esc).

In most situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for example, the current mouse position:

exec(QCursor::pos());

or aligned to a widget:

exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0)));

or in reaction to a QMouseEvent *e:

exec(e->globalPos());

func (*QMenu) Exec_1_

func (this *QMenu) Exec_1_(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QAction

Executes this menu synchronously.

This is equivalent to exec(pos()).

This returns the triggered QAction in either the popup menu or one of its submenus, or 0 if no item was triggered (normally because the user pressed Esc).

In most situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for example, the current mouse position:

exec(QCursor::pos());

or aligned to a widget:

exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0)));

or in reaction to a QMouseEvent *e:

exec(e->globalPos());

func (*QMenu) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QMenu) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QMenu) GetCthis

func (this *QMenu) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QMenu) HideEvent

func (this *QMenu) HideEvent(arg0 qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QMenu) HideTearOffMenu

func (this *QMenu) HideTearOffMenu()

This function will forcibly hide the torn off menu making it disappear from the user's desktop.

See also showTearOffMenu(), isTearOffMenuVisible(), and isTearOffEnabled().

func (*QMenu) Hovered

func (this *QMenu) Hovered(action QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.

Often this is used to update status information.

See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().

func (*QMenu) Icon

func (this *QMenu) Icon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QMenu) InheritActionEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritActionEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QActionEvent))

void actionEvent(class QActionEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritColumnCount

func (this *QMenu) InheritColumnCount(f func() int)

int columnCount()

func (*QMenu) InheritEnterEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritEnterEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void enterEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QMenu) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QMenu) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritHideEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QMenu) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionMenuItem, action *QAction))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionMenuItem *, const class QAction *)

func (*QMenu) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritLeaveEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritLeaveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void leaveEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritTimerEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QMenu) InheritWheelEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QMenu) InitStyleOption

func (this *QMenu) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionMenuItem_ITF, action QAction_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this menu and information from action. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionMenuItem, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QMenuBar::initStyleOption().

func (*QMenu) InsertMenu

func (this *QMenu) InsertMenu(before QAction_ITF, menu QMenu_ITF) *QAction

This convenience function inserts menu before action before and returns the menus menuAction().

See also QWidget::insertAction() and addMenu().

func (*QMenu) InsertSection

func (this *QMenu) InsertSection(before QAction_ITF, text string) *QAction

This convenience function creates a new title action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true but also having text hint. The function inserts the newly created action into this menu's list of actions before action before and returns it.

The rendering of the hint is style and platform dependent. Widget styles can use the text information in the rendering for sections, or can choose to ignore it and render sections like simple separators.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.1.

See also QWidget::insertAction() and addSection().

func (*QMenu) InsertSection_1

func (this *QMenu) InsertSection_1(before QAction_ITF, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QAction

This convenience function creates a new title action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true but also having text hint. The function inserts the newly created action into this menu's list of actions before action before and returns it.

The rendering of the hint is style and platform dependent. Widget styles can use the text information in the rendering for sections, or can choose to ignore it and render sections like simple separators.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.1.

See also QWidget::insertAction() and addSection().

func (*QMenu) InsertSeparator

func (this *QMenu) InsertSeparator(before QAction_ITF) *QAction

This convenience function creates a new separator action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true. The function inserts the newly created action into this menu's list of actions before action before and returns it.

QMenu takes ownership of the returned QAction.

See also QWidget::insertAction() and addSeparator().

func (*QMenu) IsEmpty

func (this *QMenu) IsEmpty() bool

Returns true if there are no visible actions inserted into the menu, false otherwise.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also QWidget::actions().

func (*QMenu) IsTearOffEnabled

func (this *QMenu) IsTearOffEnabled() bool

func (*QMenu) IsTearOffMenuVisible

func (this *QMenu) IsTearOffMenuVisible() bool

When a menu is torn off a second menu is shown to display the menu contents in a new window. When the menu is in this mode and the menu is visible returns true; otherwise false.

See also showTearOffMenu(), hideTearOffMenu(), and isTearOffEnabled().

func (*QMenu) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QMenu) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QMenu) LeaveEvent

func (this *QMenu) LeaveEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().

func (*QMenu) MenuAction

func (this *QMenu) MenuAction() *QAction

Returns the action associated with this menu.

func (*QMenu) MetaObject

func (this *QMenu) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QMenu) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QMenu) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QMenu) MousePressEvent

func (this *QMenu) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QMenu) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QMenu) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QMenu) NewFromPointer

func (*QMenu) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMenu

func (*QMenu) PaintEvent

func (this *QMenu) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QMenu) Popup

func (this *QMenu) Popup(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, at QAction_ITF)

Displays the menu so that the action atAction will be at the specified global position p. To translate a widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use QWidget::mapToGlobal().

When positioning a menu with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that you cannot rely on the menu's current size(). For performance reasons, the menu adapts its size only when necessary, so in many cases, the size before and after the show is different. Instead, use sizeHint() which calculates the proper size depending on the menu's current contents.

See also QWidget::mapToGlobal() and exec().

func (*QMenu) Popup__

func (this *QMenu) Popup__(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

Displays the menu so that the action atAction will be at the specified global position p. To translate a widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use QWidget::mapToGlobal().

When positioning a menu with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that you cannot rely on the menu's current size(). For performance reasons, the menu adapts its size only when necessary, so in many cases, the size before and after the show is different. Instead, use sizeHint() which calculates the proper size depending on the menu's current contents.

See also QWidget::mapToGlobal() and exec().

func (*QMenu) QMenu_PTR

func (ptr *QMenu) QMenu_PTR() *QMenu

func (*QMenu) SeparatorsCollapsible

func (this *QMenu) SeparatorsCollapsible() bool

func (*QMenu) SetActiveAction

func (this *QMenu) SetActiveAction(act QAction_ITF)

Sets the currently highlighted action to act.

See also activeAction().

func (*QMenu) SetCthis

func (this *QMenu) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QMenu) SetDefaultAction

func (this *QMenu) SetDefaultAction(arg0 QAction_ITF)

This sets the default action to act. The default action may have a visual cue, depending on the current QStyle. A default action usually indicates what will happen by default when a drop occurs.

See also defaultAction().

func (*QMenu) SetIcon

func (this *QMenu) SetIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QMenu) SetNoReplayFor

func (this *QMenu) SetNoReplayFor(widget QWidget_ITF)

func (*QMenu) SetSeparatorsCollapsible

func (this *QMenu) SetSeparatorsCollapsible(collapse bool)

func (*QMenu) SetTearOffEnabled

func (this *QMenu) SetTearOffEnabled(arg0 bool)

func (*QMenu) SetTitle

func (this *QMenu) SetTitle(title string)

func (*QMenu) SetToolTipsVisible

func (this *QMenu) SetToolTipsVisible(visible bool)

func (*QMenu) ShowTearOffMenu

func (this *QMenu) ShowTearOffMenu()

This function will forcibly show the torn off menu making it appear on the user's desktop at the specified global position pos.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.7.

See also hideTearOffMenu(), isTearOffMenuVisible(), and isTearOffEnabled().

func (*QMenu) ShowTearOffMenu_1

func (this *QMenu) ShowTearOffMenu_1(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

This function will forcibly show the torn off menu making it appear on the user's desktop at the specified global position pos.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.7.

See also hideTearOffMenu(), isTearOffMenuVisible(), and isTearOffEnabled().

func (*QMenu) SizeHint

func (this *QMenu) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QMenu) TimerEvent

func (this *QMenu) TimerEvent(arg0 qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QMenu) Title

func (this *QMenu) Title() string

func (*QMenu) ToolTipsVisible

func (this *QMenu) ToolTipsVisible() bool

func (*QMenu) Triggered

func (this *QMenu) Triggered(action QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when an action in this menu is triggered.

action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.

Normally, you connect each menu action's triggered() signal to its own custom slot, but sometimes you will want to connect several actions to a single slot, for example, when you have a group of closely related actions, such as "left justify", "center", "right justify".

Note: This signal is emitted for the main parent menu in a hierarchy. Hence, only the parent menu needs to be connected to a slot; sub-menus need not be connected.

See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().

func (*QMenu) WheelEvent

func (this *QMenu) WheelEvent(arg0 qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QMenuBar

type QMenuBar struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQMenuBar

func NewQMenuBar(parent QWidget_ITF) *QMenuBar

Constructs a menu bar with parent parent.

func NewQMenuBarFromPointer

func NewQMenuBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMenuBar

func NewQMenuBar__

func NewQMenuBar__() *QMenuBar

Constructs a menu bar with parent parent.

func (*QMenuBar) ActionAt

func (this *QMenuBar) ActionAt(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QAction

Returns the QAction at pt. Returns 0 if there is no action at pt or if the location has a separator.

See also addAction() and addSeparator().

func (*QMenuBar) ActionEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) ActionEvent(arg0 qtgui.QActionEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) ActionGeometry

func (this *QMenuBar) ActionGeometry(arg0 QAction_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of action act as a QRect.

See also actionAt().

func (*QMenuBar) ActiveAction

func (this *QMenuBar) ActiveAction() *QAction

Returns the QAction that is currently highlighted. A null pointer will be returned if no action is currently selected.

See also setActiveAction().

func (*QMenuBar) AddAction

func (this *QMenuBar) AddAction(text string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QWidget::actions().

func (*QMenuBar) AddAction_1

func (this *QMenuBar) AddAction_1(text string, receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

This convenience function creates a new action with text. The function adds the newly created action to the menu's list of actions, and returns it.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QWidget::actions().

func (*QMenuBar) AddMenu

func (this *QMenuBar) AddMenu(menu QMenu_ITF) *QAction

Appends menu to the menu bar. Returns the menu's menuAction().

Note: The returned QAction object can be used to hide the corresponding menu.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().

func (*QMenuBar) AddMenu_1

func (this *QMenuBar) AddMenu_1(title string) *QMenu

Appends menu to the menu bar. Returns the menu's menuAction().

Note: The returned QAction object can be used to hide the corresponding menu.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().

func (*QMenuBar) AddMenu_2

func (this *QMenuBar) AddMenu_2(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, title string) *QMenu

Appends menu to the menu bar. Returns the menu's menuAction().

Note: The returned QAction object can be used to hide the corresponding menu.

See also QWidget::addAction() and QMenu::menuAction().

func (*QMenuBar) AddSeparator

func (this *QMenuBar) AddSeparator() *QAction

Appends a separator to the menu.

func (*QMenuBar) ChangeEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) Clear

func (this *QMenuBar) Clear()

Removes all the actions from the menu bar.

Note: On macOS, menu items that have been merged to the system menu bar are not removed by this function. One way to handle this would be to remove the extra actions yourself. You can set the menu role on the different menus, so that you know ahead of time which menu items get merged and which do not. Then decide what to recreate or remove yourself.

See also removeAction().

func (*QMenuBar) CornerWidget

func (this *QMenuBar) CornerWidget(corner int) *QWidget

Returns the widget on the left of the first or on the right of the last menu item, depending on corner.

Note: Using a corner other than Qt::TopRightCorner or Qt::TopLeftCorner will result in a warning.

See also setCornerWidget().

func (*QMenuBar) CornerWidget__

func (this *QMenuBar) CornerWidget__() *QWidget

Returns the widget on the left of the first or on the right of the last menu item, depending on corner.

Note: Using a corner other than Qt::TopRightCorner or Qt::TopLeftCorner will result in a warning.

See also setCornerWidget().

func (*QMenuBar) Event

func (this *QMenuBar) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QMenuBar) EventFilter

func (this *QMenuBar) EventFilter(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QMenuBar) FocusInEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) FocusInEvent(arg0 qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) FocusOutEvent(arg0 qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) GetCthis

func (this *QMenuBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QMenuBar) HeightForWidth

func (this *QMenuBar) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().

func (*QMenuBar) Hovered

func (this *QMenuBar) Hovered(action QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when a menu action is highlighted; action is the action that caused the event to be sent.

Often this is used to update status information.

See also triggered() and QAction::hovered().

func (*QMenuBar) InheritActionEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritActionEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QActionEvent))

void actionEvent(class QActionEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritEventFilter(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QObject, arg1 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionMenuItem, action *QAction))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionMenuItem *, const class QAction *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritLeaveEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritLeaveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void leaveEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) InheritTimerEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QMenuBar) InitStyleOption

func (this *QMenuBar) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionMenuItem_ITF, action QAction_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from the menu bar and information from action. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionMenuItem, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QMenu::initStyleOption().

func (*QMenuBar) InsertMenu

func (this *QMenuBar) InsertMenu(before QAction_ITF, menu QMenu_ITF) *QAction

This convenience function inserts menu before action before and returns the menus menuAction().

See also QWidget::insertAction() and addMenu().

func (*QMenuBar) InsertSeparator

func (this *QMenuBar) InsertSeparator(before QAction_ITF) *QAction

This convenience function creates a new separator action, i.e. an action with QAction::isSeparator() returning true. The function inserts the newly created action into this menu bar's list of actions before action before and returns it.

See also QWidget::insertAction() and addSeparator().

func (*QMenuBar) IsDefaultUp

func (this *QMenuBar) IsDefaultUp() bool

func (*QMenuBar) IsNativeMenuBar

func (this *QMenuBar) IsNativeMenuBar() bool

func (*QMenuBar) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) LeaveEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) LeaveEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) MetaObject

func (this *QMenuBar) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QMenuBar) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QMenuBar) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QMenuBar) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) MousePressEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QMenuBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMenuBar

func (*QMenuBar) PaintEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) QMenuBar_PTR

func (ptr *QMenuBar) QMenuBar_PTR() *QMenuBar

func (*QMenuBar) ResizeEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) SetActiveAction

func (this *QMenuBar) SetActiveAction(action QAction_ITF)

Sets the currently highlighted action to act.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also activeAction().

func (*QMenuBar) SetCornerWidget

func (this *QMenuBar) SetCornerWidget(w QWidget_ITF, corner int)

This sets the given widget to be shown directly on the left of the first menu item, or on the right of the last menu item, depending on corner.

The menu bar takes ownership of widget, reparenting it into the menu bar. However, if the corner already contains a widget, this previous widget will no longer be managed and will still be a visible child of the menu bar.

Note: Using a corner other than Qt::TopRightCorner or Qt::TopLeftCorner will result in a warning.

See also cornerWidget().

func (*QMenuBar) SetCornerWidget__

func (this *QMenuBar) SetCornerWidget__(w QWidget_ITF)

This sets the given widget to be shown directly on the left of the first menu item, or on the right of the last menu item, depending on corner.

The menu bar takes ownership of widget, reparenting it into the menu bar. However, if the corner already contains a widget, this previous widget will no longer be managed and will still be a visible child of the menu bar.

Note: Using a corner other than Qt::TopRightCorner or Qt::TopLeftCorner will result in a warning.

See also cornerWidget().

func (*QMenuBar) SetCthis

func (this *QMenuBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QMenuBar) SetDefaultUp

func (this *QMenuBar) SetDefaultUp(arg0 bool)

func (*QMenuBar) SetNativeMenuBar

func (this *QMenuBar) SetNativeMenuBar(nativeMenuBar bool)

func (*QMenuBar) SetVisible

func (this *QMenuBar) SetVisible(visible bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QMenuBar) SizeHint

func (this *QMenuBar) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QMenuBar) TimerEvent

func (this *QMenuBar) TimerEvent(arg0 qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QMenuBar) Triggered

func (this *QMenuBar) Triggered(action QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when an action in a menu belonging to this menubar is triggered as a result of a mouse click; action is the action that caused the signal to be emitted.

Note: QMenuBar has to have ownership of the QMenu in order this signal to work.

Normally, you connect each menu action to a single slot using QAction::triggered(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.

See also hovered() and QAction::triggered().

type QMenuBar_ITF

type QMenuBar_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QMenuBar_PTR() *QMenuBar
}

type QMenu_ITF

type QMenu_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QMenu_PTR() *QMenu
}

type QMessageBox

type QMessageBox struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQMessageBox

func NewQMessageBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBoxFromPointer

func NewQMessageBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMessageBox

func NewQMessageBox_1

func NewQMessageBox_1(icon int, title string, text string, buttons int, parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBox_1_

func NewQMessageBox_1_(icon int, title string, text string) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBox_1_1

func NewQMessageBox_1_1(icon int, title string, text string, buttons int) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBox_1_2

func NewQMessageBox_1_2(icon int, title string, text string, buttons int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBox_2

func NewQMessageBox_2(title string, text string, icon int, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int, parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBox_2_

func NewQMessageBox_2_(title string, text string, icon int, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBox_2_1

func NewQMessageBox_2_1(title string, text string, icon int, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func NewQMessageBox__

func NewQMessageBox__() *QMessageBox

Constructs a message box with no text and no buttons. parent is passed to the QDialog constructor.

On macOS, if you want your message box to appear as a Qt::Sheet of its parent, set the message box's window modality to Qt::WindowModal or use open(). Otherwise, the message box will be a standard dialog.

func (*QMessageBox) About

func (this *QMessageBox) About(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string)

Displays a simple about box with title title and text text. The about box's parent is parent.

about() looks for a suitable icon in four locations:

func (*QMessageBox) AboutQt

func (this *QMessageBox) AboutQt(parent QWidget_ITF, title string)

Displays a simple message box about Qt, with the given title and centered over parent (if parent is not 0). The message includes the version number of Qt being used by the application.

This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application, as shown in the Menus example.

QApplication provides this functionality as a slot.

On macOS, the about box is popped up as a modeless window; on other platforms, it is currently application modal.

See also QApplication::aboutQt().

func (*QMessageBox) AboutQt__

func (this *QMessageBox) AboutQt__(parent QWidget_ITF)

Displays a simple message box about Qt, with the given title and centered over parent (if parent is not 0). The message includes the version number of Qt being used by the application.

This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application, as shown in the Menus example.

QApplication provides this functionality as a slot.

On macOS, the about box is popped up as a modeless window; on other platforms, it is currently application modal.

See also QApplication::aboutQt().

func (*QMessageBox) AddButton

func (this *QMessageBox) AddButton(button QAbstractButton_ITF, role int)

Adds the given button to the message box with the specified role.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also removeButton(), button(), and setStandardButtons().

func (*QMessageBox) AddButton_1

func (this *QMessageBox) AddButton_1(text string, role int) *QPushButton

Adds the given button to the message box with the specified role.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also removeButton(), button(), and setStandardButtons().

func (*QMessageBox) AddButton_2

func (this *QMessageBox) AddButton_2(button int) *QPushButton

Adds the given button to the message box with the specified role.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also removeButton(), button(), and setStandardButtons().

func (*QMessageBox) Button

func (this *QMessageBox) Button(which int) *QAbstractButton

Returns a pointer corresponding to the standard button which, or 0 if the standard button doesn't exist in this message box.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also standardButtons and standardButton().

func (*QMessageBox) ButtonClicked

func (this *QMessageBox) ButtonClicked(button QAbstractButton_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever a button is clicked inside the QMessageBox. The button that was clicked in returned in button.

func (*QMessageBox) ButtonRole

func (this *QMessageBox) ButtonRole(button QAbstractButton_ITF) int

Returns the button role for the specified button. This function returns InvalidRole if button is 0 or has not been added to the message box.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also buttons() and addButton().

func (*QMessageBox) ButtonText

func (this *QMessageBox) ButtonText(button int) string

func (*QMessageBox) ChangeEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QMessageBox) CheckBox

func (this *QMessageBox) CheckBox() *QCheckBox

Returns the checkbox shown on the dialog. This is 0 if no checkbox is set.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also setCheckBox().

func (*QMessageBox) ClickedButton

func (this *QMessageBox) ClickedButton() *QAbstractButton

Returns the button that was clicked by the user, or 0 if the user hit the Esc key and no escape button was set.

If exec() hasn't been called yet, returns 0.

Example:

QMessageBox messageBox(this);
QAbstractButton *disconnectButton =
      messageBox.addButton(tr("Disconnect"), QMessageBox::ActionRole);
...
messageBox.exec();
if (messageBox.clickedButton() == disconnectButton) {
    ...
}

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also standardButton() and button().

func (*QMessageBox) CloseEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) CloseEvent(event qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_1_

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_1_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_2_

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_2_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_2_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_2_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_2_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_2_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_2_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_2_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical__

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) Critical__1

func (this *QMessageBox) Critical__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int) int

Opens a critical message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and information().

func (*QMessageBox) DefaultButton

func (this *QMessageBox) DefaultButton() *QPushButton

Returns the button that should be the message box's default button. Returns 0 if no default button was set.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setDefaultButton(), addButton(), and QPushButton::setDefault().

func (*QMessageBox) DetailedText

func (this *QMessageBox) DetailedText() string

func (*QMessageBox) EscapeButton

func (this *QMessageBox) EscapeButton() *QAbstractButton

Returns the button that is activated when escape is pressed.

By default, QMessageBox attempts to automatically detect an escape button as follows:

func (*QMessageBox) Event

func (this *QMessageBox) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QMessageBox) GetCthis

func (this *QMessageBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QMessageBox) Icon

func (this *QMessageBox) Icon() int

func (*QMessageBox) IconPixmap

func (this *QMessageBox) IconPixmap() *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QMessageBox) Information

func (this *QMessageBox) Information(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_1_

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_1_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_1_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_1_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_2_

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_2_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_2_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_2_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_2_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_2_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_2_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_2_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information_3_

func (this *QMessageBox) Information_3_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information__

func (this *QMessageBox) Information__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Information__1

func (this *QMessageBox) Information__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int) int

Opens an information message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) InformativeText

func (this *QMessageBox) InformativeText() string

func (*QMessageBox) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QMessageBox) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) InheritCloseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QMessageBox) InheritEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QMessageBox) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QMessageBox) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QMessageBox) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) InheritShowEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QMessageBox) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QMessageBox) MetaObject

func (this *QMessageBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QMessageBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QMessageBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMessageBox

func (*QMessageBox) Open

func (this *QMessageBox) Open(receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string)

This is an overloaded function.

Opens the dialog and connects its finished() or buttonClicked() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member. If the slot in member has a pointer for its first parameter the connection is to buttonClicked(), otherwise the connection is to finished().

The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.

func (*QMessageBox) QMessageBox_PTR

func (ptr *QMessageBox) QMessageBox_PTR() *QMessageBox

func (*QMessageBox) Question

func (this *QMessageBox) Question(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_1_

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_1_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_1_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_1_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_2_

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_2_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_2_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_2_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_2_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_2_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_2_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_2_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Question_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question__

func (this *QMessageBox) Question__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Question__1

func (this *QMessageBox) Question__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int) int

Opens a question message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also information(), warning(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) RemoveButton

func (this *QMessageBox) RemoveButton(button QAbstractButton_ITF)

Removes button from the button box without deleting it.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also addButton() and setStandardButtons().

func (*QMessageBox) ResizeEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QMessageBox) SetButtonText

func (this *QMessageBox) SetButtonText(button int, text string)

func (*QMessageBox) SetCheckBox

func (this *QMessageBox) SetCheckBox(cb QCheckBox_ITF)

Sets the checkbox cb on the message dialog. The message box takes ownership of the checkbox. The argument cb can be 0 to remove an existing checkbox from the message box.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also checkBox().

func (*QMessageBox) SetCthis

func (this *QMessageBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QMessageBox) SetDefaultButton

func (this *QMessageBox) SetDefaultButton(button QPushButton_ITF)

Sets the message box's default button to button.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also defaultButton(), addButton(), and QPushButton::setDefault().

func (*QMessageBox) SetDefaultButton_1

func (this *QMessageBox) SetDefaultButton_1(button int)

Sets the message box's default button to button.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also defaultButton(), addButton(), and QPushButton::setDefault().

func (*QMessageBox) SetDetailedText

func (this *QMessageBox) SetDetailedText(text string)

func (*QMessageBox) SetEscapeButton

func (this *QMessageBox) SetEscapeButton(button QAbstractButton_ITF)

Sets the button that gets activated when the Escape key is pressed to button.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also escapeButton(), addButton(), and clickedButton().

func (*QMessageBox) SetEscapeButton_1

func (this *QMessageBox) SetEscapeButton_1(button int)

Sets the button that gets activated when the Escape key is pressed to button.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also escapeButton(), addButton(), and clickedButton().

func (*QMessageBox) SetIcon

func (this *QMessageBox) SetIcon(arg0 int)

func (*QMessageBox) SetIconPixmap

func (this *QMessageBox) SetIconPixmap(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

func (*QMessageBox) SetInformativeText

func (this *QMessageBox) SetInformativeText(text string)

func (*QMessageBox) SetStandardButtons

func (this *QMessageBox) SetStandardButtons(buttons int)

func (*QMessageBox) SetText

func (this *QMessageBox) SetText(text string)

func (*QMessageBox) SetTextFormat

func (this *QMessageBox) SetTextFormat(format int)

func (*QMessageBox) SetTextInteractionFlags

func (this *QMessageBox) SetTextInteractionFlags(flags int)

func (*QMessageBox) SetWindowModality

func (this *QMessageBox) SetWindowModality(windowModality int)

This function shadows QWidget::setWindowModality().

Sets the modality of the message box to windowModality.

On macOS, if the modality is set to Qt::WindowModal and the message box has a parent, then the message box will be a Qt::Sheet, otherwise the message box will be a standard dialog.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QMessageBox) SetWindowTitle

func (this *QMessageBox) SetWindowTitle(title string)

This function shadows QWidget::setWindowTitle().

Sets the title of the message box to title. On macOS, the window title is ignored (as required by the macOS Guidelines).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QMessageBox) ShowEvent

func (this *QMessageBox) ShowEvent(event qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QMessageBox) StandardButton

func (this *QMessageBox) StandardButton(button QAbstractButton_ITF) int

Returns the standard button enum value corresponding to the given button, or NoButton if the given button isn't a standard button.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also button() and standardButtons().

func (*QMessageBox) StandardButtons

func (this *QMessageBox) StandardButtons() int

func (*QMessageBox) StandardIcon

func (this *QMessageBox) StandardIcon(icon int) *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QMessageBox) Text

func (this *QMessageBox) Text() string

func (*QMessageBox) TextFormat

func (this *QMessageBox) TextFormat() int

func (*QMessageBox) TextInteractionFlags

func (this *QMessageBox) TextInteractionFlags() int

func (*QMessageBox) Warning

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int, defaultButton int) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int, button2 int) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_1_

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_1_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int, escapeButtonNumber int) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_2_

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_2_(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_2_1

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_2_1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_2_2

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_2_2(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_2_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_2_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0Text string, button1Text string, button2Text string, defaultButtonNumber int) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning_3

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning_3(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, button0 int, button1 int) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning__

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning__(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

func (*QMessageBox) Warning__1

func (this *QMessageBox) Warning__1(parent QWidget_ITF, title string, text string, buttons int) int

Opens a warning message box with the given title and text in front of the specified parent widget.

The standard buttons are added to the message box. defaultButton specifies the button used when Enter is pressed. defaultButton must refer to a button that was given in buttons. If defaultButton is QMessageBox::NoButton, QMessageBox chooses a suitable default automatically.

Returns the identity of the standard button that was clicked. If Esc was pressed instead, the escape button is returned.

The message box is an application modal dialog box.

Warning: Do not delete parent during the execution of the dialog. If you want to do this, you should create the dialog yourself using one of the QMessageBox constructors.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also question(), information(), and critical().

type QMessageBox_ITF

type QMessageBox_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QMessageBox_PTR() *QMessageBox
}

type QMessageBox__ButtonRole

type QMessageBox__ButtonRole = int

This enum describes the roles that can be used to describe buttons in the button box. Combinations of these roles are as flags used to describe different aspects of their behavior.

See also StandardButton.

const QMessageBox__AcceptRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 0

Clicking the button causes the dialog to be accepted (e.g. OK).

const QMessageBox__ActionRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 3

Clicking the button causes changes to the elements within the dialog.

const QMessageBox__ApplyRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 8

The button applies current changes.

const QMessageBox__DestructiveRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 2

Clicking the button causes a destructive change (e.g. for Discarding Changes) and closes the dialog.

const QMessageBox__HelpRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 4

The button can be clicked to request help.

const QMessageBox__InvalidRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = -1
const QMessageBox__NRoles QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 9
const QMessageBox__NoRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 6

The button is a "No"-like button.

const QMessageBox__RejectRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 1

Clicking the button causes the dialog to be rejected (e.g. Cancel).

const QMessageBox__ResetRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 7

The button resets the dialog's fields to default values.

const QMessageBox__YesRole QMessageBox__ButtonRole = 5

The button is a "Yes"-like button.

type QMessageBox__Icon

type QMessageBox__Icon = int

This enum has the following values:

const QMessageBox__Critical QMessageBox__Icon = 3

an icon indicating that the message represents a critical problem.

const QMessageBox__Information QMessageBox__Icon = 1

an icon indicating that the message is nothing out of the ordinary.

const QMessageBox__NoIcon QMessageBox__Icon = 0

the message box does not have any icon.

const QMessageBox__Question QMessageBox__Icon = 4

an icon indicating that the message is asking a question.

const QMessageBox__Warning QMessageBox__Icon = 2

an icon indicating that the message is a warning, but can be dealt with.

type QMessageBox__StandardButton

type QMessageBox__StandardButton = int
const QMessageBox__Abort QMessageBox__StandardButton = 262144
const QMessageBox__Apply QMessageBox__StandardButton = 33554432
const QMessageBox__ButtonMask QMessageBox__StandardButton = -769
const QMessageBox__Cancel QMessageBox__StandardButton = 4194304
const QMessageBox__Close QMessageBox__StandardButton = 2097152
const QMessageBox__Default QMessageBox__StandardButton = 256
const QMessageBox__Discard QMessageBox__StandardButton = 8388608
const QMessageBox__Escape QMessageBox__StandardButton = 512
const QMessageBox__FirstButton QMessageBox__StandardButton = 1024
const QMessageBox__FlagMask QMessageBox__StandardButton = 768
const QMessageBox__Help QMessageBox__StandardButton = 16777216
const QMessageBox__Ignore QMessageBox__StandardButton = 1048576
const QMessageBox__LastButton QMessageBox__StandardButton = 134217728
const QMessageBox__No QMessageBox__StandardButton = 65536
const QMessageBox__NoAll QMessageBox__StandardButton = 131072
const QMessageBox__NoButton QMessageBox__StandardButton = 0
const QMessageBox__NoToAll QMessageBox__StandardButton = 131072
const QMessageBox__Ok QMessageBox__StandardButton = 1024
const QMessageBox__Open QMessageBox__StandardButton = 8192
const QMessageBox__Reset QMessageBox__StandardButton = 67108864
const QMessageBox__RestoreDefaults QMessageBox__StandardButton = 134217728
const QMessageBox__Retry QMessageBox__StandardButton = 524288
const QMessageBox__Save QMessageBox__StandardButton = 2048
const QMessageBox__SaveAll QMessageBox__StandardButton = 4096
const QMessageBox__Yes QMessageBox__StandardButton = 16384
const QMessageBox__YesAll QMessageBox__StandardButton = 32768
const QMessageBox__YesToAll QMessageBox__StandardButton = 32768

type QMouseEventTransition

type QMouseEventTransition struct {
	*qtcore.QEventTransition
}

func NewQMouseEventTransition

func NewQMouseEventTransition(sourceState qtcore.QState_ITF) *QMouseEventTransition

Constructs a new mouse event transition with the given sourceState.

func NewQMouseEventTransitionFromPointer

func NewQMouseEventTransitionFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QMouseEventTransition

func NewQMouseEventTransition_1

func NewQMouseEventTransition_1(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, type_ int, button int, sourceState qtcore.QState_ITF) *QMouseEventTransition

Constructs a new mouse event transition with the given sourceState.

func NewQMouseEventTransition_1_

func NewQMouseEventTransition_1_(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, type_ int, button int) *QMouseEventTransition

Constructs a new mouse event transition with the given sourceState.

func NewQMouseEventTransition__

func NewQMouseEventTransition__() *QMouseEventTransition

Constructs a new mouse event transition with the given sourceState.

func (*QMouseEventTransition) Button

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) Button() int

Returns the button that this mouse event transition checks for.

Note: Getter function for property button.

See also setButton().

func (*QMouseEventTransition) EventTest

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) EventTest(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::eventTest().

func (*QMouseEventTransition) GetCthis

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QMouseEventTransition) HitTestPath

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) HitTestPath() *qtgui.QPainterPath

Returns the hit test path for this mouse event transition.

See also setHitTestPath().

func (*QMouseEventTransition) InheritEventTest

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) InheritEventTest(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventTest(class QEvent *)

func (*QMouseEventTransition) InheritOnTransition

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) InheritOnTransition(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void onTransition(class QEvent *)

func (*QMouseEventTransition) MetaObject

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QMouseEventTransition) ModifierMask

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) ModifierMask() int

Returns the keyboard modifier mask that this mouse event transition checks for.

Note: Getter function for property modifierMask.

See also setModifierMask().

func (*QMouseEventTransition) NewFromPointer

func (*QMouseEventTransition) OnTransition

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) OnTransition(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractTransition::onTransition().

func (*QMouseEventTransition) QMouseEventTransition_PTR

func (ptr *QMouseEventTransition) QMouseEventTransition_PTR() *QMouseEventTransition

func (*QMouseEventTransition) SetButton

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) SetButton(button int)

Sets the button that this mouse event transition will check for.

Note: Setter function for property button.

See also button().

func (*QMouseEventTransition) SetCthis

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QMouseEventTransition) SetHitTestPath

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) SetHitTestPath(path qtgui.QPainterPath_ITF)

Sets the hit test path for this mouse event transition to path. If a valid path has been set, the transition will only trigger if the mouse event position (QMouseEvent::pos()) is inside the path.

See also hitTestPath() and QPainterPath::contains().

func (*QMouseEventTransition) SetModifierMask

func (this *QMouseEventTransition) SetModifierMask(modifiers int)

Sets the keyboard modifier mask that this mouse event transition will check for to modifierMask.

Note: Setter function for property modifierMask.

See also modifierMask().

type QMouseEventTransition_ITF

type QMouseEventTransition_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QEventTransition_ITF
	QMouseEventTransition_PTR() *QMouseEventTransition
}

type QPanGesture

type QPanGesture struct {
	*QGesture
}

func NewQPanGesture

func NewQPanGesture(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QPanGesture

func NewQPanGestureFromPointer

func NewQPanGestureFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPanGesture

func NewQPanGesture__

func NewQPanGesture__() *QPanGesture

func (*QPanGesture) Acceleration

func (this *QPanGesture) Acceleration() float64

func (*QPanGesture) Delta

func (this *QPanGesture) Delta() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QPanGesture) GetCthis

func (this *QPanGesture) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QPanGesture) LastOffset

func (this *QPanGesture) LastOffset() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QPanGesture) MetaObject

func (this *QPanGesture) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QPanGesture) NewFromPointer

func (*QPanGesture) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPanGesture

func (*QPanGesture) Offset

func (this *QPanGesture) Offset() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QPanGesture) QPanGesture_PTR

func (ptr *QPanGesture) QPanGesture_PTR() *QPanGesture

func (*QPanGesture) SetAcceleration

func (this *QPanGesture) SetAcceleration(value float64)

func (*QPanGesture) SetCthis

func (this *QPanGesture) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QPanGesture) SetLastOffset

func (this *QPanGesture) SetLastOffset(value qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QPanGesture) SetOffset

func (this *QPanGesture) SetOffset(value qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

type QPanGesture_ITF

type QPanGesture_ITF interface {
	QGesture_ITF
	QPanGesture_PTR() *QPanGesture
}

type QPinchGesture

type QPinchGesture struct {
	*QGesture
}

func NewQPinchGesture

func NewQPinchGesture(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QPinchGesture

func NewQPinchGestureFromPointer

func NewQPinchGestureFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPinchGesture

func NewQPinchGesture__

func NewQPinchGesture__() *QPinchGesture

func (*QPinchGesture) CenterPoint

func (this *QPinchGesture) CenterPoint() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QPinchGesture) ChangeFlags

func (this *QPinchGesture) ChangeFlags() int

func (*QPinchGesture) GetCthis

func (this *QPinchGesture) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QPinchGesture) LastCenterPoint

func (this *QPinchGesture) LastCenterPoint() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QPinchGesture) LastRotationAngle

func (this *QPinchGesture) LastRotationAngle() float64

func (*QPinchGesture) LastScaleFactor

func (this *QPinchGesture) LastScaleFactor() float64

func (*QPinchGesture) MetaObject

func (this *QPinchGesture) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QPinchGesture) NewFromPointer

func (*QPinchGesture) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPinchGesture

func (*QPinchGesture) QPinchGesture_PTR

func (ptr *QPinchGesture) QPinchGesture_PTR() *QPinchGesture

func (*QPinchGesture) RotationAngle

func (this *QPinchGesture) RotationAngle() float64

func (*QPinchGesture) ScaleFactor

func (this *QPinchGesture) ScaleFactor() float64

func (*QPinchGesture) SetCenterPoint

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetCenterPoint(value qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetChangeFlags

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetChangeFlags(value int)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetCthis

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetLastCenterPoint

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetLastCenterPoint(value qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetLastRotationAngle

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetLastRotationAngle(value float64)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetLastScaleFactor

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetLastScaleFactor(value float64)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetRotationAngle

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetRotationAngle(value float64)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetScaleFactor

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetScaleFactor(value float64)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetStartCenterPoint

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetStartCenterPoint(value qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetTotalChangeFlags

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetTotalChangeFlags(value int)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetTotalRotationAngle

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetTotalRotationAngle(value float64)

func (*QPinchGesture) SetTotalScaleFactor

func (this *QPinchGesture) SetTotalScaleFactor(value float64)

func (*QPinchGesture) StartCenterPoint

func (this *QPinchGesture) StartCenterPoint() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QPinchGesture) TotalChangeFlags

func (this *QPinchGesture) TotalChangeFlags() int

func (*QPinchGesture) TotalRotationAngle

func (this *QPinchGesture) TotalRotationAngle() float64

func (*QPinchGesture) TotalScaleFactor

func (this *QPinchGesture) TotalScaleFactor() float64

type QPinchGesture_ITF

type QPinchGesture_ITF interface {
	QGesture_ITF
	QPinchGesture_PTR() *QPinchGesture
}

type QPinchGesture__ChangeFlag

type QPinchGesture__ChangeFlag = int
const QPinchGesture__CenterPointChanged QPinchGesture__ChangeFlag = 4
const QPinchGesture__RotationAngleChanged QPinchGesture__ChangeFlag = 2
const QPinchGesture__ScaleFactorChanged QPinchGesture__ChangeFlag = 1

type QPlainTextDocumentLayout

type QPlainTextDocumentLayout struct {
	*qtgui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout
}

func NewQPlainTextDocumentLayout

func NewQPlainTextDocumentLayout(document qtgui.QTextDocument_ITF) *QPlainTextDocumentLayout

func NewQPlainTextDocumentLayoutFromPointer

func NewQPlainTextDocumentLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPlainTextDocumentLayout

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) BlockBoundingRect

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) BlockBoundingRect(block qtgui.QTextBlock_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the bounding rectangle of the text block in the block's own coordinates.

See also blockBoundingGeometry().

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) CursorWidth

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) CursorWidth() int

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) DocumentChanged

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) DocumentChanged(from int, arg1 int, charsAdded int)

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) DocumentSize

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) DocumentSize() *qtcore.QSizeF

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) EnsureBlockLayout

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) EnsureBlockLayout(block qtgui.QTextBlock_ITF)

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) FrameBoundingRect

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) FrameBoundingRect(arg0 qtgui.QTextFrame_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) HitTest

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) HitTest(arg0 qtcore.QPointF_ITF, arg1 int) int

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) InheritDocumentChanged

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) InheritDocumentChanged(f func(from int, arg1 int, charsAdded int))

void documentChanged(int, int, int)

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) PageCount

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) PageCount() int

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) QPlainTextDocumentLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) QPlainTextDocumentLayout_PTR() *QPlainTextDocumentLayout

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) RequestUpdate

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) RequestUpdate()

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QPlainTextDocumentLayout) SetCursorWidth

func (this *QPlainTextDocumentLayout) SetCursorWidth(width int)

type QPlainTextDocumentLayout_ITF

type QPlainTextDocumentLayout_ITF interface {
	qtgui.QAbstractTextDocumentLayout_ITF
	QPlainTextDocumentLayout_PTR() *QPlainTextDocumentLayout
}

type QPlainTextEdit

type QPlainTextEdit struct {
	*QAbstractScrollArea
}

func NewQPlainTextEdit

func NewQPlainTextEdit(parent QWidget_ITF) *QPlainTextEdit

Constructs an empty QPlainTextEdit with parent parent.

func NewQPlainTextEditFromPointer

func NewQPlainTextEditFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPlainTextEdit

func NewQPlainTextEdit_1

func NewQPlainTextEdit_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QPlainTextEdit

Constructs an empty QPlainTextEdit with parent parent.

func NewQPlainTextEdit_1_

func NewQPlainTextEdit_1_(text string) *QPlainTextEdit

Constructs an empty QPlainTextEdit with parent parent.

func NewQPlainTextEdit__

func NewQPlainTextEdit__() *QPlainTextEdit

Constructs an empty QPlainTextEdit with parent parent.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) AnchorAt

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) AnchorAt(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) string

Returns the reference of the anchor at position pos, or an empty string if no anchor exists at that point.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) AppendHtml

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) AppendHtml(html string)

Appends a new paragraph with html to the end of the text edit.

appendPlainText()

func (*QPlainTextEdit) AppendPlainText

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) AppendPlainText(text string)

Appends a new paragraph with text to the end of the text edit.

See also appendHtml().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) BackgroundVisible

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) BackgroundVisible() bool

func (*QPlainTextEdit) BlockBoundingGeometry

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) BlockBoundingGeometry(block qtgui.QTextBlock_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the bounding rectangle of the text block in content coordinates. Translate the rectangle with the contentOffset() to get visual coordinates on the viewport.

See also firstVisibleBlock() and blockBoundingRect().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) BlockBoundingRect

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) BlockBoundingRect(block qtgui.QTextBlock_ITF) *qtcore.QRectF

Returns the bounding rectangle of the text block in the block's own coordinates.

See also blockBoundingGeometry().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) BlockCount

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) BlockCount() int

func (*QPlainTextEdit) BlockCountChanged

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) BlockCountChanged(newBlockCount int)

This signal is emitted whenever the block count changes. The new block count is passed in newBlockCount.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CanInsertFromMimeData

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CanInsertFromMimeData(source qtcore.QMimeData_ITF) bool

This function returns true if the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, can be decoded and inserted into the document. It is called for example when during a drag operation the mouse enters this widget and it is necessary to determine whether it is possible to accept the drag.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CanPaste

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CanPaste() bool

Returns whether text can be pasted from the clipboard into the textedit.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CenterCursor

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CenterCursor()

Scrolls the document in order to center the cursor vertically.

See also ensureCursorVisible() and centerOnScroll.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CenterOnScroll

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CenterOnScroll() bool

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ChangeEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ChangeEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Clear

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Clear()

Deletes all the text in the text edit.

Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.

See also cut() and setPlainText().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ContentOffset

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ContentOffset() *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the content's origin in viewport coordinates.

The origin of the content of a plain text edit is always the top left corner of the first visible text block. The content offset is different from (0,0) when the text has been scrolled horizontally, or when the first visible block has been scrolled partially off the screen, i.e. the visible text does not start with the first line of the first visible block, or when the first visible block is the very first block and the editor displays a margin.

See also firstVisibleBlock(), horizontalScrollBar(), and verticalScrollBar().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ContextMenuEvent(e qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

Shows the standard context menu created with createStandardContextMenu().

If you do not want the text edit to have a context menu, you can set its contextMenuPolicy to Qt::NoContextMenu. If you want to customize the context menu, reimplement this function. If you want to extend the standard context menu, reimplement this function, call createStandardContextMenu() and extend the menu returned.

Information about the event is passed in the event object.

void MyQPlainTextEdit::contextMenuEvent(QContextMenuEvent *event)
{
    QMenu *menu = createStandardContextMenu();
    menu->addAction(tr("My Menu Item"));
    //...
    menu->exec(event->globalPos());
    delete menu;
}

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Copy

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Copy()

Copies any selected text to the clipboard.

See also copyAvailable().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CopyAvailable

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CopyAvailable(b bool)

This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.

When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.

If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.

See also selectionChanged().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CreateMimeDataFromSelection

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CreateMimeDataFromSelection() *qtcore.QMimeData

This function returns a new MIME data object to represent the contents of the text edit's current selection. It is called when the selection needs to be encapsulated into a new QMimeData object; for example, when a drag and drop operation is started, or when data is copied to the clipboard.

If you reimplement this function, note that the ownership of the returned QMimeData object is passed to the caller. The selection can be retrieved by using the textCursor() function.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu() *QMenu

This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the text edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.

We recommend that you use the createStandardContextMenu(QPoint) version instead which will enable the actions that are sensitive to where the user clicked.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu_1

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu_1(position qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QMenu

This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the text edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.

We recommend that you use the createStandardContextMenu(QPoint) version instead which will enable the actions that are sensitive to where the user clicked.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CurrentCharFormat

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CurrentCharFormat() *qtgui.QTextCharFormat

Returns the char format that is used when inserting new text.

See also setCurrentCharFormat().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CursorForPosition

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CursorForPosition(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtgui.QTextCursor

returns a QTextCursor at position pos (in viewport coordinates).

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CursorPositionChanged

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CursorPositionChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CursorRect

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CursorRect(cursor qtgui.QTextCursor_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CursorRect_1

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CursorRect_1() *qtcore.QRect

returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) CursorWidth

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) CursorWidth() int

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Cut

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Cut()

Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it from the text edit.

If there is no selected text nothing happens.

See also copy() and paste().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) DoSetTextCursor

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) DoSetTextCursor(cursor qtgui.QTextCursor_ITF)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Document

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Document() *qtgui.QTextDocument

Returns a pointer to the underlying document.

See also setDocument().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) DocumentTitle

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) DocumentTitle() string

func (*QPlainTextEdit) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) DragEnterEvent(e qtgui.QDragEnterEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) DragLeaveEvent(e qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) DragMoveEvent(e qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) DropEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) DropEvent(e qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) EnsureCursorVisible

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) EnsureCursorVisible()

Ensures that the cursor is visible by scrolling the text edit if necessary.

See also centerCursor() and centerOnScroll.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Event

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Find

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Find(exp string, options int) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Find_1

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Find_1(exp qtcore.QRegExp_ITF, options int) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Find_1_

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Find_1_(exp qtcore.QRegExp_ITF) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Find__

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Find__(exp string) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) FirstVisibleBlock

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) FirstVisibleBlock() *qtgui.QTextBlock

Returns the first visible block.

See also blockBoundingRect().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) FocusInEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) FocusInEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) FocusOutEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) GetCthis

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QPlainTextEdit) GetPaintContext

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) GetPaintContext() int

Returns the paint context for the viewport(), useful only when reimplementing paintEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritBlockBoundingGeometry

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritBlockBoundingGeometry(f func(block *qtgui.QTextBlock) unsafe.Pointer)

QRectF blockBoundingGeometry(const class QTextBlock &)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritBlockBoundingRect

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritBlockBoundingRect(f func(block *qtgui.QTextBlock) unsafe.Pointer)

QRectF blockBoundingRect(const class QTextBlock &)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritCanInsertFromMimeData

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritCanInsertFromMimeData(f func(source *qtcore.QMimeData) bool)

bool canInsertFromMimeData(const class QMimeData *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritChangeEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritContentOffset

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritContentOffset(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QPointF contentOffset()

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritCreateMimeDataFromSelection

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritCreateMimeDataFromSelection(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QMimeData * createMimeDataFromSelection()

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritDoSetTextCursor

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritDoSetTextCursor(f func(cursor *qtgui.QTextCursor))

void doSetTextCursor(const class QTextCursor &)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragEnterEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QDragEnterEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritDropEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritFirstVisibleBlock

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritFirstVisibleBlock(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QTextBlock firstVisibleBlock()

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritGetPaintContext

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritGetPaintContext(f func() int)

QAbstractTextDocumentLayout::PaintContext getPaintContext()

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritInsertFromMimeData

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritInsertFromMimeData(f func(source *qtcore.QMimeData))

void insertFromMimeData(const class QMimeData *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritResizeEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritShowEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritTimerEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritWheelEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InheritZoomInF

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InheritZoomInF(f func(range_ float32))

void zoomInF(float)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InputMethodEvent(arg0 qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InputMethodQuery(property int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InputMethodQuery_1

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InputMethodQuery_1(query int, argument qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InsertFromMimeData

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InsertFromMimeData(source qtcore.QMimeData_ITF)

This function inserts the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, into the text edit at the current cursor position. It is called whenever text is inserted as the result of a clipboard paste operation, or when the text edit accepts data from a drag and drop operation.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) InsertPlainText

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) InsertPlainText(text string)

Convenience slot that inserts text at the current cursor position.

It is equivalent to

edit->textCursor().insertText(text);

func (*QPlainTextEdit) IsReadOnly

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) IsReadOnly() bool

func (*QPlainTextEdit) IsUndoRedoEnabled

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) IsUndoRedoEnabled() bool

func (*QPlainTextEdit) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) KeyPressEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) KeyReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) LineWrapMode

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) LineWrapMode() int

func (*QPlainTextEdit) LoadResource

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) LoadResource(type_ int, name qtcore.QUrl_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Loads the resource specified by the given type and name.

This function is an extension of QTextDocument::loadResource().

See also QTextDocument::loadResource().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MaximumBlockCount

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MaximumBlockCount() int

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MergeCurrentCharFormat

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MergeCurrentCharFormat(modifier qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

Merges the properties specified in modifier into the current character format by calling QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the properties of modifier are directly applied to the selection.

See also QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MetaObject

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ModificationChanged

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ModificationChanged(arg0 bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the content of the document changes in a way that affects the modification state. If changed is true, the document has been modified; otherwise it is false.

For example, calling setModified(false) on a document and then inserting text causes the signal to get emitted. If you undo that operation, causing the document to return to its original unmodified state, the signal will get emitted again.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MouseDoubleClickEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MouseMoveEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MousePressEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MousePressEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MouseReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MoveCursor

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MoveCursor(operation int, mode int)

Moves the cursor by performing the given operation.

If mode is QTextCursor::KeepAnchor, the cursor selects the text it moves over. This is the same effect that the user achieves when they hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys.

See also QTextCursor::movePosition().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) MoveCursor__

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) MoveCursor__(operation int)

Moves the cursor by performing the given operation.

If mode is QTextCursor::KeepAnchor, the cursor selects the text it moves over. This is the same effect that the user achieves when they hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys.

See also QTextCursor::movePosition().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) NewFromPointer

func (*QPlainTextEdit) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPlainTextEdit

func (*QPlainTextEdit) OverwriteMode

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) OverwriteMode() bool

func (*QPlainTextEdit) PaintEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Paste

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Paste()

Pastes the text from the clipboard into the text edit at the current cursor position.

If there is no text in the clipboard nothing happens.

To change the behavior of this function, i.e. to modify what QPlainTextEdit can paste and how it is being pasted, reimplement the virtual canInsertFromMimeData() and insertFromMimeData() functions.

See also cut() and copy().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) PlaceholderText

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) PlaceholderText() string

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Print

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Print(printer qtgui.QPagedPaintDevice_ITF)

Convenience function to print the text edit's document to the given printer. This is equivalent to calling the print method on the document directly except that this function also supports QPrinter::Selection as print range.

See also QTextDocument::print().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) QPlainTextEdit_PTR

func (ptr *QPlainTextEdit) QPlainTextEdit_PTR() *QPlainTextEdit

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Redo

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Redo()

Redoes the last operation.

If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.

See also undo().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) RedoAvailable

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) RedoAvailable(b bool)

This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ResizeEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ResizeEvent(e qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SelectAll

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SelectAll()

Selects all text.

See also copy(), cut(), and textCursor().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SelectionChanged

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.

See also copyAvailable().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetBackgroundVisible

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetBackgroundVisible(visible bool)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetCenterOnScroll

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetCenterOnScroll(enabled bool)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetCthis

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetCurrentCharFormat

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetCurrentCharFormat(format qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

Sets the char format that is be used when inserting new text to format by calling QTextCursor::setCharFormat() on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the char format is directly applied to the selection.

See also currentCharFormat().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetCursorWidth

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetCursorWidth(width int)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetDocument

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetDocument(document qtgui.QTextDocument_ITF)

Makes document the new document of the text editor.

The parent QObject of the provided document remains the owner of the object. If the current document is a child of the text editor, then it is deleted.

The document must have a document layout that inherits QPlainTextDocumentLayout (see QTextDocument::setDocumentLayout()).

See also document().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetDocumentTitle

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetDocumentTitle(title string)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetLineWrapMode

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetLineWrapMode(mode int)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetMaximumBlockCount

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetMaximumBlockCount(maximum int)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetOverwriteMode

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetOverwriteMode(overwrite bool)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetPlaceholderText

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetPlaceholderText(placeholderText string)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetPlainText

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetPlainText(text string)

Changes the text of the text edit to the string text. Any previous text is removed.

text is interpreted as plain text.

Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.

Note: Setter function for property plainText.

See also toPlainText().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetReadOnly

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetReadOnly(ro bool)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetTabChangesFocus

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetTabChangesFocus(b bool)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetTabStopDistance

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetTabStopDistance(distance float64)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetTabStopWidth

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetTabStopWidth(width int)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetTextCursor

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetTextCursor(cursor qtgui.QTextCursor_ITF)

Sets the visible cursor.

See also textCursor().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetTextInteractionFlags

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetTextInteractionFlags(flags int)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetUndoRedoEnabled

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetUndoRedoEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) SetWordWrapMode

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) SetWordWrapMode(policy int)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ShowEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ShowEvent(arg0 qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) TabChangesFocus

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) TabChangesFocus() bool

func (*QPlainTextEdit) TabStopDistance

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) TabStopDistance() float64

func (*QPlainTextEdit) TabStopWidth

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) TabStopWidth() int

func (*QPlainTextEdit) TextChanged

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) TextChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.

Note: Notifier signal for property plainText.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) TextCursor

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) TextCursor() *qtgui.QTextCursor

Returns a copy of the QTextCursor that represents the currently visible cursor. Note that changes on the returned cursor do not affect QPlainTextEdit's cursor; use setTextCursor() to update the visible cursor.

See also setTextCursor().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) TextInteractionFlags

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) TextInteractionFlags() int

func (*QPlainTextEdit) TimerEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) TimerEvent(e qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ToPlainText

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ToPlainText() string

Returns the text of the text edit as plain text.

Note: Getter function for property plainText.

See also QPlainTextEdit::setPlainText().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) Undo

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) Undo()

Undoes the last operation.

If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.

See also redo().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) UndoAvailable

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) UndoAvailable(b bool)

This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).

func (*QPlainTextEdit) UpdateRequest

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) UpdateRequest(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, dy int)

This signal is emitted when the text document needs an update of the specified rect. If the text is scrolled, rect will cover the entire viewport area. If the text is scrolled vertically, dy carries the amount of pixels the viewport was scrolled.

The purpose of the signal is to support extra widgets in plain text edit subclasses that e.g. show line numbers, breakpoints, or other extra information.

func (*QPlainTextEdit) WheelEvent

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) WheelEvent(e qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) WordWrapMode

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) WordWrapMode() int

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ZoomIn

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ZoomIn(range_ int)

Zooms in on the text by making the base font size range points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomOut().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ZoomInF

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ZoomInF(range_ float32)

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ZoomIn__

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ZoomIn__()

Zooms in on the text by making the base font size range points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomOut().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ZoomOut

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ZoomOut(range_ int)

This is an overloaded function.

Zooms out on the text by making the base font size range points smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomIn().

func (*QPlainTextEdit) ZoomOut__

func (this *QPlainTextEdit) ZoomOut__()

This is an overloaded function.

Zooms out on the text by making the base font size range points smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomIn().

type QPlainTextEdit_ITF

type QPlainTextEdit_ITF interface {
	QAbstractScrollArea_ITF
	QPlainTextEdit_PTR() *QPlainTextEdit
}

type QPlainTextEdit__LineWrapMode

type QPlainTextEdit__LineWrapMode = int

ConstantValue QPlainTextEdit::NoWrap0 QPlainTextEdit::WidgetWidth1

const QPlainTextEdit__NoWrap QPlainTextEdit__LineWrapMode = 0
const QPlainTextEdit__WidgetWidth QPlainTextEdit__LineWrapMode = 1

type QProgressBar

type QProgressBar struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQProgressBar

func NewQProgressBar(parent QWidget_ITF) *QProgressBar

Constructs a progress bar with the given parent.

By default, the minimum step value is set to 0, and the maximum to 100.

See also setRange().

func NewQProgressBarFromPointer

func NewQProgressBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QProgressBar

func NewQProgressBar__

func NewQProgressBar__() *QProgressBar

Constructs a progress bar with the given parent.

By default, the minimum step value is set to 0, and the maximum to 100.

See also setRange().

func (*QProgressBar) Alignment

func (this *QProgressBar) Alignment() int

func (*QProgressBar) Event

func (this *QProgressBar) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QProgressBar) Format

func (this *QProgressBar) Format() string

func (*QProgressBar) GetCthis

func (this *QProgressBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QProgressBar) InheritEvent

func (this *QProgressBar) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QProgressBar) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QProgressBar) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionProgressBar))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionProgressBar *)

func (*QProgressBar) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QProgressBar) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QProgressBar) InitStyleOption

func (this *QProgressBar) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionProgressBar_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QProgressBar. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionProgressBar, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QProgressBar) InvertedAppearance

func (this *QProgressBar) InvertedAppearance() bool

func (*QProgressBar) IsTextVisible

func (this *QProgressBar) IsTextVisible() bool

func (*QProgressBar) Maximum

func (this *QProgressBar) Maximum() int

func (*QProgressBar) MetaObject

func (this *QProgressBar) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QProgressBar) Minimum

func (this *QProgressBar) Minimum() int

func (*QProgressBar) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QProgressBar) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QProgressBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QProgressBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QProgressBar

func (*QProgressBar) Orientation

func (this *QProgressBar) Orientation() int

func (*QProgressBar) PaintEvent

func (this *QProgressBar) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QProgressBar) QProgressBar_PTR

func (ptr *QProgressBar) QProgressBar_PTR() *QProgressBar

func (*QProgressBar) Reset

func (this *QProgressBar) Reset()

Reset the progress bar. The progress bar "rewinds" and shows no progress.

func (*QProgressBar) ResetFormat

func (this *QProgressBar) ResetFormat()

func (*QProgressBar) SetAlignment

func (this *QProgressBar) SetAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QProgressBar) SetCthis

func (this *QProgressBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QProgressBar) SetFormat

func (this *QProgressBar) SetFormat(format string)

func (*QProgressBar) SetInvertedAppearance

func (this *QProgressBar) SetInvertedAppearance(invert bool)

func (*QProgressBar) SetMaximum

func (this *QProgressBar) SetMaximum(maximum int)

func (*QProgressBar) SetMinimum

func (this *QProgressBar) SetMinimum(minimum int)

func (*QProgressBar) SetOrientation

func (this *QProgressBar) SetOrientation(arg0 int)

func (*QProgressBar) SetRange

func (this *QProgressBar) SetRange(minimum int, maximum int)

Sets the progress bar's minimum and maximum values to minimum and maximum respectively.

If maximum is smaller than minimum, minimum becomes the only legal value.

If the current value falls outside the new range, the progress bar is reset with reset().

The QProgressBar can be set to undetermined state by using setRange(0, 0).

See also minimum and maximum.

func (*QProgressBar) SetTextDirection

func (this *QProgressBar) SetTextDirection(textDirection int)

func (*QProgressBar) SetTextVisible

func (this *QProgressBar) SetTextVisible(visible bool)

func (*QProgressBar) SetValue

func (this *QProgressBar) SetValue(value int)

func (*QProgressBar) SizeHint

func (this *QProgressBar) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QProgressBar) Text

func (this *QProgressBar) Text() string

func (*QProgressBar) TextDirection

func (this *QProgressBar) TextDirection() int

func (*QProgressBar) Value

func (this *QProgressBar) Value() int

func (*QProgressBar) ValueChanged

func (this *QProgressBar) ValueChanged(value int)

This signal is emitted when the value shown in the progress bar changes. value is the new value shown by the progress bar.

Note: Notifier signal for property value.

type QProgressBar_ITF

type QProgressBar_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QProgressBar_PTR() *QProgressBar
}

type QProgressBar__Direction

type QProgressBar__Direction = int

Specifies the reading direction of the text for vertical progress bars.

Note that whether or not the text is drawn is dependent on the style. Currently CleanLooks and Plastique draw the text. Mac, Windows and WindowsVista style do not.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.1.

See also textDirection.

const QProgressBar__BottomToTop QProgressBar__Direction = 1
const QProgressBar__TopToBottom QProgressBar__Direction = 0

type QProgressDialog

type QProgressDialog struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQProgressDialog

func NewQProgressDialog(parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QProgressDialog

Constructs a progress dialog.

Default settings:

The label text is empty. The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel". minimum is 0; maximum is 100

The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.

See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().

func NewQProgressDialogFromPointer

func NewQProgressDialogFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QProgressDialog

func NewQProgressDialog_1

func NewQProgressDialog_1(labelText string, cancelButtonText string, minimum int, maximum int, parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QProgressDialog

Constructs a progress dialog.

Default settings:

The label text is empty. The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel". minimum is 0; maximum is 100

The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.

See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().

func NewQProgressDialog_1_

func NewQProgressDialog_1_(labelText string, cancelButtonText string, minimum int, maximum int) *QProgressDialog

Constructs a progress dialog.

Default settings:

The label text is empty. The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel". minimum is 0; maximum is 100

The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.

See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().

func NewQProgressDialog_1_1

func NewQProgressDialog_1_1(labelText string, cancelButtonText string, minimum int, maximum int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QProgressDialog

Constructs a progress dialog.

Default settings:

The label text is empty. The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel". minimum is 0; maximum is 100

The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.

See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().

func NewQProgressDialog__

func NewQProgressDialog__() *QProgressDialog

Constructs a progress dialog.

Default settings:

The label text is empty. The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel". minimum is 0; maximum is 100

The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.

See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().

func NewQProgressDialog__1

func NewQProgressDialog__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QProgressDialog

Constructs a progress dialog.

Default settings:

The label text is empty. The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel". minimum is 0; maximum is 100

The parent argument is dialog's parent widget. The widget flags, f, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor.

See also setLabelText(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), setMinimum(), and setMaximum().

func (*QProgressDialog) AutoClose

func (this *QProgressDialog) AutoClose() bool

func (*QProgressDialog) AutoReset

func (this *QProgressDialog) AutoReset() bool

func (*QProgressDialog) Cancel

func (this *QProgressDialog) Cancel()

Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes true until the progress dialog is reset. The progress dialog becomes hidden.

func (*QProgressDialog) Canceled

func (this *QProgressDialog) Canceled()

This signal is emitted when the cancel button is clicked. It is connected to the cancel() slot by default.

See also wasCanceled().

func (*QProgressDialog) ChangeEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QProgressDialog) CloseEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) CloseEvent(event qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::closeEvent().

func (*QProgressDialog) ForceShow

func (this *QProgressDialog) ForceShow()

Shows the dialog if it is still hidden after the algorithm has been started and minimumDuration milliseconds have passed.

See also setMinimumDuration().

func (*QProgressDialog) GetCthis

func (this *QProgressDialog) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QProgressDialog) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QProgressDialog) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) InheritCloseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QProgressDialog) InheritForceShow

func (this *QProgressDialog) InheritForceShow(f func())

void forceShow()

func (*QProgressDialog) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QProgressDialog) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) InheritShowEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QProgressDialog) LabelText

func (this *QProgressDialog) LabelText() string

func (*QProgressDialog) Maximum

func (this *QProgressDialog) Maximum() int

func (*QProgressDialog) MetaObject

func (this *QProgressDialog) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QProgressDialog) Minimum

func (this *QProgressDialog) Minimum() int

func (*QProgressDialog) MinimumDuration

func (this *QProgressDialog) MinimumDuration() int

func (*QProgressDialog) NewFromPointer

func (*QProgressDialog) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QProgressDialog

func (*QProgressDialog) Open

func (this *QProgressDialog) Open(receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string)

This is an overloaded function.

Opens the dialog and connects its canceled() signal to the slot specified by receiver and member.

The signal will be disconnected from the slot when the dialog is closed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

func (*QProgressDialog) QProgressDialog_PTR

func (ptr *QProgressDialog) QProgressDialog_PTR() *QProgressDialog

func (*QProgressDialog) Reset

func (this *QProgressDialog) Reset()

Resets the progress dialog. The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is true.

See also setAutoClose() and setAutoReset().

func (*QProgressDialog) ResizeEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QProgressDialog) SetAutoClose

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetAutoClose(close bool)

func (*QProgressDialog) SetAutoReset

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetAutoReset(reset bool)

func (*QProgressDialog) SetBar

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetBar(bar QProgressBar_ITF)

Sets the progress bar widget to bar. The progress dialog resizes to fit. The progress dialog takes ownership of the progress bar which will be deleted when necessary, so do not use a progress bar allocated on the stack.

func (*QProgressDialog) SetCancelButton

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetCancelButton(button QPushButton_ITF)

Sets the cancel button to the push button, cancelButton. The progress dialog takes ownership of this button which will be deleted when necessary, so do not pass the address of an object that is on the stack, i.e. use new() to create the button. If 0 is passed then no cancel button will be shown.

See also setCancelButtonText().

func (*QProgressDialog) SetCancelButtonText

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetCancelButtonText(text string)

Sets the cancel button's text to cancelButtonText. If the text is set to QString() then it will cause the cancel button to be hidden and deleted.

See also setCancelButton().

func (*QProgressDialog) SetCthis

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QProgressDialog) SetLabel

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetLabel(label QLabel_ITF)

Sets the label to label. The progress dialog resizes to fit. The label becomes owned by the progress dialog and will be deleted when necessary, so do not pass the address of an object on the stack.

See also setLabelText().

func (*QProgressDialog) SetLabelText

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetLabelText(text string)

func (*QProgressDialog) SetMaximum

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetMaximum(maximum int)

func (*QProgressDialog) SetMinimum

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetMinimum(minimum int)

func (*QProgressDialog) SetMinimumDuration

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetMinimumDuration(ms int)

func (*QProgressDialog) SetRange

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetRange(minimum int, maximum int)

Sets the progress dialog's minimum and maximum values to minimum and maximum, respectively.

If maximum is smaller than minimum, minimum becomes the only legal value.

If the current value falls outside the new range, the progress dialog is reset with reset().

See also minimum and maximum.

func (*QProgressDialog) SetValue

func (this *QProgressDialog) SetValue(progress int)

func (*QProgressDialog) ShowEvent

func (this *QProgressDialog) ShowEvent(event qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QProgressDialog) SizeHint

func (this *QProgressDialog) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

Returns a size that fits the contents of the progress dialog. The progress dialog resizes itself as required, so you should not need to call this yourself.

func (*QProgressDialog) Value

func (this *QProgressDialog) Value() int

func (*QProgressDialog) WasCanceled

func (this *QProgressDialog) WasCanceled() bool

type QProgressDialog_ITF

type QProgressDialog_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QProgressDialog_PTR() *QProgressDialog
}

type QProxyStyle

type QProxyStyle struct {
	*QCommonStyle
}

func NewQProxyStyle

func NewQProxyStyle(style QStyle_ITF) *QProxyStyle

Constructs a QProxyStyle object for overriding behavior in the specified style, or in the default native style if style is not specified.

Ownership of style is transferred to QProxyStyle.

func NewQProxyStyleFromPointer

func NewQProxyStyleFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QProxyStyle

func NewQProxyStyle_1

func NewQProxyStyle_1(key string) *QProxyStyle

Constructs a QProxyStyle object for overriding behavior in the specified style, or in the default native style if style is not specified.

Ownership of style is transferred to QProxyStyle.

func NewQProxyStyle__

func NewQProxyStyle__() *QProxyStyle

Constructs a QProxyStyle object for overriding behavior in the specified style, or in the default native style if style is not specified.

Ownership of style is transferred to QProxyStyle.

func (*QProxyStyle) BaseStyle

func (this *QProxyStyle) BaseStyle() *QStyle

Returns the proxy base style object. If no base style is set on the proxy style, QProxyStyle will create an instance of the application style instead.

See also setBaseStyle() and QStyle.

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawComplexControl

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawComplexControl(control int, option QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawComplexControl().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawComplexControl__

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawComplexControl__(control int, option QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawComplexControl().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawControl

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawControl(element int, option QStyleOption_ITF, painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawControl().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawControl__

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawControl__(element int, option QStyleOption_ITF, painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawControl().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawItemPixmap

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawItemPixmap(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, alignment int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawItemPixmap().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawItemText

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawItemText(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, enabled bool, text string, textRole int)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawItemText().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawItemText__

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawItemText__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, enabled bool, text string)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawItemText().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawPrimitive

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawPrimitive(element int, option QStyleOption_ITF, painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawPrimitive().

func (*QProxyStyle) DrawPrimitive__

func (this *QProxyStyle) DrawPrimitive__(element int, option QStyleOption_ITF, painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::drawPrimitive().

func (*QProxyStyle) Event

func (this *QProxyStyle) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QProxyStyle) GeneratedIconPixmap

func (this *QProxyStyle) GeneratedIconPixmap(iconMode int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Reimplemented from QStyle::generatedIconPixmap().

func (*QProxyStyle) GetCthis

func (this *QProxyStyle) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QProxyStyle) HitTestComplexControl

func (this *QProxyStyle) HitTestComplexControl(control int, option QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::hitTestComplexControl().

func (*QProxyStyle) HitTestComplexControl__

func (this *QProxyStyle) HitTestComplexControl__(control int, option QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::hitTestComplexControl().

func (*QProxyStyle) InheritEvent

func (this *QProxyStyle) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QProxyStyle) ItemPixmapRect

func (this *QProxyStyle) ItemPixmapRect(r qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::itemPixmapRect().

func (*QProxyStyle) ItemTextRect

func (this *QProxyStyle) ItemTextRect(fm qtgui.QFontMetrics_ITF, r qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, enabled bool, text string) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::itemTextRect().

func (*QProxyStyle) LayoutSpacing

func (this *QProxyStyle) LayoutSpacing(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::layoutSpacing().

This slot is called by layoutSpacing() to determine the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

The default implementation returns -1.

See also combinedLayoutSpacing().

func (*QProxyStyle) LayoutSpacing__

func (this *QProxyStyle) LayoutSpacing__(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::layoutSpacing().

This slot is called by layoutSpacing() to determine the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

The default implementation returns -1.

See also combinedLayoutSpacing().

func (*QProxyStyle) LayoutSpacing__1

func (this *QProxyStyle) LayoutSpacing__1(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::layoutSpacing().

This slot is called by layoutSpacing() to determine the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

The default implementation returns -1.

See also combinedLayoutSpacing().

func (*QProxyStyle) MetaObject

func (this *QProxyStyle) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QProxyStyle) NewFromPointer

func (*QProxyStyle) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QProxyStyle

func (*QProxyStyle) PixelMetric

func (this *QProxyStyle) PixelMetric(metric int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().

func (*QProxyStyle) PixelMetric__

func (this *QProxyStyle) PixelMetric__(metric int) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().

func (*QProxyStyle) PixelMetric__1

func (this *QProxyStyle) PixelMetric__1(metric int, option QStyleOption_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::pixelMetric().

func (*QProxyStyle) Polish

func (this *QProxyStyle) Polish(widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().

func (*QProxyStyle) Polish_1

func (this *QProxyStyle) Polish_1(pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().

func (*QProxyStyle) Polish_2

func (this *QProxyStyle) Polish_2(app QApplication_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::polish().

func (*QProxyStyle) QProxyStyle_PTR

func (ptr *QProxyStyle) QProxyStyle_PTR() *QProxyStyle

func (*QProxyStyle) SetBaseStyle

func (this *QProxyStyle) SetBaseStyle(style QStyle_ITF)

Sets the base style that should be proxied.

Ownership of style is transferred to QProxyStyle.

If style is zero, a desktop-dependant style will be assigned automatically.

See also baseStyle().

func (*QProxyStyle) SetCthis

func (this *QProxyStyle) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QProxyStyle) SizeFromContents

func (this *QProxyStyle) SizeFromContents(type_ int, option QStyleOption_ITF, size qtcore.QSize_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QStyle::sizeFromContents().

func (*QProxyStyle) StandardIcon

func (this *QProxyStyle) StandardIcon(standardIcon int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardIcon().

Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.

Reimplement this slot to provide your own icons in a QStyle subclass. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required to find the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to help find the icon.

func (*QProxyStyle) StandardIcon__

func (this *QProxyStyle) StandardIcon__(standardIcon int) *qtgui.QIcon

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardIcon().

Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.

Reimplement this slot to provide your own icons in a QStyle subclass. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required to find the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to help find the icon.

func (*QProxyStyle) StandardIcon__1

func (this *QProxyStyle) StandardIcon__1(standardIcon int, option QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardIcon().

Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.

Reimplement this slot to provide your own icons in a QStyle subclass. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required to find the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to help find the icon.

func (*QProxyStyle) StandardPalette

func (this *QProxyStyle) StandardPalette() *qtgui.QPalette

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPalette().

func (*QProxyStyle) StandardPixmap

func (this *QProxyStyle) StandardPixmap(standardPixmap int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().

func (*QProxyStyle) StandardPixmap__

func (this *QProxyStyle) StandardPixmap__(standardPixmap int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Reimplemented from QStyle::standardPixmap().

func (*QProxyStyle) StyleHint

func (this *QProxyStyle) StyleHint(hint int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF, returnData QStyleHintReturn_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QProxyStyle) StyleHint__

func (this *QProxyStyle) StyleHint__(hint int) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QProxyStyle) StyleHint__1

func (this *QProxyStyle) StyleHint__1(hint int, option QStyleOption_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QProxyStyle) StyleHint__2

func (this *QProxyStyle) StyleHint__2(hint int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Reimplemented from QStyle::styleHint().

func (*QProxyStyle) SubControlRect

func (this *QProxyStyle) SubControlRect(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, sc int, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::subControlRect().

func (*QProxyStyle) SubElementRect

func (this *QProxyStyle) SubElementRect(element int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QStyle::subElementRect().

func (*QProxyStyle) Unpolish

func (this *QProxyStyle) Unpolish(widget QWidget_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().

func (*QProxyStyle) Unpolish_1

func (this *QProxyStyle) Unpolish_1(app QApplication_ITF)

Reimplemented from QStyle::unpolish().

type QProxyStyle_ITF

type QProxyStyle_ITF interface {
	QCommonStyle_ITF
	QProxyStyle_PTR() *QProxyStyle
}

type QPushButton

type QPushButton struct {
	*QAbstractButton
}

func NewQPushButton

func NewQPushButton(parent QWidget_ITF) *QPushButton

Constructs a push button with no text and a parent.

func NewQPushButtonFromPointer

func NewQPushButtonFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPushButton

func NewQPushButton_1

func NewQPushButton_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QPushButton

Constructs a push button with no text and a parent.

func NewQPushButton_1_

func NewQPushButton_1_(text string) *QPushButton

Constructs a push button with no text and a parent.

func NewQPushButton_2

func NewQPushButton_2(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QPushButton

Constructs a push button with no text and a parent.

func NewQPushButton_2_

func NewQPushButton_2_(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QPushButton

Constructs a push button with no text and a parent.

func NewQPushButton__

func NewQPushButton__() *QPushButton

Constructs a push button with no text and a parent.

func (*QPushButton) AutoDefault

func (this *QPushButton) AutoDefault() bool

func (*QPushButton) Event

func (this *QPushButton) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QPushButton) FocusInEvent

func (this *QPushButton) FocusInEvent(arg0 qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QPushButton) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QPushButton) FocusOutEvent(arg0 qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QPushButton) GetCthis

func (this *QPushButton) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QPushButton) InheritEvent

func (this *QPushButton) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QPushButton) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QPushButton) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QPushButton) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QPushButton) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QPushButton) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QPushButton) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionButton))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionButton *)

func (*QPushButton) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QPushButton) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QPushButton) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QPushButton) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QPushButton) InitStyleOption

func (this *QPushButton) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionButton_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QPushButton. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionButton, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QPushButton) IsDefault

func (this *QPushButton) IsDefault() bool

func (*QPushButton) IsFlat

func (this *QPushButton) IsFlat() bool

func (*QPushButton) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QPushButton) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QPushButton) Menu

func (this *QPushButton) Menu() *QMenu

Returns the button's associated popup menu or 0 if no popup menu has been set.

See also setMenu().

func (*QPushButton) MetaObject

func (this *QPushButton) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QPushButton) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QPushButton) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QPushButton) NewFromPointer

func (*QPushButton) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QPushButton

func (*QPushButton) PaintEvent

func (this *QPushButton) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QPushButton) QPushButton_PTR

func (ptr *QPushButton) QPushButton_PTR() *QPushButton

func (*QPushButton) SetAutoDefault

func (this *QPushButton) SetAutoDefault(arg0 bool)

func (*QPushButton) SetCthis

func (this *QPushButton) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QPushButton) SetDefault

func (this *QPushButton) SetDefault(arg0 bool)

func (*QPushButton) SetFlat

func (this *QPushButton) SetFlat(arg0 bool)

func (*QPushButton) SetMenu

func (this *QPushButton) SetMenu(menu QMenu_ITF)

Associates the popup menu menu with this push button. This turns the button into a menu button, which in some styles will produce a small triangle to the right of the button's text.

Ownership of the menu is not transferred to the push button.

A push button with popup menus shown in the Fusion widget style.

See also menu().

func (*QPushButton) ShowMenu

func (this *QPushButton) ShowMenu()

Shows (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return until the popup menu has been closed by the user.

func (*QPushButton) SizeHint

func (this *QPushButton) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

type QPushButton_ITF

type QPushButton_ITF interface {
	QAbstractButton_ITF
	QPushButton_PTR() *QPushButton
}

type QRadioButton

type QRadioButton struct {
	*QAbstractButton
}

func NewQRadioButton

func NewQRadioButton(parent QWidget_ITF) *QRadioButton

Constructs a radio button with the given parent, but with no text or pixmap.

The parent argument is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func NewQRadioButtonFromPointer

func NewQRadioButtonFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QRadioButton

func NewQRadioButton_1

func NewQRadioButton_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QRadioButton

Constructs a radio button with the given parent, but with no text or pixmap.

The parent argument is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func NewQRadioButton_1_

func NewQRadioButton_1_(text string) *QRadioButton

Constructs a radio button with the given parent, but with no text or pixmap.

The parent argument is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func NewQRadioButton__

func NewQRadioButton__() *QRadioButton

Constructs a radio button with the given parent, but with no text or pixmap.

The parent argument is passed on to the QAbstractButton constructor.

func (*QRadioButton) Event

func (this *QRadioButton) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QRadioButton) GetCthis

func (this *QRadioButton) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QRadioButton) HitButton

func (this *QRadioButton) HitButton(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::hitButton().

func (*QRadioButton) InheritEvent

func (this *QRadioButton) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QRadioButton) InheritHitButton

func (this *QRadioButton) InheritHitButton(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QPoint) bool)

bool hitButton(const class QPoint &)

func (*QRadioButton) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QRadioButton) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(button *QStyleOptionButton))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionButton *)

func (*QRadioButton) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QRadioButton) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QRadioButton) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QRadioButton) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QRadioButton) InitStyleOption

func (this *QRadioButton) InitStyleOption(button QStyleOptionButton_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QRadioButton. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionButton, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QRadioButton) MetaObject

func (this *QRadioButton) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QRadioButton) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QRadioButton) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QRadioButton) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QRadioButton) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QRadioButton) NewFromPointer

func (*QRadioButton) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QRadioButton

func (*QRadioButton) PaintEvent

func (this *QRadioButton) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QRadioButton) QRadioButton_PTR

func (ptr *QRadioButton) QRadioButton_PTR() *QRadioButton

func (*QRadioButton) SetCthis

func (this *QRadioButton) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QRadioButton) SizeHint

func (this *QRadioButton) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

type QRadioButton_ITF

type QRadioButton_ITF interface {
	QAbstractButton_ITF
	QRadioButton_PTR() *QRadioButton
}

type QRubberBand

type QRubberBand struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQRubberBand

func NewQRubberBand(arg0 int, arg1 QWidget_ITF) *QRubberBand

Constructs a rubber band of shape s, with parent p.

By default a rectangular rubber band (s is Rectangle) will use a mask, so that a small border of the rectangle is all that is visible. Some styles (e.g., native macOS) will change this and call QWidget::setWindowOpacity() to make a semi-transparent filled selection rectangle.

func NewQRubberBandFromPointer

func NewQRubberBandFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QRubberBand

func NewQRubberBand__

func NewQRubberBand__(arg0 int) *QRubberBand

Constructs a rubber band of shape s, with parent p.

By default a rectangular rubber band (s is Rectangle) will use a mask, so that a small border of the rectangle is all that is visible. Some styles (e.g., native macOS) will change this and call QWidget::setWindowOpacity() to make a semi-transparent filled selection rectangle.

func (*QRubberBand) ChangeEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QRubberBand) Event

func (this *QRubberBand) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QRubberBand) GetCthis

func (this *QRubberBand) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QRubberBand) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QRubberBand) InheritEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QRubberBand) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QRubberBand) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionRubberBand))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionRubberBand *)

func (*QRubberBand) InheritMoveEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) InheritMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMoveEvent))

void moveEvent(class QMoveEvent *)

func (*QRubberBand) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QRubberBand) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QRubberBand) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) InheritShowEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QRubberBand) InitStyleOption

func (this *QRubberBand) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionRubberBand_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QRubberBand. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionRubberBand, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QRubberBand) MetaObject

func (this *QRubberBand) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QRubberBand) Move

func (this *QRubberBand) Move(x int, y int)

Moves the rubberband to point (x, y).

See also resize().

func (*QRubberBand) MoveEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) MoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::moveEvent().

func (*QRubberBand) Move_1

func (this *QRubberBand) Move_1(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

Moves the rubberband to point (x, y).

See also resize().

func (*QRubberBand) NewFromPointer

func (*QRubberBand) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QRubberBand

func (*QRubberBand) PaintEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QRubberBand) QRubberBand_PTR

func (ptr *QRubberBand) QRubberBand_PTR() *QRubberBand

func (*QRubberBand) Resize

func (this *QRubberBand) Resize(w int, h int)

Resizes the rubberband so that its width is width, and its height is height.

See also move().

func (*QRubberBand) ResizeEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QRubberBand) Resize_1

func (this *QRubberBand) Resize_1(s qtcore.QSize_ITF)

Resizes the rubberband so that its width is width, and its height is height.

See also move().

func (*QRubberBand) SetCthis

func (this *QRubberBand) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QRubberBand) SetGeometry

func (this *QRubberBand) SetGeometry(r qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Sets the geometry of the rubber band to rect, specified in the coordinate system of its parent widget.

See also QWidget::geometry.

func (*QRubberBand) SetGeometry_1

func (this *QRubberBand) SetGeometry_1(x int, y int, w int, h int)

Sets the geometry of the rubber band to rect, specified in the coordinate system of its parent widget.

See also QWidget::geometry.

func (*QRubberBand) Shape

func (this *QRubberBand) Shape() int

Returns the shape of this rubber band. The shape can only be set upon construction.

func (*QRubberBand) ShowEvent

func (this *QRubberBand) ShowEvent(arg0 qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

type QRubberBand_ITF

type QRubberBand_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QRubberBand_PTR() *QRubberBand
}

type QRubberBand__Shape

type QRubberBand__Shape = int

This enum specifies what shape a QRubberBand should have. This is a drawing hint that is passed down to the style system, and can be interpreted by each QStyle.

const QRubberBand__Line QRubberBand__Shape = 0

A QRubberBand can represent a vertical or horizontal line. Geometry is still given in rect() and the line will fill the given geometry on most styles.

const QRubberBand__Rectangle QRubberBand__Shape = 1

A QRubberBand can represent a rectangle. Some styles will interpret this as a filled (often semi-transparent) rectangle, or a rectangular outline.

type QScrollArea

type QScrollArea struct {
	*QAbstractScrollArea
}

func NewQScrollArea

func NewQScrollArea(parent QWidget_ITF) *QScrollArea

Constructs an empty scroll area with the given parent.

See also setWidget().

func NewQScrollAreaFromPointer

func NewQScrollAreaFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScrollArea

func NewQScrollArea__

func NewQScrollArea__() *QScrollArea

Constructs an empty scroll area with the given parent.

See also setWidget().

func (*QScrollArea) Alignment

func (this *QScrollArea) Alignment() int

func (*QScrollArea) EnsureVisible

func (this *QScrollArea) EnsureVisible(x int, y int, xmargin int, ymargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the point (x, y) is visible inside the region of the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

func (*QScrollArea) EnsureVisible__

func (this *QScrollArea) EnsureVisible__(x int, y int)

Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the point (x, y) is visible inside the region of the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

func (*QScrollArea) EnsureVisible__1

func (this *QScrollArea) EnsureVisible__1(x int, y int, xmargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the point (x, y) is visible inside the region of the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

func (*QScrollArea) EnsureWidgetVisible

func (this *QScrollArea) EnsureWidgetVisible(childWidget QWidget_ITF, xmargin int, ymargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the childWidget of QScrollArea::widget() is visible inside the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QScrollArea) EnsureWidgetVisible__

func (this *QScrollArea) EnsureWidgetVisible__(childWidget QWidget_ITF)

Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the childWidget of QScrollArea::widget() is visible inside the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QScrollArea) EnsureWidgetVisible__1

func (this *QScrollArea) EnsureWidgetVisible__1(childWidget QWidget_ITF, xmargin int)

Scrolls the contents of the scroll area so that the childWidget of QScrollArea::widget() is visible inside the viewport with margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin. If the specified point cannot be reached, the contents are scrolled to the nearest valid position. The default value for both margins is 50 pixels.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QScrollArea) Event

func (this *QScrollArea) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QScrollArea) EventFilter

func (this *QScrollArea) EventFilter(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QScrollArea) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QScrollArea) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QScrollArea) GetCthis

func (this *QScrollArea) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QScrollArea) InheritEvent

func (this *QScrollArea) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QScrollArea) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QScrollArea) InheritEventFilter(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QObject, arg1 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QScrollArea) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QScrollArea) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QScrollArea) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QScrollArea) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QScrollArea) InheritViewportSizeHint

func (this *QScrollArea) InheritViewportSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize viewportSizeHint()

func (*QScrollArea) MetaObject

func (this *QScrollArea) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QScrollArea) NewFromPointer

func (*QScrollArea) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScrollArea

func (*QScrollArea) QScrollArea_PTR

func (ptr *QScrollArea) QScrollArea_PTR() *QScrollArea

func (*QScrollArea) ResizeEvent

func (this *QScrollArea) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QScrollArea) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QScrollArea) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().

func (*QScrollArea) SetAlignment

func (this *QScrollArea) SetAlignment(arg0 int)

func (*QScrollArea) SetCthis

func (this *QScrollArea) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QScrollArea) SetWidget

func (this *QScrollArea) SetWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the scroll area's widget.

The widget becomes a child of the scroll area, and will be destroyed when the scroll area is deleted or when a new widget is set.

The widget's autoFillBackground property will be set to true.

If the scroll area is visible when the widget is added, you must show() it explicitly.

Note that You must add the layout of widget before you call this function; if you add it later, the widget will not be visible - regardless of when you show() the scroll area. In this case, you can also not show() the widget later.

See also widget().

func (*QScrollArea) SetWidgetResizable

func (this *QScrollArea) SetWidgetResizable(resizable bool)

func (*QScrollArea) SizeHint

func (this *QScrollArea) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QScrollArea) TakeWidget

func (this *QScrollArea) TakeWidget() *QWidget

Removes the scroll area's widget, and passes ownership of the widget to the caller.

See also widget().

func (*QScrollArea) ViewportSizeHint

func (this *QScrollArea) ViewportSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportSizeHint().

func (*QScrollArea) Widget

func (this *QScrollArea) Widget() *QWidget

Returns the scroll area's widget, or 0 if there is none.

See also setWidget().

func (*QScrollArea) WidgetResizable

func (this *QScrollArea) WidgetResizable() bool

type QScrollArea_ITF

type QScrollArea_ITF interface {
	QAbstractScrollArea_ITF
	QScrollArea_PTR() *QScrollArea
}

type QScrollBar

type QScrollBar struct {
	*QAbstractSlider
}

func NewQScrollBar

func NewQScrollBar(parent QWidget_ITF) *QScrollBar

Constructs a vertical scroll bar.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.

func NewQScrollBarFromPointer

func NewQScrollBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScrollBar

func NewQScrollBar_1

func NewQScrollBar_1(arg0 int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QScrollBar

Constructs a vertical scroll bar.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.

func NewQScrollBar_1_

func NewQScrollBar_1_(arg0 int) *QScrollBar

Constructs a vertical scroll bar.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.

func NewQScrollBar__

func NewQScrollBar__() *QScrollBar

Constructs a vertical scroll bar.

The parent argument is sent to the QWidget constructor.

The minimum defaults to 0, the maximum to 99, with a singleStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0.

func (*QScrollBar) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) ContextMenuEvent(arg0 qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

func (*QScrollBar) Event

func (this *QScrollBar) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QScrollBar) GetCthis

func (this *QScrollBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QScrollBar) HideEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) HideEvent(arg0 qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QScrollBar) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritHideEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionSlider))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionSlider *)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritSliderChange

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritSliderChange(f func(change int))

void sliderChange(enum QAbstractSlider::SliderChange)

func (*QScrollBar) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) InheritWheelEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QScrollBar) InitStyleOption

func (this *QScrollBar) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionSlider_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QScrollBar. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSlider, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QScrollBar) MetaObject

func (this *QScrollBar) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QScrollBar) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QScrollBar) MousePressEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QScrollBar) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QScrollBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QScrollBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScrollBar

func (*QScrollBar) PaintEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QScrollBar) QScrollBar_PTR

func (ptr *QScrollBar) QScrollBar_PTR() *QScrollBar

func (*QScrollBar) SetCthis

func (this *QScrollBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QScrollBar) SizeHint

func (this *QScrollBar) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QScrollBar) SliderChange

func (this *QScrollBar) SliderChange(change int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractSlider::sliderChange().

func (*QScrollBar) WheelEvent

func (this *QScrollBar) WheelEvent(arg0 qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QScrollBar_ITF

type QScrollBar_ITF interface {
	QAbstractSlider_ITF
	QScrollBar_PTR() *QScrollBar
}

type QScroller

type QScroller struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQScrollerFromPointer

func NewQScrollerFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScroller

func QScroller_Scroller

func QScroller_Scroller(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QScroller

func QScroller_Scroller_1

func QScroller_Scroller_1(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QScroller

func (*QScroller) EnsureVisible

func (this *QScroller) EnsureVisible(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, xmargin float64, ymargin float64)

Starts scrolling so that the rectangle rect is visible inside the viewport with additional margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin around the rect.

In cases where it is not possible to fit the rect plus margins inside the viewport the contents are scrolled so that as much as possible is visible from rect.

The scrolling speed is calculated so that the given position is reached after a platform-defined time span.

This function performs the actual scrolling by calling scrollTo().

See also scrollTo().

func (*QScroller) EnsureVisible_1

func (this *QScroller) EnsureVisible_1(rect qtcore.QRectF_ITF, xmargin float64, ymargin float64, scrollTime int)

Starts scrolling so that the rectangle rect is visible inside the viewport with additional margins specified in pixels by xmargin and ymargin around the rect.

In cases where it is not possible to fit the rect plus margins inside the viewport the contents are scrolled so that as much as possible is visible from rect.

The scrolling speed is calculated so that the given position is reached after a platform-defined time span.

This function performs the actual scrolling by calling scrollTo().

See also scrollTo().

func (*QScroller) FinalPosition

func (this *QScroller) FinalPosition() *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the estimated final position for the current scroll movement. Returns the current position if the scroller state is not Scrolling. The result is undefined when the scroller state is Inactive.

The target position is in pixel.

See also pixelPerMeter() and scrollTo().

func (*QScroller) GetCthis

func (this *QScroller) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QScroller) GrabGesture

func (this *QScroller) GrabGesture(target qtcore.QObject_ITF, gestureType int) int

Registers a custom scroll gesture recognizer, grabs it for the target and returns the resulting gesture type. If scrollGestureType is set to TouchGesture the gesture triggers on touch events. If it is set to one of LeftMouseButtonGesture, RightMouseButtonGesture or MiddleMouseButtonGesture it triggers on mouse events of the corresponding button.

Only one scroll gesture can be active on a single object at the same time. If you call this function twice on the same object, it will ungrab the existing gesture before grabbing the new one.

Note: To avoid unwanted side-effects, mouse events are consumed while the gesture is triggered. Since the initial mouse press event is not consumed, the gesture sends a fake mouse release event at the global position (INT_MIN, INT_MIN). This ensures that internal states of the widget that received the original mouse press are consistent.

See also ungrabGesture() and grabbedGesture().

func (*QScroller) GrabGesture__

func (this *QScroller) GrabGesture__(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) int

Registers a custom scroll gesture recognizer, grabs it for the target and returns the resulting gesture type. If scrollGestureType is set to TouchGesture the gesture triggers on touch events. If it is set to one of LeftMouseButtonGesture, RightMouseButtonGesture or MiddleMouseButtonGesture it triggers on mouse events of the corresponding button.

Only one scroll gesture can be active on a single object at the same time. If you call this function twice on the same object, it will ungrab the existing gesture before grabbing the new one.

Note: To avoid unwanted side-effects, mouse events are consumed while the gesture is triggered. Since the initial mouse press event is not consumed, the gesture sends a fake mouse release event at the global position (INT_MIN, INT_MIN). This ensures that internal states of the widget that received the original mouse press are consistent.

See also ungrabGesture() and grabbedGesture().

func (*QScroller) GrabbedGesture

func (this *QScroller) GrabbedGesture(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) int

Returns the gesture type currently grabbed for the target or 0 if no gesture is grabbed.

See also grabGesture() and ungrabGesture().

func (*QScroller) HandleInput

func (this *QScroller) HandleInput(input int, position qtcore.QPointF_ITF, timestamp int64) bool

This function is used by gesture recognizers to inform the scroller about a new input event. The scroller changes its internal state() according to the input event and its attached scroller properties. The scroller doesn't distinguish between the kind of input device the event came from. Therefore the event needs to be split into the input type, a position and a milli-second timestamp. The position needs to be in the target's coordinate system.

The return value is true if the event should be consumed by the calling filter or false if the event should be forwarded to the control.

Note: Using grabGesture() should be sufficient for most use cases.

func (*QScroller) HandleInput__

func (this *QScroller) HandleInput__(input int, position qtcore.QPointF_ITF) bool

This function is used by gesture recognizers to inform the scroller about a new input event. The scroller changes its internal state() according to the input event and its attached scroller properties. The scroller doesn't distinguish between the kind of input device the event came from. Therefore the event needs to be split into the input type, a position and a milli-second timestamp. The position needs to be in the target's coordinate system.

The return value is true if the event should be consumed by the calling filter or false if the event should be forwarded to the control.

Note: Using grabGesture() should be sufficient for most use cases.

func (*QScroller) HasScroller

func (this *QScroller) HasScroller(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) bool

Returns true if a QScroller object was already created for target; false otherwise.

See also scroller().

func (*QScroller) MetaObject

func (this *QScroller) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QScroller) NewFromPointer

func (*QScroller) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScroller

func (*QScroller) PixelPerMeter

func (this *QScroller) PixelPerMeter() *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the pixel per meter metric for the scrolled widget.

The value is reported for both the x and y axis separately by using a QPointF.

Note: Please note that this value should be physically correct. The actual DPI settings that Qt returns for the display may be reported wrongly on purpose by the underlying windowing system, for example on macOS.

func (*QScroller) QScroller_PTR

func (ptr *QScroller) QScroller_PTR() *QScroller

func (*QScroller) ResendPrepareEvent

func (this *QScroller) ResendPrepareEvent()

This function resends the QScrollPrepareEvent. Calling resendPrepareEvent triggers a QScrollPrepareEvent from the scroller. This allows the receiver to re-set content position and content size while scrolling. Calling this function while in the Inactive state is useless as the prepare event is sent again before scrolling starts.

func (*QScroller) ScrollTo

func (this *QScroller) ScrollTo(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

Starts scrolling the widget so that point pos is at the top-left position in the viewport.

The behaviour when scrolling outside the valid scroll area is undefined. In this case the scroller might or might not overshoot.

The scrolling speed will be calculated so that the given position will be reached after a platform-defined time span.

pos is given in viewport coordinates.

See also ensureVisible().

func (*QScroller) ScrollTo_1

func (this *QScroller) ScrollTo_1(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF, scrollTime int)

Starts scrolling the widget so that point pos is at the top-left position in the viewport.

The behaviour when scrolling outside the valid scroll area is undefined. In this case the scroller might or might not overshoot.

The scrolling speed will be calculated so that the given position will be reached after a platform-defined time span.

pos is given in viewport coordinates.

See also ensureVisible().

func (*QScroller) Scroller

func (this *QScroller) Scroller(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QScroller

Returns the scroller for the given target. As long as the object exists this function will always return the same QScroller instance. If no QScroller exists for the target, one will implicitly be created. At no point more than one QScroller will be active on an object.

See also hasScroller() and target().

func (*QScroller) ScrollerProperties

func (this *QScroller) ScrollerProperties() *QScrollerProperties

func (*QScroller) ScrollerPropertiesChanged

func (this *QScroller) ScrollerPropertiesChanged(arg0 QScrollerProperties_ITF)

QScroller emits this signal whenever its scroller properties change. newProperties are the new scroller properties.

Note: Notifier signal for property scrollerProperties.

See also scrollerProperties.

func (*QScroller) Scroller_1

func (this *QScroller) Scroller_1(target qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QScroller

Returns the scroller for the given target. As long as the object exists this function will always return the same QScroller instance. If no QScroller exists for the target, one will implicitly be created. At no point more than one QScroller will be active on an object.

See also hasScroller() and target().

func (*QScroller) SetCthis

func (this *QScroller) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QScroller) SetScrollerProperties

func (this *QScroller) SetScrollerProperties(prop QScrollerProperties_ITF)

func (*QScroller) SetSnapPositionsX

func (this *QScroller) SetSnapPositionsX(first float64, interval float64)

Set the snap positions for the horizontal axis to a list of positions. This overwrites all previously set snap positions and also a previously set snapping interval. Snapping can be deactivated by setting an empty list of positions.

func (*QScroller) SetSnapPositionsY

func (this *QScroller) SetSnapPositionsY(first float64, interval float64)

Set the snap positions for the vertical axis to a list of positions. This overwrites all previously set snap positions and also a previously set snapping interval. Snapping can be deactivated by setting an empty list of positions.

func (*QScroller) State

func (this *QScroller) State() int

func (*QScroller) StateChanged

func (this *QScroller) StateChanged(newstate int)

QScroller emits this signal whenever the state changes. newState is the new State.

Note: Notifier signal for property state.

See also state.

func (*QScroller) Stop

func (this *QScroller) Stop()

Stops the scroller and resets its state back to Inactive.

func (*QScroller) Target

func (this *QScroller) Target() *qtcore.QObject

Returns the target object of this scroller.

See also hasScroller() and scroller().

func (*QScroller) UngrabGesture

func (this *QScroller) UngrabGesture(target qtcore.QObject_ITF)

Ungrabs the gesture for the target. Does nothing if no gesture is grabbed.

See also grabGesture() and grabbedGesture().

func (*QScroller) Velocity

func (this *QScroller) Velocity() *qtcore.QPointF

Returns the current scrolling velocity in meter per second when the state is Scrolling or Dragging. Returns a zero velocity otherwise.

The velocity is reported for both the x and y axis separately by using a QPointF.

See also pixelPerMeter().

type QScrollerProperties

type QScrollerProperties struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQScrollerProperties

func NewQScrollerProperties() *QScrollerProperties

Constructs new scroller properties.

func NewQScrollerPropertiesFromPointer

func NewQScrollerPropertiesFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScrollerProperties

func (*QScrollerProperties) GetCthis

func (this *QScrollerProperties) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QScrollerProperties) NewFromPointer

func (*QScrollerProperties) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QScrollerProperties

func (*QScrollerProperties) Operator_equal

func (*QScrollerProperties) Operator_equal_equal

func (this *QScrollerProperties) Operator_equal_equal(sp QScrollerProperties_ITF) bool

func (*QScrollerProperties) Operator_not_equal

func (this *QScrollerProperties) Operator_not_equal(sp QScrollerProperties_ITF) bool

func (*QScrollerProperties) QScrollerProperties_PTR

func (ptr *QScrollerProperties) QScrollerProperties_PTR() *QScrollerProperties

func (*QScrollerProperties) ScrollMetric

func (this *QScrollerProperties) ScrollMetric(metric int) *qtcore.QVariant

Query the metric value of the scroller properties.

See also setScrollMetric() and ScrollMetric.

func (*QScrollerProperties) SetCthis

func (this *QScrollerProperties) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QScrollerProperties) SetDefaultScrollerProperties

func (this *QScrollerProperties) SetDefaultScrollerProperties(sp QScrollerProperties_ITF)

Sets the scroller properties for all new QScrollerProperties objects to sp.

Use this function to override the platform default properties returned by the default constructor. If you only want to change the scroller properties of a single scroller, use QScroller::setScrollerProperties()

Note: Calling this function will not change the content of already existing QScrollerProperties objects.

See also unsetDefaultScrollerProperties().

func (*QScrollerProperties) SetScrollMetric

func (this *QScrollerProperties) SetScrollMetric(metric int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Set a specific value of the metric ScrollerMetric to value.

See also scrollMetric() and ScrollMetric.

func (*QScrollerProperties) UnsetDefaultScrollerProperties

func (this *QScrollerProperties) UnsetDefaultScrollerProperties()

Sets the scroller properties returned by the default constructor back to the platform default properties.

See also setDefaultScrollerProperties().

type QScrollerProperties_ITF

type QScrollerProperties_ITF interface {
	QScrollerProperties_PTR() *QScrollerProperties
}

type QScrollerProperties__FrameRates

type QScrollerProperties__FrameRates = int

This enum describes the available frame rates used while dragging or scrolling.

const QScrollerProperties__Fps20 QScrollerProperties__FrameRates = 3
const QScrollerProperties__Fps30 QScrollerProperties__FrameRates = 2
const QScrollerProperties__Fps60 QScrollerProperties__FrameRates = 1
const QScrollerProperties__Standard QScrollerProperties__FrameRates = 0

type QScrollerProperties__OvershootPolicy

type QScrollerProperties__OvershootPolicy = int

This enum describes the various modes of overshooting.

const QScrollerProperties__OvershootAlwaysOff QScrollerProperties__OvershootPolicy = 1

Overshooting is never enabled, even when the content is scrollable.

const QScrollerProperties__OvershootAlwaysOn QScrollerProperties__OvershootPolicy = 2

Overshooting is always enabled, even when the content is not scrollable.

const QScrollerProperties__OvershootWhenScrollable QScrollerProperties__OvershootPolicy = 0

Overshooting is possible when the content is scrollable. This is the default.

type QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric

type QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = int

This enum contains the different scroll metric types. When not indicated otherwise the setScrollMetric function expects a QVariant of type qreal.

See the QScroller documentation for further details of the concepts behind the different values.

const QScrollerProperties__AcceleratingFlickMaximumTime QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 9

This is the maximum time in seconds that a flick gesture can take to be recognized as an accelerating flick. If set to zero no such gesture is detected. An "accelerating flick" is a flick gesture executed on an already scrolling object. In such cases the scrolling speed is multiplied by AcceleratingFlickSpeedupFactor in order to accelerate it.

const QScrollerProperties__AcceleratingFlickSpeedupFactor QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 10
const QScrollerProperties__AxisLockThreshold QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 3
const QScrollerProperties__DecelerationFactor QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 5
const QScrollerProperties__DragStartDistance QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 1

This is the minimum distance the touch or mouse point needs to be moved before the flick gesture is triggered in m.

const QScrollerProperties__DragVelocitySmoothingFactor QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 2
const QScrollerProperties__FrameRate QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 19
const QScrollerProperties__HorizontalOvershootPolicy QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 17
const QScrollerProperties__MaximumClickThroughVelocity QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 8

This is the maximum allowed scroll speed for a click-through in m/s. This means that a click on a currently (slowly) scrolling object will not only stop the scrolling but the click event will also be delivered to the UI control. This is useful when using exponential-type scrolling curves.

const QScrollerProperties__MaximumVelocity QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 7

This is the maximum velocity that can be reached in m/s.

const QScrollerProperties__MinimumVelocity QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 6

The minimum velocity that is needed after ending the touch or releasing the mouse to start scrolling in m/s.

const QScrollerProperties__MousePressEventDelay QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 0

This is the time a mouse press event is delayed when starting a flick gesture in [s]. If the gesture is triggered within that time, no mouse press or release is sent to the scrolled object. If it triggers after that delay the delayed mouse press plus a faked release event at global position QPoint(-QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, -QWIDGETSIZE_MAX) is sent. If the gesture is canceled, then both the delayed mouse press plus the real release event are delivered.

const QScrollerProperties__OvershootDragDistanceFactor QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 14
const QScrollerProperties__OvershootDragResistanceFactor QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 13
const QScrollerProperties__OvershootScrollDistanceFactor QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 15
const QScrollerProperties__OvershootScrollTime QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 16
const QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetricCount QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 20
const QScrollerProperties__ScrollingCurve QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 4
const QScrollerProperties__SnapPositionRatio QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 11
const QScrollerProperties__SnapTime QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 12
const QScrollerProperties__VerticalOvershootPolicy QScrollerProperties__ScrollMetric = 18

type QScroller_ITF

type QScroller_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QScroller_PTR() *QScroller
}

type QScroller__Input

type QScroller__Input = int

This enum contains an input device agnostic view of input events that are relevant for QScroller.

const QScroller__InputMove QScroller__Input = 2

The user moved the input device (e.g. QEvent::MouseMove, QEvent::GraphicsSceneMouseMove, QEvent::TouchUpdate)

const QScroller__InputPress QScroller__Input = 1

The user pressed the input device (e.g. QEvent::MouseButtonPress, QEvent::GraphicsSceneMousePress, QEvent::TouchBegin)

const QScroller__InputRelease QScroller__Input = 3

The user released the input device (e.g. QEvent::MouseButtonRelease, QEvent::GraphicsSceneMouseRelease, QEvent::TouchEnd)

type QScroller__ScrollerGestureType

type QScroller__ScrollerGestureType = int

This enum contains the different gesture types that are supported by the QScroller gesture recognizer.

const QScroller__LeftMouseButtonGesture QScroller__ScrollerGestureType = 1

The gesture recognizer will only trigger on left mouse button events.

const QScroller__MiddleMouseButtonGesture QScroller__ScrollerGestureType = 3

The gesture recognizer will only trigger on middle mouse button events.

const QScroller__RightMouseButtonGesture QScroller__ScrollerGestureType = 2

The gesture recognizer will only trigger on right mouse button events.

const QScroller__TouchGesture QScroller__ScrollerGestureType = 0

The gesture recognizer will only trigger on touch events. Specifically it will react on single touch points when using a touch screen and dual touch points when using a touchpad.

type QScroller__State

type QScroller__State = int

This enum contains the different QScroller states.

const QScroller__Dragging QScroller__State = 2

The scroll area is currently following the touch point or mouse.

const QScroller__Inactive QScroller__State = 0

The scroller is not scrolling and nothing is pressed.

const QScroller__Pressed QScroller__State = 1

A touch event was received or the mouse button was pressed but the scroll area is currently not dragged.

const QScroller__Scrolling QScroller__State = 3

The scroll area is moving on it's own.

type QShortcut

type QShortcut struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQShortcut

func NewQShortcut(parent QWidget_ITF) *QShortcut

Constructs a QShortcut object for the parent widget. Since no shortcut key sequence is specified, the shortcut will not emit any signals.

See also setKey().

func NewQShortcutFromPointer

func NewQShortcutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QShortcut

func NewQShortcut_1

func NewQShortcut_1(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, member string, ambiguousMember string, context int) *QShortcut

Constructs a QShortcut object for the parent widget. Since no shortcut key sequence is specified, the shortcut will not emit any signals.

See also setKey().

func NewQShortcut_1_

func NewQShortcut_1_(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QShortcut

Constructs a QShortcut object for the parent widget. Since no shortcut key sequence is specified, the shortcut will not emit any signals.

See also setKey().

func NewQShortcut_1_1

func NewQShortcut_1_1(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, member string) *QShortcut

Constructs a QShortcut object for the parent widget. Since no shortcut key sequence is specified, the shortcut will not emit any signals.

See also setKey().

func NewQShortcut_1_2

func NewQShortcut_1_2(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, member string, ambiguousMember string) *QShortcut

Constructs a QShortcut object for the parent widget. Since no shortcut key sequence is specified, the shortcut will not emit any signals.

See also setKey().

func (*QShortcut) Activated

func (this *QShortcut) Activated()

This signal is emitted when the user types the shortcut's key sequence.

See also activatedAmbiguously().

func (*QShortcut) ActivatedAmbiguously

func (this *QShortcut) ActivatedAmbiguously()

When a key sequence is being typed at the keyboard, it is said to be ambiguous as long as it matches the start of more than one shortcut.

When a shortcut's key sequence is completed, activatedAmbiguously() is emitted if the key sequence is still ambiguous (i.e., it is the start of one or more other shortcuts). The activated() signal is not emitted in this case.

See also activated().

func (*QShortcut) AutoRepeat

func (this *QShortcut) AutoRepeat() bool

func (*QShortcut) Context

func (this *QShortcut) Context() int

func (*QShortcut) Event

func (this *QShortcut) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

func (*QShortcut) GetCthis

func (this *QShortcut) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QShortcut) Id

func (this *QShortcut) Id() int

Returns the shortcut's ID.

See also QShortcutEvent::shortcutId().

func (*QShortcut) InheritEvent

func (this *QShortcut) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QShortcut) IsEnabled

func (this *QShortcut) IsEnabled() bool

func (*QShortcut) Key

func (this *QShortcut) Key() *qtgui.QKeySequence

func (*QShortcut) MetaObject

func (this *QShortcut) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QShortcut) NewFromPointer

func (*QShortcut) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QShortcut

func (*QShortcut) ParentWidget

func (this *QShortcut) ParentWidget() *QWidget

Returns the shortcut's parent widget.

func (*QShortcut) QShortcut_PTR

func (ptr *QShortcut) QShortcut_PTR() *QShortcut

func (*QShortcut) SetAutoRepeat

func (this *QShortcut) SetAutoRepeat(on bool)

func (*QShortcut) SetContext

func (this *QShortcut) SetContext(context int)

func (*QShortcut) SetCthis

func (this *QShortcut) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QShortcut) SetEnabled

func (this *QShortcut) SetEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QShortcut) SetKey

func (this *QShortcut) SetKey(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF)

func (*QShortcut) SetWhatsThis

func (this *QShortcut) SetWhatsThis(text string)

func (*QShortcut) WhatsThis

func (this *QShortcut) WhatsThis() string

type QShortcut_ITF

type QShortcut_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QShortcut_PTR() *QShortcut
}

type QSizeGrip

type QSizeGrip struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQSizeGrip

func NewQSizeGrip(parent QWidget_ITF) *QSizeGrip

Constructs a resize corner as a child widget of the given parent.

func NewQSizeGripFromPointer

func NewQSizeGripFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSizeGrip

func (*QSizeGrip) Event

func (this *QSizeGrip) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QSizeGrip) EventFilter

func (this *QSizeGrip) EventFilter(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QSizeGrip) GetCthis

func (this *QSizeGrip) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSizeGrip) HideEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) HideEvent(hideEvent qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritEventFilter(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QObject, arg1 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritHideEvent(f func(hideEvent *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(mouseEvent *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritMoveEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritMoveEvent(f func(moveEvent *qtgui.QMoveEvent))

void moveEvent(class QMoveEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) InheritShowEvent(f func(showEvent *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QSizeGrip) MetaObject

func (this *QSizeGrip) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSizeGrip) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

Resizes the top-level widget containing this widget. The mouse move event is passed in the event parameter.

func (*QSizeGrip) MousePressEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

Receives the mouse press events for the widget, and primes the resize operation. The mouse press event is passed in the event parameter.

func (*QSizeGrip) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) MouseReleaseEvent(mouseEvent qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QSizeGrip) MoveEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) MoveEvent(moveEvent qtgui.QMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::moveEvent().

func (*QSizeGrip) NewFromPointer

func (*QSizeGrip) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSizeGrip

func (*QSizeGrip) PaintEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

Paints the resize grip.

Resize grips are usually rendered as small diagonal textured lines in the lower-right corner. The paint event is passed in the event parameter.

func (*QSizeGrip) QSizeGrip_PTR

func (ptr *QSizeGrip) QSizeGrip_PTR() *QSizeGrip

func (*QSizeGrip) SetCthis

func (this *QSizeGrip) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSizeGrip) SetVisible

func (this *QSizeGrip) SetVisible(arg0 bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QSizeGrip) ShowEvent

func (this *QSizeGrip) ShowEvent(showEvent qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QSizeGrip) SizeHint

func (this *QSizeGrip) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

type QSizeGrip_ITF

type QSizeGrip_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QSizeGrip_PTR() *QSizeGrip
}

type QSizePolicy

type QSizePolicy struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQSizePolicy

func NewQSizePolicy() *QSizePolicy

Constructs a QSizePolicy object with Fixed as its horizontal and vertical policies.

The policies can be altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and setVerticalPolicy() functions. Use the setHeightForWidth() function if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).

See also setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch().

func NewQSizePolicyFromPointer

func NewQSizePolicyFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSizePolicy

func NewQSizePolicy_1

func NewQSizePolicy_1(horizontal int, vertical int, type_ int) *QSizePolicy

Constructs a QSizePolicy object with Fixed as its horizontal and vertical policies.

The policies can be altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and setVerticalPolicy() functions. Use the setHeightForWidth() function if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).

See also setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch().

func NewQSizePolicy_1_

func NewQSizePolicy_1_(horizontal int, vertical int) *QSizePolicy

Constructs a QSizePolicy object with Fixed as its horizontal and vertical policies.

The policies can be altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and setVerticalPolicy() functions. Use the setHeightForWidth() function if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).

See also setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch().

func (*QSizePolicy) ControlType

func (this *QSizePolicy) ControlType() int

Returns the control type associated with the widget for which this size policy applies.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setControlType().

func (*QSizePolicy) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QSizePolicy) ExpandingDirections() int

Returns whether a widget can make use of more space than the QWidget::sizeHint() function indicates.

A value of Qt::Horizontal or Qt::Vertical means that the widget can grow horizontally or vertically (i.e., the horizontal or vertical policy is Expanding or MinimumExpanding), whereas Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical means that it can grow in both dimensions.

See also horizontalPolicy() and verticalPolicy().

func (*QSizePolicy) GetCthis

func (this *QSizePolicy) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSizePolicy) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QSizePolicy) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Returns true if the widget's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false.

See also setHeightForWidth().

func (*QSizePolicy) HasWidthForHeight

func (this *QSizePolicy) HasWidthForHeight() bool

Returns true if the widget's width depends on its height; otherwise returns false.

See also setWidthForHeight().

func (*QSizePolicy) HorizontalPolicy

func (this *QSizePolicy) HorizontalPolicy() int

Returns the horizontal component of the size policy.

See also setHorizontalPolicy(), verticalPolicy(), and horizontalStretch().

func (*QSizePolicy) HorizontalStretch

func (this *QSizePolicy) HorizontalStretch() int

Returns the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy.

See also setHorizontalStretch(), verticalStretch(), and horizontalPolicy().

func (*QSizePolicy) NewFromPointer

func (*QSizePolicy) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSizePolicy

func (*QSizePolicy) Operator_equal_equal

func (this *QSizePolicy) Operator_equal_equal(s QSizePolicy_ITF) bool

func (*QSizePolicy) Operator_not_equal

func (this *QSizePolicy) Operator_not_equal(s QSizePolicy_ITF) bool

func (*QSizePolicy) QSizePolicy_PTR

func (ptr *QSizePolicy) QSizePolicy_PTR() *QSizePolicy

func (*QSizePolicy) RetainSizeWhenHidden

func (this *QSizePolicy) RetainSizeWhenHidden() bool

Returns whether the layout should retain the widget's size when it is hidden. This is false by default.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also setRetainSizeWhenHidden().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetControlType

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetControlType(type_ int)

Sets the control type associated with the widget for which this size policy applies to type.

The control type specifies the type of the widget for which this size policy applies. It is used by some styles, notably QMacStyle, to insert proper spacing between widgets. For example, the macOS Aqua guidelines specify that push buttons should be separated by 12 pixels, whereas vertically stacked radio buttons only require 6 pixels.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also controlType() and QStyle::layoutSpacing().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetCthis

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSizePolicy) SetHeightForWidth

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetHeightForWidth(b bool)

Sets the flag determining whether the widget's preferred height depends on its width, to dependent.

See also hasHeightForWidth() and setWidthForHeight().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetHorizontalPolicy

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetHorizontalPolicy(d int)

Sets the horizontal component to the given policy.

See also horizontalPolicy(), setVerticalPolicy(), and setHorizontalStretch().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetHorizontalStretch

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetHorizontalStretch(stretchFactor int)

Sets the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy to the given stretchFactor. stretchFactor must be in the range [0,255].

When two widgets are adjacent to each other in a horizontal layout, setting the horizontal stretch factor of the widget on the left to 2 and the factor of widget on the right to 1 will ensure that the widget on the left will always be twice the size of the one on the right.

See also horizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch(), and setHorizontalPolicy().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetRetainSizeWhenHidden

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetRetainSizeWhenHidden(retainSize bool)

Sets whether a layout should retain the widget's size when it is hidden. If retainSize is true, the layout will not be changed by hiding the widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also retainSizeWhenHidden().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetVerticalPolicy

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetVerticalPolicy(d int)

Sets the vertical component to the given policy.

See also verticalPolicy(), setHorizontalPolicy(), and setVerticalStretch().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetVerticalStretch

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetVerticalStretch(stretchFactor int)

Sets the vertical stretch factor of the size policy to the given stretchFactor. stretchFactor must be in the range [0,255].

When two widgets are adjacent to each other in a vertical layout, setting the vertical stretch factor of the widget on the top to 2 and the factor of widget on the bottom to 1 will ensure that the widget on the top will always be twice the size of the one on the bottom.

See also verticalStretch(), setHorizontalStretch(), and setVerticalPolicy().

func (*QSizePolicy) SetWidthForHeight

func (this *QSizePolicy) SetWidthForHeight(b bool)

Sets the flag determining whether the widget's width depends on its height, to dependent.

This is only supported for QGraphicsLayout's subclasses. It is not possible to have a layout with both height-for-width and width-for-height constraints at the same time.

See also hasWidthForHeight() and setHeightForWidth().

func (*QSizePolicy) Transpose

func (this *QSizePolicy) Transpose()

Swaps the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches.

See also transposed().

func (*QSizePolicy) Transposed

func (this *QSizePolicy) Transposed() *QSizePolicy

Returns a size policy object with the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches swapped.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.9.

See also transpose().

func (*QSizePolicy) VerticalPolicy

func (this *QSizePolicy) VerticalPolicy() int

Returns the vertical component of the size policy.

See also setVerticalPolicy(), horizontalPolicy(), and verticalStretch().

func (*QSizePolicy) VerticalStretch

func (this *QSizePolicy) VerticalStretch() int

Returns the vertical stretch factor of the size policy.

See also setVerticalStretch(), horizontalStretch(), and verticalPolicy().

type QSizePolicy_ITF

type QSizePolicy_ITF interface {
	QSizePolicy_PTR() *QSizePolicy
}

type QSizePolicy__ControlType

type QSizePolicy__ControlType = int
const QSizePolicy__ButtonBox QSizePolicy__ControlType = 2
const QSizePolicy__CheckBox QSizePolicy__ControlType = 4
const QSizePolicy__ComboBox QSizePolicy__ControlType = 8
const QSizePolicy__DefaultType QSizePolicy__ControlType = 1
const QSizePolicy__Frame QSizePolicy__ControlType = 16
const QSizePolicy__GroupBox QSizePolicy__ControlType = 32
const QSizePolicy__Label QSizePolicy__ControlType = 64
const QSizePolicy__Line QSizePolicy__ControlType = 128
const QSizePolicy__LineEdit QSizePolicy__ControlType = 256
const QSizePolicy__PushButton QSizePolicy__ControlType = 512
const QSizePolicy__RadioButton QSizePolicy__ControlType = 1024
const QSizePolicy__Slider QSizePolicy__ControlType = 2048
const QSizePolicy__SpinBox QSizePolicy__ControlType = 4096
const QSizePolicy__TabWidget QSizePolicy__ControlType = 8192
const QSizePolicy__ToolButton QSizePolicy__ControlType = 16384

type QSizePolicy__Policy

type QSizePolicy__Policy = int

This enum describes the various per-dimension sizing types used when constructing a QSizePolicy.

QSizePolicy::MinimumGrowFlagThe sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger (e.g. the horizontal direction of a push button). It cannot be smaller than the size provided by sizeHint(). QSizePolicy::MaximumShrinkFlagThe sizeHint() is a maximum. The widget can be shrunk any amount without detriment if other widgets need the space (e.g. a separator line). It cannot be larger than the size provided by sizeHint(). QSizePolicy::PreferredGrowFlag | ShrinkFlagThe sizeHint() is best, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger than sizeHint() (the default QWidget policy). QSizePolicy::ExpandingGrowFlag | ShrinkFlag | ExpandFlagThe sizeHint() is a sensible size, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a horizontal slider). QSizePolicy::MinimumExpandingGrowFlag | ExpandFlagThe sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a horizontal slider). QSizePolicy::IgnoredShrinkFlag | GrowFlag | IgnoreFlagThe sizeHint() is ignored. The widget will get as much space as possible.

See also PolicyFlag, setHorizontalPolicy(), and setVerticalPolicy().

const QSizePolicy__Expanding QSizePolicy__Policy = 7
const QSizePolicy__Fixed QSizePolicy__Policy = 0

The QWidget::sizeHint() is the only acceptable alternative, so the widget can never grow or shrink (e.g. the vertical direction of a push button).

const QSizePolicy__Ignored QSizePolicy__Policy = 13
const QSizePolicy__Maximum QSizePolicy__Policy = 4
const QSizePolicy__Minimum QSizePolicy__Policy = 1
const QSizePolicy__MinimumExpanding QSizePolicy__Policy = 3
const QSizePolicy__Preferred QSizePolicy__Policy = 5

type QSizePolicy__PolicyFlag

type QSizePolicy__PolicyFlag = int

These flags are combined together to form the various Policy values:

See also Policy.

const QSizePolicy__ExpandFlag QSizePolicy__PolicyFlag = 2

The widget should get as much space as possible.

const QSizePolicy__GrowFlag QSizePolicy__PolicyFlag = 1

The widget can grow beyond its size hint if necessary.

const QSizePolicy__IgnoreFlag QSizePolicy__PolicyFlag = 8

The widget's size hint is ignored. The widget will get as much space as possible.

const QSizePolicy__ShrinkFlag QSizePolicy__PolicyFlag = 4

The widget can shrink below its size hint if necessary.

type QSlider

type QSlider struct {
	*QAbstractSlider
}

func NewQSlider

func NewQSlider(parent QWidget_ITF) *QSlider

Constructs a vertical slider with the given parent.

func NewQSliderFromPointer

func NewQSliderFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSlider

func NewQSlider_1

func NewQSlider_1(orientation int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QSlider

Constructs a vertical slider with the given parent.

func NewQSlider_1_

func NewQSlider_1_(orientation int) *QSlider

Constructs a vertical slider with the given parent.

func NewQSlider__

func NewQSlider__() *QSlider

Constructs a vertical slider with the given parent.

func (*QSlider) Event

func (this *QSlider) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QSlider) GetCthis

func (this *QSlider) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSlider) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QSlider) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionSlider))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionSlider *)

func (*QSlider) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QSlider) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSlider) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QSlider) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSlider) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QSlider) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSlider) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QSlider) InheritPaintEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QSlider) InitStyleOption

func (this *QSlider) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionSlider_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QSlider. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionSlider, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QSlider) MetaObject

func (this *QSlider) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSlider) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QSlider) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QSlider) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QSlider) MouseMoveEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QSlider) MousePressEvent

func (this *QSlider) MousePressEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QSlider) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QSlider) MouseReleaseEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QSlider) NewFromPointer

func (*QSlider) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSlider

func (*QSlider) PaintEvent

func (this *QSlider) PaintEvent(ev qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QSlider) QSlider_PTR

func (ptr *QSlider) QSlider_PTR() *QSlider

func (*QSlider) SetCthis

func (this *QSlider) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSlider) SetTickInterval

func (this *QSlider) SetTickInterval(ti int)

func (*QSlider) SetTickPosition

func (this *QSlider) SetTickPosition(position int)

func (*QSlider) SizeHint

func (this *QSlider) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QSlider) TickInterval

func (this *QSlider) TickInterval() int

func (*QSlider) TickPosition

func (this *QSlider) TickPosition() int

type QSlider_ITF

type QSlider_ITF interface {
	QAbstractSlider_ITF
	QSlider_PTR() *QSlider
}

type QSlider__TickPosition

type QSlider__TickPosition = int

This enum specifies where the tick marks are to be drawn relative to the slider's groove and the handle the user moves.

QSlider::TicksLeftTicksAboveDraw tick marks to the left of the (vertical) slider QSlider::TicksRightTicksBelowDraw tick marks to the right of the (vertical) slider

const QSlider__NoTicks QSlider__TickPosition = 0

Do not draw any tick marks.

const QSlider__TicksAbove QSlider__TickPosition = 1

Draw tick marks above the (horizontal) slider

const QSlider__TicksBelow QSlider__TickPosition = 2

Draw tick marks below the (horizontal) slider

const QSlider__TicksBothSides QSlider__TickPosition = 3

Draw tick marks on both sides of the groove.

const QSlider__TicksLeft QSlider__TickPosition = 1
const QSlider__TicksRight QSlider__TickPosition = 2

type QSpacerItem

type QSpacerItem struct {
	*QLayoutItem
}

func NewQSpacerItem

func NewQSpacerItem(w int, h int, hData int, vData int) *QSpacerItem

func NewQSpacerItemFromPointer

func NewQSpacerItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSpacerItem

func NewQSpacerItem__

func NewQSpacerItem__(w int, h int) *QSpacerItem

func NewQSpacerItem__1

func NewQSpacerItem__1(w int, h int, hData int) *QSpacerItem

func (*QSpacerItem) ChangeSize

func (this *QSpacerItem) ChangeSize(w int, h int, hData int, vData int)

func (*QSpacerItem) ChangeSize__

func (this *QSpacerItem) ChangeSize__(w int, h int)

func (*QSpacerItem) ChangeSize__1

func (this *QSpacerItem) ChangeSize__1(w int, h int, hData int)

func (*QSpacerItem) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QSpacerItem) ExpandingDirections() int

Returns whether this layout item can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Qt::Vertical or Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas Qt::Vertical | Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.

func (*QSpacerItem) Geometry

func (this *QSpacerItem) Geometry() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle covered by this layout item.

See also setGeometry().

func (*QSpacerItem) GetCthis

func (this *QSpacerItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSpacerItem) IsEmpty

func (this *QSpacerItem) IsEmpty() bool

Implemented in subclasses to return whether this item is empty, i.e. whether it contains any widgets.

func (*QSpacerItem) MaximumSize

func (this *QSpacerItem) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the maximum size of this item.

func (*QSpacerItem) MinimumSize

func (this *QSpacerItem) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the minimum size of this item.

func (*QSpacerItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QSpacerItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSpacerItem

func (*QSpacerItem) QSpacerItem_PTR

func (ptr *QSpacerItem) QSpacerItem_PTR() *QSpacerItem

func (*QSpacerItem) SetCthis

func (this *QSpacerItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSpacerItem) SetGeometry

func (this *QSpacerItem) SetGeometry(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Implemented in subclasses to set this item's geometry to r.

See also geometry().

func (*QSpacerItem) SizeHint

func (this *QSpacerItem) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the preferred size of this item.

func (*QSpacerItem) SizePolicy

func (this *QSpacerItem) SizePolicy() *QSizePolicy

func (*QSpacerItem) SpacerItem

func (this *QSpacerItem) SpacerItem() *QSpacerItem

If this item is a QSpacerItem, it is returned as a QSpacerItem; otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.

See also layout() and widget().

type QSpacerItem_ITF

type QSpacerItem_ITF interface {
	QLayoutItem_ITF
	QSpacerItem_PTR() *QSpacerItem
}

type QSpinBox

type QSpinBox struct {
	*QAbstractSpinBox
}

func NewQSpinBox

func NewQSpinBox(parent QWidget_ITF) *QSpinBox

Constructs a spin box with 0 as minimum value and 99 as maximum value, a step value of 1. The value is initially set to 0. It is parented to parent.

See also setMinimum(), setMaximum(), and setSingleStep().

func NewQSpinBoxFromPointer

func NewQSpinBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSpinBox

func NewQSpinBox__

func NewQSpinBox__() *QSpinBox

Constructs a spin box with 0 as minimum value and 99 as maximum value, a step value of 1. The value is initially set to 0. It is parented to parent.

See also setMinimum(), setMaximum(), and setSingleStep().

func (*QSpinBox) CleanText

func (this *QSpinBox) CleanText() string

func (*QSpinBox) DisplayIntegerBase

func (this *QSpinBox) DisplayIntegerBase() int

func (*QSpinBox) Event

func (this *QSpinBox) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QSpinBox) Fixup

func (this *QSpinBox) Fixup(str string)

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::fixup().

func (*QSpinBox) GetCthis

func (this *QSpinBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSpinBox) InheritEvent

func (this *QSpinBox) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QSpinBox) InheritFixup

func (this *QSpinBox) InheritFixup(f func(str string))

void fixup(class QString &)

func (*QSpinBox) InheritTextFromValue

func (this *QSpinBox) InheritTextFromValue(f func(val int) unsafe.Pointer)

QString textFromValue(int)

func (*QSpinBox) InheritValidate

func (this *QSpinBox) InheritValidate(f func(input string, pos int) int)

QValidator::State validate(class QString &, int &)

func (*QSpinBox) InheritValueFromText

func (this *QSpinBox) InheritValueFromText(f func(text string) int)

int valueFromText(const class QString &)

func (*QSpinBox) Maximum

func (this *QSpinBox) Maximum() int

func (*QSpinBox) MetaObject

func (this *QSpinBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSpinBox) Minimum

func (this *QSpinBox) Minimum() int

func (*QSpinBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QSpinBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSpinBox

func (*QSpinBox) Prefix

func (this *QSpinBox) Prefix() string

func (*QSpinBox) QSpinBox_PTR

func (ptr *QSpinBox) QSpinBox_PTR() *QSpinBox

func (*QSpinBox) SetCthis

func (this *QSpinBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSpinBox) SetDisplayIntegerBase

func (this *QSpinBox) SetDisplayIntegerBase(base int)

func (*QSpinBox) SetMaximum

func (this *QSpinBox) SetMaximum(max int)

func (*QSpinBox) SetMinimum

func (this *QSpinBox) SetMinimum(min int)

func (*QSpinBox) SetPrefix

func (this *QSpinBox) SetPrefix(prefix string)

func (*QSpinBox) SetRange

func (this *QSpinBox) SetRange(min int, max int)

Convenience function to set the minimum, and maximum values with a single function call.

setRange(minimum, maximum);

is equivalent to:

setMinimum(minimum);
setMaximum(maximum);

See also minimum and maximum.

func (*QSpinBox) SetSingleStep

func (this *QSpinBox) SetSingleStep(val int)

func (*QSpinBox) SetSuffix

func (this *QSpinBox) SetSuffix(suffix string)

func (*QSpinBox) SetValue

func (this *QSpinBox) SetValue(val int)

func (*QSpinBox) SingleStep

func (this *QSpinBox) SingleStep() int

func (*QSpinBox) Suffix

func (this *QSpinBox) Suffix() string

func (*QSpinBox) TextFromValue

func (this *QSpinBox) TextFromValue(val int) string

This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to display the given value. The default implementation returns a string containing value printed in the standard way using QWidget::locale().toString(), but with the thousand separator removed unless setGroupSeparatorShown() is set. Reimplementations may return anything. (See the example in the detailed description.)

Note: QSpinBox does not call this function for specialValueText() and that neither prefix() nor suffix() should be included in the return value.

If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement valueFromText() and validate()

See also valueFromText(), validate(), and QLocale::groupSeparator().

func (*QSpinBox) Validate

func (this *QSpinBox) Validate(input string, pos int) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractSpinBox::validate().

func (*QSpinBox) Value

func (this *QSpinBox) Value() int

func (*QSpinBox) ValueChanged

func (this *QSpinBox) ValueChanged(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value's integer value is passed in i.

Note: Signal valueChanged is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(spinBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QSpinBox::valueChanged),
    [=](int i){ \/* ... *\/ });

Note: Notifier signal for property value.

func (*QSpinBox) ValueChanged_1

func (this *QSpinBox) ValueChanged_1(arg0 string)

This signal is emitted whenever the spin box's value is changed. The new value's integer value is passed in i.

Note: Signal valueChanged is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(spinBox, QOverload<int>::of(&QSpinBox::valueChanged),
    [=](int i){ \/* ... *\/ });

Note: Notifier signal for property value.

func (*QSpinBox) ValueFromText

func (this *QSpinBox) ValueFromText(text string) int

This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value.

Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric way need to reimplement this function.

Note: QSpinBox handles specialValueText() separately; this function is only concerned with the other values.

See also textFromValue() and validate().

type QSpinBox_ITF

type QSpinBox_ITF interface {
	QAbstractSpinBox_ITF
	QSpinBox_PTR() *QSpinBox
}

type QSplashScreen

type QSplashScreen struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQSplashScreen

func NewQSplashScreen(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, f int) *QSplashScreen

Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.

There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.

func NewQSplashScreenFromPointer

func NewQSplashScreenFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSplashScreen

func NewQSplashScreen_1

func NewQSplashScreen_1(parent QWidget_ITF, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, f int) *QSplashScreen

Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.

There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.

func NewQSplashScreen_1_

func NewQSplashScreen_1_(parent QWidget_ITF) *QSplashScreen

Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.

There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.

func NewQSplashScreen_1_1

func NewQSplashScreen_1_1(parent QWidget_ITF, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF) *QSplashScreen

Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.

There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.

func NewQSplashScreen__

func NewQSplashScreen__() *QSplashScreen

Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.

There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.

func NewQSplashScreen__1

func NewQSplashScreen__1(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF) *QSplashScreen

Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.

There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except perhaps Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint.

func (*QSplashScreen) ClearMessage

func (this *QSplashScreen) ClearMessage()

Removes the message being displayed on the splash screen

See also showMessage().

func (*QSplashScreen) DrawContents

func (this *QSplashScreen) DrawContents(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Draw the contents of the splash screen using painter painter. The default implementation draws the message passed by showMessage(). Reimplement this function if you want to do your own drawing on the splash screen.

func (*QSplashScreen) Event

func (this *QSplashScreen) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QSplashScreen) Finish

func (this *QSplashScreen) Finish(w QWidget_ITF)

Makes the splash screen wait until the widget mainWin is displayed before calling close() on itself.

func (*QSplashScreen) GetCthis

func (this *QSplashScreen) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSplashScreen) InheritDrawContents

func (this *QSplashScreen) InheritDrawContents(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void drawContents(class QPainter *)

func (*QSplashScreen) InheritEvent

func (this *QSplashScreen) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QSplashScreen) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QSplashScreen) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSplashScreen) Message

func (this *QSplashScreen) Message() string

Returns the message that is currently displayed on the splash screen.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also showMessage() and clearMessage().

func (*QSplashScreen) MessageChanged

func (this *QSplashScreen) MessageChanged(message string)

This signal is emitted when the message on the splash screen changes. message is the new message and is a null-string when the message has been removed.

See also showMessage() and clearMessage().

func (*QSplashScreen) MetaObject

func (this *QSplashScreen) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSplashScreen) MousePressEvent

func (this *QSplashScreen) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QSplashScreen) NewFromPointer

func (*QSplashScreen) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSplashScreen

func (*QSplashScreen) Pixmap

func (this *QSplashScreen) Pixmap() *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns the pixmap that is used in the splash screen. The image does not have any of the text drawn by showMessage() calls.

See also setPixmap().

func (*QSplashScreen) QSplashScreen_PTR

func (ptr *QSplashScreen) QSplashScreen_PTR() *QSplashScreen

func (*QSplashScreen) Repaint

func (this *QSplashScreen) Repaint()

This overrides QWidget::repaint(). It differs from the standard repaint function in that it also calls QApplication::processEvents() to ensure the updates are displayed, even when there is no event loop present.

func (*QSplashScreen) SetCthis

func (this *QSplashScreen) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSplashScreen) SetPixmap

func (this *QSplashScreen) SetPixmap(pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

Sets the pixmap that will be used as the splash screen's image to pixmap.

See also pixmap().

func (*QSplashScreen) ShowMessage

func (this *QSplashScreen) ShowMessage(message string, alignment int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

Draws the message text onto the splash screen with color color and aligns the text according to the flags in alignment. This function calls repaint() to make sure the splash screen is repainted immediately. As a result the message is kept up to date with what your application is doing (e.g. loading files).

See also Qt::Alignment, clearMessage(), and message().

func (*QSplashScreen) ShowMessage__

func (this *QSplashScreen) ShowMessage__(message string)

Draws the message text onto the splash screen with color color and aligns the text according to the flags in alignment. This function calls repaint() to make sure the splash screen is repainted immediately. As a result the message is kept up to date with what your application is doing (e.g. loading files).

See also Qt::Alignment, clearMessage(), and message().

func (*QSplashScreen) ShowMessage__1

func (this *QSplashScreen) ShowMessage__1(message string, alignment int)

Draws the message text onto the splash screen with color color and aligns the text according to the flags in alignment. This function calls repaint() to make sure the splash screen is repainted immediately. As a result the message is kept up to date with what your application is doing (e.g. loading files).

See also Qt::Alignment, clearMessage(), and message().

type QSplashScreen_ITF

type QSplashScreen_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QSplashScreen_PTR() *QSplashScreen
}

type QSplitter

type QSplitter struct {
	*QFrame
}

func NewQSplitter

func NewQSplitter(parent QWidget_ITF) *QSplitter

Constructs a horizontal splitter with the parent argument passed on to the QFrame constructor.

See also setOrientation().

func NewQSplitterFromPointer

func NewQSplitterFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSplitter

func NewQSplitter_1

func NewQSplitter_1(arg0 int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QSplitter

Constructs a horizontal splitter with the parent argument passed on to the QFrame constructor.

See also setOrientation().

func NewQSplitter_1_

func NewQSplitter_1_(arg0 int) *QSplitter

Constructs a horizontal splitter with the parent argument passed on to the QFrame constructor.

See also setOrientation().

func NewQSplitter__

func NewQSplitter__() *QSplitter

Constructs a horizontal splitter with the parent argument passed on to the QFrame constructor.

See also setOrientation().

func (*QSplitter) AddWidget

func (this *QSplitter) AddWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Adds the given widget to the splitter's layout after all the other items.

If widget is already in the splitter, it will be moved to the new position.

Note: The splitter takes ownership of the widget.

See also insertWidget(), widget(), and indexOf().

func (*QSplitter) ChangeEvent

func (this *QSplitter) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QSplitter) ChildEvent

func (this *QSplitter) ChildEvent(arg0 qtcore.QChildEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::childEvent().

Tells the splitter that the child widget described by c has been inserted or removed.

This method is also used to handle the situation where a widget is created with the splitter as a parent but not explicitly added with insertWidget() or addWidget(). This is for compatibility and not the recommended way of putting widgets into a splitter in new code. Please use insertWidget() or addWidget() in new code.

See also addWidget() and insertWidget().

func (*QSplitter) ChildrenCollapsible

func (this *QSplitter) ChildrenCollapsible() bool

func (*QSplitter) ClosestLegalPosition

func (this *QSplitter) ClosestLegalPosition(arg0 int, arg1 int) int

Returns the closest legal position to pos of the widget at index.

For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. Positions are then measured from the right edge of the widget.

See also getRange().

func (*QSplitter) Count

func (this *QSplitter) Count() int

Returns the number of widgets contained in the splitter's layout.

See also widget() and handle().

func (*QSplitter) CreateHandle

func (this *QSplitter) CreateHandle() *QSplitterHandle

Returns a new splitter handle as a child widget of this splitter. This function can be reimplemented in subclasses to provide support for custom handles.

See also handle() and indexOf().

func (*QSplitter) Event

func (this *QSplitter) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QSplitter) GetCthis

func (this *QSplitter) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSplitter) GetRange

func (this *QSplitter) GetRange(index int, arg1 unsafe.Pointer, arg2 unsafe.Pointer)

Returns the valid range of the splitter at index in *min and *max if min and max are not 0.

func (*QSplitter) Handle

func (this *QSplitter) Handle(index int) *QSplitterHandle

Returns the handle to the left (or above) for the item in the splitter's layout at the given index. The handle at index 0 is always hidden.

For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. The handle will be to the right of the widget at index.

See also count(), widget(), indexOf(), createHandle(), and setHandleWidth().

func (*QSplitter) HandleWidth

func (this *QSplitter) HandleWidth() int

func (*QSplitter) IndexOf

func (this *QSplitter) IndexOf(w QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the index in the splitter's layout of the specified widget. This also works for handles.

Handles are numbered from 0. There are as many handles as there are child widgets, but the handle at position 0 is always hidden.

See also count() and widget().

func (*QSplitter) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QSplitter) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QSplitter) InheritChildEvent

func (this *QSplitter) InheritChildEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QChildEvent))

void childEvent(class QChildEvent *)

func (*QSplitter) InheritClosestLegalPosition

func (this *QSplitter) InheritClosestLegalPosition(f func(arg0 int, arg1 int) int)

int closestLegalPosition(int, int)

func (*QSplitter) InheritCreateHandle

func (this *QSplitter) InheritCreateHandle(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSplitterHandle * createHandle()

func (*QSplitter) InheritEvent

func (this *QSplitter) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QSplitter) InheritMoveSplitter

func (this *QSplitter) InheritMoveSplitter(f func(pos int, index int))

void moveSplitter(int, int)

func (*QSplitter) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QSplitter) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QSplitter) InheritSetRubberBand

func (this *QSplitter) InheritSetRubberBand(f func(position int))

void setRubberBand(int)

func (*QSplitter) InsertWidget

func (this *QSplitter) InsertWidget(index int, widget QWidget_ITF)

Inserts the widget specified into the splitter's layout at the given index.

If widget is already in the splitter, it will be moved to the new position.

If index is an invalid index, then the widget will be inserted at the end.

Note: The splitter takes ownership of the widget.

See also addWidget(), indexOf(), and widget().

func (*QSplitter) IsCollapsible

func (this *QSplitter) IsCollapsible(index int) bool

Returns true if the widget at index is collapsible, otherwise returns false.

func (*QSplitter) MetaObject

func (this *QSplitter) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSplitter) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QSplitter) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QSplitter) MoveSplitter

func (this *QSplitter) MoveSplitter(pos int, index int)

Moves the left or top edge of the splitter handle at index as close as possible to position pos, which is the distance from the left or top edge of the widget.

For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. pos is then the distance from the right edge of the widget.

See also splitterMoved(), closestLegalPosition(), and getRange().

func (*QSplitter) NewFromPointer

func (*QSplitter) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSplitter

func (*QSplitter) OpaqueResize

func (this *QSplitter) OpaqueResize() bool

func (*QSplitter) Orientation

func (this *QSplitter) Orientation() int

func (*QSplitter) QSplitter_PTR

func (ptr *QSplitter) QSplitter_PTR() *QSplitter

func (*QSplitter) Refresh

func (this *QSplitter) Refresh()

Updates the splitter's state. You should not need to call this function.

func (*QSplitter) ReplaceWidget

func (this *QSplitter) ReplaceWidget(index int, widget QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

Replaces the widget in the splitter's layout at the given index by widget.

Returns the widget that has just been replaced if index is valid and widget is not already a child of the splitter. Otherwise, it returns null and no replacement or addition is made.

The geometry of the newly inserted widget will be the same as the widget it replaces. Its visible and collapsed states are also inherited.

Note: The splitter takes ownership of widget and sets the parent of the replaced widget to null.

Note: Because widget gets reparented into the splitter, its geometry may not be set right away, but only after widget will receive the appropriate events.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.9.

See also insertWidget() and indexOf().

func (*QSplitter) ResizeEvent

func (this *QSplitter) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QSplitter) RestoreState

func (this *QSplitter) RestoreState(state qtcore.QByteArray_ITF) bool

Restores the splitter's layout to the state specified. Returns true if the state is restored; otherwise returns false.

Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to restore the size from a past session. Here is an example:

Restore the splitter's state:

QSettings settings;
splitter->restoreState(settings.value("splitterSizes").toByteArray());

A failure to restore the splitter's layout may result from either invalid or out-of-date data in the supplied byte array.

See also saveState().

func (*QSplitter) SaveState

func (this *QSplitter) SaveState() *qtcore.QByteArray

Saves the state of the splitter's layout.

Typically this is used in conjunction with QSettings to remember the size for a future session. A version number is stored as part of the data. Here is an example:

QSettings settings;
settings.setValue("splitterSizes", splitter->saveState());

See also restoreState().

func (*QSplitter) SetChildrenCollapsible

func (this *QSplitter) SetChildrenCollapsible(arg0 bool)

func (*QSplitter) SetCollapsible

func (this *QSplitter) SetCollapsible(index int, arg1 bool)

Sets whether the child widget at index is collapsible to collapse.

By default, children are collapsible, meaning that the user can resize them down to size 0, even if they have a non-zero minimumSize() or minimumSizeHint(). This behavior can be changed on a per-widget basis by calling this function, or globally for all the widgets in the splitter by setting the childrenCollapsible property.

See also isCollapsible() and childrenCollapsible.

func (*QSplitter) SetCthis

func (this *QSplitter) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSplitter) SetHandleWidth

func (this *QSplitter) SetHandleWidth(arg0 int)

func (*QSplitter) SetOpaqueResize

func (this *QSplitter) SetOpaqueResize(opaque bool)

func (*QSplitter) SetOpaqueResize__

func (this *QSplitter) SetOpaqueResize__()

func (*QSplitter) SetOrientation

func (this *QSplitter) SetOrientation(arg0 int)

func (*QSplitter) SetRubberBand

func (this *QSplitter) SetRubberBand(position int)

Displays a rubber band at position pos. If pos is negative, the rubber band is removed.

func (*QSplitter) SetStretchFactor

func (this *QSplitter) SetStretchFactor(index int, stretch int)

Updates the size policy of the widget at position index to have a stretch factor of stretch.

stretch is not the effective stretch factor; the effective stretch factor is calculated by taking the initial size of the widget and multiplying it with stretch.

This function is provided for convenience. It is equivalent to

QWidget *widget = splitter->widget(index);
QSizePolicy policy = widget->sizePolicy();
policy.setHorizontalStretch(stretch);
policy.setVerticalStretch(stretch);
widget->setSizePolicy(policy);

See also setSizes() and widget().

func (*QSplitter) SizeHint

func (this *QSplitter) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QSplitter) SplitterMoved

func (this *QSplitter) SplitterMoved(pos int, index int)

This signal is emitted when the splitter handle at a particular index has been moved to position pos.

For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. pos is then the distance from the right edge of the widget.

See also moveSplitter().

func (*QSplitter) Widget

func (this *QSplitter) Widget(index int) *QWidget

Returns the widget at the given index in the splitter's layout.

See also count(), handle(), indexOf(), and insertWidget().

type QSplitterHandle

type QSplitterHandle struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQSplitterHandle

func NewQSplitterHandle(o int, parent QSplitter_ITF) *QSplitterHandle

func NewQSplitterHandleFromPointer

func NewQSplitterHandleFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSplitterHandle

func (*QSplitterHandle) ClosestLegalPosition

func (this *QSplitterHandle) ClosestLegalPosition(p int) int

Returns the closest legal position to pos of the widget at index.

For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. Positions are then measured from the right edge of the widget.

See also getRange().

func (*QSplitterHandle) Event

func (this *QSplitterHandle) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QSplitterHandle) GetCthis

func (this *QSplitterHandle) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritClosestLegalPosition

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritClosestLegalPosition(f func(p int) int)

int closestLegalPosition(int)

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritMoveSplitter

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritMoveSplitter(f func(p int))

void moveSplitter(int)

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QSplitterHandle) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QSplitterHandle) MetaObject

func (this *QSplitterHandle) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSplitterHandle) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

func (*QSplitterHandle) MousePressEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

func (*QSplitterHandle) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

func (*QSplitterHandle) MoveSplitter

func (this *QSplitterHandle) MoveSplitter(p int)

Moves the left or top edge of the splitter handle at index as close as possible to position pos, which is the distance from the left or top edge of the widget.

For right-to-left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew, the layout of horizontal splitters is reversed. pos is then the distance from the right edge of the widget.

See also splitterMoved(), closestLegalPosition(), and getRange().

func (*QSplitterHandle) NewFromPointer

func (*QSplitterHandle) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSplitterHandle

func (*QSplitterHandle) OpaqueResize

func (this *QSplitterHandle) OpaqueResize() bool

func (*QSplitterHandle) Orientation

func (this *QSplitterHandle) Orientation() int

func (*QSplitterHandle) PaintEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

func (*QSplitterHandle) QSplitterHandle_PTR

func (ptr *QSplitterHandle) QSplitterHandle_PTR() *QSplitterHandle

func (*QSplitterHandle) ResizeEvent

func (this *QSplitterHandle) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QSplitterHandle) SetCthis

func (this *QSplitterHandle) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSplitterHandle) SetOrientation

func (this *QSplitterHandle) SetOrientation(o int)

func (*QSplitterHandle) SizeHint

func (this *QSplitterHandle) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QSplitterHandle) Splitter

func (this *QSplitterHandle) Splitter() *QSplitter

type QSplitterHandle_ITF

type QSplitterHandle_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QSplitterHandle_PTR() *QSplitterHandle
}

type QSplitter_ITF

type QSplitter_ITF interface {
	QFrame_ITF
	QSplitter_PTR() *QSplitter
}

type QStackedLayout

type QStackedLayout struct {
	*QLayout
}

func NewQStackedLayout

func NewQStackedLayout() *QStackedLayout

Constructs a QStackedLayout with no parent.

This QStackedLayout must be installed on a widget later on to become effective.

See also addWidget() and insertWidget().

func NewQStackedLayoutFromPointer

func NewQStackedLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStackedLayout

func NewQStackedLayout_1

func NewQStackedLayout_1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QStackedLayout

Constructs a QStackedLayout with no parent.

This QStackedLayout must be installed on a widget later on to become effective.

See also addWidget() and insertWidget().

func NewQStackedLayout_2

func NewQStackedLayout_2(parentLayout QLayout_ITF) *QStackedLayout

Constructs a QStackedLayout with no parent.

This QStackedLayout must be installed on a widget later on to become effective.

See also addWidget() and insertWidget().

func (*QStackedLayout) AddItem

func (this *QStackedLayout) AddItem(item QLayoutItem_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayout::addItem().

func (*QStackedLayout) AddWidget

func (this *QStackedLayout) AddWidget(w QWidget_ITF) int

Adds the given widget to the end of this layout and returns the index position of the widget.

If the QStackedLayout is empty before this function is called, the given widget becomes the current widget.

See also insertWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedLayout) Count

func (this *QStackedLayout) Count() int

func (*QStackedLayout) CurrentChanged

func (this *QStackedLayout) CurrentChanged(index int)

This signal is emitted whenever the current widget in the layout changes. The index specifies the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedLayout)

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedLayout) CurrentIndex

func (this *QStackedLayout) CurrentIndex() int

func (*QStackedLayout) CurrentWidget

func (this *QStackedLayout) CurrentWidget() *QWidget

Returns the current widget, or 0 if there are no widgets in this layout.

See also currentIndex() and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QStackedLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStackedLayout) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QStackedLayout) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QStackedLayout) HeightForWidth

func (this *QStackedLayout) HeightForWidth(width int) int

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::heightForWidth().

func (*QStackedLayout) InsertWidget

func (this *QStackedLayout) InsertWidget(index int, w QWidget_ITF) int

Inserts the given widget at the given index in this QStackedLayout. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).

If the QStackedLayout is empty before this function is called, the given widget becomes the current widget.

Inserting a new widget at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current widget.

See also addWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedLayout) ItemAt

func (this *QStackedLayout) ItemAt(arg0 int) *QLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QLayout::itemAt().

func (*QStackedLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QStackedLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QStackedLayout) MinimumSize

func (this *QStackedLayout) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::minimumSize().

func (*QStackedLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QStackedLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStackedLayout

func (*QStackedLayout) QStackedLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QStackedLayout) QStackedLayout_PTR() *QStackedLayout

func (*QStackedLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QStackedLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QStackedLayout) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QStackedLayout) SetCurrentIndex(index int)

func (*QStackedLayout) SetCurrentWidget

func (this *QStackedLayout) SetCurrentWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

Sets the current widget to be the specified widget. The new current widget must already be contained in this stacked layout.

See also setCurrentIndex() and currentWidget().

func (*QStackedLayout) SetGeometry

func (this *QStackedLayout) SetGeometry(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::setGeometry().

func (*QStackedLayout) SetStackingMode

func (this *QStackedLayout) SetStackingMode(stackingMode int)

func (*QStackedLayout) SizeHint

func (this *QStackedLayout) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QLayoutItem::sizeHint().

func (*QStackedLayout) StackingMode

func (this *QStackedLayout) StackingMode() int

func (*QStackedLayout) TakeAt

func (this *QStackedLayout) TakeAt(arg0 int) *QLayoutItem

Reimplemented from QLayout::takeAt().

func (*QStackedLayout) Widget

func (this *QStackedLayout) Widget(arg0 int) *QWidget

Returns the widget at the given index, or 0 if there is no widget at the given position.

See also currentWidget() and indexOf().

func (*QStackedLayout) WidgetRemoved

func (this *QStackedLayout) WidgetRemoved(index int)

This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed from the layout. The widget's index is passed as parameter.

See also removeWidget().

type QStackedLayout_ITF

type QStackedLayout_ITF interface {
	QLayout_ITF
	QStackedLayout_PTR() *QStackedLayout
}

type QStackedLayout__StackingMode

type QStackedLayout__StackingMode = int

This enum specifies how the layout handles its child widgets regarding their visibility.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.4.

const QStackedLayout__StackAll QStackedLayout__StackingMode = 1

All widgets are visible. The current widget is merely raised.

const QStackedLayout__StackOne QStackedLayout__StackingMode = 0

Only the current widget is visible. This is the default.

type QStackedWidget

type QStackedWidget struct {
	*QFrame
}

func NewQStackedWidget

func NewQStackedWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QStackedWidget

Constructs a QStackedWidget with the given parent.

See also addWidget() and insertWidget().

func NewQStackedWidgetFromPointer

func NewQStackedWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStackedWidget

func NewQStackedWidget__

func NewQStackedWidget__() *QStackedWidget

Constructs a QStackedWidget with the given parent.

See also addWidget() and insertWidget().

func (*QStackedWidget) AddWidget

func (this *QStackedWidget) AddWidget(w QWidget_ITF) int

Appends the given widget to the QStackedWidget and returns the index position. Ownership of widget is passed on to the QStackedWidget.

If the QStackedWidget is empty before this function is called, widget becomes the current widget.

See also insertWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedWidget) Count

func (this *QStackedWidget) Count() int

func (*QStackedWidget) CurrentChanged

func (this *QStackedWidget) CurrentChanged(arg0 int)

This signal is emitted whenever the current widget changes.

The parameter holds the index of the new current widget, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QStackedWidget).

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

See also currentWidget() and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedWidget) CurrentIndex

func (this *QStackedWidget) CurrentIndex() int

func (*QStackedWidget) CurrentWidget

func (this *QStackedWidget) CurrentWidget() *QWidget

Returns the current widget, or 0 if there are no child widgets.

See also currentIndex() and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedWidget) Event

func (this *QStackedWidget) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QStackedWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QStackedWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStackedWidget) IndexOf

func (this *QStackedWidget) IndexOf(arg0 QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the index of the given widget, or -1 if the given widget is not a child of the QStackedWidget.

See also currentIndex() and widget().

func (*QStackedWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QStackedWidget) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QStackedWidget) InsertWidget

func (this *QStackedWidget) InsertWidget(index int, w QWidget_ITF) int

Inserts the given widget at the given index in the QStackedWidget. Ownership of widget is passed on to the QStackedWidget. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).

If the QStackedWidget was empty before this function is called, the given widget becomes the current widget.

Inserting a new widget at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current widget.

See also addWidget(), removeWidget(), and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QStackedWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QStackedWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QStackedWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QStackedWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStackedWidget

func (*QStackedWidget) QStackedWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QStackedWidget) QStackedWidget_PTR() *QStackedWidget

func (*QStackedWidget) RemoveWidget

func (this *QStackedWidget) RemoveWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

Removes widget from the QStackedWidget. i.e., widget is not deleted but simply removed from the stacked layout, causing it to be hidden.

Note: Parent object and parent widget of widget will remain the QStackedWidget. If the application wants to reuse the removed widget, then it is recommended to re-parent it.

See also addWidget(), insertWidget(), and currentWidget().

func (*QStackedWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QStackedWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QStackedWidget) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QStackedWidget) SetCurrentIndex(index int)

func (*QStackedWidget) SetCurrentWidget

func (this *QStackedWidget) SetCurrentWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

Sets the current widget to be the specified widget. The new current widget must already be contained in this stacked widget.

See also currentWidget() and setCurrentIndex().

func (*QStackedWidget) Widget

func (this *QStackedWidget) Widget(arg0 int) *QWidget

Returns the widget at the given index, or 0 if there is no such widget.

See also currentWidget() and indexOf().

func (*QStackedWidget) WidgetRemoved

func (this *QStackedWidget) WidgetRemoved(index int)

This signal is emitted whenever a widget is removed. The widget's index is passed as parameter.

See also removeWidget().

type QStackedWidget_ITF

type QStackedWidget_ITF interface {
	QFrame_ITF
	QStackedWidget_PTR() *QStackedWidget
}

type QStatusBar

type QStatusBar struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQStatusBar

func NewQStatusBar(parent QWidget_ITF) *QStatusBar

Constructs a status bar with a size grip and the given parent.

See also setSizeGripEnabled().

func NewQStatusBarFromPointer

func NewQStatusBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStatusBar

func NewQStatusBar__

func NewQStatusBar__() *QStatusBar

Constructs a status bar with a size grip and the given parent.

See also setSizeGripEnabled().

func (*QStatusBar) AddPermanentWidget

func (this *QStatusBar) AddPermanentWidget(widget QWidget_ITF, stretch int)

Adds the given widget permanently to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

Permanently means that the widget may not be obscured by temporary messages. It is is located at the far right of the status bar.

See also insertPermanentWidget(), removeWidget(), and addWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) AddPermanentWidget__

func (this *QStatusBar) AddPermanentWidget__(widget QWidget_ITF)

Adds the given widget permanently to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

Permanently means that the widget may not be obscured by temporary messages. It is is located at the far right of the status bar.

See also insertPermanentWidget(), removeWidget(), and addWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) AddWidget

func (this *QStatusBar) AddWidget(widget QWidget_ITF, stretch int)

Adds the given widget to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

The widget is located to the far left of the first permanent widget (see addPermanentWidget()) and may be obscured by temporary messages.

See also insertWidget(), removeWidget(), and addPermanentWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) AddWidget__

func (this *QStatusBar) AddWidget__(widget QWidget_ITF)

Adds the given widget to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

The widget is located to the far left of the first permanent widget (see addPermanentWidget()) and may be obscured by temporary messages.

See also insertWidget(), removeWidget(), and addPermanentWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) ClearMessage

func (this *QStatusBar) ClearMessage()

Removes any temporary message being shown.

See also currentMessage(), showMessage(), and removeWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) CurrentMessage

func (this *QStatusBar) CurrentMessage() string

Returns the temporary message currently shown, or an empty string if there is no such message.

See also showMessage().

func (*QStatusBar) Event

func (this *QStatusBar) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QStatusBar) GetCthis

func (this *QStatusBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStatusBar) HideOrShow

func (this *QStatusBar) HideOrShow()

Ensures that the right widgets are visible.

Used by the showMessage() and clearMessage() functions.

func (*QStatusBar) InheritEvent

func (this *QStatusBar) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QStatusBar) InheritHideOrShow

func (this *QStatusBar) InheritHideOrShow(f func())

void hideOrShow()

func (*QStatusBar) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QStatusBar) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QStatusBar) InheritReformat

func (this *QStatusBar) InheritReformat(f func())

void reformat()

func (*QStatusBar) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QStatusBar) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QStatusBar) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QStatusBar) InheritShowEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QStatusBar) InsertPermanentWidget

func (this *QStatusBar) InsertPermanentWidget(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, stretch int) int

Inserts the given widget at the given index permanently to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).

The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

Permanently means that the widget may not be obscured by temporary messages. It is is located at the far right of the status bar.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also addPermanentWidget(), removeWidget(), and addWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) InsertPermanentWidget__

func (this *QStatusBar) InsertPermanentWidget__(index int, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Inserts the given widget at the given index permanently to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).

The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

Permanently means that the widget may not be obscured by temporary messages. It is is located at the far right of the status bar.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also addPermanentWidget(), removeWidget(), and addWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) InsertWidget

func (this *QStatusBar) InsertWidget(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, stretch int) int

Inserts the given widget at the given index to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).

The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

The widget is located to the far left of the first permanent widget (see addPermanentWidget()) and may be obscured by temporary messages.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also addWidget(), removeWidget(), and addPermanentWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) InsertWidget__

func (this *QStatusBar) InsertWidget__(index int, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Inserts the given widget at the given index to this status bar, reparenting the widget if it isn't already a child of this QStatusBar object. If index is out of range, the widget is appended (in which case it is the actual index of the widget that is returned).

The stretch parameter is used to compute a suitable size for the given widget as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default stretch factor is 0, i.e giving the widget a minimum of space.

The widget is located to the far left of the first permanent widget (see addPermanentWidget()) and may be obscured by temporary messages.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also addWidget(), removeWidget(), and addPermanentWidget().

func (*QStatusBar) IsSizeGripEnabled

func (this *QStatusBar) IsSizeGripEnabled() bool

func (*QStatusBar) MessageChanged

func (this *QStatusBar) MessageChanged(text string)

This signal is emitted whenever the temporary status message changes. The new temporary message is passed in the message parameter which is a null-string when the message has been removed.

See also showMessage() and clearMessage().

func (*QStatusBar) MetaObject

func (this *QStatusBar) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QStatusBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QStatusBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStatusBar

func (*QStatusBar) PaintEvent

func (this *QStatusBar) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

Shows the temporary message, if appropriate, in response to the paint event.

func (*QStatusBar) QStatusBar_PTR

func (ptr *QStatusBar) QStatusBar_PTR() *QStatusBar

func (*QStatusBar) Reformat

func (this *QStatusBar) Reformat()

Changes the status bar's appearance to account for item changes.

Special subclasses may need this function, but geometry management will usually take care of any necessary rearrangements.

func (*QStatusBar) RemoveWidget

func (this *QStatusBar) RemoveWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Removes the specified widget from the status bar.

Note: This function does not delete the widget but hides it. To add the widget again, you must call both the addWidget() and show() functions.

See also addWidget(), addPermanentWidget(), and clearMessage().

func (*QStatusBar) ResizeEvent

func (this *QStatusBar) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QStatusBar) SetCthis

func (this *QStatusBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QStatusBar) SetSizeGripEnabled

func (this *QStatusBar) SetSizeGripEnabled(arg0 bool)

func (*QStatusBar) ShowEvent

func (this *QStatusBar) ShowEvent(arg0 qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QStatusBar) ShowMessage

func (this *QStatusBar) ShowMessage(text string, timeout int)

Hides the normal status indications and displays the given message for the specified number of milli-seconds (timeout). If timeout is 0 (default), the message remains displayed until the clearMessage() slot is called or until the showMessage() slot is called again to change the message.

Note that showMessage() is called to show temporary explanations of tool tip texts, so passing a timeout of 0 is not sufficient to display a permanent message.

See also messageChanged(), currentMessage(), and clearMessage().

func (*QStatusBar) ShowMessage__

func (this *QStatusBar) ShowMessage__(text string)

Hides the normal status indications and displays the given message for the specified number of milli-seconds (timeout). If timeout is 0 (default), the message remains displayed until the clearMessage() slot is called or until the showMessage() slot is called again to change the message.

Note that showMessage() is called to show temporary explanations of tool tip texts, so passing a timeout of 0 is not sufficient to display a permanent message.

See also messageChanged(), currentMessage(), and clearMessage().

type QStatusBar_ITF

type QStatusBar_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QStatusBar_PTR() *QStatusBar
}

type QStyle

type QStyle struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQStyle

func NewQStyle() *QStyle

Constructs a style object.

func NewQStyleFromPointer

func NewQStyleFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyle

func QApplication_SetStyle_1

func QApplication_SetStyle_1(arg0 string) *QStyle

func QApplication_Style

func QApplication_Style() *QStyle

func QStyleFactory_Create

func QStyleFactory_Create(arg0 string) *QStyle

func (*QStyle) AlignedRect

func (this *QStyle) AlignedRect(direction int, alignment int, size qtcore.QSize_ITF, rectangle qtcore.QRect_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns a new rectangle of the specified size that is aligned to the given rectangle according to the specified alignment and direction.

func (*QStyle) CombinedLayoutSpacing

func (this *QStyle) CombinedLayoutSpacing(controls1 int, controls2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the spacing that should be used between controls1 and controls2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

controls1 and controls2 are OR-combination of zero or more control types.

This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also layoutSpacing().

func (*QStyle) CombinedLayoutSpacing__

func (this *QStyle) CombinedLayoutSpacing__(controls1 int, controls2 int, orientation int) int

Returns the spacing that should be used between controls1 and controls2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

controls1 and controls2 are OR-combination of zero or more control types.

This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also layoutSpacing().

func (*QStyle) CombinedLayoutSpacing__1

func (this *QStyle) CombinedLayoutSpacing__1(controls1 int, controls2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF) int

Returns the spacing that should be used between controls1 and controls2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

controls1 and controls2 are OR-combination of zero or more control types.

This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also layoutSpacing().

func (*QStyle) DrawComplexControl

func (this *QStyle) DrawComplexControl(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF)

Draws the given control using the provided painter with the style options specified by option.

The widget argument is optional and can be used as aid in drawing the control.

The option parameter is a pointer to a QStyleOptionComplex object that can be cast to the correct subclass using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the rect member of the specified option must be in logical coordinates. Reimplementations of this function should use visualRect() to change the logical coordinates into screen coordinates before calling the drawPrimitive() or drawControl() function.

The table below is listing the complex control elements and their associated style option subclass. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the controls, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.

Complex ControlQStyleOptionComplex SubclassStyle FlagRemark

CC_SpinBoxQStyleOptionSpinBoxState_EnabledSet if the spin box is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the spin box has input focus. CC_ComboBoxQStyleOptionComboBoxState_EnabledSet if the combobox is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the combobox has input focus. CC_ScrollBarQStyleOptionSliderState_EnabledSet if the scroll bar is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the scroll bar has input focus. CC_SliderQStyleOptionSliderState_EnabledSet if the slider is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the slider has input focus. CC_DialQStyleOptionSliderState_EnabledSet if the dial is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the dial has input focus. CC_ToolButtonQStyleOptionToolButtonState_EnabledSet if the tool button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the tool button has input focus. State_DownArrowSet if the tool button is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed). State_OnSet if the tool button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_AutoRaiseSet if the tool button has auto-raise enabled. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down, not on, and doesn't contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled. CC_TitleBarQStyleOptionTitleBarState_EnabledSet if the title bar is enabled.

See also drawPrimitive() and drawControl().

func (*QStyle) DrawComplexControl__

func (this *QStyle) DrawComplexControl__(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Draws the given control using the provided painter with the style options specified by option.

The widget argument is optional and can be used as aid in drawing the control.

The option parameter is a pointer to a QStyleOptionComplex object that can be cast to the correct subclass using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the rect member of the specified option must be in logical coordinates. Reimplementations of this function should use visualRect() to change the logical coordinates into screen coordinates before calling the drawPrimitive() or drawControl() function.

The table below is listing the complex control elements and their associated style option subclass. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the controls, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.

Complex ControlQStyleOptionComplex SubclassStyle FlagRemark

CC_SpinBoxQStyleOptionSpinBoxState_EnabledSet if the spin box is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the spin box has input focus. CC_ComboBoxQStyleOptionComboBoxState_EnabledSet if the combobox is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the combobox has input focus. CC_ScrollBarQStyleOptionSliderState_EnabledSet if the scroll bar is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the scroll bar has input focus. CC_SliderQStyleOptionSliderState_EnabledSet if the slider is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the slider has input focus. CC_DialQStyleOptionSliderState_EnabledSet if the dial is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the dial has input focus. CC_ToolButtonQStyleOptionToolButtonState_EnabledSet if the tool button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the tool button has input focus. State_DownArrowSet if the tool button is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed). State_OnSet if the tool button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_AutoRaiseSet if the tool button has auto-raise enabled. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down, not on, and doesn't contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled. CC_TitleBarQStyleOptionTitleBarState_EnabledSet if the title bar is enabled.

See also drawPrimitive() and drawControl().

func (*QStyle) DrawControl

func (this *QStyle) DrawControl(element int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, w QWidget_ITF)

Draws the given element with the provided painter with the style options specified by option.

The widget argument is optional and can be used as aid in drawing the control. The option parameter is a pointer to a QStyleOption object that can be cast to the correct subclass using the qstyleoption_cast() function.

The table below is listing the control elements and their associated style option subclass. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the controls, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.

Note that if a control element is not listed here, it is because it uses a plain QStyleOption object.

Control ElementQStyleOption SubclassStyle FlagRemark

CE_MenuItem, CE_MenuBarItemQStyleOptionMenuItemState_SelectedThe menu item is currently selected item. State_EnabledThe item is enabled. State_DownArrowIndicates that a scroll down arrow should be drawn. State_UpArrowIndicates that a scroll up arrow should be drawn State_HasFocusSet if the menu bar has input focus. CE_PushButton, CE_PushButtonBevel, CE_PushButtonLabelQStyleOptionButtonState_EnabledSet if the button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the button has input focus. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down, not on and not flat. State_OnSet if the button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_SunkenSet if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button). CE_RadioButton, CE_RadioButtonLabel, CE_CheckBox, CE_CheckBoxLabelQStyleOptionButtonState_EnabledSet if the button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the button has input focus. State_OnSet if the button is checked. State_OffSet if the button is not checked. State_NoChangeSet if the button is in the NoChange state. State_SunkenSet if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button). CE_ProgressBarContents, CE_ProgressBarLabel, CE_ProgressBarGrooveQStyleOptionProgressBarState_EnabledSet if the progress bar is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the progress bar has input focus. CE_Header, CE_HeaderSection, CE_HeaderLabelQStyleOptionHeader CE_TabBarTab, CE_TabBarTabShape, CE_TabBarTabLabelQStyleOptionTabState_EnabledSet if the tab bar is enabled. State_SelectedThe tab bar is the currently selected tab bar. State_HasFocusSet if the tab bar tab has input focus. CE_ToolButtonLabelQStyleOptionToolButtonState_EnabledSet if the tool button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the tool button has input focus. State_SunkenSet if the tool button is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed). State_OnSet if the tool button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_AutoRaiseSet if the tool button has auto-raise enabled. State_MouseOverSet if the mouse pointer is over the tool button. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down and is not on. CE_ToolBoxTabQStyleOptionToolBoxState_SelectedThe tab is the currently selected tab. CE_HeaderSectionQStyleOptionHeaderState_SunkenIndicates that the section is pressed. State_UpArrowIndicates that the sort indicator should be pointing up. State_DownArrowIndicates that the sort indicator should be pointing down.

See also drawPrimitive() and drawComplexControl().

func (*QStyle) DrawControl__

func (this *QStyle) DrawControl__(element int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Draws the given element with the provided painter with the style options specified by option.

The widget argument is optional and can be used as aid in drawing the control. The option parameter is a pointer to a QStyleOption object that can be cast to the correct subclass using the qstyleoption_cast() function.

The table below is listing the control elements and their associated style option subclass. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the controls, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.

Note that if a control element is not listed here, it is because it uses a plain QStyleOption object.

Control ElementQStyleOption SubclassStyle FlagRemark

CE_MenuItem, CE_MenuBarItemQStyleOptionMenuItemState_SelectedThe menu item is currently selected item. State_EnabledThe item is enabled. State_DownArrowIndicates that a scroll down arrow should be drawn. State_UpArrowIndicates that a scroll up arrow should be drawn State_HasFocusSet if the menu bar has input focus. CE_PushButton, CE_PushButtonBevel, CE_PushButtonLabelQStyleOptionButtonState_EnabledSet if the button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the button has input focus. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down, not on and not flat. State_OnSet if the button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_SunkenSet if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button). CE_RadioButton, CE_RadioButtonLabel, CE_CheckBox, CE_CheckBoxLabelQStyleOptionButtonState_EnabledSet if the button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the button has input focus. State_OnSet if the button is checked. State_OffSet if the button is not checked. State_NoChangeSet if the button is in the NoChange state. State_SunkenSet if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button). CE_ProgressBarContents, CE_ProgressBarLabel, CE_ProgressBarGrooveQStyleOptionProgressBarState_EnabledSet if the progress bar is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the progress bar has input focus. CE_Header, CE_HeaderSection, CE_HeaderLabelQStyleOptionHeader CE_TabBarTab, CE_TabBarTabShape, CE_TabBarTabLabelQStyleOptionTabState_EnabledSet if the tab bar is enabled. State_SelectedThe tab bar is the currently selected tab bar. State_HasFocusSet if the tab bar tab has input focus. CE_ToolButtonLabelQStyleOptionToolButtonState_EnabledSet if the tool button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the tool button has input focus. State_SunkenSet if the tool button is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed). State_OnSet if the tool button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_AutoRaiseSet if the tool button has auto-raise enabled. State_MouseOverSet if the mouse pointer is over the tool button. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down and is not on. CE_ToolBoxTabQStyleOptionToolBoxState_SelectedThe tab is the currently selected tab. CE_HeaderSectionQStyleOptionHeaderState_SunkenIndicates that the section is pressed. State_UpArrowIndicates that the sort indicator should be pointing up. State_DownArrowIndicates that the sort indicator should be pointing down.

See also drawPrimitive() and drawComplexControl().

func (*QStyle) DrawItemPixmap

func (this *QStyle) DrawItemPixmap(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, alignment int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

Draws the given pixmap in the specified rectangle, according to the specified alignment, using the provided painter.

See also drawItemText().

func (*QStyle) DrawItemText

func (this *QStyle) DrawItemText(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, enabled bool, text string, textRole int)

Draws the given text in the specified rectangle using the provided painter and palette.

The text is drawn using the painter's pen, and aligned and wrapped according to the specified alignment. If an explicit textRole is specified, the text is drawn using the palette's color for the given role. The enabled parameter indicates whether or not the item is enabled; when reimplementing this function, the enabled parameter should influence how the item is drawn.

See also Qt::Alignment and drawItemPixmap().

func (*QStyle) DrawItemText__

func (this *QStyle) DrawItemText__(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, enabled bool, text string)

Draws the given text in the specified rectangle using the provided painter and palette.

The text is drawn using the painter's pen, and aligned and wrapped according to the specified alignment. If an explicit textRole is specified, the text is drawn using the palette's color for the given role. The enabled parameter indicates whether or not the item is enabled; when reimplementing this function, the enabled parameter should influence how the item is drawn.

See also Qt::Alignment and drawItemPixmap().

func (*QStyle) DrawPrimitive

func (this *QStyle) DrawPrimitive(pe int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF, w QWidget_ITF)

Draws the given primitive element with the provided painter using the style options specified by option.

The widget argument is optional and may contain a widget that may aid in drawing the primitive element.

The table below is listing the primitive elements and their associated style option subclasses. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the elements, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.

Note that if a primitive element is not listed here, it is because it uses a plain QStyleOption object.

Primitive ElementQStyleOption SubclassStyle FlagRemark

PE_FrameFocusRectQStyleOptionFocusRectState_FocusAtBorderWhether the focus is is at the border or inside the widget. PE_IndicatorCheckBoxQStyleOptionButtonState_NoChangeIndicates a "tri-state" checkbox. State_OnIndicates the indicator is checked. PE_IndicatorRadioButtonQStyleOptionButtonState_OnIndicates that a radio button is selected. State_NoChangeIndicates a "tri-state" controller. State_EnabledIndicates the controller is enabled. PE_IndicatorBranchQStyleOptionState_ChildrenIndicates that the control for expanding the tree to show child items, should be drawn. State_ItemIndicates that a horizontal branch (to show a child item), should be drawn. State_OpenIndicates that the tree branch is expanded. State_SiblingIndicates that a vertical line (to show a sibling item), should be drawn. PE_IndicatorHeaderArrowQStyleOptionHeaderState_UpArrowIndicates that the arrow should be drawn up; otherwise it should be down. PE_FrameGroupBox, PE_Frame, PE_FrameLineEdit, PE_FrameMenu, PE_FrameDockWidget, PE_FrameWindowQStyleOptionFrameState_SunkenIndicates that the Frame should be sunken. PE_IndicatorToolBarHandleQStyleOptionState_HorizontalIndicates that the window handle is horizontal instead of vertical. PE_IndicatorSpinPlus, PE_IndicatorSpinMinus, PE_IndicatorSpinUp, PE_IndicatorSpinDown,QStyleOptionSpinBoxState_SunkenIndicates that the button is pressed. PE_PanelButtonCommandQStyleOptionButtonState_EnabledSet if the button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the button has input focus. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down, not on and not flat. State_OnSet if the button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_SunkenSet if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button).

See also drawComplexControl() and drawControl().

func (*QStyle) DrawPrimitive__

func (this *QStyle) DrawPrimitive__(pe int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, p qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Draws the given primitive element with the provided painter using the style options specified by option.

The widget argument is optional and may contain a widget that may aid in drawing the primitive element.

The table below is listing the primitive elements and their associated style option subclasses. The style options contain all the parameters required to draw the elements, including QStyleOption::state which holds the style flags that are used when drawing. The table also describes which flags that are set when casting the given option to the appropriate subclass.

Note that if a primitive element is not listed here, it is because it uses a plain QStyleOption object.

Primitive ElementQStyleOption SubclassStyle FlagRemark

PE_FrameFocusRectQStyleOptionFocusRectState_FocusAtBorderWhether the focus is is at the border or inside the widget. PE_IndicatorCheckBoxQStyleOptionButtonState_NoChangeIndicates a "tri-state" checkbox. State_OnIndicates the indicator is checked. PE_IndicatorRadioButtonQStyleOptionButtonState_OnIndicates that a radio button is selected. State_NoChangeIndicates a "tri-state" controller. State_EnabledIndicates the controller is enabled. PE_IndicatorBranchQStyleOptionState_ChildrenIndicates that the control for expanding the tree to show child items, should be drawn. State_ItemIndicates that a horizontal branch (to show a child item), should be drawn. State_OpenIndicates that the tree branch is expanded. State_SiblingIndicates that a vertical line (to show a sibling item), should be drawn. PE_IndicatorHeaderArrowQStyleOptionHeaderState_UpArrowIndicates that the arrow should be drawn up; otherwise it should be down. PE_FrameGroupBox, PE_Frame, PE_FrameLineEdit, PE_FrameMenu, PE_FrameDockWidget, PE_FrameWindowQStyleOptionFrameState_SunkenIndicates that the Frame should be sunken. PE_IndicatorToolBarHandleQStyleOptionState_HorizontalIndicates that the window handle is horizontal instead of vertical. PE_IndicatorSpinPlus, PE_IndicatorSpinMinus, PE_IndicatorSpinUp, PE_IndicatorSpinDown,QStyleOptionSpinBoxState_SunkenIndicates that the button is pressed. PE_PanelButtonCommandQStyleOptionButtonState_EnabledSet if the button is enabled. State_HasFocusSet if the button has input focus. State_RaisedSet if the button is not down, not on and not flat. State_OnSet if the button is a toggle button and is toggled on. State_SunkenSet if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or the space bar is pressed on the button).

See also drawComplexControl() and drawControl().

func (*QStyle) GeneratedIconPixmap

func (this *QStyle) GeneratedIconPixmap(iconMode int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns a copy of the given pixmap, styled to conform to the specified iconMode and taking into account the palette specified by option.

The option parameter can pass extra information, but it must contain a palette.

Note that not all pixmaps will conform, in which case the returned pixmap is a plain copy.

See also QIcon.

func (*QStyle) GetCthis

func (this *QStyle) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyle) HitTestComplexControl

func (this *QStyle) HitTestComplexControl(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, pt qtcore.QPoint_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the sub control at the given position in the given complex control (with the style options specified by option).

Note that the position is expressed in screen coordinates.

The option argument is a pointer to a QStyleOptionComplex object (or one of its subclasses). The object can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See drawComplexControl() for details. The widget argument is optional and can contain additional information for the function.

See also drawComplexControl() and subControlRect().

func (*QStyle) HitTestComplexControl__

func (this *QStyle) HitTestComplexControl__(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, pt qtcore.QPoint_ITF) int

Returns the sub control at the given position in the given complex control (with the style options specified by option).

Note that the position is expressed in screen coordinates.

The option argument is a pointer to a QStyleOptionComplex object (or one of its subclasses). The object can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See drawComplexControl() for details. The widget argument is optional and can contain additional information for the function.

See also drawComplexControl() and subControlRect().

func (*QStyle) ItemPixmapRect

func (this *QStyle) ItemPixmapRect(r qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the area within the given rectangle in which to draw the specified pixmap according to the defined alignment.

func (*QStyle) ItemTextRect

func (this *QStyle) ItemTextRect(fm qtgui.QFontMetrics_ITF, r qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, enabled bool, text string) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the area within the given rectangle in which to draw the provided text according to the specified font metrics and alignment. The enabled parameter indicates whether or not the associated item is enabled.

If the given rectangle is larger than the area needed to render the text, the rectangle that is returned will be offset within rectangle according to the specified alignment. For example, if alignment is Qt::AlignCenter, the returned rectangle will be centered within rectangle. If the given rectangle is smaller than the area needed, the returned rectangle will be the smallest rectangle large enough to render the text.

See also Qt::Alignment.

func (*QStyle) LayoutSpacing

func (this *QStyle) LayoutSpacing(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also combinedLayoutSpacing().

func (*QStyle) LayoutSpacing__

func (this *QStyle) LayoutSpacing__(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int) int

Returns the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also combinedLayoutSpacing().

func (*QStyle) LayoutSpacing__1

func (this *QStyle) LayoutSpacing__1(control1 int, control2 int, orientation int, option QStyleOption_ITF) int

Returns the spacing that should be used between control1 and control2 in a layout. orientation specifies whether the controls are laid out side by side or stacked vertically. The option parameter can be used to pass extra information about the parent widget. The widget parameter is optional and can also be used if option is 0.

This function is called by the layout system. It is used only if PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing or PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing returns a negative value.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also combinedLayoutSpacing().

func (*QStyle) MetaObject

func (this *QStyle) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QStyle) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyle) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyle

func (*QStyle) PixelMetric

func (this *QStyle) PixelMetric(metric int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the value of the given pixel metric.

The specified option and widget can be used for calculating the metric. In general, the widget argument is not used. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the option may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use of it. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:

Pixel MetricQStyleOption Subclass

PM_SliderControlThicknessQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderLengthQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderTickmarkOffsetQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderSpaceAvailableQStyleOptionSlider PM_ScrollBarExtentQStyleOptionSlider PM_TabBarTabOverlapQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarTabHSpaceQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarTabVSpaceQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarBaseHeightQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarBaseOverlapQStyleOptionTab

Some pixel metrics are called from widgets and some are only called internally by the style. If the metric is not called by a widget, it is the discretion of the style author to make use of it. For some styles, this may not be appropriate.

func (*QStyle) PixelMetric__

func (this *QStyle) PixelMetric__(metric int) int

Returns the value of the given pixel metric.

The specified option and widget can be used for calculating the metric. In general, the widget argument is not used. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the option may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use of it. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:

Pixel MetricQStyleOption Subclass

PM_SliderControlThicknessQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderLengthQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderTickmarkOffsetQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderSpaceAvailableQStyleOptionSlider PM_ScrollBarExtentQStyleOptionSlider PM_TabBarTabOverlapQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarTabHSpaceQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarTabVSpaceQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarBaseHeightQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarBaseOverlapQStyleOptionTab

Some pixel metrics are called from widgets and some are only called internally by the style. If the metric is not called by a widget, it is the discretion of the style author to make use of it. For some styles, this may not be appropriate.

func (*QStyle) PixelMetric__1

func (this *QStyle) PixelMetric__1(metric int, option QStyleOption_ITF) int

Returns the value of the given pixel metric.

The specified option and widget can be used for calculating the metric. In general, the widget argument is not used. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. Note that the option may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use of it. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:

Pixel MetricQStyleOption Subclass

PM_SliderControlThicknessQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderLengthQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderTickmarkOffsetQStyleOptionSlider PM_SliderSpaceAvailableQStyleOptionSlider PM_ScrollBarExtentQStyleOptionSlider PM_TabBarTabOverlapQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarTabHSpaceQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarTabVSpaceQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarBaseHeightQStyleOptionTab PM_TabBarBaseOverlapQStyleOptionTab

Some pixel metrics are called from widgets and some are only called internally by the style. If the metric is not called by a widget, it is the discretion of the style author to make use of it. For some styles, this may not be appropriate.

func (*QStyle) Polish

func (this *QStyle) Polish(widget QWidget_ITF)

Initializes the appearance of the given widget.

This function is called for every widget at some point after it has been fully created but just before it is shown for the very first time.

Note that the default implementation does nothing. Reasonable actions in this function might be to call the QWidget::setBackgroundMode() function for the widget. Do not use the function to set, for example, the geometry. Reimplementing this function provides a back-door through which the appearance of a widget can be changed, but with Qt's style engine it is rarely necessary to implement this function; reimplement drawItemPixmap(), drawItemText(), drawPrimitive(), etc. instead.

The QWidget::inherits() function may provide enough information to allow class-specific customizations. But because new QStyle subclasses are expected to work reasonably with all current and future widgets, limited use of hard-coded customization is recommended.

See also unpolish().

func (*QStyle) Polish_1

func (this *QStyle) Polish_1(application QApplication_ITF)

Initializes the appearance of the given widget.

This function is called for every widget at some point after it has been fully created but just before it is shown for the very first time.

Note that the default implementation does nothing. Reasonable actions in this function might be to call the QWidget::setBackgroundMode() function for the widget. Do not use the function to set, for example, the geometry. Reimplementing this function provides a back-door through which the appearance of a widget can be changed, but with Qt's style engine it is rarely necessary to implement this function; reimplement drawItemPixmap(), drawItemText(), drawPrimitive(), etc. instead.

The QWidget::inherits() function may provide enough information to allow class-specific customizations. But because new QStyle subclasses are expected to work reasonably with all current and future widgets, limited use of hard-coded customization is recommended.

See also unpolish().

func (*QStyle) Polish_2

func (this *QStyle) Polish_2(palette qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

Initializes the appearance of the given widget.

This function is called for every widget at some point after it has been fully created but just before it is shown for the very first time.

Note that the default implementation does nothing. Reasonable actions in this function might be to call the QWidget::setBackgroundMode() function for the widget. Do not use the function to set, for example, the geometry. Reimplementing this function provides a back-door through which the appearance of a widget can be changed, but with Qt's style engine it is rarely necessary to implement this function; reimplement drawItemPixmap(), drawItemText(), drawPrimitive(), etc. instead.

The QWidget::inherits() function may provide enough information to allow class-specific customizations. But because new QStyle subclasses are expected to work reasonably with all current and future widgets, limited use of hard-coded customization is recommended.

See also unpolish().

func (*QStyle) Proxy

func (this *QStyle) Proxy() *QStyle

This function returns the current proxy for this style. By default most styles will return themselves. However when a proxy style is in use, it will allow the style to call back into its proxy.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

func (*QStyle) QStyle_PTR

func (ptr *QStyle) QStyle_PTR() *QStyle

func (*QStyle) SetCthis

func (this *QStyle) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QStyle) SizeFromContents

func (this *QStyle) SizeFromContents(ct int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, contentsSize qtcore.QSize_ITF, w QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

Returns the size of the element described by the specified option and type, based on the provided contentsSize.

The option argument is a pointer to a QStyleOption or one of its subclasses. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. The widget is an optional argument and can contain extra information used for calculating the size.

See the table below for the appropriate option casts:

Contents TypeQStyleOption Subclass

CT_CheckBoxQStyleOptionButton CT_ComboBoxQStyleOptionComboBox CT_GroupBoxQStyleOptionGroupBox CT_HeaderSectionQStyleOptionHeader CT_ItemViewItemQStyleOptionViewItem CT_LineEditQStyleOptionFrame CT_MdiControlsQStyleOptionComplex CT_MenuQStyleOption CT_MenuItemQStyleOptionMenuItem CT_MenuBarQStyleOptionMenuItem CT_MenuBarItemQStyleOptionMenuItem CT_ProgressBarQStyleOptionProgressBar CT_PushButtonQStyleOptionButton CT_RadioButtonQStyleOptionButton CT_ScrollBarQStyleOptionSlider CT_SizeGripQStyleOption CT_SliderQStyleOptionSlider CT_SpinBoxQStyleOptionSpinBox CT_SplitterQStyleOption CT_TabBarTabQStyleOptionTab CT_TabWidgetQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame CT_ToolButtonQStyleOptionToolButton

See also ContentsType and QStyleOption.

func (*QStyle) SizeFromContents__

func (this *QStyle) SizeFromContents__(ct int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, contentsSize qtcore.QSize_ITF) *qtcore.QSize

Returns the size of the element described by the specified option and type, based on the provided contentsSize.

The option argument is a pointer to a QStyleOption or one of its subclasses. The option can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. The widget is an optional argument and can contain extra information used for calculating the size.

See the table below for the appropriate option casts:

Contents TypeQStyleOption Subclass

CT_CheckBoxQStyleOptionButton CT_ComboBoxQStyleOptionComboBox CT_GroupBoxQStyleOptionGroupBox CT_HeaderSectionQStyleOptionHeader CT_ItemViewItemQStyleOptionViewItem CT_LineEditQStyleOptionFrame CT_MdiControlsQStyleOptionComplex CT_MenuQStyleOption CT_MenuItemQStyleOptionMenuItem CT_MenuBarQStyleOptionMenuItem CT_MenuBarItemQStyleOptionMenuItem CT_ProgressBarQStyleOptionProgressBar CT_PushButtonQStyleOptionButton CT_RadioButtonQStyleOptionButton CT_ScrollBarQStyleOptionSlider CT_SizeGripQStyleOption CT_SliderQStyleOptionSlider CT_SpinBoxQStyleOptionSpinBox CT_SplitterQStyleOption CT_TabBarTabQStyleOptionTab CT_TabWidgetQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame CT_ToolButtonQStyleOptionToolButton

See also ContentsType and QStyleOption.

func (*QStyle) SliderPositionFromValue

func (this *QStyle) SliderPositionFromValue(min int, max int, val int, space int, upsideDown bool) int

Converts the given logicalValue to a pixel position. The min parameter maps to 0, max maps to span and other values are distributed evenly in-between.

This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow, providing that span is less than 4096.

By default, this function assumes that the maximum value is on the right for horizontal items and on the bottom for vertical items. Set the upsideDown parameter to true to reverse this behavior.

See also sliderValueFromPosition().

func (*QStyle) SliderPositionFromValue__

func (this *QStyle) SliderPositionFromValue__(min int, max int, val int, space int) int

Converts the given logicalValue to a pixel position. The min parameter maps to 0, max maps to span and other values are distributed evenly in-between.

This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow, providing that span is less than 4096.

By default, this function assumes that the maximum value is on the right for horizontal items and on the bottom for vertical items. Set the upsideDown parameter to true to reverse this behavior.

See also sliderValueFromPosition().

func (*QStyle) SliderValueFromPosition

func (this *QStyle) SliderValueFromPosition(min int, max int, pos int, space int, upsideDown bool) int

Converts the given pixel position to a logical value. 0 maps to the min parameter, span maps to max and other values are distributed evenly in-between.

This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow.

By default, this function assumes that the maximum value is on the right for horizontal items and on the bottom for vertical items. Set the upsideDown parameter to true to reverse this behavior.

See also sliderPositionFromValue().

func (*QStyle) SliderValueFromPosition__

func (this *QStyle) SliderValueFromPosition__(min int, max int, pos int, space int) int

Converts the given pixel position to a logical value. 0 maps to the min parameter, span maps to max and other values are distributed evenly in-between.

This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow.

By default, this function assumes that the maximum value is on the right for horizontal items and on the bottom for vertical items. Set the upsideDown parameter to true to reverse this behavior.

See also sliderPositionFromValue().

func (*QStyle) StandardIcon

func (this *QStyle) StandardIcon(standardIcon int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.

The standardIcon is a standard pixmap which can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the icon.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QStyle) StandardIcon__

func (this *QStyle) StandardIcon__(standardIcon int) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.

The standardIcon is a standard pixmap which can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the icon.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QStyle) StandardIcon__1

func (this *QStyle) StandardIcon__1(standardIcon int, option QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns an icon for the given standardIcon.

The standardIcon is a standard pixmap which can follow some existing GUI style or guideline. The option argument can be used to pass extra information required when defining the appropriate icon. The widget argument is optional and can also be used to aid the determination of the icon.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QStyle) StandardPalette

func (this *QStyle) StandardPalette() *qtgui.QPalette

Returns the style's standard palette.

Note that on systems that support system colors, the style's standard palette is not used. In particular, the Windows Vista and Mac styles do not use the standard palette, but make use of native theme engines. With these styles, you should not set the palette with QApplication::setPalette().

See also QApplication::setPalette().

func (*QStyle) StandardPixmap

func (this *QStyle) StandardPixmap(standardPixmap int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QStyle) StandardPixmap__

func (this *QStyle) StandardPixmap__(standardPixmap int) *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QStyle) StandardPixmap__1

func (this *QStyle) StandardPixmap__1(standardPixmap int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

func (*QStyle) StyleHint

func (this *QStyle) StyleHint(stylehint int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF, returnData QStyleHintReturn_ITF) int

Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.

returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.

func (*QStyle) StyleHint__

func (this *QStyle) StyleHint__(stylehint int) int

Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.

returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.

func (*QStyle) StyleHint__1

func (this *QStyle) StyleHint__1(stylehint int, opt QStyleOption_ITF) int

Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.

returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.

func (*QStyle) StyleHint__2

func (this *QStyle) StyleHint__2(stylehint int, opt QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns an integer representing the specified style hint for the given widget described by the provided style option.

returnData is used when the querying widget needs more detailed data than the integer that styleHint() returns. See the QStyleHintReturn class description for details.

func (*QStyle) SubControlRect

func (this *QStyle) SubControlRect(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, sc int, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle containing the specified subControl of the given complex control (with the style specified by option). The rectangle is defined in screen coordinates.

The option argument is a pointer to QStyleOptionComplex or one of its subclasses, and can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See drawComplexControl() for details. The widget is optional and can contain additional information for the function.

See also drawComplexControl().

func (*QStyle) SubControlRect__

func (this *QStyle) SubControlRect__(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF, sc int) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle containing the specified subControl of the given complex control (with the style specified by option). The rectangle is defined in screen coordinates.

The option argument is a pointer to QStyleOptionComplex or one of its subclasses, and can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See drawComplexControl() for details. The widget is optional and can contain additional information for the function.

See also drawComplexControl().

func (*QStyle) SubElementRect

func (this *QStyle) SubElementRect(subElement int, option QStyleOption_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the sub-area for the given element as described in the provided style option. The returned rectangle is defined in screen coordinates.

The widget argument is optional and can be used to aid determining the area. The QStyleOption object can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:

Sub ElementQStyleOption Subclass

SE_PushButtonContentsQStyleOptionButton SE_PushButtonFocusRectQStyleOptionButton SE_CheckBoxIndicatorQStyleOptionButton SE_CheckBoxContentsQStyleOptionButton SE_CheckBoxFocusRectQStyleOptionButton SE_RadioButtonIndicatorQStyleOptionButton SE_RadioButtonContentsQStyleOptionButton SE_RadioButtonFocusRectQStyleOptionButton SE_ComboBoxFocusRectQStyleOptionComboBox SE_ProgressBarGrooveQStyleOptionProgressBar SE_ProgressBarContentsQStyleOptionProgressBar SE_ProgressBarLabelQStyleOptionProgressBar

func (*QStyle) SubElementRect__

func (this *QStyle) SubElementRect__(subElement int, option QStyleOption_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the sub-area for the given element as described in the provided style option. The returned rectangle is defined in screen coordinates.

The widget argument is optional and can be used to aid determining the area. The QStyleOption object can be cast to the appropriate type using the qstyleoption_cast() function. See the table below for the appropriate option casts:

Sub ElementQStyleOption Subclass

SE_PushButtonContentsQStyleOptionButton SE_PushButtonFocusRectQStyleOptionButton SE_CheckBoxIndicatorQStyleOptionButton SE_CheckBoxContentsQStyleOptionButton SE_CheckBoxFocusRectQStyleOptionButton SE_RadioButtonIndicatorQStyleOptionButton SE_RadioButtonContentsQStyleOptionButton SE_RadioButtonFocusRectQStyleOptionButton SE_ComboBoxFocusRectQStyleOptionComboBox SE_ProgressBarGrooveQStyleOptionProgressBar SE_ProgressBarContentsQStyleOptionProgressBar SE_ProgressBarLabelQStyleOptionProgressBar

func (*QStyle) Unpolish

func (this *QStyle) Unpolish(widget QWidget_ITF)

Uninitialize the given widget's appearance.

This function is the counterpart to polish(). It is called for every polished widget whenever the style is dynamically changed; the former style has to unpolish its settings before the new style can polish them again.

Note that unpolish() will only be called if the widget is destroyed. This can cause problems in some cases, e.g, if you remove a widget from the UI, cache it, and then reinsert it after the style has changed; some of Qt's classes cache their widgets.

See also polish().

func (*QStyle) Unpolish_1

func (this *QStyle) Unpolish_1(application QApplication_ITF)

Uninitialize the given widget's appearance.

This function is the counterpart to polish(). It is called for every polished widget whenever the style is dynamically changed; the former style has to unpolish its settings before the new style can polish them again.

Note that unpolish() will only be called if the widget is destroyed. This can cause problems in some cases, e.g, if you remove a widget from the UI, cache it, and then reinsert it after the style has changed; some of Qt's classes cache their widgets.

See also polish().

func (*QStyle) VisualAlignment

func (this *QStyle) VisualAlignment(direction int, alignment int) int

Transforms an alignment of Qt::AlignLeft or Qt::AlignRight without Qt::AlignAbsolute into Qt::AlignLeft or Qt::AlignRight with Qt::AlignAbsolute according to the layout direction. The other alignment flags are left untouched.

If no horizontal alignment was specified, the function returns the default alignment for the given layout direction.

QWidget::layoutDirection

func (*QStyle) VisualPos

func (this *QStyle) VisualPos(direction int, boundingRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, logicalPos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Returns the given logicalPosition converted to screen coordinates based on the specified direction. The boundingRectangle is used when performing the translation.

See also QWidget::layoutDirection.

func (*QStyle) VisualRect

func (this *QStyle) VisualRect(direction int, boundingRect qtcore.QRect_ITF, logicalRect qtcore.QRect_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the given logicalRectangle converted to screen coordinates based on the specified direction. The boundingRectangle is used when performing the translation.

This function is provided to support right-to-left desktops, and is typically used in implementations of the subControlRect() function.

See also QWidget::layoutDirection.

type QStyleFactory

type QStyleFactory struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQStyleFactoryFromPointer

func NewQStyleFactoryFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleFactory

func (*QStyleFactory) Create

func (this *QStyleFactory) Create(arg0 string) *QStyle

Creates and returns a QStyle object that matches the given key, or returns 0 if no matching style is found.

Both built-in styles and styles from style plugins are queried for a matching style.

Note: The keys used are case insensitive.

See also keys().

func (*QStyleFactory) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleFactory) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleFactory) Keys

func (this *QStyleFactory) Keys() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns the list of valid keys, i.e. the keys this factory can create styles for.

See also create().

func (*QStyleFactory) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleFactory) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleFactory

func (*QStyleFactory) QStyleFactory_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleFactory) QStyleFactory_PTR() *QStyleFactory

func (*QStyleFactory) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleFactory) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleFactory_ITF

type QStyleFactory_ITF interface {
	QStyleFactory_PTR() *QStyleFactory
}

type QStyleHintReturn

type QStyleHintReturn struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQStyleHintReturn

func NewQStyleHintReturn(version int, type_ int) *QStyleHintReturn

func NewQStyleHintReturnFromPointer

func NewQStyleHintReturnFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleHintReturn

func NewQStyleHintReturn__

func NewQStyleHintReturn__() *QStyleHintReturn

func NewQStyleHintReturn__1

func NewQStyleHintReturn__1(version int) *QStyleHintReturn

func (*QStyleHintReturn) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleHintReturn) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleHintReturn) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleHintReturn) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleHintReturn

func (*QStyleHintReturn) QStyleHintReturn_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleHintReturn) QStyleHintReturn_PTR() *QStyleHintReturn

func (*QStyleHintReturn) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleHintReturn) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleHintReturnMask

type QStyleHintReturnMask struct {
	*QStyleHintReturn
}

func NewQStyleHintReturnMask

func NewQStyleHintReturnMask() *QStyleHintReturnMask

func NewQStyleHintReturnMaskFromPointer

func NewQStyleHintReturnMaskFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleHintReturnMask

func (*QStyleHintReturnMask) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleHintReturnMask) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleHintReturnMask) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleHintReturnMask) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleHintReturnMask

func (*QStyleHintReturnMask) QStyleHintReturnMask_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleHintReturnMask) QStyleHintReturnMask_PTR() *QStyleHintReturnMask

func (*QStyleHintReturnMask) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleHintReturnMask) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleHintReturnMask_ITF

type QStyleHintReturnMask_ITF interface {
	QStyleHintReturn_ITF
	QStyleHintReturnMask_PTR() *QStyleHintReturnMask
}

type QStyleHintReturnMask__StyleOptionType

type QStyleHintReturnMask__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleHintReturnMask__Type QStyleHintReturnMask__StyleOptionType = 61441

type QStyleHintReturnMask__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleHintReturnMask__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleHintReturnMask__Version QStyleHintReturnMask__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleHintReturnVariant

type QStyleHintReturnVariant struct {
	*QStyleHintReturn
}

func NewQStyleHintReturnVariant

func NewQStyleHintReturnVariant() *QStyleHintReturnVariant

func NewQStyleHintReturnVariantFromPointer

func NewQStyleHintReturnVariantFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleHintReturnVariant

func (*QStyleHintReturnVariant) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleHintReturnVariant) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleHintReturnVariant) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleHintReturnVariant) QStyleHintReturnVariant_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleHintReturnVariant) QStyleHintReturnVariant_PTR() *QStyleHintReturnVariant

func (*QStyleHintReturnVariant) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleHintReturnVariant) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleHintReturnVariant_ITF

type QStyleHintReturnVariant_ITF interface {
	QStyleHintReturn_ITF
	QStyleHintReturnVariant_PTR() *QStyleHintReturnVariant
}

type QStyleHintReturnVariant__StyleOptionType

type QStyleHintReturnVariant__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleHintReturnVariant__Type QStyleHintReturnVariant__StyleOptionType = 61442

type QStyleHintReturnVariant__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleHintReturnVariant__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleHintReturnVariant__Version QStyleHintReturnVariant__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleHintReturn_ITF

type QStyleHintReturn_ITF interface {
	QStyleHintReturn_PTR() *QStyleHintReturn
}

type QStyleHintReturn__HintReturnType

type QStyleHintReturn__HintReturnType = int
const QStyleHintReturn__SH_Default QStyleHintReturn__HintReturnType = 61440
const QStyleHintReturn__SH_Mask QStyleHintReturn__HintReturnType = 61441
const QStyleHintReturn__SH_Variant QStyleHintReturn__HintReturnType = 61442

type QStyleHintReturn__StyleOptionType

type QStyleHintReturn__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleHintReturn__Type QStyleHintReturn__StyleOptionType = 61440

type QStyleHintReturn__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleHintReturn__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleHintReturn__Version QStyleHintReturn__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOption

type QStyleOption struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQStyleOption

func NewQStyleOption(version int, type_ int) *QStyleOption

Constructs a QStyleOption with the specified version and type.

The version has no special meaning for QStyleOption; it can be used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of the same option type.

The state member variable is initialized to QStyle::State_None.

See also version and type.

func NewQStyleOptionFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOption

func NewQStyleOption__

func NewQStyleOption__() *QStyleOption

Constructs a QStyleOption with the specified version and type.

The version has no special meaning for QStyleOption; it can be used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of the same option type.

The state member variable is initialized to QStyle::State_None.

See also version and type.

func NewQStyleOption__1

func NewQStyleOption__1(version int) *QStyleOption

Constructs a QStyleOption with the specified version and type.

The version has no special meaning for QStyleOption; it can be used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of the same option type.

The state member variable is initialized to QStyle::State_None.

See also version and type.

func (*QStyleOption) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOption) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOption) Init

func (this *QStyleOption) Init(w QWidget_ITF)

func (*QStyleOption) InitFrom

func (this *QStyleOption) InitFrom(w QWidget_ITF)

Initializes the state, direction, rect, palette, fontMetrics and styleObject member variables based on the specified widget.

This is a convenience function; the member variables can also be initialized manually.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also QWidget::layoutDirection(), QWidget::rect(), QWidget::palette(), and QWidget::fontMetrics().

func (*QStyleOption) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOption) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOption

func (*QStyleOption) Operator_equal

func (this *QStyleOption) Operator_equal(other QStyleOption_ITF) *QStyleOption

func (*QStyleOption) QStyleOption_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOption) QStyleOption_PTR() *QStyleOption

func (*QStyleOption) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOption) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionButton

type QStyleOptionButton struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionButton

func NewQStyleOptionButton() *QStyleOptionButton

func NewQStyleOptionButtonFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionButtonFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionButton

func NewQStyleOptionButton_1

func NewQStyleOptionButton_1(version int) *QStyleOptionButton

func (*QStyleOptionButton) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionButton) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionButton) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionButton) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionButton

func (*QStyleOptionButton) QStyleOptionButton_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionButton) QStyleOptionButton_PTR() *QStyleOptionButton

func (*QStyleOptionButton) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionButton) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionButton_ITF

type QStyleOptionButton_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionButton_PTR() *QStyleOptionButton
}

type QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature

type QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature = int
const QStyleOptionButton__AutoDefaultButton QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature = 8
const QStyleOptionButton__CommandLinkButton QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature = 16
const QStyleOptionButton__DefaultButton QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature = 4
const QStyleOptionButton__Flat QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature = 1
const QStyleOptionButton__HasMenu QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature = 2
const QStyleOptionButton__None QStyleOptionButton__ButtonFeature = 0

type QStyleOptionButton__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionButton__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionButton__Type QStyleOptionButton__StyleOptionType = 2

type QStyleOptionButton__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionButton__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionButton__Version QStyleOptionButton__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionComboBox

type QStyleOptionComboBox struct {
	*QStyleOptionComplex
}

func NewQStyleOptionComboBox

func NewQStyleOptionComboBox() *QStyleOptionComboBox

func NewQStyleOptionComboBoxFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionComboBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionComboBox

func NewQStyleOptionComboBox_1

func NewQStyleOptionComboBox_1(version int) *QStyleOptionComboBox

func (*QStyleOptionComboBox) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionComboBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionComboBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionComboBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionComboBox

func (*QStyleOptionComboBox) QStyleOptionComboBox_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionComboBox) QStyleOptionComboBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionComboBox

func (*QStyleOptionComboBox) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionComboBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionComboBox_ITF

type QStyleOptionComboBox_ITF interface {
	QStyleOptionComplex_ITF
	QStyleOptionComboBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionComboBox
}

type QStyleOptionComboBox__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionComboBox__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionComboBox__Type QStyleOptionComboBox__StyleOptionType = 983044

type QStyleOptionComboBox__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionComboBox__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionComboBox__Version QStyleOptionComboBox__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionComplex

type QStyleOptionComplex struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionComplex

func NewQStyleOptionComplex(version int, type_ int) *QStyleOptionComplex

func NewQStyleOptionComplexFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionComplexFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionComplex

func NewQStyleOptionComplex__

func NewQStyleOptionComplex__() *QStyleOptionComplex

func NewQStyleOptionComplex__1

func NewQStyleOptionComplex__1(version int) *QStyleOptionComplex

func (*QStyleOptionComplex) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionComplex) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionComplex) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionComplex) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionComplex

func (*QStyleOptionComplex) QStyleOptionComplex_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionComplex) QStyleOptionComplex_PTR() *QStyleOptionComplex

func (*QStyleOptionComplex) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionComplex) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionComplex_ITF

type QStyleOptionComplex_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionComplex_PTR() *QStyleOptionComplex
}

type QStyleOptionComplex__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionComplex__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionComplex__Type QStyleOptionComplex__StyleOptionType = 983040

type QStyleOptionComplex__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionComplex__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionComplex__Version QStyleOptionComplex__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionDockWidget

type QStyleOptionDockWidget struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionDockWidget

func NewQStyleOptionDockWidget() *QStyleOptionDockWidget

func NewQStyleOptionDockWidgetFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionDockWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionDockWidget

func NewQStyleOptionDockWidget_1

func NewQStyleOptionDockWidget_1(version int) *QStyleOptionDockWidget

func (*QStyleOptionDockWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionDockWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionDockWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionDockWidget) QStyleOptionDockWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionDockWidget) QStyleOptionDockWidget_PTR() *QStyleOptionDockWidget

func (*QStyleOptionDockWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionDockWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionDockWidget_ITF

type QStyleOptionDockWidget_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionDockWidget_PTR() *QStyleOptionDockWidget
}

type QStyleOptionDockWidget__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionDockWidget__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionDockWidget__Type QStyleOptionDockWidget__StyleOptionType = 9

type QStyleOptionDockWidget__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionDockWidget__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionDockWidget__Version QStyleOptionDockWidget__StyleOptionVersion = 2

1

type QStyleOptionFocusRect

type QStyleOptionFocusRect struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionFocusRect

func NewQStyleOptionFocusRect() *QStyleOptionFocusRect

func NewQStyleOptionFocusRectFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionFocusRectFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionFocusRect

func NewQStyleOptionFocusRect_1

func NewQStyleOptionFocusRect_1(version int) *QStyleOptionFocusRect

func (*QStyleOptionFocusRect) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionFocusRect) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionFocusRect) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionFocusRect) QStyleOptionFocusRect_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionFocusRect) QStyleOptionFocusRect_PTR() *QStyleOptionFocusRect

func (*QStyleOptionFocusRect) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionFocusRect) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionFocusRect_ITF

type QStyleOptionFocusRect_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionFocusRect_PTR() *QStyleOptionFocusRect
}

type QStyleOptionFocusRect__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionFocusRect__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionFocusRect__Type QStyleOptionFocusRect__StyleOptionType = 1

type QStyleOptionFocusRect__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionFocusRect__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionFocusRect__Version QStyleOptionFocusRect__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionFrame

type QStyleOptionFrame struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionFrame

func NewQStyleOptionFrame() *QStyleOptionFrame

func NewQStyleOptionFrameFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionFrameFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionFrame

func NewQStyleOptionFrame_1

func NewQStyleOptionFrame_1(version int) *QStyleOptionFrame

func (*QStyleOptionFrame) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionFrame) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionFrame) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionFrame) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionFrame

func (*QStyleOptionFrame) QStyleOptionFrame_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionFrame) QStyleOptionFrame_PTR() *QStyleOptionFrame

func (*QStyleOptionFrame) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionFrame) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionFrame_ITF

type QStyleOptionFrame_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionFrame_PTR() *QStyleOptionFrame
}

type QStyleOptionFrame__FrameFeature

type QStyleOptionFrame__FrameFeature = int
const QStyleOptionFrame__Flat QStyleOptionFrame__FrameFeature = 1
const QStyleOptionFrame__None QStyleOptionFrame__FrameFeature = 0
const QStyleOptionFrame__Rounded QStyleOptionFrame__FrameFeature = 2

type QStyleOptionFrame__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionFrame__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionFrame__Type QStyleOptionFrame__StyleOptionType = 5

type QStyleOptionFrame__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionFrame__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionFrame__Version QStyleOptionFrame__StyleOptionVersion = 3

1

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionGraphicsItem

func NewQStyleOptionGraphicsItem() *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem

func NewQStyleOptionGraphicsItemFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionGraphicsItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem

func NewQStyleOptionGraphicsItem_1

func NewQStyleOptionGraphicsItem_1(version int) *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem

func (*QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) LevelOfDetailFromTransform

func (this *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) LevelOfDetailFromTransform(worldTransform qtgui.QTransform_ITF) float64

func (*QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_PTR() *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem

func (*QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionGraphicsItem_PTR() *QStyleOptionGraphicsItem
}

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__Type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__StyleOptionType = 15

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__Version QStyleOptionGraphicsItem__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionGroupBox

type QStyleOptionGroupBox struct {
	*QStyleOptionComplex
}

func NewQStyleOptionGroupBox

func NewQStyleOptionGroupBox() *QStyleOptionGroupBox

func NewQStyleOptionGroupBoxFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionGroupBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionGroupBox

func NewQStyleOptionGroupBox_1

func NewQStyleOptionGroupBox_1(version int) *QStyleOptionGroupBox

func (*QStyleOptionGroupBox) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionGroupBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionGroupBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionGroupBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionGroupBox

func (*QStyleOptionGroupBox) QStyleOptionGroupBox_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionGroupBox) QStyleOptionGroupBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionGroupBox

func (*QStyleOptionGroupBox) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionGroupBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionGroupBox_ITF

type QStyleOptionGroupBox_ITF interface {
	QStyleOptionComplex_ITF
	QStyleOptionGroupBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionGroupBox
}

type QStyleOptionGroupBox__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionGroupBox__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionGroupBox__Type QStyleOptionGroupBox__StyleOptionType = 983046

type QStyleOptionGroupBox__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionGroupBox__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionGroupBox__Version QStyleOptionGroupBox__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionHeader

type QStyleOptionHeader struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionHeader

func NewQStyleOptionHeader() *QStyleOptionHeader

func NewQStyleOptionHeaderFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionHeaderFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionHeader

func NewQStyleOptionHeader_1

func NewQStyleOptionHeader_1(version int) *QStyleOptionHeader

func (*QStyleOptionHeader) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionHeader) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionHeader) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionHeader) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionHeader

func (*QStyleOptionHeader) QStyleOptionHeader_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionHeader) QStyleOptionHeader_PTR() *QStyleOptionHeader

func (*QStyleOptionHeader) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionHeader) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionHeader_ITF

type QStyleOptionHeader_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionHeader_PTR() *QStyleOptionHeader
}

type QStyleOptionHeader__SectionPosition

type QStyleOptionHeader__SectionPosition = int
const QStyleOptionHeader__Beginning QStyleOptionHeader__SectionPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionHeader__End QStyleOptionHeader__SectionPosition = 2
const QStyleOptionHeader__Middle QStyleOptionHeader__SectionPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionHeader__OnlyOneSection QStyleOptionHeader__SectionPosition = 3

type QStyleOptionHeader__SelectedPosition

type QStyleOptionHeader__SelectedPosition = int
const QStyleOptionHeader__NextAndPreviousAreSelected QStyleOptionHeader__SelectedPosition = 3
const QStyleOptionHeader__NextIsSelected QStyleOptionHeader__SelectedPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionHeader__NotAdjacent QStyleOptionHeader__SelectedPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionHeader__PreviousIsSelected QStyleOptionHeader__SelectedPosition = 2

type QStyleOptionHeader__SortIndicator

type QStyleOptionHeader__SortIndicator = int
const QStyleOptionHeader__None QStyleOptionHeader__SortIndicator = 0
const QStyleOptionHeader__SortDown QStyleOptionHeader__SortIndicator = 2
const QStyleOptionHeader__SortUp QStyleOptionHeader__SortIndicator = 1

type QStyleOptionHeader__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionHeader__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionHeader__Type QStyleOptionHeader__StyleOptionType = 8

type QStyleOptionHeader__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionHeader__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionHeader__Version QStyleOptionHeader__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionMenuItem

type QStyleOptionMenuItem struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionMenuItem

func NewQStyleOptionMenuItem() *QStyleOptionMenuItem

func NewQStyleOptionMenuItemFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionMenuItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionMenuItem

func NewQStyleOptionMenuItem_1

func NewQStyleOptionMenuItem_1(version int) *QStyleOptionMenuItem

func (*QStyleOptionMenuItem) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionMenuItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionMenuItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionMenuItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionMenuItem

func (*QStyleOptionMenuItem) QStyleOptionMenuItem_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionMenuItem) QStyleOptionMenuItem_PTR() *QStyleOptionMenuItem

func (*QStyleOptionMenuItem) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionMenuItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionMenuItem_ITF

type QStyleOptionMenuItem_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionMenuItem_PTR() *QStyleOptionMenuItem
}

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__CheckType

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__CheckType = int
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__Exclusive QStyleOptionMenuItem__CheckType = 1
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__NonExclusive QStyleOptionMenuItem__CheckType = 2
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__NotCheckable QStyleOptionMenuItem__CheckType = 0

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = int
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__DefaultItem QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 1
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__EmptyArea QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 7
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__Margin QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 6
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__Normal QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 0
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__Scroller QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 4
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__Separator QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 2
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__SubMenu QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 3
const QStyleOptionMenuItem__TearOff QStyleOptionMenuItem__MenuItemType = 5

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionMenuItem__Type QStyleOptionMenuItem__StyleOptionType = 4

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionMenuItem__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionMenuItem__Version QStyleOptionMenuItem__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionProgressBar

type QStyleOptionProgressBar struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionProgressBar

func NewQStyleOptionProgressBar() *QStyleOptionProgressBar

func NewQStyleOptionProgressBarFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionProgressBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionProgressBar

func NewQStyleOptionProgressBar_1

func NewQStyleOptionProgressBar_1(version int) *QStyleOptionProgressBar

func (*QStyleOptionProgressBar) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionProgressBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionProgressBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionProgressBar) QStyleOptionProgressBar_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionProgressBar) QStyleOptionProgressBar_PTR() *QStyleOptionProgressBar

func (*QStyleOptionProgressBar) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionProgressBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionProgressBar_ITF

type QStyleOptionProgressBar_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionProgressBar_PTR() *QStyleOptionProgressBar
}

type QStyleOptionProgressBar__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionProgressBar__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionProgressBar__Type QStyleOptionProgressBar__StyleOptionType = 6

type QStyleOptionProgressBar__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionProgressBar__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionProgressBar__Version QStyleOptionProgressBar__StyleOptionVersion = 2

1

type QStyleOptionRubberBand

type QStyleOptionRubberBand struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionRubberBand

func NewQStyleOptionRubberBand() *QStyleOptionRubberBand

func NewQStyleOptionRubberBandFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionRubberBandFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionRubberBand

func NewQStyleOptionRubberBand_1

func NewQStyleOptionRubberBand_1(version int) *QStyleOptionRubberBand

func (*QStyleOptionRubberBand) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionRubberBand) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionRubberBand) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionRubberBand) QStyleOptionRubberBand_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionRubberBand) QStyleOptionRubberBand_PTR() *QStyleOptionRubberBand

func (*QStyleOptionRubberBand) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionRubberBand) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionRubberBand_ITF

type QStyleOptionRubberBand_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionRubberBand_PTR() *QStyleOptionRubberBand
}

type QStyleOptionRubberBand__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionRubberBand__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionRubberBand__Type QStyleOptionRubberBand__StyleOptionType = 13

type QStyleOptionRubberBand__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionRubberBand__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionRubberBand__Version QStyleOptionRubberBand__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip struct {
	*QStyleOptionComplex
}

func NewQStyleOptionSizeGrip

func NewQStyleOptionSizeGrip() *QStyleOptionSizeGrip

func NewQStyleOptionSizeGripFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionSizeGripFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionSizeGrip

func NewQStyleOptionSizeGrip_1

func NewQStyleOptionSizeGrip_1(version int) *QStyleOptionSizeGrip

func (*QStyleOptionSizeGrip) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionSizeGrip) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionSizeGrip) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionSizeGrip) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionSizeGrip

func (*QStyleOptionSizeGrip) QStyleOptionSizeGrip_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionSizeGrip) QStyleOptionSizeGrip_PTR() *QStyleOptionSizeGrip

func (*QStyleOptionSizeGrip) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionSizeGrip) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip_ITF

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip_ITF interface {
	QStyleOptionComplex_ITF
	QStyleOptionSizeGrip_PTR() *QStyleOptionSizeGrip
}

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionSizeGrip__Type QStyleOptionSizeGrip__StyleOptionType = 983047

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionSizeGrip__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionSizeGrip__Version QStyleOptionSizeGrip__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionSlider

type QStyleOptionSlider struct {
	*QStyleOptionComplex
}

func NewQStyleOptionSlider

func NewQStyleOptionSlider() *QStyleOptionSlider

func NewQStyleOptionSliderFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionSliderFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionSlider

func NewQStyleOptionSlider_1

func NewQStyleOptionSlider_1(version int) *QStyleOptionSlider

func (*QStyleOptionSlider) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionSlider) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionSlider) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionSlider) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionSlider

func (*QStyleOptionSlider) QStyleOptionSlider_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionSlider) QStyleOptionSlider_PTR() *QStyleOptionSlider

func (*QStyleOptionSlider) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionSlider) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionSlider_ITF

type QStyleOptionSlider_ITF interface {
	QStyleOptionComplex_ITF
	QStyleOptionSlider_PTR() *QStyleOptionSlider
}

type QStyleOptionSlider__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionSlider__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionSlider__Type QStyleOptionSlider__StyleOptionType = 983041

type QStyleOptionSlider__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionSlider__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionSlider__Version QStyleOptionSlider__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionSpinBox

type QStyleOptionSpinBox struct {
	*QStyleOptionComplex
}

func NewQStyleOptionSpinBox

func NewQStyleOptionSpinBox() *QStyleOptionSpinBox

func NewQStyleOptionSpinBoxFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionSpinBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionSpinBox

func NewQStyleOptionSpinBox_1

func NewQStyleOptionSpinBox_1(version int) *QStyleOptionSpinBox

func (*QStyleOptionSpinBox) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionSpinBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionSpinBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionSpinBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionSpinBox

func (*QStyleOptionSpinBox) QStyleOptionSpinBox_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionSpinBox) QStyleOptionSpinBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionSpinBox

func (*QStyleOptionSpinBox) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionSpinBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionSpinBox_ITF

type QStyleOptionSpinBox_ITF interface {
	QStyleOptionComplex_ITF
	QStyleOptionSpinBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionSpinBox
}

type QStyleOptionSpinBox__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionSpinBox__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionSpinBox__Type QStyleOptionSpinBox__StyleOptionType = 983042

type QStyleOptionSpinBox__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionSpinBox__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionSpinBox__Version QStyleOptionSpinBox__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionTab

type QStyleOptionTab struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionTab

func NewQStyleOptionTab() *QStyleOptionTab

func NewQStyleOptionTabFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionTabFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionTab

func NewQStyleOptionTab_1

func NewQStyleOptionTab_1(version int) *QStyleOptionTab

func (*QStyleOptionTab) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTab) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionTab) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionTab) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionTab

func (*QStyleOptionTab) QStyleOptionTab_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionTab) QStyleOptionTab_PTR() *QStyleOptionTab

func (*QStyleOptionTab) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTab) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionTabBarBase

func NewQStyleOptionTabBarBase() *QStyleOptionTabBarBase

func NewQStyleOptionTabBarBaseFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionTabBarBaseFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionTabBarBase

func NewQStyleOptionTabBarBase_1

func NewQStyleOptionTabBarBase_1(version int) *QStyleOptionTabBarBase

func (*QStyleOptionTabBarBase) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTabBarBase) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionTabBarBase) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionTabBarBase) QStyleOptionTabBarBase_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionTabBarBase) QStyleOptionTabBarBase_PTR() *QStyleOptionTabBarBase

func (*QStyleOptionTabBarBase) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTabBarBase) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase_ITF

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionTabBarBase_PTR() *QStyleOptionTabBarBase
}

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionTabBarBase__Type QStyleOptionTabBarBase__StyleOptionType = 12

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionTabBarBase__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionTabBarBase__Version QStyleOptionTabBarBase__StyleOptionVersion = 2

1

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame

func NewQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame() *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame

func NewQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrameFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame

func NewQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_1

func NewQStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_1(version int) *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame

func (*QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame) QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame) QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_PTR() *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame

func (*QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_ITF

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_PTR() *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame
}

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__Type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__StyleOptionType = 11

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__Version QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame__StyleOptionVersion = 2

1

type QStyleOptionTab_ITF

type QStyleOptionTab_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionTab_PTR() *QStyleOptionTab
}

type QStyleOptionTab__CornerWidget

type QStyleOptionTab__CornerWidget = int
const QStyleOptionTab__LeftCornerWidget QStyleOptionTab__CornerWidget = 1
const QStyleOptionTab__NoCornerWidgets QStyleOptionTab__CornerWidget = 0
const QStyleOptionTab__RightCornerWidget QStyleOptionTab__CornerWidget = 2

type QStyleOptionTab__SelectedPosition

type QStyleOptionTab__SelectedPosition = int
const QStyleOptionTab__NextIsSelected QStyleOptionTab__SelectedPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionTab__NotAdjacent QStyleOptionTab__SelectedPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionTab__PreviousIsSelected QStyleOptionTab__SelectedPosition = 2

type QStyleOptionTab__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionTab__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionTab__Type QStyleOptionTab__StyleOptionType = 3

type QStyleOptionTab__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionTab__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionTab__Version QStyleOptionTab__StyleOptionVersion = 3

1

type QStyleOptionTab__TabFeature

type QStyleOptionTab__TabFeature = int
const QStyleOptionTab__HasFrame QStyleOptionTab__TabFeature = 1
const QStyleOptionTab__None QStyleOptionTab__TabFeature = 0

type QStyleOptionTab__TabPosition

type QStyleOptionTab__TabPosition = int
const QStyleOptionTab__Beginning QStyleOptionTab__TabPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionTab__End QStyleOptionTab__TabPosition = 2
const QStyleOptionTab__Middle QStyleOptionTab__TabPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionTab__OnlyOneTab QStyleOptionTab__TabPosition = 3

type QStyleOptionTitleBar

type QStyleOptionTitleBar struct {
	*QStyleOptionComplex
}

func NewQStyleOptionTitleBar

func NewQStyleOptionTitleBar() *QStyleOptionTitleBar

func NewQStyleOptionTitleBarFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionTitleBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionTitleBar

func NewQStyleOptionTitleBar_1

func NewQStyleOptionTitleBar_1(version int) *QStyleOptionTitleBar

func (*QStyleOptionTitleBar) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTitleBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionTitleBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionTitleBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionTitleBar

func (*QStyleOptionTitleBar) QStyleOptionTitleBar_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionTitleBar) QStyleOptionTitleBar_PTR() *QStyleOptionTitleBar

func (*QStyleOptionTitleBar) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionTitleBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionTitleBar_ITF

type QStyleOptionTitleBar_ITF interface {
	QStyleOptionComplex_ITF
	QStyleOptionTitleBar_PTR() *QStyleOptionTitleBar
}

type QStyleOptionTitleBar__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionTitleBar__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionTitleBar__Type QStyleOptionTitleBar__StyleOptionType = 983045

type QStyleOptionTitleBar__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionTitleBar__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionTitleBar__Version QStyleOptionTitleBar__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionToolBar

type QStyleOptionToolBar struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionToolBar

func NewQStyleOptionToolBar() *QStyleOptionToolBar

func NewQStyleOptionToolBarFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionToolBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionToolBar

func NewQStyleOptionToolBar_1

func NewQStyleOptionToolBar_1(version int) *QStyleOptionToolBar

func (*QStyleOptionToolBar) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionToolBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionToolBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionToolBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionToolBar

func (*QStyleOptionToolBar) QStyleOptionToolBar_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionToolBar) QStyleOptionToolBar_PTR() *QStyleOptionToolBar

func (*QStyleOptionToolBar) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionToolBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionToolBar_ITF

type QStyleOptionToolBar_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionToolBar_PTR() *QStyleOptionToolBar
}

type QStyleOptionToolBar__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionToolBar__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionToolBar__Type QStyleOptionToolBar__StyleOptionType = 14

type QStyleOptionToolBar__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionToolBar__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionToolBar__Version QStyleOptionToolBar__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarFeature

type QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarFeature = int
const QStyleOptionToolBar__Movable QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarFeature = 1
const QStyleOptionToolBar__None QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarFeature = 0

type QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarPosition

type QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarPosition = int
const QStyleOptionToolBar__Beginning QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionToolBar__End QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarPosition = 2
const QStyleOptionToolBar__Middle QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionToolBar__OnlyOne QStyleOptionToolBar__ToolBarPosition = 3

type QStyleOptionToolBox

type QStyleOptionToolBox struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionToolBox

func NewQStyleOptionToolBox() *QStyleOptionToolBox

func NewQStyleOptionToolBoxFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionToolBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionToolBox

func NewQStyleOptionToolBox_1

func NewQStyleOptionToolBox_1(version int) *QStyleOptionToolBox

func (*QStyleOptionToolBox) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionToolBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionToolBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionToolBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionToolBox

func (*QStyleOptionToolBox) QStyleOptionToolBox_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionToolBox) QStyleOptionToolBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionToolBox

func (*QStyleOptionToolBox) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionToolBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionToolBox_ITF

type QStyleOptionToolBox_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionToolBox_PTR() *QStyleOptionToolBox
}

type QStyleOptionToolBox__SelectedPosition

type QStyleOptionToolBox__SelectedPosition = int
const QStyleOptionToolBox__NextIsSelected QStyleOptionToolBox__SelectedPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionToolBox__NotAdjacent QStyleOptionToolBox__SelectedPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionToolBox__PreviousIsSelected QStyleOptionToolBox__SelectedPosition = 2

type QStyleOptionToolBox__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionToolBox__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionToolBox__Type QStyleOptionToolBox__StyleOptionType = 7

type QStyleOptionToolBox__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionToolBox__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionToolBox__Version QStyleOptionToolBox__StyleOptionVersion = 2

1

type QStyleOptionToolBox__TabPosition

type QStyleOptionToolBox__TabPosition = int
const QStyleOptionToolBox__Beginning QStyleOptionToolBox__TabPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionToolBox__End QStyleOptionToolBox__TabPosition = 2
const QStyleOptionToolBox__Middle QStyleOptionToolBox__TabPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionToolBox__OnlyOneTab QStyleOptionToolBox__TabPosition = 3

type QStyleOptionToolButton

type QStyleOptionToolButton struct {
	*QStyleOptionComplex
}

func NewQStyleOptionToolButton

func NewQStyleOptionToolButton() *QStyleOptionToolButton

func NewQStyleOptionToolButtonFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionToolButtonFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionToolButton

func NewQStyleOptionToolButton_1

func NewQStyleOptionToolButton_1(version int) *QStyleOptionToolButton

func (*QStyleOptionToolButton) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionToolButton) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionToolButton) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionToolButton) QStyleOptionToolButton_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionToolButton) QStyleOptionToolButton_PTR() *QStyleOptionToolButton

func (*QStyleOptionToolButton) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionToolButton) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionToolButton_ITF

type QStyleOptionToolButton_ITF interface {
	QStyleOptionComplex_ITF
	QStyleOptionToolButton_PTR() *QStyleOptionToolButton
}

type QStyleOptionToolButton__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionToolButton__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionToolButton__Type QStyleOptionToolButton__StyleOptionType = 983043

type QStyleOptionToolButton__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionToolButton__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionToolButton__Version QStyleOptionToolButton__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature

type QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature = int
const QStyleOptionToolButton__Arrow QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature = 1
const QStyleOptionToolButton__HasMenu QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature = 16
const QStyleOptionToolButton__Menu QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature = 4
const QStyleOptionToolButton__MenuButtonPopup QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature = 4
const QStyleOptionToolButton__None QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature = 0
const QStyleOptionToolButton__PopupDelay QStyleOptionToolButton__ToolButtonFeature = 8

type QStyleOptionViewItem

type QStyleOptionViewItem struct {
	*QStyleOption
}

func NewQStyleOptionViewItem

func NewQStyleOptionViewItem() *QStyleOptionViewItem

func NewQStyleOptionViewItemFromPointer

func NewQStyleOptionViewItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionViewItem

func NewQStyleOptionViewItem_1

func NewQStyleOptionViewItem_1(version int) *QStyleOptionViewItem

func (*QStyleOptionViewItem) GetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionViewItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyleOptionViewItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyleOptionViewItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyleOptionViewItem

func (*QStyleOptionViewItem) QStyleOptionViewItem_PTR

func (ptr *QStyleOptionViewItem) QStyleOptionViewItem_PTR() *QStyleOptionViewItem

func (*QStyleOptionViewItem) SetCthis

func (this *QStyleOptionViewItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF

type QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_ITF
	QStyleOptionViewItem_PTR() *QStyleOptionViewItem
}

type QStyleOptionViewItem__Position

type QStyleOptionViewItem__Position = int
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Bottom QStyleOptionViewItem__Position = 3
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Left QStyleOptionViewItem__Position = 0
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Right QStyleOptionViewItem__Position = 1
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Top QStyleOptionViewItem__Position = 2

type QStyleOptionViewItem__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOptionViewItem__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOptionViewItem__Type QStyleOptionViewItem__StyleOptionType = 10

type QStyleOptionViewItem__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOptionViewItem__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOptionViewItem__Version QStyleOptionViewItem__StyleOptionVersion = 4

1

type QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature

type QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature = int
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Alternate QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature = 2
const QStyleOptionViewItem__HasCheckIndicator QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature = 4
const QStyleOptionViewItem__HasDecoration QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature = 16
const QStyleOptionViewItem__HasDisplay QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature = 8
const QStyleOptionViewItem__None QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature = 0
const QStyleOptionViewItem__WrapText QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemFeature = 1

type QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemPosition

type QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemPosition = int
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Beginning QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemPosition = 1
const QStyleOptionViewItem__End QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemPosition = 3
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Invalid QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemPosition = 0
const QStyleOptionViewItem__Middle QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemPosition = 2
const QStyleOptionViewItem__OnlyOne QStyleOptionViewItem__ViewItemPosition = 4

type QStyleOption_ITF

type QStyleOption_ITF interface {
	QStyleOption_PTR() *QStyleOption
}

type QStyleOption__OptionType

type QStyleOption__OptionType = int

This enum is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

QStyleOption::SO_ComboBox?QStyleOptionComboBox QStyleOption::SO_GroupBox?QStyleOptionGroupBox QStyleOption::SO_SizeGrip?QStyleOptionSizeGrip QStyleOption::SO_Slider?QStyleOptionSlider QStyleOption::SO_SpinBox?QStyleOptionSpinBox QStyleOption::SO_TitleBar?QStyleOptionTitleBar QStyleOption::SO_ToolButton?QStyleOptionToolButton

The following values are used for custom controls:

See also type.

const QStyleOption__SO_Button QStyleOption__OptionType = 2

QStyleOptionButton

const QStyleOption__SO_ComboBox QStyleOption__OptionType = 983044
const QStyleOption__SO_Complex QStyleOption__OptionType = 983040
const QStyleOption__SO_ComplexCustomBase QStyleOption__OptionType = 251658240
const QStyleOption__SO_CustomBase QStyleOption__OptionType = 3840
const QStyleOption__SO_Default QStyleOption__OptionType = 0

QStyleOption

const QStyleOption__SO_DockWidget QStyleOption__OptionType = 9

QStyleOptionDockWidget

const QStyleOption__SO_FocusRect QStyleOption__OptionType = 1

QStyleOptionFocusRect

const QStyleOption__SO_Frame QStyleOption__OptionType = 5

QStyleOptionFrame

const QStyleOption__SO_GraphicsItem QStyleOption__OptionType = 15
const QStyleOption__SO_GroupBox QStyleOption__OptionType = 983046
const QStyleOption__SO_Header QStyleOption__OptionType = 8

QStyleOptionHeader

const QStyleOption__SO_MenuItem QStyleOption__OptionType = 4

QStyleOptionMenuItem

const QStyleOption__SO_ProgressBar QStyleOption__OptionType = 6

QStyleOptionProgressBar

const QStyleOption__SO_RubberBand QStyleOption__OptionType = 13
const QStyleOption__SO_SizeGrip QStyleOption__OptionType = 983047
const QStyleOption__SO_Slider QStyleOption__OptionType = 983041
const QStyleOption__SO_SpinBox QStyleOption__OptionType = 983042
const QStyleOption__SO_Tab QStyleOption__OptionType = 3

QStyleOptionTab

const QStyleOption__SO_TabBarBase QStyleOption__OptionType = 12
const QStyleOption__SO_TabWidgetFrame QStyleOption__OptionType = 11
const QStyleOption__SO_TitleBar QStyleOption__OptionType = 983045
const QStyleOption__SO_ToolBar QStyleOption__OptionType = 14
const QStyleOption__SO_ToolBox QStyleOption__OptionType = 7

QStyleOptionToolBox

const QStyleOption__SO_ToolButton QStyleOption__OptionType = 983043
const QStyleOption__SO_ViewItem QStyleOption__OptionType = 10

type QStyleOption__StyleOptionType

type QStyleOption__StyleOptionType = int

This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

QStyleOption::TypeSO_DefaultThe type of style option provided (SO_Default for this class).

The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.

See also StyleOptionVersion.

const QStyleOption__Type QStyleOption__StyleOptionType = 0

type QStyleOption__StyleOptionVersion

type QStyleOption__StyleOptionVersion = int

This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.

The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.

See also StyleOptionType.

const QStyleOption__Version QStyleOption__StyleOptionVersion = 1

1

type QStylePainter

type QStylePainter struct {
	*qtgui.QPainter
}

func NewQStylePainter

func NewQStylePainter() *QStylePainter

Constructs a QStylePainter.

func NewQStylePainterFromPointer

func NewQStylePainterFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStylePainter

func NewQStylePainter_1

func NewQStylePainter_1(w QWidget_ITF) *QStylePainter

Constructs a QStylePainter.

func NewQStylePainter_2

func NewQStylePainter_2(pd qtgui.QPaintDevice_ITF, w QWidget_ITF) *QStylePainter

Constructs a QStylePainter.

func (*QStylePainter) Begin

func (this *QStylePainter) Begin(w QWidget_ITF) bool

Begin painting operations on the specified widget. Returns true if the painter is ready to use; otherwise returns false.

This is automatically called by the constructor that takes a QWidget.

func (*QStylePainter) Begin_1

func (this *QStylePainter) Begin_1(pd qtgui.QPaintDevice_ITF, w QWidget_ITF) bool

Begin painting operations on the specified widget. Returns true if the painter is ready to use; otherwise returns false.

This is automatically called by the constructor that takes a QWidget.

func (*QStylePainter) DrawComplexControl

func (this *QStylePainter) DrawComplexControl(cc int, opt QStyleOptionComplex_ITF)

Use the widget's style to draw a complex control cc specified by the QStyleOptionComplex option.

See also QStyle::drawComplexControl().

func (*QStylePainter) DrawControl

func (this *QStylePainter) DrawControl(ce int, opt QStyleOption_ITF)

Use the widget's style to draw a control element ce specified by QStyleOption option.

See also QStyle::drawControl().

func (*QStylePainter) DrawItemPixmap

func (this *QStylePainter) DrawItemPixmap(r qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

Draws the pixmap in rectangle rect. The pixmap is aligned according to flags.

See also QStyle::drawItemPixmap() and Qt::Alignment.

func (*QStylePainter) DrawItemText

func (this *QStylePainter) DrawItemText(r qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, enabled bool, text string, textRole int)

Draws the text in rectangle rect and palette pal. The text is aligned and wrapped according to flags.

The pen color is specified with textRole. The enabled bool indicates whether or not the item is enabled; when reimplementing this bool should influence how the item is drawn.

See also QStyle::drawItemText() and Qt::Alignment.

func (*QStylePainter) DrawItemText__

func (this *QStylePainter) DrawItemText__(r qtcore.QRect_ITF, flags int, pal qtgui.QPalette_ITF, enabled bool, text string)

Draws the text in rectangle rect and palette pal. The text is aligned and wrapped according to flags.

The pen color is specified with textRole. The enabled bool indicates whether or not the item is enabled; when reimplementing this bool should influence how the item is drawn.

See also QStyle::drawItemText() and Qt::Alignment.

func (*QStylePainter) DrawPrimitive

func (this *QStylePainter) DrawPrimitive(pe int, opt QStyleOption_ITF)

Use the widget's style to draw a primitive element pe specified by QStyleOption option.

See also QStyle::drawPrimitive().

func (*QStylePainter) GetCthis

func (this *QStylePainter) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStylePainter) NewFromPointer

func (*QStylePainter) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStylePainter

func (*QStylePainter) QStylePainter_PTR

func (ptr *QStylePainter) QStylePainter_PTR() *QStylePainter

func (*QStylePainter) SetCthis

func (this *QStylePainter) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QStylePainter) Style

func (this *QStylePainter) Style() *QStyle

Return the current style used by the QStylePainter.

type QStylePainter_ITF

type QStylePainter_ITF interface {
	qtgui.QPainter_ITF
	QStylePainter_PTR() *QStylePainter
}

type QStylePlugin

type QStylePlugin struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQStylePlugin

func NewQStylePlugin(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QStylePlugin

Constructs a style plugin with the given parent.

Note that this constructor is invoked automatically by the moc generated code that exports the plugin, so there is no need for calling it explicitly.

func NewQStylePluginFromPointer

func NewQStylePluginFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStylePlugin

func NewQStylePlugin__

func NewQStylePlugin__() *QStylePlugin

Constructs a style plugin with the given parent.

Note that this constructor is invoked automatically by the moc generated code that exports the plugin, so there is no need for calling it explicitly.

func (*QStylePlugin) Create

func (this *QStylePlugin) Create(key string) *QStyle

Creates and returns a QStyle object for the given style key. If a plugin cannot create a style, it should return 0 instead.

The style key is usually the class name of the required style. Note that the keys are case insensitive. For example:

QStyle *MyStylePlugin::create(const QString &key)
{
    QString lcKey = key.toLower();
    if (lcKey == "rocket") {
        return new RocketStyle;
    } else if (lcKey == "starbuster") {
        return new StarBusterStyle;
    }
    return 0;
}

func (*QStylePlugin) GetCthis

func (this *QStylePlugin) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStylePlugin) MetaObject

func (this *QStylePlugin) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QStylePlugin) NewFromPointer

func (*QStylePlugin) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStylePlugin

func (*QStylePlugin) QStylePlugin_PTR

func (ptr *QStylePlugin) QStylePlugin_PTR() *QStylePlugin

func (*QStylePlugin) SetCthis

func (this *QStylePlugin) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QStylePlugin_ITF

type QStylePlugin_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QStylePlugin_PTR() *QStylePlugin
}

type QStyle_ITF

type QStyle_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QStyle_PTR() *QStyle
}

type QStyle__ComplexControl

type QStyle__ComplexControl = int

This enum describes the available complex controls. Complex controls have different behavior depending upon where the user clicks on them or which keys are pressed.

See also SubControl and drawComplexControl().

const QStyle__CC_ComboBox QStyle__ComplexControl = 1

A combobox, like QComboBox.

const QStyle__CC_CustomBase QStyle__ComplexControl = -268435456
const QStyle__CC_Dial QStyle__ComplexControl = 6

A dial, like QDial.

const QStyle__CC_GroupBox QStyle__ComplexControl = 7

A group box, like QGroupBox.

const QStyle__CC_MdiControls QStyle__ComplexControl = 8

The minimize, close, and normal button in the menu bar for a maximized MDI subwindow.

const QStyle__CC_ScrollBar QStyle__ComplexControl = 2

A scroll bar, like QScrollBar.

const QStyle__CC_Slider QStyle__ComplexControl = 3

A slider, like QSlider.

const QStyle__CC_SpinBox QStyle__ComplexControl = 0

A spinbox, like QSpinBox.

const QStyle__CC_TitleBar QStyle__ComplexControl = 5

A Title bar, like those used in QMdiSubWindow.

const QStyle__CC_ToolButton QStyle__ComplexControl = 4

A tool button, like QToolButton.

type QStyle__ContentsType

type QStyle__ContentsType = int

This enum describes the available contents types. These are used to calculate sizes for the contents of various widgets.

See also sizeFromContents().

const QStyle__CT_CheckBox QStyle__ContentsType = 1

A check box, like QCheckBox.

const QStyle__CT_ComboBox QStyle__ContentsType = 4

A combo box, like QComboBox.

const QStyle__CT_CustomBase QStyle__ContentsType = -268435456
const QStyle__CT_DialogButtons QStyle__ContentsType = 18
const QStyle__CT_GroupBox QStyle__ContentsType = 20
const QStyle__CT_HeaderSection QStyle__ContentsType = 19
const QStyle__CT_ItemViewItem QStyle__ContentsType = 22
const QStyle__CT_LineEdit QStyle__ContentsType = 14
const QStyle__CT_MdiControls QStyle__ContentsType = 21
const QStyle__CT_Menu QStyle__ContentsType = 10
const QStyle__CT_MenuBar QStyle__ContentsType = 9

A menu bar, like QMenuBar.

const QStyle__CT_MenuBarItem QStyle__ContentsType = 8

A menu bar item, like the buttons in a QMenuBar.

const QStyle__CT_MenuItem QStyle__ContentsType = 7

A menu item, like QMenuItem.

const QStyle__CT_ProgressBar QStyle__ContentsType = 6

A progress bar, like QProgressBar.

const QStyle__CT_PushButton QStyle__ContentsType = 0

A push button, like QPushButton.

const QStyle__CT_RadioButton QStyle__ContentsType = 2

A radio button, like QRadioButton.

const QStyle__CT_ScrollBar QStyle__ContentsType = 13
const QStyle__CT_SizeGrip QStyle__ContentsType = 16
const QStyle__CT_Slider QStyle__ContentsType = 12
const QStyle__CT_SpinBox QStyle__ContentsType = 15
const QStyle__CT_Splitter QStyle__ContentsType = 5

A splitter, like QSplitter.

const QStyle__CT_TabBarTab QStyle__ContentsType = 11
const QStyle__CT_TabWidget QStyle__ContentsType = 17
const QStyle__CT_ToolButton QStyle__ContentsType = 3

A tool button, like QToolButton.

type QStyle__ControlElement

type QStyle__ControlElement = int

This enum represents a control element. A control element is a part of a widget that performs some action or displays information to the user.

See also drawControl().

const QStyle__CE_CheckBox QStyle__ControlElement = 3

A QCheckBox, draws a PE_IndicatorCheckBox, a CE_CheckBoxLabel and a PE_FrameFocusRect.

const QStyle__CE_CheckBoxLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 4

The label (text or pixmap) of a QCheckBox.

const QStyle__CE_ColumnViewGrip QStyle__ControlElement = 44
const QStyle__CE_ComboBoxLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 39
const QStyle__CE_CustomBase QStyle__ControlElement = -268435456
const QStyle__CE_DockWidgetTitle QStyle__ControlElement = 30
const QStyle__CE_FocusFrame QStyle__ControlElement = 38
const QStyle__CE_Header QStyle__ControlElement = 23
const QStyle__CE_HeaderEmptyArea QStyle__ControlElement = 43
const QStyle__CE_HeaderLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 25
const QStyle__CE_HeaderSection QStyle__ControlElement = 24
const QStyle__CE_ItemViewItem QStyle__ControlElement = 45
const QStyle__CE_MenuBarEmptyArea QStyle__ControlElement = 21
const QStyle__CE_MenuBarItem QStyle__ControlElement = 20
const QStyle__CE_MenuEmptyArea QStyle__ControlElement = 19
const QStyle__CE_MenuHMargin QStyle__ControlElement = 17
const QStyle__CE_MenuItem QStyle__ControlElement = 14
const QStyle__CE_MenuScroller QStyle__ControlElement = 15
const QStyle__CE_MenuTearoff QStyle__ControlElement = 18
const QStyle__CE_MenuVMargin QStyle__ControlElement = 16
const QStyle__CE_ProgressBar QStyle__ControlElement = 10
const QStyle__CE_ProgressBarContents QStyle__ControlElement = 12
const QStyle__CE_ProgressBarGroove QStyle__ControlElement = 11
const QStyle__CE_ProgressBarLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 13
const QStyle__CE_PushButton QStyle__ControlElement = 0

A QPushButton, draws CE_PushButtonBevel, CE_PushButtonLabel and PE_FrameFocusRect.

const QStyle__CE_PushButtonBevel QStyle__ControlElement = 1

The bevel and default indicator of a QPushButton.

const QStyle__CE_PushButtonLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 2

The label (an icon with text or pixmap) of a QPushButton.

const QStyle__CE_RadioButton QStyle__ControlElement = 5

A QRadioButton, draws a PE_IndicatorRadioButton, a CE_RadioButtonLabel and a PE_FrameFocusRect.

const QStyle__CE_RadioButtonLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 6

The label (text or pixmap) of a QRadioButton.

const QStyle__CE_RubberBand QStyle__ControlElement = 29
const QStyle__CE_ScrollBarAddLine QStyle__ControlElement = 31
const QStyle__CE_ScrollBarAddPage QStyle__ControlElement = 33
const QStyle__CE_ScrollBarFirst QStyle__ControlElement = 36
const QStyle__CE_ScrollBarLast QStyle__ControlElement = 37
const QStyle__CE_ScrollBarSlider QStyle__ControlElement = 35
const QStyle__CE_ScrollBarSubLine QStyle__ControlElement = 32
const QStyle__CE_ScrollBarSubPage QStyle__ControlElement = 34
const QStyle__CE_ShapedFrame QStyle__ControlElement = 46
const QStyle__CE_SizeGrip QStyle__ControlElement = 27
const QStyle__CE_Splitter QStyle__ControlElement = 28
const QStyle__CE_TabBarTab QStyle__ControlElement = 7

The tab and label within a QTabBar.

const QStyle__CE_TabBarTabLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 9

The label within a tab.

const QStyle__CE_TabBarTabShape QStyle__ControlElement = 8

The tab shape within a tab bar.

const QStyle__CE_ToolBar QStyle__ControlElement = 40
const QStyle__CE_ToolBoxTab QStyle__ControlElement = 26
const QStyle__CE_ToolBoxTabLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 42
const QStyle__CE_ToolBoxTabShape QStyle__ControlElement = 41
const QStyle__CE_ToolButtonLabel QStyle__ControlElement = 22

type QStyle__PixelMetric

type QStyle__PixelMetric = int

This enum describes the various available pixel metrics. A pixel metric is a style dependent size represented by a single pixel value.

QStyle::PM_DockWidgetTitleBarButtonMargin?Amount of whitespace between dock widget's title bar button labels and the frame. QStyle::PM_MDIFrameWidthPM_MdiSubWindowFrameWidthObsolete. Use PM_MdiSubWindowFrameWidth instead. QStyle::PM_MDIMinimizedWidthPM_MdiSubWindowMinimizedWidthObsolete. Use PM_MdiSubWindowMinimizedWidth instead. QStyle::PM_MdiSubWindowMinimizedWidth?Width of a minimized MDI window. QStyle::PM_LayoutLeftMargin?Default left margin for a QLayout. QStyle::PM_LayoutTopMargin?Default top margin for a QLayout. QStyle::PM_LayoutRightMargin?Default right margin for a QLayout. QStyle::PM_LayoutBottomMargin?Default bottom margin for a QLayout. QStyle::PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing?Default horizontal spacing for a QLayout. QStyle::PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing?Default vertical spacing for a QLayout. QStyle::PM_DockWidgetTitleMargin?Margin of the dock window title. QStyle::PM_ToolBarFrameWidth?Width of the frame around toolbars. QStyle::PM_ToolBarHandleExtent?Width of a toolbar handle in a horizontal toolbar and the height of the handle in a vertical toolbar. QStyle::PM_ToolBarItemMargin?Spacing between the toolbar frame and the items. QStyle::PM_ToolBarItemSpacing?Spacing between toolbar items. QStyle::PM_ToolBarSeparatorExtent?Width of a toolbar separator in a horizontal toolbar and the height of a separator in a vertical toolbar. QStyle::PM_ToolBarExtensionExtent?Width of a toolbar extension button in a horizontal toolbar and the height of the button in a vertical toolbar. QStyle::PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth? QStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal?Horizontal pixel shift when a tab is selected. QStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical?Vertical pixel shift when a tab is selected. QStyle::PM_HeaderMarkSize?The size of the sort indicator in a header. QStyle::PM_HeaderGripMargin?The size of the resize grip in a header. QStyle::PM_HeaderMargin?The size of the margin between the sort indicator and the text. QStyle::PM_SpinBoxSliderHeight?The height of the optional spin box slider. QStyle::PM_ToolBarIconSize?Default tool bar icon size QStyle::PM_SmallIconSize?Default small icon size QStyle::PM_LargeIconSize?Default large icon size QStyle::PM_FocusFrameHMargin?Horizontal margin that the focus frame will outset the widget by. QStyle::PM_FocusFrameVMargin?Vertical margin that the focus frame will outset the widget by. QStyle::PM_IconViewIconSize?The default size for icons in an icon view. QStyle::PM_ListViewIconSize?The default size for icons in a list view. QStyle::PM_ToolTipLabelFrameWidth?The frame width for a tool tip label. QStyle::PM_CheckBoxLabelSpacing?The spacing between a check box indicator and its label. QStyle::PM_RadioButtonLabelSpacing?The spacing between a radio button indicator and its label. QStyle::PM_TabBarIconSize?The default icon size for a tab bar. QStyle::PM_SizeGripSize?The size of a size grip. QStyle::PM_MessageBoxIconSize?The size of the standard icons in a message box QStyle::PM_ButtonIconSize?The default size of button icons QStyle::PM_TextCursorWidth?The width of the cursor in a line edit or text edit QStyle::PM_TabBar_ScrollButtonOverlap?The distance between the left and right buttons in a tab bar. QStyle::PM_TabCloseIndicatorWidth?The default width of a close button on a tab in a tab bar. QStyle::PM_TabCloseIndicatorHeight?The default height of a close button on a tab in a tab bar. QStyle::PM_ScrollView_ScrollBarSpacing?Distance between frame and scrollbar with SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents set. QStyle::PM_ScrollView_ScrollBarOverlap?Overlap between scroll bars and scroll content QStyle::PM_SubMenuOverlap?The horizontal overlap between a submenu and its parent.

The following values are obsolete:

QStyle::PM_DefaultTopLevelMargin?Use PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin instead. QStyle::PM_DefaultChildMargin?Use PM_LayoutLeftMargin, PM_LayoutTopMargin, PM_LayoutRightMargin, and PM_LayoutBottomMargin instead. QStyle::PM_DefaultLayoutSpacing?Use PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing and PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing instead.

See also pixelMetric().

const QStyle__PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator QStyle__PixelMetric = 1

Width of the default-button indicator frame.

const QStyle__PM_ButtonIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 75
const QStyle__PM_ButtonMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 0

Amount of whitespace between push button labels and the frame.

const QStyle__PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal QStyle__PixelMetric = 3

Horizontal contents shift of a button when the button is down.

const QStyle__PM_ButtonShiftVertical QStyle__PixelMetric = 4

Vertical contents shift of a button when the button is down.

const QStyle__PM_CheckBoxLabelSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 70
const QStyle__PM_ComboBoxFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 7

Frame width of a combo box, defaults to PM_DefaultFrameWidth.

const QStyle__PM_CustomBase QStyle__PixelMetric = -268435456
const QStyle__PM_DefaultChildMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 60
const QStyle__PM_DefaultFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 5
const QStyle__PM_DefaultLayoutSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 61
const QStyle__PM_DefaultTopLevelMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 59
const QStyle__PM_DialogButtonsButtonHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 43
const QStyle__PM_DialogButtonsButtonWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 42
const QStyle__PM_DialogButtonsSeparator QStyle__PixelMetric = 41
const QStyle__PM_DockWidgetFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 18
const QStyle__PM_DockWidgetHandleExtent QStyle__PixelMetric = 17
const QStyle__PM_DockWidgetSeparatorExtent QStyle__PixelMetric = 16
const QStyle__PM_DockWidgetTitleBarButtonMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 76
const QStyle__PM_DockWidgetTitleMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 73
const QStyle__PM_ExclusiveIndicatorHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 40
const QStyle__PM_ExclusiveIndicatorWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 39
const QStyle__PM_FocusFrameHMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 68
const QStyle__PM_FocusFrameVMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 67
const QStyle__PM_HeaderDefaultSectionSizeHorizontal QStyle__PixelMetric = 92
const QStyle__PM_HeaderDefaultSectionSizeVertical QStyle__PixelMetric = 93
const QStyle__PM_HeaderGripMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 48
const QStyle__PM_HeaderMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 46
const QStyle__PM_HeaderMarkSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 47
const QStyle__PM_IconViewIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 64
const QStyle__PM_IndicatorHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 38
const QStyle__PM_IndicatorWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 37
const QStyle__PM_LargeIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 66
const QStyle__PM_LayoutBottomMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 81
const QStyle__PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 82
const QStyle__PM_LayoutLeftMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 78
const QStyle__PM_LayoutRightMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 80
const QStyle__PM_LayoutTopMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 79
const QStyle__PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 83
const QStyle__PM_ListViewIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 63
const QStyle__PM_MDIFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 44
const QStyle__PM_MDIMinimizedWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 45
const QStyle__PM_MaximumDragDistance QStyle__PixelMetric = 8
const QStyle__PM_MdiSubWindowFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 44
const QStyle__PM_MdiSubWindowMinimizedWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 45
const QStyle__PM_MenuBarHMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 36
const QStyle__PM_MenuBarItemSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 34
const QStyle__PM_MenuBarPanelWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 33
const QStyle__PM_MenuBarVMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 35
const QStyle__PM_MenuButtonIndicator QStyle__PixelMetric = 2

Width of the menu button indicator proportional to the widget height.

const QStyle__PM_MenuDesktopFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 32
const QStyle__PM_MenuHMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 28
const QStyle__PM_MenuPanelWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 30
const QStyle__PM_MenuScrollerHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 27
const QStyle__PM_MenuTearoffHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 31
const QStyle__PM_MenuVMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 29
const QStyle__PM_MessageBoxIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 74
const QStyle__PM_ProgressBarChunkWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 24
const QStyle__PM_RadioButtonLabelSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 77
const QStyle__PM_ScrollBarExtent QStyle__PixelMetric = 9

Width of a vertical scroll bar and the height of a horizontal scroll bar.

const QStyle__PM_ScrollBarSliderMin QStyle__PixelMetric = 10
const QStyle__PM_ScrollView_ScrollBarOverlap QStyle__PixelMetric = 89
const QStyle__PM_ScrollView_ScrollBarSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 88
const QStyle__PM_SizeGripSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 72
const QStyle__PM_SliderControlThickness QStyle__PixelMetric = 12
const QStyle__PM_SliderLength QStyle__PixelMetric = 13
const QStyle__PM_SliderSpaceAvailable QStyle__PixelMetric = 15
const QStyle__PM_SliderThickness QStyle__PixelMetric = 11
const QStyle__PM_SliderTickmarkOffset QStyle__PixelMetric = 14
const QStyle__PM_SmallIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 65
const QStyle__PM_SpinBoxFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 6

Frame width of a spin box, defaults to PM_DefaultFrameWidth.

const QStyle__PM_SpinBoxSliderHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 58
const QStyle__PM_SplitterWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 25
const QStyle__PM_SubMenuOverlap QStyle__PixelMetric = 90
const QStyle__PM_TabBarBaseHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 22
const QStyle__PM_TabBarBaseOverlap QStyle__PixelMetric = 23
const QStyle__PM_TabBarIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 71
const QStyle__PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 51
const QStyle__PM_TabBarTabHSpace QStyle__PixelMetric = 20
const QStyle__PM_TabBarTabOverlap QStyle__PixelMetric = 19
const QStyle__PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal QStyle__PixelMetric = 49
const QStyle__PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical QStyle__PixelMetric = 50
const QStyle__PM_TabBarTabVSpace QStyle__PixelMetric = 21
const QStyle__PM_TabBar_ScrollButtonOverlap QStyle__PixelMetric = 84
const QStyle__PM_TabCloseIndicatorHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 87
const QStyle__PM_TabCloseIndicatorWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 86
const QStyle__PM_TextCursorWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 85
const QStyle__PM_TitleBarButtonIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 94
const QStyle__PM_TitleBarButtonSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 95
const QStyle__PM_TitleBarHeight QStyle__PixelMetric = 26
const QStyle__PM_ToolBarExtensionExtent QStyle__PixelMetric = 57
const QStyle__PM_ToolBarFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 52
const QStyle__PM_ToolBarHandleExtent QStyle__PixelMetric = 53
const QStyle__PM_ToolBarIconSize QStyle__PixelMetric = 62
const QStyle__PM_ToolBarItemMargin QStyle__PixelMetric = 55
const QStyle__PM_ToolBarItemSpacing QStyle__PixelMetric = 54
const QStyle__PM_ToolBarSeparatorExtent QStyle__PixelMetric = 56
const QStyle__PM_ToolTipLabelFrameWidth QStyle__PixelMetric = 69
const QStyle__PM_TreeViewIndentation QStyle__PixelMetric = 91

type QStyle__PrimitiveElement

type QStyle__PrimitiveElement = int

This enum describes the various primitive elements. A primitive element is a common GUI element, such as a checkbox indicator or button bevel.

QStyle::PE_PanelButtonCommand?Button used to initiate an action, for example, a QPushButton. QStyle::PE_PanelButtonBevel?Generic panel with a button bevel. QStyle::PE_PanelButtonTool?Panel for a Tool button, used with QToolButton. QStyle::PE_PanelLineEdit?Panel for a QLineEdit. QStyle::PE_IndicatorButtonDropDown?Indicator for a drop down button, for example, a tool button that displays a menu. QStyle::PE_IndicatorArrowUp?Generic Up arrow. QStyle::PE_IndicatorArrowDown?Generic Down arrow. QStyle::PE_IndicatorArrowRight?Generic Right arrow. QStyle::PE_IndicatorArrowLeft?Generic Left arrow. QStyle::PE_IndicatorSpinUp?Up symbol for a spin widget, for example a QSpinBox. QStyle::PE_IndicatorSpinDown?Down symbol for a spin widget. QStyle::PE_IndicatorSpinPlus?Increase symbol for a spin widget. QStyle::PE_IndicatorSpinMinus?Decrease symbol for a spin widget. QStyle::PE_IndicatorItemViewItemCheckPE_IndicatorViewItemCheckOn/off indicator for a view item. QStyle::PE_IndicatorCheckBox?On/off indicator, for example, a QCheckBox. QStyle::PE_IndicatorRadioButton?Exclusive on/off indicator, for example, a QRadioButton. QStyle::PE_IndicatorDockWidgetResizeHandle?Resize handle for dock windows. QStyle::PE_PanelMenuBar?Panel for menu bars. QStyle::PE_PanelScrollAreaCorner?Panel at the bottom-right (or bottom-left) corner of a scroll area. QStyle::PE_FrameTabWidget?Frame for tab widgets. QStyle::PE_FrameButtonBevel?Panel frame for a button bevel. QStyle::PE_FrameButtonTool?Panel frame for a tool button. QStyle::PE_IndicatorHeaderArrow?Arrow used to indicate sorting on a list or table header. QStyle::PE_FrameStatusBarItemPE_FrameStatusBarFrame for an item of a status bar; see also QStatusBar. QStyle::PE_FrameWindow?Frame around a MDI window or a docking window. QStyle::PE_IndicatorMenuCheckMark?Check mark used in a menu. QStyle::PE_IndicatorProgressChunk?Section of a progress bar indicator; see also QProgressBar. QStyle::PE_IndicatorBranch?Lines used to represent the branch of a tree in a tree view. QStyle::PE_IndicatorToolBarHandle?The handle of a toolbar. QStyle::PE_IndicatorToolBarSeparator?The separator in a toolbar. QStyle::PE_PanelToolBar?The panel for a toolbar. QStyle::PE_PanelTipLabel?The panel for a tip label. QStyle::PE_FrameTabBarBase?The frame that is drawn for a tab bar, ususally drawn for a tab bar that isn't part of a tab widget. QStyle::PE_IndicatorTabTear?Deprecated. Use PE_IndicatorTabTearLeft instead. QStyle::PE_IndicatorTabTearLeftPE_IndicatorTabTearAn indicator that a tab is partially scrolled out on the left side of the visible tab bar when there are many tabs. QStyle::PE_IndicatorTabTearRight?An indicator that a tab is partially scrolled out on the right side of the visible tab bar when there are many tabs. QStyle::PE_IndicatorColumnViewArrow?An arrow in a QColumnView. QStyle::PE_Widget?A plain QWidget. QStyle::PE_IndicatorItemViewItemDrop?An indicator that is drawn to show where an item in an item view is about to be dropped during a drag-and-drop operation in an item view. QStyle::PE_PanelItemViewItem?The background for an item in an item view. QStyle::PE_PanelItemViewRow?The background of a row in an item view. QStyle::PE_PanelStatusBar?The panel for a status bar. QStyle::PE_IndicatorTabClose?The close button on a tab bar. QStyle::PE_PanelMenu?The panel for a menu.

See also drawPrimitive().

const QStyle__PE_CustomBase QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 251658240
const QStyle__PE_Frame QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 0

Generic frame

const QStyle__PE_FrameButtonBevel QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 10
const QStyle__PE_FrameButtonTool QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 11
const QStyle__PE_FrameDefaultButton QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 1

This frame around a default button, e.g. in a dialog.

const QStyle__PE_FrameDockWidget QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 2

Panel frame for dock windows and toolbars.

const QStyle__PE_FrameFocusRect QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 3

Generic focus indicator.

const QStyle__PE_FrameGroupBox QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 4

Panel frame around group boxes.

const QStyle__PE_FrameLineEdit QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 5

Panel frame for line edits.

const QStyle__PE_FrameMenu QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 6

Frame for popup windows/menus; see also QMenu.

const QStyle__PE_FrameStatusBar QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 7

Obsolete. Use PE_FrameStatusBarItem instead.

const QStyle__PE_FrameStatusBarItem QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 7
const QStyle__PE_FrameTabBarBase QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 12
const QStyle__PE_FrameTabWidget QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 8
const QStyle__PE_FrameWindow QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 9
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorArrowDown QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 19
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorArrowLeft QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 20
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorArrowRight QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 21
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorArrowUp QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 22
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorBranch QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 23
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorButtonDropDown QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 24
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorCheckBox QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 26
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorColumnViewArrow QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 42
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorDockWidgetResizeHandle QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 27
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorHeaderArrow QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 28
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorItemViewItemCheck QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 25
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorItemViewItemDrop QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 43
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorMenuCheckMark QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 29
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorProgressChunk QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 30
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorRadioButton QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 31
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorSpinDown QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 32
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorSpinMinus QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 33
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorSpinPlus QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 34
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorSpinUp QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 35
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorTabClose QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 47
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorTabTear QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 39
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorTabTearLeft QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 39
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorTabTearRight QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 49
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorToolBarHandle QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 36
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorToolBarSeparator QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 37
const QStyle__PE_IndicatorViewItemCheck QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 25
const QStyle__PE_PanelButtonBevel QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 14
const QStyle__PE_PanelButtonCommand QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 13
const QStyle__PE_PanelButtonTool QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 15
const QStyle__PE_PanelItemViewItem QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 44
const QStyle__PE_PanelItemViewRow QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 45
const QStyle__PE_PanelLineEdit QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 18
const QStyle__PE_PanelMenu QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 48
const QStyle__PE_PanelMenuBar QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 16
const QStyle__PE_PanelScrollAreaCorner QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 40
const QStyle__PE_PanelStatusBar QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 46
const QStyle__PE_PanelTipLabel QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 38
const QStyle__PE_PanelToolBar QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 17
const QStyle__PE_Widget QStyle__PrimitiveElement = 41

type QStyle__RequestSoftwareInputPanel

type QStyle__RequestSoftwareInputPanel = int

This enum describes under what circumstances a software input panel will be requested by input capable widgets.

See also QInputMethod.

const QStyle__RSIP_OnMouseClick QStyle__RequestSoftwareInputPanel = 1

Requests an input panel if the user clicks on the widget.

const QStyle__RSIP_OnMouseClickAndAlreadyFocused QStyle__RequestSoftwareInputPanel = 0

Requests an input panel if the user clicks on the widget, but only if it is already focused.

type QStyle__StandardPixmap

type QStyle__StandardPixmap = int

This enum describes the available standard pixmaps. A standard pixmap is a pixmap that can follow some existing GUI style or guideline.

See also standardIcon().

const QStyle__SP_ArrowBack QStyle__StandardPixmap = 54
const QStyle__SP_ArrowDown QStyle__StandardPixmap = 51
const QStyle__SP_ArrowForward QStyle__StandardPixmap = 55
const QStyle__SP_ArrowLeft QStyle__StandardPixmap = 52
const QStyle__SP_ArrowRight QStyle__StandardPixmap = 53
const QStyle__SP_ArrowUp QStyle__StandardPixmap = 50
const QStyle__SP_BrowserReload QStyle__StandardPixmap = 59
const QStyle__SP_BrowserStop QStyle__StandardPixmap = 60
const QStyle__SP_CommandLink QStyle__StandardPixmap = 57
const QStyle__SP_ComputerIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 15
const QStyle__SP_CustomBase QStyle__StandardPixmap = -268435456
const QStyle__SP_DesktopIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 13
const QStyle__SP_DialogApplyButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 45
const QStyle__SP_DialogCancelButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 40
const QStyle__SP_DialogCloseButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 44
const QStyle__SP_DialogDiscardButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 47
const QStyle__SP_DialogHelpButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 41
const QStyle__SP_DialogNoButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 49
const QStyle__SP_DialogOkButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 39
const QStyle__SP_DialogOpenButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 42
const QStyle__SP_DialogResetButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 46
const QStyle__SP_DialogSaveButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 43
const QStyle__SP_DialogYesButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 48
const QStyle__SP_DirClosedIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 22
const QStyle__SP_DirHomeIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 56
const QStyle__SP_DirIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 38
const QStyle__SP_DirLinkIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 23
const QStyle__SP_DirLinkOpenIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 24
const QStyle__SP_DirOpenIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 21
const QStyle__SP_DockWidgetCloseButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 8

Close button on dock windows (see also QDockWidget).

const QStyle__SP_DriveCDIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 18
const QStyle__SP_DriveDVDIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 19
const QStyle__SP_DriveFDIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 16
const QStyle__SP_DriveHDIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 17
const QStyle__SP_DriveNetIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 20
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogBack QStyle__StandardPixmap = 37
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogContentsView QStyle__StandardPixmap = 35
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogDetailedView QStyle__StandardPixmap = 33
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogEnd QStyle__StandardPixmap = 30
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogInfoView QStyle__StandardPixmap = 34
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogListView QStyle__StandardPixmap = 36
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogNewFolder QStyle__StandardPixmap = 32
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogStart QStyle__StandardPixmap = 29
const QStyle__SP_FileDialogToParent QStyle__StandardPixmap = 31
const QStyle__SP_FileIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 25
const QStyle__SP_FileLinkIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 26
const QStyle__SP_LineEditClearButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 70
const QStyle__SP_MediaPause QStyle__StandardPixmap = 63
const QStyle__SP_MediaPlay QStyle__StandardPixmap = 61
const QStyle__SP_MediaSeekBackward QStyle__StandardPixmap = 67
const QStyle__SP_MediaSeekForward QStyle__StandardPixmap = 66
const QStyle__SP_MediaSkipBackward QStyle__StandardPixmap = 65
const QStyle__SP_MediaSkipForward QStyle__StandardPixmap = 64
const QStyle__SP_MediaStop QStyle__StandardPixmap = 62
const QStyle__SP_MediaVolume QStyle__StandardPixmap = 68
const QStyle__SP_MediaVolumeMuted QStyle__StandardPixmap = 69
const QStyle__SP_MessageBoxCritical QStyle__StandardPixmap = 11
const QStyle__SP_MessageBoxInformation QStyle__StandardPixmap = 9

The "information" icon.

const QStyle__SP_MessageBoxQuestion QStyle__StandardPixmap = 12
const QStyle__SP_MessageBoxWarning QStyle__StandardPixmap = 10
const QStyle__SP_TitleBarCloseButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 3

Close button on title bars.

const QStyle__SP_TitleBarContextHelpButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 7

The Context help button on title bars.

const QStyle__SP_TitleBarMaxButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 2

Maximize button on title bars.

const QStyle__SP_TitleBarMenuButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 0

Menu button on a title bar.

const QStyle__SP_TitleBarMinButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 1

Minimize button on title bars (e.g., in QMdiSubWindow).

const QStyle__SP_TitleBarNormalButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 4

Normal (restore) button on title bars.

const QStyle__SP_TitleBarShadeButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 5

Shade button on title bars.

const QStyle__SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 6

Unshade button on title bars.

const QStyle__SP_ToolBarHorizontalExtensionButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 27
const QStyle__SP_ToolBarVerticalExtensionButton QStyle__StandardPixmap = 28
const QStyle__SP_TrashIcon QStyle__StandardPixmap = 14
const QStyle__SP_VistaShield QStyle__StandardPixmap = 58

type QStyle__StateFlag

type QStyle__StateFlag = int
const QStyle__State_Active QStyle__StateFlag = 65536
const QStyle__State_AutoRaise QStyle__StateFlag = 4096
const QStyle__State_Bottom QStyle__StateFlag = 1024
const QStyle__State_Children QStyle__StateFlag = 524288
const QStyle__State_DownArrow QStyle__StateFlag = 64
const QStyle__State_Editing QStyle__StateFlag = 4194304
const QStyle__State_Enabled QStyle__StateFlag = 1
const QStyle__State_FocusAtBorder QStyle__StateFlag = 2048
const QStyle__State_HasFocus QStyle__StateFlag = 256
const QStyle__State_Horizontal QStyle__StateFlag = 128
const QStyle__State_Item QStyle__StateFlag = 1048576
const QStyle__State_KeyboardFocusChange QStyle__StateFlag = 8388608
const QStyle__State_Mini QStyle__StateFlag = 134217728
const QStyle__State_MouseOver QStyle__StateFlag = 8192
const QStyle__State_NoChange QStyle__StateFlag = 16
const QStyle__State_None QStyle__StateFlag = 0
const QStyle__State_Off QStyle__StateFlag = 8
const QStyle__State_On QStyle__StateFlag = 32
const QStyle__State_Open QStyle__StateFlag = 262144
const QStyle__State_Raised QStyle__StateFlag = 2
const QStyle__State_ReadOnly QStyle__StateFlag = 33554432
const QStyle__State_Selected QStyle__StateFlag = 32768
const QStyle__State_Sibling QStyle__StateFlag = 2097152
const QStyle__State_Small QStyle__StateFlag = 67108864
const QStyle__State_Sunken QStyle__StateFlag = 4
const QStyle__State_Top QStyle__StateFlag = 512
const QStyle__State_UpArrow QStyle__StateFlag = 16384
const QStyle__State_Window QStyle__StateFlag = 131072

type QStyle__StyleHint

type QStyle__StyleHint = int

This enum describes the available style hints. A style hint is a general look and/or feel hint.

QStyle::SH_ScrollBar_ContextMenu?Whether or not a scroll bar has a context menu. QStyle::SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition?A boolean value. If true, left clicking on a scroll bar causes the slider to jump to that position. If false, left clicking will behave as appropriate for each control. QStyle::SH_ScrollBar_RollBetweenButtons?A boolean value. If true, when clicking a scroll bar button (SC_ScrollBarAddLine or SC_ScrollBarSubLine) and dragging over to the opposite button (rolling) will press the new button and release the old one. When it is false, the original button is released and nothing happens (like a push button). QStyle::SH_Menu_KeyboardSearch?Typing causes a menu to be search for relevant items, otherwise only mnemnonic is considered. QStyle::SH_Menu_Scrollable?Whether popup menus must support scrolling. QStyle::SH_Menu_SloppySubMenus?Whether popup menus must support the user moving the mouse cursor to a submenu while crossing other items of the menu. This is supported on most modern desktop platforms. QStyle::SH_Menu_FillScreenWithScroll?Whether scrolling popups should fill the screen as they are scrolled. QStyle::SH_Menu_SelectionWrap?Whether popups should allow the selections to wrap, that is when selection should the next item be the first item. QStyle::SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType?Which type of mouse event should cause a list view expansion to be selected. QStyle::SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows?Whether a tab bar should suggest a size to prevent scoll arrows. QStyle::SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSliderSH_Slider_StopMouseOverSliderObsolete. Use SH_Slider_StopMouseOverSlider instead. QStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected?Whether cursor should blink when text is selected. QStyle::SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection?Whether richtext selections should extend to the full width of the document. QStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment?How to vertically align a group box's text label. QStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor?How to paint a group box's text label. QStyle::SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton?Which button gets the default status in a dialog's button widget. QStyle::SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold?Boldness of the selected page title in a QToolBox. QStyle::SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter?The Unicode character to be used for passwords. QStyle::SH_Table_GridLineColor?The RGB value of the grid for a table. QStyle::SH_UnderlineShortcut?Whether shortcuts are underlined. QStyle::SH_SpellCheckUnderlineStyle?Obsolete. Use SpellCheckUnderlineStyle hint in QPlatformTheme instead. QStyle::SH_SpinBox_AnimateButton?Animate a click when up or down is pressed in a spin box. QStyle::SH_SpinBox_KeyPressAutoRepeatRate?Auto-repeat interval for spinbox key presses. QStyle::SH_SpinBox_ClickAutoRepeatRate?Auto-repeat interval for spinbox mouse clicks. QStyle::SH_SpinBox_ClickAutoRepeatThreshold?Auto-repeat threshold for spinbox mouse clicks. QStyle::SH_DrawMenuBarSeparator?Indicates whether or not the menu bar draws separators. QStyle::SH_TitleBar_ModifyNotification?Indicates if the title bar should show a '*' for windows that are modified. QStyle::SH_Button_FocusPolicy?The default focus policy for buttons. QStyle::SH_MessageBox_UseBorderForButtonSpacing?A boolean indicating what the to use the border of the buttons (computed as half the button height) for the spacing of the button in a message box. QStyle::SH_MessageBox_CenterButtons?A boolean indicating whether the buttons in the message box should be centered or not (see QDialogButtonBox::setCentered()). QStyle::SH_MessageBox_TextInteractionFlags?A boolean indicating if the text in a message box should allow user interfactions (e.g. selection) or not. QStyle::SH_TitleBar_AutoRaise?A boolean indicating whether controls on a title bar ought to update when the mouse is over them. QStyle::SH_ToolButton_PopupDelay?An int indicating the popup delay in milliseconds for menus attached to tool buttons. QStyle::SH_FocusFrame_Mask?The mask of the focus frame. QStyle::SH_RubberBand_Mask?The mask of the rubber band. QStyle::SH_WindowFrame_Mask?The mask of the window frame. QStyle::SH_SpinControls_DisableOnBounds?Determines if the spin controls will shown as disabled when reaching the spin range boundary. QStyle::SH_Dial_BackgroundRole?Defines the style's preferred background role (as QPalette::ColorRole) for a dial widget. QStyle::SH_ComboBox_LayoutDirection?The layout direction for the combo box. By default it should be the same as indicated by the QStyleOption::direction variable. QStyle::SH_ItemView_EllipsisLocation?The location where ellipses should be added for item text that is too long to fit in an view item. QStyle::SH_ItemView_ShowDecorationSelected?When an item in an item view is selected, also highlight the branch or other decoration. QStyle::SH_ItemView_ActivateItemOnSingleClick?Emit the activated signal when the user single clicks on an item in an item in an item view. Otherwise the signal is emitted when the user double clicks on an item. QStyle::SH_Slider_AbsoluteSetButtons?Which mouse buttons cause a slider to set the value to the position clicked on. QStyle::SH_Slider_PageSetButtons?Which mouse buttons cause a slider to page step the value. QStyle::SH_TabBar_ElideMode?The default eliding style for a tab bar. QStyle::SH_DialogButtonLayout?Controls how buttons are laid out in a QDialogButtonBox, returns a QDialogButtonBox::ButtonLayout enum. QStyle::SH_WizardStyle?Controls the look and feel of a QWizard. Returns a QWizard::WizardStyle enum. QStyle::SH_FormLayoutWrapPolicy?Provides a default for how rows are wrapped in a QFormLayout. Returns a QFormLayout::RowWrapPolicy enum. QStyle::SH_FormLayoutFieldGrowthPolicy?Provides a default for how fields can grow in a QFormLayout. Returns a QFormLayout::FieldGrowthPolicy enum. QStyle::SH_FormLayoutFormAlignment?Provides a default for how a QFormLayout aligns its contents within the available space. Returns a Qt::Alignment enum. QStyle::SH_FormLayoutLabelAlignment?Provides a default for how a QFormLayout aligns labels within the available space. Returns a Qt::Alignment enum. QStyle::SH_ItemView_ArrowKeysNavigateIntoChildren?Controls whether the tree view will select the first child when it is exapanded and the right arrow key is pressed. QStyle::SH_ComboBox_PopupFrameStyle?The frame style used when drawing a combobox popup menu. QStyle::SH_DialogButtonBox_ButtonsHaveIcons?Indicates whether or not StandardButtons in QDialogButtonBox should have icons or not. QStyle::SH_ItemView_MovementWithoutUpdatingSelection?The item view is able to indicate a current item without changing the selection. QStyle::SH_ToolTip_Mask?The mask of a tool tip. QStyle::SH_FocusFrame_AboveWidget?The FocusFrame is stacked above the widget that it is "focusing on". QStyle::SH_TextControl_FocusIndicatorTextCharFormat?Specifies the text format used to highlight focused anchors in rich text documents displayed for example in QTextBrowser. The format has to be a QTextCharFormat returned in the variant of the QStyleHintReturnVariant return value. The QTextFormat::OutlinePen property is used for the outline and QTextFormat::BackgroundBrush for the background of the highlighted area. QStyle::SH_Menu_FlashTriggeredItem?Flash triggered item. QStyle::SH_Menu_FadeOutOnHide?Fade out the menu instead of hiding it immediately. QStyle::SH_TabWidget_DefaultTabPosition?Default position of the tab bar in a tab widget. QStyle::SH_ToolBar_Movable?Determines if the tool bar is movable by default. QStyle::SH_ItemView_PaintAlternatingRowColorsForEmptyArea?Whether QTreeView paints alternating row colors for the area that does not have any items. QStyle::SH_Menu_Mask?The mask for a popup menu. QStyle::SH_ItemView_DrawDelegateFrame?Determines if there should be a frame for a delegate widget. QStyle::SH_TabBar_CloseButtonPosition?Determines the position of the close button on a tab in a tab bar. QStyle::SH_DockWidget_ButtonsHaveFrame?Determines if dockwidget buttons should have frames. Default is true. QStyle::SH_ToolButtonStyle?Determines the default system style for tool buttons that uses Qt::ToolButtonFollowStyle. QStyle::SH_RequestSoftwareInputPanel?Determines when a software input panel should be requested by input widgets. Returns an enum of type QStyle::RequestSoftwareInputPanel. QStyle::SH_ScrollBar_Transient?Determines if the style supports transient scroll bars. Transient scroll bars appear when the content is scrolled and disappear when they are no longer needed. QStyle::SH_Menu_SupportsSections?Determines if the style displays sections in menus or treat them as plain separators. Sections are separators with a text and icon hint. QStyle::SH_ToolTip_WakeUpDelay?Determines the delay before a tooltip is shown, in milliseconds. QStyle::SH_ToolTip_FallAsleepDelay?Determines the delay (in milliseconds) before a new wake time is needed when a tooltip is shown (notice: shown, not hidden). When a new wake isn't needed, a user-requested tooltip will be shown nearly instantly. QStyle::SH_Widget_Animate?Deprecated. Use SH_Widget_Animation_Duration instead.

See also styleHint().

const QStyle__SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected QStyle__StyleHint = 28
const QStyle__SH_Button_FocusPolicy QStyle__StyleHint = 49
const QStyle__SH_ComboBox_LayoutDirection QStyle__StyleHint = 58
const QStyle__SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking QStyle__StyleHint = 19
const QStyle__SH_ComboBox_Popup QStyle__StyleHint = 25
const QStyle__SH_ComboBox_PopupFrameStyle QStyle__StyleHint = 69
const QStyle__SH_ComboBox_UseNativePopup QStyle__StyleHint = 103
const QStyle__SH_CustomBase QStyle__StyleHint = -268435456
const QStyle__SH_Dial_BackgroundRole QStyle__StyleHint = 57
const QStyle__SH_DialogButtonBox_ButtonsHaveIcons QStyle__StyleHint = 71
const QStyle__SH_DialogButtonLayout QStyle__StyleHint = 68
const QStyle__SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton QStyle__StyleHint = 36
const QStyle__SH_DitherDisabledText QStyle__StyleHint = 1

Disabled text is dithered as it is on Motif.

const QStyle__SH_DockWidget_ButtonsHaveFrame QStyle__StyleHint = 94
const QStyle__SH_DrawMenuBarSeparator QStyle__StyleHint = 47
const QStyle__SH_EtchDisabledText QStyle__StyleHint = 0

Disabled text is "etched" as it is on Windows.

const QStyle__SH_FocusFrame_AboveWidget QStyle__StyleHint = 77
const QStyle__SH_FocusFrame_Mask QStyle__StyleHint = 53
const QStyle__SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText QStyle__StyleHint = 13
const QStyle__SH_FormLayoutFieldGrowthPolicy QStyle__StyleHint = 89
const QStyle__SH_FormLayoutFormAlignment QStyle__StyleHint = 90
const QStyle__SH_FormLayoutLabelAlignment QStyle__StyleHint = 91
const QStyle__SH_FormLayoutWrapPolicy QStyle__StyleHint = 86
const QStyle__SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor QStyle__StyleHint = 32
const QStyle__SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment QStyle__StyleHint = 31
const QStyle__SH_Header_ArrowAlignment QStyle__StyleHint = 6

The placement of the sorting indicator may appear in list or table headers. Possible values are Qt::Alignment values (that is, an OR combination of Qt::AlignmentFlag flags).

const QStyle__SH_ItemView_ActivateItemOnSingleClick QStyle__StyleHint = 61
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_ArrowKeysNavigateIntoChildren QStyle__StyleHint = 80
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus QStyle__StyleHint = 22
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_DrawDelegateFrame QStyle__StyleHint = 92
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_EllipsisLocation QStyle__StyleHint = 59
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_MovementWithoutUpdatingSelection QStyle__StyleHint = 75
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_PaintAlternatingRowColorsForEmptyArea QStyle__StyleHint = 85
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_ScrollMode QStyle__StyleHint = 112
const QStyle__SH_ItemView_ShowDecorationSelected QStyle__StyleHint = 60
const QStyle__SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter QStyle__StyleHint = 35
const QStyle__SH_LineEdit_PasswordMaskDelay QStyle__StyleHint = 104
const QStyle__SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType QStyle__StyleHint = 40
const QStyle__SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar QStyle__StyleHint = 12
const QStyle__SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation QStyle__StyleHint = 18
const QStyle__SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking QStyle__StyleHint = 21
const QStyle__SH_Menu_AllowActiveAndDisabled QStyle__StyleHint = 14
const QStyle__SH_Menu_FadeOutOnHide QStyle__StyleHint = 83
const QStyle__SH_Menu_FillScreenWithScroll QStyle__StyleHint = 45
const QStyle__SH_Menu_FlashTriggeredItem QStyle__StyleHint = 82
const QStyle__SH_Menu_KeyboardSearch QStyle__StyleHint = 66
const QStyle__SH_Menu_Mask QStyle__StyleHint = 81
const QStyle__SH_Menu_MouseTracking QStyle__StyleHint = 20
const QStyle__SH_Menu_Scrollable QStyle__StyleHint = 30
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SelectionWrap QStyle__StyleHint = 74
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SloppySubMenus QStyle__StyleHint = 33
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SpaceActivatesItem QStyle__StyleHint = 15
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SubMenuDontStartSloppyOnLeave QStyle__StyleHint = 111
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SubMenuPopupDelay QStyle__StyleHint = 16
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SubMenuResetWhenReenteringParent QStyle__StyleHint = 110
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SubMenuSloppyCloseTimeout QStyle__StyleHint = 109
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SubMenuSloppySelectOtherActions QStyle__StyleHint = 108
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SubMenuUniDirection QStyle__StyleHint = 106
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SubMenuUniDirectionFailCount QStyle__StyleHint = 107
const QStyle__SH_Menu_SupportsSections QStyle__StyleHint = 98
const QStyle__SH_MessageBox_CenterButtons QStyle__StyleHint = 73
const QStyle__SH_MessageBox_TextInteractionFlags QStyle__StyleHint = 70
const QStyle__SH_MessageBox_UseBorderForButtonSpacing QStyle__StyleHint = 50
const QStyle__SH_PrintDialog_RightAlignButtons QStyle__StyleHint = 11
const QStyle__SH_ProgressDialog_CenterCancelButton QStyle__StyleHint = 9

Center button on progress dialogs, otherwise right aligned.

const QStyle__SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment QStyle__StyleHint = 10
const QStyle__SH_RequestSoftwareInputPanel QStyle__StyleHint = 96
const QStyle__SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection QStyle__StyleHint = 29
const QStyle__SH_RubberBand_Mask QStyle__StyleHint = 54
const QStyle__SH_ScrollBar_ContextMenu QStyle__StyleHint = 62
const QStyle__SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition QStyle__StyleHint = 39
const QStyle__SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition QStyle__StyleHint = 2

A boolean value. If true, middle clicking on a scroll bar causes the slider to jump to that position. If false, middle clicking is ignored.

const QStyle__SH_ScrollBar_RollBetweenButtons QStyle__StyleHint = 63
const QStyle__SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl QStyle__StyleHint = 3

A boolean value. If true, when clicking a scroll bar SubControl, holding the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the SubControl, the scroll bar continues to scroll. If false, the scollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the SubControl.

const QStyle__SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider QStyle__StyleHint = 27
const QStyle__SH_ScrollBar_Transient QStyle__StyleHint = 97
const QStyle__SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents QStyle__StyleHint = 17
const QStyle__SH_Slider_AbsoluteSetButtons QStyle__StyleHint = 64
const QStyle__SH_Slider_PageSetButtons QStyle__StyleHint = 65
const QStyle__SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents QStyle__StyleHint = 8

Key presses handled in a sloppy manner, i.e., left on a vertical slider subtracts a line.

const QStyle__SH_Slider_SnapToValue QStyle__StyleHint = 7

Sliders snap to values while moving, as they do on Windows.

const QStyle__SH_Slider_StopMouseOverSlider QStyle__StyleHint = 27
const QStyle__SH_SpellCheckUnderlineStyle QStyle__StyleHint = 72
const QStyle__SH_SpinBox_AnimateButton QStyle__StyleHint = 42
const QStyle__SH_SpinBox_ClickAutoRepeatRate QStyle__StyleHint = 44
const QStyle__SH_SpinBox_ClickAutoRepeatThreshold QStyle__StyleHint = 84
const QStyle__SH_SpinBox_KeyPressAutoRepeatRate QStyle__StyleHint = 43
const QStyle__SH_SpinControls_DisableOnBounds QStyle__StyleHint = 56
const QStyle__SH_Splitter_OpaqueResize QStyle__StyleHint = 102
const QStyle__SH_TabBar_Alignment QStyle__StyleHint = 5

The alignment for tabs in a QTabWidget. Possible values are Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignCenter and Qt::AlignRight.

const QStyle__SH_TabBar_ChangeCurrentDelay QStyle__StyleHint = 105
const QStyle__SH_TabBar_CloseButtonPosition QStyle__StyleHint = 93
const QStyle__SH_TabBar_ElideMode QStyle__StyleHint = 67
const QStyle__SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows QStyle__StyleHint = 38
const QStyle__SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType QStyle__StyleHint = 4

Which type of mouse event should cause a tab to be selected.

const QStyle__SH_TabWidget_DefaultTabPosition QStyle__StyleHint = 87
const QStyle__SH_Table_GridLineColor QStyle__StyleHint = 34
const QStyle__SH_TextControl_FocusIndicatorTextCharFormat QStyle__StyleHint = 78
const QStyle__SH_TitleBar_AutoRaise QStyle__StyleHint = 51
const QStyle__SH_TitleBar_ModifyNotification QStyle__StyleHint = 48
const QStyle__SH_TitleBar_NoBorder QStyle__StyleHint = 26
const QStyle__SH_TitleBar_ShowToolTipsOnButtons QStyle__StyleHint = 113
const QStyle__SH_ToolBar_Movable QStyle__StyleHint = 88
const QStyle__SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold QStyle__StyleHint = 37
const QStyle__SH_ToolButtonStyle QStyle__StyleHint = 95
const QStyle__SH_ToolButton_PopupDelay QStyle__StyleHint = 52
const QStyle__SH_ToolTipLabel_Opacity QStyle__StyleHint = 46
const QStyle__SH_ToolTip_FallAsleepDelay QStyle__StyleHint = 100
const QStyle__SH_ToolTip_Mask QStyle__StyleHint = 76
const QStyle__SH_ToolTip_WakeUpDelay QStyle__StyleHint = 99
const QStyle__SH_UnderlineShortcut QStyle__StyleHint = 41
const QStyle__SH_Widget_Animate QStyle__StyleHint = 101
const QStyle__SH_Widget_Animation_Duration QStyle__StyleHint = 114
const QStyle__SH_Widget_ShareActivation QStyle__StyleHint = 23
const QStyle__SH_WindowFrame_Mask QStyle__StyleHint = 55
const QStyle__SH_WizardStyle QStyle__StyleHint = 79
const QStyle__SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize QStyle__StyleHint = 24

type QStyle__SubControl

type QStyle__SubControl = int
const QStyle__SC_All QStyle__SubControl = -1
const QStyle__SC_ComboBoxArrow QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_ComboBoxEditField QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_ComboBoxFrame QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup QStyle__SubControl = 8
const QStyle__SC_CustomBase QStyle__SubControl = -268435456
const QStyle__SC_DialGroove QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_DialHandle QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_DialTickmarks QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_GroupBoxCheckBox QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_GroupBoxContents QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_GroupBoxFrame QStyle__SubControl = 8
const QStyle__SC_GroupBoxLabel QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_MdiCloseButton QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_MdiMinButton QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_MdiNormalButton QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_None QStyle__SubControl = 0
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarAddLine QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarAddPage QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarFirst QStyle__SubControl = 16
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarGroove QStyle__SubControl = 128
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarLast QStyle__SubControl = 32
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarSlider QStyle__SubControl = 64
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarSubLine QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_ScrollBarSubPage QStyle__SubControl = 8
const QStyle__SC_SliderGroove QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_SliderHandle QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_SliderTickmarks QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_SpinBoxDown QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_SpinBoxEditField QStyle__SubControl = 8
const QStyle__SC_SpinBoxFrame QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_SpinBoxUp QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarCloseButton QStyle__SubControl = 8
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarContextHelpButton QStyle__SubControl = 128
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarLabel QStyle__SubControl = 256
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarMaxButton QStyle__SubControl = 4
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarMinButton QStyle__SubControl = 2
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarNormalButton QStyle__SubControl = 16
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarShadeButton QStyle__SubControl = 32
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarSysMenu QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton QStyle__SubControl = 64
const QStyle__SC_ToolButton QStyle__SubControl = 1
const QStyle__SC_ToolButtonMenu QStyle__SubControl = 2

type QStyle__SubElement

type QStyle__SubElement = int

This enum represents a sub-area of a widget. Style implementations use these areas to draw the different parts of a widget.

QStyle::SE_PushButtonLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_CheckBoxLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_DateTimeEditLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_RadioButtonLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_SliderLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_SpinBoxLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_ProgressBarLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_FrameContents?Area for a frame's contents. QStyle::SE_ShapedFrameContents?Area for a frame's contents using the shape in QStyleOptionFrame; see QFrame QStyle::SE_FrameLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_LabelLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_LineEditContents?Area for a line edit's contents. QStyle::SE_TabWidgetLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_ToolButtonLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_ItemViewItemCheckIndicatorSE_ViewItemCheckIndicatorArea for a view item's check mark. QStyle::SE_TabBarTearIndicator?Deprecated. Use SE_TabBarTearIndicatorLeft instead. QStyle::SE_TabBarTearIndicatorLeftSE_TabBarTearIndicatorArea for the tear indicator on the left side of a tab bar with scroll arrows. QStyle::SE_TabBarTearIndicatorRight?Area for the tear indicator on the right side of a tab bar with scroll arrows. QStyle::SE_TabBarScrollLeftButton?Area for the scroll left button on a tab bar with scroll buttons. QStyle::SE_TabBarScrollRightButton?Area for the scroll right button on a tab bar with scroll buttons. QStyle::SE_TreeViewDisclosureItem?Area for the actual disclosure item in a tree branch. QStyle::SE_DialogButtonBoxLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_GroupBoxLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_DockWidgetFloatButton?The float button of a dock widget. QStyle::SE_DockWidgetTitleBarText?The text bounds of the dock widgets title. QStyle::SE_DockWidgetCloseButton?The close button of a dock widget. QStyle::SE_DockWidgetIcon?The icon of a dock widget. QStyle::SE_ComboBoxLayoutItem?Area that counts for the parent layout. QStyle::SE_ItemViewItemDecoration?Area for a view item's decoration (icon). QStyle::SE_ItemViewItemText?Area for a view item's text. QStyle::SE_ItemViewItemFocusRect?Area for a view item's focus rect. QStyle::SE_TabBarTabLeftButton?Area for a widget on the left side of a tab in a tab bar. QStyle::SE_TabBarTabRightButton?Area for a widget on the right side of a tab in a tab bar. QStyle::SE_TabBarTabText?Area for the text on a tab in a tab bar. QStyle::SE_ToolBarHandle?Area for the handle of a tool bar.

See also subElementRect().

const QStyle__SE_CheckBoxClickRect QStyle__SubElement = 5

Clickable area, defaults to SE_CheckBoxFocusRect.

const QStyle__SE_CheckBoxContents QStyle__SubElement = 3

Area for the label (text or pixmap).

const QStyle__SE_CheckBoxFocusRect QStyle__SubElement = 4

Area for the focus indicator.

const QStyle__SE_CheckBoxIndicator QStyle__SubElement = 2

Area for the state indicator (e.g., check mark).

const QStyle__SE_CheckBoxLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 32
const QStyle__SE_ComboBoxFocusRect QStyle__SubElement = 10
const QStyle__SE_ComboBoxLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 33
const QStyle__SE_CustomBase QStyle__SubElement = -268435456
const QStyle__SE_DateTimeEditLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 34
const QStyle__SE_DialogButtonBoxLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 35
const QStyle__SE_DockWidgetCloseButton QStyle__SubElement = 28
const QStyle__SE_DockWidgetFloatButton QStyle__SubElement = 29
const QStyle__SE_DockWidgetIcon QStyle__SubElement = 31
const QStyle__SE_DockWidgetTitleBarText QStyle__SubElement = 30
const QStyle__SE_FrameContents QStyle__SubElement = 27
const QStyle__SE_FrameLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 43
const QStyle__SE_GroupBoxLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 44
const QStyle__SE_HeaderArrow QStyle__SubElement = 17
const QStyle__SE_HeaderLabel QStyle__SubElement = 16
const QStyle__SE_ItemViewItemCheckIndicator QStyle__SubElement = 23
const QStyle__SE_ItemViewItemDecoration QStyle__SubElement = 46
const QStyle__SE_ItemViewItemFocusRect QStyle__SubElement = 48
const QStyle__SE_ItemViewItemText QStyle__SubElement = 47
const QStyle__SE_LabelLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 36
const QStyle__SE_LineEditContents QStyle__SubElement = 26
const QStyle__SE_ProgressBarContents QStyle__SubElement = 13
const QStyle__SE_ProgressBarGroove QStyle__SubElement = 12
const QStyle__SE_ProgressBarLabel QStyle__SubElement = 14
const QStyle__SE_ProgressBarLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 37
const QStyle__SE_PushButtonContents QStyle__SubElement = 0

Area containing the label (icon with text or pixmap).

const QStyle__SE_PushButtonFocusRect QStyle__SubElement = 1

Area for the focus rect (usually larger than the contents rect).

const QStyle__SE_PushButtonLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 38
const QStyle__SE_RadioButtonClickRect QStyle__SubElement = 9

Clickable area, defaults to SE_RadioButtonFocusRect.

const QStyle__SE_RadioButtonContents QStyle__SubElement = 7

Area for the label.

const QStyle__SE_RadioButtonFocusRect QStyle__SubElement = 8

Area for the focus indicator.

const QStyle__SE_RadioButtonIndicator QStyle__SubElement = 6

Area for the state indicator.

const QStyle__SE_RadioButtonLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 39
const QStyle__SE_ShapedFrameContents QStyle__SubElement = 52
const QStyle__SE_SliderFocusRect QStyle__SubElement = 11
const QStyle__SE_SliderLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 40
const QStyle__SE_SpinBoxLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 41
const QStyle__SE_TabBarScrollLeftButton QStyle__SubElement = 54
const QStyle__SE_TabBarScrollRightButton QStyle__SubElement = 55
const QStyle__SE_TabBarTabLeftButton QStyle__SubElement = 49
const QStyle__SE_TabBarTabRightButton QStyle__SubElement = 50
const QStyle__SE_TabBarTabText QStyle__SubElement = 51
const QStyle__SE_TabBarTearIndicator QStyle__SubElement = 24
const QStyle__SE_TabBarTearIndicatorLeft QStyle__SubElement = 24
const QStyle__SE_TabBarTearIndicatorRight QStyle__SubElement = 56
const QStyle__SE_TabWidgetLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 45
const QStyle__SE_TabWidgetLeftCorner QStyle__SubElement = 21
const QStyle__SE_TabWidgetRightCorner QStyle__SubElement = 22
const QStyle__SE_TabWidgetTabBar QStyle__SubElement = 18
const QStyle__SE_TabWidgetTabContents QStyle__SubElement = 20
const QStyle__SE_TabWidgetTabPane QStyle__SubElement = 19
const QStyle__SE_ToolBarHandle QStyle__SubElement = 53
const QStyle__SE_ToolBoxTabContents QStyle__SubElement = 15
const QStyle__SE_ToolButtonLayoutItem QStyle__SubElement = 42
const QStyle__SE_TreeViewDisclosureItem QStyle__SubElement = 25
const QStyle__SE_ViewItemCheckIndicator QStyle__SubElement = 23

type QStyledItemDelegate

type QStyledItemDelegate struct {
	*QAbstractItemDelegate
}

func NewQStyledItemDelegate

func NewQStyledItemDelegate(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QStyledItemDelegate

Constructs an item delegate with the given parent.

func NewQStyledItemDelegateFromPointer

func NewQStyledItemDelegateFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyledItemDelegate

func NewQStyledItemDelegate__

func NewQStyledItemDelegate__() *QStyledItemDelegate

Constructs an item delegate with the given parent.

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) CreateEditor

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) CreateEditor(parent QWidget_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QWidget

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().

Returns the widget used to edit the item specified by index for editing. The parent widget and style option are used to control how the editor widget appears.

See also QAbstractItemDelegate::createEditor().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) DisplayText

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) DisplayText(value qtcore.QVariant_ITF, locale qtcore.QLocale_ITF) string

This function returns the string that the delegate will use to display the Qt::DisplayRole of the model in locale. value is the value of the Qt::DisplayRole provided by the model.

The default implementation uses the QLocale::toString to convert value into a QString.

This function is not called for empty model indices, i.e., indices for which the model returns an invalid QVariant.

See also QAbstractItemModel::data().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) EditorEvent

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::editorEvent().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) EventFilter

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) EventFilter(object qtcore.QObject_ITF, event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

Returns true if the given editor is a valid QWidget and the given event is handled; otherwise returns false. The following key press events are handled by default:

Tab Backtab Enter Return Esc

If the editor's type is QTextEdit or QPlainTextEdit then Enter and Return keys are not handled.

In the case of Tab, Backtab, Enter and Return key press events, the editor's data is comitted to the model and the editor is closed. If the event is a Tab key press the view will open an editor on the next item in the view. Likewise, if the event is a Backtab key press the view will open an editor on the previous item in the view.

If the event is a Esc key press event, the editor is closed without committing its data.

See also commitData() and closeEditor().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) GetCthis

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) InheritEditorEvent

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) InheritEditorEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent, model *qtcore.QAbstractItemModel, option *QStyleOptionViewItem, index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool editorEvent(class QEvent *, class QAbstractItemModel *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) InheritEventFilter(f func(object *qtcore.QObject, event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionViewItem, index *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionViewItem *, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) InitStyleOption

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Initialize option with the values using the index index. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionViewItem, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) ItemEditorFactory

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) ItemEditorFactory() *QItemEditorFactory

Returns the editor factory used by the item delegate. If no editor factory is set, the function will return null.

See also setItemEditorFactory().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) MetaObject

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) NewFromPointer

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QStyledItemDelegate

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) Paint

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::paint().

Renders the delegate using the given painter and style option for the item specified by index.

This function paints the item using the view's QStyle.

When reimplementing paint in a subclass. Use the initStyleOption() to set up the option in the same way as the QStyledItemDelegate.

Whenever possible, use the option while painting. Especially its rect variable to decide where to draw and its state to determine if it is enabled or selected.

After painting, you should ensure that the painter is returned to the state it was supplied in when this function was called. For example, it may be useful to call QPainter::save() before painting and QPainter::restore() afterwards.

See also QItemDelegate::paint(), QStyle::drawControl(), and QStyle::CE_ItemViewItem.

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) QStyledItemDelegate_PTR

func (ptr *QStyledItemDelegate) QStyledItemDelegate_PTR() *QStyledItemDelegate

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) SetCthis

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) SetEditorData

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) SetEditorData(editor QWidget_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setEditorData().

Sets the data to be displayed and edited by the editor from the data model item specified by the model index.

The default implementation stores the data in the editor widget's user property.

See also QMetaProperty::isUser().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) SetItemEditorFactory

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) SetItemEditorFactory(factory QItemEditorFactory_ITF)

Sets the editor factory to be used by the item delegate to be the factory specified. If no editor factory is set, the item delegate will use the default editor factory.

See also itemEditorFactory().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) SetModelData

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) SetModelData(editor QWidget_ITF, model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::setModelData().

Gets data from the editor widget and stores it in the specified model at the item index.

The default implementation gets the value to be stored in the data model from the editor widget's user property.

See also QMetaProperty::isUser().

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) SizeHint

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::sizeHint().

Returns the size needed by the delegate to display the item specified by index, taking into account the style information provided by option.

This function uses the view's QStyle to determine the size of the item.

See also QStyle::sizeFromContents() and QStyle::CT_ItemViewItem.

func (*QStyledItemDelegate) UpdateEditorGeometry

func (this *QStyledItemDelegate) UpdateEditorGeometry(editor QWidget_ITF, option QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemDelegate::updateEditorGeometry().

Updates the editor for the item specified by index according to the style option given.

type QStyledItemDelegate_ITF

type QStyledItemDelegate_ITF interface {
	QAbstractItemDelegate_ITF
	QStyledItemDelegate_PTR() *QStyledItemDelegate
}

type QSwipeGesture

type QSwipeGesture struct {
	*QGesture
}

func NewQSwipeGesture

func NewQSwipeGesture(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QSwipeGesture

func NewQSwipeGestureFromPointer

func NewQSwipeGestureFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSwipeGesture

func NewQSwipeGesture__

func NewQSwipeGesture__() *QSwipeGesture

func (*QSwipeGesture) GetCthis

func (this *QSwipeGesture) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSwipeGesture) HorizontalDirection

func (this *QSwipeGesture) HorizontalDirection() int

func (*QSwipeGesture) MetaObject

func (this *QSwipeGesture) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSwipeGesture) NewFromPointer

func (*QSwipeGesture) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSwipeGesture

func (*QSwipeGesture) QSwipeGesture_PTR

func (ptr *QSwipeGesture) QSwipeGesture_PTR() *QSwipeGesture

func (*QSwipeGesture) SetCthis

func (this *QSwipeGesture) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSwipeGesture) SetSwipeAngle

func (this *QSwipeGesture) SetSwipeAngle(value float64)

func (*QSwipeGesture) SwipeAngle

func (this *QSwipeGesture) SwipeAngle() float64

func (*QSwipeGesture) VerticalDirection

func (this *QSwipeGesture) VerticalDirection() int

type QSwipeGesture_ITF

type QSwipeGesture_ITF interface {
	QGesture_ITF
	QSwipeGesture_PTR() *QSwipeGesture
}

type QSwipeGesture__SwipeDirection

type QSwipeGesture__SwipeDirection = int
const QSwipeGesture__Down QSwipeGesture__SwipeDirection = 4
const QSwipeGesture__Left QSwipeGesture__SwipeDirection = 1
const QSwipeGesture__NoDirection QSwipeGesture__SwipeDirection = 0
const QSwipeGesture__Right QSwipeGesture__SwipeDirection = 2
const QSwipeGesture__Up QSwipeGesture__SwipeDirection = 3

type QSystemTrayIcon

type QSystemTrayIcon struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQSystemTrayIcon

func NewQSystemTrayIcon(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QSystemTrayIcon

Constructs a QSystemTrayIcon object with the given parent.

The icon is initially invisible.

See also visible.

func NewQSystemTrayIconFromPointer

func NewQSystemTrayIconFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSystemTrayIcon

func NewQSystemTrayIcon_1

func NewQSystemTrayIcon_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QSystemTrayIcon

Constructs a QSystemTrayIcon object with the given parent.

The icon is initially invisible.

See also visible.

func NewQSystemTrayIcon_1_

func NewQSystemTrayIcon_1_(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF) *QSystemTrayIcon

Constructs a QSystemTrayIcon object with the given parent.

The icon is initially invisible.

See also visible.

func NewQSystemTrayIcon__

func NewQSystemTrayIcon__() *QSystemTrayIcon

Constructs a QSystemTrayIcon object with the given parent.

The icon is initially invisible.

See also visible.

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) Activated

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) Activated(reason int)

This signal is emitted when the user activates the system tray icon. reason specifies the reason for activation. QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason enumerates the various reasons.

See also QSystemTrayIcon::ActivationReason.

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) ContextMenu

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) ContextMenu() *QMenu

Returns the current context menu for the system tray entry.

See also setContextMenu().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) Event

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) Geometry

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) Geometry() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the geometry of the system tray icon in screen coordinates.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also visible.

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) GetCthis

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) Hide

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) Hide()

Hides the system tray entry.

See also show() and visible.

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) Icon

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) Icon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) InheritEvent

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) IsSystemTrayAvailable

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) IsSystemTrayAvailable() bool

Returns true if the system tray is available; otherwise returns false.

If the system tray is currently unavailable but becomes available later, QSystemTrayIcon will automatically add an entry in the system tray if it is visible.

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) IsVisible

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) IsVisible() bool

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) MessageClicked

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) MessageClicked()

This signal is emitted when the message displayed using showMessage() was clicked by the user.

Currently this signal is not sent on macOS.

Note: We follow Microsoft Windows behavior, so the signal is also emitted when the user clicks on a tray icon with a balloon message displayed.

See also activated().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) MetaObject

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) NewFromPointer

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QSystemTrayIcon

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) QSystemTrayIcon_PTR

func (ptr *QSystemTrayIcon) QSystemTrayIcon_PTR() *QSystemTrayIcon

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) SetContextMenu

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) SetContextMenu(menu QMenu_ITF)

Sets the specified menu to be the context menu for the system tray icon.

The menu will pop up when the user requests the context menu for the system tray icon by clicking the mouse button.

On macOS, this is currenly converted to a NSMenu, so the aboutToHide() signal is not emitted.

Note: The system tray icon does not take ownership of the menu. You must ensure that it is deleted at the appropriate time by, for example, creating the menu with a suitable parent object.

See also contextMenu().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) SetCthis

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) SetIcon

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) SetIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) SetToolTip

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) SetToolTip(tip string)

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) SetVisible

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) SetVisible(visible bool)

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) Show

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) Show()

Shows the icon in the system tray.

See also hide() and visible.

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage(title string, msg string, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, msecs int)

Shows a balloon message for the entry with the given title, message and icon for the time specified in millisecondsTimeoutHint. title and message must be plain text strings.

Message can be clicked by the user; the messageClicked() signal will emitted when this occurs.

Note that display of messages are dependent on the system configuration and user preferences, and that messages may not appear at all. Hence, it should not be relied upon as the sole means for providing critical information.

On Windows, the millisecondsTimeoutHint is usually ignored by the system when the application has focus.

Has been turned into a slot in Qt 5.2.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also show() and supportsMessages().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage_1

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage_1(title string, msg string, icon int, msecs int)

Shows a balloon message for the entry with the given title, message and icon for the time specified in millisecondsTimeoutHint. title and message must be plain text strings.

Message can be clicked by the user; the messageClicked() signal will emitted when this occurs.

Note that display of messages are dependent on the system configuration and user preferences, and that messages may not appear at all. Hence, it should not be relied upon as the sole means for providing critical information.

On Windows, the millisecondsTimeoutHint is usually ignored by the system when the application has focus.

Has been turned into a slot in Qt 5.2.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also show() and supportsMessages().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage_1_

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage_1_(title string, msg string)

Shows a balloon message for the entry with the given title, message and icon for the time specified in millisecondsTimeoutHint. title and message must be plain text strings.

Message can be clicked by the user; the messageClicked() signal will emitted when this occurs.

Note that display of messages are dependent on the system configuration and user preferences, and that messages may not appear at all. Hence, it should not be relied upon as the sole means for providing critical information.

On Windows, the millisecondsTimeoutHint is usually ignored by the system when the application has focus.

Has been turned into a slot in Qt 5.2.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also show() and supportsMessages().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage_1_1

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage_1_1(title string, msg string, icon int)

Shows a balloon message for the entry with the given title, message and icon for the time specified in millisecondsTimeoutHint. title and message must be plain text strings.

Message can be clicked by the user; the messageClicked() signal will emitted when this occurs.

Note that display of messages are dependent on the system configuration and user preferences, and that messages may not appear at all. Hence, it should not be relied upon as the sole means for providing critical information.

On Windows, the millisecondsTimeoutHint is usually ignored by the system when the application has focus.

Has been turned into a slot in Qt 5.2.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also show() and supportsMessages().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage__

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) ShowMessage__(title string, msg string, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

Shows a balloon message for the entry with the given title, message and icon for the time specified in millisecondsTimeoutHint. title and message must be plain text strings.

Message can be clicked by the user; the messageClicked() signal will emitted when this occurs.

Note that display of messages are dependent on the system configuration and user preferences, and that messages may not appear at all. Hence, it should not be relied upon as the sole means for providing critical information.

On Windows, the millisecondsTimeoutHint is usually ignored by the system when the application has focus.

Has been turned into a slot in Qt 5.2.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also show() and supportsMessages().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) SupportsMessages

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) SupportsMessages() bool

Returns true if the system tray supports balloon messages; otherwise returns false.

See also showMessage().

func (*QSystemTrayIcon) ToolTip

func (this *QSystemTrayIcon) ToolTip() string

type QSystemTrayIcon_ITF

type QSystemTrayIcon_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QSystemTrayIcon_PTR() *QSystemTrayIcon
}

type QSystemTrayIcon__ActivationReason

type QSystemTrayIcon__ActivationReason = int

This enum describes the reason the system tray was activated.

Note: On macOS, a double click will only be emitted if no context menu is set, since the menu opens on mouse press

See also activated().

const QSystemTrayIcon__Context QSystemTrayIcon__ActivationReason = 1

The context menu for the system tray entry was requested

const QSystemTrayIcon__DoubleClick QSystemTrayIcon__ActivationReason = 2

The system tray entry was double clicked.

const QSystemTrayIcon__MiddleClick QSystemTrayIcon__ActivationReason = 4

The system tray entry was clicked with the middle mouse button

const QSystemTrayIcon__Trigger QSystemTrayIcon__ActivationReason = 3

The system tray entry was clicked

const QSystemTrayIcon__Unknown QSystemTrayIcon__ActivationReason = 0

Unknown reason

type QSystemTrayIcon__MessageIcon

type QSystemTrayIcon__MessageIcon = int

This enum describes the icon that is shown when a balloon message is displayed.

See also QMessageBox.

const QSystemTrayIcon__Critical QSystemTrayIcon__MessageIcon = 3

A critical warning icon is shown.

const QSystemTrayIcon__Information QSystemTrayIcon__MessageIcon = 1

An information icon is shown.

const QSystemTrayIcon__NoIcon QSystemTrayIcon__MessageIcon = 0

No icon is shown.

const QSystemTrayIcon__Warning QSystemTrayIcon__MessageIcon = 2

A standard warning icon is shown.

type QTabBar

type QTabBar struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQTabBar

func NewQTabBar(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTabBar

Creates a new tab bar with the given parent.

func NewQTabBarFromPointer

func NewQTabBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTabBar

func NewQTabBar__

func NewQTabBar__() *QTabBar

Creates a new tab bar with the given parent.

func (*QTabBar) AccessibleTabName

func (this *QTabBar) AccessibleTabName(index int) string

Returns the accessibleName of the tab at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.

See also setAccessibleTabName().

func (*QTabBar) AddTab

func (this *QTabBar) AddTab(text string) int

Adds a new tab with text text. Returns the new tab's index.

func (*QTabBar) AddTab_1

func (this *QTabBar) AddTab_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) int

Adds a new tab with text text. Returns the new tab's index.

func (*QTabBar) AutoHide

func (this *QTabBar) AutoHide() bool

func (*QTabBar) ChangeCurrentOnDrag

func (this *QTabBar) ChangeCurrentOnDrag() bool

func (*QTabBar) ChangeEvent

func (this *QTabBar) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QTabBar) Count

func (this *QTabBar) Count() int

func (*QTabBar) CurrentChanged

func (this *QTabBar) CurrentChanged(index int)

This signal is emitted when the tab bar's current tab changes. The new current has the given index, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no tab in the QTabBar)

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

func (*QTabBar) CurrentIndex

func (this *QTabBar) CurrentIndex() int

func (*QTabBar) DocumentMode

func (this *QTabBar) DocumentMode() bool

func (*QTabBar) DrawBase

func (this *QTabBar) DrawBase() bool

func (*QTabBar) ElideMode

func (this *QTabBar) ElideMode() int

func (*QTabBar) Event

func (this *QTabBar) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QTabBar) Expanding

func (this *QTabBar) Expanding() bool

func (*QTabBar) GetCthis

func (this *QTabBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTabBar) HideEvent

func (this *QTabBar) HideEvent(arg0 qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::hideEvent().

func (*QTabBar) IconSize

func (this *QTabBar) IconSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QTabBar) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritHideEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QTabBar) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionTab, tabIndex int))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionTab *, int)

func (*QTabBar) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritMinimumTabSizeHint

func (this *QTabBar) InheritMinimumTabSizeHint(f func(index int) unsafe.Pointer)

QSize minimumTabSizeHint(int)

func (*QTabBar) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritShowEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritTabInserted

func (this *QTabBar) InheritTabInserted(f func(index int))

void tabInserted(int)

func (*QTabBar) InheritTabLayoutChange

func (this *QTabBar) InheritTabLayoutChange(f func())

void tabLayoutChange()

func (*QTabBar) InheritTabRemoved

func (this *QTabBar) InheritTabRemoved(f func(index int))

void tabRemoved(int)

func (*QTabBar) InheritTabSizeHint

func (this *QTabBar) InheritTabSizeHint(f func(index int) unsafe.Pointer)

QSize tabSizeHint(int)

func (*QTabBar) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritTimerEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QTabBar) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QTabBar) InitStyleOption

func (this *QTabBar) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionTab_ITF, tabIndex int)

Initialize option with the values from the tab at tabIndex. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionTab, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QTabWidget::initStyleOption().

func (*QTabBar) InsertTab

func (this *QTabBar) InsertTab(index int, text string) int

Inserts a new tab with text text at position index. If index is out of range, the new tab is appened. Returns the new tab's index.

func (*QTabBar) InsertTab_1

func (this *QTabBar) InsertTab_1(index int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) int

Inserts a new tab with text text at position index. If index is out of range, the new tab is appened. Returns the new tab's index.

func (*QTabBar) IsMovable

func (this *QTabBar) IsMovable() bool

func (*QTabBar) IsTabEnabled

func (this *QTabBar) IsTabEnabled(index int) bool

Returns true if the tab at position index is enabled; otherwise returns false.

func (*QTabBar) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QTabBar) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QTabBar) MetaObject

func (this *QTabBar) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTabBar) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QTabBar) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QTabBar) MinimumTabSizeHint

func (this *QTabBar) MinimumTabSizeHint(index int) *qtcore.QSize

Returns the minimum tab size hint for the tab at position index.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

func (*QTabBar) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTabBar) MouseMoveEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QTabBar) MousePressEvent

func (this *QTabBar) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QTabBar) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTabBar) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QTabBar) MoveTab

func (this *QTabBar) MoveTab(from int, to int)

Moves the item at index position from to index position to.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also tabMoved() and tabLayoutChange().

func (*QTabBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QTabBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTabBar

func (*QTabBar) PaintEvent

func (this *QTabBar) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QTabBar) QTabBar_PTR

func (ptr *QTabBar) QTabBar_PTR() *QTabBar

func (*QTabBar) RemoveTab

func (this *QTabBar) RemoveTab(index int)

Removes the tab at position index.

See also SelectionBehavior.

func (*QTabBar) ResizeEvent

func (this *QTabBar) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QTabBar) SelectionBehaviorOnRemove

func (this *QTabBar) SelectionBehaviorOnRemove() int

func (*QTabBar) SetAccessibleTabName

func (this *QTabBar) SetAccessibleTabName(index int, name string)

Sets the accessibleName of the tab at position index to name.

See also accessibleTabName().

func (*QTabBar) SetAutoHide

func (this *QTabBar) SetAutoHide(hide bool)

func (*QTabBar) SetChangeCurrentOnDrag

func (this *QTabBar) SetChangeCurrentOnDrag(change bool)

func (*QTabBar) SetCthis

func (this *QTabBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTabBar) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QTabBar) SetCurrentIndex(index int)

func (*QTabBar) SetDocumentMode

func (this *QTabBar) SetDocumentMode(set bool)

func (*QTabBar) SetDrawBase

func (this *QTabBar) SetDrawBase(drawTheBase bool)

func (*QTabBar) SetElideMode

func (this *QTabBar) SetElideMode(arg0 int)

func (*QTabBar) SetExpanding

func (this *QTabBar) SetExpanding(enabled bool)

func (*QTabBar) SetIconSize

func (this *QTabBar) SetIconSize(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QTabBar) SetMovable

func (this *QTabBar) SetMovable(movable bool)

func (*QTabBar) SetSelectionBehaviorOnRemove

func (this *QTabBar) SetSelectionBehaviorOnRemove(behavior int)

func (*QTabBar) SetShape

func (this *QTabBar) SetShape(shape int)

func (*QTabBar) SetTabButton

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabButton(index int, position int, widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets widget on the tab index. The widget is placed on the left or right hand side depending upon the position.

Any previously set widget in position is hidden.

The tab bar will take ownership of the widget and so all widgets set here will be deleted by the tab bar when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other widget (or 0).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also tabButton() and tabsClosable().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabData

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabData(index int, data qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Sets the data of the tab at position index to data.

See also tabData().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabEnabled

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabEnabled(index int, arg1 bool)

If enabled is true then the tab at position index is enabled; otherwise the item at position index is disabled.

See also isTabEnabled().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabIcon

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabIcon(index int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

Sets the icon of the tab at position index to icon.

See also tabIcon().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabText

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabText(index int, text string)

Sets the text of the tab at position index to text.

See also tabText().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabTextColor

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabTextColor(index int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

Sets the color of the text in the tab with the given index to the specified color.

If an invalid color is specified, the tab will use the QTabBar foreground role instead.

See also tabTextColor().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabToolTip

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabToolTip(index int, tip string)

Sets the tool tip of the tab at position index to tip.

See also tabToolTip().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabWhatsThis

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabWhatsThis(index int, text string)

Sets the What's This help text of the tab at position index to text.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also tabWhatsThis().

func (*QTabBar) SetTabsClosable

func (this *QTabBar) SetTabsClosable(closable bool)

func (*QTabBar) SetUsesScrollButtons

func (this *QTabBar) SetUsesScrollButtons(useButtons bool)

func (*QTabBar) Shape

func (this *QTabBar) Shape() int

func (*QTabBar) ShowEvent

func (this *QTabBar) ShowEvent(arg0 qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QTabBar) SizeHint

func (this *QTabBar) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QTabBar) TabAt

func (this *QTabBar) TabAt(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) int

Returns the index of the tab that covers position or -1 if no tab covers position;

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QTabBar) TabBarClicked

func (this *QTabBar) TabBarClicked(index int)

This signal is emitted when user clicks on a tab at an index.

index is the index of a clicked tab, or -1 if no tab is under the cursor.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QTabBar) TabBarDoubleClicked

func (this *QTabBar) TabBarDoubleClicked(index int)

This signal is emitted when the user double clicks on a tab at index.

index refers to the tab clicked, or -1 if no tab is under the cursor.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QTabBar) TabButton

func (this *QTabBar) TabButton(index int, position int) *QWidget

Returns the widget set a tab index and position or 0 if one is not set.

See also setTabButton().

func (*QTabBar) TabCloseRequested

func (this *QTabBar) TabCloseRequested(index int)

This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also setTabsClosable().

func (*QTabBar) TabData

func (this *QTabBar) TabData(index int) *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the data of the tab at position index, or a null variant if index is out of range.

See also setTabData().

func (*QTabBar) TabIcon

func (this *QTabBar) TabIcon(index int) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns the icon of the tab at position index, or a null icon if index is out of range.

See also setTabIcon().

func (*QTabBar) TabInserted

func (this *QTabBar) TabInserted(index int)

This virtual handler is called after a new tab was added or inserted at position index.

See also tabRemoved().

func (*QTabBar) TabLayoutChange

func (this *QTabBar) TabLayoutChange()

This virtual handler is called whenever the tab layout changes.

See also tabRect().

func (*QTabBar) TabMoved

func (this *QTabBar) TabMoved(from int, to int)

This signal is emitted when the tab has moved the tab at index position from to index position to.

note: QTabWidget will automatically move the page when this signal is emitted from its tab bar.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also moveTab().

func (*QTabBar) TabRect

func (this *QTabBar) TabRect(index int) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the visual rectangle of the tab at position index, or a null rectangle if index is out of range.

func (*QTabBar) TabRemoved

func (this *QTabBar) TabRemoved(index int)

This virtual handler is called after a tab was removed from position index.

See also tabInserted().

func (*QTabBar) TabSizeHint

func (this *QTabBar) TabSizeHint(index int) *qtcore.QSize

Returns the size hint for the tab at position index.

func (*QTabBar) TabText

func (this *QTabBar) TabText(index int) string

Returns the text of the tab at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.

See also setTabText().

func (*QTabBar) TabTextColor

func (this *QTabBar) TabTextColor(index int) *qtgui.QColor

Returns the text color of the tab with the given index, or a invalid color if index is out of range.

See also setTabTextColor().

func (*QTabBar) TabToolTip

func (this *QTabBar) TabToolTip(index int) string

Returns the tool tip of the tab at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.

See also setTabToolTip().

func (*QTabBar) TabWhatsThis

func (this *QTabBar) TabWhatsThis(index int) string

Returns the What's This help text of the tab at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setTabWhatsThis().

func (*QTabBar) TabsClosable

func (this *QTabBar) TabsClosable() bool

func (*QTabBar) TimerEvent

func (this *QTabBar) TimerEvent(event qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QTabBar) UsesScrollButtons

func (this *QTabBar) UsesScrollButtons() bool

func (*QTabBar) WheelEvent

func (this *QTabBar) WheelEvent(event qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

type QTabBar_ITF

type QTabBar_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QTabBar_PTR() *QTabBar
}

type QTabBar__ButtonPosition

type QTabBar__ButtonPosition = int

This enum type lists the location of the widget on a tab.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.

const QTabBar__LeftSide QTabBar__ButtonPosition = 0

Left side of the tab.

const QTabBar__RightSide QTabBar__ButtonPosition = 1

Right side of the tab.

type QTabBar__SelectionBehavior

type QTabBar__SelectionBehavior = int

This enum type lists the behavior of QTabBar when a tab is removed and the tab being removed is also the current tab.

This enum was introduced or modified in Qt 4.5.

const QTabBar__SelectLeftTab QTabBar__SelectionBehavior = 0

Select the tab to the left of the one being removed.

const QTabBar__SelectPreviousTab QTabBar__SelectionBehavior = 2

Select the previously selected tab.

const QTabBar__SelectRightTab QTabBar__SelectionBehavior = 1

Select the tab to the right of the one being removed.

type QTabBar__Shape

type QTabBar__Shape = int

This enum type lists the built-in shapes supported by QTabBar. Treat these as hints as some styles may not render some of the shapes. However, position should be honored.

const QTabBar__RoundedEast QTabBar__Shape = 3

The normal rounded look on the right side the pages

const QTabBar__RoundedNorth QTabBar__Shape = 0

The normal rounded look above the pages

const QTabBar__RoundedSouth QTabBar__Shape = 1

The normal rounded look below the pages

const QTabBar__RoundedWest QTabBar__Shape = 2

The normal rounded look on the left side of the pages

const QTabBar__TriangularEast QTabBar__Shape = 7

Triangular tabs on the right of the pages.

const QTabBar__TriangularNorth QTabBar__Shape = 4

Triangular tabs above the pages.

const QTabBar__TriangularSouth QTabBar__Shape = 5

Triangular tabs similar to those used in the Excel spreadsheet, for example

const QTabBar__TriangularWest QTabBar__Shape = 6

Triangular tabs on the left of the pages.

type QTabWidget

type QTabWidget struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQTabWidget

func NewQTabWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTabWidget

Constructs a tabbed widget with parent parent.

func NewQTabWidgetFromPointer

func NewQTabWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTabWidget

func NewQTabWidget__

func NewQTabWidget__() *QTabWidget

Constructs a tabbed widget with parent parent.

func (*QTabWidget) AddTab

func (this *QTabWidget) AddTab(widget QWidget_ITF, arg1 string) int

Adds a tab with the given page and label to the tab widget, and returns the index of the tab in the tab bar.

If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as a shortcut for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes a shortcut which will move the focus to this tab.

Note: If you call addTab() after show(), the layout system will try to adjust to the changes in its widgets hierarchy and may cause flicker. To prevent this, you can set the QWidget::updatesEnabled property to false prior to changes; remember to set the property to true when the changes are done, making the widget receive paint events again.

See also insertTab().

func (*QTabWidget) AddTab_1

func (this *QTabWidget) AddTab_1(widget QWidget_ITF, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, label string) int

Adds a tab with the given page and label to the tab widget, and returns the index of the tab in the tab bar.

If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as a shortcut for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes a shortcut which will move the focus to this tab.

Note: If you call addTab() after show(), the layout system will try to adjust to the changes in its widgets hierarchy and may cause flicker. To prevent this, you can set the QWidget::updatesEnabled property to false prior to changes; remember to set the property to true when the changes are done, making the widget receive paint events again.

See also insertTab().

func (*QTabWidget) ChangeEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QTabWidget) Clear

func (this *QTabWidget) Clear()

Removes all the pages, but does not delete them. Calling this function is equivalent to calling removeTab() until the tab widget is empty.

func (*QTabWidget) CornerWidget

func (this *QTabWidget) CornerWidget(corner int) *QWidget

Returns the widget shown in the corner of the tab widget or 0.

See also setCornerWidget().

func (*QTabWidget) CornerWidget__

func (this *QTabWidget) CornerWidget__() *QWidget

Returns the widget shown in the corner of the tab widget or 0.

See also setCornerWidget().

func (*QTabWidget) Count

func (this *QTabWidget) Count() int

func (*QTabWidget) CurrentChanged

func (this *QTabWidget) CurrentChanged(index int)

This signal is emitted whenever the current page index changes. The parameter is the new current page index position, or -1 if there isn't a new one (for example, if there are no widgets in the QTabWidget)

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

See also currentWidget() and currentIndex.

func (*QTabWidget) CurrentIndex

func (this *QTabWidget) CurrentIndex() int

func (*QTabWidget) CurrentWidget

func (this *QTabWidget) CurrentWidget() *QWidget

Returns a pointer to the page currently being displayed by the tab dialog. The tab dialog does its best to make sure that this value is never 0 (but if you try hard enough, it can be).

See also currentIndex() and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QTabWidget) DocumentMode

func (this *QTabWidget) DocumentMode() bool

func (*QTabWidget) ElideMode

func (this *QTabWidget) ElideMode() int

func (*QTabWidget) Event

func (this *QTabWidget) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QTabWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QTabWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTabWidget) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QTabWidget) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QTabWidget) HeightForWidth

func (this *QTabWidget) HeightForWidth(width int) int

Reimplemented from QWidget::heightForWidth().

func (*QTabWidget) IconSize

func (this *QTabWidget) IconSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QTabWidget) IndexOf

func (this *QTabWidget) IndexOf(widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the index position of the page occupied by the widget w, or -1 if the widget cannot be found.

func (*QTabWidget) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritResizeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritSetTabBar

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritSetTabBar(f func(arg0 *QTabBar))

void setTabBar(class QTabBar *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritShowEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritTabInserted

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritTabInserted(f func(index int))

void tabInserted(int)

func (*QTabWidget) InheritTabRemoved

func (this *QTabWidget) InheritTabRemoved(f func(index int))

void tabRemoved(int)

func (*QTabWidget) InitStyleOption

func (this *QTabWidget) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QTabWidget. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom() and QTabBar::initStyleOption().

func (*QTabWidget) InsertTab

func (this *QTabWidget) InsertTab(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, arg2 string) int

Inserts a tab with the given label and page into the tab widget at the specified index, and returns the index of the inserted tab in the tab bar.

The label is displayed in the tab and may vary in appearance depending on the configuration of the tab widget.

If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as a shortcut for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes a shortcut which will move the focus to this tab.

If index is out of range, the tab is simply appended. Otherwise it is inserted at the specified position.

If the QTabWidget was empty before this function is called, the new page becomes the current page. Inserting a new tab at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current page.

Note: If you call insertTab() after show(), the layout system will try to adjust to the changes in its widgets hierarchy and may cause flicker. To prevent this, you can set the QWidget::updatesEnabled property to false prior to changes; remember to set the property to true when the changes are done, making the widget receive paint events again.

See also addTab().

func (*QTabWidget) InsertTab_1

func (this *QTabWidget) InsertTab_1(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, label string) int

Inserts a tab with the given label and page into the tab widget at the specified index, and returns the index of the inserted tab in the tab bar.

The label is displayed in the tab and may vary in appearance depending on the configuration of the tab widget.

If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as a shortcut for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes a shortcut which will move the focus to this tab.

If index is out of range, the tab is simply appended. Otherwise it is inserted at the specified position.

If the QTabWidget was empty before this function is called, the new page becomes the current page. Inserting a new tab at an index less than or equal to the current index will increment the current index, but keep the current page.

Note: If you call insertTab() after show(), the layout system will try to adjust to the changes in its widgets hierarchy and may cause flicker. To prevent this, you can set the QWidget::updatesEnabled property to false prior to changes; remember to set the property to true when the changes are done, making the widget receive paint events again.

See also addTab().

func (*QTabWidget) IsMovable

func (this *QTabWidget) IsMovable() bool

func (*QTabWidget) IsTabEnabled

func (this *QTabWidget) IsTabEnabled(index int) bool

Returns true if the page at position index is enabled; otherwise returns false.

See also setTabEnabled() and QWidget::isEnabled().

func (*QTabWidget) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) KeyPressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QTabWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QTabWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTabWidget) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QTabWidget) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

Returns a suitable minimum size for the tab widget.

func (*QTabWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QTabWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTabWidget

func (*QTabWidget) PaintEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

Paints the tab widget's tab bar in response to the paint event.

func (*QTabWidget) QTabWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QTabWidget) QTabWidget_PTR() *QTabWidget

func (*QTabWidget) RemoveTab

func (this *QTabWidget) RemoveTab(index int)

Removes the tab at position index from this stack of widgets. The page widget itself is not deleted.

See also addTab() and insertTab().

func (*QTabWidget) ResizeEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) ResizeEvent(arg0 qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QTabWidget) SetCornerWidget

func (this *QTabWidget) SetCornerWidget(w QWidget_ITF, corner int)

Sets the given widget to be shown in the specified corner of the tab widget. The geometry of the widget is determined based on the widget's sizeHint() and the style().

Only the horizontal element of the corner will be used.

Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.

Any previously set corner widget is hidden.

All widgets set here will be deleted by the tab widget when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0).

Note: Corner widgets are designed for North and South tab positions; other orientations are known to not work properly.

See also cornerWidget() and setTabPosition().

func (*QTabWidget) SetCornerWidget__

func (this *QTabWidget) SetCornerWidget__(w QWidget_ITF)

Sets the given widget to be shown in the specified corner of the tab widget. The geometry of the widget is determined based on the widget's sizeHint() and the style().

Only the horizontal element of the corner will be used.

Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.

Any previously set corner widget is hidden.

All widgets set here will be deleted by the tab widget when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0).

Note: Corner widgets are designed for North and South tab positions; other orientations are known to not work properly.

See also cornerWidget() and setTabPosition().

func (*QTabWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QTabWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTabWidget) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QTabWidget) SetCurrentIndex(index int)

func (*QTabWidget) SetCurrentWidget

func (this *QTabWidget) SetCurrentWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Makes widget the current widget. The widget used must be a page in this tab widget.

See also addTab(), setCurrentIndex(), and currentWidget().

func (*QTabWidget) SetDocumentMode

func (this *QTabWidget) SetDocumentMode(set bool)

func (*QTabWidget) SetElideMode

func (this *QTabWidget) SetElideMode(arg0 int)

func (*QTabWidget) SetIconSize

func (this *QTabWidget) SetIconSize(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QTabWidget) SetMovable

func (this *QTabWidget) SetMovable(movable bool)

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabBar

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabBar(arg0 QTabBar_ITF)

Replaces the dialog's QTabBar heading with the tab bar tb. Note that this must be called before any tabs have been added, or the behavior is undefined.

See also tabBar().

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabBarAutoHide

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabBarAutoHide(enabled bool)

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabEnabled

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabEnabled(index int, arg1 bool)

If enable is true, the page at position index is enabled; otherwise the page at position index is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.

QTabWidget uses QWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a separate flag.

Note that even a disabled tab/page may be visible. If the page is visible already, QTabWidget will not hide it; if all the pages are disabled, QTabWidget will show one of them.

See also isTabEnabled() and QWidget::setEnabled().

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabIcon

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabIcon(index int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

This is an overloaded function.

Sets the icon for the tab at position index.

See also tabIcon().

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabPosition

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabPosition(arg0 int)

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabShape

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabShape(s int)

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabText

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabText(index int, arg1 string)

Defines a new label for the page at position index's tab.

If the provided text contains an ampersand character ('&'), a shortcut is automatically created for it. The character that follows the '&' will be used as the shortcut key. Any previous shortcut will be overwritten, or cleared if no shortcut is defined by the text. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&&').

See also tabText().

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabToolTip

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabToolTip(index int, tip string)

Sets the tab tool tip for the page at position index to tip.

See also tabToolTip().

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabWhatsThis

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabWhatsThis(index int, text string)

Sets the What's This help text for the page at position index to text.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also tabWhatsThis().

func (*QTabWidget) SetTabsClosable

func (this *QTabWidget) SetTabsClosable(closeable bool)

func (*QTabWidget) SetUsesScrollButtons

func (this *QTabWidget) SetUsesScrollButtons(useButtons bool)

func (*QTabWidget) ShowEvent

func (this *QTabWidget) ShowEvent(arg0 qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QTabWidget) SizeHint

func (this *QTabWidget) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QTabWidget) TabBar

func (this *QTabWidget) TabBar() *QTabBar

Returns the current QTabBar.

See also setTabBar().

func (*QTabWidget) TabBarAutoHide

func (this *QTabWidget) TabBarAutoHide() bool

func (*QTabWidget) TabBarClicked

func (this *QTabWidget) TabBarClicked(index int)

This signal is emitted when user clicks on a tab at an index.

index refers to the tab clicked, or -1 if no tab is under the cursor.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QTabWidget) TabBarDoubleClicked

func (this *QTabWidget) TabBarDoubleClicked(index int)

This signal is emitted when the user double clicks on a tab at an index.

index is the index of a clicked tab, or -1 if no tab is under the cursor.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

func (*QTabWidget) TabCloseRequested

func (this *QTabWidget) TabCloseRequested(index int)

This signal is emitted when the close button on a tab is clicked. The index is the index that should be removed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also setTabsClosable().

func (*QTabWidget) TabIcon

func (this *QTabWidget) TabIcon(index int) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns the icon for the tab on the page at position index.

See also setTabIcon().

func (*QTabWidget) TabInserted

func (this *QTabWidget) TabInserted(index int)

This virtual handler is called after a new tab was added or inserted at position index.

See also tabRemoved().

func (*QTabWidget) TabPosition

func (this *QTabWidget) TabPosition() int

func (*QTabWidget) TabRemoved

func (this *QTabWidget) TabRemoved(index int)

This virtual handler is called after a tab was removed from position index.

See also tabInserted().

func (*QTabWidget) TabShape

func (this *QTabWidget) TabShape() int

func (*QTabWidget) TabText

func (this *QTabWidget) TabText(index int) string

Returns the label text for the tab on the page at position index.

See also setTabText().

func (*QTabWidget) TabToolTip

func (this *QTabWidget) TabToolTip(index int) string

Returns the tab tool tip for the page at position index or an empty string if no tool tip has been set.

See also setTabToolTip().

func (*QTabWidget) TabWhatsThis

func (this *QTabWidget) TabWhatsThis(index int) string

Returns the What's This help text for the page at position index, or an empty string if no help text has been set.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setTabWhatsThis().

func (*QTabWidget) TabsClosable

func (this *QTabWidget) TabsClosable() bool

func (*QTabWidget) UsesScrollButtons

func (this *QTabWidget) UsesScrollButtons() bool

func (*QTabWidget) Widget

func (this *QTabWidget) Widget(index int) *QWidget

Returns the tab page at index position index or 0 if the index is out of range.

type QTabWidget_ITF

type QTabWidget_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QTabWidget_PTR() *QTabWidget
}

type QTabWidget__TabPosition

type QTabWidget__TabPosition = int

This enum type defines where QTabWidget draws the tab row:

const QTabWidget__East QTabWidget__TabPosition = 3

The tabs are drawn to the right of the pages.

const QTabWidget__North QTabWidget__TabPosition = 0

The tabs are drawn above the pages.

const QTabWidget__South QTabWidget__TabPosition = 1

The tabs are drawn below the pages.

const QTabWidget__West QTabWidget__TabPosition = 2

The tabs are drawn to the left of the pages.

type QTabWidget__TabShape

type QTabWidget__TabShape = int

This enum type defines the shape of the tabs:

const QTabWidget__Rounded QTabWidget__TabShape = 0

The tabs are drawn with a rounded look. This is the default shape.

const QTabWidget__Triangular QTabWidget__TabShape = 1

The tabs are drawn with a triangular look.

type QTableView

type QTableView struct {
	*QAbstractItemView
}

func NewQTableView

func NewQTableView(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTableView

Constructs a table view with a parent to represent the data.

See also QAbstractItemModel.

func NewQTableViewFromPointer

func NewQTableViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTableView

func NewQTableView__

func NewQTableView__() *QTableView

Constructs a table view with a parent to represent the data.

See also QAbstractItemModel.

func (*QTableView) ClearSpans

func (this *QTableView) ClearSpans()

Removes all row and column spans in the table view.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setSpan().

func (*QTableView) ColumnAt

func (this *QTableView) ColumnAt(x int) int

Returns the column in which the given x-coordinate, x, in contents coordinates is located.

Note: This function returns -1 if the given coordinate is not valid (has no column).

See also rowAt().

func (*QTableView) ColumnCountChanged

func (this *QTableView) ColumnCountChanged(oldCount int, newCount int)

This slot is called whenever columns are added or deleted. The previous number of columns is specified by oldCount, and the new number of columns is specified by newCount.

func (*QTableView) ColumnMoved

func (this *QTableView) ColumnMoved(column int, oldIndex int, newIndex int)

This slot is called to change the index of the given column in the table view. The old index is specified by oldIndex, and the new index by newIndex.

See also rowMoved().

func (*QTableView) ColumnResized

func (this *QTableView) ColumnResized(column int, oldWidth int, newWidth int)

This slot is called to change the width of the given column. The old width is specified by oldWidth, and the new width by newWidth.

See also rowResized().

func (*QTableView) ColumnSpan

func (this *QTableView) ColumnSpan(row int, column int) int

Returns the column span of the table element at (row, column). The default is 1.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setSpan() and rowSpan().

func (*QTableView) ColumnViewportPosition

func (this *QTableView) ColumnViewportPosition(column int) int

Returns the x-coordinate in contents coordinates of the given column.

func (*QTableView) ColumnWidth

func (this *QTableView) ColumnWidth(column int) int

Returns the width of the given column.

See also setColumnWidth(), resizeColumnToContents(), and rowHeight().

func (*QTableView) CurrentChanged

func (this *QTableView) CurrentChanged(current qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, previous qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().

func (*QTableView) DoItemsLayout

func (this *QTableView) DoItemsLayout()

func (*QTableView) GetCthis

func (this *QTableView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTableView) GridStyle

func (this *QTableView) GridStyle() int

func (*QTableView) HideColumn

func (this *QTableView) HideColumn(column int)

Hide the given column.

See also showColumn() and hideRow().

func (*QTableView) HideRow

func (this *QTableView) HideRow(row int)

Hide the given row.

See also showRow() and hideColumn().

func (*QTableView) HorizontalHeader

func (this *QTableView) HorizontalHeader() *QHeaderView

Returns the table view's horizontal header.

See also setHorizontalHeader(), verticalHeader(), and QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

func (*QTableView) HorizontalOffset

func (this *QTableView) HorizontalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().

Returns the horizontal offset of the items in the table view.

Note that the table view uses the horizontal header section positions to determine the positions of columns in the view.

See also verticalOffset().

func (*QTableView) HorizontalScrollbarAction

func (this *QTableView) HorizontalScrollbarAction(action int)

func (*QTableView) IndexAt

func (this *QTableView) IndexAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().

Returns the index position of the model item corresponding to the table item at position pos in contents coordinates.

func (*QTableView) InheritColumnCountChanged

func (this *QTableView) InheritColumnCountChanged(f func(oldCount int, newCount int))

void columnCountChanged(int, int)

func (*QTableView) InheritColumnMoved

func (this *QTableView) InheritColumnMoved(f func(column int, oldIndex int, newIndex int))

void columnMoved(int, int, int)

func (*QTableView) InheritColumnResized

func (this *QTableView) InheritColumnResized(f func(column int, oldWidth int, newWidth int))

void columnResized(int, int, int)

func (*QTableView) InheritCurrentChanged

func (this *QTableView) InheritCurrentChanged(f func(current *qtcore.QModelIndex, previous *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void currentChanged(const class QModelIndex &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTableView) InheritHorizontalOffset

func (this *QTableView) InheritHorizontalOffset(f func() int)

int horizontalOffset()

func (*QTableView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarAction

func (this *QTableView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarAction(f func(action int))

void horizontalScrollbarAction(int)

func (*QTableView) InheritIsIndexHidden

func (this *QTableView) InheritIsIndexHidden(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool isIndexHidden(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTableView) InheritMoveCursor

func (this *QTableView) InheritMoveCursor(f func(cursorAction int, modifiers int) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex moveCursor(enum QAbstractItemView::CursorAction, Qt::KeyboardModifiers)

func (*QTableView) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QTableView) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QTableView) InheritRowCountChanged

func (this *QTableView) InheritRowCountChanged(f func(oldCount int, newCount int))

void rowCountChanged(int, int)

func (*QTableView) InheritRowMoved

func (this *QTableView) InheritRowMoved(f func(row int, oldIndex int, newIndex int))

void rowMoved(int, int, int)

func (*QTableView) InheritRowResized

func (this *QTableView) InheritRowResized(f func(row int, oldHeight int, newHeight int))

void rowResized(int, int, int)

func (*QTableView) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QTableView) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QTableView) InheritSelectedIndexes

func (this *QTableView) InheritSelectedIndexes(f func() *qtcore.QModelIndexList)

QModelIndexList selectedIndexes()

func (*QTableView) InheritSelectionChanged

func (this *QTableView) InheritSelectionChanged(f func(selected *qtcore.QItemSelection, deselected *qtcore.QItemSelection))

void selectionChanged(const class QItemSelection &, const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QTableView) InheritSetSelection

func (this *QTableView) InheritSetSelection(f func(rect *qtcore.QRect, command int))

void setSelection(const class QRect &, class QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags)

func (*QTableView) InheritSizeHintForColumn

func (this *QTableView) InheritSizeHintForColumn(f func(column int) int)

int sizeHintForColumn(int)

func (*QTableView) InheritSizeHintForRow

func (this *QTableView) InheritSizeHintForRow(f func(row int) int)

int sizeHintForRow(int)

func (*QTableView) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QTableView) InheritTimerEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QTableView) InheritUpdateGeometries

func (this *QTableView) InheritUpdateGeometries(f func())

void updateGeometries()

func (*QTableView) InheritVerticalOffset

func (this *QTableView) InheritVerticalOffset(f func() int)

int verticalOffset()

func (*QTableView) InheritVerticalScrollbarAction

func (this *QTableView) InheritVerticalScrollbarAction(f func(action int))

void verticalScrollbarAction(int)

func (*QTableView) InheritViewOptions

func (this *QTableView) InheritViewOptions(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QStyleOptionViewItem viewOptions()

func (*QTableView) InheritViewportSizeHint

func (this *QTableView) InheritViewportSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize viewportSizeHint()

func (*QTableView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QTableView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection(f func(selection *qtcore.QItemSelection) unsafe.Pointer)

QRegion visualRegionForSelection(const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QTableView) IsColumnHidden

func (this *QTableView) IsColumnHidden(column int) bool

Returns true if the given column is hidden; otherwise returns false.

See also isRowHidden().

func (*QTableView) IsCornerButtonEnabled

func (this *QTableView) IsCornerButtonEnabled() bool

func (*QTableView) IsIndexHidden

func (this *QTableView) IsIndexHidden(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().

func (*QTableView) IsRowHidden

func (this *QTableView) IsRowHidden(row int) bool

Returns true if the given row is hidden; otherwise returns false.

See also isColumnHidden().

func (*QTableView) IsSortingEnabled

func (this *QTableView) IsSortingEnabled() bool

func (*QTableView) MetaObject

func (this *QTableView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTableView) MoveCursor

func (this *QTableView) MoveCursor(cursorAction int, modifiers int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().

Moves the cursor in accordance with the given cursorAction, using the information provided by the modifiers.

See also QAbstractItemView::CursorAction.

func (*QTableView) NewFromPointer

func (*QTableView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTableView

func (*QTableView) PaintEvent

func (this *QTableView) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

Paints the table on receipt of the given paint event event.

func (*QTableView) QTableView_PTR

func (ptr *QTableView) QTableView_PTR() *QTableView

func (*QTableView) ResizeColumnToContents

func (this *QTableView) ResizeColumnToContents(column int)

Resizes the given column based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the column.

Note: Only visible columns will be resized. Reimplement sizeHintForColumn() to resize hidden columns as well.

See also resizeColumnsToContents(), sizeHintForColumn(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTableView) ResizeColumnsToContents

func (this *QTableView) ResizeColumnsToContents()

Resizes all columns based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the columns.

See also resizeColumnToContents(), sizeHintForColumn(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTableView) ResizeRowToContents

func (this *QTableView) ResizeRowToContents(row int)

Resizes the given row based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the row.

See also resizeRowsToContents(), sizeHintForRow(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTableView) ResizeRowsToContents

func (this *QTableView) ResizeRowsToContents()

Resizes all rows based on the size hints of the delegate used to render each item in the rows.

See also resizeRowToContents(), sizeHintForRow(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTableView) RowAt

func (this *QTableView) RowAt(y int) int

Returns the row in which the given y-coordinate, y, in contents coordinates is located.

Note: This function returns -1 if the given coordinate is not valid (has no row).

See also columnAt().

func (*QTableView) RowCountChanged

func (this *QTableView) RowCountChanged(oldCount int, newCount int)

This slot is called whenever rows are added or deleted. The previous number of rows is specified by oldCount, and the new number of rows is specified by newCount.

func (*QTableView) RowHeight

func (this *QTableView) RowHeight(row int) int

Returns the height of the given row.

See also setRowHeight(), resizeRowToContents(), and columnWidth().

func (*QTableView) RowMoved

func (this *QTableView) RowMoved(row int, oldIndex int, newIndex int)

This slot is called to change the index of the given row in the table view. The old index is specified by oldIndex, and the new index by newIndex.

See also columnMoved().

func (*QTableView) RowResized

func (this *QTableView) RowResized(row int, oldHeight int, newHeight int)

This slot is called to change the height of the given row. The old height is specified by oldHeight, and the new height by newHeight.

See also columnResized().

func (*QTableView) RowSpan

func (this *QTableView) RowSpan(row int, column int) int

Returns the row span of the table element at (row, column). The default is 1.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setSpan() and columnSpan().

func (*QTableView) RowViewportPosition

func (this *QTableView) RowViewportPosition(row int) int

Returns the y-coordinate in contents coordinates of the given row.

func (*QTableView) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QTableView) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

func (*QTableView) ScrollTo

func (this *QTableView) ScrollTo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, hint int)

func (*QTableView) ScrollTo__

func (this *QTableView) ScrollTo__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

func (*QTableView) SelectColumn

func (this *QTableView) SelectColumn(column int)

Selects the given column in the table view if the current SelectionMode and SelectionBehavior allows columns to be selected.

See also selectRow().

func (*QTableView) SelectRow

func (this *QTableView) SelectRow(row int)

Selects the given row in the table view if the current SelectionMode and SelectionBehavior allows rows to be selected.

See also selectColumn().

func (*QTableView) SelectedIndexes

func (this *QTableView) SelectedIndexes() *qtcore.QModelIndexList

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectedIndexes().

func (*QTableView) SelectionChanged

func (this *QTableView) SelectionChanged(selected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF, deselected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectionChanged().

func (*QTableView) SetColumnHidden

func (this *QTableView) SetColumnHidden(column int, hide bool)

If hide is true the given column will be hidden; otherwise it will be shown.

See also isColumnHidden() and setRowHidden().

func (*QTableView) SetColumnWidth

func (this *QTableView) SetColumnWidth(column int, width int)

Sets the width of the given column to be width.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also columnWidth().

func (*QTableView) SetCornerButtonEnabled

func (this *QTableView) SetCornerButtonEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QTableView) SetCthis

func (this *QTableView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTableView) SetGridStyle

func (this *QTableView) SetGridStyle(style int)

func (*QTableView) SetHorizontalHeader

func (this *QTableView) SetHorizontalHeader(header QHeaderView_ITF)

Sets the widget to use for the horizontal header to header.

See also horizontalHeader() and setVerticalHeader().

func (*QTableView) SetModel

func (this *QTableView) SetModel(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().

func (*QTableView) SetRootIndex

func (this *QTableView) SetRootIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setRootIndex().

func (*QTableView) SetRowHeight

func (this *QTableView) SetRowHeight(row int, height int)

Sets the height of the given row to be height.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also rowHeight().

func (*QTableView) SetRowHidden

func (this *QTableView) SetRowHidden(row int, hide bool)

If hide is true row will be hidden, otherwise it will be shown.

See also isRowHidden() and setColumnHidden().

func (*QTableView) SetSelection

func (this *QTableView) SetSelection(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, command int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().

Selects the items within the given rect and in accordance with the specified selection flags.

func (*QTableView) SetSelectionModel

func (this *QTableView) SetSelectionModel(selectionModel qtcore.QItemSelectionModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().

func (*QTableView) SetShowGrid

func (this *QTableView) SetShowGrid(show bool)

func (*QTableView) SetSortingEnabled

func (this *QTableView) SetSortingEnabled(enable bool)

If enable is true, enables sorting for the table and immediately trigger a call to sortByColumn() with the current sort section and order

Note: Setter function for property sortingEnabled.

See also isSortingEnabled().

func (*QTableView) SetSpan

func (this *QTableView) SetSpan(row int, column int, rowSpan int, columnSpan int)

Sets the span of the table element at (row, column) to the number of rows and columns specified by (rowSpanCount, columnSpanCount).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also rowSpan() and columnSpan().

func (*QTableView) SetVerticalHeader

func (this *QTableView) SetVerticalHeader(header QHeaderView_ITF)

Sets the widget to use for the vertical header to header.

See also verticalHeader() and setHorizontalHeader().

func (*QTableView) SetWordWrap

func (this *QTableView) SetWordWrap(on bool)

func (*QTableView) ShowColumn

func (this *QTableView) ShowColumn(column int)

Show the given column.

See also hideColumn() and showRow().

func (*QTableView) ShowGrid

func (this *QTableView) ShowGrid() bool

func (*QTableView) ShowRow

func (this *QTableView) ShowRow(row int)

Show the given row.

See also hideRow() and showColumn().

func (*QTableView) SizeHintForColumn

func (this *QTableView) SizeHintForColumn(column int) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::sizeHintForColumn().

Returns the size hint for the given column's width or -1 if there is no model.

If you need to set the width of a given column to a fixed value, call QHeaderView::resizeSection() on the table's horizontal header.

If you reimplement this function in a subclass, note that the value you return will be used when resizeColumnToContents() or QHeaderView::resizeSections() is called. If a larger column width is required by either the horizontal header or the item delegate, the larger width will be used instead.

See also QWidget::sizeHint, horizontalHeader(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTableView) SizeHintForRow

func (this *QTableView) SizeHintForRow(row int) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::sizeHintForRow().

Returns the size hint for the given row's height or -1 if there is no model.

If you need to set the height of a given row to a fixed value, call QHeaderView::resizeSection() on the table's vertical header.

If you reimplement this function in a subclass, note that the value you return is only used when resizeRowToContents() is called. In that case, if a larger row height is required by either the vertical header or the item delegate, that width will be used instead.

See also QWidget::sizeHint, verticalHeader(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTableView) SortByColumn

func (this *QTableView) SortByColumn(column int, order int)

Sorts the model by the values in the given column in the given order.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also sortingEnabled.

func (*QTableView) SortByColumn_1

func (this *QTableView) SortByColumn_1(column int)

Sorts the model by the values in the given column in the given order.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also sortingEnabled.

func (*QTableView) TimerEvent

func (this *QTableView) TimerEvent(event qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QTableView) UpdateGeometries

func (this *QTableView) UpdateGeometries()

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::updateGeometries().

func (*QTableView) VerticalHeader

func (this *QTableView) VerticalHeader() *QHeaderView

Returns the table view's vertical header.

See also setVerticalHeader(), horizontalHeader(), and QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

func (*QTableView) VerticalOffset

func (this *QTableView) VerticalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().

Returns the vertical offset of the items in the table view.

Note that the table view uses the vertical header section positions to determine the positions of rows in the view.

See also horizontalOffset().

func (*QTableView) VerticalScrollbarAction

func (this *QTableView) VerticalScrollbarAction(action int)

func (*QTableView) ViewOptions

func (this *QTableView) ViewOptions() *QStyleOptionViewItem

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::viewOptions().

func (*QTableView) ViewportSizeHint

func (this *QTableView) ViewportSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportSizeHint().

func (*QTableView) VisualRect

func (this *QTableView) VisualRect(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

func (*QTableView) VisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QTableView) VisualRegionForSelection(selection qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF) *qtgui.QRegion

func (*QTableView) WordWrap

func (this *QTableView) WordWrap() bool

type QTableView_ITF

type QTableView_ITF interface {
	QAbstractItemView_ITF
	QTableView_PTR() *QTableView
}

type QTableWidget

type QTableWidget struct {
	*QTableView
}

func NewQTableWidget

func NewQTableWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTableWidget

Creates a new table view with the given parent.

func NewQTableWidgetFromPointer

func NewQTableWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTableWidget

func NewQTableWidget_1

func NewQTableWidget_1(rows int, columns int, parent QWidget_ITF) *QTableWidget

Creates a new table view with the given parent.

func NewQTableWidget_1_

func NewQTableWidget_1_(rows int, columns int) *QTableWidget

Creates a new table view with the given parent.

func NewQTableWidget__

func NewQTableWidget__() *QTableWidget

Creates a new table view with the given parent.

func (*QTableWidget) CellActivated

func (this *QTableWidget) CellActivated(row int, column int)

This signal is emitted when the cell specified by row and column has been activated

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) CellChanged

func (this *QTableWidget) CellChanged(row int, column int)

This signal is emitted whenever the data of the item in the cell specified by row and column has changed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) CellClicked

func (this *QTableWidget) CellClicked(row int, column int)

This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was clicked.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) CellDoubleClicked

func (this *QTableWidget) CellDoubleClicked(row int, column int)

This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is double clicked. The row and column specified is the cell that was double clicked.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) CellEntered

func (this *QTableWidget) CellEntered(row int, column int)

This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters a cell. The cell is specified by row and column.

This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) CellPressed

func (this *QTableWidget) CellPressed(row int, column int)

This signal is emitted whenever a cell in the table is pressed. The row and column specified is the cell that was pressed.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) CellWidget

func (this *QTableWidget) CellWidget(row int, column int) *QWidget

Returns the widget displayed in the cell in the given row and column.

Note: The table takes ownership of the widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setCellWidget().

func (*QTableWidget) Clear

func (this *QTableWidget) Clear()

Removes all items in the view. This will also remove all selections and headers. If you don't want to remove the headers, use QTableWidget::clearContents(). The table dimensions stay the same.

func (*QTableWidget) ClearContents

func (this *QTableWidget) ClearContents()

Removes all items not in the headers from the view. This will also remove all selections. The table dimensions stay the same.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QTableWidget) ClosePersistentEditor

func (this *QTableWidget) ClosePersistentEditor(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Closes the persistent editor for item.

See also openPersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QTableWidget) Column

func (this *QTableWidget) Column(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF) int

Returns the column for the item.

func (*QTableWidget) ColumnCount

func (this *QTableWidget) ColumnCount() int

Returns the number of columns.

Note: Getter function for property columnCount.

See also setColumnCount().

func (*QTableWidget) CurrentCellChanged

func (this *QTableWidget) CurrentCellChanged(currentRow int, currentColumn int, previousRow int, previousColumn int)

This signal is emitted whenever the current cell changes. The cell specified by previousRow and previousColumn is the cell that previously had the focus, the cell specified by currentRow and currentColumn is the new current cell.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) CurrentColumn

func (this *QTableWidget) CurrentColumn() int

Returns the column of the current item.

See also currentRow() and setCurrentCell().

func (*QTableWidget) CurrentItem

func (this *QTableWidget) CurrentItem() *QTableWidgetItem

Returns the current item.

See also setCurrentItem().

func (*QTableWidget) CurrentItemChanged

func (this *QTableWidget) CurrentItemChanged(current QTableWidgetItem_ITF, previous QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the current item changes. The previous item is the item that previously had the focus, current is the new current item.

func (*QTableWidget) CurrentRow

func (this *QTableWidget) CurrentRow() int

Returns the row of the current item.

See also currentColumn() and setCurrentCell().

func (*QTableWidget) DropEvent

func (this *QTableWidget) DropEvent(event qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QTableWidget) DropMimeData

func (this *QTableWidget) DropMimeData(row int, column int, data qtcore.QMimeData_ITF, action int) bool

Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action in the given row and column. Returns true if the data and action can be handled by the model; otherwise returns false.

See also supportedDropActions().

func (*QTableWidget) EditItem

func (this *QTableWidget) EditItem(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Starts editing the item if it is editable.

func (*QTableWidget) Event

func (this *QTableWidget) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QTableWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QTableWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTableWidget) HorizontalHeaderItem

func (this *QTableWidget) HorizontalHeaderItem(column int) *QTableWidgetItem

Returns the horizontal header item for column, column, if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.

See also setHorizontalHeaderItem().

func (*QTableWidget) IndexFromItem

func (this *QTableWidget) IndexFromItem(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the QModelIndex associated with the given item.

func (*QTableWidget) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QTableWidget) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QTableWidget) InheritDropMimeData

func (this *QTableWidget) InheritDropMimeData(f func(row int, column int, data *qtcore.QMimeData, action int) bool)

bool dropMimeData(int, int, const class QMimeData *, Qt::DropAction)

func (*QTableWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QTableWidget) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QTableWidget) InheritIndexFromItem

func (this *QTableWidget) InheritIndexFromItem(f func(item *QTableWidgetItem) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex indexFromItem(class QTableWidgetItem *)

func (*QTableWidget) InheritItemFromIndex

func (this *QTableWidget) InheritItemFromIndex(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) unsafe.Pointer)

QTableWidgetItem * itemFromIndex(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTableWidget) InheritMimeTypes

func (this *QTableWidget) InheritMimeTypes(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QStringList mimeTypes()

func (*QTableWidget) InheritSupportedDropActions

func (this *QTableWidget) InheritSupportedDropActions(f func() int)

Qt::DropActions supportedDropActions()

func (*QTableWidget) InsertColumn

func (this *QTableWidget) InsertColumn(column int)

Inserts an empty column into the table at column.

func (*QTableWidget) InsertRow

func (this *QTableWidget) InsertRow(row int)

Inserts an empty row into the table at row.

func (*QTableWidget) IsItemSelected

func (this *QTableWidget) IsItemSelected(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QTableWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen

func (this *QTableWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF) bool

Returns whether a persistent editor is open for item item.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.10.

See also openPersistentEditor() and closePersistentEditor().

func (*QTableWidget) IsSortingEnabled

func (this *QTableWidget) IsSortingEnabled() bool

func (*QTableWidget) Item

func (this *QTableWidget) Item(row int, column int) *QTableWidgetItem

Returns the item for the given row and column if one has been set; otherwise returns 0.

See also setItem().

func (*QTableWidget) ItemActivated

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemActivated(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the specified item has been activated

func (*QTableWidget) ItemAt

Returns a pointer to the item at the given point, or returns 0 if point is not covered by an item in the table widget.

See also item().

func (*QTableWidget) ItemAt_1

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemAt_1(x int, y int) *QTableWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the item at the given point, or returns 0 if point is not covered by an item in the table widget.

See also item().

func (*QTableWidget) ItemChanged

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemChanged(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the data of item has changed.

func (*QTableWidget) ItemClicked

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemClicked(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is clicked. The item specified is the item that was clicked.

func (*QTableWidget) ItemDoubleClicked

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemDoubleClicked(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is double clicked. The item specified is the item that was double clicked.

func (*QTableWidget) ItemEntered

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemEntered(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item. The item is the item entered.

This signal is only emitted when mouseTracking is turned on, or when a mouse button is pressed while moving into an item.

func (*QTableWidget) ItemFromIndex

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemFromIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QTableWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the QTableWidgetItem associated with the given index.

func (*QTableWidget) ItemPressed

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemPressed(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever an item in the table is pressed. The item specified is the item that was pressed.

func (*QTableWidget) ItemPrototype

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemPrototype() *QTableWidgetItem

Returns the item prototype used by the table.

See also setItemPrototype().

func (*QTableWidget) ItemSelectionChanged

func (this *QTableWidget) ItemSelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.

See also selectedItems() and QTableWidgetItem::isSelected().

func (*QTableWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QTableWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTableWidget) MimeTypes

func (this *QTableWidget) MimeTypes() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of tablewidget items.

See also mimeData().

func (*QTableWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QTableWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTableWidget

func (*QTableWidget) OpenPersistentEditor

func (this *QTableWidget) OpenPersistentEditor(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Opens an editor for the give item. The editor remains open after editing.

See also closePersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QTableWidget) QTableWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QTableWidget) QTableWidget_PTR() *QTableWidget

func (*QTableWidget) RemoveCellWidget

func (this *QTableWidget) RemoveCellWidget(row int, column int)

Removes the widget set on the cell indicated by row and column.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QTableWidget) RemoveColumn

func (this *QTableWidget) RemoveColumn(column int)

Removes the column column and all its items from the table.

func (*QTableWidget) RemoveRow

func (this *QTableWidget) RemoveRow(row int)

Removes the row row and all its items from the table.

func (*QTableWidget) Row

func (this *QTableWidget) Row(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF) int

Returns the row for the item.

func (*QTableWidget) RowCount

func (this *QTableWidget) RowCount() int

Returns the number of rows.

Note: Getter function for property rowCount.

See also setRowCount().

func (*QTableWidget) ScrollToItem

func (this *QTableWidget) ScrollToItem(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF, hint int)

Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item is visible. The hint parameter specifies more precisely where the item should be located after the operation.

func (*QTableWidget) ScrollToItem__

func (this *QTableWidget) ScrollToItem__(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Scrolls the view if necessary to ensure that the item is visible. The hint parameter specifies more precisely where the item should be located after the operation.

func (*QTableWidget) SetCellWidget

func (this *QTableWidget) SetCellWidget(row int, column int, widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the given widget to be displayed in the cell in the given row and column, passing the ownership of the widget to the table.

If cell widget A is replaced with cell widget B, cell widget A will be deleted. For example, in the code snippet below, the QLineEdit object will be deleted.

setCellWidget(row, column, new QLineEdit);
...
setCellWidget(row, column, new QTextEdit);

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also cellWidget().

func (*QTableWidget) SetColumnCount

func (this *QTableWidget) SetColumnCount(columns int)

Sets the number of columns in this table's model to columns. If this is less than columnCount(), the data in the unwanted columns is discarded.

Note: Setter function for property columnCount.

See also columnCount() and setRowCount().

func (*QTableWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QTableWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTableWidget) SetCurrentCell

func (this *QTableWidget) SetCurrentCell(row int, column int)

Sets the current cell to be the cell at position (row, column).

Depending on the current selection mode, the cell may also be selected.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setCurrentItem(), currentRow(), and currentColumn().

func (*QTableWidget) SetCurrentCell_1

func (this *QTableWidget) SetCurrentCell_1(row int, column int, command int)

Sets the current cell to be the cell at position (row, column).

Depending on the current selection mode, the cell may also be selected.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setCurrentItem(), currentRow(), and currentColumn().

func (*QTableWidget) SetCurrentItem

func (this *QTableWidget) SetCurrentItem(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the current item to item.

Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected.

See also currentItem() and setCurrentCell().

func (*QTableWidget) SetCurrentItem_1

func (this *QTableWidget) SetCurrentItem_1(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF, command int)

Sets the current item to item.

Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected.

See also currentItem() and setCurrentCell().

func (*QTableWidget) SetHorizontalHeaderItem

func (this *QTableWidget) SetHorizontalHeaderItem(column int, item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the horizontal header item for column column to item. If necessary, the column count is increased to fit the item. The previous header item (if there was one) is deleted.

See also horizontalHeaderItem().

func (*QTableWidget) SetHorizontalHeaderLabels

func (this *QTableWidget) SetHorizontalHeaderLabels(labels qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Sets the horizontal header labels using labels.

func (*QTableWidget) SetItem

func (this *QTableWidget) SetItem(row int, column int, item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the item for the given row and column to item.

The table takes ownership of the item.

Note that if sorting is enabled (see sortingEnabled) and column is the current sort column, the row will be moved to the sorted position determined by item.

If you want to set several items of a particular row (say, by calling setItem() in a loop), you may want to turn off sorting before doing so, and turn it back on afterwards; this will allow you to use the same row argument for all items in the same row (i.e. setItem() will not move the row).

See also item() and takeItem().

func (*QTableWidget) SetItemPrototype

func (this *QTableWidget) SetItemPrototype(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the item prototype for the table to the specified item.

The table widget will use the item prototype clone function when it needs to create a new table item. For example when the user is editing in an empty cell. This is useful when you have a QTableWidgetItem subclass and want to make sure that QTableWidget creates instances of your subclass.

The table takes ownership of the prototype.

See also itemPrototype().

func (*QTableWidget) SetItemSelected

func (this *QTableWidget) SetItemSelected(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF, select_ bool)

func (*QTableWidget) SetRangeSelected

func (this *QTableWidget) SetRangeSelected(range_ QTableWidgetSelectionRange_ITF, select_ bool)

Selects or deselects the range depending on select.

func (*QTableWidget) SetRowCount

func (this *QTableWidget) SetRowCount(rows int)

Sets the number of rows in this table's model to rows. If this is less than rowCount(), the data in the unwanted rows is discarded.

Note: Setter function for property rowCount.

See also rowCount() and setColumnCount().

func (*QTableWidget) SetSortingEnabled

func (this *QTableWidget) SetSortingEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QTableWidget) SetVerticalHeaderItem

func (this *QTableWidget) SetVerticalHeaderItem(row int, item QTableWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the vertical header item for row row to item.

See also verticalHeaderItem().

func (*QTableWidget) SetVerticalHeaderLabels

func (this *QTableWidget) SetVerticalHeaderLabels(labels qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Sets the vertical header labels using labels.

func (*QTableWidget) SortItems

func (this *QTableWidget) SortItems(column int, order int)

Sorts all the rows in the table widget based on column and order.

func (*QTableWidget) SortItems__

func (this *QTableWidget) SortItems__(column int)

Sorts all the rows in the table widget based on column and order.

func (*QTableWidget) SupportedDropActions

func (this *QTableWidget) SupportedDropActions() int

Returns the drop actions supported by this view.

See also Qt::DropActions.

func (*QTableWidget) TakeHorizontalHeaderItem

func (this *QTableWidget) TakeHorizontalHeaderItem(column int) *QTableWidgetItem

Removes the horizontal header item at column from the header without deleting it.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) TakeItem

func (this *QTableWidget) TakeItem(row int, column int) *QTableWidgetItem

Removes the item at row and column from the table without deleting it.

func (*QTableWidget) TakeVerticalHeaderItem

func (this *QTableWidget) TakeVerticalHeaderItem(row int) *QTableWidgetItem

Removes the vertical header item at row from the header without deleting it.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTableWidget) VerticalHeaderItem

func (this *QTableWidget) VerticalHeaderItem(row int) *QTableWidgetItem

Returns the vertical header item for row row.

See also setVerticalHeaderItem().

func (*QTableWidget) VisualColumn

func (this *QTableWidget) VisualColumn(logicalColumn int) int

Returns the visual column of the given logicalColumn.

func (*QTableWidget) VisualItemRect

func (this *QTableWidget) VisualItemRect(item QTableWidgetItem_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at item.

func (*QTableWidget) VisualRow

func (this *QTableWidget) VisualRow(logicalRow int) int

Returns the visual row of the given logicalRow.

type QTableWidgetItem

type QTableWidgetItem struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQTableWidgetItem

func NewQTableWidgetItem(type_ int) *QTableWidgetItem

func NewQTableWidgetItemFromPointer

func NewQTableWidgetItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTableWidgetItem

func NewQTableWidgetItem_1

func NewQTableWidgetItem_1(text string, type_ int) *QTableWidgetItem

func NewQTableWidgetItem_1_

func NewQTableWidgetItem_1_(text string) *QTableWidgetItem

func NewQTableWidgetItem_2

func NewQTableWidgetItem_2(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, type_ int) *QTableWidgetItem

func NewQTableWidgetItem_2_

func NewQTableWidgetItem_2_(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QTableWidgetItem

func NewQTableWidgetItem__

func NewQTableWidgetItem__() *QTableWidgetItem

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Background

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Background() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QTableWidgetItem) BackgroundColor

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) BackgroundColor() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QTableWidgetItem) CheckState

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) CheckState() int

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Clone

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Clone() *QTableWidgetItem

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Column

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Column() int

Returns the column for the item.

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Data

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Data(role int) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Flags

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Flags() int

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Font

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Foreground

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Foreground() *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QTableWidgetItem) GetCthis

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Icon

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Icon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QTableWidgetItem) IsSelected

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) IsSelected() bool

func (*QTableWidgetItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QTableWidgetItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTableWidgetItem

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Operator_equal

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Operator_equal(other QTableWidgetItem_ITF) *QTableWidgetItem

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Operator_less_than

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Operator_less_than(other QTableWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QTableWidgetItem) QTableWidgetItem_PTR

func (ptr *QTableWidgetItem) QTableWidgetItem_PTR() *QTableWidgetItem

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Read

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Read(in qtcore.QDataStream_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Row

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Row() int

Returns the row for the item.

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetBackground

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetBackground(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetBackgroundColor

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetBackgroundColor(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetCheckState

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetCheckState(state int)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetCthis

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetData

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetData(role int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetFlags

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetFlags(flags int)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetFont

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetFont(font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetForeground

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetForeground(brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetIcon

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetSelected

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetSelected(select_ bool)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetSizeHint

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetSizeHint(size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetStatusTip

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetStatusTip(statusTip string)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetText

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetText(text string)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetTextAlignment

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetTextAlignment(alignment int)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetTextColor

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetTextColor(color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetToolTip

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetToolTip(toolTip string)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SetWhatsThis

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SetWhatsThis(whatsThis string)

func (*QTableWidgetItem) SizeHint

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QTableWidgetItem) StatusTip

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) StatusTip() string

func (*QTableWidgetItem) TableWidget

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) TableWidget() *QTableWidget

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Text

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Text() string

func (*QTableWidgetItem) TextAlignment

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) TextAlignment() int

func (*QTableWidgetItem) TextColor

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) TextColor() *qtgui.QColor

func (*QTableWidgetItem) ToolTip

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) ToolTip() string

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Type

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Type() int

func (*QTableWidgetItem) WhatsThis

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) WhatsThis() string

func (*QTableWidgetItem) Write

func (this *QTableWidgetItem) Write(out qtcore.QDataStream_ITF)

type QTableWidgetItem_ITF

type QTableWidgetItem_ITF interface {
	QTableWidgetItem_PTR() *QTableWidgetItem
}

type QTableWidgetItem__ItemType

type QTableWidgetItem__ItemType = int
const QTableWidgetItem__Type QTableWidgetItem__ItemType = 0
const QTableWidgetItem__UserType QTableWidgetItem__ItemType = 1000

type QTableWidgetSelectionRange

type QTableWidgetSelectionRange struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQTableWidgetSelectionRange

func NewQTableWidgetSelectionRange() *QTableWidgetSelectionRange

func NewQTableWidgetSelectionRangeFromPointer

func NewQTableWidgetSelectionRangeFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTableWidgetSelectionRange

func NewQTableWidgetSelectionRange_1

func NewQTableWidgetSelectionRange_1(top int, left int, bottom int, right int) *QTableWidgetSelectionRange

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) BottomRow

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) BottomRow() int

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) ColumnCount

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) ColumnCount() int

Returns the number of columns.

Note: Getter function for property columnCount.

See also setColumnCount().

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) GetCthis

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) LeftColumn

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) LeftColumn() int

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) NewFromPointer

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) QTableWidgetSelectionRange_PTR

func (ptr *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) QTableWidgetSelectionRange_PTR() *QTableWidgetSelectionRange

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) RightColumn

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) RightColumn() int

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) RowCount

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) RowCount() int

Returns the number of rows.

Note: Getter function for property rowCount.

See also setRowCount().

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) SetCthis

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTableWidgetSelectionRange) TopRow

func (this *QTableWidgetSelectionRange) TopRow() int

type QTableWidgetSelectionRange_ITF

type QTableWidgetSelectionRange_ITF interface {
	QTableWidgetSelectionRange_PTR() *QTableWidgetSelectionRange
}

type QTableWidget_ITF

type QTableWidget_ITF interface {
	QTableView_ITF
	QTableWidget_PTR() *QTableWidget
}

type QTapAndHoldGesture

type QTapAndHoldGesture struct {
	*QGesture
}

func NewQTapAndHoldGesture

func NewQTapAndHoldGesture(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QTapAndHoldGesture

func NewQTapAndHoldGestureFromPointer

func NewQTapAndHoldGestureFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTapAndHoldGesture

func NewQTapAndHoldGesture__

func NewQTapAndHoldGesture__() *QTapAndHoldGesture

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) GetCthis

func (this *QTapAndHoldGesture) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) MetaObject

func (this *QTapAndHoldGesture) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) NewFromPointer

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTapAndHoldGesture

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) Position

func (this *QTapAndHoldGesture) Position() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) QTapAndHoldGesture_PTR

func (ptr *QTapAndHoldGesture) QTapAndHoldGesture_PTR() *QTapAndHoldGesture

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) SetCthis

func (this *QTapAndHoldGesture) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) SetPosition

func (this *QTapAndHoldGesture) SetPosition(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) SetTimeout

func (this *QTapAndHoldGesture) SetTimeout(msecs int)

func (*QTapAndHoldGesture) Timeout

func (this *QTapAndHoldGesture) Timeout() int

type QTapAndHoldGesture_ITF

type QTapAndHoldGesture_ITF interface {
	QGesture_ITF
	QTapAndHoldGesture_PTR() *QTapAndHoldGesture
}

type QTapGesture

type QTapGesture struct {
	*QGesture
}

func NewQTapGesture

func NewQTapGesture(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QTapGesture

func NewQTapGestureFromPointer

func NewQTapGestureFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTapGesture

func NewQTapGesture__

func NewQTapGesture__() *QTapGesture

func (*QTapGesture) GetCthis

func (this *QTapGesture) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTapGesture) MetaObject

func (this *QTapGesture) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTapGesture) NewFromPointer

func (*QTapGesture) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTapGesture

func (*QTapGesture) Position

func (this *QTapGesture) Position() *qtcore.QPointF

func (*QTapGesture) QTapGesture_PTR

func (ptr *QTapGesture) QTapGesture_PTR() *QTapGesture

func (*QTapGesture) SetCthis

func (this *QTapGesture) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTapGesture) SetPosition

func (this *QTapGesture) SetPosition(pos qtcore.QPointF_ITF)

type QTapGesture_ITF

type QTapGesture_ITF interface {
	QGesture_ITF
	QTapGesture_PTR() *QTapGesture
}

type QTextBrowser

type QTextBrowser struct {
	*QTextEdit
}

func NewQTextBrowser

func NewQTextBrowser(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTextBrowser

Constructs an empty QTextBrowser with parent parent.

func NewQTextBrowserFromPointer

func NewQTextBrowserFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTextBrowser

func NewQTextBrowser__

func NewQTextBrowser__() *QTextBrowser

Constructs an empty QTextBrowser with parent parent.

func (*QTextBrowser) AnchorClicked

func (this *QTextBrowser) AnchorClicked(arg0 qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.

Note that the browser will automatically handle navigation to the location specified by link unless the openLinks property is set to false or you call setSource() in a slot connected. This mechanism is used to override the default navigation features of the browser.

func (*QTextBrowser) Backward

func (this *QTextBrowser) Backward()

Changes the document displayed to the previous document in the list of documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there is no previous document.

See also forward() and backwardAvailable().

func (*QTextBrowser) BackwardAvailable

func (this *QTextBrowser) BackwardAvailable(arg0 bool)

This signal is emitted when the availability of backward() changes. available is false when the user is at home(); otherwise it is true.

func (*QTextBrowser) BackwardHistoryCount

func (this *QTextBrowser) BackwardHistoryCount() int

Returns the number of locations backward in the history.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QTextBrowser) ClearHistory

func (this *QTextBrowser) ClearHistory()

Clears the history of visited documents and disables the forward and backward navigation.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also backward() and forward().

func (*QTextBrowser) Event

func (this *QTextBrowser) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QTextBrowser) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QTextBrowser) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QTextBrowser) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) FocusOutEvent(ev qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QTextBrowser) Forward

func (this *QTextBrowser) Forward()

Changes the document displayed to the next document in the list of documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there is no next document.

See also backward() and forwardAvailable().

func (*QTextBrowser) ForwardAvailable

func (this *QTextBrowser) ForwardAvailable(arg0 bool)

This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes. available is true after the user navigates backward() and false when the user navigates or goes forward().

func (*QTextBrowser) ForwardHistoryCount

func (this *QTextBrowser) ForwardHistoryCount() int

Returns the number of locations forward in the history.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QTextBrowser) GetCthis

func (this *QTextBrowser) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTextBrowser) Highlighted

func (this *QTextBrowser) Highlighted(arg0 qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not activated an anchor in the document. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.

Note: Signal highlighted is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(textBrowser, QOverload<const QUrl &>::of(&QTextBrowser::highlighted),
    [=](const QUrl &link){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QTextBrowser) Highlighted_1

func (this *QTextBrowser) Highlighted_1(arg0 string)

This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not activated an anchor in the document. The URL referred to by the anchor is passed in link.

Note: Signal highlighted is overloaded in this class. To connect to this signal by using the function pointer syntax, Qt provides a convenient helper for obtaining the function pointer as shown in this example:

connect(textBrowser, QOverload<const QUrl &>::of(&QTextBrowser::highlighted),
    [=](const QUrl &link){ \/* ... *\/ });

func (*QTextBrowser) HistoryChanged

func (this *QTextBrowser) HistoryChanged()

This signal is emitted when the history changes.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also historyTitle() and historyUrl().

func (*QTextBrowser) HistoryTitle

func (this *QTextBrowser) HistoryTitle(arg0 int) string

Returns the documentTitle() of the HistoryItem.

InputReturn

i < 0backward() history i == 0current, see QTextBrowser::source() i > 0forward() history

backaction.setToolTip(browser.historyTitle(-1));
forwardaction.setToolTip(browser.historyTitle(+1));

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QTextBrowser) HistoryUrl

func (this *QTextBrowser) HistoryUrl(arg0 int) *qtcore.QUrl

Returns the url of the HistoryItem.

InputReturn

i < 0backward() history i == 0current, see QTextBrowser::source() i > 0forward() history

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

func (*QTextBrowser) Home

func (this *QTextBrowser) Home()

Changes the document displayed to be the first document from the history.

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(ev *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTextBrowser) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QTextBrowser) IsBackwardAvailable

func (this *QTextBrowser) IsBackwardAvailable() bool

Returns true if the text browser can go backward in the document history using backward().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also backwardAvailable() and backward().

func (*QTextBrowser) IsForwardAvailable

func (this *QTextBrowser) IsForwardAvailable() bool

Returns true if the text browser can go forward in the document history using forward().

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also forwardAvailable() and forward().

func (*QTextBrowser) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) KeyPressEvent(ev qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

The event ev is used to provide the following keyboard shortcuts:

KeypressAction

Alt+Left Arrowbackward() Alt+Right Arrowforward() Alt+Up Arrowhome()

func (*QTextBrowser) LoadResource

func (this *QTextBrowser) LoadResource(type_ int, name qtcore.QUrl_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QTextEdit::loadResource().

This function is called when the document is loaded and for each image in the document. The type indicates the type of resource to be loaded. An invalid QVariant is returned if the resource cannot be loaded.

The default implementation ignores type and tries to locate the resources by interpreting name as a file name. If it is not an absolute path it tries to find the file in the paths of the searchPaths property and in the same directory as the current source. On success, the result is a QVariant that stores a QByteArray with the contents of the file.

If you reimplement this function, you can return other QVariant types. The table below shows which variant types are supported depending on the resource type:

ResourceTypeQVariant::Type

QTextDocument::HtmlResourceQString or QByteArray QTextDocument::ImageResourceQImage, QPixmap or QByteArray QTextDocument::StyleSheetResourceQString or QByteArray

func (*QTextBrowser) MetaObject

func (this *QTextBrowser) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTextBrowser) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) MouseMoveEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QTextBrowser) MousePressEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) MousePressEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QTextBrowser) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) MouseReleaseEvent(ev qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QTextBrowser) NewFromPointer

func (*QTextBrowser) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTextBrowser
func (this *QTextBrowser) OpenExternalLinks() bool
func (this *QTextBrowser) OpenLinks() bool

func (*QTextBrowser) PaintEvent

func (this *QTextBrowser) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QTextBrowser) QTextBrowser_PTR

func (ptr *QTextBrowser) QTextBrowser_PTR() *QTextBrowser

func (*QTextBrowser) Reload

func (this *QTextBrowser) Reload()

Reloads the current set source.

func (*QTextBrowser) SearchPaths

func (this *QTextBrowser) SearchPaths() *qtcore.QStringList

func (*QTextBrowser) SetCthis

func (this *QTextBrowser) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)
func (this *QTextBrowser) SetOpenExternalLinks(open bool)
func (this *QTextBrowser) SetOpenLinks(open bool)

func (*QTextBrowser) SetSearchPaths

func (this *QTextBrowser) SetSearchPaths(paths qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

func (*QTextBrowser) SetSource

func (this *QTextBrowser) SetSource(name qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

func (*QTextBrowser) Source

func (this *QTextBrowser) Source() *qtcore.QUrl

func (*QTextBrowser) SourceChanged

func (this *QTextBrowser) SourceChanged(arg0 qtcore.QUrl_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the source has changed, src being the new source.

Source changes happen both programmatically when calling setSource(), forward(), backword() or home() or when the user clicks on links or presses the equivalent key sequences.

type QTextBrowser_ITF

type QTextBrowser_ITF interface {
	QTextEdit_ITF
	QTextBrowser_PTR() *QTextBrowser
}

type QTextEdit

type QTextEdit struct {
	*QAbstractScrollArea
}

func NewQTextEdit

func NewQTextEdit(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTextEdit

Constructs an empty QTextEdit with parent parent.

func NewQTextEditFromPointer

func NewQTextEditFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTextEdit

func NewQTextEdit_1

func NewQTextEdit_1(text string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QTextEdit

Constructs an empty QTextEdit with parent parent.

func NewQTextEdit_1_

func NewQTextEdit_1_(text string) *QTextEdit

Constructs an empty QTextEdit with parent parent.

func NewQTextEdit__

func NewQTextEdit__() *QTextEdit

Constructs an empty QTextEdit with parent parent.

func (*QTextEdit) AcceptRichText

func (this *QTextEdit) AcceptRichText() bool

func (*QTextEdit) Alignment

func (this *QTextEdit) Alignment() int

Returns the alignment of the current paragraph.

See also setAlignment().

func (*QTextEdit) AnchorAt

func (this *QTextEdit) AnchorAt(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) string

Returns the reference of the anchor at position pos, or an empty string if no anchor exists at that point.

func (*QTextEdit) AutoFormatting

func (this *QTextEdit) AutoFormatting() int

func (*QTextEdit) CanInsertFromMimeData

func (this *QTextEdit) CanInsertFromMimeData(source qtcore.QMimeData_ITF) bool

This function returns true if the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, can be decoded and inserted into the document. It is called for example when during a drag operation the mouse enters this widget and it is necessary to determine whether it is possible to accept the drag and drop operation.

Reimplement this function to enable drag and drop support for additional MIME types.

func (*QTextEdit) CanPaste

func (this *QTextEdit) CanPaste() bool

Returns whether text can be pasted from the clipboard into the textedit.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QTextEdit) ChangeEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) ChangeEvent(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) Clear

func (this *QTextEdit) Clear()

Deletes all the text in the text edit.

Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.

See also cut(), setPlainText(), and setHtml().

func (*QTextEdit) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) ContextMenuEvent(e qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::contextMenuEvent().

Shows the standard context menu created with createStandardContextMenu().

If you do not want the text edit to have a context menu, you can set its contextMenuPolicy to Qt::NoContextMenu. If you want to customize the context menu, reimplement this function. If you want to extend the standard context menu, reimplement this function, call createStandardContextMenu() and extend the menu returned.

Information about the event is passed in the event object.

void MyTextEdit::contextMenuEvent(QContextMenuEvent *event)
{
    QMenu *menu = createStandardContextMenu();
    menu->addAction(tr("My Menu Item"));
    //...
    menu->exec(event->globalPos());
    delete menu;
}

func (*QTextEdit) Copy

func (this *QTextEdit) Copy()

Copies any selected text to the clipboard.

See also copyAvailable().

func (*QTextEdit) CopyAvailable

func (this *QTextEdit) CopyAvailable(b bool)

This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.

When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to false.

If yes is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If yes is false then copy() does nothing.

See also selectionChanged().

func (*QTextEdit) CreateMimeDataFromSelection

func (this *QTextEdit) CreateMimeDataFromSelection() *qtcore.QMimeData

This function returns a new MIME data object to represent the contents of the text edit's current selection. It is called when the selection needs to be encapsulated into a new QMimeData object; for example, when a drag and drop operation is started, or when data is copied to the clipboard.

If you reimplement this function, note that the ownership of the returned QMimeData object is passed to the caller. The selection can be retrieved by using the textCursor() function.

func (*QTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu

func (this *QTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu() *QMenu

This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the text edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.

We recommend that you use the createStandardContextMenu(QPoint) version instead which will enable the actions that are sensitive to where the user clicked.

func (*QTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu_1

func (this *QTextEdit) CreateStandardContextMenu_1(position qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QMenu

This function creates the standard context menu which is shown when the user clicks on the text edit with the right mouse button. It is called from the default contextMenuEvent() handler. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.

We recommend that you use the createStandardContextMenu(QPoint) version instead which will enable the actions that are sensitive to where the user clicked.

func (*QTextEdit) CurrentCharFormat

func (this *QTextEdit) CurrentCharFormat() *qtgui.QTextCharFormat

Returns the char format that is used when inserting new text.

See also setCurrentCharFormat().

func (*QTextEdit) CurrentCharFormatChanged

func (this *QTextEdit) CurrentCharFormatChanged(format qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

This signal is emitted if the current character format has changed, for example caused by a change of the cursor position.

The new format is f.

See also setCurrentCharFormat().

func (*QTextEdit) CurrentFont

func (this *QTextEdit) CurrentFont() *qtgui.QFont

Returns the font of the current format.

See also setCurrentFont(), setFontFamily(), and setFontPointSize().

func (*QTextEdit) CursorForPosition

func (this *QTextEdit) CursorForPosition(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtgui.QTextCursor

returns a QTextCursor at position pos (in viewport coordinates).

func (*QTextEdit) CursorPositionChanged

func (this *QTextEdit) CursorPositionChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor changed.

func (*QTextEdit) CursorRect

func (this *QTextEdit) CursorRect(cursor qtgui.QTextCursor_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor.

func (*QTextEdit) CursorRect_1

func (this *QTextEdit) CursorRect_1() *qtcore.QRect

returns a rectangle (in viewport coordinates) that includes the cursor.

func (*QTextEdit) CursorWidth

func (this *QTextEdit) CursorWidth() int

func (*QTextEdit) Cut

func (this *QTextEdit) Cut()

Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it from the text edit.

If there is no selected text nothing happens.

See also copy() and paste().

func (*QTextEdit) DoSetTextCursor

func (this *QTextEdit) DoSetTextCursor(cursor qtgui.QTextCursor_ITF)

func (*QTextEdit) Document

func (this *QTextEdit) Document() *qtgui.QTextDocument

func (*QTextEdit) DocumentTitle

func (this *QTextEdit) DocumentTitle() string

func (*QTextEdit) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) DragEnterEvent(e qtgui.QDragEnterEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragEnterEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) DragLeaveEvent(e qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragLeaveEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) DragMoveEvent(e qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) DropEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) DropEvent(e qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) EnsureCursorVisible

func (this *QTextEdit) EnsureCursorVisible()

Ensures that the cursor is visible by scrolling the text edit if necessary.

func (*QTextEdit) Event

func (this *QTextEdit) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

func (*QTextEdit) Find

func (this *QTextEdit) Find(exp string, options int) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QTextEdit) Find_1

func (this *QTextEdit) Find_1(exp qtcore.QRegExp_ITF, options int) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QTextEdit) Find_1_

func (this *QTextEdit) Find_1_(exp qtcore.QRegExp_ITF) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QTextEdit) Find__

func (this *QTextEdit) Find__(exp string) bool

Finds the next occurrence of the string, exp, using the given options. Returns true if exp was found and changes the cursor to select the match; otherwise returns false.

func (*QTextEdit) FocusInEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) FocusInEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusInEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QTextEdit) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusNextPrevChild().

func (*QTextEdit) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) FocusOutEvent(e qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::focusOutEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) FontFamily

func (this *QTextEdit) FontFamily() string

Returns the font family of the current format.

See also setFontFamily(), setCurrentFont(), and setFontPointSize().

func (*QTextEdit) FontItalic

func (this *QTextEdit) FontItalic() bool

Returns true if the font of the current format is italic; otherwise returns false.

See also setFontItalic().

func (*QTextEdit) FontPointSize

func (this *QTextEdit) FontPointSize() float64

Returns the point size of the font of the current format.

See also setFontFamily(), setCurrentFont(), and setFontPointSize().

func (*QTextEdit) FontUnderline

func (this *QTextEdit) FontUnderline() bool

Returns true if the font of the current format is underlined; otherwise returns false.

See also setFontUnderline().

func (*QTextEdit) FontWeight

func (this *QTextEdit) FontWeight() int

Returns the font weight of the current format.

See also setFontWeight(), setCurrentFont(), setFontPointSize(), and QFont::Weight.

func (*QTextEdit) GetCthis

func (this *QTextEdit) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTextEdit) InheritCanInsertFromMimeData

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritCanInsertFromMimeData(f func(source *qtcore.QMimeData) bool)

bool canInsertFromMimeData(const class QMimeData *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritChangeEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritCreateMimeDataFromSelection

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritCreateMimeDataFromSelection(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QMimeData * createMimeDataFromSelection()

func (*QTextEdit) InheritDoSetTextCursor

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritDoSetTextCursor(f func(cursor *qtgui.QTextCursor))

void doSetTextCursor(const class QTextCursor &)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragEnterEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QDragEnterEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritDropEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritInsertFromMimeData

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritInsertFromMimeData(f func(source *qtcore.QMimeData))

void insertFromMimeData(const class QMimeData *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritPaintEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritResizeEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritShowEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritTimerEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritWheelEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QTextEdit) InheritZoomInF

func (this *QTextEdit) InheritZoomInF(f func(range_ float32))

void zoomInF(float)

func (*QTextEdit) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) InputMethodEvent(arg0 qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QTextEdit) InputMethodQuery(property int) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QTextEdit) InputMethodQuery_1

func (this *QTextEdit) InputMethodQuery_1(query int, argument qtcore.QVariant_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Reimplemented from QWidget::inputMethodQuery().

func (*QTextEdit) InsertFromMimeData

func (this *QTextEdit) InsertFromMimeData(source qtcore.QMimeData_ITF)

This function inserts the contents of the MIME data object, specified by source, into the text edit at the current cursor position. It is called whenever text is inserted as the result of a clipboard paste operation, or when the text edit accepts data from a drag and drop operation.

Reimplement this function to enable drag and drop support for additional MIME types.

func (*QTextEdit) InsertHtml

func (this *QTextEdit) InsertHtml(text string)

Convenience slot that inserts text which is assumed to be of html formatting at the current cursor position.

It is equivalent to:

edit->textCursor().insertHtml(fragment);

Note: When using this function with a style sheet, the style sheet will only apply to the current block in the document. In order to apply a style sheet throughout a document, use QTextDocument::setDefaultStyleSheet() instead.

func (*QTextEdit) InsertPlainText

func (this *QTextEdit) InsertPlainText(text string)

Convenience slot that inserts text at the current cursor position.

It is equivalent to

edit->textCursor().insertText(text);

func (*QTextEdit) IsReadOnly

func (this *QTextEdit) IsReadOnly() bool

func (*QTextEdit) IsUndoRedoEnabled

func (this *QTextEdit) IsUndoRedoEnabled() bool

func (*QTextEdit) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) KeyPressEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) KeyReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyReleaseEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) LineWrapColumnOrWidth

func (this *QTextEdit) LineWrapColumnOrWidth() int

func (*QTextEdit) LineWrapMode

func (this *QTextEdit) LineWrapMode() int

func (*QTextEdit) LoadResource

func (this *QTextEdit) LoadResource(type_ int, name qtcore.QUrl_ITF) *qtcore.QVariant

Loads the resource specified by the given type and name.

This function is an extension of QTextDocument::loadResource().

See also QTextDocument::loadResource().

func (*QTextEdit) MergeCurrentCharFormat

func (this *QTextEdit) MergeCurrentCharFormat(modifier qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

Merges the properties specified in modifier into the current character format by calling QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the properties of modifier are directly applied to the selection.

See also QTextCursor::mergeCharFormat().

func (*QTextEdit) MetaObject

func (this *QTextEdit) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTextEdit) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) MouseDoubleClickEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) MouseMoveEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) MousePressEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) MousePressEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) MouseReleaseEvent(e qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) MoveCursor

func (this *QTextEdit) MoveCursor(operation int, mode int)

Moves the cursor by performing the given operation.

If mode is QTextCursor::KeepAnchor, the cursor selects the text it moves over. This is the same effect that the user achieves when they hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also QTextCursor::movePosition().

func (*QTextEdit) MoveCursor__

func (this *QTextEdit) MoveCursor__(operation int)

Moves the cursor by performing the given operation.

If mode is QTextCursor::KeepAnchor, the cursor selects the text it moves over. This is the same effect that the user achieves when they hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also QTextCursor::movePosition().

func (*QTextEdit) NewFromPointer

func (*QTextEdit) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTextEdit

func (*QTextEdit) OverwriteMode

func (this *QTextEdit) OverwriteMode() bool

func (*QTextEdit) PaintEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) PaintEvent(e qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events passed in event. It is usually unnecessary to reimplement this function in a subclass of QTextEdit.

Warning: The underlying text document must not be modified from within a reimplementation of this function.

func (*QTextEdit) Paste

func (this *QTextEdit) Paste()

Pastes the text from the clipboard into the text edit at the current cursor position.

If there is no text in the clipboard nothing happens.

To change the behavior of this function, i.e. to modify what QTextEdit can paste and how it is being pasted, reimplement the virtual canInsertFromMimeData() and insertFromMimeData() functions.

See also cut() and copy().

func (*QTextEdit) PlaceholderText

func (this *QTextEdit) PlaceholderText() string

func (*QTextEdit) Print

func (this *QTextEdit) Print(printer qtgui.QPagedPaintDevice_ITF)

Convenience function to print the text edit's document to the given printer. This is equivalent to calling the print method on the document directly except that this function also supports QPrinter::Selection as print range.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also QTextDocument::print().

func (*QTextEdit) QTextEdit_PTR

func (ptr *QTextEdit) QTextEdit_PTR() *QTextEdit

func (*QTextEdit) Redo

func (this *QTextEdit) Redo()

Redoes the last operation.

If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also undo().

func (*QTextEdit) RedoAvailable

func (this *QTextEdit) RedoAvailable(b bool)

This signal is emitted whenever redo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).

func (*QTextEdit) ResizeEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) ResizeEvent(e qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QTextEdit) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().

func (*QTextEdit) ScrollToAnchor

func (this *QTextEdit) ScrollToAnchor(name string)

Scrolls the text edit so that the anchor with the given name is visible; does nothing if the name is empty, or is already visible, or isn't found.

func (*QTextEdit) SelectAll

func (this *QTextEdit) SelectAll()

Selects all text.

See also copy(), cut(), and textCursor().

func (*QTextEdit) SelectionChanged

func (this *QTextEdit) SelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.

See also copyAvailable().

func (*QTextEdit) SetAcceptRichText

func (this *QTextEdit) SetAcceptRichText(accept bool)

func (*QTextEdit) SetAlignment

func (this *QTextEdit) SetAlignment(a int)

Sets the alignment of the current paragraph to a. Valid alignments are Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight, Qt::AlignJustify and Qt::AlignCenter (which centers horizontally).

See also alignment().

func (*QTextEdit) SetAutoFormatting

func (this *QTextEdit) SetAutoFormatting(features int)

func (*QTextEdit) SetCthis

func (this *QTextEdit) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTextEdit) SetCurrentCharFormat

func (this *QTextEdit) SetCurrentCharFormat(format qtgui.QTextCharFormat_ITF)

Sets the char format that is be used when inserting new text to format by calling QTextCursor::setCharFormat() on the editor's cursor. If the editor has a selection then the char format is directly applied to the selection.

See also currentCharFormat().

func (*QTextEdit) SetCurrentFont

func (this *QTextEdit) SetCurrentFont(f qtgui.QFont_ITF)

Sets the font of the current format to f.

See also currentFont(), setFontPointSize(), and setFontFamily().

func (*QTextEdit) SetCursorWidth

func (this *QTextEdit) SetCursorWidth(width int)

func (*QTextEdit) SetDocument

func (this *QTextEdit) SetDocument(document qtgui.QTextDocument_ITF)

func (*QTextEdit) SetDocumentTitle

func (this *QTextEdit) SetDocumentTitle(title string)

func (*QTextEdit) SetFontFamily

func (this *QTextEdit) SetFontFamily(fontFamily string)

Sets the font family of the current format to fontFamily.

See also fontFamily() and setCurrentFont().

func (*QTextEdit) SetFontItalic

func (this *QTextEdit) SetFontItalic(b bool)

If italic is true, sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets the current format to non-italic.

See also fontItalic().

func (*QTextEdit) SetFontPointSize

func (this *QTextEdit) SetFontPointSize(s float64)

Sets the point size of the current format to s.

Note that if s is zero or negative, the behavior of this function is not defined.

See also fontPointSize(), setCurrentFont(), and setFontFamily().

func (*QTextEdit) SetFontUnderline

func (this *QTextEdit) SetFontUnderline(b bool)

If underline is true, sets the current format to underline; otherwise sets the current format to non-underline.

See also fontUnderline().

func (*QTextEdit) SetFontWeight

func (this *QTextEdit) SetFontWeight(w int)

Sets the font weight of the current format to the given weight, where the value used is in the range defined by the QFont::Weight enum.

See also fontWeight(), setCurrentFont(), and setFontFamily().

func (*QTextEdit) SetHtml

func (this *QTextEdit) SetHtml(text string)

func (*QTextEdit) SetLineWrapColumnOrWidth

func (this *QTextEdit) SetLineWrapColumnOrWidth(w int)

func (*QTextEdit) SetLineWrapMode

func (this *QTextEdit) SetLineWrapMode(mode int)

func (*QTextEdit) SetOverwriteMode

func (this *QTextEdit) SetOverwriteMode(overwrite bool)

func (*QTextEdit) SetPlaceholderText

func (this *QTextEdit) SetPlaceholderText(placeholderText string)

func (*QTextEdit) SetPlainText

func (this *QTextEdit) SetPlainText(text string)

Changes the text of the text edit to the string text. Any previous text is removed.

text is interpreted as plain text.

Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.

Note: Setter function for property plainText.

See also toPlainText().

func (*QTextEdit) SetReadOnly

func (this *QTextEdit) SetReadOnly(ro bool)

func (*QTextEdit) SetTabChangesFocus

func (this *QTextEdit) SetTabChangesFocus(b bool)

func (*QTextEdit) SetTabStopDistance

func (this *QTextEdit) SetTabStopDistance(distance float64)

func (*QTextEdit) SetTabStopWidth

func (this *QTextEdit) SetTabStopWidth(width int)

func (*QTextEdit) SetText

func (this *QTextEdit) SetText(text string)

Sets the text edit's text. The text can be plain text or HTML and the text edit will try to guess the right format.

Use setHtml() or setPlainText() directly to avoid text edit's guessing.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also toPlainText() and toHtml().

func (*QTextEdit) SetTextBackgroundColor

func (this *QTextEdit) SetTextBackgroundColor(c qtgui.QColor_ITF)

Sets the text background color of the current format to c.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also textBackgroundColor().

func (*QTextEdit) SetTextColor

func (this *QTextEdit) SetTextColor(c qtgui.QColor_ITF)

Sets the text color of the current format to c.

See also textColor().

func (*QTextEdit) SetTextCursor

func (this *QTextEdit) SetTextCursor(cursor qtgui.QTextCursor_ITF)

Sets the visible cursor.

See also textCursor().

func (*QTextEdit) SetTextInteractionFlags

func (this *QTextEdit) SetTextInteractionFlags(flags int)

func (*QTextEdit) SetUndoRedoEnabled

func (this *QTextEdit) SetUndoRedoEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QTextEdit) SetWordWrapMode

func (this *QTextEdit) SetWordWrapMode(policy int)

func (*QTextEdit) ShowEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) ShowEvent(arg0 qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) TabChangesFocus

func (this *QTextEdit) TabChangesFocus() bool

func (*QTextEdit) TabStopDistance

func (this *QTextEdit) TabStopDistance() float64

func (*QTextEdit) TabStopWidth

func (this *QTextEdit) TabStopWidth() int

func (*QTextEdit) TextBackgroundColor

func (this *QTextEdit) TextBackgroundColor() *qtgui.QColor

Returns the text background color of the current format.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also setTextBackgroundColor().

func (*QTextEdit) TextChanged

func (this *QTextEdit) TextChanged()

This signal is emitted whenever the document's content changes; for example, when text is inserted or deleted, or when formatting is applied.

Note: Notifier signal for property html.

func (*QTextEdit) TextColor

func (this *QTextEdit) TextColor() *qtgui.QColor

Returns the text color of the current format.

See also setTextColor().

func (*QTextEdit) TextCursor

func (this *QTextEdit) TextCursor() *qtgui.QTextCursor

Returns a copy of the QTextCursor that represents the currently visible cursor. Note that changes on the returned cursor do not affect QTextEdit's cursor; use setTextCursor() to update the visible cursor.

See also setTextCursor().

func (*QTextEdit) TextInteractionFlags

func (this *QTextEdit) TextInteractionFlags() int

func (*QTextEdit) TimerEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) TimerEvent(e qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

func (*QTextEdit) ToHtml

func (this *QTextEdit) ToHtml() string

func (*QTextEdit) ToPlainText

func (this *QTextEdit) ToPlainText() string

QString QTextEdit::toPlainText() const

Returns the text of the text edit as plain text.

Note: Getter function for property plainText.

See also QTextEdit::setPlainText().

func (*QTextEdit) Undo

func (this *QTextEdit) Undo()

Undoes the last operation.

If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in the undo/redo history, nothing happens.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also redo().

func (*QTextEdit) UndoAvailable

func (this *QTextEdit) UndoAvailable(b bool)

This signal is emitted whenever undo operations become available (available is true) or unavailable (available is false).

func (*QTextEdit) WheelEvent

func (this *QTextEdit) WheelEvent(e qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::wheelEvent().

func (*QTextEdit) WordWrapMode

func (this *QTextEdit) WordWrapMode() int

func (*QTextEdit) ZoomIn

func (this *QTextEdit) ZoomIn(range_ int)

Zooms in on the text by making the base font size range points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomOut().

func (*QTextEdit) ZoomInF

func (this *QTextEdit) ZoomInF(range_ float32)

func (*QTextEdit) ZoomIn__

func (this *QTextEdit) ZoomIn__()

Zooms in on the text by making the base font size range points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomOut().

func (*QTextEdit) ZoomOut

func (this *QTextEdit) ZoomOut(range_ int)

This is an overloaded function.

Zooms out on the text by making the base font size range points smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomIn().

func (*QTextEdit) ZoomOut__

func (this *QTextEdit) ZoomOut__()

This is an overloaded function.

Zooms out on the text by making the base font size range points smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not change the size of any images.

See also zoomIn().

type QTextEdit_ITF

type QTextEdit_ITF interface {
	QAbstractScrollArea_ITF
	QTextEdit_PTR() *QTextEdit
}

type QTextEdit__AutoFormattingFlag

type QTextEdit__AutoFormattingFlag = int
const QTextEdit__AutoAll QTextEdit__AutoFormattingFlag = -1
const QTextEdit__AutoBulletList QTextEdit__AutoFormattingFlag = 1
const QTextEdit__AutoNone QTextEdit__AutoFormattingFlag = 0

type QTextEdit__LineWrapMode

type QTextEdit__LineWrapMode = int

ConstantValue QTextEdit::NoWrap0 QTextEdit::WidgetWidth1 QTextEdit::FixedPixelWidth2 QTextEdit::FixedColumnWidth3

const QTextEdit__FixedColumnWidth QTextEdit__LineWrapMode = 3
const QTextEdit__FixedPixelWidth QTextEdit__LineWrapMode = 2
const QTextEdit__NoWrap QTextEdit__LineWrapMode = 0
const QTextEdit__WidgetWidth QTextEdit__LineWrapMode = 1

type QTileRules

type QTileRules struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQTileRules

func NewQTileRules(horizontalRule int, verticalRule int) *QTileRules

func NewQTileRulesFromPointer

func NewQTileRulesFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTileRules

func NewQTileRules_1

func NewQTileRules_1(rule int) *QTileRules

func NewQTileRules_1_

func NewQTileRules_1_() *QTileRules

func (*QTileRules) GetCthis

func (this *QTileRules) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTileRules) NewFromPointer

func (*QTileRules) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTileRules

func (*QTileRules) QTileRules_PTR

func (ptr *QTileRules) QTileRules_PTR() *QTileRules

func (*QTileRules) SetCthis

func (this *QTileRules) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QTileRules_ITF

type QTileRules_ITF interface {
	QTileRules_PTR() *QTileRules
}

type QTimeEdit

type QTimeEdit struct {
	*QDateTimeEdit
}

func NewQTimeEdit

func NewQTimeEdit(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTimeEdit

func NewQTimeEditFromPointer

func NewQTimeEditFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTimeEdit

func NewQTimeEdit_1

func NewQTimeEdit_1(time qtcore.QTime_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QTimeEdit

func NewQTimeEdit_1_

func NewQTimeEdit_1_(time qtcore.QTime_ITF) *QTimeEdit

func NewQTimeEdit__

func NewQTimeEdit__() *QTimeEdit

func (*QTimeEdit) GetCthis

func (this *QTimeEdit) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTimeEdit) MetaObject

func (this *QTimeEdit) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTimeEdit) NewFromPointer

func (*QTimeEdit) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTimeEdit

func (*QTimeEdit) QTimeEdit_PTR

func (ptr *QTimeEdit) QTimeEdit_PTR() *QTimeEdit

func (*QTimeEdit) SetCthis

func (this *QTimeEdit) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTimeEdit) UserTimeChanged

func (this *QTimeEdit) UserTimeChanged(time qtcore.QTime_ITF)

type QTimeEdit_ITF

type QTimeEdit_ITF interface {
	QDateTimeEdit_ITF
	QTimeEdit_PTR() *QTimeEdit
}

type QToolBar

type QToolBar struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQToolBar

func NewQToolBar(title string, parent QWidget_ITF) *QToolBar

Constructs a QToolBar with the given parent.

The given window title identifies the toolbar and is shown in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQToolBarFromPointer

func NewQToolBarFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolBar

func NewQToolBar_1

func NewQToolBar_1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QToolBar

Constructs a QToolBar with the given parent.

The given window title identifies the toolbar and is shown in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQToolBar_1_

func NewQToolBar_1_() *QToolBar

Constructs a QToolBar with the given parent.

The given window title identifies the toolbar and is shown in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func NewQToolBar__

func NewQToolBar__(title string) *QToolBar

Constructs a QToolBar with the given parent.

The given window title identifies the toolbar and is shown in the context menu provided by QMainWindow.

See also setWindowTitle().

func (*QToolBar) ActionAt

func (this *QToolBar) ActionAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QAction

Returns the action at point p. This function returns zero if no action was found.

See also QWidget::childAt().

func (*QToolBar) ActionAt_1

func (this *QToolBar) ActionAt_1(x int, y int) *QAction

Returns the action at point p. This function returns zero if no action was found.

See also QWidget::childAt().

func (*QToolBar) ActionEvent

func (this *QToolBar) ActionEvent(event qtgui.QActionEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().

func (*QToolBar) ActionGeometry

func (this *QToolBar) ActionGeometry(action QAction_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

func (*QToolBar) ActionTriggered

func (this *QToolBar) ActionTriggered(action QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when an action in this toolbar is triggered. This happens when the action's tool button is pressed, or when the action is triggered in some other way outside the toolbar. The parameter holds the triggered action.

func (*QToolBar) AddAction

func (this *QToolBar) AddAction(text string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

Creates a new action with the given text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar.

func (*QToolBar) AddAction_1

func (this *QToolBar) AddAction_1(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

Creates a new action with the given text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar.

func (*QToolBar) AddAction_2

func (this *QToolBar) AddAction_2(text string, receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

Creates a new action with the given text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar.

func (*QToolBar) AddAction_3

func (this *QToolBar) AddAction_3(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string, receiver qtcore.QObject_ITF, member string) *QAction

This is an overloaded function.

Creates a new action with the given text. This action is added to the end of the toolbar.

func (*QToolBar) AddSeparator

func (this *QToolBar) AddSeparator() *QAction

Adds a separator to the end of the toolbar.

See also insertSeparator().

func (*QToolBar) AddWidget

func (this *QToolBar) AddWidget(widget QWidget_ITF) *QAction

Adds the given widget to the toolbar as the toolbar's last item.

The toolbar takes ownership of widget.

If you add a QToolButton with this method, the toolbar's Qt::ToolButtonStyle will not be respected.

Note: You should use QAction::setVisible() to change the visibility of the widget. Using QWidget::setVisible(), QWidget::show() and QWidget::hide() does not work.

See also insertWidget().

func (*QToolBar) AllowedAreas

func (this *QToolBar) AllowedAreas() int

func (*QToolBar) AllowedAreasChanged

func (this *QToolBar) AllowedAreasChanged(allowedAreas int)

This signal is emitted when the collection of allowed areas for the toolbar is changed. The new areas in which the toolbar can be positioned are specified by allowedAreas.

Note: Notifier signal for property allowedAreas.

See also allowedAreas.

func (*QToolBar) ChangeEvent

func (this *QToolBar) ChangeEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QToolBar) Clear

func (this *QToolBar) Clear()

Removes all actions from the toolbar.

See also removeAction().

func (*QToolBar) Event

func (this *QToolBar) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QToolBar) GetCthis

func (this *QToolBar) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QToolBar) IconSize

func (this *QToolBar) IconSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QToolBar) IconSizeChanged

func (this *QToolBar) IconSizeChanged(iconSize qtcore.QSize_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the icon size is changed. The iconSize parameter holds the toolbar's new icon size.

Note: Notifier signal for property iconSize.

See also iconSize and QMainWindow::iconSize.

func (*QToolBar) InheritActionEvent

func (this *QToolBar) InheritActionEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QActionEvent))

void actionEvent(class QActionEvent *)

func (*QToolBar) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QToolBar) InheritChangeEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolBar) InheritEvent

func (this *QToolBar) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolBar) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QToolBar) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionToolBar))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionToolBar *)

func (*QToolBar) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QToolBar) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QToolBar) InitStyleOption

func (this *QToolBar) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionToolBar_ITF)

func (*QToolBar) InsertSeparator

func (this *QToolBar) InsertSeparator(before QAction_ITF) *QAction

Inserts a separator into the toolbar in front of the toolbar item associated with the before action.

See also addSeparator().

func (*QToolBar) InsertWidget

func (this *QToolBar) InsertWidget(before QAction_ITF, widget QWidget_ITF) *QAction

Inserts the given widget in front of the toolbar item associated with the before action.

Note: You should use QAction::setVisible() to change the visibility of the widget. Using QWidget::setVisible(), QWidget::show() and QWidget::hide() does not work.

See also addWidget().

func (*QToolBar) IsAreaAllowed

func (this *QToolBar) IsAreaAllowed(area int) bool

Returns true if this toolbar is dockable in the given area; otherwise returns false.

func (*QToolBar) IsFloatable

func (this *QToolBar) IsFloatable() bool

func (*QToolBar) IsFloating

func (this *QToolBar) IsFloating() bool

func (*QToolBar) IsMovable

func (this *QToolBar) IsMovable() bool

func (*QToolBar) MetaObject

func (this *QToolBar) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QToolBar) MovableChanged

func (this *QToolBar) MovableChanged(movable bool)

This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes movable or fixed. If the toolbar can be moved, movable is true; otherwise it is false.

Note: Notifier signal for property movable.

See also movable.

func (*QToolBar) NewFromPointer

func (*QToolBar) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolBar

func (*QToolBar) Orientation

func (this *QToolBar) Orientation() int

func (*QToolBar) OrientationChanged

func (this *QToolBar) OrientationChanged(orientation int)

This signal is emitted when the orientation of the toolbar changes. The orientation parameter holds the toolbar's new orientation.

Note: Notifier signal for property orientation.

See also orientation.

func (*QToolBar) PaintEvent

func (this *QToolBar) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QToolBar) QToolBar_PTR

func (ptr *QToolBar) QToolBar_PTR() *QToolBar

func (*QToolBar) SetAllowedAreas

func (this *QToolBar) SetAllowedAreas(areas int)

func (*QToolBar) SetCthis

func (this *QToolBar) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QToolBar) SetFloatable

func (this *QToolBar) SetFloatable(floatable bool)

func (*QToolBar) SetIconSize

func (this *QToolBar) SetIconSize(iconSize qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QToolBar) SetMovable

func (this *QToolBar) SetMovable(movable bool)

func (*QToolBar) SetOrientation

func (this *QToolBar) SetOrientation(orientation int)

func (*QToolBar) SetToolButtonStyle

func (this *QToolBar) SetToolButtonStyle(toolButtonStyle int)

func (*QToolBar) ToggleViewAction

func (this *QToolBar) ToggleViewAction() *QAction

Returns a checkable action that can be used to show or hide this toolbar.

The action's text is set to the toolbar's window title.

See also QAction::text and QWidget::windowTitle.

func (*QToolBar) ToolButtonStyle

func (this *QToolBar) ToolButtonStyle() int

func (*QToolBar) ToolButtonStyleChanged

func (this *QToolBar) ToolButtonStyleChanged(toolButtonStyle int)

This signal is emitted when the tool button style is changed. The toolButtonStyle parameter holds the toolbar's new tool button style.

Note: Notifier signal for property toolButtonStyle.

See also toolButtonStyle and QMainWindow::toolButtonStyle.

func (*QToolBar) TopLevelChanged

func (this *QToolBar) TopLevelChanged(topLevel bool)

This signal is emitted when the floating property changes. The topLevel parameter is true if the toolbar is now floating; otherwise it is false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also isWindow().

func (*QToolBar) VisibilityChanged

func (this *QToolBar) VisibilityChanged(visible bool)

This signal is emitted when the toolbar becomes visible (or invisible). This happens when the widget is hidden or shown.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

func (*QToolBar) WidgetForAction

func (this *QToolBar) WidgetForAction(action QAction_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the widget associated with the specified action.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also addWidget().

type QToolBar_ITF

type QToolBar_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QToolBar_PTR() *QToolBar
}

type QToolBox

type QToolBox struct {
	*QFrame
}

func NewQToolBox

func NewQToolBox(parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QToolBox

Constructs a new toolbox with the given parent and the flags, f.

func NewQToolBoxFromPointer

func NewQToolBoxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolBox

func NewQToolBox__

func NewQToolBox__() *QToolBox

Constructs a new toolbox with the given parent and the flags, f.

func NewQToolBox__1

func NewQToolBox__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QToolBox

Constructs a new toolbox with the given parent and the flags, f.

func (*QToolBox) AddItem

func (this *QToolBox) AddItem(widget QWidget_ITF, text string) int

Adds the widget in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The new tab's text is set to text, and the iconSet is displayed to the left of the text. Returns the new tab's index.

func (*QToolBox) AddItem_1

func (this *QToolBox) AddItem_1(widget QWidget_ITF, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) int

Adds the widget in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The new tab's text is set to text, and the iconSet is displayed to the left of the text. Returns the new tab's index.

func (*QToolBox) ChangeEvent

func (this *QToolBox) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QToolBox) Count

func (this *QToolBox) Count() int

func (*QToolBox) CurrentChanged

func (this *QToolBox) CurrentChanged(index int)

This signal is emitted when the current item is changed. The new current item's index is passed in index, or -1 if there is no current item.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentIndex.

func (*QToolBox) CurrentIndex

func (this *QToolBox) CurrentIndex() int

func (*QToolBox) CurrentWidget

func (this *QToolBox) CurrentWidget() *QWidget

Returns a pointer to the current widget, or 0 if there is no such item.

See also currentIndex() and setCurrentWidget().

func (*QToolBox) Event

func (this *QToolBox) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QToolBox) GetCthis

func (this *QToolBox) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QToolBox) IndexOf

func (this *QToolBox) IndexOf(widget QWidget_ITF) int

Returns the index of widget, or -1 if the item does not exist.

func (*QToolBox) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QToolBox) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolBox) InheritEvent

func (this *QToolBox) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolBox) InheritItemInserted

func (this *QToolBox) InheritItemInserted(f func(index int))

void itemInserted(int)

func (*QToolBox) InheritItemRemoved

func (this *QToolBox) InheritItemRemoved(f func(index int))

void itemRemoved(int)

func (*QToolBox) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QToolBox) InheritShowEvent(f func(e *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QToolBox) InsertItem

func (this *QToolBox) InsertItem(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, text string) int

Inserts the widget at position index, or at the bottom of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's text is set to text, and the icon is displayed to the left of the text. Returns the new item's index.

func (*QToolBox) InsertItem_1

func (this *QToolBox) InsertItem_1(index int, widget QWidget_ITF, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF, text string) int

Inserts the widget at position index, or at the bottom of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's text is set to text, and the icon is displayed to the left of the text. Returns the new item's index.

func (*QToolBox) IsItemEnabled

func (this *QToolBox) IsItemEnabled(index int) bool

Returns true if the item at position index is enabled; otherwise returns false.

func (*QToolBox) ItemIcon

func (this *QToolBox) ItemIcon(index int) *qtgui.QIcon

Returns the icon of the item at position index, or a null icon if index is out of range.

See also setItemIcon().

func (*QToolBox) ItemInserted

func (this *QToolBox) ItemInserted(index int)

This virtual handler is called after a new item was added or inserted at position index.

See also itemRemoved().

func (*QToolBox) ItemRemoved

func (this *QToolBox) ItemRemoved(index int)

This virtual handler is called after an item was removed from position index.

See also itemInserted().

func (*QToolBox) ItemText

func (this *QToolBox) ItemText(index int) string

Returns the text of the item at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.

See also setItemText().

func (*QToolBox) ItemToolTip

func (this *QToolBox) ItemToolTip(index int) string

Returns the tooltip of the item at position index, or an empty string if index is out of range.

See also setItemToolTip().

func (*QToolBox) MetaObject

func (this *QToolBox) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QToolBox) NewFromPointer

func (*QToolBox) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolBox

func (*QToolBox) QToolBox_PTR

func (ptr *QToolBox) QToolBox_PTR() *QToolBox

func (*QToolBox) RemoveItem

func (this *QToolBox) RemoveItem(index int)

Removes the item at position index from the toolbox. Note that the widget is not deleted.

func (*QToolBox) SetCthis

func (this *QToolBox) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QToolBox) SetCurrentIndex

func (this *QToolBox) SetCurrentIndex(index int)

func (*QToolBox) SetCurrentWidget

func (this *QToolBox) SetCurrentWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Makeswidget the current widget. The widget must be an item in this tool box.

See also addItem(), setCurrentIndex(), and currentWidget().

func (*QToolBox) SetItemEnabled

func (this *QToolBox) SetItemEnabled(index int, enabled bool)

If enabled is true then the item at position index is enabled; otherwise the item at position index is disabled.

See also isItemEnabled().

func (*QToolBox) SetItemIcon

func (this *QToolBox) SetItemIcon(index int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

Sets the icon of the item at position index to icon.

See also itemIcon().

func (*QToolBox) SetItemText

func (this *QToolBox) SetItemText(index int, text string)

Sets the text of the item at position index to text.

If the provided text contains an ampersand character ('&'), a mnemonic is automatically created for it. The character that follows the '&' will be used as the shortcut key. Any previous mnemonic will be overwritten, or cleared if no mnemonic is defined by the text. See the QShortcut documentation for details (to display an actual ampersand, use '&&').

See also itemText().

func (*QToolBox) SetItemToolTip

func (this *QToolBox) SetItemToolTip(index int, toolTip string)

Sets the tooltip of the item at position index to toolTip.

See also itemToolTip().

func (*QToolBox) ShowEvent

func (this *QToolBox) ShowEvent(e qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::showEvent().

func (*QToolBox) Widget

func (this *QToolBox) Widget(index int) *QWidget

Returns the widget at position index, or 0 if there is no such item.

type QToolBox_ITF

type QToolBox_ITF interface {
	QFrame_ITF
	QToolBox_PTR() *QToolBox
}

type QToolButton

type QToolButton struct {
	*QAbstractButton
}

func NewQToolButton

func NewQToolButton(parent QWidget_ITF) *QToolButton

Constructs an empty tool button with parent parent.

func NewQToolButtonFromPointer

func NewQToolButtonFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolButton

func NewQToolButton__

func NewQToolButton__() *QToolButton

Constructs an empty tool button with parent parent.

func (*QToolButton) ActionEvent

func (this *QToolButton) ActionEvent(arg0 qtgui.QActionEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::actionEvent().

func (*QToolButton) ArrowType

func (this *QToolButton) ArrowType() int

func (*QToolButton) AutoRaise

func (this *QToolButton) AutoRaise() bool

func (*QToolButton) ChangeEvent

func (this *QToolButton) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::changeEvent().

func (*QToolButton) DefaultAction

func (this *QToolButton) DefaultAction() *QAction

Returns the default action.

See also setDefaultAction().

func (*QToolButton) EnterEvent

func (this *QToolButton) EnterEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::enterEvent().

func (*QToolButton) Event

func (this *QToolButton) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QToolButton) GetCthis

func (this *QToolButton) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QToolButton) HitButton

func (this *QToolButton) HitButton(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::hitButton().

func (*QToolButton) InheritActionEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritActionEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QActionEvent))

void actionEvent(class QActionEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritEnterEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritEnterEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void enterEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritHitButton

func (this *QToolButton) InheritHitButton(f func(pos *qtcore.QPoint) bool)

bool hitButton(const class QPoint &)

func (*QToolButton) InheritInitStyleOption

func (this *QToolButton) InheritInitStyleOption(f func(option *QStyleOptionToolButton))

void initStyleOption(class QStyleOptionToolButton *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritLeaveEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritLeaveEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void leaveEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritNextCheckState

func (this *QToolButton) InheritNextCheckState(f func())

void nextCheckState()

func (*QToolButton) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritPaintEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QToolButton) InheritTimerEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QToolButton) InitStyleOption

func (this *QToolButton) InitStyleOption(option QStyleOptionToolButton_ITF)

Initialize option with the values from this QToolButton. This method is useful for subclasses when they need a QStyleOptionToolButton, but don't want to fill in all the information themselves.

See also QStyleOption::initFrom().

func (*QToolButton) LeaveEvent

func (this *QToolButton) LeaveEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::leaveEvent().

func (*QToolButton) Menu

func (this *QToolButton) Menu() *QMenu

Returns the associated menu, or 0 if no menu has been defined.

See also setMenu().

func (*QToolButton) MetaObject

func (this *QToolButton) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QToolButton) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QToolButton) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::minimumSizeHint().

func (*QToolButton) MousePressEvent

func (this *QToolButton) MousePressEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QToolButton) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QToolButton) MouseReleaseEvent(arg0 qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QToolButton) NewFromPointer

func (*QToolButton) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolButton

func (*QToolButton) NextCheckState

func (this *QToolButton) NextCheckState()

Reimplemented from QAbstractButton::nextCheckState().

func (*QToolButton) PaintEvent

func (this *QToolButton) PaintEvent(arg0 qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

Paints the button in response to the paint event.

func (*QToolButton) PopupMode

func (this *QToolButton) PopupMode() int

func (*QToolButton) QToolButton_PTR

func (ptr *QToolButton) QToolButton_PTR() *QToolButton

func (*QToolButton) SetArrowType

func (this *QToolButton) SetArrowType(type_ int)

func (*QToolButton) SetAutoRaise

func (this *QToolButton) SetAutoRaise(enable bool)

func (*QToolButton) SetCthis

func (this *QToolButton) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QToolButton) SetDefaultAction

func (this *QToolButton) SetDefaultAction(arg0 QAction_ITF)

Sets the default action to action.

If a tool button has a default action, the action defines the button's properties like text, icon, tool tip, etc.

See also defaultAction().

func (*QToolButton) SetMenu

func (this *QToolButton) SetMenu(menu QMenu_ITF)

Associates the given menu with this tool button.

The menu will be shown according to the button's popupMode.

Ownership of the menu is not transferred to the tool button.

See also menu().

func (*QToolButton) SetPopupMode

func (this *QToolButton) SetPopupMode(mode int)

func (*QToolButton) SetToolButtonStyle

func (this *QToolButton) SetToolButtonStyle(style int)

func (*QToolButton) ShowMenu

func (this *QToolButton) ShowMenu()

Shows (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return until the popup menu has been closed by the user.

func (*QToolButton) SizeHint

func (this *QToolButton) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QToolButton) TimerEvent

func (this *QToolButton) TimerEvent(arg0 qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QToolButton) ToolButtonStyle

func (this *QToolButton) ToolButtonStyle() int

func (*QToolButton) Triggered

func (this *QToolButton) Triggered(arg0 QAction_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the given action is triggered.

The action may also be associated with other parts of the user interface, such as menu items and keyboard shortcuts. Sharing actions in this way helps make the user interface more consistent and is often less work to implement.

type QToolButton_ITF

type QToolButton_ITF interface {
	QAbstractButton_ITF
	QToolButton_PTR() *QToolButton
}

type QToolButton__ToolButtonPopupMode

type QToolButton__ToolButtonPopupMode = int

Describes how a menu should be popped up for tool buttons that has a menu set or contains a list of actions.

const QToolButton__DelayedPopup QToolButton__ToolButtonPopupMode = 0

After pressing and holding the tool button down for a certain amount of time (the timeout is style dependent, see QStyle::SH_ToolButton_PopupDelay), the menu is displayed. A typical application example is the "back" button in some web browsers's tool bars. If the user clicks it, the browser simply browses back to the previous page. If the user presses and holds the button down for a while, the tool button shows a menu containing the current history list

const QToolButton__InstantPopup QToolButton__ToolButtonPopupMode = 2

The menu is displayed, without delay, when the tool button is pressed. In this mode, the button's own action is not triggered.

const QToolButton__MenuButtonPopup QToolButton__ToolButtonPopupMode = 1

In this mode the tool button displays a special arrow to indicate that a menu is present. The menu is displayed when the arrow part of the button is pressed.

type QToolTip

type QToolTip struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQToolTipFromPointer

func NewQToolTipFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolTip

func (*QToolTip) Font

func (this *QToolTip) Font() *qtgui.QFont

Returns the font used to render tooltips.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also setFont().

func (*QToolTip) GetCthis

func (this *QToolTip) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QToolTip) HideText

func (this *QToolTip) HideText()

Hides the tool tip. This is the same as calling showText() with an empty string.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also showText().

func (*QToolTip) IsVisible

func (this *QToolTip) IsVisible() bool

Returns true if this tooltip is currently shown.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also showText().

func (*QToolTip) NewFromPointer

func (*QToolTip) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QToolTip

func (*QToolTip) Palette

func (this *QToolTip) Palette() *qtgui.QPalette

Returns the palette used to render tooltips.

Note: Tool tips use the inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.

See also setPalette().

func (*QToolTip) QToolTip_PTR

func (ptr *QToolTip) QToolTip_PTR() *QToolTip

func (*QToolTip) SetCthis

func (this *QToolTip) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QToolTip) SetFont

func (this *QToolTip) SetFont(arg0 qtgui.QFont_ITF)

Sets the font used to render tooltips.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also font().

func (*QToolTip) SetPalette

func (this *QToolTip) SetPalette(arg0 qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

Sets the palette used to render tooltips.

Note: Tool tips use the inactive color group of QPalette, because tool tips are not active windows.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also palette().

func (*QToolTip) ShowText

func (this *QToolTip) ShowText(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF)

Shows text as a tool tip, with the global position pos as the point of interest. The tool tip will be shown with a platform specific offset from this point of interest.

If you specify a non-empty rect the tip will be hidden as soon as you move your cursor out of this area.

The rect is in the coordinates of the widget you specify with w. If the rect is not empty you must specify a widget. Otherwise this argument can be 0 but it is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.

If text is empty the tool tip is hidden. If the text is the same as the currently shown tooltip, the tip will not move. You can force moving by first hiding the tip with an empty text, and then showing the new tip at the new position.

func (*QToolTip) ShowText_1

func (this *QToolTip) ShowText_1(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Shows text as a tool tip, with the global position pos as the point of interest. The tool tip will be shown with a platform specific offset from this point of interest.

If you specify a non-empty rect the tip will be hidden as soon as you move your cursor out of this area.

The rect is in the coordinates of the widget you specify with w. If the rect is not empty you must specify a widget. Otherwise this argument can be 0 but it is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.

If text is empty the tool tip is hidden. If the text is the same as the currently shown tooltip, the tip will not move. You can force moving by first hiding the tip with an empty text, and then showing the new tip at the new position.

func (*QToolTip) ShowText_2

func (this *QToolTip) ShowText_2(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, msecShowTime int)

Shows text as a tool tip, with the global position pos as the point of interest. The tool tip will be shown with a platform specific offset from this point of interest.

If you specify a non-empty rect the tip will be hidden as soon as you move your cursor out of this area.

The rect is in the coordinates of the widget you specify with w. If the rect is not empty you must specify a widget. Otherwise this argument can be 0 but it is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.

If text is empty the tool tip is hidden. If the text is the same as the currently shown tooltip, the tip will not move. You can force moving by first hiding the tip with an empty text, and then showing the new tip at the new position.

func (*QToolTip) ShowText__

func (this *QToolTip) ShowText__(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string)

Shows text as a tool tip, with the global position pos as the point of interest. The tool tip will be shown with a platform specific offset from this point of interest.

If you specify a non-empty rect the tip will be hidden as soon as you move your cursor out of this area.

The rect is in the coordinates of the widget you specify with w. If the rect is not empty you must specify a widget. Otherwise this argument can be 0 but it is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.

If text is empty the tool tip is hidden. If the text is the same as the currently shown tooltip, the tip will not move. You can force moving by first hiding the tip with an empty text, and then showing the new tip at the new position.

func (*QToolTip) Text

func (this *QToolTip) Text() string

Returns the tooltip text, if a tooltip is visible, or an empty string if a tooltip is not visible.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

type QToolTip_ITF

type QToolTip_ITF interface {
	QToolTip_PTR() *QToolTip
}

type QTreeView

type QTreeView struct {
	*QAbstractItemView
}

func NewQTreeView

func NewQTreeView(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTreeView

Constructs a tree view with a parent to represent a model's data. Use setModel() to set the model.

See also QAbstractItemModel.

func NewQTreeViewFromPointer

func NewQTreeViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTreeView

func NewQTreeView__

func NewQTreeView__() *QTreeView

Constructs a tree view with a parent to represent a model's data. Use setModel() to set the model.

See also QAbstractItemModel.

func (*QTreeView) AllColumnsShowFocus

func (this *QTreeView) AllColumnsShowFocus() bool

func (*QTreeView) AutoExpandDelay

func (this *QTreeView) AutoExpandDelay() int

func (*QTreeView) Collapse

func (this *QTreeView) Collapse(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Collapses the model item specified by the index.

See also collapsed().

func (*QTreeView) CollapseAll

func (this *QTreeView) CollapseAll()

Collapses all expanded items.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also expandAll(), expand(), collapse(), and setExpanded().

func (*QTreeView) Collapsed

func (this *QTreeView) Collapsed(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is collapsed.

func (*QTreeView) ColumnAt

func (this *QTreeView) ColumnAt(x int) int

Returns the column in the tree view whose header covers the x coordinate given.

func (*QTreeView) ColumnCountChanged

func (this *QTreeView) ColumnCountChanged(oldCount int, newCount int)

Informs the tree view that the number of columns in the tree view has changed from oldCount to newCount.

func (*QTreeView) ColumnMoved

func (this *QTreeView) ColumnMoved()

This slot is called whenever a column has been moved.

func (*QTreeView) ColumnResized

func (this *QTreeView) ColumnResized(column int, oldSize int, newSize int)

This function is called whenever column's size is changed in the header. oldSize and newSize give the previous size and the new size in pixels.

See also setColumnWidth().

func (*QTreeView) ColumnViewportPosition

func (this *QTreeView) ColumnViewportPosition(column int) int

Returns the horizontal position of the column in the viewport.

func (*QTreeView) ColumnWidth

func (this *QTreeView) ColumnWidth(column int) int

Returns the width of the column.

See also resizeColumnToContents() and setColumnWidth().

func (*QTreeView) CurrentChanged

func (this *QTreeView) CurrentChanged(current qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, previous qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::currentChanged().

func (*QTreeView) DoItemsLayout

func (this *QTreeView) DoItemsLayout()

func (*QTreeView) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QTreeView) DragMoveEvent(event qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dragMoveEvent().

func (*QTreeView) DrawBranches

func (this *QTreeView) DrawBranches(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Draws the branches in the tree view on the same row as the model item index, using the painter given. The branches are drawn in the rectangle specified by rect.

func (*QTreeView) DrawRow

func (this *QTreeView) DrawRow(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, options QStyleOptionViewItem_ITF, index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Draws the row in the tree view that contains the model item index, using the painter given. The option controls how the item is displayed.

See also setAlternatingRowColors().

func (*QTreeView) DrawTree

func (this *QTreeView) DrawTree(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, region qtgui.QRegion_ITF)

Draws the part of the tree intersecting the given region using the specified painter.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also paintEvent().

func (*QTreeView) Expand

func (this *QTreeView) Expand(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Expands the model item specified by the index.

See also expanded().

func (*QTreeView) ExpandAll

func (this *QTreeView) ExpandAll()

Expands all expandable items.

Warning: if the model contains a large number of items, this function will take some time to execute.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also collapseAll(), expand(), collapse(), and setExpanded().

func (*QTreeView) ExpandToDepth

func (this *QTreeView) ExpandToDepth(depth int)

Expands all expandable items to the given depth.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also expandAll(), collapseAll(), expand(), collapse(), and setExpanded().

func (*QTreeView) Expanded

func (this *QTreeView) Expanded(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the item specified by index is expanded.

See also setExpanded().

func (*QTreeView) ExpandsOnDoubleClick

func (this *QTreeView) ExpandsOnDoubleClick() bool

func (*QTreeView) GetCthis

func (this *QTreeView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTreeView) Header

func (this *QTreeView) Header() *QHeaderView

Returns the header for the tree view.

See also setHeader() and QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

func (*QTreeView) HideColumn

func (this *QTreeView) HideColumn(column int)

Hides the column given.

Note: This function should only be called after the model has been initialized, as the view needs to know the number of columns in order to hide column.

See also showColumn() and setColumnHidden().

func (*QTreeView) HorizontalOffset

func (this *QTreeView) HorizontalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::horizontalOffset().

Returns the horizontal offset of the items in the treeview.

Note that the tree view uses the horizontal header section positions to determine the positions of columns in the view.

See also verticalOffset().

func (*QTreeView) HorizontalScrollbarAction

func (this *QTreeView) HorizontalScrollbarAction(action int)

func (*QTreeView) Indentation

func (this *QTreeView) Indentation() int

func (*QTreeView) IndexAbove

func (this *QTreeView) IndexAbove(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the model index of the item above index.

func (*QTreeView) IndexAt

func (this *QTreeView) IndexAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::indexAt().

func (*QTreeView) IndexBelow

func (this *QTreeView) IndexBelow(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the model index of the item below index.

func (*QTreeView) IndexRowSizeHint

func (this *QTreeView) IndexRowSizeHint(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Returns the size hint for the row indicated by index.

See also sizeHintForColumn() and uniformRowHeights().

func (*QTreeView) InheritColumnCountChanged

func (this *QTreeView) InheritColumnCountChanged(f func(oldCount int, newCount int))

void columnCountChanged(int, int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritColumnMoved

func (this *QTreeView) InheritColumnMoved(f func())

void columnMoved()

func (*QTreeView) InheritColumnResized

func (this *QTreeView) InheritColumnResized(f func(column int, oldSize int, newSize int))

void columnResized(int, int, int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritCurrentChanged

func (this *QTreeView) InheritCurrentChanged(f func(current *qtcore.QModelIndex, previous *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void currentChanged(const class QModelIndex &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritDrawBranches

func (this *QTreeView) InheritDrawBranches(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, rect *qtcore.QRect, index *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void drawBranches(class QPainter *, const class QRect &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritDrawRow

func (this *QTreeView) InheritDrawRow(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, options *QStyleOptionViewItem, index *qtcore.QModelIndex))

void drawRow(class QPainter *, const class QStyleOptionViewItem &, const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritDrawTree

func (this *QTreeView) InheritDrawTree(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter, region *qtgui.QRegion))

void drawTree(class QPainter *, const class QRegion &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritHorizontalOffset

func (this *QTreeView) InheritHorizontalOffset(f func() int)

int horizontalOffset()

func (*QTreeView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarAction

func (this *QTreeView) InheritHorizontalScrollbarAction(f func(action int))

void horizontalScrollbarAction(int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritIndexRowSizeHint

func (this *QTreeView) InheritIndexRowSizeHint(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) int)

int indexRowSizeHint(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritIsIndexHidden

func (this *QTreeView) InheritIsIndexHidden(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) bool)

bool isIndexHidden(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritMoveCursor

func (this *QTreeView) InheritMoveCursor(f func(cursorAction int, modifiers int) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex moveCursor(enum QAbstractItemView::CursorAction, Qt::KeyboardModifiers)

func (*QTreeView) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritReexpand

func (this *QTreeView) InheritReexpand(f func())

void reexpand()

func (*QTreeView) InheritRowHeight

func (this *QTreeView) InheritRowHeight(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) int)

int rowHeight(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritRowsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QTreeView) InheritRowsAboutToBeRemoved(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsAboutToBeRemoved(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritRowsInserted

func (this *QTreeView) InheritRowsInserted(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, start int, end int))

void rowsInserted(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritRowsRemoved

func (this *QTreeView) InheritRowsRemoved(f func(parent *qtcore.QModelIndex, first int, last int))

void rowsRemoved(const class QModelIndex &, int, int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritScrollContentsBy

func (this *QTreeView) InheritScrollContentsBy(f func(dx int, dy int))

void scrollContentsBy(int, int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritSelectedIndexes

func (this *QTreeView) InheritSelectedIndexes(f func() *qtcore.QModelIndexList)

QModelIndexList selectedIndexes()

func (*QTreeView) InheritSelectionChanged

func (this *QTreeView) InheritSelectionChanged(f func(selected *qtcore.QItemSelection, deselected *qtcore.QItemSelection))

void selectionChanged(const class QItemSelection &, const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QTreeView) InheritSetSelection

func (this *QTreeView) InheritSetSelection(f func(rect *qtcore.QRect, command int))

void setSelection(const class QRect &, class QItemSelectionModel::SelectionFlags)

func (*QTreeView) InheritSizeHintForColumn

func (this *QTreeView) InheritSizeHintForColumn(f func(column int) int)

int sizeHintForColumn(int)

func (*QTreeView) InheritTimerEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritTimerEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QTimerEvent))

void timerEvent(class QTimerEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritUpdateGeometries

func (this *QTreeView) InheritUpdateGeometries(f func())

void updateGeometries()

func (*QTreeView) InheritVerticalOffset

func (this *QTreeView) InheritVerticalOffset(f func() int)

int verticalOffset()

func (*QTreeView) InheritViewportEvent

func (this *QTreeView) InheritViewportEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool viewportEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QTreeView) InheritViewportSizeHint

func (this *QTreeView) InheritViewportSizeHint(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QSize viewportSizeHint()

func (*QTreeView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QTreeView) InheritVisualRegionForSelection(f func(selection *qtcore.QItemSelection) unsafe.Pointer)

QRegion visualRegionForSelection(const class QItemSelection &)

func (*QTreeView) IsAnimated

func (this *QTreeView) IsAnimated() bool

func (*QTreeView) IsColumnHidden

func (this *QTreeView) IsColumnHidden(column int) bool

Returns true if the column is hidden; otherwise returns false.

See also hideColumn() and isRowHidden().

func (*QTreeView) IsExpanded

func (this *QTreeView) IsExpanded(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Returns true if the model item index is expanded; otherwise returns false.

See also expand(), expanded(), and setExpanded().

func (*QTreeView) IsFirstColumnSpanned

func (this *QTreeView) IsFirstColumnSpanned(row int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Returns true if the item in first column in the given row of the parent is spanning all the columns; otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setFirstColumnSpanned().

func (*QTreeView) IsHeaderHidden

func (this *QTreeView) IsHeaderHidden() bool

func (*QTreeView) IsIndexHidden

func (this *QTreeView) IsIndexHidden(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::isIndexHidden().

func (*QTreeView) IsRowHidden

func (this *QTreeView) IsRowHidden(row int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) bool

Returns true if the item in the given row of the parent is hidden; otherwise returns false.

See also setRowHidden() and isColumnHidden().

func (*QTreeView) IsSortingEnabled

func (this *QTreeView) IsSortingEnabled() bool

func (*QTreeView) ItemsExpandable

func (this *QTreeView) ItemsExpandable() bool

func (*QTreeView) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QTreeView) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::keyPressEvent().

func (*QTreeView) KeyboardSearch

func (this *QTreeView) KeyboardSearch(search string)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::keyboardSearch().

func (*QTreeView) MetaObject

func (this *QTreeView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTreeView) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QTreeView) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent().

func (*QTreeView) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QTreeView) MouseMoveEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().

func (*QTreeView) MousePressEvent

func (this *QTreeView) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mousePressEvent().

func (*QTreeView) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QTreeView) MouseReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent().

func (*QTreeView) MoveCursor

func (this *QTreeView) MoveCursor(cursorAction int, modifiers int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::moveCursor().

Move the cursor in the way described by cursorAction, using the information provided by the button modifiers.

func (*QTreeView) NewFromPointer

func (*QTreeView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTreeView

func (*QTreeView) PaintEvent

func (this *QTreeView) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QTreeView) QTreeView_PTR

func (ptr *QTreeView) QTreeView_PTR() *QTreeView

func (*QTreeView) Reexpand

func (this *QTreeView) Reexpand()

func (*QTreeView) Reset

func (this *QTreeView) Reset()

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::reset().

func (*QTreeView) ResetIndentation

func (this *QTreeView) ResetIndentation()

func (*QTreeView) ResizeColumnToContents

func (this *QTreeView) ResizeColumnToContents(column int)

Resizes the column given to the size of its contents.

See also columnWidth(), setColumnWidth(), sizeHintForColumn(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTreeView) RootIsDecorated

func (this *QTreeView) RootIsDecorated() bool

func (*QTreeView) RowHeight

func (this *QTreeView) RowHeight(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) int

Returns the height of the row indicated by the given index.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also indexRowSizeHint().

func (*QTreeView) RowsAboutToBeRemoved

func (this *QTreeView) RowsAboutToBeRemoved(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsAboutToBeRemoved().

Informs the view that the rows from the start row to the end row inclusive are about to removed from the given parent model item.

func (*QTreeView) RowsInserted

func (this *QTreeView) RowsInserted(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, start int, end int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::rowsInserted().

Informs the view that the rows from the start row to the end row inclusive have been inserted into the parent model item.

func (*QTreeView) RowsRemoved

func (this *QTreeView) RowsRemoved(parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, first int, last int)

Informs the view that the rows from the start row to the end row inclusive have been removed from the given parent model item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

func (*QTreeView) ScrollContentsBy

func (this *QTreeView) ScrollContentsBy(dx int, dy int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::scrollContentsBy().

Scrolls the contents of the tree view by (dx, dy).

func (*QTreeView) ScrollTo

func (this *QTreeView) ScrollTo(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, hint int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().

Scroll the contents of the tree view until the given model item index is visible. The hint parameter specifies more precisely where the item should be located after the operation. If any of the parents of the model item are collapsed, they will be expanded to ensure that the model item is visible.

func (*QTreeView) ScrollTo__

func (this *QTreeView) ScrollTo__(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::scrollTo().

Scroll the contents of the tree view until the given model item index is visible. The hint parameter specifies more precisely where the item should be located after the operation. If any of the parents of the model item are collapsed, they will be expanded to ensure that the model item is visible.

func (*QTreeView) SelectAll

func (this *QTreeView) SelectAll()

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectAll().

func (*QTreeView) SelectedIndexes

func (this *QTreeView) SelectedIndexes() *qtcore.QModelIndexList

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectedIndexes().

func (*QTreeView) SelectionChanged

func (this *QTreeView) SelectionChanged(selected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF, deselected qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::selectionChanged().

func (*QTreeView) SetAllColumnsShowFocus

func (this *QTreeView) SetAllColumnsShowFocus(enable bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetAnimated

func (this *QTreeView) SetAnimated(enable bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetAutoExpandDelay

func (this *QTreeView) SetAutoExpandDelay(delay int)

func (*QTreeView) SetColumnHidden

func (this *QTreeView) SetColumnHidden(column int, hide bool)

If hide is true the column is hidden, otherwise the column is shown.

See also isColumnHidden(), hideColumn(), and setRowHidden().

func (*QTreeView) SetColumnWidth

func (this *QTreeView) SetColumnWidth(column int, width int)

Sets the width of the given column to the width specified.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also columnWidth() and resizeColumnToContents().

func (*QTreeView) SetCthis

func (this *QTreeView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTreeView) SetExpanded

func (this *QTreeView) SetExpanded(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, expand bool)

Sets the item referred to by index to either collapse or expanded, depending on the value of expanded.

See also expanded(), expand(), and isExpanded().

func (*QTreeView) SetExpandsOnDoubleClick

func (this *QTreeView) SetExpandsOnDoubleClick(enable bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetFirstColumnSpanned

func (this *QTreeView) SetFirstColumnSpanned(row int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, span bool)

If span is true the item in the first column in the row with the given parent is set to span all columns, otherwise all items on the row are shown.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also isFirstColumnSpanned().

func (*QTreeView) SetHeader

func (this *QTreeView) SetHeader(header QHeaderView_ITF)

Sets the header for the tree view, to the given header.

The view takes ownership over the given header and deletes it when a new header is set.

See also QAbstractItemModel::headerData().

func (*QTreeView) SetHeaderHidden

func (this *QTreeView) SetHeaderHidden(hide bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetIndentation

func (this *QTreeView) SetIndentation(i int)

func (*QTreeView) SetItemsExpandable

func (this *QTreeView) SetItemsExpandable(enable bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetModel

func (this *QTreeView) SetModel(model qtcore.QAbstractItemModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setModel().

func (*QTreeView) SetRootIndex

func (this *QTreeView) SetRootIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setRootIndex().

func (*QTreeView) SetRootIsDecorated

func (this *QTreeView) SetRootIsDecorated(show bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetRowHidden

func (this *QTreeView) SetRowHidden(row int, parent qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF, hide bool)

If hide is true the row with the given parent is hidden, otherwise the row is shown.

See also isRowHidden() and setColumnHidden().

func (*QTreeView) SetSelection

func (this *QTreeView) SetSelection(rect qtcore.QRect_ITF, command int)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelection().

Applies the selection command to the items in or touched by the rectangle, rect.

See also selectionCommand().

func (*QTreeView) SetSelectionModel

func (this *QTreeView) SetSelectionModel(selectionModel qtcore.QItemSelectionModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().

func (*QTreeView) SetSortingEnabled

func (this *QTreeView) SetSortingEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetTreePosition

func (this *QTreeView) SetTreePosition(logicalIndex int)

This specifies that the tree structure should be placed at logical index index. If set to -1 then the tree will always follow visual index 0.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also treePosition(), QHeaderView::swapSections(), and QHeaderView::moveSection().

func (*QTreeView) SetUniformRowHeights

func (this *QTreeView) SetUniformRowHeights(uniform bool)

func (*QTreeView) SetWordWrap

func (this *QTreeView) SetWordWrap(on bool)

func (*QTreeView) ShowColumn

func (this *QTreeView) ShowColumn(column int)

Shows the given column in the tree view.

See also hideColumn() and setColumnHidden().

func (*QTreeView) SizeHintForColumn

func (this *QTreeView) SizeHintForColumn(column int) int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::sizeHintForColumn().

Returns the size hint for the column's width or -1 if there is no model.

If you need to set the width of a given column to a fixed value, call QHeaderView::resizeSection() on the view's header.

If you reimplement this function in a subclass, note that the value you return is only used when resizeColumnToContents() is called. In that case, if a larger column width is required by either the view's header or the item delegate, that width will be used instead.

See also QWidget::sizeHint, header(), and QHeaderView::resizeContentsPrecision().

func (*QTreeView) SortByColumn

func (this *QTreeView) SortByColumn(column int, order int)

Sets the model up for sorting by the values in the given column and order.

column may be -1, in which case no sort indicator will be shown and the model will return to its natural, unsorted order. Note that not all models support this and may even crash in this case.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also sortingEnabled.

func (*QTreeView) SortByColumn_1

func (this *QTreeView) SortByColumn_1(column int)

Sets the model up for sorting by the values in the given column and order.

column may be -1, in which case no sort indicator will be shown and the model will return to its natural, unsorted order. Note that not all models support this and may even crash in this case.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also sortingEnabled.

func (*QTreeView) TimerEvent

func (this *QTreeView) TimerEvent(event qtcore.QTimerEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QTreeView) TreePosition

func (this *QTreeView) TreePosition() int

Return the logical index the tree is set on. If the return value is -1 then the tree is placed on the visual index 0.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

See also setTreePosition().

func (*QTreeView) UniformRowHeights

func (this *QTreeView) UniformRowHeights() bool

func (*QTreeView) UpdateGeometries

func (this *QTreeView) UpdateGeometries()

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::updateGeometries().

func (*QTreeView) VerticalOffset

func (this *QTreeView) VerticalOffset() int

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::verticalOffset().

Returns the vertical offset of the items in the tree view.

See also horizontalOffset().

func (*QTreeView) ViewportEvent

func (this *QTreeView) ViewportEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportEvent().

func (*QTreeView) ViewportSizeHint

func (this *QTreeView) ViewportSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QAbstractScrollArea::viewportSizeHint().

func (*QTreeView) VisualRect

func (this *QTreeView) VisualRect(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRect().

Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at index. If the index is not visible or explicitly hidden, the returned rectangle is invalid.

func (*QTreeView) VisualRegionForSelection

func (this *QTreeView) VisualRegionForSelection(selection qtcore.QItemSelection_ITF) *qtgui.QRegion

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::visualRegionForSelection().

Returns the rectangle from the viewport of the items in the given selection.

Since 4.7, the returned region only contains rectangles intersecting (or included in) the viewport.

func (*QTreeView) WordWrap

func (this *QTreeView) WordWrap() bool

type QTreeView_ITF

type QTreeView_ITF interface {
	QAbstractItemView_ITF
	QTreeView_PTR() *QTreeView
}

type QTreeWidget

type QTreeWidget struct {
	*QTreeView
}

func NewQTreeWidget

func NewQTreeWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QTreeWidget

Constructs a tree widget with the given parent.

func NewQTreeWidgetFromPointer

func NewQTreeWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTreeWidget

func NewQTreeWidget__

func NewQTreeWidget__() *QTreeWidget

Constructs a tree widget with the given parent.

func (*QTreeWidget) AddTopLevelItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) AddTopLevelItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Appends the item as a top-level item in the widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also insertTopLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) Clear

func (this *QTreeWidget) Clear()

Clears the tree widget by removing all of its items and selections.

Note: Since each item is removed from the tree widget before being deleted, the return value of QTreeWidgetItem::treeWidget() will be invalid when called from an item's destructor.

See also takeTopLevelItem(), topLevelItemCount(), and columnCount().

func (*QTreeWidget) ClosePersistentEditor

func (this *QTreeWidget) ClosePersistentEditor(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

Closes the persistent editor for the item in the given column.

This function has no effect if no persistent editor is open for this combination of item and column.

See also openPersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QTreeWidget) ClosePersistentEditor__

func (this *QTreeWidget) ClosePersistentEditor__(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Closes the persistent editor for the item in the given column.

This function has no effect if no persistent editor is open for this combination of item and column.

See also openPersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QTreeWidget) CollapseItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) CollapseItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Closes the item. This causes the tree containing the item's children to be collapsed.

See also expandItem(), currentItem(), itemAt(), and topLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) ColumnCount

func (this *QTreeWidget) ColumnCount() int

func (*QTreeWidget) CurrentColumn

func (this *QTreeWidget) CurrentColumn() int

Returns the current column in the tree widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setCurrentItem() and columnCount().

func (*QTreeWidget) CurrentItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) CurrentItem() *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns the current item in the tree widget.

See also setCurrentItem() and currentItemChanged().

func (*QTreeWidget) CurrentItemChanged

func (this *QTreeWidget) CurrentItemChanged(current QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, previous QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the current item changes. The current item is specified by current, and this replaces the previous current item.

See also setCurrentItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) DropEvent

func (this *QTreeWidget) DropEvent(event qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::dropEvent().

func (*QTreeWidget) DropMimeData

func (this *QTreeWidget) DropMimeData(parent QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, index int, data qtcore.QMimeData_ITF, action int) bool

Handles the data supplied by a drag and drop operation that ended with the given action in the index in the given parent item.

The default implementation returns true if the drop was successfully handled by decoding the mime data and inserting it into the model; otherwise it returns false.

See also supportedDropActions().

func (*QTreeWidget) EditItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) EditItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

Starts editing the item in the given column if it is editable.

func (*QTreeWidget) EditItem__

func (this *QTreeWidget) EditItem__(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Starts editing the item in the given column if it is editable.

func (*QTreeWidget) Event

func (this *QTreeWidget) Event(e qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QTreeWidget) ExpandItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) ExpandItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Expands the item. This causes the tree containing the item's children to be expanded.

See also collapseItem(), currentItem(), itemAt(), topLevelItem(), and itemExpanded().

func (*QTreeWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QTreeWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTreeWidget) HeaderItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) HeaderItem() *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns the item used for the tree widget's header.

See also setHeaderItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the QModelIndex associated with the given item in the given column.

Note: In Qt versions prior to 5.7, this function took a non-const item.

See also itemFromIndex() and topLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem_1

func (this *QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem_1(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the QModelIndex associated with the given item in the given column.

Note: In Qt versions prior to 5.7, this function took a non-const item.

See also itemFromIndex() and topLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem_1_

func (this *QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem_1_(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the QModelIndex associated with the given item in the given column.

Note: In Qt versions prior to 5.7, this function took a non-const item.

See also itemFromIndex() and topLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem__

func (this *QTreeWidget) IndexFromItem__(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *qtcore.QModelIndex

Returns the QModelIndex associated with the given item in the given column.

Note: In Qt versions prior to 5.7, this function took a non-const item.

See also itemFromIndex() and topLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) IndexOfTopLevelItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) IndexOfTopLevelItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) int

Returns the index of the given top-level item, or -1 if the item cannot be found.

See also sortItems() and topLevelItemCount().

func (*QTreeWidget) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QTreeWidget) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QTreeWidget) InheritDropMimeData

func (this *QTreeWidget) InheritDropMimeData(f func(parent *QTreeWidgetItem, index int, data *qtcore.QMimeData, action int) bool)

bool dropMimeData(class QTreeWidgetItem *, int, const class QMimeData *, Qt::DropAction)

func (*QTreeWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QTreeWidget) InheritEvent(f func(e *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QTreeWidget) InheritIndexFromItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) InheritIndexFromItem(f func(item *QTreeWidgetItem, column int) unsafe.Pointer)

QModelIndex indexFromItem(const class QTreeWidgetItem *, int)

func (*QTreeWidget) InheritItemFromIndex

func (this *QTreeWidget) InheritItemFromIndex(f func(index *qtcore.QModelIndex) unsafe.Pointer)

QTreeWidgetItem * itemFromIndex(const class QModelIndex &)

func (*QTreeWidget) InheritMimeTypes

func (this *QTreeWidget) InheritMimeTypes(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QStringList mimeTypes()

func (*QTreeWidget) InheritSupportedDropActions

func (this *QTreeWidget) InheritSupportedDropActions(f func() int)

Qt::DropActions supportedDropActions()

func (*QTreeWidget) InsertTopLevelItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) InsertTopLevelItem(index int, item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Inserts the item at index in the top level in the view.

If the item has already been inserted somewhere else it won't be inserted.

See also addTopLevelItem() and columnCount().

func (*QTreeWidget) InvisibleRootItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) InvisibleRootItem() *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns the tree widget's invisible root item.

The invisible root item provides access to the tree widget's top-level items through the QTreeWidgetItem API, making it possible to write functions that can treat top-level items and their children in a uniform way; for example, recursive functions.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QTreeWidget) IsFirstItemColumnSpanned

func (this *QTreeWidget) IsFirstItemColumnSpanned(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) bool

Returns true if the given item is set to show only one section over all columns; otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also setFirstItemColumnSpanned().

func (*QTreeWidget) IsItemExpanded

func (this *QTreeWidget) IsItemExpanded(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QTreeWidget) IsItemHidden

func (this *QTreeWidget) IsItemHidden(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QTreeWidget) IsItemSelected

func (this *QTreeWidget) IsItemSelected(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QTreeWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen

func (this *QTreeWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int) bool

Returns whether a persistent editor is open for item item in column column.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.10.

See also openPersistentEditor() and closePersistentEditor().

func (*QTreeWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen__

func (this *QTreeWidget) IsPersistentEditorOpen__(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) bool

Returns whether a persistent editor is open for item item in column column.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.10.

See also openPersistentEditor() and closePersistentEditor().

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemAbove

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemAbove(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns the item above the given item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemActivated

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemActivated(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

This signal is emitted when the user activates an item by single- or double-clicking (depending on the platform, i.e. on the QStyle::SH_ItemView_ActivateItemOnSingleClick style hint) or pressing a special key (e.g., Enter).

The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemAt

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates p. The coordinates are relative to the tree widget's viewport().

See also visualItemRect().

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemAt_1

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemAt_1(x int, y int) *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the item at the coordinates p. The coordinates are relative to the tree widget's viewport().

See also visualItemRect().

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemBelow

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemBelow(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns the item visually below the given item.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemChanged

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemChanged(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

This signal is emitted when the contents of the column in the specified item changes.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemClicked

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemClicked(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

This signal is emitted when the user clicks inside the widget.

The specified item is the item that was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was clicked, no signal will be emitted.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemCollapsed

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemCollapsed(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the specified item is collapsed so that none of its children are displayed.

Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when collapseAll() is invoked.

See also QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemExpanded(), and collapseItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemDoubleClicked

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemDoubleClicked(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

This signal is emitted when the user double clicks inside the widget.

The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked. If no item was double clicked, no signal will be emitted.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemEntered

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemEntered(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

This signal is emitted when the mouse cursor enters an item over the specified column. QTreeWidget mouse tracking needs to be enabled for this feature to work.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemExpanded

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemExpanded(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the specified item is expanded so that all of its children are displayed.

Note: This signal will not be emitted if an item changes its state when expandAll() is invoked.

See also setItemExpanded(), QTreeWidgetItem::isExpanded(), itemCollapsed(), and expandItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemFromIndex

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemFromIndex(index qtcore.QModelIndex_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns a pointer to the QTreeWidgetItem associated with the given index.

See also indexFromItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemPressed

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemPressed(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

This signal is emitted when the user presses a mouse button inside the widget.

The specified item is the item that was clicked, or 0 if no item was clicked. The column is the item's column that was clicked, or -1 if no item was clicked.

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemSelectionChanged

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemSelectionChanged()

This signal is emitted when the selection changes in the tree widget. The current selection can be found with selectedItems().

func (*QTreeWidget) ItemWidget

func (this *QTreeWidget) ItemWidget(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int) *QWidget

Returns the widget displayed in the cell specified by item and the given column.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also setItemWidget().

func (*QTreeWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QTreeWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QTreeWidget) MimeTypes

func (this *QTreeWidget) MimeTypes() *qtcore.QStringList

Returns a list of MIME types that can be used to describe a list of treewidget items.

See also mimeData().

func (*QTreeWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QTreeWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTreeWidget

func (*QTreeWidget) OpenPersistentEditor

func (this *QTreeWidget) OpenPersistentEditor(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

Opens a persistent editor for the item in the given column.

See also closePersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QTreeWidget) OpenPersistentEditor__

func (this *QTreeWidget) OpenPersistentEditor__(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Opens a persistent editor for the item in the given column.

See also closePersistentEditor() and isPersistentEditorOpen().

func (*QTreeWidget) QTreeWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QTreeWidget) QTreeWidget_PTR() *QTreeWidget

func (*QTreeWidget) RemoveItemWidget

func (this *QTreeWidget) RemoveItemWidget(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

Removes the widget set in the given item in the given column.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QTreeWidget) ScrollToItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) ScrollToItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, hint int)

Ensures that the item is visible, scrolling the view if necessary using the specified hint.

See also currentItem(), itemAt(), and topLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) ScrollToItem__

func (this *QTreeWidget) ScrollToItem__(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Ensures that the item is visible, scrolling the view if necessary using the specified hint.

See also currentItem(), itemAt(), and topLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) SetColumnCount

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetColumnCount(columns int)

func (*QTreeWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTreeWidget) SetCurrentItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetCurrentItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the current item in the tree widget.

Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected.

See also currentItem() and currentItemChanged().

func (*QTreeWidget) SetCurrentItem_1

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetCurrentItem_1(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int)

Sets the current item in the tree widget.

Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected.

See also currentItem() and currentItemChanged().

func (*QTreeWidget) SetCurrentItem_2

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetCurrentItem_2(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int, command int)

Sets the current item in the tree widget.

Unless the selection mode is NoSelection, the item is also selected.

See also currentItem() and currentItemChanged().

func (*QTreeWidget) SetFirstItemColumnSpanned

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetFirstItemColumnSpanned(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, span bool)

Sets the given item to only show one section for all columns if span is true; otherwise the item will show one section per column.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

See also isFirstItemColumnSpanned().

func (*QTreeWidget) SetHeaderItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetHeaderItem(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

Sets the header item for the tree widget. The label for each column in the header is supplied by the corresponding label in the item.

The tree widget takes ownership of the item.

See also headerItem() and setHeaderLabels().

func (*QTreeWidget) SetHeaderLabel

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetHeaderLabel(label string)

Same as setHeaderLabels(QStringList(label)).

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

func (*QTreeWidget) SetHeaderLabels

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetHeaderLabels(labels qtcore.QStringList_ITF)

Adds a column in the header for each item in the labels list, and sets the label for each column.

Note that setHeaderLabels() won't remove existing columns.

See also setHeaderItem() and setHeaderLabel().

func (*QTreeWidget) SetItemExpanded

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetItemExpanded(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, expand bool)

func (*QTreeWidget) SetItemHidden

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetItemHidden(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, hide bool)

func (*QTreeWidget) SetItemSelected

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetItemSelected(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, select_ bool)

func (*QTreeWidget) SetItemWidget

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetItemWidget(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, column int, widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the given widget to be displayed in the cell specified by the given item and column.

The given widget's autoFillBackground property must be set to true, otherwise the widget's background will be transparent, showing both the model data and the tree widget item.

This function should only be used to display static content in the place of a tree widget item. If you want to display custom dynamic content or implement a custom editor widget, use QTreeView and subclass QItemDelegate instead.

This function cannot be called before the item hierarchy has been set up, i.e., the QTreeWidgetItem that will hold widget must have been added to the view before widget is set.

Note: The tree takes ownership of the widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also itemWidget() and Delegate Classes.

func (*QTreeWidget) SetSelectionModel

func (this *QTreeWidget) SetSelectionModel(selectionModel qtcore.QItemSelectionModel_ITF)

Reimplemented from QAbstractItemView::setSelectionModel().

func (*QTreeWidget) SortColumn

func (this *QTreeWidget) SortColumn() int

Returns the column used to sort the contents of the widget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.1.

See also sortItems().

func (*QTreeWidget) SortItems

func (this *QTreeWidget) SortItems(column int, order int)

Sorts the items in the widget in the specified order by the values in the given column.

See also sortColumn().

func (*QTreeWidget) SupportedDropActions

func (this *QTreeWidget) SupportedDropActions() int

Returns the drop actions supported by this view.

See also Qt::DropActions.

func (*QTreeWidget) TakeTopLevelItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) TakeTopLevelItem(index int) *QTreeWidgetItem

Removes the top-level item at the given index in the tree and returns it, otherwise returns 0;

See also insertTopLevelItem(), topLevelItem(), and topLevelItemCount().

func (*QTreeWidget) TopLevelItem

func (this *QTreeWidget) TopLevelItem(index int) *QTreeWidgetItem

Returns the top level item at the given index, or 0 if the item does not exist.

See also topLevelItemCount() and insertTopLevelItem().

func (*QTreeWidget) TopLevelItemCount

func (this *QTreeWidget) TopLevelItemCount() int

func (*QTreeWidget) VisualItemRect

func (this *QTreeWidget) VisualItemRect(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle on the viewport occupied by the item at item.

See also itemAt().

type QTreeWidgetItem

type QTreeWidgetItem struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem(type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItemFromPointer

func NewQTreeWidgetItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_1

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_1(strings qtcore.QStringList_ITF, type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_1_

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_1_(strings qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_2

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_2(view QTreeWidget_ITF, type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_2_

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_2_(view QTreeWidget_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_3

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_3(view QTreeWidget_ITF, strings qtcore.QStringList_ITF, type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_3_

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_3_(view QTreeWidget_ITF, strings qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_4

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_4(view QTreeWidget_ITF, after QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_4_

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_4_(view QTreeWidget_ITF, after QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_5

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_5(parent QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_5_

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_5_(parent QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_6

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_6(parent QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, strings qtcore.QStringList_ITF, type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_6_

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_6_(parent QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, strings qtcore.QStringList_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_7

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_7(parent QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, after QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, type_ int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_7_

func NewQTreeWidgetItem_7_(parent QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, after QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func NewQTreeWidgetItem__

func NewQTreeWidgetItem__() *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) AddChild

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) AddChild(child QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Background

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Background(column int) *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) BackgroundColor

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) BackgroundColor(column int) *qtgui.QColor

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) CheckState

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) CheckState(column int) int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Child

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Child(index int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) ChildCount

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) ChildCount() int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) ChildIndicatorPolicy

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) ChildIndicatorPolicy() int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Clone

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Clone() *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) ColumnCount

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) ColumnCount() int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Data

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Data(column int, role int) *qtcore.QVariant

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) EmitDataChanged

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) EmitDataChanged()

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Flags

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Flags() int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Font

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Font(column int) *qtgui.QFont

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Foreground

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Foreground(column int) *qtgui.QBrush

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) GetCthis

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Icon

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Icon(column int) *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) IndexOfChild

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) IndexOfChild(child QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) InheritEmitDataChanged

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) InheritEmitDataChanged(f func())

void emitDataChanged()

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) InsertChild

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) InsertChild(index int, child QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) IsDisabled

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) IsDisabled() bool

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) IsExpanded

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) IsExpanded() bool

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) IsFirstColumnSpanned

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) IsFirstColumnSpanned() bool

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) IsHidden

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) IsHidden() bool

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) IsSelected

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) IsSelected() bool

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Operator_equal

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Operator_equal(other QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Operator_less_than

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Operator_less_than(other QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) bool

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Parent

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Parent() *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) QTreeWidgetItem_PTR

func (ptr *QTreeWidgetItem) QTreeWidgetItem_PTR() *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Read

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Read(in qtcore.QDataStream_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) RemoveChild

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) RemoveChild(child QTreeWidgetItem_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetBackground

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetBackground(column int, brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetBackgroundColor

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetBackgroundColor(column int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetCheckState

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetCheckState(column int, state int)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetChildIndicatorPolicy

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetChildIndicatorPolicy(policy int)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetCthis

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetData

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetData(column int, role int, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetDisabled

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetDisabled(disabled bool)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetExpanded

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetExpanded(expand bool)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetFirstColumnSpanned

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetFirstColumnSpanned(span bool)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetFlags

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetFlags(flags int)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetFont

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetFont(column int, font qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetForeground

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetForeground(column int, brush qtgui.QBrush_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetHidden

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetHidden(hide bool)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetIcon

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetIcon(column int, icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetSelected

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetSelected(select_ bool)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetSizeHint

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetSizeHint(column int, size qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetStatusTip

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetStatusTip(column int, statusTip string)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetText

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetText(column int, text string)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetTextAlignment

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetTextAlignment(column int, alignment int)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetTextColor

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetTextColor(column int, color qtgui.QColor_ITF)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetToolTip

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetToolTip(column int, toolTip string)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SetWhatsThis

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SetWhatsThis(column int, whatsThis string)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SizeHint

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SizeHint(column int) *qtcore.QSize

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) SortChildren

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) SortChildren(column int, order int)

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) StatusTip

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) StatusTip(column int) string

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) TakeChild

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) TakeChild(index int) *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Text

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Text(column int) string

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) TextAlignment

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) TextAlignment(column int) int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) TextColor

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) TextColor(column int) *qtgui.QColor

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) ToolTip

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) ToolTip(column int) string

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) TreeWidget

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) TreeWidget() *QTreeWidget

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Type

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Type() int

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) WhatsThis

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) WhatsThis(column int) string

func (*QTreeWidgetItem) Write

func (this *QTreeWidgetItem) Write(out qtcore.QDataStream_ITF)

type QTreeWidgetItemIterator

type QTreeWidgetItemIterator struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator(widget QTreeWidget_ITF, flags int) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

Constructs an iterator for the same QTreeWidget as it. The current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIteratorFromPointer

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIteratorFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator_1

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator_1(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF, flags int) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

Constructs an iterator for the same QTreeWidget as it. The current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator_1_

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator_1_(item QTreeWidgetItem_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

Constructs an iterator for the same QTreeWidget as it. The current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator__

func NewQTreeWidgetItemIterator__(widget QTreeWidget_ITF) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

Constructs an iterator for the same QTreeWidget as it. The current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) GetCthis

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) NewFromPointer

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_add_add

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_add_add() *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_add_add_1

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_add_add_1(arg0 int) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_add_equal

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_add_equal(n int) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_equal

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_minus_equal

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_minus_equal(n int) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_minus_minus

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_minus_minus() *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

The prefix -- operator (--it) advances the iterator to the previous matching item and returns a reference to the resulting iterator. Sets the current pointer to 0 if the current item is the first matching item.

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_minus_minus_1

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_minus_minus_1(arg0 int) *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

The prefix -- operator (--it) advances the iterator to the previous matching item and returns a reference to the resulting iterator. Sets the current pointer to 0 if the current item is the first matching item.

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_mul

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) Operator_mul() *QTreeWidgetItem

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) QTreeWidgetItemIterator_PTR

func (ptr *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) QTreeWidgetItemIterator_PTR() *QTreeWidgetItemIterator

func (*QTreeWidgetItemIterator) SetCthis

func (this *QTreeWidgetItemIterator) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QTreeWidgetItemIterator_ITF

type QTreeWidgetItemIterator_ITF interface {
	QTreeWidgetItemIterator_PTR() *QTreeWidgetItemIterator
}

type QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag

type QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = int
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__All QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 0
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Checked QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 4096
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Disabled QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 32768
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__DragDisabled QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 128
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__DragEnabled QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 64
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__DropDisabled QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 512
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__DropEnabled QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 256
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Editable QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 65536
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Enabled QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 16384
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__HasChildren QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 1024
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Hidden QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 1
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__NoChildren QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 2048
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__NotChecked QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 8192
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__NotEditable QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 131072
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__NotHidden QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 2
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__NotSelectable QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 32
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Selectable QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 16
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Selected QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 4
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__Unselected QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 8
const QTreeWidgetItemIterator__UserFlag QTreeWidgetItemIterator__IteratorFlag = 16777216

type QTreeWidgetItem_ITF

type QTreeWidgetItem_ITF interface {
	QTreeWidgetItem_PTR() *QTreeWidgetItem
}

type QTreeWidgetItem__ChildIndicatorPolicy

type QTreeWidgetItem__ChildIndicatorPolicy = int
const QTreeWidgetItem__DontShowIndicator QTreeWidgetItem__ChildIndicatorPolicy = 1
const QTreeWidgetItem__DontShowIndicatorWhenChildless QTreeWidgetItem__ChildIndicatorPolicy = 2
const QTreeWidgetItem__ShowIndicator QTreeWidgetItem__ChildIndicatorPolicy = 0

type QTreeWidgetItem__ItemType

type QTreeWidgetItem__ItemType = int
const QTreeWidgetItem__Type QTreeWidgetItem__ItemType = 0
const QTreeWidgetItem__UserType QTreeWidgetItem__ItemType = 1000

type QTreeWidget_ITF

type QTreeWidget_ITF interface {
	QTreeView_ITF
	QTreeWidget_PTR() *QTreeWidget
}

type QUndoCommand

type QUndoCommand struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQUndoCommand

func NewQUndoCommand(parent QUndoCommand_ITF) *QUndoCommand

func NewQUndoCommandFromPointer

func NewQUndoCommandFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoCommand

func NewQUndoCommand_1

func NewQUndoCommand_1(text string, parent QUndoCommand_ITF) *QUndoCommand

func NewQUndoCommand_1_

func NewQUndoCommand_1_(text string) *QUndoCommand

func NewQUndoCommand__

func NewQUndoCommand__() *QUndoCommand

func (*QUndoCommand) ActionText

func (this *QUndoCommand) ActionText() string

func (*QUndoCommand) Child

func (this *QUndoCommand) Child(index int) *QUndoCommand

func (*QUndoCommand) ChildCount

func (this *QUndoCommand) ChildCount() int

func (*QUndoCommand) GetCthis

func (this *QUndoCommand) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QUndoCommand) Id

func (this *QUndoCommand) Id() int

func (*QUndoCommand) IsObsolete

func (this *QUndoCommand) IsObsolete() bool

func (*QUndoCommand) MergeWith

func (this *QUndoCommand) MergeWith(other QUndoCommand_ITF) bool

func (*QUndoCommand) NewFromPointer

func (*QUndoCommand) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoCommand

func (*QUndoCommand) QUndoCommand_PTR

func (ptr *QUndoCommand) QUndoCommand_PTR() *QUndoCommand

func (*QUndoCommand) Redo

func (this *QUndoCommand) Redo()

Redoes the current command by calling QUndoCommand::redo(). Increments the current command index.

If the stack is empty, or if the top command on the stack has already been redone, this function does nothing.

If QUndoCommand::isObsolete() returns true for the current command, then the command will be deleted from the stack. Additionally, if the clean index is greater than or equal to the current command index, then the clean index is reset.

See also undo() and index().

func (*QUndoCommand) SetCthis

func (this *QUndoCommand) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QUndoCommand) SetObsolete

func (this *QUndoCommand) SetObsolete(obsolete bool)

func (*QUndoCommand) SetText

func (this *QUndoCommand) SetText(text string)

func (*QUndoCommand) Text

func (this *QUndoCommand) Text() string

Returns the text of the command at index idx.

See also beginMacro().

func (*QUndoCommand) Undo

func (this *QUndoCommand) Undo()

Undoes the command below the current command by calling QUndoCommand::undo(). Decrements the current command index.

If the stack is empty, or if the bottom command on the stack has already been undone, this function does nothing.

After the command is undone, if QUndoCommand::isObsolete() returns true, then the command will be deleted from the stack. Additionally, if the clean index is greater than or equal to the current command index, then the clean index is reset.

See also redo() and index().

type QUndoCommand_ITF

type QUndoCommand_ITF interface {
	QUndoCommand_PTR() *QUndoCommand
}

type QUndoGroup

type QUndoGroup struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQUndoGroup

func NewQUndoGroup(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QUndoGroup

Creates an empty QUndoGroup object with parent parent.

See also addStack().

func NewQUndoGroupFromPointer

func NewQUndoGroupFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoGroup

func NewQUndoGroup__

func NewQUndoGroup__() *QUndoGroup

Creates an empty QUndoGroup object with parent parent.

See also addStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) ActiveStack

func (this *QUndoGroup) ActiveStack() *QUndoStack

Returns the active stack of this group.

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns 0.

See also setActiveStack() and QUndoStack::setActive().

func (*QUndoGroup) ActiveStackChanged

func (this *QUndoGroup) ActiveStackChanged(stack QUndoStack_ITF)

This signal is emitted whenever the active stack of the group changes. This can happen when setActiveStack() or QUndoStack::setActive() is called, or when the active stack is removed form the group. stack is the new active stack. If no stack is active, stack is 0.

See also setActiveStack() and QUndoStack::setActive().

func (*QUndoGroup) AddStack

func (this *QUndoGroup) AddStack(stack QUndoStack_ITF)

Adds stack to this group. The group does not take ownership of the stack. Another way of adding a stack to a group is by specifying the group as the stack's parent QObject in QUndoStack::QUndoStack(). In this case, the stack is deleted when the group is deleted, in the usual manner of QObjects.

See also removeStack(), stacks(), and QUndoStack::QUndoStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) CanRedo

func (this *QUndoGroup) CanRedo() bool

Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::canRedo().

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns false.

See also canUndo() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) CanRedoChanged

func (this *QUndoGroup) CanRedoChanged(canRedo bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() or the active stack changes.

canRedo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.

See also QUndoStack::canRedoChanged() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) CanUndo

func (this *QUndoGroup) CanUndo() bool

Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::canUndo().

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns false.

See also canRedo() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) CanUndoChanged

func (this *QUndoGroup) CanUndoChanged(canUndo bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() or the active stack changes.

canUndo is the new state, or false if the active stack is 0.

See also QUndoStack::canUndoChanged() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) CleanChanged

func (this *QUndoGroup) CleanChanged(clean bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::cleanChanged() or the active stack changes.

clean is the new state, or true if the active stack is 0.

See also QUndoStack::cleanChanged() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) CreateRedoAction

func (this *QUndoGroup) CreateRedoAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF, prefix string) *QAction

Creates an redo QAction object with parent parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to QUndoStack::redo() on the active stack. The text of this action will always be the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo(), prefixed by prefix. If there is no command available for redo, if the group is empty or if none of the stacks are active, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Redo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Redo" was used by default.

See also createUndoAction(), canRedo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoGroup) CreateRedoAction__

func (this *QUndoGroup) CreateRedoAction__(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Creates an redo QAction object with parent parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to QUndoStack::redo() on the active stack. The text of this action will always be the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo(), prefixed by prefix. If there is no command available for redo, if the group is empty or if none of the stacks are active, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Redo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Redo" was used by default.

See also createUndoAction(), canRedo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoGroup) CreateUndoAction

func (this *QUndoGroup) CreateUndoAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF, prefix string) *QAction

Creates an undo QAction object with parent parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to QUndoStack::undo() on the active stack. The text of this action will always be the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo(), prefixed by prefix. If there is no command available for undo, if the group is empty or if none of the stacks are active, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Undo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Undo" was used by default.

See also createRedoAction(), canUndo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoGroup) CreateUndoAction__

func (this *QUndoGroup) CreateUndoAction__(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Creates an undo QAction object with parent parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to QUndoStack::undo() on the active stack. The text of this action will always be the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo(), prefixed by prefix. If there is no command available for undo, if the group is empty or if none of the stacks are active, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Undo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Undo" was used by default.

See also createRedoAction(), canUndo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoGroup) GetCthis

func (this *QUndoGroup) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QUndoGroup) IndexChanged

func (this *QUndoGroup) IndexChanged(idx int)

This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::indexChanged() or the active stack changes.

idx is the new current index, or 0 if the active stack is 0.

See also QUndoStack::indexChanged() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) IsClean

func (this *QUndoGroup) IsClean() bool

Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::isClean().

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns true.

See also setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) MetaObject

func (this *QUndoGroup) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QUndoGroup) NewFromPointer

func (*QUndoGroup) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoGroup

func (*QUndoGroup) QUndoGroup_PTR

func (ptr *QUndoGroup) QUndoGroup_PTR() *QUndoGroup

func (*QUndoGroup) Redo

func (this *QUndoGroup) Redo()

Calls QUndoStack::redo() on the active stack.

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function does nothing.

See also undo(), canRedo(), and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) RedoText

func (this *QUndoGroup) RedoText() string

Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::redoText().

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns an empty string.

See also undoText() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) RedoTextChanged

func (this *QUndoGroup) RedoTextChanged(redoText string)

This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.

redoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.

See also QUndoStack::redoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) RemoveStack

func (this *QUndoGroup) RemoveStack(stack QUndoStack_ITF)

Removes stack from this group. If the stack was the active stack in the group, the active stack becomes 0.

See also addStack(), stacks(), and QUndoStack::~QUndoStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) SetActiveStack

func (this *QUndoGroup) SetActiveStack(stack QUndoStack_ITF)

Sets the active stack of this group to stack.

If the stack is not a member of this group, this function does nothing.

Synonymous with calling QUndoStack::setActive() on stack.

The actions returned by createUndoAction() and createRedoAction() will now behave in the same way as those returned by stack's QUndoStack::createUndoAction() and QUndoStack::createRedoAction().

See also QUndoStack::setActive() and activeStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) SetCthis

func (this *QUndoGroup) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QUndoGroup) Undo

func (this *QUndoGroup) Undo()

Calls QUndoStack::undo() on the active stack.

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function does nothing.

See also redo(), canUndo(), and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) UndoText

func (this *QUndoGroup) UndoText() string

Returns the value of the active stack's QUndoStack::undoText().

If none of the stacks are active, or if the group is empty, this function returns an empty string.

See also redoText() and setActiveStack().

func (*QUndoGroup) UndoTextChanged

func (this *QUndoGroup) UndoTextChanged(undoText string)

This signal is emitted whenever the active stack emits QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() or the active stack changes.

undoText is the new state, or an empty string if the active stack is 0.

See also QUndoStack::undoTextChanged() and setActiveStack().

type QUndoGroup_ITF

type QUndoGroup_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QUndoGroup_PTR() *QUndoGroup
}

type QUndoStack

type QUndoStack struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
}

func NewQUndoStack

func NewQUndoStack(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QUndoStack

Constructs an empty undo stack with the parent parent. The stack will initially be in the clean state. If parent is a QUndoGroup object, the stack is automatically added to the group.

See also push().

func NewQUndoStackFromPointer

func NewQUndoStackFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoStack

func NewQUndoStack__

func NewQUndoStack__() *QUndoStack

Constructs an empty undo stack with the parent parent. The stack will initially be in the clean state. If parent is a QUndoGroup object, the stack is automatically added to the group.

See also push().

func (*QUndoStack) BeginMacro

func (this *QUndoStack) BeginMacro(text string)

Begins composition of a macro command with the given text description.

An empty command described by the specified text is pushed on the stack. Any subsequent commands pushed on the stack will be appended to the empty command's children until endMacro() is called.

Calls to beginMacro() and endMacro() may be nested, but every call to beginMacro() must have a matching call to endMacro().

While a macro is being composed, the stack is disabled. This means that:

indexChanged() and cleanChanged() are not emitted, canUndo() and canRedo() return false, calling undo() or redo() has no effect, the undo/redo actions are disabled.

The stack becomes enabled and appropriate signals are emitted when endMacro() is called for the outermost macro.

stack.beginMacro("insert red text");
stack.push(new InsertText(document, idx, text));
stack.push(new SetColor(document, idx, text.length(), Qt::red));
stack.endMacro(); // indexChanged() is emitted

This code is equivalent to:

QUndoCommand *insertRed = new QUndoCommand(); // an empty command
insertRed->setText("insert red text");

new InsertText(document, idx, text, insertRed); // becomes child of insertRed
new SetColor(document, idx, text.length(), Qt::red, insertRed);

stack.push(insertRed);

See also endMacro().

func (*QUndoStack) CanRedo

func (this *QUndoStack) CanRedo() bool

Returns true if there is a command available for redo; otherwise returns false.

This function returns false if the stack is empty or if the top command on the stack has already been redone.

Synonymous with index() == count().

See also index() and canUndo().

func (*QUndoStack) CanRedoChanged

func (this *QUndoStack) CanRedoChanged(canRedo bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the value of canRedo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). canRedo specifies the new value.

func (*QUndoStack) CanUndo

func (this *QUndoStack) CanUndo() bool

Returns true if there is a command available for undo; otherwise returns false.

This function returns false if the stack is empty, or if the bottom command on the stack has already been undone.

Synonymous with index() == 0.

See also index() and canRedo().

func (*QUndoStack) CanUndoChanged

func (this *QUndoStack) CanUndoChanged(canUndo bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the value of canUndo() changes. It is used to enable or disable the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). canUndo specifies the new value.

func (*QUndoStack) CleanChanged

func (this *QUndoStack) CleanChanged(clean bool)

This signal is emitted whenever the stack enters or leaves the clean state. If clean is true, the stack is in a clean state; otherwise this signal indicates that it has left the clean state.

See also isClean() and setClean().

func (*QUndoStack) CleanIndex

func (this *QUndoStack) CleanIndex() int

Returns the clean index. This is the index at which setClean() was called.

A stack may not have a clean index. This happens if a document is saved, some commands are undone, then a new command is pushed. Since push() deletes all the undone commands before pushing the new command, the stack can't return to the clean state again. In this case, this function returns -1. The -1 may also be returned after an explicit call to resetClean().

See also isClean() and setClean().

func (*QUndoStack) Clear

func (this *QUndoStack) Clear()

Clears the command stack by deleting all commands on it, and returns the stack to the clean state.

Commands are not undone or redone; the state of the edited object remains unchanged.

This function is usually used when the contents of the document are abandoned.

See also QUndoStack().

func (*QUndoStack) Command

func (this *QUndoStack) Command(index int) *QUndoCommand

Returns a const pointer to the command at index.

This function returns a const pointer, because modifying a command, once it has been pushed onto the stack and executed, almost always causes corruption of the state of the document, if the command is later undone or redone.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also QUndoCommand::child().

func (*QUndoStack) Count

func (this *QUndoStack) Count() int

Returns the number of commands on the stack. Macro commands are counted as one command.

See also index(), setIndex(), and command().

func (*QUndoStack) CreateRedoAction

func (this *QUndoStack) CreateRedoAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF, prefix string) *QAction

Creates an redo QAction object with the given parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to redo(). The text of this action is the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo(), prefixed by the specified prefix. If there is no command available for redo, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Redo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Redo" was used by default.

See also createUndoAction(), canRedo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoStack) CreateRedoAction__

func (this *QUndoStack) CreateRedoAction__(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Creates an redo QAction object with the given parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to redo(). The text of this action is the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo(), prefixed by the specified prefix. If there is no command available for redo, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Redo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Redo" was used by default.

See also createUndoAction(), canRedo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoStack) CreateUndoAction

func (this *QUndoStack) CreateUndoAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF, prefix string) *QAction

Creates an undo QAction object with the given parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to undo(). The text of this action is the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo(), prefixed by the specified prefix. If there is no command available for undo, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Undo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Undo" was used by default.

See also createRedoAction(), canUndo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoStack) CreateUndoAction__

func (this *QUndoStack) CreateUndoAction__(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Creates an undo QAction object with the given parent.

Triggering this action will cause a call to undo(). The text of this action is the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo(), prefixed by the specified prefix. If there is no command available for undo, this action will be disabled.

If prefix is empty, the default template "Undo %1" is used instead of prefix. Before Qt 4.8, the prefix "Undo" was used by default.

See also createRedoAction(), canUndo(), and QUndoCommand::text().

func (*QUndoStack) EndMacro

func (this *QUndoStack) EndMacro()

Ends composition of a macro command.

If this is the outermost macro in a set nested macros, this function emits indexChanged() once for the entire macro command.

See also beginMacro().

func (*QUndoStack) GetCthis

func (this *QUndoStack) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QUndoStack) Index

func (this *QUndoStack) Index() int

Returns the index of the current command. This is the command that will be executed on the next call to redo(). It is not always the top-most command on the stack, since a number of commands may have been undone.

See also setIndex(), undo(), redo(), and count().

func (*QUndoStack) IndexChanged

func (this *QUndoStack) IndexChanged(idx int)

This signal is emitted whenever a command modifies the state of the document. This happens when a command is undone or redone. When a macro command is undone or redone, or setIndex() is called, this signal is emitted only once.

idx specifies the index of the current command, ie. the command which will be executed on the next call to redo().

See also index() and setIndex().

func (*QUndoStack) IsActive

func (this *QUndoStack) IsActive() bool

func (*QUndoStack) IsClean

func (this *QUndoStack) IsClean() bool

If the stack is in the clean state, returns true; otherwise returns false.

See also setClean() and cleanIndex().

func (*QUndoStack) MetaObject

func (this *QUndoStack) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QUndoStack) NewFromPointer

func (*QUndoStack) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoStack

func (*QUndoStack) Push

func (this *QUndoStack) Push(cmd QUndoCommand_ITF)

Pushes cmd on the stack or merges it with the most recently executed command. In either case, executes cmd by calling its redo() function.

If cmd's id is not -1, and if the id is the same as that of the most recently executed command, QUndoStack will attempt to merge the two commands by calling QUndoCommand::mergeWith() on the most recently executed command. If QUndoCommand::mergeWith() returns true, cmd is deleted.

After calling QUndoCommand::redo() and, if applicable, QUndoCommand::mergeWith(), QUndoCommand::isObsolete() will be called for cmd or the merged command. If QUndoCommand::isObsolete() returns true, then cmd or the merged command will be deleted from the stack.

In all other cases cmd is simply pushed on the stack.

If commands were undone before cmd was pushed, the current command and all commands above it are deleted. Hence cmd always ends up being the top-most on the stack.

Once a command is pushed, the stack takes ownership of it. There are no getters to return the command, since modifying it after it has been executed will almost always lead to corruption of the document's state.

See also QUndoCommand::id() and QUndoCommand::mergeWith().

func (*QUndoStack) QUndoStack_PTR

func (ptr *QUndoStack) QUndoStack_PTR() *QUndoStack

func (*QUndoStack) Redo

func (this *QUndoStack) Redo()

Redoes the current command by calling QUndoCommand::redo(). Increments the current command index.

If the stack is empty, or if the top command on the stack has already been redone, this function does nothing.

If QUndoCommand::isObsolete() returns true for the current command, then the command will be deleted from the stack. Additionally, if the clean index is greater than or equal to the current command index, then the clean index is reset.

See also undo() and index().

func (*QUndoStack) RedoText

func (this *QUndoStack) RedoText() string

Returns the text of the command which will be redone in the next call to redo().

See also QUndoCommand::actionText() and undoText().

func (*QUndoStack) RedoTextChanged

func (this *QUndoStack) RedoTextChanged(redoText string)

This signal is emitted whenever the value of redoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the redo action returned by createRedoAction(). redoText specifies the new text.

func (*QUndoStack) ResetClean

func (this *QUndoStack) ResetClean()

Leaves the clean state and emits cleanChanged() if the stack was clean. This method resets the clean index to -1.

This is typically called in the following cases, when a document has been:

created basing on some template and has not been saved, so no filename has been associated with the document yet. restored from a backup file. changed outside of the editor and the user did not reload it.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.8.

See also isClean(), setClean(), and cleanIndex().

func (*QUndoStack) SetActive

func (this *QUndoStack) SetActive(active bool)

func (*QUndoStack) SetActive__

func (this *QUndoStack) SetActive__()

func (*QUndoStack) SetClean

func (this *QUndoStack) SetClean()

Marks the stack as clean and emits cleanChanged() if the stack was not already clean.

This is typically called when a document is saved, for example.

Whenever the stack returns to this state through the use of undo/redo commands, it emits the signal cleanChanged(). This signal is also emitted when the stack leaves the clean state.

See also isClean(), resetClean(), and cleanIndex().

func (*QUndoStack) SetCthis

func (this *QUndoStack) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QUndoStack) SetIndex

func (this *QUndoStack) SetIndex(idx int)

Repeatedly calls undo() or redo() until the current command index reaches idx. This function can be used to roll the state of the document forwards of backwards. indexChanged() is emitted only once.

See also index(), count(), undo(), and redo().

func (*QUndoStack) SetUndoLimit

func (this *QUndoStack) SetUndoLimit(limit int)

func (*QUndoStack) Text

func (this *QUndoStack) Text(idx int) string

Returns the text of the command at index idx.

See also beginMacro().

func (*QUndoStack) Undo

func (this *QUndoStack) Undo()

Undoes the command below the current command by calling QUndoCommand::undo(). Decrements the current command index.

If the stack is empty, or if the bottom command on the stack has already been undone, this function does nothing.

After the command is undone, if QUndoCommand::isObsolete() returns true, then the command will be deleted from the stack. Additionally, if the clean index is greater than or equal to the current command index, then the clean index is reset.

See also redo() and index().

func (*QUndoStack) UndoLimit

func (this *QUndoStack) UndoLimit() int

func (*QUndoStack) UndoText

func (this *QUndoStack) UndoText() string

Returns the text of the command which will be undone in the next call to undo().

See also QUndoCommand::actionText() and redoText().

func (*QUndoStack) UndoTextChanged

func (this *QUndoStack) UndoTextChanged(undoText string)

This signal is emitted whenever the value of undoText() changes. It is used to update the text property of the undo action returned by createUndoAction(). undoText specifies the new text.

type QUndoStack_ITF

type QUndoStack_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	QUndoStack_PTR() *QUndoStack
}

type QUndoView

type QUndoView struct {
	*QListView
}

func NewQUndoView

func NewQUndoView(parent QWidget_ITF) *QUndoView

Constructs a new view with parent parent.

func NewQUndoViewFromPointer

func NewQUndoViewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoView

func NewQUndoView_1

func NewQUndoView_1(stack QUndoStack_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QUndoView

Constructs a new view with parent parent.

func NewQUndoView_1_

func NewQUndoView_1_(stack QUndoStack_ITF) *QUndoView

Constructs a new view with parent parent.

func NewQUndoView_2

func NewQUndoView_2(group QUndoGroup_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QUndoView

Constructs a new view with parent parent.

func NewQUndoView_2_

func NewQUndoView_2_(group QUndoGroup_ITF) *QUndoView

Constructs a new view with parent parent.

func NewQUndoView__

func NewQUndoView__() *QUndoView

Constructs a new view with parent parent.

func (*QUndoView) CleanIcon

func (this *QUndoView) CleanIcon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QUndoView) EmptyLabel

func (this *QUndoView) EmptyLabel() string

func (*QUndoView) GetCthis

func (this *QUndoView) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QUndoView) Group

func (this *QUndoView) Group() *QUndoGroup

Returns the group displayed by this view.

If the view is not looking at group, this function returns 0.

See also setGroup() and setStack().

func (*QUndoView) MetaObject

func (this *QUndoView) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QUndoView) NewFromPointer

func (*QUndoView) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QUndoView

func (*QUndoView) QUndoView_PTR

func (ptr *QUndoView) QUndoView_PTR() *QUndoView

func (*QUndoView) SetCleanIcon

func (this *QUndoView) SetCleanIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QUndoView) SetCthis

func (this *QUndoView) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QUndoView) SetEmptyLabel

func (this *QUndoView) SetEmptyLabel(label string)

func (*QUndoView) SetGroup

func (this *QUndoView) SetGroup(group QUndoGroup_ITF)

Sets the group displayed by this view to group. If group is 0, the view will be empty.

The view will update itself autmiatically whenever the active stack of the group changes.

See also group() and setStack().

func (*QUndoView) SetStack

func (this *QUndoView) SetStack(stack QUndoStack_ITF)

Sets the stack displayed by this view to stack. If stack is 0, the view will be empty.

If the view was previously looking at a QUndoGroup, the group is set to 0.

See also stack() and setGroup().

func (*QUndoView) Stack

func (this *QUndoView) Stack() *QUndoStack

Returns the stack currently displayed by this view. If the view is looking at a QUndoGroup, this the group's active stack.

See also setStack() and setGroup().

type QUndoView_ITF

type QUndoView_ITF interface {
	QListView_ITF
	QUndoView_PTR() *QUndoView
}

type QVBoxLayout

type QVBoxLayout struct {
	*QBoxLayout
}

func NewQVBoxLayout

func NewQVBoxLayout() *QVBoxLayout

func NewQVBoxLayoutFromPointer

func NewQVBoxLayoutFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QVBoxLayout

func NewQVBoxLayout_1

func NewQVBoxLayout_1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QVBoxLayout

func (*QVBoxLayout) GetCthis

func (this *QVBoxLayout) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QVBoxLayout) MetaObject

func (this *QVBoxLayout) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QVBoxLayout) NewFromPointer

func (*QVBoxLayout) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QVBoxLayout

func (*QVBoxLayout) QVBoxLayout_PTR

func (ptr *QVBoxLayout) QVBoxLayout_PTR() *QVBoxLayout

func (*QVBoxLayout) SetCthis

func (this *QVBoxLayout) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QVBoxLayout_ITF

type QVBoxLayout_ITF interface {
	QBoxLayout_ITF
	QVBoxLayout_PTR() *QVBoxLayout
}

type QWhatsThis

type QWhatsThis struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQWhatsThisFromPointer

func NewQWhatsThisFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWhatsThis

func (*QWhatsThis) CreateAction

func (this *QWhatsThis) CreateAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QAction

Returns a ready-made QAction, used to invoke "What's This?" context help, with the given parent.

The returned QAction provides a convenient way to let users enter "What's This?" mode.

func (*QWhatsThis) CreateAction__

func (this *QWhatsThis) CreateAction__() *QAction

Returns a ready-made QAction, used to invoke "What's This?" context help, with the given parent.

The returned QAction provides a convenient way to let users enter "What's This?" mode.

func (*QWhatsThis) EnterWhatsThisMode

func (this *QWhatsThis) EnterWhatsThisMode()

This function switches the user interface into "What's This?" mode. The user interface can be switched back into normal mode by the user (e.g. by them clicking or pressing Esc), or programmatically by calling leaveWhatsThisMode().

When entering "What's This?" mode, a QEvent of type Qt::EnterWhatsThisMode is sent to all toplevel widgets.

See also inWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().

func (*QWhatsThis) GetCthis

func (this *QWhatsThis) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWhatsThis) HideText

func (this *QWhatsThis) HideText()

If a "What's This?" window is showing, this destroys it.

See also showText().

func (*QWhatsThis) InWhatsThisMode

func (this *QWhatsThis) InWhatsThisMode() bool

Returns true if the user interface is in "What's This?" mode; otherwise returns false.

See also enterWhatsThisMode().

func (*QWhatsThis) LeaveWhatsThisMode

func (this *QWhatsThis) LeaveWhatsThisMode()

If the user interface is in "What's This?" mode, this function switches back to normal mode; otherwise it does nothing.

When leaving "What's This?" mode, a QEvent of type Qt::LeaveWhatsThisMode is sent to all toplevel widgets.

See also enterWhatsThisMode() and inWhatsThisMode().

func (*QWhatsThis) NewFromPointer

func (*QWhatsThis) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWhatsThis

func (*QWhatsThis) QWhatsThis_PTR

func (ptr *QWhatsThis) QWhatsThis_PTR() *QWhatsThis

func (*QWhatsThis) SetCthis

func (this *QWhatsThis) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QWhatsThis) ShowText

func (this *QWhatsThis) ShowText(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string, w QWidget_ITF)

Shows text as a "What's This?" window, at global position pos. The optional widget argument, w, is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.

See also hideText().

func (*QWhatsThis) ShowText__

func (this *QWhatsThis) ShowText__(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF, text string)

Shows text as a "What's This?" window, at global position pos. The optional widget argument, w, is used to determine the appropriate screen on multi-head systems.

See also hideText().

type QWhatsThis_ITF

type QWhatsThis_ITF interface {
	QWhatsThis_PTR() *QWhatsThis
}

type QWidget

type QWidget struct {
	*qtcore.QObject
	*qtgui.QPaintDevice
}

func NewQWidget

func NewQWidget(parent QWidget_ITF, f int) *QWidget

Constructs a widget which is a child of parent, with widget flags set to f.

If parent is 0, the new widget becomes a window. If parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window inside parent. The new widget is deleted when its parent is deleted.

The widget flags argument, f, is normally 0, but it can be set to customize the frame of a window (i.e. parent must be 0). To customize the frame, use a value composed from the bitwise OR of any of the window flags.

If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must explicitly show the child to make it visible.

Note that the X11 version of Qt may not be able to deliver all combinations of style flags on all systems. This is because on X11, Qt can only ask the window manager, and the window manager can override the application's settings. On Windows, Qt can set whatever flags you want.

See also windowFlags.

func NewQWidgetFromPointer

func NewQWidgetFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidget

func NewQWidget__

func NewQWidget__() *QWidget

Constructs a widget which is a child of parent, with widget flags set to f.

If parent is 0, the new widget becomes a window. If parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window inside parent. The new widget is deleted when its parent is deleted.

The widget flags argument, f, is normally 0, but it can be set to customize the frame of a window (i.e. parent must be 0). To customize the frame, use a value composed from the bitwise OR of any of the window flags.

If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must explicitly show the child to make it visible.

Note that the X11 version of Qt may not be able to deliver all combinations of style flags on all systems. This is because on X11, Qt can only ask the window manager, and the window manager can override the application's settings. On Windows, Qt can set whatever flags you want.

See also windowFlags.

func NewQWidget__1

func NewQWidget__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

Constructs a widget which is a child of parent, with widget flags set to f.

If parent is 0, the new widget becomes a window. If parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window inside parent. The new widget is deleted when its parent is deleted.

The widget flags argument, f, is normally 0, but it can be set to customize the frame of a window (i.e. parent must be 0). To customize the frame, use a value composed from the bitwise OR of any of the window flags.

If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must explicitly show the child to make it visible.

Note that the X11 version of Qt may not be able to deliver all combinations of style flags on all systems. This is because on X11, Qt can only ask the window manager, and the window manager can override the application's settings. On Windows, Qt can set whatever flags you want.

See also windowFlags.

func QApplication_ActiveModalWidget

func QApplication_ActiveModalWidget() *QWidget

func QApplication_ActivePopupWidget

func QApplication_ActivePopupWidget() *QWidget

func QApplication_ActiveWindow

func QApplication_ActiveWindow() *QWidget

func QApplication_FocusWidget

func QApplication_FocusWidget() *QWidget

func QApplication_TopLevelAt

func QApplication_TopLevelAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QWidget

func QApplication_TopLevelAt_1

func QApplication_TopLevelAt_1(x int, y int) *QWidget

func QApplication_WidgetAt

func QApplication_WidgetAt(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QWidget

func QApplication_WidgetAt_1

func QApplication_WidgetAt_1(x int, y int) *QWidget

func QWidget_CreateWindowContainer

func QWidget_CreateWindowContainer(window qtgui.QWindow_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QWidget

func QWidget_Find

func QWidget_Find(arg0 uint64) *QWidget

func QWidget_KeyboardGrabber

func QWidget_KeyboardGrabber() *QWidget

func QWidget_MouseGrabber

func QWidget_MouseGrabber() *QWidget

func (*QWidget) AcceptDrops

func (this *QWidget) AcceptDrops() bool

func (*QWidget) AccessibleDescription

func (this *QWidget) AccessibleDescription() string

func (*QWidget) AccessibleName

func (this *QWidget) AccessibleName() string

func (*QWidget) ActionEvent

func (this *QWidget) ActionEvent(event qtgui.QActionEvent_ITF)

This event handler is called with the given event whenever the widget's actions are changed.

See also addAction(), insertAction(), removeAction(), actions(), and QActionEvent.

func (*QWidget) ActivateWindow

func (this *QWidget) ActivateWindow()

Sets the top-level widget containing this widget to be the active window.

An active window is a visible top-level window that has the keyboard input focus.

This function performs the same operation as clicking the mouse on the title bar of a top-level window. On X11, the result depends on the Window Manager. If you want to ensure that the window is stacked on top as well you should also call raise(). Note that the window must be visible, otherwise activateWindow() has no effect.

On Windows, if you are calling this when the application is not currently the active one then it will not make it the active window. It will change the color of the taskbar entry to indicate that the window has changed in some way. This is because Microsoft does not allow an application to interrupt what the user is currently doing in another application.

See also isActiveWindow(), window(), show(), and QWindowsWindowFunctions::setWindowActivationBehavior().

func (*QWidget) AddAction

func (this *QWidget) AddAction(action QAction_ITF)

Appends the action action to this widget's list of actions.

All QWidgets have a list of QActions, however they can be represented graphically in many different ways. The default use of the QAction list (as returned by actions()) is to create a context QMenu.

A QWidget should only have one of each action and adding an action it already has will not cause the same action to be in the widget twice.

The ownership of action is not transferred to this QWidget.

See also removeAction(), insertAction(), actions(), and QMenu.

func (*QWidget) AdjustSize

func (this *QWidget) AdjustSize()

Adjusts the size of the widget to fit its contents.

This function uses sizeHint() if it is valid, i.e., the size hint's width and height are >= 0. Otherwise, it sets the size to the children rectangle that covers all child widgets (the union of all child widget rectangles).

For windows, the screen size is also taken into account. If the sizeHint() is less than (200, 100) and the size policy is expanding, the window will be at least (200, 100). The maximum size of a window is 2/3 of the screen's width and height.

See also sizeHint() and childrenRect().

func (*QWidget) AutoFillBackground

func (this *QWidget) AutoFillBackground() bool

func (*QWidget) BackgroundRole

func (this *QWidget) BackgroundRole() int

Returns the background role of the widget.

The background role defines the brush from the widget's palette that is used to render the background.

If no explicit background role is set, the widget inherts its parent widget's background role.

See also setBackgroundRole() and foregroundRole().

func (*QWidget) BackingStore

func (this *QWidget) BackingStore() *qtgui.QBackingStore

Returns the QBackingStore this widget will be drawn into.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

func (*QWidget) BaseSize

func (this *QWidget) BaseSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) ChangeEvent

func (this *QWidget) ChangeEvent(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented to handle state changes.

The state being changed in this event can be retrieved through the event supplied.

Change events include: QEvent::ToolBarChange, QEvent::ActivationChange, QEvent::EnabledChange, QEvent::FontChange, QEvent::StyleChange, QEvent::PaletteChange, QEvent::WindowTitleChange, QEvent::IconTextChange, QEvent::ModifiedChange, QEvent::MouseTrackingChange, QEvent::ParentChange, QEvent::WindowStateChange, QEvent::LanguageChange, QEvent::LocaleChange, QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange, QEvent::ReadOnlyChange.

func (*QWidget) ChildAt

func (this *QWidget) ChildAt(x int, y int) *QWidget

Returns the visible child widget at the position (x, y) in the widget's coordinate system. If there is no visible child widget at the specified position, the function returns 0.

func (*QWidget) ChildAt_1

func (this *QWidget) ChildAt_1(p qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *QWidget

Returns the visible child widget at the position (x, y) in the widget's coordinate system. If there is no visible child widget at the specified position, the function returns 0.

func (*QWidget) ChildrenRect

func (this *QWidget) ChildrenRect() *qtcore.QRect

func (*QWidget) ChildrenRegion

func (this *QWidget) ChildrenRegion() *qtgui.QRegion

func (*QWidget) ClearFocus

func (this *QWidget) ClearFocus()

Takes keyboard input focus from the widget.

If the widget has active focus, a focus out event is sent to this widget to tell it that it has lost the focus.

This widget must enable focus setting in order to get the keyboard input focus, i.e. it must call setFocusPolicy().

See also hasFocus(), setFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), and QApplication::focusWidget().

func (*QWidget) ClearMask

func (this *QWidget) ClearMask()

Removes any mask set by setMask().

See also setMask().

func (*QWidget) Close

func (this *QWidget) Close() bool

Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; otherwise returns false.

First it sends the widget a QCloseEvent. The widget is hidden if it accepts the close event. If it ignores the event, nothing happens. The default implementation of QWidget::closeEvent() accepts the close event.

If the widget has the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose flag, the widget is also deleted. A close events is delivered to the widget no matter if the widget is visible or not.

The QApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the last visible primary window (i.e. window with no parent) with the Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute set is closed. By default this attribute is set for all widgets except transient windows such as splash screens, tool windows, and popup menus.

func (*QWidget) CloseEvent

func (this *QWidget) CloseEvent(event qtgui.QCloseEvent_ITF)

This event handler is called with the given event when Qt receives a window close request for a top-level widget from the window system.

By default, the event is accepted and the widget is closed. You can reimplement this function to change the way the widget responds to window close requests. For example, you can prevent the window from closing by calling ignore() on all events.

Main window applications typically use reimplementations of this function to check whether the user's work has been saved and ask for permission before closing. For example, the Application Example uses a helper function to determine whether or not to close the window:

void MainWindow::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)
{
    if (maybeSave()) {
        writeSettings();
        event->accept();
    } else {
        event->ignore();
    }
}

See also event(), hide(), close(), QCloseEvent, and Application Example.

func (*QWidget) ContentsMargins

func (this *QWidget) ContentsMargins() *qtcore.QMargins

The contentsMargins function returns the widget's contents margins.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also getContentsMargins(), setContentsMargins(), and contentsRect().

func (*QWidget) ContentsRect

func (this *QWidget) ContentsRect() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the area inside the widget's margins.

See also setContentsMargins() and getContentsMargins().

func (*QWidget) ContextMenuEvent

func (this *QWidget) ContextMenuEvent(event qtgui.QContextMenuEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget context menu events.

The handler is called when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::DefaultContextMenu.

The default implementation ignores the context event. See the QContextMenuEvent documentation for more details.

See also event(), QContextMenuEvent, and customContextMenuRequested().

func (*QWidget) ContextMenuPolicy

func (this *QWidget) ContextMenuPolicy() int

func (*QWidget) Create

func (this *QWidget) Create(arg0 uint64, initializeWindow bool, destroyOldWindow bool)

Creates a new widget window.

The parameter window is ignored in Qt 5. Please use QWindow::fromWinId() to create a QWindow wrapping a foreign window and pass it to QWidget::createWindowContainer() instead.

Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is true. If initializeWindow is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.

Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is true. If destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).

The QWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget.

See also createWindowContainer() and QWindow::fromWinId().

func (*QWidget) CreateWinId

func (this *QWidget) CreateWinId()

func (*QWidget) CreateWindowContainer

func (this *QWidget) CreateWindowContainer(window qtgui.QWindow_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QWidget

Creates a QWidget that makes it possible to embed window into a QWidget-based application.

The window container is created as a child of parent and with window flags flags.

Once the window has been embedded into the container, the container will control the window's geometry and visibility. Explicit calls to QWindow::setGeometry(), QWindow::show() or QWindow::hide() on an embedded window is not recommended.

The container takes over ownership of window. The window can be removed from the window container with a call to QWindow::setParent().

The window container is attached as a native child window to the toplevel window it is a child of. When a window container is used as a child of a QAbstractScrollArea or QMdiArea, it will create a native window for every widget in its parent chain to allow for proper stacking and clipping in this use case. Creating a native window for the window container also allows for proper stacking and clipping. This must be done before showing the window container. Applications with many native child windows may suffer from performance issues.

The window container has a number of known limitations:

Stacking order; The embedded window will stack on top of the widget hierarchy as an opaque box. The stacking order of multiple overlapping window container instances is undefined. Rendering Integration; The window container does not interoperate with QGraphicsProxyWidget, QWidget::render() or similar functionality. Focus Handling; It is possible to let the window container instance have any focus policy and it will delegate focus to the window via a call to QWindow::requestActivate(). However, returning to the normal focus chain from the QWindow instance will be up to the QWindow instance implementation itself. For instance, when entering a Qt Quick based window with tab focus, it is quite likely that further tab presses will only cycle inside the QML application. Also, whether QWindow::requestActivate() actually gives the window focus, is platform dependent. Using many window container instances in a QWidget-based application can greatly hurt the overall performance of the application.

func (*QWidget) CreateWindowContainer__

func (this *QWidget) CreateWindowContainer__(window qtgui.QWindow_ITF) *QWidget

Creates a QWidget that makes it possible to embed window into a QWidget-based application.

The window container is created as a child of parent and with window flags flags.

Once the window has been embedded into the container, the container will control the window's geometry and visibility. Explicit calls to QWindow::setGeometry(), QWindow::show() or QWindow::hide() on an embedded window is not recommended.

The container takes over ownership of window. The window can be removed from the window container with a call to QWindow::setParent().

The window container is attached as a native child window to the toplevel window it is a child of. When a window container is used as a child of a QAbstractScrollArea or QMdiArea, it will create a native window for every widget in its parent chain to allow for proper stacking and clipping in this use case. Creating a native window for the window container also allows for proper stacking and clipping. This must be done before showing the window container. Applications with many native child windows may suffer from performance issues.

The window container has a number of known limitations:

Stacking order; The embedded window will stack on top of the widget hierarchy as an opaque box. The stacking order of multiple overlapping window container instances is undefined. Rendering Integration; The window container does not interoperate with QGraphicsProxyWidget, QWidget::render() or similar functionality. Focus Handling; It is possible to let the window container instance have any focus policy and it will delegate focus to the window via a call to QWindow::requestActivate(). However, returning to the normal focus chain from the QWindow instance will be up to the QWindow instance implementation itself. For instance, when entering a Qt Quick based window with tab focus, it is quite likely that further tab presses will only cycle inside the QML application. Also, whether QWindow::requestActivate() actually gives the window focus, is platform dependent. Using many window container instances in a QWidget-based application can greatly hurt the overall performance of the application.

func (*QWidget) CreateWindowContainer__1

func (this *QWidget) CreateWindowContainer__1(window qtgui.QWindow_ITF, parent QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

Creates a QWidget that makes it possible to embed window into a QWidget-based application.

The window container is created as a child of parent and with window flags flags.

Once the window has been embedded into the container, the container will control the window's geometry and visibility. Explicit calls to QWindow::setGeometry(), QWindow::show() or QWindow::hide() on an embedded window is not recommended.

The container takes over ownership of window. The window can be removed from the window container with a call to QWindow::setParent().

The window container is attached as a native child window to the toplevel window it is a child of. When a window container is used as a child of a QAbstractScrollArea or QMdiArea, it will create a native window for every widget in its parent chain to allow for proper stacking and clipping in this use case. Creating a native window for the window container also allows for proper stacking and clipping. This must be done before showing the window container. Applications with many native child windows may suffer from performance issues.

The window container has a number of known limitations:

Stacking order; The embedded window will stack on top of the widget hierarchy as an opaque box. The stacking order of multiple overlapping window container instances is undefined. Rendering Integration; The window container does not interoperate with QGraphicsProxyWidget, QWidget::render() or similar functionality. Focus Handling; It is possible to let the window container instance have any focus policy and it will delegate focus to the window via a call to QWindow::requestActivate(). However, returning to the normal focus chain from the QWindow instance will be up to the QWindow instance implementation itself. For instance, when entering a Qt Quick based window with tab focus, it is quite likely that further tab presses will only cycle inside the QML application. Also, whether QWindow::requestActivate() actually gives the window focus, is platform dependent. Using many window container instances in a QWidget-based application can greatly hurt the overall performance of the application.

func (*QWidget) Create__

func (this *QWidget) Create__()

Creates a new widget window.

The parameter window is ignored in Qt 5. Please use QWindow::fromWinId() to create a QWindow wrapping a foreign window and pass it to QWidget::createWindowContainer() instead.

Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is true. If initializeWindow is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.

Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is true. If destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).

The QWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget.

See also createWindowContainer() and QWindow::fromWinId().

func (*QWidget) Create__1

func (this *QWidget) Create__1(arg0 uint64)

Creates a new widget window.

The parameter window is ignored in Qt 5. Please use QWindow::fromWinId() to create a QWindow wrapping a foreign window and pass it to QWidget::createWindowContainer() instead.

Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is true. If initializeWindow is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.

Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is true. If destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).

The QWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget.

See also createWindowContainer() and QWindow::fromWinId().

func (*QWidget) Create__2

func (this *QWidget) Create__2(arg0 uint64, initializeWindow bool)

Creates a new widget window.

The parameter window is ignored in Qt 5. Please use QWindow::fromWinId() to create a QWindow wrapping a foreign window and pass it to QWidget::createWindowContainer() instead.

Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is true. If initializeWindow is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.

Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is true. If destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).

The QWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget.

See also createWindowContainer() and QWindow::fromWinId().

func (*QWidget) Cursor

func (this *QWidget) Cursor() *qtgui.QCursor

func (*QWidget) CustomContextMenuRequested

func (this *QWidget) CustomContextMenuRequested(pos qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the widget's contextMenuPolicy is Qt::CustomContextMenu, and the user has requested a context menu on the widget. The position pos is the position of the context menu event that the widget receives. Normally this is in widget coordinates. The exception to this rule is QAbstractScrollArea and its subclasses that map the context menu event to coordinates of the viewport().

See also mapToGlobal(), QMenu, and contextMenuPolicy.

func (*QWidget) Destroy

func (this *QWidget) Destroy(destroyWindow bool, destroySubWindows bool)

Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if destroyWindow is true.

destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets, passing destroySubWindows for the destroyWindow parameter. To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy subwidgets selectively first.

This function is usually called from the QWidget destructor.

func (*QWidget) Destroy__

func (this *QWidget) Destroy__()

Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if destroyWindow is true.

destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets, passing destroySubWindows for the destroyWindow parameter. To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy subwidgets selectively first.

This function is usually called from the QWidget destructor.

func (*QWidget) Destroy__1

func (this *QWidget) Destroy__1(destroyWindow bool)

Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if destroyWindow is true.

destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets, passing destroySubWindows for the destroyWindow parameter. To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy subwidgets selectively first.

This function is usually called from the QWidget destructor.

func (*QWidget) DevType

func (this *QWidget) DevType() int

func (*QWidget) DragEnterEvent

func (this *QWidget) DragEnterEvent(event qtgui.QDragEnterEvent_ITF)

This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse enters this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.

If the event is ignored, the widget won't receive any drag move events.

See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.

See also QDrag and QDragEnterEvent.

func (*QWidget) DragLeaveEvent

func (this *QWidget) DragLeaveEvent(event qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent_ITF)

This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the mouse leaves this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.

See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.

See also QDrag and QDragLeaveEvent.

func (*QWidget) DragMoveEvent

func (this *QWidget) DragMoveEvent(event qtgui.QDragMoveEvent_ITF)

This event handler is called if a drag is in progress, and when any of the following conditions occur: the cursor enters this widget, the cursor moves within this widget, or a modifier key is pressed on the keyboard while this widget has the focus. The event is passed in the event parameter.

See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.

See also QDrag and QDragMoveEvent.

func (*QWidget) DropEvent

func (this *QWidget) DropEvent(event qtgui.QDropEvent_ITF)

This event handler is called when the drag is dropped on this widget. The event is passed in the event parameter.

See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.

See also QDrag and QDropEvent.

func (*QWidget) EffectiveWinId

func (this *QWidget) EffectiveWinId() uint64

Returns the effective window system identifier of the widget, i.e. the native parent's window system identifier.

If the widget is native, this function returns the native widget ID. Otherwise, the window ID of the first native parent widget, i.e., the top-level widget that contains this widget, is returned.

Note: We recommend that you do not store this value as it is likely to change at run-time.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also nativeParentWidget().

func (*QWidget) EnsurePolished

func (this *QWidget) EnsurePolished()

Ensures that the widget and its children have been polished by QStyle (i.e., have a proper font and palette).

QWidget calls this function after it has been fully constructed but before it is shown the very first time. You can call this function if you want to ensure that the widget is polished before doing an operation, e.g., the correct font size might be needed in the widget's sizeHint() reimplementation. Note that this function is called from the default implementation of sizeHint().

Polishing is useful for final initialization that must happen after all constructors (from base classes as well as from subclasses) have been called.

If you need to change some settings when a widget is polished, reimplement event() and handle the QEvent::Polish event type.

Note: The function is declared const so that it can be called from other const functions (e.g., sizeHint()).

See also event().

func (*QWidget) EnterEvent

func (this *QWidget) EnterEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget enter events which are passed in the event parameter.

An event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor enters the widget.

See also leaveEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().

func (*QWidget) Event

func (this *QWidget) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

This is the main event handler; it handles event event. You can reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using one of the specialized event handlers instead.

Key press and release events are treated differently from other events. event() checks for Tab and Shift+Tab and tries to move the focus appropriately. If there is no widget to move the focus to (or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls keyPressEvent().

Mouse and tablet event handling is also slightly special: only when the widget is enabled, event() will call the specialized handlers such as mousePressEvent(); otherwise it will discard the event.

This function returns true if the event was recognized, otherwise it returns false. If the recognized event was accepted (see QEvent::accepted), any further processing such as event propagation to the parent widget stops.

See also closeEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), enterEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), leaveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), moveEvent(), paintEvent(), resizeEvent(), QObject::event(), and QObject::timerEvent().

func (*QWidget) Find

func (this *QWidget) Find(arg0 uint64) *QWidget

Returns a pointer to the widget with window identifer/handle id.

The window identifier type depends on the underlying window system, see qwindowdefs.h for the actual definition. If there is no widget with this identifier, 0 is returned.

func (*QWidget) FocusInEvent

func (this *QWidget) FocusInEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus received) for the widget. The event is passed in the event parameter

A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)

The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).

See also focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.

func (*QWidget) FocusNextChild

func (this *QWidget) FocusNextChild() bool

Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it can't.

See also focusPreviousChild().

func (*QWidget) FocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QWidget) FocusNextPrevChild(next bool) bool

Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it can't.

If next is true, this function searches forward, if next is false, it searches backward.

Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its "current active link" forward or backward, and call focusNextPrevChild() only when it reaches the last or first link on the "page".

Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets, but only the window that contains the child widgets decides where to redirect focus. By reimplementing this function for an object, you thus gain control of focus traversal for all child widgets.

See also focusNextChild() and focusPreviousChild().

func (*QWidget) FocusOutEvent

func (this *QWidget) FocusOutEvent(event qtgui.QFocusEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive keyboard focus events (focus lost) for the widget. The events is passed in the event parameter.

A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even those that do not normally accept focus.)

The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows that do not specify a focusPolicy()).

See also focusInEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and QFocusEvent.

func (*QWidget) FocusPolicy

func (this *QWidget) FocusPolicy() int

func (*QWidget) FocusPreviousChild

func (this *QWidget) FocusPreviousChild() bool

Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or false if it can't.

See also focusNextChild().

func (*QWidget) FocusProxy

func (this *QWidget) FocusProxy() *QWidget

Returns the focus proxy, or 0 if there is no focus proxy.

See also setFocusProxy().

func (*QWidget) FocusWidget

func (this *QWidget) FocusWidget() *QWidget

Returns the last child of this widget that setFocus had been called on. For top level widgets this is the widget that will get focus in case this window gets activated

This is not the same as QApplication::focusWidget(), which returns the focus widget in the currently active window.

func (*QWidget) Font

func (this *QWidget) Font() *qtgui.QFont

func (*QWidget) FontInfo

func (this *QWidget) FontInfo() *qtgui.QFontInfo

Returns the font info for the widget's current font. Equivalent to QFontInfo(widget->font()).

See also font(), fontMetrics(), and setFont().

func (*QWidget) FontMetrics

func (this *QWidget) FontMetrics() *qtgui.QFontMetrics

Returns the font metrics for the widget's current font. Equivalent to QFontMetrics(widget->font()).

See also font(), fontInfo(), and setFont().

func (*QWidget) ForegroundRole

func (this *QWidget) ForegroundRole() int

Returns the foreground role.

The foreground role defines the color from the widget's palette that is used to draw the foreground.

If no explicit foreground role is set, the function returns a role that contrasts with the background role.

See also setForegroundRole() and backgroundRole().

func (*QWidget) FrameGeometry

func (this *QWidget) FrameGeometry() *qtcore.QRect

func (*QWidget) FrameSize

func (this *QWidget) FrameSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) Geometry

func (this *QWidget) Geometry() *qtcore.QRect

func (*QWidget) GetContentsMargins

func (this *QWidget) GetContentsMargins(left unsafe.Pointer, top unsafe.Pointer, right unsafe.Pointer, bottom unsafe.Pointer)

Returns the widget's contents margins for left, top, right, and bottom.

See also setContentsMargins() and contentsRect().

func (*QWidget) GetCthis

func (this *QWidget) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWidget) Grab

func (this *QWidget) Grab(rectangle qtcore.QRect_ITF) *qtgui.QPixmap

Renders the widget into a pixmap restricted by the given rectangle. If the widget has any children, then they are also painted in the appropriate positions.

If a rectangle with an invalid size is specified (the default), the entire widget is painted.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also render() and QPixmap.

func (*QWidget) GrabGesture

func (this *QWidget) GrabGesture(type_ int, flags int)

Subscribes the widget to a given gesture with specific flags.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also ungrabGesture() and QGestureEvent.

func (*QWidget) GrabGesture__

func (this *QWidget) GrabGesture__(type_ int)

Subscribes the widget to a given gesture with specific flags.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also ungrabGesture() and QGestureEvent.

func (*QWidget) GrabKeyboard

func (this *QWidget) GrabKeyboard()

Grabs the keyboard input.

This widget receives all keyboard events until releaseKeyboard() is called; other widgets get no keyboard events at all. Mouse events are not affected. Use grabMouse() if you want to grab that.

The focus widget is not affected, except that it doesn't receive any keyboard events. setFocus() moves the focus as usual, but the new focus widget receives keyboard events only after releaseKeyboard() is called.

If a different widget is currently grabbing keyboard input, that widget's grab is released first.

See also releaseKeyboard(), grabMouse(), releaseMouse(), and focusWidget().

func (*QWidget) GrabMouse

func (this *QWidget) GrabMouse()

Grabs the mouse input.

This widget receives all mouse events until releaseMouse() is called; other widgets get no mouse events at all. Keyboard events are not affected. Use grabKeyboard() if you want to grab that.

Warning: Bugs in mouse-grabbing applications very often lock the terminal. Use this function with extreme caution, and consider using the -nograb command line option while debugging.

It is almost never necessary to grab the mouse when using Qt, as Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last button is released.

Note: Only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If isVisible() returns false for a widget, that widget cannot call grabMouse().

Note: On Windows, grabMouse() only works when the mouse is inside a window owned by the process. On macOS, grabMouse() only works when the mouse is inside the frame of that widget.

See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().

func (*QWidget) GrabMouse_1

func (this *QWidget) GrabMouse_1(arg0 qtgui.QCursor_ITF)

Grabs the mouse input.

This widget receives all mouse events until releaseMouse() is called; other widgets get no mouse events at all. Keyboard events are not affected. Use grabKeyboard() if you want to grab that.

Warning: Bugs in mouse-grabbing applications very often lock the terminal. Use this function with extreme caution, and consider using the -nograb command line option while debugging.

It is almost never necessary to grab the mouse when using Qt, as Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last button is released.

Note: Only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If isVisible() returns false for a widget, that widget cannot call grabMouse().

Note: On Windows, grabMouse() only works when the mouse is inside a window owned by the process. On macOS, grabMouse() only works when the mouse is inside the frame of that widget.

See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().

func (*QWidget) GrabShortcut

func (this *QWidget) GrabShortcut(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF, context int) int

Adds a shortcut to Qt's shortcut system that watches for the given key sequence in the given context. If the context is Qt::ApplicationShortcut, the shortcut applies to the application as a whole. Otherwise, it is either local to this widget, Qt::WidgetShortcut, or to the window itself, Qt::WindowShortcut.

If the same key sequence has been grabbed by several widgets, when the key sequence occurs a QEvent::Shortcut event is sent to all the widgets to which it applies in a non-deterministic order, but with the “ambiguous” flag set to true.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function; instead create QActions with the shortcut key sequences you require (if you also want equivalent menu options and toolbar buttons), or create QShortcuts if you just need key sequences. Both QAction and QShortcut handle all the event filtering for you, and provide signals which are triggered when the user triggers the key sequence, so are much easier to use than this low-level function.

See also releaseShortcut() and setShortcutEnabled().

func (*QWidget) GrabShortcut__

func (this *QWidget) GrabShortcut__(key qtgui.QKeySequence_ITF) int

Adds a shortcut to Qt's shortcut system that watches for the given key sequence in the given context. If the context is Qt::ApplicationShortcut, the shortcut applies to the application as a whole. Otherwise, it is either local to this widget, Qt::WidgetShortcut, or to the window itself, Qt::WindowShortcut.

If the same key sequence has been grabbed by several widgets, when the key sequence occurs a QEvent::Shortcut event is sent to all the widgets to which it applies in a non-deterministic order, but with the “ambiguous” flag set to true.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function; instead create QActions with the shortcut key sequences you require (if you also want equivalent menu options and toolbar buttons), or create QShortcuts if you just need key sequences. Both QAction and QShortcut handle all the event filtering for you, and provide signals which are triggered when the user triggers the key sequence, so are much easier to use than this low-level function.

See also releaseShortcut() and setShortcutEnabled().

func (*QWidget) Grab__

func (this *QWidget) Grab__() *qtgui.QPixmap

Renders the widget into a pixmap restricted by the given rectangle. If the widget has any children, then they are also painted in the appropriate positions.

If a rectangle with an invalid size is specified (the default), the entire widget is painted.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also render() and QPixmap.

func (*QWidget) GraphicsEffect

func (this *QWidget) GraphicsEffect() *QGraphicsEffect

The graphicsEffect function returns a pointer to the widget's graphics effect.

If the widget has no graphics effect, 0 is returned.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also setGraphicsEffect().

func (*QWidget) GraphicsProxyWidget

func (this *QWidget) GraphicsProxyWidget() *QGraphicsProxyWidget

Returns the proxy widget for the corresponding embedded widget in a graphics view; otherwise returns 0.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also QGraphicsProxyWidget::createProxyForChildWidget() and QGraphicsScene::addWidget().

func (*QWidget) HasFocus

func (this *QWidget) HasFocus() bool

func (*QWidget) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QWidget) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Returns true if the widget's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

func (*QWidget) HasMouseTracking

func (this *QWidget) HasMouseTracking() bool

func (*QWidget) HasTabletTracking

func (this *QWidget) HasTabletTracking() bool

func (*QWidget) Height

func (this *QWidget) Height() int

func (*QWidget) HeightForWidth

func (this *QWidget) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Returns the preferred height for this widget, given the width w.

If this widget has a layout, the default implementation returns the layout's preferred height. if there is no layout, the default implementation returns -1 indicating that the preferred height does not depend on the width.

func (*QWidget) Hide

func (this *QWidget) Hide()

Hides the widget. This function is equivalent to setVisible(false).

Note: If you are working with QDialog or its subclasses and you invoke the show() function after this function, the dialog will be displayed in its original position.

See also hideEvent(), isHidden(), show(), setVisible(), isVisible(), and close().

func (*QWidget) HideEvent

func (this *QWidget) HideEvent(event qtgui.QHideEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget hide events. The event is passed in the event parameter.

Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been hidden.

Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().

See also visible, event(), and QHideEvent.

func (*QWidget) InheritActionEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritActionEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QActionEvent))

void actionEvent(class QActionEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritChangeEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritChangeEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent))

void changeEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritCloseEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritCloseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QCloseEvent))

void closeEvent(class QCloseEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritContextMenuEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritContextMenuEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QContextMenuEvent))

void contextMenuEvent(class QContextMenuEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritCreate

func (this *QWidget) InheritCreate(f func(arg0 uint64, initializeWindow bool, destroyOldWindow bool))

void create(WId, _Bool, _Bool)

func (*QWidget) InheritDestroy

func (this *QWidget) InheritDestroy(f func(destroyWindow bool, destroySubWindows bool))

void destroy(_Bool, _Bool)

func (*QWidget) InheritDragEnterEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritDragEnterEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragEnterEvent))

void dragEnterEvent(class QDragEnterEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritDragLeaveEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritDragLeaveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragLeaveEvent))

void dragLeaveEvent(class QDragLeaveEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritDragMoveEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritDragMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDragMoveEvent))

void dragMoveEvent(class QDragMoveEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritDropEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritDropEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QDropEvent))

void dropEvent(class QDropEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritEnterEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritEnterEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void enterEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritFocusInEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritFocusInEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusInEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritFocusNextChild

func (this *QWidget) InheritFocusNextChild(f func() bool)

bool focusNextChild()

func (*QWidget) InheritFocusNextPrevChild

func (this *QWidget) InheritFocusNextPrevChild(f func(next bool) bool)

bool focusNextPrevChild(_Bool)

func (*QWidget) InheritFocusOutEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritFocusOutEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QFocusEvent))

void focusOutEvent(class QFocusEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritFocusPreviousChild

func (this *QWidget) InheritFocusPreviousChild(f func() bool)

bool focusPreviousChild()

func (*QWidget) InheritHideEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritHideEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QHideEvent))

void hideEvent(class QHideEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritInitPainter

func (this *QWidget) InheritInitPainter(f func(painter *qtgui.QPainter))

void initPainter(class QPainter *)

func (*QWidget) InheritInputMethodEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritInputMethodEvent(f func(arg0 *qtgui.QInputMethodEvent))

void inputMethodEvent(class QInputMethodEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritKeyPressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyPressEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritKeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritKeyReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QKeyEvent))

void keyReleaseEvent(class QKeyEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritLeaveEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritLeaveEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent))

void leaveEvent(class QEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritMetric

func (this *QWidget) InheritMetric(f func(arg0 int) int)

int metric(enum QPaintDevice::PaintDeviceMetric)

func (*QWidget) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritMouseDoubleClickEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseDoubleClickEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritMouseMoveEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritMouseMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseMoveEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritMousePressEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritMousePressEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mousePressEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritMouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritMouseReleaseEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMouseEvent))

void mouseReleaseEvent(class QMouseEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritMoveEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritMoveEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QMoveEvent))

void moveEvent(class QMoveEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritNativeEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritNativeEvent(f func(eventType *qtcore.QByteArray, message unsafe.Pointer, result unsafe.Pointer) bool)

bool nativeEvent(const class QByteArray &, void *, long *)

func (*QWidget) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritRedirected

func (this *QWidget) InheritRedirected(f func(offset *qtcore.QPoint) unsafe.Pointer)

QPaintDevice * redirected(class QPoint *)

func (*QWidget) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritSharedPainter

func (this *QWidget) InheritSharedPainter(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QPainter * sharedPainter()

func (*QWidget) InheritShowEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritShowEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QShowEvent))

void showEvent(class QShowEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritTabletEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritTabletEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QTabletEvent))

void tabletEvent(class QTabletEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InheritUpdateMicroFocus

func (this *QWidget) InheritUpdateMicroFocus(f func())

void updateMicroFocus()

func (*QWidget) InheritWheelEvent

func (this *QWidget) InheritWheelEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QWheelEvent))

void wheelEvent(class QWheelEvent *)

func (*QWidget) InitPainter

func (this *QWidget) InitPainter(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Initializes the painter pen, background and font to the same as the given widget's. This function is called automatically when the painter is opened on a QWidget.

func (*QWidget) InputMethodEvent

func (this *QWidget) InputMethodEvent(arg0 qtgui.QInputMethodEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler is called when the state of the input method changes.

Note that when creating custom text editing widgets, the Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled window attribute must be set explicitly (using the setAttribute() function) in order to receive input method events.

The default implementation calls event->ignore(), which rejects the Input Method event. See the QInputMethodEvent documentation for more details.

See also event() and QInputMethodEvent.

func (*QWidget) InputMethodHints

func (this *QWidget) InputMethodHints() int

func (*QWidget) InputMethodQuery

func (this *QWidget) InputMethodQuery(arg0 int) *qtcore.QVariant

This method is only relevant for input widgets. It is used by the input method to query a set of properties of the widget to be able to support complex input method operations as support for surrounding text and reconversions.

query specifies which property is queried.

See also inputMethodEvent(), QInputMethodEvent, QInputMethodQueryEvent, and inputMethodHints.

func (*QWidget) InsertAction

func (this *QWidget) InsertAction(before QAction_ITF, action QAction_ITF)

Inserts the action action to this widget's list of actions, before the action before. It appends the action if before is 0 or before is not a valid action for this widget.

A QWidget should only have one of each action.

See also removeAction(), addAction(), QMenu, contextMenuPolicy, and actions().

func (*QWidget) InternalWinId

func (this *QWidget) InternalWinId() uint64

func (*QWidget) IsActiveWindow

func (this *QWidget) IsActiveWindow() bool

func (*QWidget) IsAncestorOf

func (this *QWidget) IsAncestorOf(child QWidget_ITF) bool

Returns true if this widget is a parent, (or grandparent and so on to any level), of the given child, and both widgets are within the same window; otherwise returns false.

func (*QWidget) IsEnabled

func (this *QWidget) IsEnabled() bool

func (*QWidget) IsEnabledTo

func (this *QWidget) IsEnabledTo(arg0 QWidget_ITF) bool

Returns true if this widget would become enabled if ancestor is enabled; otherwise returns false.

This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly disabled.

isEnabledTo(0) returns false if this widget or any if its ancestors was explicitly disabled.

The word ancestor here means a parent widget within the same window.

Therefore isEnabledTo(0) stops at this widget's window, unlike isEnabled() which also takes parent windows into considerations.

See also setEnabled() and enabled.

func (*QWidget) IsEnabledToTLW

func (this *QWidget) IsEnabledToTLW() bool

func (*QWidget) IsFullScreen

func (this *QWidget) IsFullScreen() bool

func (*QWidget) IsHidden

func (this *QWidget) IsHidden() bool

Returns true if the widget is hidden, otherwise returns false.

A hidden widget will only become visible when show() is called on it. It will not be automatically shown when the parent is shown.

To check visibility, use !isVisible() instead (notice the exclamation mark).

isHidden() implies !isVisible(), but a widget can be not visible and not hidden at the same time. This is the case for widgets that are children of widgets that are not visible.

Widgets are hidden if:

they were created as independent windows, they were created as children of visible widgets, hide() or setVisible(false) was called.

func (*QWidget) IsLeftToRight

func (this *QWidget) IsLeftToRight() bool

func (*QWidget) IsMaximized

func (this *QWidget) IsMaximized() bool

func (*QWidget) IsMinimized

func (this *QWidget) IsMinimized() bool

func (*QWidget) IsModal

func (this *QWidget) IsModal() bool

func (*QWidget) IsRightToLeft

func (this *QWidget) IsRightToLeft() bool

func (*QWidget) IsTopLevel

func (this *QWidget) IsTopLevel() bool

func (*QWidget) IsVisible

func (this *QWidget) IsVisible() bool

func (*QWidget) IsVisibleTo

func (this *QWidget) IsVisibleTo(arg0 QWidget_ITF) bool

Returns true if this widget would become visible if ancestor is shown; otherwise returns false.

The true case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent up to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly hidden.

This function will still return true if the widget is obscured by other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it or they were to be moved.

isVisibleTo(0) is identical to isVisible().

See also show(), hide(), and isVisible().

func (*QWidget) IsWindow

func (this *QWidget) IsWindow() bool

Returns true if the widget is an independent window, otherwise returns false.

A window is a widget that isn't visually the child of any other widget and that usually has a frame and a window title.

A window can have a parent widget. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a common taskbar entry with its parent.

QDialog and QMainWindow widgets are by default windows, even if a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is specified by the Qt::Window flag.

See also window(), isModal(), and parentWidget().

func (*QWidget) IsWindowModified

func (this *QWidget) IsWindowModified() bool

func (*QWidget) KeyPressEvent

func (this *QWidget) KeyPressEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key press events for the widget.

A widget must call setFocusPolicy() to accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key press event.

If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.

The default implementation closes popup widgets if the user presses the key sequence for QKeySequence::Cancel (typically the Escape key). Otherwise the event is ignored, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.

Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.

See also keyReleaseEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), QKeyEvent, and Tetrix Example.

func (*QWidget) KeyReleaseEvent

func (this *QWidget) KeyReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QKeyEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key release events for the widget.

A widget must accept focus initially and have focus in order to receive a key release event.

If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.

The default implementation ignores the event, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.

Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class implementation if you act upon the key.

See also keyPressEvent(), QEvent::ignore(), setFocusPolicy(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and QKeyEvent.

func (*QWidget) KeyboardGrabber

func (this *QWidget) KeyboardGrabber() *QWidget

Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the keyboard input.

If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the keyboard, 0 is returned.

See also grabMouse() and mouseGrabber().

func (*QWidget) Layout

func (this *QWidget) Layout() *QLayout

Returns the layout manager that is installed on this widget, or 0 if no layout manager is installed.

The layout manager sets the geometry of the widget's children that have been added to the layout.

See also setLayout(), sizePolicy(), and Layout Management.

func (*QWidget) LayoutDirection

func (this *QWidget) LayoutDirection() int

func (*QWidget) LeaveEvent

func (this *QWidget) LeaveEvent(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget leave events which are passed in the event parameter.

A leave event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor leaves the widget.

See also enterEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().

func (*QWidget) Locale

func (this *QWidget) Locale() *qtcore.QLocale

func (*QWidget) Lower

func (this *QWidget) Lower()

Lowers the widget to the bottom of the parent widget's stack.

After this call the widget will be visually behind (and therefore obscured by) any overlapping sibling widgets.

See also raise() and stackUnder().

func (*QWidget) MapFrom

func (this *QWidget) MapFrom(arg0 QWidget_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Translates the widget coordinate pos from the coordinate system of parent to this widget's coordinate system. The parent must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget.

See also mapTo(), mapFromParent(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse().

func (*QWidget) MapFromGlobal

func (this *QWidget) MapFromGlobal(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Translates the global screen coordinate pos to widget coordinates.

See also mapToGlobal(), mapFrom(), and mapFromParent().

func (*QWidget) MapFromParent

func (this *QWidget) MapFromParent(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Translates the parent widget coordinate pos to widget coordinates.

Same as mapFromGlobal() if the widget has no parent.

See also mapToParent(), mapFrom(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse().

func (*QWidget) MapTo

func (this *QWidget) MapTo(arg0 QWidget_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Translates the widget coordinate pos to the coordinate system of parent. The parent must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget.

See also mapFrom(), mapToParent(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse().

func (*QWidget) MapToGlobal

func (this *QWidget) MapToGlobal(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Translates the widget coordinate pos to global screen coordinates. For example, mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0)) would give the global coordinates of the top-left pixel of the widget.

See also mapFromGlobal(), mapTo(), and mapToParent().

func (*QWidget) MapToParent

func (this *QWidget) MapToParent(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtcore.QPoint

Translates the widget coordinate pos to a coordinate in the parent widget.

Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no parent.

See also mapFromParent(), mapTo(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse().

func (*QWidget) Mask

func (this *QWidget) Mask() *qtgui.QRegion

Returns the mask currently set on a widget. If no mask is set the return value will be an empty region.

See also setMask(), clearMask(), QRegion::isEmpty(), and Shaped Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) MaximumHeight

func (this *QWidget) MaximumHeight() int

func (*QWidget) MaximumSize

func (this *QWidget) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) MaximumWidth

func (this *QWidget) MaximumWidth() int

func (*QWidget) MetaObject

func (this *QWidget) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QWidget) Metric

func (this *QWidget) Metric(arg0 int) int

Reimplemented from QPaintDevice::metric().

Internal implementation of the virtual QPaintDevice::metric() function.

m is the metric to get.

func (*QWidget) MinimumHeight

func (this *QWidget) MinimumHeight() int

func (*QWidget) MinimumSize

func (this *QWidget) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) MinimumSizeHint

func (this *QWidget) MinimumSizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) MinimumWidth

func (this *QWidget) MinimumWidth() int

func (*QWidget) MouseDoubleClickEvent

func (this *QWidget) MouseDoubleClickEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse double click events for the widget.

The default implementation calls mousePressEvent().

Note: The widget will also receive mouse press and mouse release events in addition to the double click event. It is up to the developer to ensure that the application interprets these events correctly.

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and QMouseEvent.

func (*QWidget) MouseGrabber

func (this *QWidget) MouseGrabber() *QWidget

Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the mouse input.

If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the mouse, 0 is returned.

See also grabMouse() and keyboardGrabber().

func (*QWidget) MouseMoveEvent

func (this *QWidget) MouseMoveEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse move events for the widget.

If mouse tracking is switched off, mouse move events only occur if a mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse tracking is switched on, mouse move events occur even if no mouse button is pressed.

QMouseEvent::pos() reports the position of the mouse cursor, relative to this widget. For press and release events, the position is usually the same as the position of the last mouse move event, but it might be different if the user's hand shakes. This is a feature of the underlying window system, not Qt.

If you want to show a tooltip immediately, while the mouse is moving (e.g., to get the mouse coordinates with QMouseEvent::pos() and show them as a tooltip), you must first enable mouse tracking as described above. Then, to ensure that the tooltip is updated immediately, you must call QToolTip::showText() instead of setToolTip() in your implementation of mouseMoveEvent().

See also setMouseTracking(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.

func (*QWidget) MousePressEvent

func (this *QWidget) MousePressEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.

If you create new widgets in the mousePressEvent() the mouseReleaseEvent() may not end up where you expect, depending on the underlying window system (or X11 window manager), the widgets' location and maybe more.

The default implementation implements the closing of popup widgets when you click outside the window. For other widget types it does nothing.

See also mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.

func (*QWidget) MouseReleaseEvent

func (this *QWidget) MouseReleaseEvent(event qtgui.QMouseEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.

See also mousePressEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, and Scribble Example.

func (*QWidget) Move

func (this *QWidget) Move(x int, y int)

func (*QWidget) MoveEvent

func (this *QWidget) MoveEvent(event qtgui.QMoveEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget move events which are passed in the event parameter. When the widget receives this event, it is already at the new position.

The old position is accessible through QMoveEvent::oldPos().

See also resizeEvent(), event(), move(), and QMoveEvent.

func (*QWidget) Move_1

func (this *QWidget) Move_1(arg0 qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

func (*QWidget) NativeEvent

func (this *QWidget) NativeEvent(eventType qtcore.QByteArray_ITF, message unsafe.Pointer, result unsafe.Pointer) bool

This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive native platform events identified by eventType which are passed in the message parameter.

In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the event being handled by Qt, return true and set result. If you return false, this native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into a Qt event and sends it to the widget.

Note: Events are only delivered to this event handler if the widget is has a native Window handle.

Note: This function superseedes the event filter functions x11Event(), winEvent() and macEvent() of Qt 4.

PlatformEvent Type IdentifierMessage TypeResult Type

Windows"windows_generic_MSG"MSG *LRESULT macOS"NSEvent"NSEvent *

func (*QWidget) NativeParentWidget

func (this *QWidget) NativeParentWidget() *QWidget

Returns the native parent for this widget, i.e. the next ancestor widget that has a system identifier, or 0 if it does not have any native parent.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.4.

See also effectiveWinId().

func (*QWidget) NewFromPointer

func (*QWidget) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidget

func (*QWidget) NextInFocusChain

func (this *QWidget) NextInFocusChain() *QWidget

Returns the next widget in this widget's focus chain.

See also previousInFocusChain().

func (*QWidget) NormalGeometry

func (this *QWidget) NormalGeometry() *qtcore.QRect

func (*QWidget) OverrideWindowFlags

func (this *QWidget) OverrideWindowFlags(type_ int)

Sets the window flags for the widget to flags, without telling the window system.

Warning: Do not call this function unless you really know what you're doing.

See also setWindowFlags().

func (*QWidget) OverrideWindowState

func (this *QWidget) OverrideWindowState(state int)

func (*QWidget) PaintEngine

func (this *QWidget) PaintEngine() *qtgui.QPaintEngine

Reimplemented from QPaintDevice::paintEngine().

Returns the widget's paint engine.

Note that this function should not be called explicitly by the user, since it's meant for reimplementation purposes only. The function is called by Qt internally, and the default implementation may not always return a valid pointer.

func (*QWidget) PaintEvent

func (this *QWidget) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events passed in event.

A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of a widget. It can happen for one of the following reasons:

repaint() or update() was invoked, the widget was obscured and has now been uncovered, or many other reasons.

Many widgets can simply repaint their entire surface when asked to, but some slow widgets need to optimize by painting only the requested region: QPaintEvent::region(). This speed optimization does not change the result, as painting is clipped to that region during event processing. QListView and QTableView do this, for example.

Qt also tries to speed up painting by merging multiple paint events into one. When update() is called several times or the window system sends several paint events, Qt merges these events into one event with a larger region (see QRegion::united()). The repaint() function does not permit this optimization, so we suggest using update() whenever possible.

When the paint event occurs, the update region has normally been erased, so you are painting on the widget's background.

The background can be set using setBackgroundRole() and setPalette().

Since Qt 4.0, QWidget automatically double-buffers its painting, so there is no need to write double-buffering code in paintEvent() to avoid flicker.

Note: Generally, you should refrain from calling update() or repaint() inside a paintEvent(). For example, calling update() or repaint() on children inside a paintEvent() results in undefined behavior; the child may or may not get a paint event.

Warning: If you are using a custom paint engine without Qt's backingstore, Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen must be set. Otherwise, QWidget::paintEngine() will never be called; the backingstore will be used instead.

See also event(), repaint(), update(), QPainter, QPixmap, QPaintEvent, and Analog Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) Palette

func (this *QWidget) Palette() *qtgui.QPalette

func (*QWidget) ParentWidget

func (this *QWidget) ParentWidget() *QWidget

Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any parent widget.

func (*QWidget) Pos

func (this *QWidget) Pos() *qtcore.QPoint

func (*QWidget) PreviousInFocusChain

func (this *QWidget) PreviousInFocusChain() *QWidget

The previousInFocusChain function returns the previous widget in this widget's focus chain.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also nextInFocusChain().

func (*QWidget) QWidget_PTR

func (ptr *QWidget) QWidget_PTR() *QWidget

func (*QWidget) Raise

func (this *QWidget) Raise()

Raises this widget to the top of the parent widget's stack.

After this call the widget will be visually in front of any overlapping sibling widgets.

Note: When using activateWindow(), you can call this function to ensure that the window is stacked on top.

See also lower() and stackUnder().

func (*QWidget) Rect

func (this *QWidget) Rect() *qtcore.QRect

func (*QWidget) Redirected

func (this *QWidget) Redirected(offset qtcore.QPoint_ITF) *qtgui.QPaintDevice

func (*QWidget) ReleaseKeyboard

func (this *QWidget) ReleaseKeyboard()

Releases the keyboard grab.

See also grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), and releaseMouse().

func (*QWidget) ReleaseMouse

func (this *QWidget) ReleaseMouse()

Releases the mouse grab.

See also grabMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().

func (*QWidget) ReleaseShortcut

func (this *QWidget) ReleaseShortcut(id int)

Removes the shortcut with the given id from Qt's shortcut system. The widget will no longer receive QEvent::Shortcut events for the shortcut's key sequence (unless it has other shortcuts with the same key sequence).

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system removes shortcuts automatically when their parent widget is destroyed. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function. Note also that this is an expensive operation.

See also grabShortcut() and setShortcutEnabled().

func (*QWidget) RemoveAction

func (this *QWidget) RemoveAction(action QAction_ITF)

Removes the action action from this widget's list of actions.

See also insertAction(), actions(), and insertAction().

func (*QWidget) Render

func (this *QWidget) Render(target qtgui.QPaintDevice_ITF, targetOffset qtcore.QPoint_ITF, sourceRegion qtgui.QRegion_ITF, renderFlags int)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Render_1

func (this *QWidget) Render_1(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, targetOffset qtcore.QPoint_ITF, sourceRegion qtgui.QRegion_ITF, renderFlags int)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Render_1_

func (this *QWidget) Render_1_(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Render_1_1

func (this *QWidget) Render_1_1(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, targetOffset qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Render_1_2

func (this *QWidget) Render_1_2(painter qtgui.QPainter_ITF, targetOffset qtcore.QPoint_ITF, sourceRegion qtgui.QRegion_ITF)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Render__

func (this *QWidget) Render__(target qtgui.QPaintDevice_ITF)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Render__1

func (this *QWidget) Render__1(target qtgui.QPaintDevice_ITF, targetOffset qtcore.QPoint_ITF)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Render__2

func (this *QWidget) Render__2(target qtgui.QPaintDevice_ITF, targetOffset qtcore.QPoint_ITF, sourceRegion qtgui.QRegion_ITF)

Renders the sourceRegion of this widget into the target using renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering starts at targetOffset in the target. For example:

QPixmap pixmap(widget->size());
widget->render(&pixmap);

If sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as the region, i.e. the entire widget.

Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the target device's active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:

QPainter painter(this);
...
painter.end();
myWidget->render(this);

Note: To obtain the contents of a QOpenGLWidget, use QOpenGLWidget::grabFramebuffer() instead.

Note: To obtain the contents of a QGLWidget (deprecated), use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer() or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.3.

func (*QWidget) Repaint

func (this *QWidget) Repaint()

Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint, for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update() is better, as it permits Qt to optimize for speed and minimize flicker.

Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The update() function never causes recursion.

See also update(), paintEvent(), and setUpdatesEnabled().

func (*QWidget) Repaint_1

func (this *QWidget) Repaint_1(x int, y int, w int, h int)

Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint, for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update() is better, as it permits Qt to optimize for speed and minimize flicker.

Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The update() function never causes recursion.

See also update(), paintEvent(), and setUpdatesEnabled().

func (*QWidget) Repaint_2

func (this *QWidget) Repaint_2(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint, for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update() is better, as it permits Qt to optimize for speed and minimize flicker.

Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The update() function never causes recursion.

See also update(), paintEvent(), and setUpdatesEnabled().

func (*QWidget) Repaint_3

func (this *QWidget) Repaint_3(arg0 qtgui.QRegion_ITF)

Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint, for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update() is better, as it permits Qt to optimize for speed and minimize flicker.

Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The update() function never causes recursion.

See also update(), paintEvent(), and setUpdatesEnabled().

func (*QWidget) Resize

func (this *QWidget) Resize(w int, h int)

func (*QWidget) ResizeEvent

func (this *QWidget) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget resize events which are passed in the event parameter. When resizeEvent() is called, the widget already has its new geometry. The old size is accessible through QResizeEvent::oldSize().

The widget will be erased and receive a paint event immediately after processing the resize event. No drawing need be (or should be) done inside this handler.

See also moveEvent(), event(), resize(), QResizeEvent, paintEvent(), and Scribble Example.

func (*QWidget) Resize_1

func (this *QWidget) Resize_1(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QWidget) RestoreGeometry

func (this *QWidget) RestoreGeometry(geometry qtcore.QByteArray_ITF) bool

Restores the geometry and state of top-level widgets stored in the byte array geometry. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false.

If the restored geometry is off-screen, it will be modified to be inside the available screen geometry.

To restore geometry saved using QSettings, you can use code like this:

QSettings settings("MyCompany", "MyApp");
myWidget->restoreGeometry(settings.value("myWidget/geometry").toByteArray());

See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.

Use QMainWindow::restoreState() to restore the geometry and the state of toolbars and dock widgets.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also saveGeometry(), QSettings, QMainWindow::saveState(), and QMainWindow::restoreState().

func (*QWidget) SaveGeometry

func (this *QWidget) SaveGeometry() *qtcore.QByteArray

Saves the current geometry and state for top-level widgets.

To save the geometry when the window closes, you can implement a close event like this:

void MyWidget::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)
{
    QSettings settings("MyCompany", "MyApp");
    settings.setValue("geometry", saveGeometry());
    QWidget::closeEvent(event);
}

See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with windows.

Use QMainWindow::saveState() to save the geometry and the state of toolbars and dock widgets.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also restoreGeometry(), QMainWindow::saveState(), and QMainWindow::restoreState().

func (*QWidget) Scroll

func (this *QWidget) Scroll(dx int, dy int)

Scrolls the widget including its children dx pixels to the right and dy downward. Both dx and dy may be negative.

After scrolling, the widgets will receive paint events for the areas that need to be repainted. For widgets that Qt knows to be opaque, this is only the newly exposed parts. For example, if an opaque widget is scrolled 8 pixels to the left, only an 8-pixel wide stripe at the right edge needs updating.

Since widgets propagate the contents of their parents by default, you need to set the autoFillBackground property, or use setAttribute() to set the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent attribute, to make a widget opaque.

For widgets that use contents propagation, a scroll will cause an update of the entire scroll area.

See also Transparency and Double Buffering.

func (*QWidget) Scroll_1

func (this *QWidget) Scroll_1(dx int, dy int, arg2 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Scrolls the widget including its children dx pixels to the right and dy downward. Both dx and dy may be negative.

After scrolling, the widgets will receive paint events for the areas that need to be repainted. For widgets that Qt knows to be opaque, this is only the newly exposed parts. For example, if an opaque widget is scrolled 8 pixels to the left, only an 8-pixel wide stripe at the right edge needs updating.

Since widgets propagate the contents of their parents by default, you need to set the autoFillBackground property, or use setAttribute() to set the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent attribute, to make a widget opaque.

For widgets that use contents propagation, a scroll will cause an update of the entire scroll area.

See also Transparency and Double Buffering.

func (*QWidget) SetAcceptDrops

func (this *QWidget) SetAcceptDrops(on bool)

func (*QWidget) SetAccessibleDescription

func (this *QWidget) SetAccessibleDescription(description string)

func (*QWidget) SetAccessibleName

func (this *QWidget) SetAccessibleName(name string)

func (*QWidget) SetAttribute

func (this *QWidget) SetAttribute(arg0 int, on bool)

Sets the attribute attribute on this widget if on is true; otherwise clears the attribute.

See also testAttribute().

func (*QWidget) SetAttribute__

func (this *QWidget) SetAttribute__(arg0 int)

Sets the attribute attribute on this widget if on is true; otherwise clears the attribute.

See also testAttribute().

func (*QWidget) SetAutoFillBackground

func (this *QWidget) SetAutoFillBackground(enabled bool)

func (*QWidget) SetBackgroundRole

func (this *QWidget) SetBackgroundRole(arg0 int)

Sets the background role of the widget to role.

The background role defines the brush from the widget's palette that is used to render the background.

If role is QPalette::NoRole, then the widget inherits its parent's background role.

Note that styles are free to choose any color from the palette. You can modify the palette or set a style sheet if you don't achieve the result you want with setBackgroundRole().

See also backgroundRole() and foregroundRole().

func (*QWidget) SetBaseSize

func (this *QWidget) SetBaseSize(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetBaseSize_1

func (this *QWidget) SetBaseSize_1(basew int, baseh int)

func (*QWidget) SetContentsMargins

func (this *QWidget) SetContentsMargins(left int, top int, right int, bottom int)

Sets the margins around the contents of the widget to have the sizes left, top, right, and bottom. The margins are used by the layout system, and may be used by subclasses to specify the area to draw in (e.g. excluding the frame).

Changing the margins will trigger a resizeEvent().

See also contentsMargins(), contentsRect(), and getContentsMargins().

func (*QWidget) SetContentsMargins_1

func (this *QWidget) SetContentsMargins_1(margins qtcore.QMargins_ITF)

Sets the margins around the contents of the widget to have the sizes left, top, right, and bottom. The margins are used by the layout system, and may be used by subclasses to specify the area to draw in (e.g. excluding the frame).

Changing the margins will trigger a resizeEvent().

See also contentsMargins(), contentsRect(), and getContentsMargins().

func (*QWidget) SetContextMenuPolicy

func (this *QWidget) SetContextMenuPolicy(policy int)

func (*QWidget) SetCthis

func (this *QWidget) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QWidget) SetCursor

func (this *QWidget) SetCursor(arg0 qtgui.QCursor_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetDisabled

func (this *QWidget) SetDisabled(arg0 bool)

Disables widget input events if disable is true; otherwise enables input events.

See the enabled documentation for more information.

See also isEnabledTo(), QKeyEvent, QMouseEvent, and changeEvent().

func (*QWidget) SetEnabled

func (this *QWidget) SetEnabled(arg0 bool)

func (*QWidget) SetFixedHeight

func (this *QWidget) SetFixedHeight(h int)

Sets both the minimum and maximum heights of the widget to h without changing the widths. Provided for convenience.

See also sizeHint(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), and setFixedSize().

func (*QWidget) SetFixedSize

func (this *QWidget) SetFixedSize(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

Sets both the minimum and maximum sizes of the widget to s, thereby preventing it from ever growing or shrinking.

This will override the default size constraints set by QLayout.

To remove constraints, set the size to QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.

Alternatively, if you want the widget to have a fixed size based on its contents, you can call QLayout::setSizeConstraint(QLayout::SetFixedSize);

See also maximumSize and minimumSize.

func (*QWidget) SetFixedSize_1

func (this *QWidget) SetFixedSize_1(w int, h int)

Sets both the minimum and maximum sizes of the widget to s, thereby preventing it from ever growing or shrinking.

This will override the default size constraints set by QLayout.

To remove constraints, set the size to QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.

Alternatively, if you want the widget to have a fixed size based on its contents, you can call QLayout::setSizeConstraint(QLayout::SetFixedSize);

See also maximumSize and minimumSize.

func (*QWidget) SetFixedWidth

func (this *QWidget) SetFixedWidth(w int)

Sets both the minimum and maximum width of the widget to w without changing the heights. Provided for convenience.

See also sizeHint(), minimumSize(), maximumSize(), and setFixedSize().

func (*QWidget) SetFocus

func (this *QWidget) SetFocus()

Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the active window. The reason argument will be passed into any focus event sent from this function, it is used to give an explanation of what caused the widget to get focus. If the window is not active, the widget will be given the focus when the window becomes active.

First, a focus about to change event is sent to the focus widget (if any) to tell it that it is about to lose the focus. Then focus is changed, a focus out event is sent to the previous focus item and a focus in event is sent to the new item to tell it that it just received the focus. (Nothing happens if the focus in and focus out widgets are the same.)

Note: On embedded platforms, setFocus() will not cause an input panel to be opened by the input method. If you want this to happen, you have to send a QEvent::RequestSoftwareInputPanel event to the widget yourself.

setFocus() gives focus to a widget regardless of its focus policy, but does not clear any keyboard grab (see grabKeyboard()).

Be aware that if the widget is hidden, it will not accept focus until it is shown.

Warning: If you call setFocus() in a function which may itself be called from focusOutEvent() or focusInEvent(), you may get an infinite recursion.

See also hasFocus(), clearFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), focusWidget(), QApplication::focusWidget(), grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), Keyboard Focus in Widgets, and QEvent::RequestSoftwareInputPanel.

func (*QWidget) SetFocusPolicy

func (this *QWidget) SetFocusPolicy(policy int)

func (*QWidget) SetFocusProxy

func (this *QWidget) SetFocusProxy(arg0 QWidget_ITF)

Sets the widget's focus proxy to widget w. If w is 0, the function resets this widget to have no focus proxy.

Some widgets can "have focus", but create a child widget, such as QLineEdit, to actually handle the focus. In this case, the widget can set the line edit to be its focus proxy.

setFocusProxy() sets the widget which will actually get focus when "this widget" gets it. If there is a focus proxy, setFocus() and hasFocus() operate on the focus proxy.

See also focusProxy().

func (*QWidget) SetFocus_1

func (this *QWidget) SetFocus_1(reason int)

Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the active window. The reason argument will be passed into any focus event sent from this function, it is used to give an explanation of what caused the widget to get focus. If the window is not active, the widget will be given the focus when the window becomes active.

First, a focus about to change event is sent to the focus widget (if any) to tell it that it is about to lose the focus. Then focus is changed, a focus out event is sent to the previous focus item and a focus in event is sent to the new item to tell it that it just received the focus. (Nothing happens if the focus in and focus out widgets are the same.)

Note: On embedded platforms, setFocus() will not cause an input panel to be opened by the input method. If you want this to happen, you have to send a QEvent::RequestSoftwareInputPanel event to the widget yourself.

setFocus() gives focus to a widget regardless of its focus policy, but does not clear any keyboard grab (see grabKeyboard()).

Be aware that if the widget is hidden, it will not accept focus until it is shown.

Warning: If you call setFocus() in a function which may itself be called from focusOutEvent() or focusInEvent(), you may get an infinite recursion.

See also hasFocus(), clearFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), focusWidget(), QApplication::focusWidget(), grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), Keyboard Focus in Widgets, and QEvent::RequestSoftwareInputPanel.

func (*QWidget) SetFont

func (this *QWidget) SetFont(arg0 qtgui.QFont_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetForegroundRole

func (this *QWidget) SetForegroundRole(arg0 int)

Sets the foreground role of the widget to role.

The foreground role defines the color from the widget's palette that is used to draw the foreground.

If role is QPalette::NoRole, the widget uses a foreground role that contrasts with the background role.

Note that styles are free to choose any color from the palette. You can modify the palette or set a style sheet if you don't achieve the result you want with setForegroundRole().

See also foregroundRole() and backgroundRole().

func (*QWidget) SetGeometry

func (this *QWidget) SetGeometry(x int, y int, w int, h int)

func (*QWidget) SetGeometry_1

func (this *QWidget) SetGeometry_1(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetGraphicsEffect

func (this *QWidget) SetGraphicsEffect(effect QGraphicsEffect_ITF)

The setGraphicsEffect function is for setting the widget's graphics effect.

Sets effect as the widget's effect. If there already is an effect installed on this widget, QWidget will delete the existing effect before installing the new effect.

If effect is the installed effect on a different widget, setGraphicsEffect() will remove the effect from the widget and install it on this widget.

QWidget takes ownership of effect.

Note: This function will apply the effect on itself and all its children.

Note: Graphics effects are not supported for OpenGL-based widgets, such as QGLWidget, QOpenGLWidget and QQuickWidget.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also graphicsEffect().

func (*QWidget) SetHidden

func (this *QWidget) SetHidden(hidden bool)

Convenience function, equivalent to setVisible(!hidden).

See also isHidden().

func (*QWidget) SetInputMethodHints

func (this *QWidget) SetInputMethodHints(hints int)

func (*QWidget) SetLayout

func (this *QWidget) SetLayout(arg0 QLayout_ITF)

Sets the layout manager for this widget to layout.

If there already is a layout manager installed on this widget, QWidget won't let you install another. You must first delete the existing layout manager (returned by layout()) before you can call setLayout() with the new layout.

If layout is the layout manager on a different widget, setLayout() will reparent the layout and make it the layout manager for this widget.

Example:

QVBoxLayout *layout = new QVBoxLayout;
layout->addWidget(formWidget);
setLayout(layout);

An alternative to calling this function is to pass this widget to the layout's constructor.

The QWidget will take ownership of layout.

See also layout() and Layout Management.

func (*QWidget) SetLayoutDirection

func (this *QWidget) SetLayoutDirection(direction int)

func (*QWidget) SetLocale

func (this *QWidget) SetLocale(locale qtcore.QLocale_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetMask

func (this *QWidget) SetMask(arg0 qtgui.QBitmap_ITF)

Causes only the pixels of the widget for which bitmap has a corresponding 1 bit to be visible. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the widget, window system controls in that area may or may not be visible, depending on the platform.

Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly complex.

The following code shows how an image with an alpha channel can be used to generate a mask for a widget:

QLabel topLevelLabel;
QPixmap pixmap(":/images/tux.png");
topLevelLabel.setPixmap(pixmap);
topLevelLabel.setMask(pixmap.mask());

The label shown by this code is masked using the image it contains, giving the appearance that an irregularly-shaped image is being drawn directly onto the screen.

Masked widgets receive mouse events only on their visible portions.

See also mask(), clearMask(), windowOpacity(), and Shaped Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) SetMask_1

func (this *QWidget) SetMask_1(arg0 qtgui.QRegion_ITF)

Causes only the pixels of the widget for which bitmap has a corresponding 1 bit to be visible. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the widget, window system controls in that area may or may not be visible, depending on the platform.

Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly complex.

The following code shows how an image with an alpha channel can be used to generate a mask for a widget:

QLabel topLevelLabel;
QPixmap pixmap(":/images/tux.png");
topLevelLabel.setPixmap(pixmap);
topLevelLabel.setMask(pixmap.mask());

The label shown by this code is masked using the image it contains, giving the appearance that an irregularly-shaped image is being drawn directly onto the screen.

Masked widgets receive mouse events only on their visible portions.

See also mask(), clearMask(), windowOpacity(), and Shaped Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) SetMaximumHeight

func (this *QWidget) SetMaximumHeight(maxh int)

func (*QWidget) SetMaximumSize

func (this *QWidget) SetMaximumSize(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetMaximumSize_1

func (this *QWidget) SetMaximumSize_1(maxw int, maxh int)

func (*QWidget) SetMaximumWidth

func (this *QWidget) SetMaximumWidth(maxw int)

func (*QWidget) SetMinimumHeight

func (this *QWidget) SetMinimumHeight(minh int)

func (*QWidget) SetMinimumSize

func (this *QWidget) SetMinimumSize(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetMinimumSize_1

func (this *QWidget) SetMinimumSize_1(minw int, minh int)

func (*QWidget) SetMinimumWidth

func (this *QWidget) SetMinimumWidth(minw int)

func (*QWidget) SetMouseTracking

func (this *QWidget) SetMouseTracking(enable bool)

func (*QWidget) SetPalette

func (this *QWidget) SetPalette(arg0 qtgui.QPalette_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetParent

func (this *QWidget) SetParent(parent QWidget_ITF)

Sets the parent of the widget to parent, and resets the window flags. The widget is moved to position (0, 0) in its new parent.

If the new parent widget is in a different window, the reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the tab chain of the new parent widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved widgets had keyboard focus, setParent() calls clearFocus() for that widget.

If the new parent widget is in the same window as the old parent, setting the parent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard focus.

If the "new" parent widget is the old parent widget, this function does nothing.

Note: The widget becomes invisible as part of changing its parent, even if it was previously visible. You must call show() to make the widget visible again.

Warning: It is very unlikely that you will ever need this function. If you have a widget that changes its content dynamically, it is far easier to use QStackedWidget.

See also setWindowFlags().

func (*QWidget) SetParent_1

func (this *QWidget) SetParent_1(parent QWidget_ITF, f int)

Sets the parent of the widget to parent, and resets the window flags. The widget is moved to position (0, 0) in its new parent.

If the new parent widget is in a different window, the reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the tab chain of the new parent widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved widgets had keyboard focus, setParent() calls clearFocus() for that widget.

If the new parent widget is in the same window as the old parent, setting the parent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard focus.

If the "new" parent widget is the old parent widget, this function does nothing.

Note: The widget becomes invisible as part of changing its parent, even if it was previously visible. You must call show() to make the widget visible again.

Warning: It is very unlikely that you will ever need this function. If you have a widget that changes its content dynamically, it is far easier to use QStackedWidget.

See also setWindowFlags().

func (*QWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat

func (this *QWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat(id int, enable bool)

If enable is true, auto repeat of the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also grabShortcut() and releaseShortcut().

func (*QWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat__

func (this *QWidget) SetShortcutAutoRepeat__(id int)

If enable is true, auto repeat of the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.2.

See also grabShortcut() and releaseShortcut().

func (*QWidget) SetShortcutEnabled

func (this *QWidget) SetShortcutEnabled(id int, enable bool)

If enable is true, the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise the shortcut is disabled.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system enables/disables shortcuts automatically as widgets become hidden/visible and gain or lose focus. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function.

See also grabShortcut() and releaseShortcut().

func (*QWidget) SetShortcutEnabled__

func (this *QWidget) SetShortcutEnabled__(id int)

If enable is true, the shortcut with the given id is enabled; otherwise the shortcut is disabled.

Warning: You should not normally need to use this function since Qt's shortcut system enables/disables shortcuts automatically as widgets become hidden/visible and gain or lose focus. It is best to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than this low-level function.

See also grabShortcut() and releaseShortcut().

func (*QWidget) SetSizeIncrement

func (this *QWidget) SetSizeIncrement(arg0 qtcore.QSize_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetSizeIncrement_1

func (this *QWidget) SetSizeIncrement_1(w int, h int)

func (*QWidget) SetSizePolicy

func (this *QWidget) SetSizePolicy(arg0 QSizePolicy_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetSizePolicy_1

func (this *QWidget) SetSizePolicy_1(horizontal int, vertical int)

func (*QWidget) SetStatusTip

func (this *QWidget) SetStatusTip(arg0 string)

func (*QWidget) SetStyle

func (this *QWidget) SetStyle(arg0 QStyle_ITF)

Sets the widget's GUI style to style. The ownership of the style object is not transferred.

If no style is set, the widget uses the application's style, QApplication::style() instead.

Setting a widget's style has no effect on existing or future child widgets.

Warning: This function is particularly useful for demonstration purposes, where you want to show Qt's styling capabilities. Real applications should avoid it and use one consistent GUI style instead.

Warning: Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.

See also style(), QStyle, QApplication::style(), and QApplication::setStyle().

func (*QWidget) SetStyleSheet

func (this *QWidget) SetStyleSheet(styleSheet string)

func (*QWidget) SetTabOrder

func (this *QWidget) SetTabOrder(arg0 QWidget_ITF, arg1 QWidget_ITF)

Puts the second widget after the first widget in the focus order.

It effectively removes the second widget from its focus chain and inserts it after the first widget.

Note that since the tab order of the second widget is changed, you should order a chain like this:

setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b
setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c
setTabOrder(c, d); // a to b to c to d

not like this:

// WRONG
setTabOrder(c, d); // c to d
setTabOrder(a, b); // a to b AND c to d
setTabOrder(b, c); // a to b to c, but not c to d

If first or second has a focus proxy, setTabOrder() correctly substitutes the proxy.

Note: Since Qt 5.10: A widget that has a child as focus proxy is understood as a compound widget. When setting a tab order between one or two compound widgets, the local tab order inside each will be preserved. This means that if both widgets are compound widgets, the resulting tab order will be from the last child inside first, to the first child inside second.

See also setFocusPolicy(), setFocusProxy(), and Keyboard Focus in Widgets.

func (*QWidget) SetTabletTracking

func (this *QWidget) SetTabletTracking(enable bool)

func (*QWidget) SetToolTip

func (this *QWidget) SetToolTip(arg0 string)

func (*QWidget) SetToolTipDuration

func (this *QWidget) SetToolTipDuration(msec int)

func (*QWidget) SetUpdatesEnabled

func (this *QWidget) SetUpdatesEnabled(enable bool)

func (*QWidget) SetVisible

func (this *QWidget) SetVisible(visible bool)

func (*QWidget) SetWhatsThis

func (this *QWidget) SetWhatsThis(arg0 string)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowFilePath

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowFilePath(filePath string)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowFlag

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowFlag(arg0 int, on bool)

Sets the window flag flag on this widget if on is true; otherwise clears the flag.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.9.

See also setWindowFlags(), windowFlags(), and windowType().

func (*QWidget) SetWindowFlag__

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowFlag__(arg0 int)

Sets the window flag flag on this widget if on is true; otherwise clears the flag.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.9.

See also setWindowFlags(), windowFlags(), and windowType().

func (*QWidget) SetWindowFlags

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowFlags(type_ int)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowIcon

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowIcon(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowIconText

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowIconText(arg0 string)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowModality

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowModality(windowModality int)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowModified

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowModified(arg0 bool)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowOpacity

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowOpacity(level float64)

func (*QWidget) SetWindowRole

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowRole(arg0 string)

Sets the window's role to role. This only makes sense for windows on X11.

See also windowRole().

func (*QWidget) SetWindowState

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowState(state int)

Sets the window state to windowState. The window state is a OR'ed combination of Qt::WindowState: Qt::WindowMinimized, Qt::WindowMaximized, Qt::WindowFullScreen, and Qt::WindowActive.

If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns false), the window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between full-screen and normal mode, use the following code:

w->setWindowState(w->windowState() ^ Qt::WindowFullScreen);

In order to restore and activate a minimized window (while preserving its maximized and/or full-screen state), use the following:

w->setWindowState((w->windowState() & ~Qt::WindowMinimized) | Qt::WindowActive);

Calling this function will hide the widget. You must call show() to make the widget visible again.

Note: On some window systems Qt::WindowActive is not immediate, and may be ignored in certain cases.

When the window state changes, the widget receives a changeEvent() of type QEvent::WindowStateChange.

See also Qt::WindowState and windowState().

func (*QWidget) SetWindowTitle

func (this *QWidget) SetWindowTitle(arg0 string)

func (*QWidget) SharedPainter

func (this *QWidget) SharedPainter() *qtgui.QPainter

func (*QWidget) Show

func (this *QWidget) Show()

Shows the widget and its child widgets.

This is equivalent to calling showFullScreen(), showMaximized(), or setVisible(true), depending on the platform's default behavior for the window flags.

See also raise(), showEvent(), hide(), setVisible(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), showNormal(), isVisible(), and windowFlags().

func (*QWidget) ShowEvent

func (this *QWidget) ShowEvent(event qtgui.QShowEvent_ITF)

This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget show events which are passed in the event parameter.

Non-spontaneous show events are sent to widgets immediately before they are shown. The spontaneous show events of windows are delivered afterwards.

Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in the sense of isVisible().

See also visible, event(), and QShowEvent.

func (*QWidget) ShowFullScreen

func (this *QWidget) ShowFullScreen()

Shows the widget in full-screen mode.

Calling this function only affects windows.

To return from full-screen mode, call showNormal().

Full-screen mode works fine under Windows, but has certain problems under X. These problems are due to limitations of the ICCCM protocol that specifies the communication between X11 clients and the window manager. ICCCM simply does not understand the concept of non-decorated full-screen windows. Therefore, the best we can do is to request a borderless window and place and resize it to fill the entire screen. Depending on the window manager, this may or may not work. The borderless window is requested using MOTIF hints, which are at least partially supported by virtually all modern window managers.

An alternative would be to bypass the window manager entirely and create a window with the Qt::X11BypassWindowManagerHint flag. This has other severe problems though, like totally broken keyboard focus and very strange effects on desktop changes or when the user raises other windows.

X11 window managers that follow modern post-ICCCM specifications support full-screen mode properly.

See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and isVisible().

func (*QWidget) ShowMaximized

func (this *QWidget) ShowMaximized()

Shows the widget maximized.

Calling this function only affects windows.

On X11, this function may not work properly with certain window managers. See the Window Geometry documentation for an explanation.

See also setWindowState(), showNormal(), showMinimized(), show(), hide(), and isVisible().

func (*QWidget) ShowMinimized

func (this *QWidget) ShowMinimized()

Shows the widget minimized, as an icon.

Calling this function only affects windows.

See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), isVisible(), and isMinimized().

func (*QWidget) ShowNormal

func (this *QWidget) ShowNormal()

Restores the widget after it has been maximized or minimized.

Calling this function only affects windows.

See also setWindowState(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and isVisible().

func (*QWidget) Size

func (this *QWidget) Size() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) SizeHint

func (this *QWidget) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) SizeIncrement

func (this *QWidget) SizeIncrement() *qtcore.QSize

func (*QWidget) SizePolicy

func (this *QWidget) SizePolicy() *QSizePolicy

func (*QWidget) StackUnder

func (this *QWidget) StackUnder(arg0 QWidget_ITF)

Places the widget under w in the parent widget's stack.

To make this work, the widget itself and w must be siblings.

See also raise() and lower().

func (*QWidget) StatusTip

func (this *QWidget) StatusTip() string

func (*QWidget) Style

func (this *QWidget) Style() *QStyle

See also QWidget::setStyle(), QApplication::setStyle(), and QApplication::style().

func (*QWidget) StyleSheet

func (this *QWidget) StyleSheet() string

func (*QWidget) TabletEvent

func (this *QWidget) TabletEvent(event qtgui.QTabletEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive tablet events for the widget.

If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.

The default implementation ignores the event.

If tablet tracking is switched off, tablet move events only occur if the stylus is in contact with the tablet, or at least one stylus button is pressed, while the stylus is being moved. If tablet tracking is switched on, tablet move events occur even while the stylus is hovering in proximity of the tablet, with no buttons pressed.

See also QEvent::ignore(), QEvent::accept(), event(), setTabletTracking(), and QTabletEvent.

func (*QWidget) TestAttribute

func (this *QWidget) TestAttribute(arg0 int) bool

Returns true if attribute attribute is set on this widget; otherwise returns false.

See also setAttribute().

func (*QWidget) ToolTip

func (this *QWidget) ToolTip() string

func (*QWidget) ToolTipDuration

func (this *QWidget) ToolTipDuration() int

func (*QWidget) TopLevelWidget

func (this *QWidget) TopLevelWidget() *QWidget

func (*QWidget) UnderMouse

func (this *QWidget) UnderMouse() bool

Returns true if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns false.

This value is not updated properly during drag and drop operations.

See also enterEvent() and leaveEvent().

func (*QWidget) UngrabGesture

func (this *QWidget) UngrabGesture(type_ int)

Unsubscribes the widget from a given gesture type

This function was introduced in Qt 4.6.

See also grabGesture() and QGestureEvent.

func (*QWidget) UnsetCursor

func (this *QWidget) UnsetCursor()

func (*QWidget) UnsetLayoutDirection

func (this *QWidget) UnsetLayoutDirection()

func (*QWidget) UnsetLocale

func (this *QWidget) UnsetLocale()

func (*QWidget) Update

func (this *QWidget) Update()

Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main event loop. This permits Qt to optimize for more speed and less flicker than a call to repaint() does.

Calling update() several times normally results in just one paintEvent() call.

Qt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call. If the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute is set, the widget is responsible for painting all its pixels with an opaque color.

See also repaint(), paintEvent(), setUpdatesEnabled(), and Analog Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) UpdateGeometry

func (this *QWidget) UpdateGeometry()

Notifies the layout system that this widget has changed and may need to change geometry.

Call this function if the sizeHint() or sizePolicy() have changed.

For explicitly hidden widgets, updateGeometry() is a no-op. The layout system will be notified as soon as the widget is shown.

func (*QWidget) UpdateMicroFocus

func (this *QWidget) UpdateMicroFocus()

Updates the widget's micro focus.

func (*QWidget) Update_1

func (this *QWidget) Update_1(x int, y int, w int, h int)

Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main event loop. This permits Qt to optimize for more speed and less flicker than a call to repaint() does.

Calling update() several times normally results in just one paintEvent() call.

Qt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call. If the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute is set, the widget is responsible for painting all its pixels with an opaque color.

See also repaint(), paintEvent(), setUpdatesEnabled(), and Analog Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) Update_2

func (this *QWidget) Update_2(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main event loop. This permits Qt to optimize for more speed and less flicker than a call to repaint() does.

Calling update() several times normally results in just one paintEvent() call.

Qt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call. If the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute is set, the widget is responsible for painting all its pixels with an opaque color.

See also repaint(), paintEvent(), setUpdatesEnabled(), and Analog Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) Update_3

func (this *QWidget) Update_3(arg0 qtgui.QRegion_ITF)

Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.

This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main event loop. This permits Qt to optimize for more speed and less flicker than a call to repaint() does.

Calling update() several times normally results in just one paintEvent() call.

Qt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call. If the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute is set, the widget is responsible for painting all its pixels with an opaque color.

See also repaint(), paintEvent(), setUpdatesEnabled(), and Analog Clock Example.

func (*QWidget) UpdatesEnabled

func (this *QWidget) UpdatesEnabled() bool

func (*QWidget) VisibleRegion

func (this *QWidget) VisibleRegion() *qtgui.QRegion

Returns the unobscured region where paint events can occur.

For visible widgets, this is an approximation of the area not covered by other widgets; otherwise, this is an empty region.

The repaint() function calls this function if necessary, so in general you do not need to call it.

func (*QWidget) WhatsThis

func (this *QWidget) WhatsThis() string

func (*QWidget) WheelEvent

func (this *QWidget) WheelEvent(event qtgui.QWheelEvent_ITF)

This event handler, for event event, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive wheel events for the widget.

If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you ignore() the event if you do not handle it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.

The default implementation ignores the event.

See also QEvent::ignore(), QEvent::accept(), event(), and QWheelEvent.

func (*QWidget) Width

func (this *QWidget) Width() int

func (*QWidget) WinId

func (this *QWidget) WinId() uint64

Returns the window system identifier of the widget.

Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to do something non-portable. Be careful.

If a widget is non-native (alien) and winId() is invoked on it, that widget will be provided a native handle.

This value may change at run-time. An event with type QEvent::WinIdChange will be sent to the widget following a change in window system identifier.

See also find().

func (*QWidget) Window

func (this *QWidget) Window() *QWidget

Returns the window for this widget, i.e. the next ancestor widget that has (or could have) a window-system frame.

If the widget is a window, the widget itself is returned.

Typical usage is changing the window title:

aWidget->window()->setWindowTitle("New Window Title");

See also isWindow().

func (*QWidget) WindowFilePath

func (this *QWidget) WindowFilePath() string

func (*QWidget) WindowFlags

func (this *QWidget) WindowFlags() int

func (*QWidget) WindowHandle

func (this *QWidget) WindowHandle() *qtgui.QWindow

If this is a native widget, return the associated QWindow. Otherwise return null.

Native widgets include toplevel widgets, QGLWidget, and child widgets on which winId() was called.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.0.

See also winId().

func (*QWidget) WindowIcon

func (this *QWidget) WindowIcon() *qtgui.QIcon

func (*QWidget) WindowIconChanged

func (this *QWidget) WindowIconChanged(icon qtgui.QIcon_ITF)

This signal is emitted when the window's icon has changed, with the new icon as an argument.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

Note: Notifier signal for property windowIcon.

func (*QWidget) WindowIconText

func (this *QWidget) WindowIconText() string

func (*QWidget) WindowIconTextChanged

func (this *QWidget) WindowIconTextChanged(iconText string)

func (*QWidget) WindowModality

func (this *QWidget) WindowModality() int

func (*QWidget) WindowOpacity

func (this *QWidget) WindowOpacity() float64

func (*QWidget) WindowRole

func (this *QWidget) WindowRole() string

Returns the window's role, or an empty string.

See also setWindowRole(), windowIcon, and windowTitle.

func (*QWidget) WindowState

func (this *QWidget) WindowState() int

Returns the current window state. The window state is a OR'ed combination of Qt::WindowState: Qt::WindowMinimized, Qt::WindowMaximized, Qt::WindowFullScreen, and Qt::WindowActive.

See also Qt::WindowState and setWindowState().

func (*QWidget) WindowTitle

func (this *QWidget) WindowTitle() string

func (*QWidget) WindowTitleChanged

func (this *QWidget) WindowTitleChanged(title string)

This signal is emitted when the window's title has changed, with the new title as an argument.

This function was introduced in Qt 5.2.

Note: Notifier signal for property windowTitle.

func (*QWidget) WindowType

func (this *QWidget) WindowType() int

Returns the window type of this widget. This is identical to windowFlags() & Qt::WindowType_Mask.

See also windowFlags.

func (*QWidget) X

func (this *QWidget) X() int

func (*QWidget) Y

func (this *QWidget) Y() int

type QWidgetAction

type QWidgetAction struct {
	*QAction
}

func NewQWidgetAction

func NewQWidgetAction(parent qtcore.QObject_ITF) *QWidgetAction

Constructs an action with parent.

func NewQWidgetActionFromPointer

func NewQWidgetActionFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetAction

func (*QWidgetAction) CreateWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) CreateWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

This function is called whenever the action is added to a container widget that supports custom widgets. If you don't want a custom widget to be used as representation of the action in the specified parent widget then 0 should be returned.

See also deleteWidget().

func (*QWidgetAction) DefaultWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) DefaultWidget() *QWidget

Returns the default widget.

See also setDefaultWidget().

func (*QWidgetAction) DeleteWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) DeleteWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

This function is called whenever the action is removed from a container widget that displays the action using a custom widget previously created using createWidget(). The default implementation hides the widget and schedules it for deletion using QObject::deleteLater().

See also createWidget().

func (*QWidgetAction) Event

func (this *QWidgetAction) Event(arg0 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QWidgetAction) EventFilter

func (this *QWidgetAction) EventFilter(arg0 qtcore.QObject_ITF, arg1 qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::eventFilter().

func (*QWidgetAction) GetCthis

func (this *QWidgetAction) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWidgetAction) InheritCreateWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) InheritCreateWidget(f func(parent *QWidget) unsafe.Pointer)

QWidget * createWidget(class QWidget *)

func (*QWidgetAction) InheritDeleteWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) InheritDeleteWidget(f func(widget *QWidget))

void deleteWidget(class QWidget *)

func (*QWidgetAction) InheritEvent

func (this *QWidgetAction) InheritEvent(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QWidgetAction) InheritEventFilter

func (this *QWidgetAction) InheritEventFilter(f func(arg0 *qtcore.QObject, arg1 *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool eventFilter(class QObject *, class QEvent *)

func (*QWidgetAction) MetaObject

func (this *QWidgetAction) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QWidgetAction) NewFromPointer

func (*QWidgetAction) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetAction

func (*QWidgetAction) QWidgetAction_PTR

func (ptr *QWidgetAction) QWidgetAction_PTR() *QWidgetAction

func (*QWidgetAction) ReleaseWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) ReleaseWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Releases the specified widget.

Container widgets that support actions call this function when a widget action is removed.

See also requestWidget(), deleteWidget(), and defaultWidget().

func (*QWidgetAction) RequestWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) RequestWidget(parent QWidget_ITF) *QWidget

Returns a widget that represents the action, with the given parent.

Container widgets that support actions can call this function to request a widget as visual representation of the action.

See also releaseWidget(), createWidget(), and defaultWidget().

func (*QWidgetAction) SetCthis

func (this *QWidgetAction) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QWidgetAction) SetDefaultWidget

func (this *QWidgetAction) SetDefaultWidget(w QWidget_ITF)

Sets widget to be the default widget. The ownership is transferred to QWidgetAction. Unless createWidget() is reimplemented by a subclass to return a new widget the default widget is used when a container widget requests a widget through requestWidget().

See also defaultWidget().

type QWidgetAction_ITF

type QWidgetAction_ITF interface {
	QAction_ITF
	QWidgetAction_PTR() *QWidgetAction
}

type QWidgetData

type QWidgetData struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

func NewQWidgetDataFromPointer

func NewQWidgetDataFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetData

func (*QWidgetData) GetCthis

func (this *QWidgetData) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWidgetData) NewFromPointer

func (*QWidgetData) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetData

func (*QWidgetData) QWidgetData_PTR

func (ptr *QWidgetData) QWidgetData_PTR() *QWidgetData

func (*QWidgetData) SetCthis

func (this *QWidgetData) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QWidgetData_ITF

type QWidgetData_ITF interface {
	QWidgetData_PTR() *QWidgetData
}

type QWidgetItem

type QWidgetItem struct {
	*QLayoutItem
}

func NewQWidgetItem

func NewQWidgetItem(w QWidget_ITF) *QWidgetItem

func NewQWidgetItemFromPointer

func NewQWidgetItemFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetItem

func (*QWidgetItem) ControlTypes

func (this *QWidgetItem) ControlTypes() int

Returns the control type(s) for the layout item. For a QWidgetItem, the control type comes from the widget's size policy; for a QLayoutItem, the control types is derived from the layout's contents.

See also QSizePolicy::controlType().

func (*QWidgetItem) ExpandingDirections

func (this *QWidgetItem) ExpandingDirections() int

Returns whether this layout item can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Qt::Vertical or Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas Qt::Vertical | Qt::Horizontal means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.

func (*QWidgetItem) Geometry

func (this *QWidgetItem) Geometry() *qtcore.QRect

Returns the rectangle covered by this layout item.

See also setGeometry().

func (*QWidgetItem) GetCthis

func (this *QWidgetItem) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWidgetItem) HasHeightForWidth

func (this *QWidgetItem) HasHeightForWidth() bool

Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false. The default implementation returns false.

Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width.

See also heightForWidth() and QWidget::heightForWidth().

func (*QWidgetItem) HeightForWidth

func (this *QWidgetItem) HeightForWidth(arg0 int) int

Returns the preferred height for this layout item, given the width w.

The default implementation returns -1, indicating that the preferred height is independent of the width of the item. Using the function hasHeightForWidth() will typically be much faster than calling this function and testing for -1.

Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width. A typical implementation will look like this:

int MyLayout::heightForWidth(int w) const
{
    if (cache_dirty || cached_width != w) {
        // not all C++ compilers support "mutable"
        MyLayout *that = (MyLayout*)this;
        int h = calculateHeightForWidth(w);
        that->cached_hfw = h;
        return h;
    }
    return cached_hfw;
}

Caching is strongly recommended; without it layout will take exponential time.

See also hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QWidgetItem) IsEmpty

func (this *QWidgetItem) IsEmpty() bool

Implemented in subclasses to return whether this item is empty, i.e. whether it contains any widgets.

func (*QWidgetItem) MaximumSize

func (this *QWidgetItem) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the maximum size of this item.

func (*QWidgetItem) MinimumSize

func (this *QWidgetItem) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the minimum size of this item.

func (*QWidgetItem) NewFromPointer

func (*QWidgetItem) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetItem

func (*QWidgetItem) QWidgetItem_PTR

func (ptr *QWidgetItem) QWidgetItem_PTR() *QWidgetItem

func (*QWidgetItem) SetCthis

func (this *QWidgetItem) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QWidgetItem) SetGeometry

func (this *QWidgetItem) SetGeometry(arg0 qtcore.QRect_ITF)

Implemented in subclasses to set this item's geometry to r.

See also geometry().

func (*QWidgetItem) SizeHint

func (this *QWidgetItem) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the preferred size of this item.

func (*QWidgetItem) Widget

func (this *QWidgetItem) Widget() *QWidget

If this item manages a QWidget, returns that widget. Otherwise, nullptr is returned.

Note: While the functions layout() and spacerItem() perform casts, this function returns another object: QLayout and QSpacerItem inherit QLayoutItem, while QWidget does not.

See also layout() and spacerItem().

type QWidgetItemV2

type QWidgetItemV2 struct {
	*QWidgetItem
}

func NewQWidgetItemV2

func NewQWidgetItemV2(widget QWidget_ITF) *QWidgetItemV2

func NewQWidgetItemV2FromPointer

func NewQWidgetItemV2FromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetItemV2

func (*QWidgetItemV2) GetCthis

func (this *QWidgetItemV2) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWidgetItemV2) HeightForWidth

func (this *QWidgetItemV2) HeightForWidth(width int) int

Returns the preferred height for this layout item, given the width w.

The default implementation returns -1, indicating that the preferred height is independent of the width of the item. Using the function hasHeightForWidth() will typically be much faster than calling this function and testing for -1.

Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width. A typical implementation will look like this:

int MyLayout::heightForWidth(int w) const
{
    if (cache_dirty || cached_width != w) {
        // not all C++ compilers support "mutable"
        MyLayout *that = (MyLayout*)this;
        int h = calculateHeightForWidth(w);
        that->cached_hfw = h;
        return h;
    }
    return cached_hfw;
}

Caching is strongly recommended; without it layout will take exponential time.

See also hasHeightForWidth().

func (*QWidgetItemV2) MaximumSize

func (this *QWidgetItemV2) MaximumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the maximum size of this item.

func (*QWidgetItemV2) MinimumSize

func (this *QWidgetItemV2) MinimumSize() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the minimum size of this item.

func (*QWidgetItemV2) NewFromPointer

func (*QWidgetItemV2) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetItemV2

func (*QWidgetItemV2) QWidgetItemV2_PTR

func (ptr *QWidgetItemV2) QWidgetItemV2_PTR() *QWidgetItemV2

func (*QWidgetItemV2) SetCthis

func (this *QWidgetItemV2) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QWidgetItemV2) SizeHint

func (this *QWidgetItemV2) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Implemented in subclasses to return the preferred size of this item.

type QWidgetItemV2_ITF

type QWidgetItemV2_ITF interface {
	QWidgetItem_ITF
	QWidgetItemV2_PTR() *QWidgetItemV2
}

type QWidgetItemV2__

type QWidgetItemV2__ = int
const QWidgetItemV2__Dirty QWidgetItemV2__ = -123
const QWidgetItemV2__HfwCacheMaxSize QWidgetItemV2__ = 3

type QWidgetItem_ITF

type QWidgetItem_ITF interface {
	QLayoutItem_ITF
	QWidgetItem_PTR() *QWidgetItem
}

type QWidgetList

type QWidgetList struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

body block begin

func NewQWidgetListFromPointer

func NewQWidgetListFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetList

func QApplication_AllWidgets

func QApplication_AllWidgets() *QWidgetList

func QApplication_TopLevelWidgets

func QApplication_TopLevelWidgets() *QWidgetList

func (*QWidgetList) Append_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Append_0()

void append(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Append_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Append_1()

void append(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) At_0

func (this *QWidgetList) At_0() *QWidget

const T & at(int)

func (*QWidgetList) Back_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Back_0() *QWidget

T & back()

func (*QWidgetList) Back_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Back_1() *QWidget

const T & back()

func (*QWidgetList) Begin_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Begin_0()

QList::iterator begin()

func (*QWidgetList) Begin_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Begin_1()

QList::const_iterator begin()

func (*QWidgetList) Cbegin_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Cbegin_0()

QList::const_iterator cbegin()

func (*QWidgetList) Cend_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Cend_0()

QList::const_iterator cend()

func (*QWidgetList) Clear_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Clear_0()

void clear()

func (*QWidgetList) ConstBegin_0

func (this *QWidgetList) ConstBegin_0()

QList::const_iterator constBegin()

func (*QWidgetList) ConstEnd_0

func (this *QWidgetList) ConstEnd_0()

QList::const_iterator constEnd()

func (*QWidgetList) ConstFirst_0

func (this *QWidgetList) ConstFirst_0() *QWidget

const T & constFirst()

func (*QWidgetList) ConstLast_0

func (this *QWidgetList) ConstLast_0() *QWidget

const T & constLast()

func (*QWidgetList) Contains_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Contains_0() bool

bool contains(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Contains_impl_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Contains_impl_0() bool

bool contains_impl(const T &, struct QListData::NotArrayCompatibleLayout)

func (*QWidgetList) Contains_impl_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Contains_impl_1() bool

bool contains_impl(const T &, struct QListData::ArrayCompatibleLayout)

func (*QWidgetList) Count_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Count_0() int

int count(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Count_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Count_1() int

int count()

func (*QWidgetList) Count_impl_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Count_impl_0() int

int count_impl(const T &, struct QListData::NotArrayCompatibleLayout)

func (*QWidgetList) Count_impl_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Count_impl_1() int

int count_impl(const T &, struct QListData::ArrayCompatibleLayout)

func (*QWidgetList) Crbegin_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Crbegin_0()

QList::const_reverse_iterator crbegin()

func (*QWidgetList) Crend_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Crend_0()

QList::const_reverse_iterator crend()

func (*QWidgetList) Dealloc_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Dealloc_0()

void dealloc(struct QListData::Data *)

func (*QWidgetList) DetachShared_0

func (this *QWidgetList) DetachShared_0()

void detachShared()

func (*QWidgetList) Detach_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Detach_0()

void detach()

func (*QWidgetList) Detach_helper_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Detach_helper_0()

void detach_helper(int)

func (*QWidgetList) Detach_helper_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Detach_helper_1()

void detach_helper()

func (*QWidgetList) Detach_helper_grow_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Detach_helper_grow_0()

QList::Node * detach_helper_grow(int, int)

func (*QWidgetList) Empty_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Empty_0() bool

bool empty()

func (*QWidgetList) End_0

func (this *QWidgetList) End_0()

QList::iterator end()

func (*QWidgetList) End_1

func (this *QWidgetList) End_1()

QList::const_iterator end()

func (*QWidgetList) EndsWith_0

func (this *QWidgetList) EndsWith_0() bool

bool endsWith(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Erase_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Erase_0()

QList::iterator erase(class QList::iterator)

func (*QWidgetList) Erase_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Erase_1()

QList::iterator erase(class QList::iterator, class QList::iterator)

func (*QWidgetList) First_0

func (this *QWidgetList) First_0() *QWidget

T & first()

func (*QWidgetList) First_1

func (this *QWidgetList) First_1() *QWidget

const T & first()

func (*QWidgetList) FromSet_0

func (this *QWidgetList) FromSet_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> fromSet(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) FromStdList_0

func (this *QWidgetList) FromStdList_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> fromStdList(const std::list<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) FromVector_0

func (this *QWidgetList) FromVector_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> fromVector(const QVector<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Front_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Front_0() *QWidget

T & front()

func (*QWidgetList) Front_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Front_1() *QWidget

const T & front()

func (*QWidgetList) IndexOf_0

func (this *QWidgetList) IndexOf_0() int

int indexOf(const T &, int)

func (*QWidgetList) Insert_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Insert_0()

void insert(int, const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Insert_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Insert_1()

QList::iterator insert(class QList::iterator, const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) IsDetached_0

func (this *QWidgetList) IsDetached_0() bool

bool isDetached()

func (*QWidgetList) IsEmpty_0

func (this *QWidgetList) IsEmpty_0() bool

bool isEmpty()

func (*QWidgetList) IsSharedWith_0

func (this *QWidgetList) IsSharedWith_0() bool

bool isSharedWith(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) IsValidIterator_0

func (this *QWidgetList) IsValidIterator_0() bool

bool isValidIterator(const class QList::iterator &)

func (*QWidgetList) LastIndexOf_0

func (this *QWidgetList) LastIndexOf_0() int

int lastIndexOf(const T &, int)

func (*QWidgetList) Last_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Last_0() *QWidget

T & last()

func (*QWidgetList) Last_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Last_1() *QWidget

const T & last()

func (*QWidgetList) Length_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Length_0() int

int length()

func (*QWidgetList) Mid_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Mid_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> mid(int, int)

func (*QWidgetList) Move_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Move_0()

void move(int, int)

func (*QWidgetList) Node_construct_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Node_construct_0()

void node_construct(struct QList::Node *, const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Node_copy_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Node_copy_0()

void node_copy(struct QList::Node *, struct QList::Node *, struct QList::Node *)

func (*QWidgetList) Node_destruct_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Node_destruct_0()

void node_destruct(struct QList::Node *)

func (*QWidgetList) Node_destruct_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Node_destruct_1()

void node_destruct(struct QList::Node *, struct QList::Node *)

func (*QWidgetList) Op_eq_impl_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Op_eq_impl_0() bool

bool op_eq_impl(const QList<T> &, struct QListData::NotArrayCompatibleLayout)

func (*QWidgetList) Op_eq_impl_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Op_eq_impl_1() bool

bool op_eq_impl(const QList<T> &, struct QListData::ArrayCompatibleLayout)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_add_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_add_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> operator+(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_add_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_add_equal_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> & operator+=(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_add_equal_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_add_equal_1() *QWidgetList

QList<T> & operator+=(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_equal_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> & operator=(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_equal_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_equal_1() *QWidgetList

QList<T> & operator=(QList<T> &&)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_equal_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_equal_equal_0() bool

bool operator==(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_get_index_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_get_index_0() *QWidget

const T & operator[](int)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_get_index_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_get_index_1() *QWidget

T & operator[](int)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_left_shift_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_left_shift_0() *QWidgetList

QList<T> & operator<<(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_left_shift_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_left_shift_1() *QWidgetList

QList<T> & operator<<(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Operator_not_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Operator_not_equal_0() bool

bool operator!=(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Pop_back_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Pop_back_0()

void pop_back()

func (*QWidgetList) Pop_front_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Pop_front_0()

void pop_front()

func (*QWidgetList) Prepend_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Prepend_0()

void prepend(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Push_back_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Push_back_0()

void push_back(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Push_front_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Push_front_0()

void push_front(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Rbegin_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Rbegin_0()

QList::reverse_iterator rbegin()

func (*QWidgetList) Rbegin_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Rbegin_1()

QList::const_reverse_iterator rbegin()

func (*QWidgetList) RemoveAll_0

func (this *QWidgetList) RemoveAll_0() int

int removeAll(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) RemoveAt_0

func (this *QWidgetList) RemoveAt_0()

void removeAt(int)

func (*QWidgetList) RemoveFirst_0

func (this *QWidgetList) RemoveFirst_0()

void removeFirst()

func (*QWidgetList) RemoveLast_0

func (this *QWidgetList) RemoveLast_0()

void removeLast()

func (*QWidgetList) RemoveOne_0

func (this *QWidgetList) RemoveOne_0() bool

bool removeOne(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Rend_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Rend_0()

QList::reverse_iterator rend()

func (*QWidgetList) Rend_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Rend_1()

QList::const_reverse_iterator rend()

func (*QWidgetList) Replace_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Replace_0()

void replace(int, const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Reserve_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Reserve_0()

void reserve(int)

func (*QWidgetList) SetSharable_0

func (this *QWidgetList) SetSharable_0()

void setSharable(_Bool)

func (*QWidgetList) Size_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Size_0() int

int size()

func (*QWidgetList) StartsWith_0

func (this *QWidgetList) StartsWith_0() bool

bool startsWith(const T &)

func (*QWidgetList) Swap_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Swap_0()

void swap(QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetList) Swap_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Swap_1()

void swap(int, int)

func (*QWidgetList) TakeAt_0

func (this *QWidgetList) TakeAt_0() *QWidget

T takeAt(int)

func (*QWidgetList) TakeFirst_0

func (this *QWidgetList) TakeFirst_0() *QWidget

T takeFirst()

func (*QWidgetList) TakeLast_0

func (this *QWidgetList) TakeLast_0() *QWidget

T takeLast()

func (*QWidgetList) ToSet_0

func (this *QWidgetList) ToSet_0()

QSet<T> toSet()

func (*QWidgetList) ToStdList_0

func (this *QWidgetList) ToStdList_0()

std::list<T> toStdList()

func (*QWidgetList) ToVector_0

func (this *QWidgetList) ToVector_0()

QVector<T> toVector()

func (*QWidgetList) Value_0

func (this *QWidgetList) Value_0() *QWidget

T value(int)

func (*QWidgetList) Value_1

func (this *QWidgetList) Value_1() *QWidget

T value(int, const T &)

type QWidgetListx

type QWidgetListx struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

///

func NewQWidgetListxFromPointer

func NewQWidgetListxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetListx

func (*QWidgetListx) At

func (this *QWidgetListx) At(i int) *QWidget

func (*QWidgetListx) ConvertFromSlice

func (*QWidgetListx) ConvertFromSlice(lst []*QWidget) *QWidgetListx

func (*QWidgetListx) ConvertToSlice

func (this *QWidgetListx) ConvertToSlice() (lst []*QWidget)

func (*QWidgetListx) Count

func (this *QWidgetListx) Count() int

func (*QWidgetListx) GetCthis

func (this *QWidgetListx) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWidgetListx) NewFromPointer

func (*QWidgetListx) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetListx

func (*QWidgetListx) SetCthis

func (this *QWidgetListx) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QWidgetSet

type QWidgetSet struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

body block begin

func (*QWidgetSet) Begin_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Begin_0()

QSet::iterator begin()

func (*QWidgetSet) Begin_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Begin_1()

QSet::const_iterator begin()

func (*QWidgetSet) Capacity_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Capacity_0() int

int capacity()

func (*QWidgetSet) Cbegin_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Cbegin_0()

QSet::const_iterator cbegin()

func (*QWidgetSet) Cend_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Cend_0()

QSet::const_iterator cend()

func (*QWidgetSet) Clear_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Clear_0()

void clear()

func (*QWidgetSet) ConstBegin_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) ConstBegin_0()

QSet::const_iterator constBegin()

func (*QWidgetSet) ConstEnd_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) ConstEnd_0()

QSet::const_iterator constEnd()

func (*QWidgetSet) ConstFind_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) ConstFind_0()

QSet::const_iterator constFind(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Contains_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Contains_0() bool

bool contains(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Contains_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Contains_1() bool

bool contains(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Count_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Count_0() int

int count()

func (*QWidgetSet) Crbegin_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Crbegin_0()

QSet::const_reverse_iterator crbegin()

func (*QWidgetSet) Crend_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Crend_0()

QSet::const_reverse_iterator crend()

func (*QWidgetSet) Detach_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Detach_0()

void detach()

func (*QWidgetSet) Empty_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Empty_0() bool

bool empty()

func (*QWidgetSet) End_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) End_0()

QSet::iterator end()

func (*QWidgetSet) End_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) End_1()

QSet::const_iterator end()

func (*QWidgetSet) Erase_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Erase_0()

QSet::iterator erase(class QSet::iterator)

func (*QWidgetSet) Erase_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Erase_1()

QSet::iterator erase(class QSet::const_iterator)

func (*QWidgetSet) Find_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Find_0()

QSet::iterator find(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Find_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Find_1()

QSet::const_iterator find(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) FromList_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) FromList_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> fromList(const QList<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Insert_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Insert_0()

QSet::iterator insert(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Intersect_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Intersect_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & intersect(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Intersects_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Intersects_0() bool

bool intersects(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) IsDetached_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) IsDetached_0() bool

bool isDetached()

func (*QWidgetSet) IsEmpty_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) IsEmpty_0() bool

bool isEmpty()

func (*QWidgetSet) IsValidIterator_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) IsValidIterator_0() bool

bool isValidIterator(const class QSet::iterator &)

func (*QWidgetSet) IsValidIterator_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) IsValidIterator_1() bool

bool isValidIterator(const class QSet::const_iterator &)

func (*QWidgetSet) M2c_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) M2c_0()

QSet::const_iterator m2c(class QSet::iterator)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_add_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_add_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> operator+(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_add_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_add_equal_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator+=(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_add_equal_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_add_equal_1() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator+=(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_and_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_and_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> operator&(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_and_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_and_equal_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator&=(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_and_equal_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_and_equal_1() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator&=(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_equal_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_equal_equal_0() bool

bool operator==(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_left_shift_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_left_shift_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator<<(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_minus_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_minus_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> operator-(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_minus_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_minus_equal_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator-=(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_minus_equal_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_minus_equal_1() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator-=(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_not_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_not_equal_0() bool

bool operator!=(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_or_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_or_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> operator|(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_or_equal_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_or_equal_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator|=(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Operator_or_equal_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Operator_or_equal_1() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & operator|=(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Rbegin_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Rbegin_0()

QSet::reverse_iterator rbegin()

func (*QWidgetSet) Rbegin_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Rbegin_1()

QSet::const_reverse_iterator rbegin()

func (*QWidgetSet) Remove_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Remove_0() bool

bool remove(const T &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Rend_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Rend_0()

QSet::reverse_iterator rend()

func (*QWidgetSet) Rend_1

func (this *QWidgetSet) Rend_1()

QSet::const_reverse_iterator rend()

func (*QWidgetSet) Reserve_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Reserve_0()

void reserve(int)

func (*QWidgetSet) SetSharable_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) SetSharable_0()

void setSharable(_Bool)

func (*QWidgetSet) Size_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Size_0() int

int size()

func (*QWidgetSet) Squeeze_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Squeeze_0()

void squeeze()

func (*QWidgetSet) Subtract_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Subtract_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & subtract(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Swap_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Swap_0()

void swap(QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) ToList_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) ToList_0()

QList<T> toList()

func (*QWidgetSet) Unite_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Unite_0() *QWidgetSet

QSet<T> & unite(const QSet<T> &)

func (*QWidgetSet) Values_0

func (this *QWidgetSet) Values_0()

QList<T> values()

type QWidgetSetx

type QWidgetSetx struct {
	*qtrt.CObject
}

///

func NewQWidgetSetxFromPointer

func NewQWidgetSetxFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetSetx

func (*QWidgetSetx) At

func (this *QWidgetSetx) At(i int) *QWidget

func (*QWidgetSetx) ConvertFromSlice

func (*QWidgetSetx) ConvertFromSlice(lst []*QWidget) *QWidgetSetx

func (*QWidgetSetx) ConvertToSlice

func (this *QWidgetSetx) ConvertToSlice() (lst []*QWidget)

func (*QWidgetSetx) Count

func (this *QWidgetSetx) Count() int

func (*QWidgetSetx) GetCthis

func (this *QWidgetSetx) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWidgetSetx) NewFromPointer

func (*QWidgetSetx) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWidgetSetx

func (*QWidgetSetx) SetCthis

func (this *QWidgetSetx) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

type QWidget_ITF

type QWidget_ITF interface {
	qtcore.QObject_ITF
	qtgui.QPaintDevice_ITF
	QWidget_PTR() *QWidget
}

type QWidget__RenderFlag

type QWidget__RenderFlag = int
const QWidget__DrawChildren QWidget__RenderFlag = 2
const QWidget__DrawWindowBackground QWidget__RenderFlag = 1
const QWidget__IgnoreMask QWidget__RenderFlag = 4

type QWizard

type QWizard struct {
	*QDialog
}

func NewQWizard

func NewQWizard(parent QWidget_ITF, flags int) *QWizard

Constructs a wizard with the given parent and window flags.

See also parent() and windowFlags().

func NewQWizardFromPointer

func NewQWizardFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWizard

func NewQWizard__

func NewQWizard__() *QWizard

Constructs a wizard with the given parent and window flags.

See also parent() and windowFlags().

func NewQWizard__1

func NewQWizard__1(parent QWidget_ITF) *QWizard

Constructs a wizard with the given parent and window flags.

See also parent() and windowFlags().

func (*QWizard) AddPage

func (this *QWizard) AddPage(page QWizardPage_ITF) int

Adds the given page to the wizard, and returns the page's ID.

The ID is guaranteed to be larger than any other ID in the QWizard so far.

See also setPage(), page(), and pageAdded().

func (*QWizard) Back

func (this *QWizard) Back()

Goes back to the previous page.

This is equivalent to pressing the Back button.

See also next(), accept(), reject(), and restart().

func (*QWizard) Button

func (this *QWizard) Button(which int) *QAbstractButton

Returns the button corresponding to role which.

See also setButton() and setButtonText().

func (*QWizard) ButtonText

func (this *QWizard) ButtonText(which int) string

Returns the text on button which.

If a text has ben set using setButtonText(), this text is returned.

By default, the text on buttons depends on the wizardStyle. For example, on macOS, the Next button is called Continue.

See also button(), setButton(), setButtonText(), QWizardPage::buttonText(), and QWizardPage::setButtonText().

func (*QWizard) CleanupPage

func (this *QWizard) CleanupPage(id int)

This virtual function is called by QWizard to clean up page id just before the user leaves it by clicking Back (unless the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set).

The default implementation calls QWizardPage::cleanupPage() on page(id).

See also QWizardPage::cleanupPage() and initializePage().

func (*QWizard) CurrentId

func (this *QWizard) CurrentId() int

func (*QWizard) CurrentIdChanged

func (this *QWizard) CurrentIdChanged(id int)

This signal is emitted when the current page changes, with the new current id.

Note: Notifier signal for property currentId.

See also currentId() and currentPage().

func (*QWizard) CurrentPage

func (this *QWizard) CurrentPage() *QWizardPage

Returns a pointer to the current page, or 0 if there is no current page (e.g., before the wizard is shown).

This is equivalent to calling page(currentId()).

See also page(), currentId(), and restart().

func (*QWizard) CustomButtonClicked

func (this *QWizard) CustomButtonClicked(which int)

This signal is emitted when the user clicks a custom button. which can be CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3.

By default, no custom button is shown. Call setOption() with HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, or HaveCustomButton3 to have one, and use setButtonText() or setButton() to configure it.

See also helpRequested().

func (*QWizard) Done

func (this *QWizard) Done(result int)

Reimplemented from QDialog::done().

func (*QWizard) Event

func (this *QWizard) Event(event qtcore.QEvent_ITF) bool

Reimplemented from QObject::event().

func (*QWizard) Field

func (this *QWizard) Field(name string) *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the value of the field called name.

This function can be used to access fields on any page of the wizard.

See also QWizardPage::registerField(), QWizardPage::field(), and setField().

func (*QWizard) GetCthis

func (this *QWizard) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWizard) HasVisitedPage

func (this *QWizard) HasVisitedPage(id int) bool

Returns true if the page history contains page id; otherwise, returns false.

Pressing Back marks the current page as "unvisited" again.

See also visitedPages().

func (*QWizard) HelpRequested

func (this *QWizard) HelpRequested()

This signal is emitted when the user clicks the Help button.

By default, no Help button is shown. Call setOption(HaveHelpButton, true) to have one.

Example:

LicenseWizard::LicenseWizard(QWidget *parent)
    : QWizard(parent)
{
    ...
    setOption(HaveHelpButton, true);
    connect(this, &QWizard::helpRequested, this, &LicenseWizard::showHelp);
    ...
}

void LicenseWizard::showHelp()
{
    static QString lastHelpMessage;

    QString message;

    switch (currentId()) {
    case Page_Intro:
        message = tr("The decision you make here will affect which page you "
                     "get to see next.");
        break;
    ...
    default:
        message = tr("This help is likely not to be of any help.");
    }

    QMessageBox::information(this, tr("License Wizard Help"), message);

}

See also customButtonClicked().

func (*QWizard) InheritCleanupPage

func (this *QWizard) InheritCleanupPage(f func(id int))

void cleanupPage(int)

func (*QWizard) InheritDone

func (this *QWizard) InheritDone(f func(result int))

void done(int)

func (*QWizard) InheritEvent

func (this *QWizard) InheritEvent(f func(event *qtcore.QEvent) bool)

bool event(class QEvent *)

func (*QWizard) InheritInitializePage

func (this *QWizard) InheritInitializePage(f func(id int))

void initializePage(int)

func (*QWizard) InheritPaintEvent

func (this *QWizard) InheritPaintEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QPaintEvent))

void paintEvent(class QPaintEvent *)

func (*QWizard) InheritResizeEvent

func (this *QWizard) InheritResizeEvent(f func(event *qtgui.QResizeEvent))

void resizeEvent(class QResizeEvent *)

func (*QWizard) InitializePage

func (this *QWizard) InitializePage(id int)

This virtual function is called by QWizard to prepare page id just before it is shown either as a result of QWizard::restart() being called, or as a result of the user clicking Next. (However, if the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set, this function is only called the first time the page is shown.)

By reimplementing this function, you can ensure that the page's fields are properly initialized based on fields from previous pages.

The default implementation calls QWizardPage::initializePage() on page(id).

See also QWizardPage::initializePage() and cleanupPage().

func (*QWizard) MetaObject

func (this *QWizard) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QWizard) NewFromPointer

func (*QWizard) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWizard

func (*QWizard) Next

func (this *QWizard) Next()

Advances to the next page.

This is equivalent to pressing the Next or Commit button.

See also nextId(), back(), accept(), reject(), and restart().

func (*QWizard) NextId

func (this *QWizard) NextId() int

This virtual function is called by QWizard to find out which page to show when the user clicks the Next button.

The return value is the ID of the next page, or -1 if no page follows.

The default implementation calls QWizardPage::nextId() on the currentPage().

By reimplementing this function, you can specify a dynamic page order.

See also QWizardPage::nextId() and currentPage().

func (*QWizard) Options

func (this *QWizard) Options() int

func (*QWizard) Page

func (this *QWizard) Page(id int) *QWizardPage

Returns the page with the given id, or 0 if there is no such page.

See also addPage() and setPage().

func (*QWizard) PageAdded

func (this *QWizard) PageAdded(id int)

This signal is emitted whenever a page is added to the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

See also addPage(), setPage(), and startId().

func (*QWizard) PageRemoved

func (this *QWizard) PageRemoved(id int)

This signal is emitted whenever a page is removed from the wizard. The page's id is passed as parameter.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

See also removePage() and startId().

func (*QWizard) PaintEvent

func (this *QWizard) PaintEvent(event qtgui.QPaintEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::paintEvent().

func (*QWizard) Pixmap

func (this *QWizard) Pixmap(which int) *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns the pixmap set for role which.

By default, the only pixmap that is set is the BackgroundPixmap on macOS.

See also setPixmap(), QWizardPage::pixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.

func (*QWizard) QWizard_PTR

func (ptr *QWizard) QWizard_PTR() *QWizard

func (*QWizard) RemovePage

func (this *QWizard) RemovePage(id int)

Removes the page with the given id. cleanupPage() will be called if necessary.

Note: Removing a page may influence the value of the startId property.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.5.

See also addPage(), setPage(), pageRemoved(), and startId().

func (*QWizard) ResizeEvent

func (this *QWizard) ResizeEvent(event qtgui.QResizeEvent_ITF)

Reimplemented from QWidget::resizeEvent().

func (*QWizard) Restart

func (this *QWizard) Restart()

Restarts the wizard at the start page. This function is called automatically when the wizard is shown.

See also startId().

func (*QWizard) SetButton

func (this *QWizard) SetButton(which int, button QAbstractButton_ITF)

Sets the button corresponding to role which to button.

To add extra buttons to the wizard (e.g., a Print button), one way is to call setButton() with CustomButton1 to CustomButton3, and make the buttons visible using the HaveCustomButton1 to HaveCustomButton3 options.

See also button(), setButtonText(), setButtonLayout(), and options.

func (*QWizard) SetButtonText

func (this *QWizard) SetButtonText(which int, text string)

Sets the text on button which to be text.

By default, the text on buttons depends on the wizardStyle. For example, on macOS, the Next button is called Continue.

To add extra buttons to the wizard (e.g., a Print button), one way is to call setButtonText() with CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3 to set their text, and make the buttons visible using the HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, and/or HaveCustomButton3 options.

Button texts may also be set on a per-page basis using QWizardPage::setButtonText().

See also buttonText(), setButton(), button(), setButtonLayout(), setOptions(), and QWizardPage::setButtonText().

func (*QWizard) SetCthis

func (this *QWizard) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QWizard) SetDefaultProperty

func (this *QWizard) SetDefaultProperty(className string, property string, changedSignal string)

Sets the default property for className to be property, and the associated change signal to be changedSignal.

The default property is used when an instance of className (or of one of its subclasses) is passed to QWizardPage::registerField() and no property is specified.

QWizard knows the most common Qt widgets. For these (or their subclasses), you don't need to specify a property or a changedSignal. The table below lists these widgets:

WidgetPropertyChange Notification Signal

QAbstractButtonbool checkedtoggled() QAbstractSliderint valuevalueChanged() QComboBoxint currentIndexcurrentIndexChanged() QDateTimeEditQDateTime dateTimedateTimeChanged() QLineEditQString texttextChanged() QListWidgetint currentRowcurrentRowChanged() QSpinBoxint valuevalueChanged()

See also QWizardPage::registerField().

func (*QWizard) SetField

func (this *QWizard) SetField(name string, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Sets the value of the field called name to value.

This function can be used to set fields on any page of the wizard.

See also QWizardPage::registerField(), QWizardPage::setField(), and field().

func (*QWizard) SetOption

func (this *QWizard) SetOption(option int, on bool)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options, testOption(), and setWizardStyle().

func (*QWizard) SetOption__

func (this *QWizard) SetOption__(option int)

Sets the given option to be enabled if on is true; otherwise, clears the given option.

See also options, testOption(), and setWizardStyle().

func (*QWizard) SetOptions

func (this *QWizard) SetOptions(options int)

func (*QWizard) SetPage

func (this *QWizard) SetPage(id int, page QWizardPage_ITF)

Adds the given page to the wizard with the given id.

Note: Adding a page may influence the value of the startId property in case it was not set explicitly.

See also addPage(), page(), and pageAdded().

func (*QWizard) SetPixmap

func (this *QWizard) SetPixmap(which int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

Sets the pixmap for role which to pixmap.

The pixmaps are used by QWizard when displaying a page. Which pixmaps are actually used depend on the wizard style.

Pixmaps can also be set for a specific page using QWizardPage::setPixmap().

See also pixmap(), QWizardPage::setPixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.

func (*QWizard) SetSideWidget

func (this *QWizard) SetSideWidget(widget QWidget_ITF)

Sets the given widget to be shown on the left side of the wizard. For styles which use the WatermarkPixmap (ClassicStyle and ModernStyle) the side widget is displayed on top of the watermark, for other styles or when the watermark is not provided the side widget is displayed on the left side of the wizard.

Passing 0 shows no side widget.

When the widget is not 0 the wizard reparents it.

Any previous side widget is hidden.

You may call setSideWidget() with the same widget at different times.

All widgets set here will be deleted by the wizard when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other side widget (or 0).

By default, no side widget is present.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

See also sideWidget().

func (*QWizard) SetStartId

func (this *QWizard) SetStartId(id int)

func (*QWizard) SetSubTitleFormat

func (this *QWizard) SetSubTitleFormat(format int)

func (*QWizard) SetTitleFormat

func (this *QWizard) SetTitleFormat(format int)

func (*QWizard) SetVisible

func (this *QWizard) SetVisible(visible bool)

Reimplemented from QWidget::setVisible().

func (*QWizard) SetWizardStyle

func (this *QWizard) SetWizardStyle(style int)

func (*QWizard) SideWidget

func (this *QWizard) SideWidget() *QWidget

Returns the widget on the left side of the wizard or 0.

By default, no side widget is present.

This function was introduced in Qt 4.7.

See also setSideWidget().

func (*QWizard) SizeHint

func (this *QWizard) SizeHint() *qtcore.QSize

Reimplemented from QWidget::sizeHint().

func (*QWizard) StartId

func (this *QWizard) StartId() int

func (*QWizard) SubTitleFormat

func (this *QWizard) SubTitleFormat() int

func (*QWizard) TestOption

func (this *QWizard) TestOption(option int) bool

Returns true if the given option is enabled; otherwise, returns false.

See also options, setOption(), and setWizardStyle().

func (*QWizard) TitleFormat

func (this *QWizard) TitleFormat() int

func (*QWizard) ValidateCurrentPage

func (this *QWizard) ValidateCurrentPage() bool

This virtual function is called by QWizard when the user clicks Next or Finish to perform some last-minute validation. If it returns true, the next page is shown (or the wizard finishes); otherwise, the current page stays up.

The default implementation calls QWizardPage::validatePage() on the currentPage().

When possible, it is usually better style to disable the Next or Finish button (by specifying mandatory fields or by reimplementing QWizardPage::isComplete()) than to reimplement validateCurrentPage().

See also QWizardPage::validatePage() and currentPage().

func (*QWizard) WizardStyle

func (this *QWizard) WizardStyle() int

type QWizardPage

type QWizardPage struct {
	*QWidget
}

func NewQWizardPage

func NewQWizardPage(parent QWidget_ITF) *QWizardPage

func NewQWizardPageFromPointer

func NewQWizardPageFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWizardPage

func NewQWizardPage__

func NewQWizardPage__() *QWizardPage

func (*QWizardPage) ButtonText

func (this *QWizardPage) ButtonText(which int) string

Returns the text on button which.

If a text has ben set using setButtonText(), this text is returned.

By default, the text on buttons depends on the wizardStyle. For example, on macOS, the Next button is called Continue.

See also button(), setButton(), setButtonText(), QWizardPage::buttonText(), and QWizardPage::setButtonText().

func (*QWizardPage) CleanupPage

func (this *QWizardPage) CleanupPage()

This virtual function is called by QWizard to clean up page id just before the user leaves it by clicking Back (unless the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set).

The default implementation calls QWizardPage::cleanupPage() on page(id).

See also QWizardPage::cleanupPage() and initializePage().

func (*QWizardPage) CompleteChanged

func (this *QWizardPage) CompleteChanged()

func (*QWizardPage) Field

func (this *QWizardPage) Field(name string) *qtcore.QVariant

Returns the value of the field called name.

This function can be used to access fields on any page of the wizard.

See also QWizardPage::registerField(), QWizardPage::field(), and setField().

func (*QWizardPage) GetCthis

func (this *QWizardPage) GetCthis() unsafe.Pointer

func (*QWizardPage) InheritField

func (this *QWizardPage) InheritField(f func(name string) unsafe.Pointer)

QVariant field(const class QString &)

func (*QWizardPage) InheritRegisterField

func (this *QWizardPage) InheritRegisterField(f func(name string, widget *QWidget, property string, changedSignal string))

void registerField(const class QString &, class QWidget *, const char *, const char *)

func (*QWizardPage) InheritSetField

func (this *QWizardPage) InheritSetField(f func(name string, value *qtcore.QVariant))

void setField(const class QString &, const class QVariant &)

func (*QWizardPage) InheritWizard

func (this *QWizardPage) InheritWizard(f func() unsafe.Pointer)

QWizard * wizard()

func (*QWizardPage) InitializePage

func (this *QWizardPage) InitializePage()

This virtual function is called by QWizard to prepare page id just before it is shown either as a result of QWizard::restart() being called, or as a result of the user clicking Next. (However, if the QWizard::IndependentPages option is set, this function is only called the first time the page is shown.)

By reimplementing this function, you can ensure that the page's fields are properly initialized based on fields from previous pages.

The default implementation calls QWizardPage::initializePage() on page(id).

See also QWizardPage::initializePage() and cleanupPage().

func (*QWizardPage) IsCommitPage

func (this *QWizardPage) IsCommitPage() bool

func (*QWizardPage) IsComplete

func (this *QWizardPage) IsComplete() bool

func (*QWizardPage) IsFinalPage

func (this *QWizardPage) IsFinalPage() bool

func (*QWizardPage) MetaObject

func (this *QWizardPage) MetaObject() *qtcore.QMetaObject

func (*QWizardPage) NewFromPointer

func (*QWizardPage) NewFromPointer(cthis unsafe.Pointer) *QWizardPage

func (*QWizardPage) NextId

func (this *QWizardPage) NextId() int

This virtual function is called by QWizard to find out which page to show when the user clicks the Next button.

The return value is the ID of the next page, or -1 if no page follows.

The default implementation calls QWizardPage::nextId() on the currentPage().

By reimplementing this function, you can specify a dynamic page order.

See also QWizardPage::nextId() and currentPage().

func (*QWizardPage) Pixmap

func (this *QWizardPage) Pixmap(which int) *qtgui.QPixmap

Returns the pixmap set for role which.

By default, the only pixmap that is set is the BackgroundPixmap on macOS.

See also setPixmap(), QWizardPage::pixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.

func (*QWizardPage) QWizardPage_PTR

func (ptr *QWizardPage) QWizardPage_PTR() *QWizardPage

func (*QWizardPage) RegisterField

func (this *QWizardPage) RegisterField(name string, widget QWidget_ITF, property string, changedSignal string)

func (*QWizardPage) RegisterField__

func (this *QWizardPage) RegisterField__(name string, widget QWidget_ITF)

func (*QWizardPage) RegisterField__1

func (this *QWizardPage) RegisterField__1(name string, widget QWidget_ITF, property string)

func (*QWizardPage) SetButtonText

func (this *QWizardPage) SetButtonText(which int, text string)

Sets the text on button which to be text.

By default, the text on buttons depends on the wizardStyle. For example, on macOS, the Next button is called Continue.

To add extra buttons to the wizard (e.g., a Print button), one way is to call setButtonText() with CustomButton1, CustomButton2, or CustomButton3 to set their text, and make the buttons visible using the HaveCustomButton1, HaveCustomButton2, and/or HaveCustomButton3 options.

Button texts may also be set on a per-page basis using QWizardPage::setButtonText().

See also buttonText(), setButton(), button(), setButtonLayout(), setOptions(), and QWizardPage::setButtonText().

func (*QWizardPage) SetCommitPage

func (this *QWizardPage) SetCommitPage(commitPage bool)

func (*QWizardPage) SetCthis

func (this *QWizardPage) SetCthis(cthis unsafe.Pointer)

func (*QWizardPage) SetField

func (this *QWizardPage) SetField(name string, value qtcore.QVariant_ITF)

Sets the value of the field called name to value.

This function can be used to set fields on any page of the wizard.

See also QWizardPage::registerField(), QWizardPage::setField(), and field().

func (*QWizardPage) SetFinalPage

func (this *QWizardPage) SetFinalPage(finalPage bool)

func (*QWizardPage) SetPixmap

func (this *QWizardPage) SetPixmap(which int, pixmap qtgui.QPixmap_ITF)

Sets the pixmap for role which to pixmap.

The pixmaps are used by QWizard when displaying a page. Which pixmaps are actually used depend on the wizard style.

Pixmaps can also be set for a specific page using QWizardPage::setPixmap().

See also pixmap(), QWizardPage::setPixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.

func (*QWizardPage) SetSubTitle

func (this *QWizardPage) SetSubTitle(subTitle string)

func (*QWizardPage) SetTitle

func (this *QWizardPage) SetTitle(title string)

func (*QWizardPage) SubTitle

func (this *QWizardPage) SubTitle() string

func (*QWizardPage) Title

func (this *QWizardPage) Title() string

func (*QWizardPage) ValidatePage

func (this *QWizardPage) ValidatePage() bool

func (*QWizardPage) Wizard

func (this *QWizardPage) Wizard() *QWizard

type QWizardPage_ITF

type QWizardPage_ITF interface {
	QWidget_ITF
	QWizardPage_PTR() *QWizardPage
}

type QWizard_ITF

type QWizard_ITF interface {
	QDialog_ITF
	QWizard_PTR() *QWizard
}

type QWizard__WizardButton

type QWizard__WizardButton = int

This enum specifies the buttons in a wizard.

The following value is only useful when calling setButtonLayout():

See also setButton(), setButtonText(), setButtonLayout(), and customButtonClicked().

const QWizard__BackButton QWizard__WizardButton = 0

The Back button (Go Back on macOS)

const QWizard__CancelButton QWizard__WizardButton = 4

The Cancel button (see also NoCancelButton)

const QWizard__CommitButton QWizard__WizardButton = 2

The Commit button

const QWizard__CustomButton1 QWizard__WizardButton = 6
const QWizard__CustomButton2 QWizard__WizardButton = 7
const QWizard__CustomButton3 QWizard__WizardButton = 8
const QWizard__FinishButton QWizard__WizardButton = 3

The Finish button (Done on macOS)

const QWizard__HelpButton QWizard__WizardButton = 5

The Help button (see also HaveHelpButton)

const QWizard__NButtons QWizard__WizardButton = 9
const QWizard__NStandardButtons QWizard__WizardButton = 6
const QWizard__NextButton QWizard__WizardButton = 1

The Next button (Continue on macOS)

const QWizard__NoButton QWizard__WizardButton = -1
const QWizard__Stretch QWizard__WizardButton = 9

A horizontal stretch in the button layout

type QWizard__WizardOption

type QWizard__WizardOption = int
const QWizard__CancelButtonOnLeft QWizard__WizardOption = 1024
const QWizard__DisabledBackButtonOnLastPage QWizard__WizardOption = 64
const QWizard__ExtendedWatermarkPixmap QWizard__WizardOption = 4
const QWizard__HaveCustomButton1 QWizard__WizardOption = 8192
const QWizard__HaveCustomButton2 QWizard__WizardOption = 16384
const QWizard__HaveCustomButton3 QWizard__WizardOption = 32768
const QWizard__HaveFinishButtonOnEarlyPages QWizard__WizardOption = 256
const QWizard__HaveHelpButton QWizard__WizardOption = 2048
const QWizard__HaveNextButtonOnLastPage QWizard__WizardOption = 128
const QWizard__HelpButtonOnRight QWizard__WizardOption = 4096
const QWizard__IgnoreSubTitles QWizard__WizardOption = 2
const QWizard__IndependentPages QWizard__WizardOption = 1
const QWizard__NoBackButtonOnLastPage QWizard__WizardOption = 32
const QWizard__NoBackButtonOnStartPage QWizard__WizardOption = 16
const QWizard__NoCancelButton QWizard__WizardOption = 512
const QWizard__NoCancelButtonOnLastPage QWizard__WizardOption = 65536
const QWizard__NoDefaultButton QWizard__WizardOption = 8

type QWizard__WizardPixmap

type QWizard__WizardPixmap = int

This enum specifies the pixmaps that can be associated with a page.

See also setPixmap(), QWizardPage::setPixmap(), and Elements of a Wizard Page.

const QWizard__BackgroundPixmap QWizard__WizardPixmap = 3

The pixmap that occupies the background of a MacStyle wizard

const QWizard__BannerPixmap QWizard__WizardPixmap = 2

The pixmap that occupies the background of a ModernStyle page header

const QWizard__LogoPixmap QWizard__WizardPixmap = 1

The small pixmap on the right side of a ClassicStyle or ModernStyle page header

const QWizard__NPixmaps QWizard__WizardPixmap = 4
const QWizard__WatermarkPixmap QWizard__WizardPixmap = 0

The tall pixmap on the left side of a ClassicStyle or ModernStyle page

type QWizard__WizardStyle

type QWizard__WizardStyle = int

This enum specifies the different looks supported by QWizard.

See also setWizardStyle(), WizardOption, and Wizard Look and Feel.

const QWizard__AeroStyle QWizard__WizardStyle = 3

Windows Aero look

const QWizard__ClassicStyle QWizard__WizardStyle = 0

Classic Windows look

const QWizard__MacStyle QWizard__WizardStyle = 2

macOS look

const QWizard__ModernStyle QWizard__WizardStyle = 1

Modern Windows look

const QWizard__NStyles QWizard__WizardStyle = 4

Source Files

Jump to

Keyboard shortcuts

? : This menu
/ : Search site
f or F : Jump to
y or Y : Canonical URL